Pharmaceutical Microbiology
EDITED BY
W.B.HUGO
BPharm PhD FRPharmS
Formerly Reader in Pharmaceutical Microbiology
University of Nottingham
AND
A.D.RUSSELL
B ph arm DSc PhD FRPharmS FR C Path
Professor of Pharmaceutical Microbiology
University of Wales Cardiff
Cardiff
SIXTH EDITION
Blackwell
Science
© 1977, 1980, 1983, 1987, 1992, 1998 by
Blackwell Science Ltd
Editorial Offices:
Osney Mead, Oxford OX2 OEL
25 John Street, London WC1N 2BL
23 Ainslie Place, Edinburgh EH3 6AJ
350 Main Street, Maiden
MA 02148 5018, USA
54 University Street, Carlton
Victoria 3053, Australia
10, rue Casimir Delavigne
75006 Paris, France
Other Editorial Offices:
Blackwell Wissenschafts-Verlag GmbH
Kurfiirstendamm 57
10707 Berlin, Germany
Blackwell Science KK
MG Kodenmacho Building
7-10 Kodenmacho Nihombashi
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104, Japan
The right of the Author to be
identified as the Author of this Work
has been asserted in accordance
with Copyright, Designs and
Patents Act 1988.
DISTRIBUTORS
Marston Book Services Ltd
PO Box 269
Abingdon, Oxon OX 14 4YN
(Orders: Tel: 01235 465500
Fax: 01235 465555)
USA
Blackwell Science, Inc.
Commerce Place
350 Main Street
Maiden, MA 02148 5018
(Orders: Tel: 800 759 6102
781 388 8250
Fax: 781 388 8255)
Canada
Login Brothers Book Company
324 Saulteaux Crescent
Winnipeg, Manitoba R3J 3T2
(Orders: Tel: 204 224-4068)
Australia
Blackwell Science Pty Ltd
54 University Street
Carlton, Victoria 3053
(Orders: Tel: 3 9347 0300
Fax: 3 9347 5001)
All rights reserved. No part of
this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise,
except as permitted by the UK
Copyright, Designs and Patents Act
1988, without the prior permission
of the copyright owner.
First published 1977
Second edition 1980
Third edition 1983
Reprinted 1986
Fourth edition 1987
Reprinted 1989, 1991
Italian Edition 1991
Fifth edition 1992
Reprinted 1993, 1994, 1995
Sixth edition 1998
Set by Setrite Typesetters Ltd,
Hong Kong
Printed and bound in Great Britain by
MPG Books Ltd, Bodmin, Cornwall
A catalogue record for this title
is available from the British Library
ISBN 0-632-04196X
Library of Congress
Cataloging-in-publication Data
Pharmaceutical microbiology
edited by W.B. Hugo and A.D. Russell.
— 6th ed.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and
index.
ISBN0-632-04196-X
1. Pharmaceutical in microbiology.
2. Anti-infective agents.
I. Hugo, W.B. (William Barry)
II. Russell, A.D. (Allan Denver),
1936-
QR46.5.P48 1998
6 1 5'. 1' 01 579— dc21
97-31976
CIP
The Blackwell Science logo is a
trade mark of Blackwell Science Ltd,
registered at the United Kingdom
Trade Marks Registry
Contents
Contributors, vii
Preface to the Sixth Edition, ix
Preface to the First Edition, x
Part 1 Biology of Microorganisms
1 Bacteria, 3
W. B. Hugo
2 Yeasts and moulds, 35
/. R. Dickinson
3 Viruses, 53
D. J. Stickler
4 Principles of microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology, 75
P. Gilbert
Part 2 Antimicrobial Agents
5 Types of antibiotics and synthetic antimicrobial agents, 91
A. D. Russell
6 Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs, 130
R. G. Finch
7 Manufacture of antibiotics, 149
S. A. Marian
8 Mechanisms of action of antibiotics, 162
P. A. Lambert
9 Bacterial resistance to antibiotics, 181
E. G. M. Power
10 Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives, 201
E. M. Scott &S.P. Gorman
1 1 Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents, 229
W.B.Hugo & A. D.Russell
12 Mode of action of non-antibiotic antibacterial agents, 256
W. B. Hugo
13 Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents, 263
A. D. Russell
14 Fundamentals of immunology, 278
J. R. Furr
15 The manufacture and quality control of immunological products, 304
F W. Sheffield
16 Vaccination and immunization, 321
P. Gilbert & D. G. Allison
Part 3 Microbial Aspects of Pharmaceutical Processing
17 Ecology of microorganisms as it affects the pharmaceutical industry, 339
E. Underwood
18 Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products, 355
E. G. B eve ridge
19 Contamination of non-sterile pharmaceuticals in hospital and community
environments, 374
R. M. Baird
20 Principles and practice of sterilization, 385
S. P. Denyer & N. A. Hodges
21 Sterile pharmaceutical products, 410
M. C. Allwood
22 Factory and hospital hygiene and good manufacturing practice, 426
S. P. Denyer
23 Sterilization control and sterility assurance, 439
S. P. Denyer & N. A. Hodges
24 Production of therapeutically useful substances by recombinant DNA
technology, 453
S. B. Primrose
25 Additional applications of microorganisms in the pharmaceutical
sciences, 469
A. D. Russell
Index, 493
Contributors
D. G. ALLISON BSc, PhD, Lecturer in Pharmacy, School of Pharmacy and
Pharmaceutical Sciences, University of Manchester, Manchester
M. C. ALLWOOD BPharm, PhD, MRPharmS, Professor of Clinical Pharmaceutics,
Pharmacy Academic Practice Unit, School of Health and Community Studies, University of
Derby, Mickleover, Derby
R.M.BAIRD BPharm, PhD, MRPharmS, Research Fellow of the Daphne Jackson
Memorial Fellowships Trust, School of Pharmacy and Pharmacology, University of Bath,
Bath
E.G.BEVERIDGE BPharm, PhD, MRPharmS, MIBiol, CBiol, MIQA, Principal
Lecturer in Pharmaceutical Microbiology, School of Health Sciences, University of
Sunderland, Sunderland
S.RDENYER BPharm, PhD, MRPharmS, Professor of Pharmaceutical and Applied
Microbiology and Head, Department of Pharmacy, University of Brighton, Moulsecoomb,
Brighton
J. R. DICKINSON BSc, PhD, Senior Lecturer in Yeast Molecular Biology, School of
Pure & Applied Biology, University of Wales Cardiff, Cardiff
R. G. F I N C H MB, ChB, FRCP, FRCPath, FFPM, Consultant Physician in Microbial
Diseases, City Hospital NHS Trust, Nottingham, and Professor of Infectious Diseases,
Division of Microbiology and Infectious Diseases, Faculty of Medicine, Queen's Medical
Centre, University of Nottingham, Nottingham
J. R. F U R R MPharm, PhD, MRPharmS, Lecturer in Pharmaceutical Microbiology, Welsh
School of Pharmacy, University of Wales Cardiff, Cardiff
R G I L B E RT BSc, PhD, Senior Lecturer in Pharmacy, School of Pharmacy and
Pharmaceutical Sciences, University of Manchester, Manchester
S.R GORMAN BSc, PhD, MPSNI, Professor of Pharmaceutical Microbiology, School
of Pharmacy, Medical Biology Centre, Queen's University of Belfast, Belfast
N. A. H O D G E S BPharm, PhD, MRPharmS, Principal Lecturer in Pharmaceutical
Microbiology, University of Brighton, Moulsecoomb, Brighton
W. B.HUGO BPharm, PhD, FRPharmS, Formerly Reader in Pharmaceutical
Contributors vii
Microbiology, University of Nottingham. Present address: 618 Wollaton Road,
Nottingham
R A. LAMBERT BSc, PhD, DSc, Senior Lecturer in Microbiology, Department of
Pharmaceutical Sciences, Aston University, Aston Triangle, Birmingham
E. G. M. POWER BSc, PhD, Lecturer in Microbiology, Department of Microbiology,
United Medical and Dental Schools, St. Thomas' Hospital, Lambeth Palace Road, London
S.B. PRIMROSE BSc, PhD, Vice-President, European Operations, Azurr
Environmental, Winnersh Triangle, Wokingham, Berks
A.D.RUSSELL BPharm, DSc, PhD, FRPharmS, FRCPath, Professor of
Pharmaceutical Microbiology, Welsh School of Pharmacy, University of Wales Cardiff,
Cardiff
E. M. S C O T T BSc, PhD, MPSNI, Senior Lecturer in Pharmaceutics, School of
Pharmacy, Medical Biology Centre, Queen's University of Belfast, Belfast
F.W.SHEFFIELD MB, ChB, The Limes, Wilcot, Pewsey, Wiltshire. Formerly Head
of the Division of Bacterial Products, National Institute for Biological Standards &
Control, South Mimms, Hertfordshire
D.J. STICKLER BSc, MA, DPhil, Senior Lecturer in Microbiology, School of Pure &
Applied Biology, University of Wales Cardiff, Cardiff
E. UNDERWOOD BSc, PhD, Nutritional Product & Process Development Manager,
SMA Nutrition, Taplow, Maidenhead
S. A. VA R I A N BSc, PhD, Fermentation Extraction Operations Manager, Glaxo
Wellcome Operations, Ulverston, Cumbria
viii Contributors
Preface to the Sixth Edition
We were delighted to be asked to produce a sixth edition of Pharmaceutical
Microbiology and we thank the publishers for their considerable input. With the willing
cooperation of our co-authors, we have been able to update and modify our text. Several
chapters are under new authorship in an attempt to produce a fresh approach. Some
chapters have been streamlined but others expanded to take into account the rapid
changes and progress being made in certain areas. A new chapter on vaccination and
immunization has been introduced to act as a link with the updated chapters on the
principles of immunity and the production of immunological products. The chapter on
antibiotic assays has been deleted from this edition because it was considered not only
that few developments had taken place in this field during the past few years but also
that the topic had been comprehensively dealt with in the previous edition.
We hope that this edition will satisfy the needs of pharmacy students, now that
the pharmacy degree has been extended to 4 years, and that it will also be of value
to pharmacy graduates in hospital, industry and general practice as well as to
microbiologists working in the pharmaceutical industry.
W.B.Hugo
A. D. RusseU
Preface to the Sixth Edition ix
Preface to the First Edition
When we were first approached by the publishers to write a textbook on pharmaceutical
microbiology to appear in the spring of 1977, it was felt that such a task could not be
accomplished satisfactorily in the time available.
However, by a process of combined editorship and by invitation to experts to con-
tribute to the various chapters this task has been accomplished thanks to the cooperation
of our collaborators.
Pharmaceutical microbiology may be defined as that part of microbiology which
has a special bearing on pharmacy in all its aspects. This will range from the manufacture
and quality control of pharmaceutical products to an understanding of the mode of
action of antibiotics. The full extent of microbiology on the pharmaceutical area may
be judged from the chapter contents.
As this book is aimed at undergraduate pharmacy students (as well as microbiologists
entering the pharmaceutical industry) we were under constraint to limit the length of
the book to retain it in a defined price range. The result is to be found in the following
pages. The editors must bear responsibility for any omissions, a point which has most
concerned us. Length and depth of treatment were determined by the dictate of our
publishers. It is hoped that the book will provide a concise reading for pharmacy students
(who, at the moment, lack a textbook in this subject) and help to highlight those parts
of a general microbiological training which impinge on the pharmaceutical industry.
In conclusion, the editors thank most sincerely the contributors to this book, both
for complying with our strictures as to the length of their contribution and for providing
their material on time, and our publishers for their friendly courtesy and efficiency
during the production of this book. We also wish to thank Dr H. J. Smith for his advice
on various chemical aspects, Dr M. I. Barnett for useful comments on reverse osmosis,
and Mr A. Keall who helped with the table on sterilization methods.
W B.Hugo
A.D.Russell
Preface to First Edition
Part 1
Biology of Microorganisms
Pharmaceutical microbiology is one of the many facets of applied microbiology, but
very little understanding of its posed and potential problems will be achieved unless
the basic properties of microorganisms are understood.
This section considers, in three separate chapters, the anatomy and physiology of
bacteria, fungi and yeasts, and viruses, together with a survey of the characters of
individual members of these groups likely to be of importance to the applied field
covered by this book. Additional information is provided about more rapid methods
for detecting bacteria. The final chapter in this section (Chapter 4) considers the
principles of microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology.
The treatment is perforce brief, but it is hoped that the material will give an
understanding of the essentials of each group which may be amplified as required from
the bibliographic material listed at the end of each chapter.
Bacteria
1
Introduction
5.6.5
Bioluminescence
2
Structure and form of the bacterial cell
6
Properties of selected bacterial species
2.1
Size and shape
6.1
Gram-positive cocci
2.2
Structure
6.1.1
Staphylococcus
2.2.1
Cell wall
6.1.2
Streptococcus
2.2.2
Cytoplasmic membrane
6.1.3
Diplococcus (now Streptococcus)
2.2.3
Cytoplasm
6.2
Gram-negative cocci
2.2.4
Appendages to the bacterial cell
6.2.1
Neisseria and Branhamella
2.2.5
Capsules and slime
6.3
Gram-positive rods
2.2.6
Pigments
6.3.1
Bacillus
2.3
The bacterial spore
6.3.2
Clostridium
2.3.1
The process of spore formation
6.3.3
Corynebacterium
2.3.2
Spore germination and outgrowth
6.3.4
Listeria
2.3.3
Parameters of heat resistance
6.4
Gram-negative rods
6.4.1
Pseudomonas
3
Toxins
6.4.2
Vibrio
6.4.3
Yersinia and Francisella
4
Reproduction
6.4.4
Bordetella
4.1
Binary fission
6.4.5
Brucella
4.2
Reproduction involving genetic
6.4.6
Haemophilus
exchange
6.4.7
Escherichia
4.2.1
Transformation
6.4.8
Salmonella
4.2.2
Conjugation
6.4.9
Shigella
4.2.3
Transduction
6.4.10
Proteus (Morganella, Providencia)
6.4.11
Serratia marcescens
5
Bacterial growth
6.4.12
Klebsiella
5.1
The growth requirements of bacteria
6.4.13
Flavobacterium
5.1.1
Consumable determinants
6.4.14
Acinetobacter
5.1.2
Environmental determinants
6.4.15
Bacteroides
5.1.3
Culture media
6.4.16
Campylobacter
5.2
Energy provision
6.4.17
Helicobacter
5.3
Identification of bacteria
6.4.18
Chlamydia
5.3.1
Selective and diagnostic media
6.4.19
Rickettsia
5.3.2
Examples of additional biochemical
6.4.20
Legionella
tests
6.5
Acid-fast organisms
5.4
Measurement of bacterial growth
6.5.1
Mycobacterium
5.4.1
Mean generation time
6.6
Spirochaetes
5.5
Growth curves
6.6.1
Borrelia
5.6
Quicker methods for detecting bacteria
6.6.2
Treponema
5.6.1
Microscopy
6.6.3
Leptospira
5.6.2
Flow cytometry
5.6.3
Microcalorimetry
7
Further reading
5.6.4 Electrical conductivity
Introduction
Bacteria share with the blue-green algae a unique place in the world of living organisms.
Formerly classified with the fungi, bacteria were considered as primitive members of
Bacteria
Table 1.1 The main features distinguishing prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells
Feature
Prokaryotes
Eukaryotes
Nucleus
Cell wall
Mitochondria
Mesosomes
Chloroplasts
No enclosing membrane
Peptidoglycan
Absent
Present
Absent
Enclosed by a membrane
Cellulose
Present
Absent
Present
the plant kingdom, but they are now called prokaryotes, a name which means primitive
nucleus. All other living organisms are called eukaryotes, a name implying a true or
proper nucleus. This important division does not invalidate classification schemes within
the world of bacterial, animal and plant life.
This subdivision is not based on the more usual macroscopic criteria; it was made
possible when techniques of subcellular biology became sufficiently refined for many
more fundamental differences to become apparent. Some of the criteria differentiating
eukaryotes and prokaryotes are given in Table 1.1.
Recently, a third class must be added to the bacteria and blue-green algae. Organisms
in this class have been named the Archaebacteria; they differ from bacteria and blue-
green algae in their wall and membrane structure and pattern of metabolism. They are
thought by many to be the first living organisms to have appeared on earth.
Structure and form of the bacterial ce
2.1
Size and shape
The majority of bacteria fall within the general dimensions of 0.15-4(Xm. They are
unicellular structures which may occur as cylindrical (rod-shaped) or spherical (coccoid)
forms. In one or two genera, the cylindrical form may be modified in that a single twist
(vibrios) or many twists like a corkscrew (spirochaetes) may occur.
Another feature of bacterial form is the tendency of coccoid cells to grow in
aggregates. Thus, there exist assemblies (i) of pairs (called diplococci); (ii) of groups
of four arranged in a cube (sarcinae); (iii) in a generally unorganized array like a
bunch of grapes (staphylococci); and (iv) in a chain like a string of beads (streptococci).
The aggregates are often so characteristic as to give rise to the generic name of a
group, e.g. Diplococcus (now called Streptococcus) pneumoniae, a cause of pneumonia;
Staphylococcus aureus, a cause of boils and food poisoning; and Streptococcus pyogenes,
a cause of sore throat.
Rod-shaped organisms occasionally occur in chains either joined end to end or
branched.
2.2
Chapter 1
Structure
Three fundamental divisions of the bacterial cell occur in all species: cell wall, cell or
cytoplasmic membrane, and cytoplasm.
2.2.7
Cell wall
Extensive chemical studies have revealed a basic structure of alternating 7V-
acetylglucosamine and A A -acetyl-3-0-l-carboxyethyl-glucosamine molecules, giving
a polysaccharide backbone. This is then cross-linked by peptide chains, the nature of
which varies from species to species. This structure (Fig. 1.1) possesses great mechanical
strength and is the target for a group of antibiotics which, in different ways, inhibit the
biosynthesis occurring during the cell growth and division (Chapter 8).
This basic peptidoglycan (sometimes called murein or mucopeptide) also contains
other chemical structures which differ in two types of bacteria, Gram-negative and
Gram-positive. In 1884, Christian Gram discovered a staining method for bacteria which
bears his name. It consists of treating a film of bacteria, dried on a microscope slide,
with a solution of a basic dye, such as gentian violet, followed by application of a
solution of iodine. The dye complex may be easily washed from some types of cells
which, as a result, are called Gram-negative whereas others, termed Gram-positive,
retain the dye despite alcohol washing. These marked differences in behaviour,
discovered by chance, are now known to be a reflection of different wall structures in
the two types of cell. These differences reside in the differing chemistry of material
attached to the outside of the peptidoglycan (Fig. 1.2).
In the walls of Gram-positive bacteria, molecules of a polyribitol or polyglycerol-
phosphate are attached by covalent links to the oligosaccharide backbone; these entities
Teichmc fluid
Llpcpalysacchdftdft
Lipoprotein
Covitartt link
FlagBlhum
Fig. 1.1 Diagram of the bacterial cell- A, the lenertJized iuudune of Hie bacterial tell; B-, Grafli-
positive SUUCtUKi C, Crf^ni- negative slructure.
Bacteria
L-ala
ala
L-ata
B
CH,OH
— -0
CH 2 0H
NHCOCH
,iV-BcetvigluMJ6#mine
CH,CH
CO L-ak D-alLJ. CAP r D-gle
jV-acBtylmurernK add
fMptidff
Fig. 1.2 A, peptidoglycan of Escherichia coli. •, /V-acetylmuramic acid; •, Af-acetylglucosamine. B,
repeating unit of peptidoglycan oiE. coli L-ala, L-alanine; D-glu, D-glutamine; DAP, diaminopimelic
acid: D-aia, D-alanine.
™2
QOCH
CHjO
OH
\
\
O
r OH^C
Ala-
. 3-10
B
,0CH
ch^q'
- 3-10
Fig. 1.3 A, glycerol teichoic
acid; B, ribitol teichoic acid; G,
glycosyl; Ala, D-alanyl.
Lipopolysaccharide
Phospholipid
msssem
Peptide^ yean
Cytoplasmic membrane
Fig. 1.4 Diagram showing detailed structure of the envelope of Gram-negative bacteria.
are teichoic acids (Fig. 1.3 A, B). The glycerol teichoic acid may contain an alanine
residue (Fig. 1.3A). Teichoic acids do not confer additional rigidity on the cell wall,
but as they are acidic in nature they may function by sequestering essential metal cations
from the media on which the cells are growing. This could be of value in situations
where cation concentration in the environment is low.
The Gram-negative cell envelope (Fig. 1.4) is even more complicated; essentially,
it contains lipoprotein molecules attached covalently to the oligosaccharide backbone
and in addition, on its outer side, a layer of lipopolysaccharide (LPS) and protein attached
by hydrophobic interactions and divalent metal cations, Ca 2+ and Mg 2 + . On the inner
side is a layer of phospholipid (PL).
The LPS molecule consists of three regions, called lipid A, core polysaccharide
and O-specific side chain (Fig. 1.5). The O-specific side chain comprises an array of
sugars that are responsible for specific serological reactions of organisms, which are
used in identification. The lipid A region is responsible for the toxic and pyrogenic
(fever-producing) properties of this group (see Chapter 18).
The complex outer layers beyond the peptidoglycan in the Gram-negative species,
the outer membrane, protect the organism to a certain extent from the action of toxic
chemicals (see Chapter 13). Thus, disinfectants are often effective only at concentrations
higher than those affecting Gram-positive cells and these layers provide unique
protection to the cells from the action of benzylpenicillin and lysozyme.
Cor* polysaccharide^
Fig. 1.5 Lipopolysaccharide structure in Gram-negative bacteria.
Bacteria
1
2.2.2
Part of the LPS may be removed by treating the cells with ethylenediamine tetra-
acetic acid (EDTA) or related chelating agents (Chapter 12).
The proteins of the outer membrane, many of which traverse the whole structure,
are currently the subject of active study. Some of the proteins consist of three subunits,
and these units with a central space or pore running through them are known as porins.
They are thought to act as a mechanism of selectivity for the ingress or exclusion of
metabolites and antibacterial agents (see Chapter 8).
Cytoplasmic membrane
The chemistry and structure of this organelle have been the subject of more than a
century of research, but it is only during the last 20 years that some degree of finality
has been realized.
Chemically, the membrane is known to consist of phospholipids and proteins, many
of which have enzymic properties. The phospholipid molecules are arranged in a
bimolecular layer with the polar groups directed outwards on both sides. The structures
of some phospholipids found in bacteria are shown in Fig. 1.6. Earlier views held that
the protein part of the membrane was spread as a continuous sheet on either side of the
Rt
Q
H 2 C CI c R*
— CH O
h^C 0- — -P O* — H'
0"
Polar group
H*-
^H,
■NHr
h.
CH 2 — CM— CH 2 OH
OH
R c — C O CH :
«D 1
a CH CH 2 <
OH
O— CH
O -CH 2
Fig. 1.6 The structure of some
phospholipids found in E. coll.
A, the structure of phosphatidic
acid. H* of this structure is
replaced by grouping B-D to
give the following phospholipids:
B, phosphatidylethanolamine; C,
phosphatidylglycerol; D,
diphosphatidylglycerol
(cardiolipin). R A .COO and
R B .COO are fatty acid residues.
ChupKY 1
phospholipid
Protein
Fig. 1.7 Membrane structure.
phospholipid bilayer. The current view is that protein is distributed in local patches in
the bilayer, the mosaic structure (Fig. 1.7).
Unlike the wall, which has great mechanical strength, determines the characteristic
shape of the cell and is metabolically inert, the membrane is structurally a very delicate
organelle and is highly active metabolically.
The membrane acts as a selective permeability barrier between the cytoplasm and
the cell environment; the wall acts only as a sieve to exclude molecules larger than
about 1 nm. Certain enzymes, and especially the electron transport chain, that are located
in the membrane are responsible for an elaborate active transport system which utilizes
the electrochemical potential of the proton to power it.
An interesting experiment serves to illustrate the differing mechanical strengths of
the wall and membrane. The wall of some Gram-positive bacteria may be partially
dissolved by treatment of cells with lysozyme or in the case of Gram-negative cells
with EDTA plus lysozyme. Upon doing this, cells so treated burst due to the fact that
the cytoplasm contains a large number of solutes giving it an effective osmotic pressure
of 608-2533 kPa (6-25 atm). Water enters the cell, now no longer protected by the
peptidoglycan, causing the naked protoplast to swell and burst. If this experiment is
conducted in a medium containing 0.33 M sucrose, a non-penetrating solute, the osmotic
pressure inside and outside the protoplast is equalized, thus no bursting occurs, and
forms free of cell wall (protoplasts) may be observed in the medium.
2.2.3 Cytoplasm
The cytoplasm is a viscous fluid and contains within it systems of paramount im-
portance. These are the nucleus, responsible for the genetic make-up of the cell, and
the ribosomes, which are the site of protein synthesis. In addition are found granules of
reserve material such as polyhydroxybutyric acid, an energy reserve, and polyphosphate
or volutin granules, the exact function of which has not yet been elucidated. The
prokaryotic nucleus or bacterial chromosome exists in the cytoplasm in the form of a
loop and is not surrounded by a nuclear membrane. Bacteria carry other chromosomal
elements: episomes, which are portions of the main chromosome that have become
isolated from it, and plasmids, which may be called miniature chromosomes. These are
small annular pieces of DNA which carry a limited amount of genetic information,
Bacteria 9
often associated with the expression of resistance to antimicrobial agents (Chapters 9
and 13).
Despite the differences in nuclear structures between prokaryotes and eukaryotes,
the genetic code, i.e. the combination of bases which does for a particular amino acid
in the process of protein synthesis, is the same as it is in all living organisms.
2.2.4 Appendages to the bacterial cell
Three types of thread-like appendages may be found growing from bacterial cells:
flagella, pili (fimbriae) and F-pili (sex strands).
Flagella are threads of protein often \2fim . long which start as small basal organs
just beneath the cytoplasmic membrane. They are responsible for the movement of
motile bacteria. Their number and distribution varies. Some species bear a single
flagellum, others are flagellate over their whole surface.
Pili are responsible for haemagglutination in bacteria and also for intercellular
adhesiveness giving rise to clumping. At present, a clear role for these structures has
not been formulated.
F-pili or sex strands are part of a primitive genetic exchange system in some bacterial
species. Part of the genetic material may be passed from one cell to another through the
hollow pilus, thus giving rise to a simple form of sexual reproduction.
2.2.5 Capsules and slime
Some bacterial species accumulate material as a coating of varying degrees of looseness.
If the material is reasonably discrete it is called a capsule, if loosely bound to the
surface it is called slime.
Recently a phenomenon of resistance to biocide solutions has been recognized
(see also Chapters 9 and 13) in which bacteria adhere to a container wall and cover
themselves with a carbohydrate slime called a glycocalyx; thus, doubly protected (wall
and glycocalyx), they have been found to resist biocide attack.
Bacillus anthracis, the causative organism of anthrax, possesses a capsule composed
of polyglutamic acid; the slime layers produced by other organisms are of a carbohydrate
nature.
An extreme example of slime production is found in Leuconostoc dextranicum
and L. mesenteroides where so much carbohydrate, called dextran, may be produced
that the whole medium in which these cells are growing becomes almost gel-like. This
phenomenon has caused pipe blockage in sugar refineries and is deliberately encouraged
for the production of dextran as a blood substitute (Chapter 25).
2.2.6 Pigments
Some bacterial species produce pigments during their growth which give the colonies
a characteristic colour.
Thus, Staphylococcus aureus produces a golden yellow pigment, Serratia marcescens
a bright red pigment. There appears to be no valid function for these pigments but they
may afford the cell some protection from the toxic effects of sunlight.
10 Chapter 1
Cortex
Spore wal
Exosporium
h'ip KM Diagram of a transverse section of a "bflfileriti]
spore.
Cytoplasm or Spar* cofttE
spore core
2.3
The bacterial spore
In a few bacterial genera, notably Bacillus and Clostridium, a unique process takes
place in which the vegetative cell undergoes a profound biochemical change to give
rise to a structure called a spore or endospore (Fig. 1.8). This process is not part of
a reproductive cycle, but the bacterial endospore is highly resistant to adverse
environments such as lack of moisture or essential nutrients, toxic chemicals and
radiations and high temperatures. Because of their heat resistance all sterilization
processes have to be designed to destroy the bacterial spore.
2.3.1
The process of spore formation
In general, an adverse environment, and in particular the absence or limited presence
of one component, induces spore formation. Examples of such components are alanine,
Zn 2+ , Fe 2 + , POj~ and, in the case of the aerobic (oxygen-requiring) Bacillus species,
oxygen. Equally, certain substances, for instance Ca" + and Mn" + , have to be present for
the process of spore formation to proceed to completion.
If the conditions for spore formation are fulfilled the sequence of events shown
in Fig. 1.9 occurs.
The essential genetic material of the original vegetative bacterium is retained in the
core or protoplast; around this lies the thick cortex which contains the murein or
peptidoglycan already encountered as a cell wall component (see Fig. 1.2). The outer
coats which are protein in composition are distinguished by their high cysteine content.
In this respect they resemble keratin, the protein of hair and horn.
Another feature of the spore is the presence of pyridine 2,6-dicarboxylic acid (DPA)
(Fig. 1.10) occurring as a complex with calcium, which at one time was implicated
in heat resistance. The isolation of heat-resistant spores containing no Ca-DPA has
refuted this hypothesis.
The reason for heat resistance is thought to lie in the fact that the core or spore
cytoplasm becomes dehydrated during sporulation. The mechanism for this dehydration
Bacteria
11
Growth
Formation
of septum
Formation,
of cortex
Formation,
of coats
.Release
of spore
Onset of radiation
resistance
Synthesis of cysteine-
rich structures
Synthesis of
spore-specific
proteins
Increased production of
enzymes required for
energy-yielding reactions
and for synthesis of RNA
and proteins
Antibiotics
synthesized
Lytic enzymes
excreted
Maturation
of the
fully formed
spore
Onset of resistance
to heat
Synthesis of
dipicolinic acid
Incorporation
of
calcium
Retractile spores
visible in optical
microscope
Approximate time (hours) following commencement of sporulation
Fig. 1.9 Changes occurring during spore formation. The position and length of the boxes represent
the approximate time and duration of the various activities.
OOOH
COOH Fig. 1.10 Pyridine 2,6-dicarboxylic acid, dipicolinic acid (DPA).
2.3.2
is the mechanical expulsion of water by the expansion of the peptidoglycan network
which comprises the cortex — the expanded cortex theory.
Dehydration of the core by means of concentrated sucrose solution also results in
heat resistance.
The tough keratin-like spore coats probably help to protect the spore core or
protoplast from the harmful effects of chemicals. Radiation resistance has not been
fully explained.
The same generally impervious properties make spores difficult to stain by simple
stains. However, if a slide preparation of spores is warmed with a stain the spores are
dyed so effectively that dilute acid will not wash out the colour. This is the basis of the
acid-fast stain for spores.
Spore germination and outgrowth
In nature, spores can revert to the vegetative form by a process called either 'germination'
or 'germination and outgrowth'. The process of germination may be triggered by specific
12 Chapter 1
Inhibitors:
Germi nation
Lobs of heat
rgei Stance
IncrgAfi* in
sts inability
OrmL Qf
reepirgtiori
Urwn**inB of
onxyrws
Fall in optical
density and
retractility
Salt
Swelling
Outflfowrth
If
1st Cflll
division
2nd call
drvi'MQn
Net increase in DKA
Pauifcui Jyiltf^w's
RNA synthesis
5 min 1 hour 3 hours
Approximate time following initiation of germination
Fig. 1.11 Spore germination, outgrowth and division of the outgrown cells.
2.3.3
germination stimulants, such as L-alanine or glucose, by the physical processes of
shaking with small glass beads, or by sublethal heating (e.g. at 60°C for 1 hour).
Outgrowth and subsequent growth depends on the presence of the necessary nutrients
for the particular organism concerned. The stages of germination and outgrowth, and
also the action of inhibitors of the process, are shown in Fig. 1.11.
Parameters of heat resistance
The existence and possible presence of bacterial spores determines the parameters,
i.e. time and temperature relationships, of thermal sterilization processes which are
used extensively by the food and pharmaceutical industry. These are defined below
(see also Chapters 20 and 23).
1 D-value (decimal reduction time, DRT) is the time in minutes required to destroy
90% of a population of cells. The D-value has little relevance to the sterilization of
medicines for injection, surgical instruments or dressings, where a process designed to
kill all living spores must be developed. The D-value is used extensively in the food
industry.
2 The Fg-value is a process-describing unit expressed in terms of minutes at 121.1 °C
(originally 250°F) or a corresponding time-temperature relationship to produce the
same complete spore-killing effect.
3 The z-value is the increase in temperature (°C) to reduce the D-value to
one-tenth.
Bacteria
13
Toxins
Although bacteria are associated with the production of disease, only a few species
are disease-producing or pathogenic.
The mechanism whereby the bacteria produce the disease with its attendant symptoms
is often due to the cells' ability to produce specific poisons, toxins or aggressins (Chapter
14). Many of these are tissue-destroying enzymes which can damage the cellular
structure of the body or destroy red blood cells. Others (neurotoxins) are highly specific
poisons of the central nervous system, for example the toxin produced by Clostridium
botulinum is, weight for weight, one of the most poisonous substances known.
Reproduction
4.1 Binary fission
The majority of bacteria reproduce-by simple binary fission; the circular chromosome
divides into two identical circles which segregate at opposite ends of the cell. At the
same time, the cell wall is laid down in the middle of the cell, which finally grows to
produce two new cells each with its own wall and nucleus. Each of the two new cells
will be an exact copy of the original cell from which they arose and no new genetic
material is received and none lost.
4.2 Reproduction involving genetic exchange
For many years, it was thought that binary fission was the only method of reproduction
in bacteria, but it is now known that there are three methods of reproduction in which
genetic exchange can occur between pairs of cells, and thus a form of sexual reproduction
is exhibited. These processes are transformation, conjugation and transduction. Further
details of these processes as they affect antibiotic resistance will be found in Chapter 9.
4.2.1 Transformation
In 1928, long before the role of DNA, the genetic code and the mechanics of genetics
and gene expression were known, Griffith found that a culture of Streptococcus
pneumoniae deficient in capsular material could be made to produce normal capsulated
cells by the addition of the cell-free filtrate from a culture in which a normal capsulated
strain had been growing. The state of knowledge at that time was insufficient for the
great significance of this experiment to be realized and developed. It was not until 16
years later that the material in the culture filtrate responsible for the re-establishment
of capsulated cells was shown to be DNA.
4.2.2 Conjugation
Conjugation, discovered in 1946, is a natural process found in certain bacterial genera
and involves the active passage of genetic material from one cell to another by means
of the sex pili (p. 10). However, despite the resemblance of this process to the complete
14 Chapter 1
genetic exchange found in eukaryotes, it is not possible to designate male and female
bacteria. Bacteria which are able to effect transfer contain in their genetic make-up a
fertility factor and are designated F + strains. These are able to transfer part, and in some
cases all, of their genetic material to F" strains.
It should be realized that this is an extremely brief and incomplete account of
conjugation. The importance of bacterial conjugation in antibiotic resistance will be
considered later (Chapter 9).
4.2.3 Transduction
Viruses are discussed more fully elsewhere (Chapter 3). However, there are certain
groups of viruses, called bacteriophages (phages), which can attack bacteria. This attack
involves the injection of viral DNA into bacterial cells which then proceed to make
new virus particles and destroy cells. Some viruses, known as temperate viruses, do
not cause this catastrophic event when they infect their host, but can pass genetic material
from one cell to another.
In summary, then, conjugation is a natural process representing the early stages in a
true sexually reproductive process. Transformation involving autolysis of the culture
with loss of genetic material, and transduction arising out of an infective process, are
secondary processes which are not known to occur in eukaryotes; nevertheless, they
must have taken their part in microbial evolution.
5 Bacterial growth
The preceding account has been concerned with the single bacterial cell and the
information has been obtained by various forms of microscopy and by chemical analysis.
Further bacteriological information has been, and is being, obtained by observing
bacteria in very large numbers either as a culture in liquid growth medium or as colonies
on a solid growth medium. Under these circumstances bacteria can be seen but the
behaviour of aggregates is really a statistical average behaviour of its individuals. A
somewhat fanciful analogy is that whereas a molecule of a chemical substance is
invisible, molecules in mass, i.e. a chemical specimen, are visible and macroscopic
properties are determinable.
5.1 The growth requirements of bacteria
The determinants of microbial growth are described as consumable and environmental.
5.7.7 Consumable determinants
The consumables represent the essential food or nutritional requirements. Conventionally
they include sugars, starches, proteins, vitamins, trace elements, oxygen, carbon dioxide
and nitrogen; but bacteria are probably the most omnivorous of all living organisms
and to the above list may be added plastic, rubber, kerosene, naphthalene, phenol and
cement. One is left feeling that there is no substance which is immune to microbial
Bacteria 1 5
attack. It is easy, too, to overlook the importance of water; bacteria cannot grow without
water and, besides a milieu in which to thrive, water also provides hydrogen as part of
reaction sequences for the metabolism of the substrates.
Some bacteria have very simple growth requirements, and the following medium
(expressed as gl~) will support the growth of a wide range of species: glucose, 20;
(NH 4 ) 2 HP04,0.05. On the other hand, some species may need the addition of some 20
amino acids and perhaps 8-10 vitamins or growth factors (thiamine or vitamin Bj is an
example of the latter) before growth will occur, and it follows that these requirements
have to be present in natural environments also. Between the extremes of the nutritionally
non-exacting and the nutritionally highly exacting, a whole range of intermediate
requirements are found.
The requirements of a microorganism for an amino acid or vitamin can be used to
determine the amount of that substance in foods or pharmaceutical products by growing
the organism in a medium containing all the essential requirements and measured doses
of the substance to be determined.
Mention has been made of gases as part of the bacterial consumables list. Some
bacteria cannot grow unless oxygen is present in their immediate atmosphere; in practical
terms this means that they grow in air. Such organisms are called obligate aerobes.
Another group is actually inhibited in the presence of oxygen, this gas behaving almost
as an intoxicant, and such bacteria are known as obligate anaerobes. A large number of
species can grow both in the presence and absence of oxygen and these are termed
facultative bacteria. These organisms, however, make much better use of foodstuffs,
i.e. their consumables, when growing in air. A fourth group is named microaerophilic:
these grow best in the presence of oxygen at slightly lower concentrations than that
found in air. Special techniques are needed to grow anaerobic bacteria which, briefly,
consist of cultivation in oxygen-free atmospheres or growth in culture media containing
a reducing agent; sometimes a combination of both methods is used.
5.1.2 Environmental determinants
The main environmental determinants of microbial growth are pH and temperature.
The availability of water may be lowered when certain solutes are present in high
concentration; thus, concentrated salt and sugar solutions may either slow down or
prevent growth.
Most bacteria grow best at pH values of 7.4-7.6, on the alkaline side of neutrality, but
some bacterial species are able to grow at pH 1-2 or 9-9.5, although they are exceptional.
Bacteria also show a wide range of growth temperatures. Those organisms which
cause disease in man and other mammals, and in consequence have been extensively
studied, grow best at the temperature of the mammalian body, i.e. 37-39°C. However,
viable microorganisms have been recovered from hot springs, the polar seas and
submarine volcanic fissures (thermal vents), and there are bacteria which can grow in
domestic refrigerators. Bacteria which grow best at 15-20°C are called psychrophiles,
at 25 A 10°C mesophiles, and at 55-75°C thermophiles.
The growth of bacteria, as with other living organisms, can be inhibited or prevented.
Antiseptics, disinfectants, antibiotics and chemotherapeutic agents are the names given
to special chemicals developed to combat infection. They are discussed in later chapters.
16 Chapter 1
Culture media
Mention has already been made of the wide variety of consumable nutrients which
may be required by bacteria, and also how some bacteria can grow in simple aqueous
solution containing an energy source, such as glucose, and a few inorganic ions.
For the routine cultivation of bacteria, a cheap source of all likely nutrients is
desirable, and it should also be remembered that even bacteria whose minimum
requirements are very simple grow far better on more highly nutritious media.
The media usually employed are prepared from protein by acid or enzymic digestion.
Typical sources are muscle tissue (meat), casein (milk protein) and blood fibrin. Their
digestion provides a supply of the natural amino acids and, because of their origin as
living tissue, they will also contain vitamins or growth factors and mineral traces.
Solutions of these digests, with the addition of sodium chloride to optimize the tonicity,
comprise the common liquid culture media of the bacteriological laboratory. If it is
required to study the characteristic colony appearance of cultures, the above media
may be solidified by a natural carbohydrate gelling agent, agar, which is derived from
seaweed.
In addition, a vast array of special culture media have been developed containing
chemicals which by either their selective inhibitory properties or characteristic changes
act as selective and diagnostic agents to pick out and identify bacterial species from
specimens containing a mixture of microorganisms. The examination of faeces for
pathogens is a good example.
As stated in section 5.1.1, some bacteria will not grow in the presence of oxygen.
These anaerobes may be grown by placing cultures in an oxygen free atmosphere, or
adding a reducing agent such as cooked meat or sodium thiogly collate to the media.
Energy provision
The growth requirements outlined above express themselves in growth itself through
the less tangible but fundamental necessity of energy which is provided by metabolism.
Not all metabolic reactions, however, provide energy; esterase activity is an example
of one that does not.
The energy provision by carbohydrate metabolism has been extensively studied
from the beginning of this century, chiefly in an attempt to understand the basic
biochemistry of alcohol production from carbohydrate. However, many laboratory
culture media contain only nitrogenous compounds and their metabolism is of
importance as it clearly provides energy for growth and maintenance.
In addition, living cells need a system of energy storage and this is provided by
'bond energy', strictly the free energy of hydrolysis of a diphosphate bond in the
compound adenosine triphosphate (ATP).
Energy-yielding reactions and energy-storage systems form a common pattern found
in all living systems and may be depicted thus:
stored
_ , 71
Reactant — > products + energy
utilized as produced.
Bacteria 17
A fundamental characteristic of the overall reaction is that it proceeds by a series
of steps, each catalysed by a separate enzyme. This ensures gentle and not explosive
release of energy and also provides a useful set of intermediates for the biosynthetic
reactions which are concomitant to growth.
It is the complexity of the array of enzymes, coenzymes and intermediates which at
first sight provides a daunting barrier to those wishing to try to understand cellular
energetics.
As stated in section 5.1.1, some bacteria derive energy from food sources without
the use of oxygen, whereas others are able to use this gas. The pathway of oxygen
utilization itself is also a stepwise series of reactions and thus the overall picture emerges
of cellular metabolism characterized by multistep reactions.
Although bacteria (the prokaryotes) differ in many fundamental ways from all other
living organisms (see Table 1.1), their metabolic pathways do not. The handling of
carbohydrates by the Embden-Meyerhof pathway and the Krebs citric acid cycle and
many of the reactions of the metabolism of nitrogen-containing compounds are common
to both eukaryotes and prokaryotes. The enzymes and coenzymes for handling molecular
oxygen are also strikingly similar in both classes. A full treatment of these pathways is
given in the former editions of this book and in textbooks of biochemistry and microbial
chemistry.
5.3 Identification of bacteria
The varying metabolic activities of bacteria and their response to immediate environ-
mental factors have been exploited in the design of special diagnostic and selective
media. Recipes for these run into many hundreds; such media are used in hospital and
public health laboratories for identifying organisms found in samples believed to be
contaminated by them, and as an aid to diagnosis and treatment. In addition they are
used to detect contaminants in pharmaceutical products (British Pharmacopoeia 1993).
A few examples will be given to illustrate the principle.
5.3.1 Selective and diagnostic media
MacConkey's medium. This was introduced in 1905 to isolate Enterobacteriaceae from
water, urine, faeces, foods, etc. Essentially, it consists of a nutrient medium with bile
salts, lactose and a suitable indicator. The bile salts function as a natural surface-active
agent which, while not inhibiting the growth of the Enterobacteriaceae, inhibits the
growth of Gram-positive bacteria which are likely to be present in the material to be
examined.
Escherichia coli and Klebsiella pneumoniae subsp, aerogenes produce acid from
lactose on this medium, altering the colour of the indicator, and also adsorb some of the
indicator which may be precipitated around the growing cells. The organisms causing
typhoid and paratyphoid fever and bacillary dysentery do not ferment lactose, and
colonies of these organisms appear transparent.
Many modifications of MacConkey's medium exist; one employs a synthetic
surface- active agent in place of bile salts.
1 8 Chapter 1
Bismuth sulphite agar. This medium was developed in the 1920s for the identification
of Salmonella typhi in water, faeces, urine, foods and pharmaceutical products. It consists
of a buffered nutrient agar containing bismuth sulphite, ferrous sulphate and brilliant
green.
Escherichia coli (which is also likely to be present in material to be examined) is
inhibited by the concentration (0.0025%) of brilliant green used, while Sal. typhi will
grow luxuriantly. Bismuth sulphite also exerts some inhibitory effect on E. coli.
Salmonella typhi, in the presence of glucose, reduces bismuth sulphite to bismuth
sulphide, a black compound; the organism can produce hydrogen sulphide from
sulphur-containing amino acids in the medium and this will react with ferrous ions to
give a black deposit of ferrous sulphide (Table 1.2).
Selective media for staphylococci. It is often necessary to examine pathological
specimens, food and pharmaceutical products for the presence of staphylococci,
organisms which can cause food poisoning as well as systemic infections.
In media selective for enterobacteria a surface-active agent is the main selector,
whereas in staphylococcal medium sodium and lithium chlorides are the selectors;
staphylococci are tolerant of 'salt' concentrations to around 7.5%. Mannitol salt,
Baird-Parker (BP) and Vogel- Johnson (VJ) media are three examples of selective
staphyloccocal media. Beside salt concentration the other principles are the use of a
selective carbon source, mannitol or sodium pyruvate together with a buffer plus
acid-base indicator for visualizing metabolic activity and, by inference, growth. BP
medium also contains egg yolk; the lecithin (phospholipid) in this is hydrolysed by
staphylococcal (esterase) activity so that organisms are surrounded by a cleared zone
in the otherwise opaque medium. The United States Pharmacopeia (1990) includes a
test for staphylococci in pharmaceutical products, whereas the British Pharmacopoeia
(1993) does not.
Selective media for pseudomonads. These media depend on the relative resistance of
pseudomonads to the quaternary ammonium disinfectant cetrimide. In some recipes
the antibiotic nalidixic acid (Chapter 5) is added, to which pseudomonads are also
resistant.
Table 1.2 Appearance of bacterial colonies on bismuth sulphite agar
Organism Appearance
Salmonella typhi i
Salmonella enteritidis ' Black with blackened extracolonial zone
Salmonella schotmulleri I
Salmonella paratyphi 1
Salmonella typhimurium Green
Salmonella choleraesuis I
Shigella flexneri \ Brown
Shigella sonnei J
Other shigellae s No growth
Escherichia coli \
Bacteria 19
Selective media for legionellas and listerias. Such have been devised.
Media for fungi. Most fungi encountered as contaminants in pharmaceutical products
will grow on media similar to that used to grow bacteria. Growth is favoured, however,
if the proportion of carbohydrate is increased in relation to that of nitrogenous
constituents.
Thus, media for the cultivation of fungi often contain additional glucose, malt,
sucrose or wort. The optimum pH for mould growth is usually on the acid side of
neutrality and so the pH of culture media for moulds is usually 5-6. This, while entirely
suitable for most common moulds, at the same time discourages bacterial growth and
thus renders the medium selective. Examples of such media are Sabouraud maltose or
dextrose agar, malt extract agar and soya tryptone agar.
The optimum temperature varies widely from species to species but in general
the common moulds will grow better at 22-25 °C than most human pathogenic and
commensal bacteria. It is customary, therefore, to incubate mould cultures at lower
temperatures than bacterial cultures.
A comprehensive account of culture media may be found in the Oxoid manual (see
references).
5.3.2 Examples of additional biochemical tests
The differing ability to ferment sugars, glycosides and polyhydric alcohols is widely
used to differentiate the Enterobacteriaceae and in diagnostic bacteriology generally.
The test is usually carried out by adding the reagent aseptically to sterilized peptone
water and a suitable indicator, contained in a 5-ml bottle closed with a rubber-lined
screw cap and containing a small inverted tube filled with the medium. Acid production
is indicated by a change in colour of the indicator, and gas production by gas collecting
in the inverted tube.
It is possible to buy ingenious testing devices which consist of a plastic strip
containing cavities in which dried reagents are placed. Such a strip may contain some
50 different tests and is used by depositing in the cavity a culture medium containing a
suspension of bacteria from the colony to be investigated. The strip is then incubated.
This is the API system (API Laboratory Products, Basingstoke, Hants). Another useful
device consists of a plastic tube with a number of compartments of about 12 cm , each
containing agar medium. These are inoculated by means of a still wire run through
their centre; this enables some 1 1 tests to be carried out. It is known as the Enterotube.
5.4 Measurement of bacterial growth
The quantification of the growth response to the total environment may be determined
by counting the bacterial population to see if it changes with the passage of time. The
most direct method is literally to count the bacterial cells placed on a calibrated
microscope slide. This slide has a grid of 0.05-mm squares ruled on it and is so arranged
that when a microscope slide is placed in position on two ledges raised by 0.02 mm, a
known volume (0.00005 mm ) is spread over each square. From the counts per unit
of known volume, the total count may be calculated. This method cannot distinguish
20 Chapter 1
between living and dead bacteria, however, and to determine the number of living
bacteria in a culture it is necessary to perform what is known as a viable count. In this
method, an aliquot of the culture, suitably diluted, is mixed with, or placed on the
surface of, a suitable solid culture medium and the mixture incubated. Viable colonies
appear in or on the medium and are counted. It will be realized here that a single
bacterium in the original culture being plated is assumed to give rise to a single viable
colony — this may not always be true, and aggregates of two or more cells may give
rise to a single colony. Ideally, this situation should be avoided, but in order to present
some notion of scientific correctness or semantic perfection, the viable count may
be referred to as the number of colony-forming units (cfu) rather than as 'number of
bacteria'.
A third method of determining the changes in a viable population is to take advantage
of the fact that bacteria in suspension scatter or absorb light. By shining a light beam
through a bacterial suspension and calculating changes in light intensity by allowing
the emergent beam to fall on a photoelectric cell connected to a galvanometer,
the bacterial population observed as light-scattering or light-absorbing units may be
determined. This method is rapid but it counts both living and dead bacteria and, for
that matter, non-bacterial particles. A calibration curve relating bacterial numbers to
galvanometer reading must be produced for each experimental circumstance.
Great care, skill and understanding are required to determine the state of a bacterial
population whether growing, stationary or dying.
In addition to these time-honoured methods, newer techniques involving bio-
luminescense, fluorescent dyes (epifluorescence) and physical methods such as
impedance, calorimetry and flow cytometry have been developed. A feature being sought
in these methods is rapidity: see section 5.6.
5.4. 1 Mean generation time
The time interval between one cell division and the next is called the generation time.
When considering a growing culture containing many thousands of cells, a mean
generation time is usually calculated.
If a single cell reproduces by binary fission, then the number of bacteria n in any
generation will be as follows:
1st generation n = 1 x 2 =2'
2nd generation n=lx2x2 =2
3rd generation n = lx2x2x2 = 2 J
yth generation n=\x2 y =2 y
For an initial inoculum of n cells, as distinct from one cell, at the yth generation
the cell population will be:
n = rtox2 y
This equation may be rewritten thus:
log n = log n Q + y log 2
whence
Bacteria 2 1
_ logn-log»o _ logn-logn<
y
log 2
0.3010
where y is the number of generations that have elapsed in the time interval between
determining the viable count uq and the population reaching n.
If this time interval is t, then the mean generation time G is given by the expression:
t
logn-logrci
0.3010
tx 0.3010
logn - log n c
Growth curves
When a sample of living bacteria is inoculated into a medium adequate for
growth, the change in viable population with time follows a characteristic pattern
(Fig. 1.12).
The first phase, A, is called the lag phase. It will be short if the culture medium is
adequate, i.e. not necessarily minimal, and is at the optimum temperature for growth. It
may be longer if the medium is minimal or has to warm up to the optimum growth
temperature, and prolonged if toxic substances are present; other things being equal,
there is a relationship between the duration of the lag phase and the amount of the toxic
inhibitor.
In phase B it is assumed that the inoculum has adapted itself to the new environment
and growth then proceeds, each cell dividing into two. Cell division by binary fission
may take place every 15-20 minutes and the increase in numbers is exponential or
logarithmic, hence the name log phase. Phase C, the stationary phase, is thought to
occur as a result of the exhaustion of essential nutrients and possibly the accumulation
Time
Fig. 1.12 Typical bacterial growth curve: A, lag phase; B, log phase; C, stationary phase; D, phase
of decline.
of bacteriostatic concentrations of wastes. Growth will recommence if fresh medium is
added to provide a new supply of nutrients and to dilute out toxic accumulations.
In phase D, the phase of decline, bacteria are actually dying due to the combined
pressures of food exhaustion and toxic waste accumulation.
Quicker methods for detecting bacteria
The methods for determining bacterial contamination both quantitatively and quali-
tatively which have been outlined in sections 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5 have the general
disadvantage that they involve an incubation period of 15-72 hours before a reliable
answer is obtained.
In the case of pharmaceutical quality control, and in many other spheres, methods
which give an answer in a shorter time are being investigated, evaluated and in some
cases used. Some of these quicker or rapid methods will be referred to in this section.
Microscopy
It had been found that if bacteria are stained with acridine orange and examined under
fluorescent microscopy, viable, as distinct from dead, cells fluoresce with an orange-
red hue. This basic observation has been adapted to an ingenious method of determining
bacterial content and may be completed within 1 hour.
The method, known as the direct epifluorescent filtration technique (DEFT), consists
of filtering the liquid to be tested through a membrane filter, staining the filter with the
acridine orange and examining the filter under a fluorescent microscope. The organisms
may be counted, thus rendering the technique quantitative. This method has been used
to determine microbial contaminants in intravenous fluids and was able to detect
organisms at a level of 25/ml. DEFT presents difficulties if the fluid to be examined
is viscous, although this may be overcome by dilution. Water-soluble solids may be
dissolved before difficulties with water-immiscible, viscous liquids and water-insoluble
solids.
Flow cytometry
This technique together with the Coulter counting technique depends upon a simple
but ingenious device. A potential difference is maintained in a circuit which includes a
tube with a small orifice submerged in a conducting liquid (Fig. 1.13).
If a liquid containing particulate matter, blood cells, bacteria or suspensions of
inanimate matter is passed down the tube, when a particle passes through the orifice a
change in resistance in the circuit occurs and the change may be recorded by the usual
detection or print-out devices. Both the number of particles per unit of time and their
size may be determined.
There are certain points to be borne in mind, however, with this method:
1 In the counting of bacteria, both dead and living cells will be counted and sized
although prestaining with a dye and a sophistication of the instrumentation has been
investigated.
2 A further possible disadvantage is that the orifice may become blocked during use.
Bacteria 23
Suspension containing
particles to be counted
Recorder
Electrodes-
\l
\
□
X
Conducting
fluid
Orifice
Egress
Fig. 1.13 Principle of electronic
particle counter: Coulter counter.
5.6.3.
3 If the bacterial content of an inanimate suspension, i.e. a medicine such as milk
of magnesia, is being examined both bacteria and magnesium hydroxide particles will
be detected, although here again methods of distinguishing the two types of particle
have been developed.
Micro calorimetry
This method depends on the fact that bacteria like all living organisms produce heat
when they metabolize. Because of the small amount of heat produced, especially
sensitive calorimetric devices are required hence the name microcalorimetry. The
specimen to be evaluated is diluted with a nutrient medium and, if microorganisms are
present and can metabolize, heat is produced and can be measured. An interesting
offshoot of this technique is the fact that differing organisms produce different heat
outputs and this may provide a means of identification. Microcalorimetry may enable
organisms to be detected and possibly identified in 3 hours.
5.6.4
Electrical conductivity
When organisms grow in a liquid media their metabolic products can create a change
in the conductivity of the media, a fact noted in 1898. Research has shown that colony
numbers of about 10/ml are required to produce a measurable conductivity change.
The actual changes in the media may be measured also by changes in impedance
(resistance to an alternating current) or the change in its electrical capacity. As with all
techniques it has certain limitations. If the level of initial contamination of a product is
low, incubation of a sample in a suitable broth will be necessary to increase the organism
content to nearer 10/ml. This will add to the time of the test. Another limitation lies in
24 Chapter 1
the detection of non-fermentative microorganisms whose metabolic activity produces
little change in media conductivity.
5.6.5 Bioluminescence
It has long been known that certain insects (e.g. the beetles known as fire flies) and two
or three genera of bacteria possess the ability to emit light; this property has been
utilized in quality control and research.
The use of the fire fly light -emitting system. Light generation depends on the oxidation
of a substance known as luciferin. This is a fatty aldehyde such as dodecanal. An enzyme
called luciferase, extracted from fire flies, catalyses the oxidation. The reaction also
requires ATP. Thus, light emission measures ATP.
The detection of bacteria by this method depends on the fact that they, like all
living material, contain ATP but here arises a potential problem.
When determining the bacterial content of, for example, foods, clinical material
and even water, elaborate techniques are required to eliminate non-bacterial ATP. Also,
the sample being tested has to undergo an extraction process to remove ATP from any
bacteria present. The problem of non-microbial ATP is not likely to be met in the
examination of pharmaceuticals and toilet goods, however.
Comprehensive kits are available to analysts, bacteriologists and research workers
to perform the determination of ATP. They include, or are backed by, special light-
measuring equipment (luminometers) to estimate light emission and follow its extinction.
The use of luminous bacteria. A naturally occurring light-emitting bacterium,
Photobacteriumfischeri, was used as early as 1942 to assay antibiotics, the end-point
being taken as the extinction of light as viewed visibly.
With the advent of genetic engineering it has been possible to insert the light-
emitting genes of a natural bioluminescent organism, the so-called lux cluster into
organisms more relevant to medicine and public health, e.g. Escherichia coli, Salmonella
typhimurium, Listeria spp. and Mycobacterium smegmatis amongst others. The ex-
tinction of light in these organisms is used to mark the end-point in an estimation of
biocide activity and thermal stress to quote two examples of the application of this
method.
Rapid methods have great appeal in microbial quality control and certain areas of
research, but it should always be borne in mind, especially in quality control, that
rigorous testing of the method should be carried out in comparison to accepted
methods.
Rapid and quicker methods have an extensive literature and mainly review-type
publications are given at the end of the chapter.
Properties of selected bacterial species
In this section, no attempt will be made to follow the modern classification system; the
reader is referred to the works of Bergey (Buchanan & Gibbons 1974), Cowan and
Steel (Cowan 1993) and Logan (1994) for an overview of classification.
Bacteria 25
6.1 Gram-positive cocci
6.1.1 Staphylococcus
The spheres grow characteristically in aggregates which have been likened to a bunch
of grapes. The organisms are non-motile and non-sporing; they can grow aerobically
or anaerobically. Staphylococcus aureus produces a golden yellow pigment. It is a
cause of skin lesions such as boils, and can affect bone tissue in the case of staphylococcal
osteomyelitis. It produces a toxin which, if ingested with food in which the organism
has been growing, can give rise to food poisoning. A common manifestation of
its infection is the production of pus, i.e. the organism is pyogenic. Other com-
mon conditions associated with staphylococcal infections are styes, impetigo and
conjunctivitis.
6.7.2 Streptococcus
These also are non-sporing, spherical organisms which grow characteristically in chains
like strings of beads, and can grow aerobically or anaerobically.
Streptococcus pyogenes can be an extremely dangerous pathogen; it produces a
series of toxins, including an erythrogenic toxin which induces a characteristic red
rash, and a family of toxins which destroy the formed elements of blood.
Typical diseases caused by Strep, pyogenes are scarlet fever and acute tonsillitis
(sore throat), and the organism is a dangerous infective agent in wounds and in blood
poisoning after childbirth (puerperal sepsis). Rheumatic fever and acute inflammation
of the kidney are serious sequelae of streptococcal infection. Invasive streptococcal
infection can cause necrosis of subcutaneous tissue (necrotizing fasciitis) together with
other serious systemic pathologies.
6.1.3 Diplococcus (now Streptococcus)
As the name implies, these organisms grow in pairs, otherwise they are similar
to streptococci and are now referred to as streptococci. Streptococcus pneumoniae is
the causal agent of acute lobar pneumonia and also of meningitis, peritonitis and
conjunctivitis. This organism can also initiate an invasive infection.
6.2 Gram-negative cocci
6.2.1 Neisseria and Branhamella
The Gram-negative pathogenic cocci belong to the genus Neisseria. The cells are slightly
curved rather than true spheres and have been likened to a kidney bean in shape. They
often occur in pairs and embedded in pus cells. Neisseria gonorrhoeae is the causal
organism of the venereal disease gonorrhoea. The organism can also affect the eyes,
causing a purulent ophthalmia. Neisseria meningitidis is a cause of cerebrospinal fever
or meningococcal meningitis. Branhamella catarrhalis (formerly N. catarrhalis) is a
harmless member of the genus and is often isolated from sputum.
26 Chapter 1
6.3 Gram-positive rods
The genera of importance in this group are Bacillus, Clostridium and Corynebacterium.
6.3.1 Bacillus
Members of this genus are widespread in air, soil and water, and in animal products
such as hair, wool and carcasses. It occurs characteristically as a large rod with square
ends; it is aerobic and spore-forming. The most dangerous member of the group, B.
anthracis, is the causal organism of anthrax. Bacillus cereus has been implicated during
recent years as a cause of food poisoning, B. polymyxa is the source of the antibiotic
polymyxin, B. brevis of tyrothricin and B. subtilis and B. licheniformis of bacitracin.
6.3.2 Clostridium
Clostridia are anaerobic, spore-forming rods. The genus contains a number of dangerous
pathogens.
Clostridium septicum, CI. perfringens (welchii) and CI. novyi (oedematiens) cause
serious damage to tissue if they are able to develop in wounds where the oxygen supply
is limited. Tissue may be destroyed, and carbon dioxide produced from muscle glycogen
gives rise to the condition known as gas gangrene.
Clostridium botulinum secretes an extremely toxic nerve poison and ingestion of
food in which this organism has grown is fatal. Cooking rapidly destroys the poison
but cold meats, sausages and pates that contain the organism and that are eaten uncooked
are possible sources of botulism. Clostridium tetani also produces a powerful central
nervous system poison and gives rise to the condition known as lockjaw or tetanus.
Clostridium sporogenes is a non-pathogenic member of the genus and is sometimes
used as a control organism for anaerobic culture media in sterility testing (although the
European Pharmacopoeia specifies CI. sphenoides: Chapter 23).
Clostridium difficile, described in older texts as of little significance as a pathogen
if present in the gut, may, after therapy with antibiotics such as clindamycin or ampicillin,
remain uninhibited, grow and produce toxins which give rise to a serious condition
known as pseudomembranous colitis. The organism will usually succumb to vancomycin.
6.3.3 Corynebacterium
Corynebacterium diphtheriae, which is non-sporing, is the causal organism of diphtheria,
a disease which has largely been eradicated by immunization (Chapter 16).
Gardnerella vaginalis (previously named C. vaginale or Haemophilus vaginalis),
although often part of the normal flora of the vagina, can be a cause of vaginitis. It has
been suggested that the condition is expressed in association with anaerobes. It responds
to treatment with metronidazole (Chapter 5).
6.3.4 Listeria
Listeria monocytogenes has been known as a pathogen since the 1920s. It has achieved
Bacteria 27
prominence and some notoriety lately as a contaminant in dairy products. It occurs as
a non-sporing Gram-positive coccobacillus or rod-shaped organism, and is able to
survive and multiply at low temperatures. Thus, it is essential that freezer cabinets in
retail outlets should be maintained at temperatures low enough to prevent growth of
the organism.
Ingestion of L. monocytogenes can cause abortion in humans and animals and in
the case of listeriosis a prime characteristic is an increase in monocytes.
Listeriosis may be treated with a combination of ampicillin and gentamicin.
6.4 Gram-negative rods
6. 4. 1 Pseudomonas
Pseudomonas aeruginosa (pyocyanea) has, in recent years, assumed the role of a
dangerous pathogen. It has long been a troublesome cause of secondary infection of
wounds, especially burns, but is not necessarily pathogenic. With the advent of immuno-
suppressive therapy following organ transplant, systemic infections including pneumonia
have resulted from infection by this organism. It has also been implicated in eye
infections resulting in the loss of sight.
Pseudomonas aeruginosa is resistant to many antibacterial agents (Chapters 9,13)
and is biochemically very versatile, being able to use many disinfectants as food sources.
6.4.2 Vibrio
Vibrio cholerae (comma) is often seen in the form of a curved rod (or a comma), hence
its alternative specific name. It is the causal organism of Asiatic cholera. This disease
is still endemic in India and Burma, and was in the UK until the nineteenth century, the
last epidemic occurring in 1866. It is a water-borne organism and infection may be
prevented in epidemics by boiling all water and consuming only well-cooked foodstuffs.
Vibrio par ahaemolyticus occurs in sea water and has been implicated in food poisoning
following consumption of raw fish. It accounts for more than half the cases of food
poisoning in Japan, where raw fish, suchi, is an important dietary item. Food poisoning
from this organism also occurs in the UK.
6.4.3 Yersinia and Francisella
Yersinia pestis (formerly Pasteurella pestis) is the causal organism of plague or the
Black Death which ravaged the UK at various times, the Great Plague occurring in
1348. It infects the lymphatic system to give bubonic plague, the more usual form, or
the respiratory system, giving the rapidly fatal pneumonic plague.
Francisella tularensis (formerly Pasteurella tularensis) causes tularaemia in humans,
a disease endemic in the American Midwest and contracted from infected animals.
6.4.4 Bordetella
Bordetella pertussis is the causal organism of whooping-cough, a disease which
28 Chapter 1
has been largely eradicated by a successful immunization programme (Chapter
16).
6.4.5 Brucella
This genus is found in many domesticated animals and in some wild species.
Brucella abortus is a cause of spontaneous abortion in cattle. In humans it causes
undulant fever, i.e. a fever in which temperature undulates with time. Brucella melitensis
infects goats; it causes an undulant fever called Malta fever, which is common in people
living in Mediterranean countries where large flocks of goats are kept.
Brucella suis is found in pigs; it too manifests itself in humans as undulant fever
and occurs frequently in North America.
6.4.6 Haemophilus
Haemophilus influenzae owes its specific name to the fact that it was thought to be the
causal organism of influenza (now known to be a virus disease) as it was often isolated
in cases of influenza. It is the main cause of infantile meningitis and conjunctivitis and
is one of the most important causes of chronic bronchitis.
6.4.7 Escherichia
Escherichia coli and the organisms listed below (sections 6.4.8-6.4.12) are members
of a group of microorganisms known as the enterobacteria, so called because they
inhabit the intestines of humans and animals. Many selective and diagnostic media and
differential biochemical reactions are available to isolate and distinguish members of
this group, as they are of great significance in public health.
Escherichia coli is a cause of enteritis in young infants and the young of farm
animals, where it can cause diarrhoea and fatal dehydration. It is a common infectant
of the urinary tract and bladder in humans, and is a cause of pyelitis, pyelonephritis and
cystitis.
6.4.8 Salmonella
Salmonella typhi is the causal organism of typhoid fever, Sal. paratyphi causes
paratyphoid fever, whilst Sal. typhimurium, Sal. enteritidis and very many other closely
related organisms are a cause of bacterial food poisoning.
6.4.9 Shigella
Shigella shiga, Sh. flexneri, Sh. sonnei and Sh. boydii are the causes of bacillary
dysentery.
6.4.10 Proteus (Morganella, Providencia)
Proteus vulgaris and Pr. morganii can infect the urinary tract of humans. They are avid
Bacteria 29
decomposers of urea, producing ammonia and carbon dioxide. These organisms
occasionally cause wound infection. Some species have the generic name Morganella
or Providencia.
6.4.11 Serratia marcescens
This very small organism, 0.5-1.0/zm long, has been used to test bacterial filters. It is
not to be regarded as non-pathogenic, although infections arising from it are rare.
6.4.12 Klebsiella
Klebsiella pneumoniae subsp, aerogenes is found in the gut and respiratory tract of
man and animals, and in soil and water. It may be distinguished from E. coli by a
pattern of biochemical tests (Table 1.3). It can give rise to acute bronchopneumonia in
humans but is not a common pathogen.
6.4.13 Fla vobacterium
Various species of this characteristically pigmented genus occur in water and soil and
can contaminate pharmaceutical products.
6.4.14 Acinetobacter
This genus has the same distribution and the same opportunities for causing
contamination as Flavobacterium. These organisms are not pigmented.
6.4.15 Bacteroides
The characteristic of this genus is that its members are anaerobes. They occur in the
alimentary tract of humans and animals and have been associated with wound infections,
especially after surgery. Bacteroides fragilis is a frequently encountered member of
the genus.
6.4.16 Campylobacter
Campylobacters are thin, Gram-negative organisms which are in essence rod-shaped
but often appear in culture with one or more spirals or as 'S' and 'W (gull- winged)
shaped cells. They are microaerophilic or anaerobic and move by means of a single
polar flagellum. They are unable to grow below 30°C.
Table 1.3 Comparison of E. coli and K. pneumoniae subsp, aerogenes
Indole MR VP Citrate 44^0
E. coli + + - -
K. pneumoniae subsp, aerogenes - - + + +
Campylobacter jejuni has emerged during the last few years as a major cause of
enteritis in humans and is mainly transmitted by contaminated food, in other words it is
a food-poisoning microorganism.
6.4.17 Helicobacter
This genus, originally grouped with the Campylobacters (section 6.4.16), is now
considered a separate genus. Helicobacter pylori is of interest as a cause of peptic
ulcer.
6.4.18 Chlamydia
The diseases associated with chlamydias (e.g. psittacosis) were at one time thought to
be due to what were regarded as large viruses.
Chlamydias, however, are bacteria and have been shown to possess a cell wall
containing muramic acid (section 2.2.1), to contain ribosomes of the bacterial
(prokaryotic) type, to reproduce themselves by binary fission and to be inhibited by
antibiotics active against bacteria.
They are coccoid-shaped organisms and the feature which at one time consigned
them to the virus class was the fact that they would only reproduce in living tissue.
Chlamydia psittaci is the causal organism of psittacosis or ornithosis and occurs
mainly in the parrot family (hence psittacosis), but it is now known to be found in other
avian species (hence ornithosis). It is often found in persons who work in pet shops
selling parrots and budgerigars, and can be fatal.
Chlamydia trachomatis can cause a variety of diseases in humans, for example
trachoma, conjunctivitis and non-gonococcal urethritis. It is sensitive to the rifampicins,
the tetracyclines and erythromycin.
6.4.19 Rickettsia
This group of microorganisms shares with chlamydias the property of growing only
in living tissue. Rickettsiae occur as small (0.3 x 0.25 /mi) rod-shaped or coccoid
cells. They can be stained by special procedures. Division is by binary fission. They
may be cultivated in the blood of laboratory animals or in the yolk sac of the embryo
of the domestic fowl, and it is by this method that the organism is grown to produce
vaccines.
Infection with rickettsiae gives rise to a variety of typhus infections in humans, the
intermediate carriers being lice, fleas, ticks or mites. Rickettsiae can occur without
harm to these arthropod hosts.
Amongst the diseases caused by rickettsiae are epidemic typhus, trench fever and
murine typhus, caused by R. prowazeki, R. quintana andi?. typhi, respectively. Q-fever
is caused by Coxiella burned.
6.4.20 Legionella
Few people can have failed to have heard of Legionnaires' disease or legionellosis.
Bacteria 3 1
The causal organism of this disease, which must have existed undetected from time
immemorial, was isolated and verified in 1977 and called L. pneumophila.
It causes an influenza- like fever which is accompanied by pneumonia in 90% of
cases and which was usually diagnosed as atypical or viral pneumonia.
Legionella pneumophila is a rod- shaped, Gram-negative organism which grows
on a conventional laboratory medium provided the concentrations of cysteine and iron
are optimal. The organism will grow on a medium of sterilized tap water. This is in
keeping with its known habitat of water supplies, especially water maintained in storage
tanks, and must rely on the correct nutrients being present in the water.
The organism is sensitive to the antibiotic erythromycin (Chapter 5).
In addition to L pneumophila, 16 other species of Legionella of proven pathogenicity
have been described.
6.5 Acid-fast organisms
These comprise a group of organisms which, like the Gram-positive and Gram-negative
groups, have been named after a staining reaction.
Due to a waxy component in the cell wall these organisms are difficult to
stain with ordinary stain solutions, the hydrophobic nature of the wall being stain
repellent; however, if the bacterial smear on the slide is warmed with the stain, the
cells are dyed so strongly that they are not decolorized by washing with dilute
acid, hence the term acid- fast. Many bacterial spores exhibit the phenomenon of acid
fastness.
6. 5. 1 Mycobacterium
Mycobacterium tuberculosis is the causal organism of tuberculosis in humans. Allied
strains cause infections in animals, e.g. bovine tuberculosis and tuberculosis in rodents.
Due to the waxy nature of the cell wall this organism will resist desiccation and will
survive in sputum. Tuberculosis has been largely eliminated by immunization and
chemotherapy.
Mycobacterium leprae is the cause of leprosy.
6.6 Spirochaetes
Spirochaetes have a unique shape, structure and mode of locomotion. They are not
stained easily by normal staining methods and thus cannot be designated either Gram-
negative or Gram-positive. They are best observed by dark-ground illumination. They
are slender rods in the form of spirals, like a corkscrew, and may be as long as 500 A m.
Examples of spirochaete genera follow.
6.6.1 Borrelia
Borrelia recurrentis causes a relapsing fever in humans. Borrelia vincenti is the cause
of Vincent's angina in humans, an ulcerative condition of the mouth and gums. Borrelia
burgdorferi is the causal organism of the tick-borne Lyme disease.
32 Chapter 1
6. 6. 2 Treponema
Treponema pallidum is the causal organism of syphilis. Treponema pertenue causes
the tropical disease called yaws.
6.6.3 Leptospira
Leptospira icterohaemorrhagiae is the cause of a type of jaundice in humans called
Weil's disease. The disease is carried by rats and is encountered in sewer workers.
Other species of Leptospira, with hosts ranging from domestic animals such as the pig
to wild animals such as opossums and jackals, give rise to a variety of fevers encountered
locally or widely across the world.
Note: All organisms are potential pathogens in ill or immunologically compromised
patients.
Further reading
Buchanan R.E. & Gibbons N.E. (eds) (1974) Bergey 's Manual of Determinative Bacteriology, 8th edn.
Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
Collee J.G., Duguid J.P., Fraser A.G. & Marmion B.P. (1989) Mackie & McCartney's Practical
Microbiology, 13th edn. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Cowan S .T. (1993) Cowan and Steel's Manual for the Identification of Medical Bacterial, 3rd edn. (eds
G. Barrow & R.K.A. Feltham). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Davis B.D., Dulbecco R., Eisen H. & Ginsberg H.S. (1990) Microbiology, 4th edn. Philadelphia: J.B.
Lippincott.
Dawes I.W. & Sutherland I.W. (1991) Microbial Physiology, 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific
Publications.
Gould G.W. (1983) Mechanisms of resistance and dormancy. In: The Bacterial Spore (eds A. Hurst &
G.W. Gould), vol. 2, pp. 173-209. London: Academic Press.
Gould G.W. (1985) Modification of resistance and dormancy. In: Fundamental and Applied Aspects of
Bacterial Spores (eds G.J. Dring, D.J. Ellar & G.W. Gould), pp. 371-382. London: Academic Press.
Hugo W.B. (1972) An Introduction to Microbiology, 2nd edn. London: Heinemann Medical Books.
Logan N.A. (1994) Bacterial Systematic s. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Olds R.J. (1975) A Colour Atlas of Microbiology. London: Wolfe Publishing.
Oxoid Manual (1990) Compiled by Bridson, E.Y. 6th edn. Alton: Alphaprint.
Parker M.T. & Collier L.H. (eds) (1990) Topley and Wilson's Principles of Bacteriology, Virology and
Immunity, 8th edn., vols 1-5. London: Edward Arnold.
RoseA.H. (1976) Chemical Microbiology, 3rd edn. London: Butterworths.
Russell A.D. (1982) The Destruction of Bacterial Spores. London: Academic Press.
Skerman V.B.D., McGowan V. & Sneath PH. A. (1980) Approved list of bacterial names. Int J Syst
Bacteriol, 30, 225-240.
Stokes E.J. & Ridgway G.L. (1993) Clinical Microbiology, 7th edn. London: Edward Arnold.
Stryer L. (1995) Biochemistry, 5th edn. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman & Co.
The following references are included because, although of an advanced nature, they concern the
interaction of drugs and bacteria.
Chopra I. (1988) Efflux of antibacterial agents from bacteria. FEMS Symposium No. 44: Homeostatic
Mechanisms of Microorganisms, pp. 146-58. Bath: Bath University Press.
Costerton J.W, Cheng K.-J., Geesey G.G., Ladd T.I., Nickel S.C, Dasgupta M. & Marrie T.J. (1987)
Bacterial biofilms in nature and disease. Annu Rev Microbiol, 41, 435-464.
Bacteria 33
Hammond S.M., Lambert P.A. & Rycroft A.N. (1984) The Bacterial Cell Surface. London: Croom Helm.
Hinkle P.C. & McCarty R.E. (1976) How cells make ATP. SciAm, 238, 104-123.
Nikaido H. & Vaara T. (1986) Molecular basis of bacterial outer membrane permeability. Microbiol
Rev, 49, 1-32.
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (1996) Understanding Antibacterial Action and Resistance, 2nd edn.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
The references below refer to the subject matter in 5.6.
Microscopy, DEFT
Pettipher G.J., Mansell R., McKinnon C.H. & Cousins, CM. (1980) Rapid membrane filtration —
epifluorescent technique for direct inumeration of bacteria in raw milk. Appl Environ Microbiol,
39,423-429.
Denyer S.P. & Ward K.H. (1983) A rapid method for the detection of bacterial contaminants in
intravenous fluids using membrane filtration and epifluorescent microscopy. J Parental Sci Technol,
37, 156-158.
Flow cytometry
Shapiro H.M. (1990) Flow cytometry in laboratory microbiology: new directions. Am Soc Microbiol
News, 56, 584-586.
Microcalorimetry
Beezer A.E. (1980) Biological Microcalorimetry. London: Academic Press.
Impedance
Silley P. & Forsythe S. (1996) Impedance microbiology — a rapid change for microbiologists. J Bacterial
80,233-243.
Bioluminescence
Stanley P.E., McCarthy B.J. & Smither R. (eds) (1989) ATP Luminescence: Rapid Methods in
Microbiology. Society of Applied Bacteriology Technical Series No. 26. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific
Publications.
Stewart G.S.A.B., Loessner M.J. & Scherer S. (1996) The bacterial lux gene bioluminescent biosensor
revisited. Am Soc Microbiol News, 62, 297-301.
General reference
Stannard C.J., Petit S.B. & Skinner F.A. (1989) Rapid Microbiological Methods for Foods, Beverages
and Pharmaceuticals. Society of Applied Bacteriology Technical Series No. 25. Oxford: Blackwell
Scientific Publications.
Yeasts and moulds
1 Introduction 4 Cryptococcus neoformans
2 Saccharomyces cerevisiae 5 Neurospora crassa
2.1 The life cycle
2.2 Metabolism and physiology 6 Penicillium and Aspergillus
2.3 Cell wall
7 Epidermophyton, Microsporum and
3 Candida albicans Trichophyton
3.1 Pharmaceutical and clinical significance
3.2 Alternative morphologies 8 References
Introduction
Yeasts and moulds are members of the fungi. Yeasts are characterized as being essentially
unicellular, whereas moulds are composed of filaments which en masse frequently
appear fuzzy or powdery. The familar budding yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae, also
known as Baker's or Brewer's yeast, is usually thought of as the typical yeast. The
green mould Penicillium digitatum, a frequent spoiler of fruits such as apples or oranges,
and the bread mould Neurospora crassa will also be well-known to many. These latter
two organisms are properly considered as typical moulds. As is usually the case, however,
life is not completely straightforward for there are a considerable number of so-called
'dimorphic fungi' which can alternate between yeast-like and filamentous forms. One
such organisms is Candida albicans. To make matters more complicated, it has been
rediscovered that the would-be typical yeast S. cerevisiae can also form filaments
under a variety of different conditions (Gimeno et al. 1992). All of these fungi have
pharmaceutical and medical significance. The precise nature of this significance is
different in each case. For example, S. cerevisiae is generally regarded as a totally safe
organism suitable for use in human food and drink; the reason for its importance is
because it is by far the best understood eukaryotic organism on the planet. In contrast,
Cryptococcus neoformans has a variety of ways by which it can evade defence
mechanisms of the immune system, but is relatively little studied. In between these
two extremes are many yeasts and moulds, which are omnipresent in the environment,
in or on our foods, or a part of the normal flora of humans, but all of which can
opportunistically contaminate pharmaceutical preparations or cause post-operative
disease. All fungi pose a threat to immunocompromised individuals. This knowledge
should be weighed against a background of a general lack of suitable antifungal agents
(see Chapter 5). The approach of this chapter will be to first describe S. cerevisiae in
considerable detail because so much is known about it. Then, other yeasts and moulds
will be considered in turn, pointing out (where appropriate) significant differences
from S. cerevisiae or from each other.
Yeasts and moulds 35
Saccharomyces cerevisiae
Saccharomyces cerevisiae has a predominant place in the realms of cell biology and
molecular biology where it has become accepted as the universal model eukaryote.
The main reason for this is its genetic tractability . Traditionally, for reasons associated
with its importance to the food and drink industry, a great deal was known about the
biochemistry and physiology of this yeast. Later, with the advent of yeast genetics, a
vast range of well-characterized mutants became available. In turn, because S. cerevisiae
can be transformed and is readily amenable to genetic manipulation, this permitted
the isolation and characterization of many yeast genes. Ultimately, in mid 1996
the nucleotide sequence of the entire genome of the organism was reported. This
achievement is still only a far-off dream for molecular biologists studying most other
eukaryotic organisms. Nevertheless, it is possible to identify genes from other organisms
by means of genetic complementation in S. cerevisiae. Explained briefly, only one
piece of DNA from another organism will be able to substitute for a mutation in a
known gene in S. cerevisiae — this is a segment of DNA which carries the homologous
gene (i.e. codes for the same function) in the other organism. The availability of well-
defined mutants in S. cerevisiae combined with the facility of genetic manipulation
and this yeast's short generation time, make this a very rapid way to identify heterologous
(i.e. belonging to another organism) genes. Many of the latest concepts in cell and
molecular biology (e.g. concerning control of the cell cycle) have been developed and
tested in this organism. Naturally then, since it is the prime model eukaryote, it is also
the best understood fungus.
The life cycle
The life cycle of S. cerevisiae is shown in Fig. 2. 1 . It can exist both as a haploid (one
copy of each chromosome per cell) or as a diploid (two copies of each chromosome per
cell). Haploids exists as one of two sexes referred to as mating type a and mating type
a. When two haploid cells come close together they cause each other to arrest in the
Gl phase of the cell cycle. Each subsequently produces a special protuberance enabling
growth towards the mating partner. These somewhat abnormal looking cells are termed
'schmoos'. A haploid will only mate with another haploid of the opposite mating type.
This is achieved by the expression of specific oligopeptide mating pheromones
(hormones with brings about behavioual change in cells of the opposite sex) and the
possession of surface receptors only for the opposite pheromone (hence, mating type a
strains produce only a-factor and have receptors for a-factor, whilst mating type a
strains produce only cu-factor and have receptors for a-factor). The resulting diploid,
like the haploids from which it arose, is capable of repeated rounds of vegetative
reproduction.
The vegetative cell cycle of S. cerevisiae has received extensive attention. There
are many justifications for this. Firstly, the cell cycle in this organism has many
convenient landmarks' (Hartwell 1974, 1978; Pringle 1978) which make it very easy
to identify the exact point in the cell cycle at which a cell happens to be. Examples of
these landmark events include bud emergence, the size of the bud, mitosis (nuclear
division takes place through the neck between the 'mother' cell and the bud), and cell
PeeudaliyphaJ cell
Sporulation
Schmaos
<7^
uZD Ascjs
" (four haptoid spores)
Invasive \ *_ HAPLOID
fjlamant \ ^^/
cell
Fig. 2.1 The life cycle of Saccharomyces cerevisiae.
separation. Other markers of cell cycle progress are also apparent to the more experienced
observer (Fig. 2.2). The reader will notice from Fig. 2.2 that the 'daughter' which is
formed is smaller than the mother cell from which it arose. There is a size control
which operates over initiation of anew cell cycle (Pringle & Hartwell 1981), and since
the mother is larger than the minimum size necessary to pass this control, but the daughter
is not, the consequence is that the mother cell can immediately start a new cell cycle,
whereas the daughter must first grow for a period until it is large enough. Hence, mother
and daughter do not proceed through the next cell cycle synchronously. The significant
extent of morphological change throughout the cell cycle provides another reason for
studying this yeast as the construction of defined morphology.
A third justification for studying the cell cycle of this yeast is that it affords
a convenient system in which to study cell polarity. Together with asymmetric cell
division (inherent in the S. cerevisiae cell cycle with the unequal sized mothers and
daughters), the development of polarity is crucial in many aspects of development and
differentiation. Furthermore, as explained in more detail later in this chapter, the correct
Yeasts and moulds
37
Dauq
Cell
separatio
Unbudded eel
Nuclear
division
Chitin
ring
Bud
emergence
Bud
enlargement
Fig. 2.2 'Landmark' events in
the cell cycle of Saccharomyces
cerevisiae. Gl, S, G2 and M are
the classical phases of the
eukaryotic cell cycle.
development of polarity is an essential aspect in the life of most fungi. The development
of polarity and the resulting asymmetric division can be considered as five constituent
processes (Lew & Reed 1995) shown schematically in Fig. 2.3. These are:
1 the F-actin cytoskeleton;
2 the polarity of growth achieved by the way new cell wall material is arranged;
3 the location of 10-nm neck filaments;
4 formation of the cell 'cap';
5 the distribution of DNA and microtubules.
The construction of a yeast cell requires isotropic growth. Bud emergence is signalled
by the accumulation of secretory vesicles, the rho protein Cdc42p and a cap of
membrane-localized actin patches. Once the cap is established, subsequent bud
emergence is accomplished entirely by polarized growth. Following bud emergence,
the rings of 10-nm filaments remain at the mother/bud neck, whereas the proteins in
the cap concentrate at the tip of the bud where secretion takes place. Later, there is a
critical switch back to isotropic growth which brings about swelling of the bud. Most
of the proteins of the cap appear to disperse simultaneously with the apical/isotropic
switch. At cytokinesis, secretion is redirected to the neck and the proteins of the cap
redistribute to this region. Mutants have been isolated which distinguish between the
separate components and processes. In turn, the genes which the mutations have
identified have all been characterized.
The pattern of budding in haploids differs from that in diploids (Frief elder 1960).
Haploids grown in rich medium bud in an axial pattern, i.e. each new bud site is placed
adjacent to the previous one. In the same rich nutrient conditions diploids exhibit bipolar
budding, in this case choosing new bud sites at either end of the cell (Fig. 2.4). Under
a variety of other conditions, all presumably involving some form of nutrient limitation,
diploids will form pseudohyphae and haploids will form invasive filaments. As alluded
to earlier in this chapter, this represents a 'rediscovery' in the case of S. cerevisiae
because it had been known for a long time and forms part of the basic taxonomy. Its
significance had been ignored. This situation arose because the ability to form these
structures had been crossed-out of the genetic background of many academic strains
(8)
Bud
Apical
isotropic
swilch
fbi
®-
(c)
<<n
(el
0-0O-
o -0 -0-
®
Fig. 2.3 The development of polarity and asymmetric division in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. The
diagram is reproduced in a slightly simplified form from the work of Lew & Reed (1995) with the
permission of Current Opinion in Genetics and Development, (a) The F-actin cytoskeleton: strands =
actin cables; (•) cortical actin patches, (b) The polarity of growth is indicated by the direction of the
arrows; (arrows in many directions signifies isotropic growth), (c) 10-nm filaments which are
assembled to form a ring at the neck between mother and bud. (d) Construction of the 'cap' at the
pre-bud site. Notice that the proteins of the cap become dispersed at the apical/isotropic switch, first
over the whole surface of the bud, then more widely. Finally, secretion becomes refocussed at the neck
in time for cytokinesis, (e) The status and distribution of the nucleus and microtubules of the spindle.
Notice how the spindle pole body (•) plays an important part in orientation of the mitotic spindle.
Haploid
Fig. 2.4 The budding pattern in
haploid and diploid
Saccharomyces cerevisiae. The
original cell which formed a bud
is the mother (M). The daughter
cell (D) is shown remaining
attached as might be the case in
colonies growing on the surface
of agar.
around the world. Pseudohyphae are chains of regular-shaped, elongated cells in which
unipolar budding predominates. The analogous situation in colonies of haploids growing
on solid media is the formation of invasive filaments which are capable of penetrating
Yeasts and moulds
39
the agar. The generally accepted view is that starvation of nitrogen is the signal for the
switch from the yeast to a filamentous form (Kron et al. 1994), although it has also
been shown that pseudohyphal growth is strictly oxygen-dependent (Wright et al. 1993)
and that limitation of oxygen during continuous cultivation can result in the formation
of pseudohyphae (Kuriyama & Slaughter 1995). In 1996 Dickinson showed that,
dependent upon the concentration used, 'fusel' alcohols, i.e. n-amyl, isoamyl alcohol,
etc., caused the formation of hyphal-like extensions or pseudohyphae in a wide number
of different yeast species which were being cultured in rich liquid media where the
cells would normally proliferate as yeasts rather than in any other form (Dickinson
1996). It seems reasonable to conclude that since fusel alcohols are produced when the
yeasts are under various conditions of nutrient stress, the many situations which have
been reported to induce pseudohyphal formation are triggered by fusel alcohols. As we
have already noted, yeast-form proliferation is asymmetric and asynchronous; in
contrast, as others have already observed (Kron & Gow 1995), pseudohyphal growth
is symmetric and synchronous and, as will become apparent later in this chapter, hyphal
growth is symmetric and asynchronous (Fig. 2.5).
The diplophase and haplophase are equally stable. Hence, in the presence of adequate
nutrients, both are capable of repeated rounds of vegetative growth and mitosis.
However, in the presence of a poorly utilized carbon source such as acetate, and usually
in the absence of a nitrogen source, diploid strains switch to the alternative developmental
pathway of meiosis and spore formation. This process of sporulation gives rise to
structures termed 'asci'. Each single ascus contains four haploid ascospores (usually
referred to simply as 'spores'). Sporulation in diploid strains of S. cerevisiae has been
studied as a simple unicellular model of differentiation because it involves the co-
ordination of a complex sequence of genetic, biochemical and morphological events
(Fig. 2.6). The developmental switch occurs only in the Gl phase of the cell cycle, in
normal (a/a) diploids which are respiratorily complete. Hence, it requires the co-
ordination of signals about the environment, about the physiological and metabolic
YeasMorm growth
asymmetric,
asynchronous
Start (•>
"t
Start
S
f ^Q
<•>
Start
Pseudohyphal growth
symmetric,
synchronous
Slfiftr
s
G2 (
Gl M
\
}
3D
st^ t~gr~g>
G1
Hyphal growth
ayrnmB&ic r
asynchronous
I
]
:
io»o io m
•hT
Start
Is
!<
G2
i
M
Fig. 2.5 Cell cycles resulting in yeast-form cells, pseudohyphae and hyphae. In many respects the
cell cycle of pseudohyphal cells is similar to that of yeast-form cells, except that in pseudohyphae
G2 is prolonged, thus larger daughter cells are produced which are identical in size to the mother
cell. Hence, mother and daughter are both sufficiently large to start the next cell cycle and so bud
synchronously. In hyphae the apical cell becomes progressively longer. The diagram is reproduced
from the review of Kron & Gow (1995) with the permission of Current Opinion in Cell Biology.
40
Chapter 2
w
(d)
<5>
»
(e>
1
ft)
(I)
u>
',-:
osc
Fig. 2.6 The morphological events of sporulation in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. (a) starved cell: V,
vacuole; LG, lipid granule; ER, endoplasmic reticulum; CW, cell wall; M, mitochondrion; S, spindle
pole; SM, spindle microtubules; N, nucleus; NO, nucleolus, (b) Synaptonemal complex (SX) and
development ofpolycomplex body (PB) along with division of spindle pole body in (c). (d) First
meiotic division which is completed in (e). (f) Prepararation for meiosis II. (g) Enlargement of
prospore wall, culminating in enclosure of separate haploid nuclei (h). (i) Spore coat (SC) materials
produced and deposited, giving rise to the distinct outer spore coat (OSC) seen in the completed
spores of the mature ascus (j). Reproduced from the review by Dickinson (1988) with permission
from Blackwell Science Ltd.
status of the cell along with a way of monitoring the cell's ploidy and position in
the cell cycle. It is attractive for study because it involves meiosis, a relatively rare
event that occurs only in cells of specialized tissues in higher eukaryotes, and because
it allows the study of developmentally regulated gene expression. Transfer to the
sporulation pathway also involves a number of distinct metabolic switches (Dickinson
1988; Dickinson & Hewlins 1991). The whole process can be completed within 24
hours. The products of sporulation (haploid ascospores) have far greater resistance to
heat, solvents, dehydration, etc. than vegetative cells. If returned to good nutrient
conditions the spores will germinate and commence proliferation as free-living haploids.
This whole sequence of events forms the basis of conventional genetics and laboratory
strain construction in this yeast. Two haploids of opposite mating type each carrying
particular mutations are placed in close proximity to each other on the surface of an
agar medium. After mating and subsequent formation of the diploid, the cells can be
replica plated to a different medium to allow selection for the diploid and against the
parental haploids. ('Replica plating' involves making a replica of a group of cells which
Yeasts and moulds
41
are growing on one type of medium onto one, or more, different media. This is done by
pressing the agar surface of a Petri dish carrying cells onto a sheet of sterile velvet.
Subsequently, other, uninoculated, Petri dishes can receive doses of these cells by being
pressed onto the surface of the velvet). This is most simply arranged by ensuring that
each parental haploid has different auxotrophic requirements, hence the resultant diploid
will be able to grow on a minimal medium (due to complementation) whereas neither
of the parents can. After 1-3 days growth, the diploid will then be replica plated again
onto a sporulation medium. When the asci have formed, the individual spore progeny
can be separately grown as individual clones (a clone is a group of cells which are
genetically identical). This final step is accomplished by enzymatic digestion of the
ascus wall followed by micromanipulation of the individual spores (a process known
as 'dissection'). Due to the fact that meiotic recombination took place during sporulation,
the spores will have different combinations of mutations to those present in the original
parents. The precise combination of mutations in each spore can be determined by
analysing the phenotypes.
Metabolism and physiology
Sac char omyces cerevisiae is normally described as a faculative anaerobe which means
that it is able to proliferate under either anaerobic or aerobic conditions. It is able to
utilize a wide range of mono-, di- and oligosaccharides, ethanol, acetate, glycerol,
pyruvate and lactate. The favourite carbon source is glucose and the preferred mode of
metabolism is fermentative using the Embden-Meyerhof pathway (EMP) resulting in
the formation of ethanol. Many aspects of metabolism and physiology in this organism
(not merely carbon metabolism) are subject to catabolite repression which in most
cases means glucose repression. In the presence of glucose, synthesis of the enzymes
necessary for disaccharide (sucrose and maltose) or galactose utilization and for growth
on non-fermentable carbon sources (ethanol, acetate, glycerol, pyruvate and lactate) as
well as mitochondrial development are repressed. As the repressing substrate (glucose)
is consumed its concentration falls and the cells are said to become 'derepressed'; this
occurs typically at glucose concentrations below 0.2%. In other words, induction of
respiratory enzymes and components of the mitochondrial electron transport chain
occurs. This metabolic switch takes place late in the exponential phase of a batch
culture. As the cells pass through the deceleration phase and enter the stationary
phase they will be fully derepressed and will start to consume the ethanol that was
produced earlier. This requires the full participation of the tricarboxylic acid (TCA)
and glyoxylate cycles for the complete oxidation of ethanol to carbon dioxide and
water. Cells utilizing any of the non-fermentable carbon sources are also carrying out
gluconeogenesis. The glucose-6-phosphate produced as a result of this gluconeogenesis
is used both for the production of storage carbohydrate (trehalose) and for 'shuttling'
around the hexose monophosphate pathway (HMP) for synthesis of ribose which is
required for nucleotide (and hence ultimately nucleic acid) biosynthesis. The importance
of the glycolytic pathway to S. cerevisiae cannot be overstated. This is underlined by
the frequently quoted figure that the enzymes of glycolysis represent 30-65% (depending
upon physiological conditions) of soluble protein (Fraenkel 1982). The storage material
trehalose is produced in large quantities during sporulation (Dickinson et al. 1983). It
confers to the spore the ability to withstand dehydration. A wide range of organisms
in low water environments utilize trehalose for the same purpose including most
insects and the remarkable drought-resisting resurrection plant Selaginella lepidophylla
which can survive protracted desiccation until rains return (Leopold 1986). Trehalose
does this by preventing phase transitions within membranes (Crowe etal. 1984). The
compound is now added to a considerable number of laboratory products in order to
extend their shelf -life and its use in pharmaceutical and medical materials including
plasma, blood-based products, whole cells and tissues is under active investigation for
the same reason.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, an important constraint on this otherwise meta-
bolically flexible organism is the fact that proliferation under truly anaerobic conditions
(something that is very difficult to achieve in the laboratory) is not possible without the
provision of unsaturated fatty acid and sterol (Andreasen & Stier 1953, 1954). These
are required for the assembly of membranes. Naturally, mutants defective in fatty acid
or sterol biosynthesis have such requirements, but so do mutants with defects in
porphoryin biosynthesis due to the involvement of haematin in the synthesis of both
groups of compounds. Wild-type S. cerevisiae do not take up sterol under aerobic
conditions. It is possible to supply a limited range of alternative sterols instead of
the yeast's usual ergosterol. The ability of such an alternative sterol to support growth
of anaerobic S. cerevisiae is a way of assessing the structural specificity of sterol
requirement (Henry 1982). Some yeast sterol mutants were isolated as auxotrophs
requiring ergosterol whilst others were obtained on the basis of resistance to the polyene
antibiotic nystatin. Polyene antibiotics alter membrane permeability by interaction
with specific membrane sterols (Cass etal. 1970; Norman etal. 1972; see Chapter 8)
and seem not to inhibit lipid synthesis. Hence, mutants resistant to polyene antibiotics
have been useful in identifying the effects of altered sterol composition on different
membranes within the cell. This can be reflected in, for example, altered permeability
to a specific molecule or ion.
2.3 Cell wall
The cell wall of S. cerevisiae, like that of other fungi, is very strong. Despite its great
strength, one should remember that the cell wall is a dynamic structure (unlike a brick
wall). There are three major components:
1 an internal glucan layer,
2 the external layer of mannoproteins;
3 chitin which occupies various specialized locations.
Cell wall composition varies according to physiological conditions and developmental
status. For example, the wall of cells from stationary phase is much more resistant to
degradation by /3-glucanase than that from exponential phase cells (Necas 1971). The
glucan of S. cerevisiae is mainly j8(l-3)-linked glucoses with branching via /?(l-6)-
linked glucose units (Manners et al. 1973a, b). Most of the mannoproteins can only be
released after enzymatic degradation of the glucan layer. There are long «(l-6)-
mannose chains with a{\-2) and cu(l-3) side chains iV-linked to asparagine. There are
also short mannose chains O-linked to serine or threonine (Van Rinsum et al. 1991).
The carbohydrate chains of the mannoprotein layer are the main antigenic determinants
Yeasts and moulds 43
when S. cerevisiae is injected into laboratory mammals. Chitin is a /3(l-4-)-linked
polymer of jV-acetylglucosamine. It confers enormous mechanical strength. In S.
cerevisiae a ring of chitin is formed at the mother-bud junction (see Fig. 2.2). This ring
persists after cell separation and is referred to as the 'bud scar'. Chitin is readily stained
with the optical brightener Calcofluor White, and all of the bud scars on a cell can
easily be visualized. Thus, it is possible to determine both the 'age' of a cell (by counting
the number of bud scars) and the ploidy of the cell (by observing the pattern of bud
scars, because, as explained earlier, haploids and diploids have different patterns of
bud formation). Indeed, ageing research is also possible in this organism (Kennedy &
Guarente 1996). In spore walls, the outermost layers contain a special polymer which
is based upon dityrosine (Briza et al. 1990).
Candida albicans
Pharmaceutical and clinical significance
Candida albicans is a dimorphic organism which is part of the normal body flora of
humans. For the majority of normal healthy individuals it will never cause any problems.
However, in a number of settings it can cause severe disruption to lifestyle or even
death. In the USA it is now the third most frequent cause of nosocomial (hospital
acquired) infections. Post-operative infection arises typically where a patient has been
in intensive care for weeks and has undergone several cycles of bacterial infections
and high dose antibacterial therapy. In excess of 50% of deep-seated Candida infections
are lethal. Persons suffering from AIDS, transplant patients and other immuno-
compromised individuals are at even greater risk. The azole family of antifungal
compounds (see Chapter 5) is frequently deployed but several of these block the
metabolism of cyclosporins (which are administered for chronic immunosuppressive
therapy) and thereby increase immunosupressivity. A possible alternative antifungal
drug is amphotericin B, but this interacts with cyclosporins to give increased nephro-
toxicity. Catheterized patients can become infected with C. parapsilosis which causes
problems by virtue of its ability to form biofilm. In many apparently normal women,
C. albicans causes vaginal thrush which can be so extreme as to incapacitate. Some
denture-wearers and malnourished children can develop thrush in the mouth; in the
case of the latter this can extend to large portions of the face.
It would be reasonable to imagine that the cell wall would be a focus for attacking
this organism. In reality, whilst there have been studies of the biosynthesis of cell wall
materials, the precise molecular organization within the cell walls is largely unknown.
jS-glucans and chitin form a skeleton for the mannoproteins which are found both at the
outer surface and throughout the entire cell wall. By using wheat germ agglutinin it has
been shown that chitin is concentrated in the cross-walls between mother and daughter
cells, but is also distributed throughout the whole of the cell wall. It has not been
possible to examine the distribution of glucans using plant lectins because there is no
known lectin which reacts specifically with glucans. However, the use of a monoclonal
antibody that reacts with (l,6)-/5-glucan has enabled the linkages which connect (1,6)-
/3-glucan to mannoproteins and the distribution of (l,6)-/?-glucan in the cell walls to be
studied (Sanjuan et al. 1995). In S. cerevisiae, the synthesis of (l,6)-/3-glucan begins
early in the secretory pathway whereas in C. albicans it is apparently incorporated at a
later stage. In both yeasts, (l,6)-/3-glucan is located within an inner layer of the cell
wall which can be rendered accessible with tunicamycin.
In the yeast form, C. albicans could be confused with S. cerevisiae upon simple
microscopic inspection. However, major differences exist which would soon become
apparent even to one not familiar with yeast taxonomy. Candida albicans is diploid
and has no sexual cycle. This means that classical genetic methods like those described
for S. cerevisiae are not possible with this organism. Attempts to isolate mutants by the
use of mutagenic agents are almost bound to fail because of the improbability of
producing mutations in both copies of a given gene and nowhere else in the genome.
Naturally occurring mutants do, of course, exist. The more recent developments of
molecular genetics are now being applied to Candida, but the reader should not conclude
that this organism is understood to anything like the extent of S. cerevisiae. The isolation
of C. albicans genes homologous to those in S. cerevisiae by means of complementation
of S. cerevisiae mutants has been particularly useful as have techniques such as 'Ura
blasting' in which first one copy of a given Candida gene is disrupted with the coding
sequence of the URA 3 gene and then the second copy is treated likewise. This process
can be applied sequentially to produce a strain with defined mutations in known genes
(Gowetal. 1993).
3.2 Alternative morphologies
One spectacular difference between S. cerevisiae and C. albicans is the ability of the
latter to switch to a hyphal pattern of proliferation (Gow 1994). A variety of different
factors and conditions have been described which can elicit this switch. These include
serum, neutral pH, certain temperature profiles, the addition of yV-acetylglucosamine
and many more (Odds 1988). In germ tube formation, a protuberance develops from
the cell and thereafter growth remains highly polarized (Fig. 2.7). The cell which
forms the tip of the developing germ tube remains polarized throughout the cell cycle.
It must be emphasized that this is hyphal growth where cell division is symmetric,
but in contrast to pseudohyphal development (where the next cell cycle is started
synchronously), in this case growth is asynchronous with the result that the apical cell
becomes progressively longer (see Fig. 2.5). It has not been shown that the virulence or
pathogenicity of C. albicans are uniquely due to either the yeast or hyphal form.
Nonetheless, the ability to be able to interconvert between the distinct morphologies
must surely be to its advantage. The hyphal form is considered to be specialized for
foraging (Kron & Gow 1995). Even if this is not the correct conclusion, it certainly
conveys the ability to penetrate tissue, whilst the yeast form would seem to be more
effective for dispersal, e.g. through the blood system. One of the justifications for
studying morphological switching in C. albicans is that this may reveal a unique target
for therapy or prophylaxis.
Another form of switching is well-known in C. albicans. This is the phenomenon
of 'phenotypic switching' (Soil 1992) whereby colony morphologies vary dramatically
(e.g. white, opaque, fuzzy, wrinkled.) These may seem trivial to the pharmacist or
physician, but the variability extends far beyond the mere appearance of the colonies.
It can encompass a vast array of biochemical alterations, antigenicities and drug
Yeasts and moulds 45
,0
D
6
i * >
}
i*i*: *
Fig. 2.7 Germ tube formation by
Candida albicans. For simplicity
the diagram merely illustrates the
nuclear content of the parental
yeast cell and the developing
germ tube. In real life there is a
complex rearrangement of
cytoplasmic constituents which
results in all parts except the
apex becoming highly
vacuolated.
sensitivities. Furthermore, it is documented that patients who have suffered from repeated
vaginal candidosis have yielded the same strain which has presented an alternative
phenotype on each occasion (Soil et al. 1989). Thus, this phenomenon seems to represent
a mechanism which has evolved to enable C. albicans to escape destruction by the
immune system. Phenotypic switching is so-called because it has been assumed that a
mutational event could not be responsible due to the high frequencies (up to 10%)
.0.
M
0°
Fig. 2.8 Mating type switching in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. The founder cell (F) is a virgin (i.e. has
not formed a bud previously), carries the HO gene and is mating type a. After the first cell cycle there
will be the mother cell (M) and the daughter (D), both of which are mating type a. Mother cells which
carry HO are able to switch mating type whilst in the Gl phase of the cell cycle. Assuming that M
switches to mating type a, the progeny which result from M (a mother and a daughter) will thus both
be mating type a. Daughters cannot switch mating type, hence D will produce two cells of mating
type a. Note that two of the cells present at the four cell stage are mothers and hence capable of
switching mating type before entering the next budding cycle.
46 Chapter 2
observed. However, there clearly has to be a genetic basis to such variation. In S.
cerevisiae, mating type switching can occur (Herskowitz et al 1992) due to the presence
of the HO gene. This gene confers on a haploid strain of either mating type the ability
to switch to the opposite mating type. The opportunity to switch is only available to
mother cells which are in the Gl phase of the cell cycle. Thus, it is quite easy to calculate
that a single cell that was (say) mating type a could give rise after two complete cell
cycles to a colony that comprised two cells of mating type a and two of mating type a
(Fig. 2.8.) Hence, one could say that mating type switching in S. cerevisiae has a
frequency of approximately 50% in appropriate strains, i.e. even higher than the
frequency of phenotypic switching in C. albicans. The molecular basis of phenopic
switching remains unclear at the time of writing.
Cryptococcus neoformans
Cryptococcus neoformans is an encapsulated yeast which causes cryptococcosis, a
subacute or chronic infection of the central nervous system. In extreme cases, tissue
damage can also occur in the skin, bones and internal organs. Cryptococcal meningitis
is very frequent in AIDS patients. Despite this, it is not a newly discovered organism
and its pathogenic capabilities have been known for many years. For example, in 1955
it was known that Cr. neoformans was the causative agent in 10% of all fatal human
mycoses in the USA (Emmons 1955). It does not form a pseudomycelium, neither does
it develop hyphae. Surely this yeast provides adequate proof that neither is necessary
to be pathogenic to any warm-blooded animal! The yeast cells are almost spherical and
in conditions of high osmolality they produce a much reduced capsule, such that the
overall size is less than 5fm\ in diameter. This renders them small enough to remain as
dust in the atmosphere and be inhaled. This is reckoned to be the route of all infections.
The yeast is inhaled and carried to the alveoli of the lungs. When in the warm, moist
alveoli, the yeast cells regenerate their thick capsules with the consequent release of
polysaccharides and glycoproteins into the host's bloodstream, both of which serve as
virulence factors (Murphy 1996). The capsule products cause neutrophils to lose their
surface L-selectin, which is required for leukocytes to attach to endothelial cells before
moving from the blood system to the tissues. Since the leukocytes are not sent to the
site of infection in the tissue, the yeast escapes. The immune system is further confused
by yeast cell products in the bloodstream due to the induction of suppressor T
lymphocytes which attenuate immune responses. It is believed that the release of melanin
from the yeast also helps it to evade the immune system. Melanin is thought to act as an
antioxidant which thereby protects cryptococci from oxidative killing. With such an
armoury of virulence, the reader will appreciate why rapid identification of this organism
is so important.
Neurospora crassa
Neurospora crassa is a filamentous pink mould. It became famous to scientists due to
the work of Beadle and Tatum in the 1940s when they developed the 'one gene — one
enzyme' hypothesis. Its life cycle is shown in Fig. 2.9. Unfortunately, the full force of
fungal nomenclature comes into play when considering this organism. Aerial hyphae
Yeasts and moulds 47
Macrotonidlum
Ascus
O
Diploid
Perlthecijrn
Myc&llum
Pratoperilliaelum
Trichogyne
Dlfcaryotic cell
Ascog&nojs
hyp ha.
Mslosis
Karyogamy
Fig. 2.9 The life cycle of Neurospora crassa. The figure illustrates both the asexual cycle via
macroconidia and the sexual cycle. In the case of the latter, the diagram represents the
interaction between a male of mating type A and a female of mating type a. The trichogyne
grows towards the male. There is fusion, one male nucleus enters and pairs with a female nucleus.
Rounds of synchronous nuclear divisions result in dikaryotic (i.e. containing two nuclei)
cells. Karyogamy produces a true diploid which immediately undergoes meiosis and
ascosporogenesis. The cycle is completed by germination of the individual ascospores to found fresh
mycelia.
from the heterokaryotic (i.e. containing many separate nuclei) vegetative mycelium
produce either macroconidia or microconidia. The macroconidia contain several nuclei
and re-establish vegetative mycelium when they germinate. Each microconidium is
uninucleate; their role in the life cycle is to fuse with the trichogyne (a specialized
hypha of opposite mating type.) The trichogyne is carried on the protoperithecium,
which, as its name suggests, is the precursor to the perithecium (fruiting body). Inside
the perithecium, nuclear fusion takes place, followed by meiosis and further differen-
tiation to produce an ascus containing eight ascospores. When the ascospores germinate,
they produce haploid mycelia which can form heterokaryons by means of hyphal fusions
with mycelia of the opposite mating type.
It is instructive to consider the similarities and differences in the life cycle of
S. cerevisiae and N. crassa. Disregarding the obvious difference that the former is a
yeast whilst the latter is a mould, it should be noted that both fungi have a vegetative
haplophase. The diplophase of S. cerevisiae can proliferate, whereas mN. crassa the
diploid rapidly undergoes meiosis and ascospore formation. Both organisms can exist
in one of two mating types, each of which is controlled by a single genetic locus.
Neurospora crassa has truly male and female thalli (singular, thallus, is the vegetative
body of a fungus) which are morphologically distinct. Neurospora crassa is an obligate
aerobe, hence, elimination of oxygen will prevent its growth.
Pen ici Ilium and Aspergillus
The scientifically informed layperson is aware that Penicillium species are associated
with a number of beneficial products. These include the important antibiotic penicillin
(originally from P. notatum, but which soon came to be prepared from P. chrysogenum
because this species produces more: see Chapters 5 and 7), and the ripening of Stilton,
Roquefort and Camembert cheeses with strains of P. roquefortii (blue vein cheeses)
and P. camembertii (surface-ripened cheeses). However, many more would be surprised
to learn that today's commercial penicillin-producing strains all derive from an organism
which was originally isolated from a rotting Canteloupe melon. This fact emphasizes
the real ecological place of such moulds where, of course, decomposition of fruits and
vegetables is an essential part of the recycling of materials in the biosphere. Life could
not continue on our planet in the absence of decomposer organisms.
A less desirable characteristic of many moulds is the production of mycotoxins.
One group of mycotoxins, the aflatoxins, which are derived from decaketides, are a
particular cause for concern. Aflatoxin Bj is carcinogenic in animals and mammalian
cell lines in tissue culture. It has been linked to specific mutations in the human
tumour suppressor gene p5 3 thus causing primary hepatocellular carcinoma. Hence,
contamination by aflatoxins of food, feed, and medical, veterinary, pharmaceutical and
laboratory preparations has serious health and economic consequences. Aspergillus
parasiticus mdA.flavus are notorious as producers of aflatoxins. As with other species
of Aspergillus, they are very widespread in the environment and, aided by their rapid
growth on a variety of substrates, they are commonly found as contaminants of all
sorts of materials. Members of the genus can give rise to a group of diseases known
collectively as aspergilloses. These includes allergies, toxicoses, tissue invasion and
local colonization. Aspergillus fumigatus is the most common cause of aspergillosis.
Not all members of the genus are wholly bad. Aspergillus oryzae has been used for
centuries in the production of soy sauce. Although this is of little consequence in the
West, the underlying technology became the foundation of the Japanese amino acid
and nucleotide business which have worldwide economic importance.
It appears that the various strains of Penicillium used in cheese production do not
produce any such toxins. Presumably this is an example of selection acting on the early
human cheese-makers: the folk who produced cheese which contained mycotoxins ate
their own cheese and died. Hence, they did not hand on their skills and strains of mould
to subsequent generations! Microbiological contamination by wild moulds always carries
the possibility of chemical contamination with their toxins, so we should not think of
Penicillium species as being of universal benefit to humankind. Indeed, direct infections
by Penicillium species have been reported to various parts of the human body including
the cornea, ear, respiratory tract, urinary tract and heart (following the surgical insertion
of artificial valves: Kwon-Chung & Bennett 1992).
Penicillium has no sexual cycle. The organisms merely produce conidia (asexually
produced spores) which are readily dispersed by slight draughts (Fig. 2. 10). New growth
can commence after landing on a suitable substrate. The brush-like appearance is typical
Yeasts and moulds 49
Conidla
Fig. 2.10 A typical Penicillium.
(Fig. 2.10). The organism Penicillium marneffei is said to be thermally dimorphic: at
25-30°C it produces colonies like any other of the genus. At 35-37°C it is yeast-like
(Larone 1995). It is endemic in South-East Asia and is reported as causing deep-seated
infections in both immunocompromised and normal individuals who have visited those
parts. The wider significance of this to fungal biology and especially to the taxonomy
of Penicillium species remains to be established, but the importance to human health is
already clear.
Epidermophy ton, Microsporum and Trichophyton
All three of these are dermatophytes, i.e. filamentous fungi which can utilize keratin
for their nutrition. Keratin is the chief protein in skin, hair and nail. Hence, all of these
organisms are responsible for superficial mycoses in mammals. It is often stated that
dermatophytes are the only fungi to have evolved which rely upon infection for their
own survival. This mistaken belief results from a view which is too human-centred and
neglects, for example, the presence of symbiotic fungi in the stomachs of ruminants.
The genus Microsporum contains several interesting species including M. audouinii,
which, in years gone by, caused epidemics of 'ringworm' in children, but rarely in
adults: M.ferrugineum appears to fulfil this role today; M. canis which infects children,
cats and dogs, but not adults — it is said that the children acquire the infection from
the animals; M. gypseum affects mainly lower animals; M. gallinae infects poultry and
humans; M. nanum can be common in pigs, but is rare in humans. The appearance of a
tinea ('ringworm') is the host's reaction to the proteolytic (protein degrading) enzymes
secreted by the fungus. In highly sensitized or hyper-allergic individuals this can be
very pronounced.
Epidermophyton floccosum infects the skin and nails but not the hair, whereas
different species of the genus Trichophyton display both geographical and anatomical
variations. For example, T. rub rum is currently the most common dermatophyte of
humans: it infects skin and nails but almost never hairy parts of the body; T.
mentagrophytes, which is frequently the cause of athlete's foot, can infect all parts of
the human body; the aptly-named T. tonsurans is the major causative agent of scalp
ringworm in the USA whereas T. megninii is hardly ever found in the Western world.
These varied distributions presumably reflect a complex matrix of variables including
climate, nutrition, age, physiological status, the proximity of animals and other aspects
of human lifestyle.
Certain identification of each individual dermatophyte requires great skill especially
in the case of Micros porum where there is considerable morphological similarity between
the species: hyphae are septate with numerous macroconidia which are thick- walled
and rough in most cases. Microconidia are usually present. Epidermophyton is broadly
similar except that microconidia are not formed. Distinguishing individual species
of Trichophyton from each other is less problematical, although an unwary observer
might confuse T. mentagrophytes with T. rubrum. Generally, in Trichophyton species,
macroconidia are rare, thin-walled and smooth; there are numerous microconidia.
Clearly, although these organisms only cause superficial infections, a rapid, genetic-
based identification system would be a boon.
8 References
Andreasen A.A. & Stier J.B. (1953) Anaerobic nutrition of Saccharomyces cerevisiae. I. Ergosterol
requirement for growth in a defined medium. / Cell Comp Physiol, 41, 23-36.
Andreasen A. A. & Stier J.B. (1954) Anaerobic nutrition of Saccharomyces cerevisiae. II. Unsaturated
fatty acid requirement for growth in a defined medium. J Cell Comp Physiol, 43, 271-281.
Briza P., Ellinger A., Winkler G. & Breitenbach M. (1990) Characterization of a D, L-dityrosine-containing
macromolecule from yeast ascospore walls. J Biol Chem, 265, 151 18-15123.
Cass A., Finklestein A. & Krespi V. (1970) The ion permeability induced in thin lipid membranes by
the polyene antibiotics nystatin and amphotericin B. J Gen Physiol, 56, 100-124.
Crowe J.H., Crowe L.M. & Chapman D. (1984) Preservation of membranes in anydrobiotic organisms:
the role of trehalose. Science, 223, 701-703.
Dickinson J.R. (1988) The metabolism of sporulation in yeast. Microbiol Sci, 5, 121-123.
Dickinson J.R. (1996) 'Fusel' alcohols induce hyphal-like extensions and pseudohyphal formation in
yeasts. Microbiology, 142, 1391-1 397 .
Dickinson J.R. & Hewlins M.J.E. (1991) C NMR analysis of a developmental pathway mutation in
Saccharomyces cerevisiae reveals a cell derepressed for succinate dehydrogenase. J Gen Microbiol,
137, 1033-1037.
Dickinson J.R., Dawes I.W., Boyd A.S.F. & Baxter R.L. (1983) l3 C NMR studies of acetate metabolism
during sporulation of Saccharomyces cerevisiae. P roc Nat Acad Sci USA, 80, 5847-5851.
Emmons C.W. (1955) Saprophytic sources of Cryptococcus neoformans associated with the pigeon.
Am J Hygiene, 62, 227-232.
Fraenkel D.G. (1982) Carbohydrate metabolism. In: The Molecular Biology of the Yeast Saccharomyces,
vol. 2. Metabolism and Biosynthesis (eds J.N. Strathern, E.W. Jones & J.R. Broach), pp. 1-37. Cold
Spring Harbor, NY: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.
Friefelder D.M. (1960) Bud formation in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. J Bacteriol, 80, 567-568.
Gimeno C.J., Ljungdahl P.O., Styles C.A. & Fink G.R. (1992) Unipolar cell divisions in the yeast
S. cerevisiae lead to filamentous growth: regulation by starvation and RAS. Cell, 68, 1077-1090.
Gow N.A.R. (1994) Growth and guidance of the fungal hypha. Microbiology, 140, 3139-3205.
Gow N.A.R., Swoboda R.K., Bertram G., Gooday G.W. & Brown A.J.P. (1993) Key genes in the
regulation of dimorphism of Candida albicans. In: Dimorphic Fungi (eds H. Vanden Bossche, F.C.
Odds & D. Kerridge), pp. 61-71. New York: Plenum Press.
Hartwell L.H. (1974) Saccharomyces cerevisiae cell cycle. Bacteriol Rev, 38, 164-198.
Hartwell L.H. (1978) Cell division from a genetic perspective. J Cell Biol, 77, 627-637.
Yeasts and moulds 5 1
Henry S.A. (1982) Membrane lipids of yeast: biochemical and genetic studies. In: The Molecular
Biology of the Yeast Saccharomyces, vol. 2. Metabolism and Biosynthesis (eds J.N. Strathern, E.W.
Jones & J.R. Broach), pp. 101-158. Cold Spring Harbor, NY: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.
Herskowitz I., Rine J. & Strathern J.N. (1992) Mating-type determination and mating-type inter-
conversion in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. In: The Molecular and Cellular Biology of the Yeast
Saccharomyces cerevisiae. vol. 2, Gene Expression (eds E.W. Jones, J.R. Pringle & J.R. Broach),
pp. 583-656. Cold Spring Harbor, NY: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.
Kennedy B.K. & Guarente L. (1996) Genetic analysis of aging in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. Trends
Genet, 12, 355-359.
Kron S.J. & Gow N.A.R. (1995) Budding yeast morphogenesis: signalling, cytoskeleton and cell cycle.
CurrOpin Cell Biol, 7, 845-855.
Kron S.J., Styles C.A. & Fink G.R. (1994) Symmetric cell division in pseudohyphae of the yeast
Saccharomyces cerevisiae. MolBiol Cell, 5, 1003-1022.
Kuriyama H. & Slaughter J.C. (1995) Control of cell morphology of the yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae
by nutrient limitation in continuous culture. LettAppl Microbiol, 20, 37-40.
Kwon-Chung K.J. & Bennett J.E. (1992) Medical Mycology. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger.
Larone D.H. (1995) Medically Important Fungi: A Guide to Identification, 3rd edn. Washington:
American Society for Microbiology.
Lew D.J. & Reed S.l. (1995) Cell cycle control of morphogenesis in budding yeast. Curr Opin Genet
Dev, 5, 17-23.
Leopold A. C. (1986) Membranes, Metabolism and Dry Organisms. Ithaca: Cornell University Press.
Manners D.J., Masson A.J. & Patterson J.C. (1973a) The structure of a j8-(l-3)-D-glucan from yeast cell
walls. BiochemJ, 135, 19-30.
Manners D.J., Masson A.J., Patterson J.C, Bjorndal H. & Lindberg B. (1973b) The structure of a /J-(l-
6)-D-glucan from yeast cell walls. Biochem J, 135, 31-36.
Murphy J.W. (1996) Slick ways Cryptococcus neoformans foils host defences. Am Soc Microbiol News,
62, 77-80.
Necas O. (1971) Cell wall synthesis in yeast protoplasts. Bacteriol Rev, 35, 149-170.
Norman A.W, Demel R.A., DeKruyff B., Geurts Van Kessel W.S.M. & Van Deenen L.L.M. (1972)
Studies on the biological properties of polyene antibiotics: comparison of the other polyenes with
filipin in their ability to interact specifically with sterol. Biochim Biophys Acta, 290, 1-14.
Odds EC. (1988) Candida and Candidos is. London: Balliere Tindall.
Pringle J.R. (1978) The use of conditional lethal cell cycle mutants for temporal and functional sequence
mapping of cell cycle events. J Cell Physiol, 95, 393-406.
Pringle J.R. & Hartwell L.H. (1981) The Saccharomyces cerevisiae cell cycle. In: The Molecular Biology
of the Yeast Saccharomyces, vol. 1. Life Cycle and Inheritance (eds J.N. Strathern, E.W. Jones &
J.R. Broach), pp. 97-142. Cold Spring Harbor, NY: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.
Soil D.R. (1992) High frequency switching in Candida albicans. Clin Microbiol Rev, 5, 183-203.
Sanjuan R., Zueco J., Stock R., Font de Mora J. & Sentandreu R. (1995) Identification of glucan-
mannoprotein complexes in the cell wall of Candida albicans using a monoclonal antibody that
reacts with a (l,6)-/3-glucan epitope. Microbiology, 141, 1545-1551.
Soil D.R., Galask R., Isley S. etal. (1989) Switching of Candida albicans during recurrent episodes of
recurrent vaginitis. J Clin Microbiol, 27, 681-690.
Van Rinsum J., Klis EM. & van den Ende H. (1991) Cell wall glucomannoproteins of Saccharomyces
cerevisiae mnn9. Yeast, 7, 717-726.
Wright R.M., Repine T. & Repine J.E. (1993) Reversible pseudohyphal growth in haploid Saccharomyces
cerevisiae is an aerobic process. Curr Genet, 23, 388-391.
Viruses
1
Introduction
2
General properties of viruses
2.1
Size
2.2
Nucleic acid content
2.3
Metabolic capabilities
3
Structure of viruses
3.1
Helical symmetry
3.2
Icosahedral symmetry
4
The effect of chemical and physical
agents on viruses
5 Virus-host-cell interactions
6 Bacteriophages
6.1 The lytic growth cycle
6.2 Lysogeny
6.3 Epidemiological uses
7 Human viruses
7.1 Cultivation of human viruses
7.1.1 Cell culture
7.1.2 The chick embryo
7.1.3 Animal inoculation
8 Multiplication of human viruses
8.1 Attachment
8.2 Penetration and uncoating
8.3 Production of viral proteins and
replication of viral nucleic acid
8.4 Assembly and release of progeny
The problems of viral chemotherapy
9.1 Interferon
10 Tumour viruses
11 The human immunodeficiency virus
12 Prions
13 Further reading
Introduction
Following the demonstration by Koch and his colleagues that anthrax, tuberculosis
and diphtheria were caused by bacteria, it was thought that similar organisms
would, in time, be shown to be responsible for all infectious diseases. It gradually
became obvious, however, that for a number of important diseases no such bacterial
cause could be established. Infectious material from a case of rabies, for example,
could be passed through special filters which held back all particles of bacterial
size, and the resulting bacteria-free filtrate still proved to be capable of inducing
rabies when inoculated into a susceptible animal. The term virus had, up until
this time, been used quite indiscriminately to describe any agent capable of
producing disease, so these filter-passing agents were originally called filterable viruses.
With the passage of time the description 'filterable' has been dropped and the name
virus has come to refer specifically to what are now known to be a distinctive
group of microorganisms different in structure and method of replication from
all others.
General properties of viruses
All forms of life — animal, plant and even bacterial — are susceptible to infection by
Viruses 53
viruses. Three main properties distinguish viruses from their various host cells: size,
nucleic acid content and metabolic capabilities.
Size
Whereas abacterial cell like a staphylococcus might be lOOOnm in diameter, the largest
of the human pathogenic viruses, the poxviruses, measure only 250 nm along their
longest axis, and the smallest, the poliovirus, is only 28 nm in diameter. They are mostly,
therefore, beyond the limit of resolution of the light microscope and have to be visualized
with the electron microscope.
Nucleic acid content
Viruses contain only a single type of nucleic acid, either DNA or RNA.
Metabolic capabilities
Virus particles have no metabolic machinery of their own. They cannot synthesize
their own protein and nucleic acid from inanimate laboratory media and thus fail to
grow on even nutritious media. They are obligatory intracellular parasites, only growing
within other living cells whose energy and protein-producing systems they redirect for
the purpose of manufacturing new viral components. The production of new virus
particles generally results in death of the host cell and as the particles spread from cell
to cell (e.g. within a tissue), disease can become apparent in the host.
Structure of viruses
In essence, virus particles are composed of a core of genetic material, either DNA or
RNA, surrounded by a coat of protein. The function of the coat is to protect the viral
genes from inactivation by adverse environmental factors, such as tissue nuclease
enzymes which would otherwise digest a naked viral chromosome during its passage
from cell to cell within a host. In a number of viruses the coat also plays an important
part in the attachment of the virus to receptors on susceptible cells, and in many bacterial
viruses the coat is further modified to facilitate the insertion of the viral genome through
the tough structural barrier of the bacterial cell wall. The morphology of a variety of
viruses is illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
The viral protein coat, or capsid, is composed of a large number of subunits, the
capsomeres. This subunit structure is a fundamental property and is important from a
number of aspects.
1 It leads to considerable economy of genetic information. This can be illustrated by
considering some of the smaller viruses, which might, for example, have as a genome
a single strand of RNA composed of about 3000 nucleotides and a protein coat with an
overall composition of some 20000 amino acid units. Assuming that one amino acid is
coded for by a triplet of nucleotides, such a coat in the form of a single large protein
would require a gene some 60000 nucleotides in length. If, however, the viral coat
comprised repeating units each composed of about 100 amino acids, only a section of
-f 1 |xrn •
Fig. 3.1 The morphology of a variety of virus particles. The large circle indicates the relative size of
a staphylococcus cell.
about 300 nucleotides long would be required to specify the capsid protein, leaving
genetic capacity for other essential functions.
2 Such a subunit structure permits the construction of the virus particles by a process
in which the subunits self-assemble into structures held together by non-covalent
intermolecular forces as occurs in the process of crystallization. This eliminates the
need for a sequence of enzyme-catalysed reactions for coat synthesis. It also provides
an automatic quality-control system, as subunits which may have major structural defects
fail to become incorporated into complete particles.
3 The subunit composition is such that the intracellular release of the viral genome
from its coat involves only the dissociation of non-covalently bonded subunits, rather
than the degradation of an integral protein sheath.
In addition to the protein coat, many animal virus particles are surrounded by a
lipoprotein envelope which has generally been derived from the cytoplasmic membrane
of their last host cell.
Viruses
55
An icosahedral virus
particle composed of
252 capsomeres
240 being hexons and
12 being pentons
A helical virus partially
disrupted to show the
helical coil of viral
nucleic acid embedded
in the capsomeres
Fig. 3.2 Icosahedral and helical
symmetry in viruses.
The geometry of the capsomeres results in their assembly into particles exhibiting
one of two different architectural styles — helical or icosahedral symmetry (Fig. 3.2).
There is a third structural group comprising the poxviruses and many bacterial
viruses, in which a number of major structural components can be identified and the
overall geometry of the particles is complex.
Helical symmetry
Some virus particles have their protein subunits symmetrically packed in a helical
array, forming hollow cylinders. The tobacco mosaic virus (TMV) is the classic
example. X-ray diffraction data and electron micrographs have revealed that 16 subunits
per turn of the helix project from a central axial hole that runs the length of the
particle. The nucleic acid does not lie in this hole, but is embedded into ridges on the
inside of each subunit and describes its own helix from one end of the particle to the
other.
Helical symmetry was thought at one time to exist only in plant viruses. It is now
known, however, to occur in a number of animal virus particles. The influenza and
mumps viruses, for example, which were first seen in early electron micrographs as
roughly spherical particles, have now been observed as enveloped particles; within the
envelope, the capsids themselves are helically symmetrical and appear similar to the
rods of TMV, except that they are more flexible and are wound like coils of rope in the
centre of the particle.
Icosahedral symmetry
The viruses in this architectural group have their capsomeres arranged in the form of
regular icosahedra, i.e. polygons having 12 vertices, 20 faces and 30 sides. At each of
the 12 vertices or corners of these icosahedral particles is a capsomere, called apenton,
which is surrounded by five neighbouring units. Each of the 20 triangular faces contains
an identical number of capsomeres which are surrounded by six neighbours and called
hexons. In plant and bacterial viruses exhibiting this type of symmetry, the hexons
and pentons are composed of the same polypeptide chains; in animal viruses, however,
they may be distinct proteins. The number of hexons per capsid varies considerably
in different viruses. Adenovirus, for example, is constructed from 240 hexons and 12
pentons, while the much smaller poliovirus is composed of 20 hexons and 12 pentons.
The effect of chemical and physical agents on viruses
Heat is the most reliable method of virus disinfection. Most human pathogenic viruses
are inactivated following exposure at 60°C for 30 minutes. The virus of serum hepatitis
can, however, survive this temperature for up to 4 hours. Viruses are stable at low tem-
peratures and are routinely stored at -40 to -70 °C. Some viruses are rapidly inactivated
by drying, others survive well in a desiccated state. Ultraviolet light inactivates viruses
by damaging their nucleic acid and has been used to prepare viral vaccines. These facts
must be taken into account in the storage and preparation of viral vaccines (Chapter 15).
Viruses that contain lipid are inactivated by organic solvents such as chloroform
and ether. Those without lipid are resistant to these agents. This distinction has been
used to classify viruses. Many of the chemical disinfectants used against bacteria, e.g.
phenols, alcohols and quaternary ammonium compounds (Chapter 10), have minimal
virucidal activity. The most generally active agents are chlorine, the hypochlorites,
iodine, aldehydes and ethylene oxide.
Virus-host-cell interactions
The precise sequence of events resulting from the infection of a cell by a virus will
vary with different virus-host systems, but they will be variations of four basic themes.
1 Multiplication of the virus and destruction of the host cell.
2 Elimination of the virus from the cell and the infection aborted without a recognizable
effect on the cells occurring.
3 Survival of the infected cell unchanged, except that it now carries the virus in a
latent state.
4 Survival of the infected cell in a dramatically altered or transformed state, e.g.
transformation of a normal cell to one having the properties of a cancerous cell.
Bacteriophages
Bacteriophages, or as they are more simply termed, phages, are viruses that have bacteria
as their host cells. The name was first given by D'Herelle to an agent which he found
could produce lysis of the dysentery bacillus Shigella shiga. D'Herelle was convinced
Viruses 57
that he had stumbled across an agent with tremendous medical potential. His phage
could destroy Sh. shiga in broth culture so why not in the dysenteric gut of humans?
Similar agents were found before long which were active against the bacteria of many
other diseases, including anthrax, scarlet fever, cholera and diphtheria, and attempts
were made to use them to treat these diseases. It was a great disappointment, however,
that phages so virulent in their antibacterial activity in vitro proved impotent in vivo. A
possible exception was cholera, where some success seems to have been achieved, and
cholera phages were apparently used by the medical corps of the German and Japanese
armies during the Second World War to treat this disease. Since the development of
antibiotics, however, phage therapy has been abandoned.
Interest in bacterial viruses did not cease with the demise of phage therapy. They
proved to be very much easier to handle in the laboratory than other viruses and had
conveniently rapid multiplication cycles. They have, therefore, been used extensively
as the experimental models for elucidating the biochemical mechanisms of viral
replication. A vast amount of information has been collected about them and many
of the important advances in molecular biology, such as the discovery of messenger
RNA (mRNA), the understanding of the genetic code and the way in which genes are
controlled, have come from work on phage-bacterium systems.
It is probable that all species of bacteria are susceptible to phages. Any particular
phage will exhibit a marked specificity in selecting host cells, attacking only organisms
belonging to a single species. A Staphylococcus aureus phage, for example, will not
infect Staph, epidermidis cells. In most cases, phages are in fact strain-specific, only
being active on certain characteristic strains of a given species.
Most phages are tadpole-shaped structures with heads which function as containers
for the nucleic acid and tails which are used to attach the virus to its host cell. There
are, however, some simple icosahedral phages and others that are helically symmetrical
cylinders. The dimensions of the phage heads vary from the large T-even group (Fig.
3.3) of Escherichia coli phages (60 x 90 nm) to the much smaller ones (30 x 30nm) of
certain Bacillus phages. The tails vary in length from 15 to 200 nm and can be quite
Haad
containing
DMA
100 nm
Extended'; r
Empty haad
tai-l
sheath C^l
Cantr*c-t*d
Tail
spikas
i
EapqEed tail Bftra
DNA
Before
After
Fig. 3.3 T-even phage structure before and after tail contraction.
complex structures (Fig. 3.3). While the majority of phages have double- stranded DNA
as their genetic material, some of the very small icosahedral and the helical phages
have single-stranded DNA or RNA.
On the basis of the response they produce in their host cells, phages can be classified
as virulent or temperate. Infection of a sensitive bacterium with a virulent phage results
in the replication of the virus, lysis of the cell and release of new infectious progeny
phage particles. Temperate phages can produce this lytic response, but they are also
capable of a symbiotic response in which the invading viral genome does not take over
the direction of cellular activity, the cell survives the infection and the viral nucleic
acid becomes incorporated into the bacterial chromosome, where it is termed prophage.
Cells carrying viral genes in this way are referred to as ly so genie.
6.1 The lytic growth cycle
The replication of virulent phage was initially studied using the T-even-numbered
(T 2 , T 4 and T 6 ) phages of E. coll These phages adsorb, by their long tail fibres, on
to specific receptors on the surface of the bacterial cell wall. The base plate of the
tail sheath and its pins then lock the phage into position on the outside of the cell. At
this stage, the tail sheath contracts towards the head, while the base plate remains in
contact with the cell wall and, as a result, the hollow tail core is exposed and driven
through to the cytoplasmic membrane (Fig. 3.3). Simultaneously, the DNA passes from
the head, through the hollow tail core and is deposited on the outer surface of the
cytoplasmic membrane, from where it finds its own way into the cytoplasm. The
phage protein coat remains on the outside of the cell and plays no further part in the
replication cycle.
Within the first few minutes after infection, transcription of part of the viral genome
produces 'early' mRNA molecules, which are translated into a set of 'early' proteins.
These serve to switch off host-cell macromolecular synthesis, degrade the host DNA
and start to make components for viral DNA. Many of the early proteins duplicate
enzymes already present in the host, concerned in the manufacture of nucleotides for
cell DNA. However, the requirement for the production of 5-hydroxymethylcytosine-
containing nucleotides, which replace the normal cytosine derivatives in T-even phage
DNA, means that some of the early enzymes are entirely new to the cell. With the
build-up of its components, the viral DNA replicates and also starts to produce a batch
of 'late' mRNA molecules, transcribed from genes which specify the proteins of the
phage coat. These late messages are translated into the subunits of the capsid structures,
which condense to form phage heads, tails and tail fibres, and then together with viral
DNA are assembled into complete infectious particles. The enzyme digesting the cell
wall, lysozyme, is also produced in the cell at this stage and it eventually brings about the
lysis of the cell and liberation of about 100 progeny viruses, some 25 minutes after infection.
As other phage systems have been studied, it has become clear that the T-even
model of virulent phage replication is atypical in a number of respects. The large T-
even genomes, with their coding capacity for about 200 proteins, give these phages a
relatively high degree of independence from their hosts. Although relying on the host
energy and protein-synthesizing systems they are capable of specifying a battery of
their own enzymes. Most other phages have considerably smaller genomes. They tend
Viruses 59
Fig. 3.4 Plaques formed by a phage on a plate seeded with Bacillus subtilis.
to disturb the host-cell metabolism to a much lesser extent than the T-even viruses, and
also rely to a greater degree on pre-existing cell enzymes to produce components for
their nucleic acid.
The lytic activity of the virulent phages can be demonstrated by mixing phage
with about 10 7 sensitive indicator bacteria in 5 ml of molten nutrient agar. The
mixture is then poured over the surface of a solid nutrient agar plate. On incubation,
the phage particles will infect bacteria in their immediate neighbourhood, lysing
them and producing a burst of progeny viruses. These particles then infect bacteria
in the vicinity, producing a second generation of progeny and this sequence is
repeated many times. In the meantime the uninfected bacteria produce a thick
carpet or lawn of growth over the agar. As the lawn develops, clear holes or 'plaques'
become obvious in it at each site of virus multiplication (Fig. 3.4). As each of
these plaques is initiated by a single phage particle, they provide a means for titrating
phage preparations.
Lysogeny
When a temperate phage is mixed with sensitive indicator bacteria and plated as
described above, the reaction at each focus of infection is generally a combination of
lytic and lysogenic responses. Some bacteria will be lysed and produce phage, others
will survive as lysogenic cells, and the plaque becomes visible as a partial area of
clearing in the bacterial lawn. It is possible to pick off cells from the central areas of
these plaques and demonstrate that they carry prophage.
The phage lambda (X) ofE. coli is the temperate phage that has been most extensively
studied. When any particular strain of E. coli, say K12, is infected with A, the cells
surviving the infection are designated E. coli K 12(A) to indicate that they are carrying
the /1-prophage.
hk*t celt
DMA
Empty phage
wet Ural DMA
-^ Host cell
F^plicatigri of
viral DMA
Production of
coat proteins
and assembly
Of Complete
partidBs
Lyfifi of hcst
cell with
release of
progeny
Lytic
response-
response
At any time ane*
tyeogeniSation exposure
gf these cells to agents
such afi UV light hydrogen
peroxide or rrfcJtO*TiyPii C # wi
cause INDUCTION of the prophage
and viral replication
Viral DMA.
mCflFpQTHted
inlo host
cell ohromoscma
&
— — - ^, .
The prophage « jmhk] on to the daughter cells on celJ division.
TTipse E^BEtervdant lysogenic cells are immuns to infection Ijy ttie
phage carried as prophage
Fig, 3^5 Scheme. [& iLfeusirale the lytic and tysogenic responses of bacceri op hag.es.
The essential features of lysogenic cells and the phenomenon of lysogeny are listed
below and summarized in Fig. 3.5.
1 Integration of the prophage into the bacterial chromosome ensures that, on cell
division, each daughter cell will acquire the set of viral genes.
2 In a normally growing culture of lysogenic bacteria, the majority of bacteria manage
to keep their prophages in a dormant state. In a very small minority of cells, however,
the prophage genes express themselves. This results in the multiplication of the virus,
lysis of the cells and liberation of infectious particles into the medium.
3 Exposure of lysogenic cultures to certain chemical and physical agents, e.g. hydrogen
peroxide, mitomycin C and ultraviolet light, results in mass lysis and the production of
high titres of phage. This process is called induction.
4 When a lysogenic cell is infected by the same type of phage as it carries as prophage,
the infection is aborted, the activity of the invading viral genes being repressed by the
same mechanism that normally keeps the prophage in a dormant state.
5 Lysogeny is generally a very stable state, but occasionally a cell will lose its prophage
and these 'cured' cells are once more susceptible to infection by that particular phage
type.
Lysogeny is an extremely common phenomenon and it seems that most natural
isolates of bacteria carry one or more prophages; some strains of Staph, aureus have
been shown to carry four or five different prophages.
The induction of a lysogenic culture to produce infectious phages, followed by
lysogenization of a second strain of the bacterial species by these phages, results in the
Viruses
61
transmission of a prophage from the chromosome of one type of cell to that of another.
On this migration, temperate bacteriophages can occasionally act as vectors for the
transfer of bacterial genes between cells. This process is called transduction and it can
be responsible for the transfer of such genetic factors as those that determine resistance
to antibiotics (Chapter 9). In addition, certain phages have the innate ability to
change the properties of their host cell. The classic example is the case of the /3-phage
of Cory ne bacterium diphtheriae. The acquisition of the j8-prophage by non-toxin-
producing strains of this species results in their conversion to diphtheria-toxin producers.
Epidemiological uses
Different strains of a number of bacterial species can be distinguished by their sensitivity
to a collection of phages. Bacteria which can be typed in this way include Staph, aureus
and Salmonella typhi. The particular strain of, say, Staph, aureus responsible for an
outbreak of infection is characterized by the pattern of its sensitivity to a standard set
of phages and then possible sources of infection are examined for the presence of that
same phage type of Staph, aureus.
More recently, the fact that many of the chemical agents which cause the induction
of prophage are carcinogenic has led to the use of lysogenic bacteria in screening tests
for detecting potential carcinogens.
Human viruses
Viruses are, of course, important and common causes of disease in humans, particularly
in children. Fortunately, most infections are not serious and, like the rhinovirus infections
responsible for the common cold syndrome, are followed by the complete recovery of
the patient. Many viral infections are in fact so mild that they are termed 'silent', to
indicate that the virus replicates in the body without producing symptoms of disease.
Occasionally, however, some of the viruses that are normally responsible for mild
infections can produce serious disease. This pattern of pathogenicity is exemplified by
the enterovirus group. Most enterovirus infections merely result in the symptomless
replication of the virus in the cells lining the alimentary tract. Only in a small percentage
of infections does the virus spread from this site via the bloodstream and the lymphatic
system to other organs, producing a fever and possibly a skin rash in the host. On rare
occasions enteroviruses like polio virus can progress to the central nervous system where
they may produce an aseptic meningitis or paralysis. There are a few virus diseases,
such as rabies, which are invariably severe and have very high mortality rates.
Human viruses will cause disease in other animals. Some are capable of infecting
only a few closely related primate species, others will infect a wide range of mammals.
Under the conditions of natural infection viruses generally exhibit a considerable degree
of tissue specificity. The influenza virus, for example, replicates only in the cells lining
the upper respiratory tract.
Table 3.1 presents a summary of the properties of some of the more important
human viruses.
Table 3.1 Important: human viruses and their properties
Group
Virus
Characteristics
Clinical importance
DNA viruses
Poxviruses
Variola
Vaccinia
Adenoviruses
Adenovirus
Herpesviruses
Herpes simplex
virus (HSV1 and
HSV2)
Cytomegalovirus
(CMV)
Epstein-Barr
virus (EBV)
Hepatitis viruses Hepatitis B virus
(HBV)
Large particles 200 x
250nm: complex
symmetry
Icosahedral particles
80nm in diameter
Enveloped,
icosahedral particles
150nm in diameter
%
Enveloped,
icosahedral particles
150nm in diameter
Enveloped,
icosahedral particles
150nm in diameter
Spherical enveloped
particle 42 nm in
diameter enclosing an
inner icosahedral
27-nm nucleocapsid
Variola is the smallpox virus. It
produces a systemic infection with a
characteristic vesicular rash affecting
the face, arms and legs, and has
a high mortality rate. Vaccinia has
been derived from the cowpox
virus and is used to immunize against
smallpox
Commonly cause upper respiratory tract
infections; tend to produce latent
infections in tonsils and adenoids; will
produce tumours on injection into
hamsters, rats or mice
HSV1 infects oral membranes in
children, >80% are infected by
adolescence. Following the primary
infection the individual retains the
HSV1 DNA in the trigeminal nerve
ganglion for life and has a 50% chance
of developing 'cold sores'. HSV2
is responsible for recurrent genital
herpes
CMV is generally acquired in
childhood as a subclinical infection.
About 50% of adults carry the virus in
a dormant state in white blood cells.
The virus can cause severe
disease (pneumonia, hepatitis,
encephalitis) in immunocompromised
patients. Primary infections during
pregnancy can induce serious
congenital abnormalities in the fetus
Infections occur by salivary exchange.
In young children they are commonly
asymptomatic but the virus persists in a
latent form in lymphocytes. Infection
delayed until adolescence often
results in glandular fever. In tropical
Africa, a severe EBV infection
early in life predisposes the child
to malignant facial tumours
(Burkitt's lymphoma)
In areas such as South-East Asia and
Africa, most children are infected by
perinatal transmission. In the Western
world the virus is spread through
contact with contaminated blood or by
sexual intercourse. There is strong
evidence that chronic infections with
HBV can progress to liver cancer
continued on p. 64
Viruses
63
Table 3.1 Continued
Group
Virus
Characteristics
Clinical importance
Papovavi ruses
Papilloma virus
Naked icosahedra
50nm in diameter
RNA viruses
Myxovi ruses
Influenza virus
Paramyxoviruses Mumps virus
Measles virus
Rhabdoviruses
Rabies virus
Reoviruses
Rotavirus
Picomaviruses
Poliovirus
Enveloped particles,
100 nm in diameter with
a helically symmetric
capsid; haemagglutinin
and neuraminidase
spikes project from the
envelope
Enveloped particles
variable in size, 110-170nm
in diameter,
with helical capsids
Enveloped particles
variable in size, 120-250nm
in diameter, helical
capsids
Bullet-shaped particles,
75-180 nm, enveloped,
helical capsids
An inner core is
surrounded by two
concentric icosahedral
shells producing
particles 70nm in
diameter
Naked icosahedral
particles 28 nm in
diameter
Multiply only in epithelial cells of skin
and mucous membranes causing warts.
There is evidence that some types are
associated with cervical carcinoma
These viruses are capable of extensive
antigenic variation, producing new types
against which the human population does
not have effective immunity. These new
antigenic types can cause pandemics of
influenza. In natural infections the virus
only multiplies in the cells lining the
upper respiratory tract. The
constitutional symptoms of influenza are
probably brought about by absorption of
toxic breakdown products from the dying
cells on the respiratory epithelium
Infection in children produces
characteristic swelling of parotid and
submaxillary salivary glands. The disease
can have neurological complications, e.g.
meningitis, especially in adults
Very common childhood fever, immunity
is life-long and second attacks are very
rare
The virus has a very wide host range,
infecting all mammals so far tested; dogs,
cats and cattle are particularly
susceptible. The incubation period of
rabies is extremely varied, ranging from
6 days up to 1 year. The virus remains
localized at the wound side of entry for a
while before passing along nerve fibres to
central nervous system, where it
invariably produces a fatal encephalitis
A very common cause of
gastroenteritis in infants. It is spread
through poor water supplies and
when standards of general hygiene
are low. In developing countries it is
responsible for about a million
deaths each year
One of a group of enteroviruses
common in the gut of humans. The
primary site of multiplication is the
lymphoid tissue ofthe alimentary
tract. Only rarely do they cause
systemic infections or serious
neurological conditions like
encephalitis or poliomyelitis
continued
Table 3.1 Continued
Group
Virus
Characteristics
Clinical importance
Rhinoviruses
Naked icosahedra 30 nm
in diameter
Hepatitis A virus
(HAV)
Togaviruses
Rubella
Flaviviruses
Yellow fever virus
Hepatitis C virus
(HCV)
Filoviruses
Ebola virus
Retroviruses
Human T-cell
leukaemia virus
(HTLV-1)
Human
immunodeficiency
virus (HIV)
Naked icosahedra
27 nm in diameter
Spherical particles 70 nm
in diameter, a
tightly adherent
envelope surrounds an
icosahedral capsid
Spherical particles 40 nm
in diameter with
an inner core
surrounded by an
adherent lipid
envelope
Spherical particles 40 nm
in diameter
consisting of an inner
core surrounded by an
adherent lipid
envelope
Long filamentous rods
composed of a lipid
envelope surrounding a
helical nucleocapsid
1000nm long, 80nm
in diameter
Spherical enveloped
virus 100nm in
diameter, icosahedral
cores contain two
copies of linear RNA
molecules and reverse
transcriptase
Differs from other
retroviruses in that the
core is cone-shaped
rather than icosahedral
The common cold viruses; there are
over 100 antigenically distinct types,
hence the difficulty in preparing
effective vaccines. The virus is shed
copiously in watery nasal secretions
Responsible for 'infectious
hepatitis' spread by the oro-faecal
route especially in children. Also
associated with sewage
contamination of food or water
supplies
Causes German measles in children.
An infection contracted in the early
stages of pregnancy can induce
severe multiple congenital
abnormalities, e.g. deafness,
blindness, heart disease and mental
retardation
The virus is spread to humans by
mosquito bites; the liver is the main
target; necrosis of hepatocytes leads
to jaundice and fever
The virus is spread through blood
transfusions and blood products. Induces
a hepatitis which is usually milder
than that caused by HBV
The virus is widespread amongst
populations of monkeys. It can be
spread to humans by contact with
body fluids from the primates. The
resulting haemorragic fever has a
90% case fatality rate
HTLV is spread inside infected
lymphocytes in blood, semen or
breast milk. Most infections
remain asymptomatic but after an
incubation period of 10-40 years in
about 2% of cases, adult T-cell
leukaemia can result
HIV is transmitted from person to
person via blood or genital secretions.
The principal target for the virus is the
CD4+ T-lymphocyte cells. Depletion
of these cells induces
immunodeficiency
7.1 Cultivation of human viruses
The cultivation of viruses from material taken from lesions is an important step in the
diagnosis of many viral diseases. Studies of the basic biology and multiplication
processes of human viruses also require that they are grown in the laboratory under
experimental conditions. Human pathogenic viruses can be propagated in three types
of cell systems.
7.1.1 Cell culture
Cells from human or other primate sources are obtained from an intact tissue, e.g.
human embryo kidney or monkey kidney. The cells are dispersed by digestion with
trypsin and the resulting suspension of single cells is generally allowed to settle in a
vessel containing a nutrient medium. The cells will metabolize and grow and after a
few days of incubation at 37°C will form a continuous film or monolayer one cell
thick. These cells are then capable of supporting viral replication. Cell cultures may be
divided into three types according to their history.
1 Primary cell cultures, which are prepared directly from tissues.
2 Secondary cell cultures, which can be prepared by taking cells from some types of
primary culture, usually those derived from embryonic tissue, dispersing them by
treatment with trypsin and inoculating some into a fresh batch of medium. A limited
number of subcultures can be performed with these sorts of cells, up to a maximum of
about 50 before the cells degenerate.
3 There are now available a number of lines of cells, mainly originating from malignant
tissue, which can be serially subcultured apparently indefinitely. These established cell
lines are particularly convenient as they eliminate the requirement for fresh animal
tissue for such sets or series of cultures. An example of these continuous cell lines are
the famous HeLa cells, which were originally isolated from a cervical carcinoma of a
woman called Henrietta Lacks, long since dead but whose cells have been used in
laboratories all over the world to grow viruses.
Inoculation of cell cultures with virus-containing material produces characteristic
changes in the cells. The replication of many types of viruses produces the cytopathic
effect (CPE) in which cells degenerate. This effect is seen as the shrinkage or sometimes
ballooning of cells and the disruption of the monolayer by death and detachment of the
cells (Fig. 3.6). The replicating virus can then be identified by inoculating a series of
cell cultures with mixtures of the virus and different known viral antisera. If the virus
is the same as one of the types used to prepare the various antisera, then its activity will
be neutralized by that particular antiserum and CPE will not be apparent in that tube.
Alternatively viral antisera labelled with a fluorescent dye can be used to identify the
virus in the cell culture.
7.1.2 The chick embryo
Fertile chicken eggs, 10-12 days old, have been used as a convenient cell system in
which to grow a number of human pathogenic viruses. Figure 3.7 shows that viruses
generally have preferences for particular tissues within the embryo. Influenza viruses,
66 Chapter 3
Gantidl mQngEeyer
of ceJls
with viruB
i
Nutrient
medium
| f
Tubes incubated
and oKBmirtfld
microscopically
some day£ later
MiCrOfiCDple dppMrancti
of normal control
rail layer
Layer has degenerated,
cell debris visible
(cylopainic effect!
Fijj. 3.6 The cyiopuihic cAccLof a vIiuk dci a tissue cQlturc <x3] monolayer.
Smallpox, herpes
sjmplra
Chorioallantoic
membrane
AJbumen
Influenza.
mumps
Fig, 3i«.7 A chick emhtyn shjnwinjj the ihq filiation mutes fnrvLriLS CLdtivaiinn.
for example, can be grown in the cells of the membrane bounding the amniotic cavity,
while smallpox virus will grow in the chorioallantoic membrane. The growth of smallpox
virus in the embryo is recognized by the formation of characteristic pock marks on the
membrane. Influenza virus replication is detected by exploiting the ability of these
particles to cause erythrocytes to clump together. Fluid from the amniotic cavity of the
infected embryo is titrated for its haemagglutinating activity.
Viruses
67
7.1.3
Animal inoculation
Experimental animals such as mice and ferrets have to be used for the cultivation of
some viruses. Growth of the virus is indicated by signs of disease or death of the
inoculated animal.
8
Multiplication of human viruses
The long incubation times of many human virus diseases indicate that they replicate
slowly in host cells. In tissue culture systems it has been shown that most human viruses
take from 4 to 24 hours to complete a single replication cycle, contrasting with the 30
or so minutes for many bacterial viruses.
In general terms, four main stages can be recognized in the multiplication of
human viruses, (i) attachment; (ii) penetration and uncoating (iii) production of viral
proteins and replication of viral nucleic acid, (iv) assembly and release of progeny
viruses.
8.1
Attachment
Specific proteins on the surface of virus particles, e.g. the haemagglutinins of influenza
viruses (Fig. 3.8), mediate their adherence to glycoprotein receptors in the plasma
membrane of host cells. Viruses make use of a variety of membrane glycoproteins as
START
FlMlSH
influana
virufr
Priori*
viru&OT
Fig. 3.8 Diagrammatic representation of the production and release of influenza virus particles fiom
an infected cell.
68 Chapter 3
their receptors. The primary functions of the cellular receptor molecules are not related
to their role as viral attachment sites, some being membrane permeases or hormone
receptors. Different viruses may use different receptors, e.g. different serotypes of human
rhinoviruses use different receptors, in other cases unrelated viruses may share common
receptors.
Penetration and uncoating
Viruses penetrate their host cells either by endocytosis or by fusion with the cell
membrane. Macromolecules can be taken up into animal cells by attachment to
membrane receptors and subsequent endocytosis. Many viruses use this essential cell
function of receptor-mediated endocytosis to gain entry to their host cells. The virus-
containing cytoplasmic vacuole fuses with endo somes and the resulting acidification
generates conformational changes in the virus coat which can release the virus
nucleocapsid into the cytosol. The membranes of some enveloped viruses fuse with the
plasma membranes of their host cells and this releases the nucleocapsid directly into
the cytoplasm. Some viruses then require only partial uncoating before transcription of
their nucleic acid can begin, but in most cases the viral capsid completely disintegrates
before viral functions start to be expressed. In some cases the nucleocapsid passes to
the cell nucleus before uncoating occurs.
Production of viral proteins and replication of viral nucleic acid
During this phase most human viruses seem to bring host-cell macromolecular synthesis
to a stop: the cell DNA, however, is generally not degraded. With the DNA-containing
viruses, like adenovirus, the nucleic acid passes to the nucleus, where a host-cell RNA
polymerase enzyme is used to transcribe part of the viral genome. These first messages
are analogous to the 'early' messages of the T-even phages and are concerned in the
production of enzymes for viral DNA synthesis. Viral DNA replication is then followed
by formation of 'late' mRNA specifying capsid protein. The mRNA molecules are of
course translated on the cytoplasmic ribosomes. The proteins produced are rapidly
transported back to the nucleus, where capsid assembly takes place. An exception to
this pattern of DNA virus replication is provided by the poxvirus, vaccinia. Within
their complex structure these particles contain a DNA-dependent RNA polymerase
enzyme, which is released during uncoating and proceeds to make mRNA molecules
from the viral DNA. The whole of the replication of vaccinia takes place in the cell
cytoplasm.
With some RNA viruses, e.g. poliovirus, the RNA strand from the particle can act
directly as mRNA and is translated into viral proteins on the host-cell ribosomes.
In many other RNA viruses, however (e.g. the influenza viruses), the RNA strands
are negative-sense RNAs (antimessages) that have first to be transcribed to the
complementary sequence by RNA-dependent RNA polymerases before they can
function in protein synthesis. Since eukaryotic cells do not have these enzymes, the
negative-sense RNA viruses must carry them in the virion.
Unlike eukaryotic cells which normally produce monocistronic mRNA, many
viruses produce polycistronic messages. DNA viruses, which usually replicate in
Viruses 69
the cell nuclei, use nuclear RNA processing and splicing enzymes to cleave their
polycistronic messages. Some RNA viruses such as human immunodeficiency virus
(HIV) produce polycistronic messages which are translated into polyproteins. These
then have to be cleaved by protease enzymes to produce functional proteins. Other RNA
viruses (e.g. influenza) have segmented genomes in which each RNA molecule is a
separate gene in its own nucleocapsid.
Assembly and release of progeny viruses
The non-enveloped human viruses all have icosahedral capsids. The structural proteins
undergo a self-assembly process to form capsids into which the viral nucleic acid is
packaged. Most non-enveloped viruses accumulate within the cytoplasm or nucleus
and are only released when the cell lyses.
All enveloped human viruses acquire their phospholipid coating by budding through
cellular membranes. The maturation and release of enveloped influenza particles is
illustrated in Fig. 3.8. The capsid protein subunits are transported from the ribosomes
to the nucleus, where they combine with new viral RNA molecules and are assembled
into the helical capsids. The haemagglutinin and neuraminidase proteins that project
from the envelope of the normal particles migrate to the cytoplasmic membrane where
they displace the normal cell membrane proteins. The assembled nucleocapsids finally
pass out from the nucleus, and as they impinge on the altered cytoplasmic membrane
they cause it to bulge and bud off completed enveloped particles from the cell. Virus
particles are released in this way over a period of hours before the cell eventually dies.
The problems of viral chemotherapy
Bacteria are vulnerable to the selective attack of chemo therapeutic agents because
of the many metabolic and molecular differences between them and animal cells. The
biology of virus replication, with its considerable dependence on host-cell energy-
producing, protein-synthesizing and biosynthetic enzyme systems, severely limits the
opportunities for selective attack. Another problem is that many virus diseases only
become apparent after extensive viral multiplication and tissue damage has been done.
Recently, however, there have been a number of encouraging developments in the
field of antiviral therapy. For example, acycloguanosine (acyclovir: see Chapter 5) has
been shown to be non-toxic to host cells while specifically inhibiting the replication of
herpes viruses. Successful clinical trials have led to the introduction of this drug for the
treatment of a variety of herpetic conditions.
The control over human viral diseases is exercised by active immunization (Chapters
14 and 16) of the population, together with general hygiene and physical and chemical
disinfection procedures.
Interferon
Although it is difficult to obtain drugs capable of interrupting viral replication, it had
been known for many years that infection of a host with one virus could sometimes
prevent infections with a second, quite unrelated virus. This phenomenon was called
interference and in many cases it proved to be due to the production of a substance
called interferon,
Interferons are low molecular weight proteins produced by virus-infected cells.
They have no direct antiviral activity. They bind to the cell membranes and induce
the synthesis of secondary proteins. If interferon-treated cells are then infected
with a virus, although adsorption, penetration and uncoating can take place, the
interferon-induced proteins inhibit viral nucleic acid and protein synthesis and the
infection is aborted. Interferons have major roles to play in protecting the host
against natural virus infections. They are produced more rapidly than antibodies and
the outcome of many natural viral infections is probably determined by the relative
early titres of interferon and virus, protection being most effective when the infecting
dose of virus is low.
Potentially, interferon is an ideal antiviral agent in that it acts on many different
viruses and is not toxic to host cells. However, the exploitation of this agent in the
treatment of viral infections has been delayed by a number of factors. For example, it
has proved to be species-specific and interferons raised in animal sources offered little
protection to human cells. Human interferon is thus needed for the treatment of human
infections and the production and purification of human interferon on a large scale has
proved difficult The insertion of human genes for interferon into E. coli has resolved
the production problems (Chapter 24). Clinical trials have demonstrated that interferon
prevents rhinovirus infection and has a beneficial effect in herpes, cytomegalovirus
and hepatitis B virus infections.
Interferon does not only inhibit virus replication, it also has multiple effects on cell
metabolism and slows down the growth and multiplication of treated cells. This is
probably responsible for its widely reported antitumour effect. Encouraging results
have been reported from clinical trials of interferon against several human tumours
such as osteogenic sarcoma, myeloma, lymphoma and breast cancer.
10 Tumour viruses
Many viruses, both DNA and RNA containing, will cause cancer in animals. This so-
called oncogenic activity of a virus can be demonstrated by the observation of tumour
formation in inoculated experimental animals and by the ability of the virus to transform
normal tissue culture cells into cells with malignant characteristics. These transformed
cells are easily recognizable as they exhibit such properties as rapid growth and frequent
mitosis, or loss of normal cell contact inhibition, so that they pile up on top of each
other instead of remaining in a well-organized layer.
Studies on the transformation of tissue cultures with DNA-containing viruses
have shown that, although complete virus particles cannot be found in the infected,
transformed cells, viral DNA is present and is bound to the transformed cell DNA as
provirus, analogous to the prophage of lysogenic bacteria.
RNA oncogenic viruses have an unusual enzyme, reverse transcriptase, which is
capable of making DNA copies from an RNA template. Cells transformed by these
retroviruses have been shown to possess DNA transcripts of the viral RNA. It appears
that the transformation from normal to malignant is associated with the acquisition by
the cell of viral DNA.
Viruses 7 1
While human viruses like the adenoviruses can induce cancer in hamsters, rats and
mice, the search for viruses causing human cancer is of course difficult because of the
unacceptability of testing for oncogenic activity by infecting humans. In the last 10
years, however, it has been realized that viruses are a major cause of the disease in
humans, being involved in the genesis of some 20% of human cancers worldwide. The
characteristic features of the association between viruses and human cancers are that
the incubation time between virus infection and development of the disease can be
considerable, that less than 1 % of infected individuals will develop the disease and that
genetic and environmental cofactors are crucial for the progression to cancer. The
Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), for example, is involved in the aetiology of Burkitt's
lymphoma a malignant tumour of the jaw, found in African children. In fact this virus
has a widespread distribution in the human population, being responsible for the
condition of glandular fever which is common in young adults in Europe and America.
The characteristic occurrence of Burkitt's lymphoma in hot humid areas of Africa where
mosquitoes flourish has led to the hypothesis that infection with EBV has to be followed
by malaria, which then induces immunosuppression and acts as the cofactor necessary
for tumour formation.
The list of viruses involved in other human cancers includes hepatitis B, which is
associated with hepatocellular carcinoma; human papilloma viruses with cervical, penile
and some anal carcinomas; human T-cell lymphotropic virus type 1 associated with
adult T-cell leukaemia/lymphoma syndrome; and HIV with Kaposi's sarcoma.
The human immunodeficiency virus
HIV is an enveloped particle with a cone-shaped nucleocapsid containing two copies
of a positive sense single stranded RNA and the enzyme reverse transcriptase. The
virus is transmitted from person to person by genital secretions and blood. From the
original site of infection the virus is transported to lymph nodes where it replicates
extensively in its target host cells, the CD4+ lymphocytes. After infection, most patients
experience a brief glandular fever-like illness which is associated with a decline in the
CD4+ cells and high titres of virus in the blood. The levels of virus in the blood then
decline as the cellular and humoral immune responses are mounted. A long period of
latency then follows which may last from 1 to perhaps 15 years or longer before any
further clinical symptoms become apparent. In infected CD4+ cells the viral reverse
transcriptase makes double stranded DNA copies of the HIV RNA and some of these
become integrated into cellular chromosomes. These integrated proviruses may remain
latent indefinitely. During this long asymptomatic phase only a small minority of CD4+-
cells produce virus and only very low titres of HTV can be detected in the blood. As
time goes by, however, there is a steady decline in the numbers of CD4+ cells in the
blood and when the count falls below 200^-00^0 the immune system becomes severely
compromised. The consequent activation of other latent infections with organisms such
cytomegalovirus or Mycobacterium tuberculosis and secondary infections with a variety
of opportunistic pathogens such as Pneumocystis carinii will inevitably kill the AIDS
patient.
Despite enormous research efforts, effective vaccines or chemotherapeutic agents
against HTV have yet to be produced. There is no prospect that drugs will be able to
eliminate the virus from the population of lymphocytes, the only hope is that compounds
will be found that will achieve long-term suppression of viral replication and thus
preserve the stock of CD4+ cells in infected individuals. It was hoped that inhibitors of
reverse transcriptase such as azidothymidine (AZT) or dideoxyinosine (ddl) would act
in this way; however, it is becoming increasing clear that these drugs do not consistently
arrest the progress of the disease even when treatment is started in the asymptomatic
phase.
In parts of the world (sub-Sahran African and southern and South-East Asia) the
ADDS pandemic is out of control, with no effective chemotherapeutic agents and little
prospect of a vaccine; the prognoses are bleak for the millions of HIV-infected
individuals. Sexual intercourse is now the main mode of infection and if the pandemic
is to be contained, sexually active individuals have to be persuaded to reduce the numbers
of their sex partners and to practise safe sex using condoms.
Prions
The causative agents of the neurodegerative diseases of scrapie in sheep, bovine
spongiform encephalopathy (BSE) and Creutzfeldt- Jakob disease (CJD) in humans
used to be referred to as slow viruses. It is now clear, however, that they are caused by
a distinct class of infectious agents termed prions (a word standing for 'proteinaceous
infectious particle') that have unique and disturbing properties. These particles can be
recovered from the brains of infected individuals as minute rod-like structures composed
of oligomers of a 30-kDa polypeptide. They are devoid of nucleic acid and extremely
resistant to heating and to ultraviolet irradiation. They also fail to produce an immune
response in the host. Just how such proteins can replicate and be infectious has only
recently become understood. It seems that a protein with the same amino acid sequence
as the prion, but with a different conformation, is present in the membranes of normal
neurones of the host. The evidence suggests that the prion form of the protein combines
with the normal host cell form and alters its configuration to that of the prion. The
newly formed prion can then in turn modify the folding of other normal protein
molecules. In this way the prion protein is capable of autocatalytic replication. As the
prions slowly accumulate in the brain, the neurones progressively vacuolate, holes
eventually develop in the grey matter and the brain takes on a sponge-like appearance.
The clinical symptoms take a long time to develop — up to 20 years in humans — but
the disease has an inevitable progression to paralysis and death.
There has been great concern over the large-scale outbreak of BSE that occurred in
the UK from 1988 as a result of feeding cattle with supplements prepared from sheep
and cattle offal. Brain extracts from BSE cattle have transmitted the disease to mice,
sheep, cattle, pigs and monkeys. Studies of 12 recent cases of atypical CJD in the
UK have provided evidence that the bovine prions have infected humans through the
consumption of contaminated beef.
Further reading
Dalgleish A.G. (1991) Viruses and cancer. Br Med Bull, 47, 21 A 16.
Grady C. & Kelly G. (1996) HIV vaccine development. Nursing Clin North Am, 31, 25-39.
Viruses 73
Levie A.J. (1991) Viruses. Oxford: W.H. Freeman.
Norkin L.C. (1995) Virus receptors — implications for pathogenesis and the design of antiviral agents.
Clin Microbiol Rev, 8,293-315.
Oxford J.S. (1995) Quo-vadis antiviral agents for herpes, influenza and HIV. J Med Microbiol, 43,
1-3.
Pantaleo G. & Fauci A.S. (1996) Immunopathogenesis of HIV infection. Ann Rev Microbiol, 50, 825-
854.
Pauza CD. & Streblow D.N. (1995) Therapeutic approaches to HIV infection based on virus structure
and host-pathogen interaction. Curr Topics Microbiol Immunol, 202, 117-132.
Prusiner S.B. (1996) Molecular biology and pathogenesis of prion disease. Trends Biochem Sci, 21,
482-487.
White D.O. & Fenner F.J. (1994) Medical Virology, 4th edn. San Diego: Academic Press.
Whitley R.G. (1996) The past as a prelude to the future — history, status and future of antiviral drugs.
Ann Pharmac other, 30, 967-971.
Principles of microbial
pathogenicity and epidemiology
1
Introduction
2
Portals of entry
2.1
Respiratory tract
2.2
Intestinal tract
2.3
Urinogenital tract
2.4
Conjunctiva
3
Consolidation
3.1
Resistance to host's defences
3.1.1
Modulation of the inflammatory
response
3.1.2
Avoidance of phagocytosis
3.1.3
Survival following phagocytosis
3.1.4
Killing of phagocytes
4 Manifestation of disease
4.1 Non-invasive pathogens
4.2 Partially invasive pathogens
4.3 Invasive pathogens
4.3.1 Active spread
4.3.2 Passive spread
5 Damage to tissues
5.1 Direct damage
5.1.1 Specific effects
5.1.2 Non-specific effects
5.2 Indirect damage
6 Recovery from infection: exit of
microorganisms
7 Epidemiology of infectious disease
8
Further reading
Introduction
The majority of microorganisms are free living and cferive their nutrition from inert
organic and inorganic materials. The association of such microorganisms with humans
is generally harmonious, as the majority of those encountered are benign and, indeed,
are often vital to balanced ecosystems. In spite of the ubiquity of microorganisms the
tissues of healthy animals and plants are essentially microbe-free. This is achieved
through provision of a number of non-specific defences to those tissues, and specific
defences such as antibodies (see Chapters 14, 15) acquired after exposure to particular
agents. Breach of these defences by microorganisms through the expression of virulence
factors and adaptation to a pathogenic mode of life or following disease, accidental
trauma, catheterization or implantation of medical devices may lead to the establishment
of microbial infections.
The ability of bacteria and fungi to establish infections varies considerably. Some
are rarely, if ever, isolated from infected tissues, whilst opportunist pathogens (e.g.
Pseudomonas aeruginosa) can establish themselves only in compromised tissues. Only
a few species of bacteria may be regarded as obligate pathogens, for which animals,
plants or humans are the only reservoirs for their existence (e.g. Neisseria gonorrhoeae).
Viruses (Chapter 3) on the other hand must parasitize host cells in order to replicate
and are therefore inevitably associated with disease. Even amongst the viruses and
obligate bacterial pathogens the degree of virulence varies, in that some are able to
coexist with the host without causing the disease state (e.g. staphylococci), whilst others
will always manifest disease. Organisms such as these invariably produce their effects,
directly or indirectly, by actively growing on or in the host tissues.
Microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology 75
Other groups of organisms may cause disease through ingestion by the victim of
substances (toxins) produced during microbial growth on foods (e.g. Clostridium
botulinum, botulism; Bacillus cereus, vomiting). The organisms themselves do not
have to survive and grow in the victim in order for the effects of the toxin to be felt.
Whether such organisms should be regarded as pathogenic is debatable, but they must
be considered in any account of microbial pathogenicity.
The course of infection can be considered as a sequence of separate events (Fig.
4.1). In order for an infection to develop, pathogenic microorganisms must increase
their number within the host more rapidly than the host can eliminate or kill them.
Greater numbers of cells in the initial challenge to the host will increase the chances of
successful colonization. The successful pathogen must therefore arrive at its 'portal of
entry' to the body, or directly at the target tissue, in sufficient numbers as to allow
establishment. The minimum number of infective organisms required to cause disease
is called the 'minimum infective number' (MIN). MIN varies markedly between
the various pathogens and is also affected by the general health and immune status
of the individual host organisms, between individual hosts, and with the general state
of health of the host. Growth and consolidation of the microorganisms at the portal of
Fgud r
water
o
*
E
J.
Latency
Swimming
cye-drap&
r
Aii
Conjunctiva
Blood
Insets,
Trauma
Upper respiratory tract
I
D
Lower respiratory tract
Soil, contact
~r~
Skm
Viscera
CNS
Feus
I
C-r Lists.
scabs,
ekiri-fitalM
Urinary genital
tract
SeKual contact
Fig. 4.1 Routes of infection and spread of transmission of disease. CNS, central nervous system.
entry commonly involves the formation of a microcolony (biofilm). Biofilms and
microcolonies are collections of microorganisms that are attached to surfaces and
enveloped within exopolymer matrices (glycocalyx) composed of polysaccharides,
glycoproteins and/or proteins. Growth within the matrix not only protects the pathogens
against phagocytosis and opsonization within the host but also modulates their micro-
environment and reduces the effectiveness of some antibiotics. The high bacterial
densities present within the biofilm communities also initiate the production of
extracellular virulence factors such as toxins, proteases and siderophores (low molecular
weight ligands responsible for the solubilization and transport of iron (IE) in microbial
cells) and may promote their acquisition of nutrients. Viruses are incapable of growing
extracellularly and must therefore rapidly gain entry to the epithelial cells at their site
of entry. Once internalized they are to a large extent, in the non-immune host, protected
against the non-specific host defences. Following these initial consolidation events,
the organisms may expand into surrounding tissues, and/or disperse via the circulatory
systems to distant tissues to establish secondary sites of infection and consolidate further.
Finally, the organism must exit the body, survive and/or immediately re-enter another
susceptible host.
Portals of entry
The part of the body most widely exposed to microorganisms is the skin. Intact
skin is usually impervious to microorganisms. Its surface contains relatively few
nutrients and is of acid pH, which is unfavourable for microbial growth. The vast
majority of organisms falling onto the skin surface will die, the remainder must compete
for nutrients with the commensal microflora in order to grow. These commensals are
highly adapted to growth on the skin and will normally prevent the establishment of
adventitious contaminants. Infections of the skin itself, such as ringworm {Trichophyton
mentagrophytes) rarely, if ever, involve penetration of the epidermis. Infections can,
however, occur through the skin following trauma such as burns, cuts and abrasions
and, in some instances, through insect or animal bites or the injection of contaminated
medicines. In recent years extensive use of intravascular and extravascular medical
devices and implants has led to an increase in the occurrence of hospital-acquired
infection. Commonly these infections involve growth of skin commensals such as
Staphylococcus epidermidis when associated with devices which penetrate the skin
barrier. The organism grows as an adhesive biofilm upon the surfaces of the device,
where infection arises either from contamination of the device during its implantation
or by growth of the organism along it from the skin. In such instances the biofilm sheds
bacterial cells to the body and gives rise to bacteraemias (the presence of bacteria in
the blood). These readily respond to antibiotic treatment but the biofilm which is
relatively recalcitrant towards even agressive antibiotic therapy, remains and acts as a
continued focus of infection. In practice, such infected devices must be removed, and
can be replaced only after successful chemotherapy of the bacteraemia.
The weak spots, or Achilles heels, of the body occur where the skin ends and mucous
epithelial tissues begin (mouth, anus, eyes, ears, nose and urinogenital tract). These
mucous membranes present a much more favourable environment for microbial growth
than the skin, in that they are warm, moist and rich in nutrients. Such membranes,
Microb ial pathogen ic ity and ep idem io logy 1 1
nevertheless, possess certain characteristics that allow them to resist infection. The
majority, for example, possess their own highly adapted commensal microflora which
must be displaced by any invading organisms. These resident flora vary greatly between
different sites of the body but are usually common to particular host species. Each site
can be additionally protected by physico-chemical barriers such as extreme acid pH in
the stomach, the presence of freely circulating non-specific antibodies and/or opsonins,
and/or by macrophages and phagocytes (see Chapter 14). All infections start from contact
between these tissues and the potential pathogen. Contact may be direct, from an infected
individual to a healthy one; or indirect, and involve inanimate vectors such as soil,
food, drink, air and airborne particles being ingested, inhaled or entering wounds, or
via infected bed-linen and clothing. Indirect contact may also involve animal vectors
(carriers).
Respiratory tract
Air contains a large amount of suspended organic matter and, in enclosed occupied
spaces, may hold up to 1000 microorganisms m" . Almost all of these airborne organisms
are non-pathogenic bacteria and fungi of which the average person would inhale
approximately 10000 per day. The respiratory tract is protected against this assault by
a mucociliary blanket which envelops the lower respiratory tract and nasal cavity.
Particles becoming entrapped in this blanket of mucus are carried by ciliary action to
the back of the throat and swallowed. The alveolar regions are, in addition, protected
by a lining of macrophages. To be successful, a pathogen must avoid being trapped in
the mucus and swallowed, and if deposited in the alveolar sacs must avoid engulfment
by macrophages or resist subsequent digestion by them. The possession of surface
adhesins, specific for epithelial receptors, aids attachment of the invading microorganism
and avoidance of removal by the mucociliary blanket.
Intestinal tract
The intestinal tract must contend with whatever it is given in terms of food and drink.
The lower gut is highly populated by commensal microorganisms (10 n g _1 gut tissue).
These organisms are often associated with the intestinal wall, either embedded in layers
of protective mucus or attached directly to the epithelial cells. The pathogenicity of
incoming bacteria and viruses depends upon their ability to survive passage through
the stomach and duodenum and upon their capacity for attachment to, or penetration
of, the gut wall in competition with the commensal flora, and in spite of the presence of
secretory antibodies (Chapter 14).
Urinogenital tract
In healthy individuals, the bladder, ureters and urethra are sterile and sterile urine
constantly flushes the urinary tract. Organisms invading the urinary tract must avoid
being detached from the epithelial surfaces and washed out during urination. In the
male, since the urethra is long ica. 20 cm), bacteria must be introduced directly into
the bladder, possibly through catheterization. In the female, the urethra is much shorter
(ca. 5 cm) and is more readily traversed by microorganisms normally resident within
the vaginal vault. Bladder infections are therefore much more common in the female.
Spread of the infection from the bladder to the kidneys can easily occur through the
reflux of urine into the ureter. As for the implantation of devices across the skin barrier
(above), long-term catheterization of the bladder will promote the occurrence of
bacterurias (the presence of bacteria in the urine) with all of the associated complications.
Lactic acid in the vagina gives it an acidic pH (5.0) which together with other
products of metabolism inhibits colonization by most bacteria, except some lactobacilli,
which constitute the commensal flora. Other types of bacteria are unable to establish
themselves in the vagina unless they have become extremely specialized. These species
of microorganism tend to be associated with venereal infections.
Conjunctiva
The conjunctiva is usually free of microorganisms and protected by the continuous
flow of secretions from lachrymal and other glands, and by frequent mechanical
cleansing of its surface by the eyelid periphery during blinking. Damage to the
conjunctiva, caused through mechanical abrasion or reduction in tear flow, will
increase microbial adhesion and allow colonization by opportunist pathogens. The
likelihood of infection is thus promoted by the use of soft and hard contact lenses,
physical damage, exposure to chemicals, or damage and infection of the eyelid border
(blepharitis).
Consolidation
To be successful, a pathogen must be able to survive at its initial portal of entry, frequently
in competition with the commensal flora and subject to the attention of macrophages
and wandering white blood cells. Such survival invariably requires the organism to
attach itself firmly to the epithelial surface. This attachment must be highly specific in
order to displace the commensal microflora and subsequently governs the course of
an infection. Attachment can be mediated through provision, on the bacterial surface,
of adhesive substances, such as mucopeptide and mucopolysaccharide slime layers,
fimbriae (Chapter 1), pili (Chapter 1) and agglutinins (Chapter 14). These are often
highly specific in their binding characteristics, differentiating, for example, between
the tips and bases of villi and the epithelial cells of the upper, mid and lower gut.
Secretory antibodies which are directed against such adhesins block the initial attachment
of the organism and confer resistance to infection.
The outcome of the encounter between the tissues and potential pathogens is
governed by the ability of the microorganisms to multiply at a faster rate than they are
removed from those tissues. Factors which influence this are the organisms's rate of
growth, the initial number of organisms arriving at the site and their ability to resist the
efforts of the host tissues at killing it. The definition of virulence for pathogenic
microorganisms must therefore relate to the minimum number of cells required to
initiate an infection. This will vary between individuals, but will invariably be lower in
compromised hosts such as diabetics, cystic fibrotics and those suffering trauma such
as malnutrition, chronic infection or physical damage.
Microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology 79
3.1 Resistance to host's defences
Most bacterial infections confine themselves to the surface of epithelial tissue (e.g.
Bordetella pertussis, Corynebacterium diphtheriae, Vibrio cholerae). This is, to a large
extent, a reflection of their inability to combat that host's deeper defences. Survival at
these sites is largely due to firm attachment to the epithelial cells. Such organisms
manifest disease through the production and release of toxins (see below).
Other groups of organisms regularly establish systemic infections (e.g. Brucella
abortus, Salmonella typhi, Streptococcus pyogenes) after traversing the epithelial
surfaces. This property is associated with their ability either to gain entry into susceptible
cells and thereby enjoy protection from the body's defences, or to be phagocytosed by
macrophages or polymorphs yet resist their lethal action and multiply within them.
Other organisms are able to multiply and grow freely in the body's extracellular fluids.
Microorganisms have evolved a number of different strategies which allow them to
suppress the host's normal defences and thereby survive in the tissues. These are
considered later.
3.1.1 Modulation of the inflammatory response
Growth of microorganisms releases cellular products into their surrounding medium,
many of which cause non-specific inflammation associated with dilatation of blood
vessels. This increases capillary flow and access of phagocytes to the infected site.
Increased lymphatic flow from the inflamed tissues carries the organisms to lymph
nodes where further antimicrobial and immune forces come into play (Chapter
14). Many of the substances released by microorganisms are chemotactic towards
polymorphs which tend therefore to become concentrated at the site of infection.
This is in addition to inflammation and white blood cell chemotaxis associated
with antibody binding and complement fixation (Chapter 14). Many organisms have
adapted mechanisms which allow them to overcome these initial defences. Thus, virulent
strains of Staphylococcus aureus produce a mucopeptide (peptidoglycan), which
suppresses early inflammatory oedema, and a related factor which suppresses the
chemotaxis of polymorphs.
3.1.2 Avoidance of phagocytosis
Resistance to phagocytosis is sometimes associated with specific components of the
cell wall and/or with the presence of capsules surrounding the cell wall. Classic examples
of these are the M-proteins of the streptococci and the polysaccharide capsules of
pneumococci. The acidic polysaccharide K-antigens of Escherichia coli and Sal. typhi
behave similarly, in that (i) they can mediate attachment to the intestinal epithelial
cells, and (ii) they render phagocytosis more difficult. Generally, possession of an
extracellular capsule will reduce the likelihood of phagocytosis.
Microorganisms are more readily phagocytosed when coated with antibody
(opsonized). This is due to the presence on the white blood cells of receptors for the Fc
fragment oflgM and IgG (discussed in Chapter 14). Avoidance of opsonization will
clearly enhance the chances of survival of a particular pathogen. A substance called
80 Chapter 4
protein A is released from actively growing strains of Staph, aureus. This acts by non-
specific binding to IgG, at the Fc region (see also Chapter 14), at sites both close to and
remote from the bacterial surface. This blocks the Fc region of bound antibody masking
it from phagocytes. Protein A-IgG complexes will also bind complement, depleting it
from the plasma and negating the associated chemotactic responses.
Survival following phagocytosis
Death following phagocytosis can be avoided if the microorganisms are not exposed to
the intracellular processes (killing and digestion) within the phagocyte. This is possible
if fusion of the lysosomes with phagocytic vacuoles can be prevented. Such a strategy
is employed by virulent Mycobacterium tuberculosis, although the precise mechanism is
unknown. Other bacteria seem able to grow within the vacuoles despite lysosomal fusion
(Listeria monocytogenes, Sal. typhi). This can be attributed to cell wall components which
prevent access of the lysosomal substances to the bacterial membranes (e.g. Brucella
abortus, mycobacteria) or to the production of extracellular catalase which neutralizes
the hydrogen peroxide liberated in the vacuole (e.g. staphylococci, streptococci).
If microorganisms are able to survive and grow within phagocytes then they will
escape many of the other body defences and be distributed around the body.
Killing of phagocytes
An alternative strategy is for the microorganism to kill the phagocyte. This can be
achieved by the production of leucocidins (e.g. staphylococci, streptococci) which
promote the discharge of lysosomal substances into the cytoplasm of the phagocyte
rather than into the vacuole, thus directing the phagocyte's lethal activity towards itself.
Manifestation of disease
Once established, the course of a bacterial infection can proceed in a number of ways.
These can be related to the relative ability of the organism to penetrate and invade
surrounding tissues and organs. The vast majority of pathogens, being unable to combat
the defences of the deeper tissues, consolidate further on the epithelial surface. Others,
which include a majority of viruses, penetrate the epithelial layers, but no further, and
can be regarded as partially invasive. A small group of pathogens are fully invasive.
These permeate the subepithelial tissues and are circulated around the body to initiate
secondary sites of infection remote from the initial portal of entry.
Other groups of organisms may cause disease through ingestion by the victim of
substances produced during microbial growth on foods. Such diseases may be regarded
as intoxications rather than as infections and are considered further in section 5.1.1.
Treatment in these cases is usually an alleviation of the harmful effects of the toxin
rather than elimination of the pathogen from the body.
Non-invasive pathogens
Bordetella pertussis (the aetiological agent of whooping-cough) is probably the best
Microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology 81
described of these pathogens. This organism is inhaled and rapidly localizes on the
mucociliary blanket of the lower respiratory tract. This localization is very selective
and thought to involve agglutinins on the organisms' surface. Toxins, produced by the
organism, inhibit ciliary movement of the epithelial surface and thereby prevent removal
of the bacterial cells to the gut. A high molecular weight exotoxin is also produced
during the growth of the organism which, being of limited diffusibility, pervades the
subepithelial tissues to produce inflammation and necrosis. C. diphtheriae (the causal
organism of diphtheria) behaves similarly, attaching itself to the epithelial cells of the
respiratory tract. This organism produces a low molecular weight, diffusible toxin which
enters the blood circulation and brings about a generalized toxaemia.
In the gut, many pathogens adhere to the gut wall and produce their toxic effect via
toxins which pervade the surrounding gut wall or enter the systemic circulation. Vibrio
cholerae and some enteropathic E. coli strains localize on the gut wall and produce
toxins which increase vascular permeability. The end result is a hypersecretion of
isotonic fluids into the gut lumen, acute diarrhoea and consequent dehydration which
may be fatal in juveniles and the elderly. In all these instances, binding to epithelial
cells is not essential but increases permeation of the toxin and prolongs the presence of
the pathogen.
Partially invasive pathogens
Some bacteria and the majority of viruses are able to attach to the mucosal epithelia
and then penetrate rapidly into the epithelial cells. These organisms multiply within
the protective environment of the host cell, eventually killing it and inducing disease
through erosion and ulceration of the mucosal epithelium. Typically, members of the
genera Shigella and Salmonella utilize such mechanisms. These bacteria attach to the
epithelial cells of the large and small intestines, respectively, and, following their entry
into these cells by induced pinocytosis, multiply rapidly and penetrate laterally into
adjacent epithelial cells. The mechanisms for such attachment and movement are
unknown. Some species of salmonellae produce, in addition, exotoxins which induce
diarrhoea (section 4.1). There are innumerable species and serotypes of Salmonella.
These are primarily parasites of animals, but are important to humans in that they
colonize farm animals such as pigs and poultry and ultimately infect such food.
Salmonella food poisoning (salmonellosis), therefore, is commonly associated with
inadequately cooked meats, eggs and also with cold meat products which have been
incorrectly stored following contact with the uncooked product. Dependent upon the
severity of the lesions induced in the gut wall by these pathogens, red blood cells and
phagocytes pass into the gut lumen, along with plasma, and cause the classic 'bloody
flux' ofbacillary dysentery. Similar erosive lesions are produced by some enteropathic
strains of E. coli.
Virus infections such as influenza and the 'common cold' (in reality 300-400
different strains of rhinovirus) infect epithelial cells of the respiratory tract and naso-
pharynx, respectively. Release of the virus, after lysis of the host cells, is to the void
rather than to subepithelial tissues. The epithelia is further infected resulting in general
degeneration of the tracts. Such damage predisposes the respiratory tract to infection
with opportunistic pathogens such as Neisseria meningitidis and Haemophilus influenzae.
4.3 Invasive pathogens
Invasive pathogens either aggressively invade the tissues surrounding the primary
site of infection or are passively transported around the body in the blood, lymph,
cerebrospinal fluid or pleural fluids. Some, especially aggressive organisms, do both,
setting up a number of expansive secondary sites of infection in various organs.
4.3.1 Active spread
Active spread of microorganisms through normal subepithelial tissues is difficult
in that the gel-like nature of the intracellular materials physically inhibits bacterial
movement. Induced death and lysis of the tissue cells, in addition, produces a highly
viscous fluid, partly due to undenatured DNA. Physical damage, such as wounds, rapidly
seal with fibrin clots, thus reducing the effective routes of spread for opportunist
pathogens. Organisms such as Str. pyogenes, CI. perfringens, and to some extent the
staphylococci, are able to establish themselves in tissues by virtue of their ability to
produce a wide range of extracellular enzyme toxins. These are associated with killing
of tissue cells, degradation of intracellular materials and mobilization of nutrients, and
will be considered briefly.
1 Haemolysins are produced by most of the pathogenic staphylococci and streptococci.
They have a lytic effect on red blood cells, releasing iron-containing nutrients.
2 Fibrinolysins are produced by both staphylococci (staphylokinase) and streptococci
(streptokinase). These toxins dissolve fibrin clots, formed by the host around wounds
and lesions to seal them, by indirect activation of plasminogen, thereby increasing the
likelihood of organism spread. Streptokinase may be employed clinically in conjunction
with streptodornase (Chapter 25) in the treatment of thrombosis.
3 Collagenases and hyaluronidases are produced by most of the aggressive invaders.
These are able to dissolve collagen fibres and hyaluronic acids which function as
intracellular cements. Their loss causes the tissues to break up and produce oedematous
lesions.
4 Phospholipases are produced by organisms such as CI. perfringens (cc-toxin). These
kill tissue cells by hydrolysing phospholipids present in cell membranes.
5 Amylases, peptidases and deoxyribonuclease mobilize many nutrients that are
released from lysed cells. They also decrease the viscosity of fluids present at the lesion
by depolymerization of their biopolymer substrates.
Organisms possessing the above toxins, particularly those also possessing leuco-
cidins, are likely to cause expanding oedematous lesions at the primary site of
infection. In the case of CI. perfringens, a soil microorganism which has become
adapted to a saprophytic mode of life, when it causes infection due to accidental
contamination of deep wounds there ensues a process similar to that seen during
the decomposition of a carcass. This organism is most likely to spread through
tissues when blood circulation, and therefore oxygen tension, in the affected areas is
minimal.
Abscesses formed by streptococci and staphylococci can be deep seated in soft
tissues or associated with infected wounds or skin lesions. These become localized
through the deposition of fibrin capsules around the infective site. Fibrin deposition is
Microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology 83
partly a response of the host tissues and partly a function of enzyme toxins such as
coagulase. Phagocytic white blood cells can migrate into these abscesses in large
numbers to produce significant quantities of pus; this might be digested by other
phagocytes in the latter stages of the infection or discharged to the exterior or to the
capillary and lymphatic network. In the latter case, blocked capillaries might serve as
sites for secondary lesions. Toxins liberated from the microorganisms during their growth
in such abscesses can freely diffuse to the rest of the body to set up a generalized
toxaemia.
Particular strains of salmonellae (section 4.2) such as Sal. typhi, Sal. paratyphi and
Sal. typhimurium are able not only to penetrate into intestinal epithelial cells and produce
exotoxins but also to penetrate beyond into subepithelial tissues. These organisms
therefore produce, in addition to the usual symptoms of salmonellosis, a characteristic
systemic disease (typhoid and enteric fever). Following recovery from such infection
the organism is commonly found associated with the gall bladder. In this state, the
recovered person will excrete the organism and form a reservoir for the infection of
others.
4. 3. 2 Passive spread
When invading microorganisms have crossed the epithelial barriers they will almost
certainly be taken up, with lymph, in the lymphatic ducts and be delivered to the filtration
and immune systems of the local lymph nodes. Sometimes this serves to spread infections
further around the body. Eventually, spread may occur from local to regional lymph
nodes and thence to the bloodstream. Direct entry to the bloodstream from the primary
portal of entry is rare and will only occur when the organism damages the blood vessels
or if it is injected directly into them. This might be the case following an insect bite or
surgery. Bacteraemia such as this will often lead to secondary infections remote from
the original portal of entry.
5 Damage to tissues
Damage caused to the host organism through infection can be direct and relate to the
destructive presence, or to the production, of toxins by microorganisms in particular
target organs; or it can be indirect and relate to interactions of the antigenic components
of the pathogen with the host's immune system. Effects can therefore be closely related
to, or remote from, the target organ.
Symptoms of the infection can in some instances be highly specific, relating to a
single, precise pharmacological response to a particular toxin; or they might be non-
specific and relate to the usual response of the body to particular types of trauma.
Damage induced by infection will therefore be considered in these categories.
5.1 Direct damage
5.1.1 Specific effects
The consequences of infection to the host depend to a large extent upon the tissue or
84 Chapter 4
organ involved. Soft tissue infections of skeletal muscle are likely to be less damaging
than, for instance, infections of the heart muscle and central nervous system. Infections
of the epithelial cells of small blood vessels can produce anoxia or necrosis in the
tissues they supply. Cell and tissue damage is generally the result of direct local action
by the microorganisms, usually concerning action at cell membranes. The target cells
are usually phagocytic cells and are generally killed (e.g. by Brucella, Listeria,
Mycobacterium). Interference with membrane function, through the action of enzymes
such as phospholipase, cause the affected cells to leak. When lysosomal membranes
are affected, then lysosomal enzymes disperse into the cells and tissues causing them,
in turn, to autolyse. This is mediated through the vast battery of enzyme toxins available
to these organisms (section 4). If enough of these toxins are produced to enter the
circulation then a generalized toxaemia might result. During their growth, other
pathogens liberate toxins with precise pharmacological actions. Diseases mediated in
this manner include diphtheria, tetanus and scarlet fever.
In diphtheria, the organism C. diphtheriae confines itself to epithelial surfaces of
the nose and throat and produces a powerful toxin which affects the elongation factor
involved in protein biosynthesis. The heart and peripheral nerves are particularly affected
resulting in myocarditis (inflammation of the myocardium) and neuritis (inflammation
of a nerve). Little damage is produced at the infective site.
Tetanus occurs when CI. tetani, ubiquitous in the soil and faeces, contaminates
wounds, especially deep puncture-type lesions. These might be minor traumas such as
a splinter, or major ones such as battle injury. At these sites, tissue necrosis and possibly
microbial growth reduce the oxygen tension to allow this anaerobe to multiply. Its
growth is accompanied by the production of a highly potent toxin which passes up
peripheral nerves and diffuses locally within the central nervous system. It acts like
strychnine by affecting normal function at the synapses. Since the motor nerves of the
brain stem are the shortest, the cranial nerves are the first affected, with twitches of the
eyes and spasms of the jaw (lockjaw).
A related organism, CI. botulinum, produces a similar toxin which may contaminate
food if the organism has grown in it and conditions are favourable for anaerobic growth.
Meat pastes and pates are likely sources. This toxin interferes with acetylcholine release
at cholinergic synapses and also acts at neuromuscular junctions. Death from this toxin
eventually results from respiratory failure.
Many other organisms are capable of producing intoxication following their growth
on foods. Most common amongst these are the staphylococci and particular strains of
Bacillus such as B. cereus. Staphylococci such as Staph, aureus produce an enterotoxin
which acts upon the vomiting centres of the brain. Nausea and vomiting therefore
follow ingestion of contaminated foods, the delay between eating and vomiting varying
between 1 and 6 hours, depending on the amount of toxin ingested. Bacillus cereus
also produces an emetic toxin but its actions are delayed and vomiting can follow up to
20 hours after ingestion. The latter organism is often associated with rice products and
will propagate when the rice is cooked (spore activation) and subsequently reheated
after a period of storage.
Scarlet fever is produced following infection with certain strains of Strep, pyogenes.
These produce a potent toxin which causes an erythrogenic skin rash which accompanies
the more usual effects of a streptococcal infection.
Microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology 85
5. 7 .2 Non-specific effects
If the infective agent damages an organ and affects its functioning, this can manifest
itself as a series of secondary disease features. Thus, diabetes may result from an infection
of the islets of Langerhans, paralysis or coma from infections of the central nervous
system, and kidney malfunction from loss of tissue fluids and its associated hyper-
glycaemia. In this respect virus infections almost inevitably result in the death and
lysis of the host cells. This will result in some loss of function by the target organ.
Similarly, exotoxins and endotoxins can also be implicated in non-specific symptoms,
even when they have fairly well-defined pharmacological actions. Thus, a number
of intestinal pathogens (e.g. V. cholerae, E. coli) produce potent exotoxins which
affect vascular permeability. These generally act through adenyl cyclase, raising the
intracellular levels of cyclic AMP (adenosine monophosphate). As a result of this
the cells lose water and electrolytes to the surrounding medium, the gut lumen. A
common consequence of these related, yet distinct, toxins is acute diarrhoea and
haemoconcentration. Kidney malfunction might well follow and in severe cases lead
to death. Symptomologically there is little difference between these conditions and
food poisoning induced by ingestion of staphylococcal enterotoxin. The latter toxin is
formed by the organisms during their growth on infected food substances and is absorbed
actively from the gut. It acts, not at the epithelial cells of the gut, but at the vomiting
centre of the central nervous system causing nausea, vomiting and diarrhoea within
6 hours.
Endotoxins form part of the cell envelopes of some bacterial species (see Chapter
1). They are shed into the surrounding medium during growth and following autolysis
of the infecting organism. Endotoxins tend to be less toxic than exotoxins and less
precise in their action. Classic endotoxins are the lipopolysaccharide/protein components
of Gram-negative cells, i.e. E. coli and the salmonellae. Various toxic effects have been
attributed to these endotoxins but their role in the establishment of the infection, if any,
remains unclear. The most notable effect is their pyrogenicity (Chapters 1 and 18).
This relates to release by the endotoxin of endogenous pyrogen from macrophages and
phagocytes. Elevation of body temperature follows within 1-2 hours.
5.2 Indirect damage
Inflammatory materials are released from necrotic cells and directly from the infective
agent. It is not always clear to what extent these can be related to actions by the host or
by the pathogen. Inflammation causes swelling, pain and reddening of the tissues, and
sometimes loss of function of the organs affected. These reactions may sometimes be
the major sign and symptom of the disease.
Many microorganisms minimize the effects of the host's defence system against
them by mimicking the antigenic structure of the host tissue. The eventual immunological
response of the host to infection then leads to the autoimmune destruction of itself.
Thus, infections with Mycoplasma pneumoniae can lead to production of antibody
against normal Group O erythrocytes with concomitant haemolytic anaemia.
If antigen, released from the infective agent, is soluble then antigen-antibody
complexes are produced. When antibody is present at a concentration equal to or greater
86 Chapter 4
than the antigen, such as in the case of an immune host, then these complexes precipitate
and are removed by macrophages present in the lymph nodes. When antigen is present
in excess the complexes, being small, continue to circulate in the blood and are eventually
filtered off by the kidneys, becoming lodged in kidney glomeruli. A localized
inflammatory response in the kidneys might then be initiated by the complement system
(Chapter 14). Eventually the filtering function of the kidneys becomes impaired,
producing symptoms of chronic glomerulonephritis.
Recovery from infection: exit of microorganisms
The primary requirement for recovery is that multiplication of the infective agent is
brought under control, that it ceases to spread around the body and that the damaging
consequences of its presence are arrested and repaired. Such control and recovery
are brought about by the combined functioning of the phagocytic, immune and
complement systems. A successful pathogen will not seriously debilitate its host; rather,
the continued existence of the host must be ensured in order to maximize the
dissemination of the pathogen within the host population. Ideally, the organism must
persist within the host for the remainder of its lifespan and be constantly released to the
environment. Whilst this is the case for a number of virus infections and for some
bacterial ones, it is not common. Generally, recovery from infection is accompanied by
complete destruction of the organism and restoration of a sterile tissue. Alternatively,
the organism might return to a commensal relationship with the host on the epithelial
and skin surface.
Where the infective agent is an obligate pathogen, a means must exist for it to
infect other individuals before its eradication from the host organism. The route of exit
is commonly related to the original portal of entry. Thus, pathogens of the intestinal
tract are liberated in the faeces and might easily contaminate food and drinking water.
Infective agents of the respiratory tract might be inhaled during coughing, sneezing or
talking, survive in the associated water droplets and infect nearby individuals. Infective
agents transmitted by insect and animal vectors may be spread through the same vectors,
the insects/animals having been infected by the diseased host. For some 'fragile'
organisms (e.g. N. gonorrhoeae, Treponema pallidum), direct contact transmission is
the only means of transmission. In these cases, intimate contact between epithelial
membranes, such as occurs during sexual contact, is required for transfer to occur. For
opportunist pathogens, such as those associated with wound infections, transfer is less
important because the pathogenic role is minor. Rather, the natural habitat of the
organism serves as a constant reservoir for infection.
Epidemiology of infectious disease
Spread of a microbial disease through a population of individuals can be considered as
vertical (transferred from one generation to another) or horizontal (transfer occurring
within genetically unrelated groups). The latter can be divided into common- source
outbreaks, relating to infection of a number of susceptible individuals from a single
reservoir of the infective agent (i.e. infected foods), or propagated-source outbreaks,
where each individual provides a new source for the infection of others.
Microbial pathogenicity and epidemiology 87
Common-source outbreaks are characterized by a sharp onset of reported cases
over the course of a single incubation period and relate to a common experience of the
infected individuals. The number of cases will persist until the source of the infection
is removed. If the source of the infection remains (i.e. a reservoir of insect vectors)
then the disease becomes endemic to the exposed population with a constant rate of
infection. Propagated-source outbreaks, on the other hand, show a gradual increase in
reported cases over a number of incubation periods and eventually decline when the
majority of susceptibles in the population have been affected. Factors contributing to
propagated outbreaks of infectious disease are the infectivity of the agent (I), the
population density (P) and the numbers of susceptible individuals in it (F). The likelihood
of an epidemic is given by the product of these three factors (i.e. FIP). Changes in any
one of them might initiate an outbreak of the disease in epidemic proportions. Thus,
reported cases of particular diseases show periodicity, with outbreaks of epidemic
proportion occurring only when FIP exceeds certain critical threshold values, related
to the infectivity of the agent. Outbreaks of measles and chickenpox therefore tend to
occur annually in the late summer amongst children attending school for the first time.
This has the effect of concentrating all susceptible individuals in one, often confined,
space at the same time. The proportion of susceptibles can be reduced through rigorous
vaccination programmes (Chapter 16). Provided that the susceptible population does
not exceed the threshold FIP value, then herd immunity against epidemic spread of the
disease will be maintained.
Certain types of infectious agent (e.g. influenza virus) are able to combat herd
immunity such as this through undergoing major antigenic changes. These render the
majority of the population susceptible, and their occurrence is often accompanied by
spread of the disease across the entire globe (pandemics).
Further reading
Bisno A.L. & Waidvogel F. A. (1994) Infections Associated with Indwelling Medical Devices, 2nd edn.
Washington: American Society for Microbiology.
Minis C.A. (1991) The Pathogenesis of Infectious Disease, 4th edn. London: Academic Press.
Salyers A. A. & Drew D.D. (1994) Bacterial Pathogenesis; a Molecular Approach. Washington:
American Society for Microbiology Press.
Smith H. (1990) Pathogenicity and the microbe in vivo. J Gen Microbiol, 136, 377-393.
Part 2
Antimicrobial Agents
The theme of this section is antimicrobial agents; these are considered in three categories:
first, antibiotics and de novo chemically synthesized chemotherapeutic agents; second,
non-antibiotic antimicrobial compounds (disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives);
and third, immunological products. The subjects covered comprise the manufacture,
evaluation and properties of antibiotics; the evaluation and properties of disinfectants,
antiseptics and preservatives; the fundamentals of immunology; and the manufacture,
quality control and clinical uses of immunological products. The mechanisms of action
of antibiotics and non-antibiotic agents are also considered, together with an account
of the ever-present problem of natural and acquired resistance. The principles involved
in the clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs are discussed in Chapter 6.
Problems of recent years involving listeriosis, salmonellosis, giardiasis and
Legionnaire's disease have received attention, as have the re-emergence of tuberculosis
and the importance of methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRS A) and
vancomycin-resistant enterococci (VRE).
Appropriate suggestions for additional reading are provided.
Types of antibiotics and synthetic
antimicrobial agents
1
Antibiotics
8.1
Vancomycin
1.1
Definition
8.2
Teicoplanin
1.2
Sources
9
Miscellaneous antibacterial antibiotics
2
/3-lactam antibiotics
9.1
Chloramphenicol
2.1
Penicillins and mecillinams
9.2
Fusidic acid
2.2
Cephalosporins
9.3
Lincomycins
2.2.1
Structure-activity relationships
9.4
Mupirocin (pseudomonic acid A)
2.2.2
Pharmacokinetic properties
2.3
Clavams
10
Antifungal antibiotics
2.4
1-oxacephems
10.1
Griseofulvin
2.5
1-carbapenems
10.2
Polyenes
2.5.1
Olivanic acids
2.5.2
Thienamycin and imipenem
11
Synthetic antimicrobial agents
2.6
1-carbacephems
11.1
Sulphonamides
2.7
Nocardicins
11.2
Diaminopyrimidine derivatives
2.8
Monobactams
11.3
Co-trimoxazole
2.9
Penicillanic acid derivatives
11.4
Dapsone
2.10
Hypersensitivity
11.5
Antitubercular drugs
11.6
Nitrofuran compounds
3
Tetracycline group
11.7
4-quinolone antibacterials
3.1
Tetracyclines
11.8
Imidazole derivatives
3.2
Glycylcyclines
11.9
Flucytosine
11.10
Synthetic allylamines
4
Rifamycins
11.11
Synthetic thiocarbamates
5 Aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
antibiotics
6 Macrolides
6.1 Older members
6.2 Newer members
7 Polypeptide antibiotics
12
Antiviral drugs
12.1
Amantadines
12.2
Methisazone
12.3
Nucleoside analogues
12.4
Non-nucleoside compounds
12.5
Interferons
8
Glycopeptide antibiotics
13 Drug combinations
14 Further reading
Antibiotics
Definition
An antibiotic was originally defined as a substance, produced by one microorganism,
which inhibited the growth of other microorganisms. The advent of synthetic methods
has, however, resulted in a modification of this definition and an antibiotic now refers
to a substance produced by a microorganism, or to a similar substance (produced wholly
or partly by chemical synthesis), which in low concentrations inhibits the growth of
other microorganisms. Chloramphenicol was an early example. Antimicrobial agents
Types of antibiotics 91
such as sulphonamides (section 11.1) and the 4-quinolones (section 11.7), produced
solely by synthetic means, are often referred to as antibiotics.
Sources
There are three major sources from which antibiotics are obtained.
1 Microorganisms. For example, bacitracin and polymyxin are obtained from some
Bacillus species; streptomycin, tetracyclines, etc. from Streptomyces species; gentamicin
from Micromonospora purpurea; griseofulvin and some penicillins and cephalosporins
from certain genera (Penicillium, Acremonium) of the family Aspergillaceae; and mono-
bactams from Pseudomonas acidophila and Gluconobacter species. Most antibiotics
in current use have been produced from Streptomyces spp.
2 Synthesis. Chloramphenicol is now usually produced by a synthetic process.
3 Semisynthesis. This means that part of the molecule is produced by a fermentation
process using the appropriate microorganism and the product is then further modified
by a chemical process. Many penicillins and cephalosporins (section 2) are produced
in this way.
/Mactam antibiotics
There are several different types of /3-lactam antibiotics that are valuable, or potentially
important, antibacterial compounds. These will be considered briefly.
Penicillins and mecillinams
The penicillins (general structure, Fig. 5. 1 A) may be considered as being of the following
types.
1 Naturally occurring. For example, those produced by fermentation of moulds such
as Penicillium notatum and P. chrysogenum. The most important examples are
benzylpenicillin (penicillin G) and phenoxymethylpenicillin (penicillin V).
2 Semisynthetic. In 1959, scientists at Beecham Research Laboratories succeeded in
isolating the penicillin 'nucleus', 6-aminopenicillanic acid (6-APA; Fig. 5.1 A: R
represents H). During the commercial production of benzylpenicillin, phenylacetic
(phenylethanoic) acid (C6H 5 .CH 2 .COOH) is added to the medium in which the
Penicillium mould is growing (see Chapter 7). This substance is a precursor of the side
G ft H 6 CH s CO« r NK
8
HO'H S^ .CH
! 3
coo" i 1 ^J+w ' — coo
y^*&-
OH,'h
Fig. 5.1 A, General structure of penicillins; B, removal of side chain from benzylpenicillin; C, site
of action of /3-lactamases.
chain (R; see Fig. 5.2) in benzylpenicillin. Growth of the organism in the absence of
phenylacetic acid led to the isolation of 6-APA; this has a different R F value from
benzylpenicillin which allowed it to be detected chromatographically.
A second method of producing 6-APA came with the discovery that certain
microorganisms produce enzymes, penicillin amidases (acylases), which catalyse the
removal of the side chain from benzylpenicillin (Fig. 5. IB).
Acylation of 6-APA with appropriate substances results in new penicillins being
produced which differ only in the nature of the side chain (Table 5.1; Fig. 5.2). Some of
these penicillins have considerable activity against Gram-negative as well as Gram-
positive bacteria, and are thus broad-spectrum antibiotics. Pharmacokinetic properties
may also be altered.
The sodium and potassium salts are very soluble in water but they are hydrolysed
in solution, at a temperature-dependent rate, to the corresponding penicilloic acid (Fig.
5.3A; see also Fig. 9.3), which is not antibacterial. Penicilloic acid is produced at alkaline
pH or (via penicillenic acid; Fig. 5.3B) at neutral pH, but at acid pH a molecular
rearrangement occurs, giving penillic acid (Fig. 5.3C). Instability in acid medium
logically precludes oral administration, since the antibiotic may be destroyed in the
stomach; for example at pH 1.3 and 35 °C methicillin has a half-life of only 2-3 minutes
and is therefore not administered orally, whereas ampicillin, with a half -life of 600
minutes, is obviously suitable for oral use.
Benzylpenicillin is rapidly absorbed and rapidly excreted. However, certain sparingly
soluble salts of benzylpenicillin (benzathine, benethamine and procaine) slowly release
penicillin into the circulation over a period of time, thus giving a continuous high
concentration in the blood. Simultaneous administration of benzylpenicillin (see
Fortified Procaine Penicillin, BP) may be given initially.
Pro-drugs (e.g. carbenicillin esters, ampicillin esters; Fig. 5.2, Table 5.1) are
hydrolysed by enzyme action after absorption from the gut mucosa to produce high
blood levels of the active antibiotic, carbenicillin and ampicillin, respectively.
Several bacteria produce an enzyme, / A -lactamase (penicillinase; see Chapter 9)
which may inactivate a penicillin by opening the /3-lactam ring, as in Fig. 5.1C. However,
some penicillins (Table 5.1) are considerably more resistant to this enzyme than are
others, and consequently may be extremely valuable in the treatment of infections
caused by /Mactamase-producing bacteria. In general, the penicillins are active against
Gram-positive bacteria; some members (e.g. ampicillin) are also effective against
Gram-negative bacteria though not Pseudomonas aeruginosa, whereas others (e.g.
carbenicillin) are active against this organism also. In particular, substituted ampicillins
(piperacillin and the ureidopenicillins, azlocillin and mezlocillin) appear to combine
the properties of ampicillin and carbenicillin. Temocillin is the first penicillin to be
completely stable to hydrolysis by ^lactamases produced by Gram-negative bacteria.
The 6-j3-amidinopenicillanic acids, mecillinam and its ester pivmecillinam, have
unusual antibacterial properties, since they are active against Gram-negative but not
Gram-positive organisms.
2.2 Cephalosporins
In the 1950s, a species of Cephalosporium (now known as Acremonium: see Chapter 7)
Types of antibiotics 93
Drvg
CjH*CH a CO
4 f y — c — c — oc^—
VAcH,
Drvg
C B H E OCH a CQ —
-™C0
7 /
/ \ CH.CO
nh,
10
CROO
r jl L4-IAA/
^S^ COON*
13
CH-CO —
1$
CH.CO
At 3: COOCHaCH^aCOOCsH*
C&DCHjCH^O.COO^Hp
TS
CH.CO —
MH
CO
— H- SQi.CHa
e
CH.CO-
11
CHLCO
5^ COONa
14
CH.CO —
NHn
At 3: 0O0CHiO.CC[CH5} a
O
17
// ^
CH.CO —
NH
CO
o
N-S
| )n.cm-
CH 7 — CH^ — 6ij
V
Drug
OCHr
OCHr
CI
e
;it
V V
CO
* /™^CH.OO-
COONs
12
■CH.OO-
DO
15
f \
-Ckco-
NHj
At 3: 000 CH —
^x
Jl
1S
— CH.CO —
NH
CO
N -NH
21 CH, CH» —
Cclj Grlj"
)u.CH =
H 2
At ?■ CO0CHiO.C fc C(CH a J 3
Table 5.1 The penicillins and mecillinams
Stability
to
^lactamases
Ore
lly
from
Activity versus
Staph.
Gram
Gram
Ps.
Hydrolysed
after
Penicillin
effective
aureus
-ve
-ve*
aeruginosa
Ester ;
absorption
1 Benzylpenicillin
-
2 Phenoxymethylpenicillin
+
-
-
3 Methicillin
.
+
+
4 Oxacillin
+
+
+
5 Cloxacillin
+
+
+
6 Flucloxacillin
+
+
+
7 Ampicillin
+
-
-
+
8 Amoxycillin
+
-
-
+
9 Carbenicillin
-
-
+
+
f
10 Ticarcillin
-
-
+
+ +
11 Temocillin
+
+
+
+ +
12 Carfecillin 1 „ . , ,
, . . .. .,,.. .1 Carbenicillin
13 Indanyl carbenicillin f
+
+
+
+
+ + + +
+ + + +
{carmaaclHfn) v J
14 Pivampicillin 1 A
„ -r _. .. ..... t Ampicillin
15 Talampicillin T
©SteTS
16 Bacampicillin J
+
+
+
-
-
+
+
+
f
f
f
f
17 Piperacillin 1 „ ,
•4-bA A ., 'u \ Substituted
18 Azlocillm f ... ..,,,
,,,. , K „. .... . .ampiciflms
19 Mezlocillin J
-
-
-
+ +
+ +
+ +
20 Mecillinam I 6-/3-amidino-
-
NR
V
+
21 Pivmecillinam J penicillins
+
NR
V
+
f +
* Except Ps. aeruginosa. All penicillins show some degree of activity against Gram-negative cocci.
+, applicable. -, inapplicable. NR, not relevant: mecillinam and pivmecillinam have no effect on Gram-positive bacteria;
V, variable.
Note: 1 Esters give high urinary levels. 2 Hydrolysis of these esters by enzyme action after absorption from the gut
mucosa gives rapid and high blood levels. 3 For additional information on resistance to /3-lactamase inactivation, see
Chapter 9. 4 In general, all penicillins are active against Gram-positive bacteria, although this may depend on the
resistance of the drug to /^lactamase (see column 3); thus, benzylpenicillin is highly active against strains of
Staphylococcus aureus which do not produce /3-lactamase, but is destroyed by /?-lactamase-producing strains. 5 Temocillin
(number 11) is less active against Gram-positive bacteria than ampicillin or the ureidopenicillins (substituted ampicillins).
isolated near a sewage outfall off the Sardinian coast was studied at Oxford and found
to produce the following antibiotics.
1 An acidic antibiotic, cephalosporin P (subsequently found to have a steroid-like
structure).
2 Another acidic antibiotic, cephalosporin N (later shown to be a penicillin, since its
structure was based on 6-APA).
Fig. 5.2 (Opposite) Examples of the side chain R in various penicillins (the numbers 1-19
correspond to those in Table 5.1). Numbers 20 (mecillinam) and 21 (pivmecillinam) are 6-/3-
amidinopenicillanic acids (mecillinams). Number 11 (temocillin) has a methoxy ( — OCH 3 ) group at
position 6a: this confers high /3-lactamase stability on the molecule.
Types of antibiotics 95
COQH
COOH
H 3
CH 3
C 6 H B CH 2 C N CH COOH
Fig. 5.3 Degradation products of benzylpenicillin in solution: A, penicilloic acid; B, penicillenic
acid; C, penillic acid.
3 Cephalosporin C, obtained during the purification of cephalosporin N; this is a true
cephalosporin, and from it has been obtained 7-aminocephalosporanic acid (7-ACA;
Fig. 5.4), the starting point for new cephalosporins.
Cephalosporins consist of a six-membered dihydrothiazine ring fused to a /3-lactam
ring. Thus, the cephalosporins (A -cephalosporins) are structurally related to the
penicillins (section 2.1). The position of the double bond in A -cephalosporins is
important, since A" -cephalosporins (double bond between 2 and 3) are not antibacterial
irrespective of the composition of the side-chains.
2.2.7 Structure-activity relationships
The activity of cephalosporins (and other /3-lactams) against Gram-positive bacteria
depends on antibiotic affinity for penicillin-sensitive enzymes (PSEs) detected in
practice as penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs). Resistance results from altered PBPs or,
more commonly, from / A -lactamases. Activity against Gram-negative bacteria depends
upon penetration of j6-lactams through the outer membrane, resistance to A -lactamases
found in the periplasmic space and binding to PBPs. (For further information on
mechanisms of action and bacterial resistance, see Chapters 8 and 9.) Modifications of
the cephem nucleus (Fig. 5.4) at la, i.e. R 3 , by addition of methoxy groups increase
/^lactamase stability but decrease activity against Gram-positive bacteria because
of reduced affinity for PBPs. Side-chains containing a 2-aminothiazolyl group at
R , e.g. cefotaxime, ceftizoxime, ceftriaxone and ceftazidime, yield cephalosporins
with enhanced affinity for PBPs of Gram-negative bacteria and streptococci. An
iminomethoxy group ( — C=N.OCH3) in, for example, cefuroxime provides A -lactamase
stability against common plasmid-mediated A -lactamases. A propylcarboxy group
((CH3)2 — C — COOH) in, for example, ceftazidime increases / A -lactamase resistance
and also provides activity against Ps. aeruginosa, whilst at the same time reducing j8-
lactamase induction capabilities.
Further examples of the interplay of factors in antibacterial activity are demonstrated
by the following findings.
96 Chapter 5
1 7cc-methoxy substitution of cefuroxine, cefamandole and cephapirin produces
reduced activity against E. coli because of a lower affinity for PBPs;
2 similar substitution of cefoxitin produces enhanced activity against E. coli because
of greater penetration through the outer membrane of the organism.
In cephalosporins susceptible to /?-lactamases, opening of the y8-lactam ring occurs
2 2
with concomitant loss of the substituent at R (except in cephalexin, where R" represents
H; see Fig. 5.4). This is followed by fragmentation of the molecule. Provided that they
are not inactivated by A -lactamases, the cephalosporins generally have a broad spectrum
of activity, although there may be a wide variation. Haemophilus influenzae, for example,
is particularly susceptible to cefuroxime; see also Table 5.2.
Pharmacokinetic properties
Pharmacokinetic properties of the cephalosporins depend to a considerable extent on
their chemical nature, e.g. the substituent R\ The 3-acetoxymethyl compounds such
as cephalothin, cephapirin and cephacetrile are converted in vivo by esterases to the
antibacterially less active 3-hydroxymethyl derivatives and are excreted partly as such.
The rapid excretion means that such cephalosporins have a short half-life in the body.
Replacement of the 3-acetoxymethyl group by a variety of groups has rendered other
cephalosporins much less prone to esterase attack. For example, cephaloridine has an
internally compensated betaine group at position 3 (R~) and is metabolically stable.
Cephalosporins such as the 3-acetoxymethyl derivatives described above,
cephaloridine and cefazolin are inactive when given orally. For good oral absorption,
the 7-acyl group (R 1 ) must be based on phenylglycine and the amino group must remain
unsubstituted. The R" substituent must be small, non-polar and stable; a methyl group
is considered desirable but might decrease antibacterial activity. Earlier examples of
oral cephalosporins are provided by cephalexin, cefaclor and cephradine (Table 5.2).
Newer oral cephalosporins such as cefixime, cefpodoxime and ceftibuten show increased
stability to / A -lactamases produced by Gram-negative bacteria.
Like cefuroxime atexil (also given orally), cefpodoxime is an absorbable ester.
During absorption, esterases remove the ester side-chain, liberating the active substance
into the blood. Cefixime and ceftibuten are non-ester drugs characterized by activity
against Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria, although Ps. aeruginosa is resistant.
Parenterally administered cephalosporins that are metabolically stable and that are
resistant to many types of jS -lactamases include cefuroxime, cefamandole, cefotaxime
and cefoxitin, which has a 7a-methoxy group at R". Injectable cephalosporins with
anti-pseudomonal activity include cefsulodin and cefoperazone.
Side-chains of the various cephalosporins, including those most recently developed,
are presented in Fig. 5.4 and a summary of the properties of these antibiotics in Table
5.2.
Clavams
The clavams differ from penicillins (based on the penam structure) in two respects,
namely the replacement of S in the penicillin thiazolidine ring (Fig. 5.1) with oxygen
in the clavam oxazolidine ring (Fig. 5.5 A) and the absence of the side-chain at position
Types of antibiotics 97
6. Clavulanic acid, a naturally occurring clavam isolated from Streptomyces clavuligerus,
has poor antibacterial activity but is a potent inhibitor of staphylococcal jft-lactamase
and of most types of /^lactamases produced by Gram-negative bacteria, especially
those with a 'penicillinase' rather than a 'cephalosporinase' type of action.
A significant development in chemotherapy has been the introduction into clinical
practice of a combination of clavulanic acid with a broad-spectrum, but jS-lactamase-
■"ti-* :LL -CH s .-R J
COO-
Cflitflfllfuparin-
7-ACA
H--
— O.C0.<:H 3
C«E*fl«trik N=CjCH z .CC? — O.-CO.CH]
■cri 2 oo — \ /
■Dsphalcirrtllne
C*pi[ihal*!4iri
CeffuTD»i ma-
Co Fault in
Cfffflfil&r
CaphalnEhin
Ccfaulndin
CH.CD — H
c »
NU,
CJCO —
II
N.Q.CH:,
— D.-caNHj
CH-.CO — — O.CO-NH-
CH.CO— —CI
CH bCO —
OCOCHj
Cephaplrtn h|' ^—s.CHpCO— — OCOCH,,
S0 3 Nfl
Cti-
Gafwortn
Daphrpdi-nB
Ce-farnundeil*
N =
\
fv-cHjCa —
N-
o
ch.cq
j
*jh 2
CH.CO—
N N
— H
N N
II 1I
Isl-
^
Fig. 5.4 (Above and opposite) General structure of cephalosporins and examples of side-chains R
and R 2 . (R 3 is — OCH 3 in cefoxitin and cefotetan and — H in other members.) Cephalosporins
containing an ester group at position 3 are liable to attack by esterases in vivo.
CGphaloipcwin
R 1
taphilgsporin C CHJCH^JCO
1/
— o.co.cn,
HN 1
Carol juxime
N- -r-C
c.co— — a.co.cH 3
H ] N H *^S^ *>OCH,
Cehi
zaximfl-
K^-^S
N— -i— C-CO
U
Ceftriaxone
H,N
■c_co-
ll
H |ir*fltaadirf
— CH 7 — H J J
Ceftazidime
N- 1— C
I
COONa
Cerwecan H 3 NOC
HOQC
y
C CH-
N — N
I
Ch 3
Cetopenszon*
HQ
CH —
O 1
h — N
II ■■
N J
CHj
N
C>?fik'rYifr
H..N
X
CCO
II
N
— CM,
h . .. « — r-c.co —
CfiftUHHBn
H 2 N &
N r
Hj.N S
C.CO
II
cw
— O^Ch t |A| j- CO
1 I
I
h,c-cui
CH 2
COOH
N r
icTpirDrnt 11
C.CO
— N -)— WH
"ri 2 N S N
CnEfpimti
N r
H.N 5 ^
c.co —
H a C
\ ./s
iv
OCtt:
\^
Fit ^-^ Cwirintftt/-
T^fpes flfansibiotics 99
Table 5.2 The cephalosporins'
'Properties
Group
Examples
CO
CO
CD i° "
CO «ii. CO
B 4-< CO = §
LU LU «b. ^
01
Comment
Oral cephalosporins
Cephalexin,
cephradine,
cefaclor,
cefadroxil
++
++
+
V
V
+
(+)
R
Cefixime,
+
++
++
V
V
++
++
R
Newer oral
ceftibuten
cephalosporins
Cefuroxime atexil
++
++
++
V
V
++
++
R
Absorbable ester
Cefpodoxime
++
++
++
V
V
++
++
R
Absorbable ester
Injectable
Cephaloridine,
++
+
+
V
V
+
(+)
R
cephalosporins
cephalothin,
(/3-lactamase-
cephacetrile,
susceptible)
cefazolin
Injectable
Cefuroxime,
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
R
Cefoxitin shows
cephalosporins
cefoxitin,
activity
(improved
cefamandole
against
/3-lactamase
Bacteroides
stability)
fragilis
Injectable
Cefotaxime,
++
++
+++
+++
+++
+++
+++
R (ceftazidime)
Latamoxef has
cephalosporins
ceftazidime,
+++)
high activity
(still higher
ceftizoxime,
against B.
A -lactamase
ceftriaxone (also
fragilis
stability)
the oxacephem,
latamoxef,
section 2.4)
Injectable
Cefoperazone
++
++
+
V
V
++
++
++
cephalosporins
Cefsulodin
(+)
++
(+)
R
+++
(anti-pseudomonal
activity)
Injectable
Cefotetan
(+)
+++
+++
R
Inhibits
cephalosporins
B. fragilis
(other)
* Early cephalosporins were spelt with 'ph', more recently with T.
t Methicillin-resistant Staph, aureus (MRSA) strains are resistant to cephalosporins.
t Enterococci are resistant to cephalosporins.
+++, excellent; ++, good; +, fair; (+), poor; R, resistant; V, variable.
susceptible, penicillin, amoxycillin. The spectrum of activity has been extended to
include Ps. aeruginosa by combining clavulanic acid with the /3-lactamase-susceptible
penicillin, ticarcillin.
2.4
1-oxacephems
In the 1-oxacephems, for example latamoxef (moxalactam, Fig. 5.5B), the sulphur
100 Chapter 5
CH 3 OH
f/ #COOH
D
CH 3
N 4 0.
C0 2 Na
NH 2 (-N-CHNHi
inimipenamf
COOH
H
— tf
COO
COOH
/\\_CH-CT— NH
— L
COOH
Fig. 5.5 A, clavulanic acid; B, latamoxef; C, 1-carbapenems; D, olivanic acid (general structure); E,
thienamycin; F, meropenem; G, 1-carbacephems; H, loracarbef.
2.5
atom in the dihydrothiazine cephalosporin ring system is replaced by oxygen. This
would tend to make the molecule chemically less stable and more susceptible to
inactivation by lactamases. The introduction of the 7-a-methoxy group (as in cefoxitin,
Fig. 5.4), however, stabilizes the molecule. Latamoxef is a broad-spectrum antibiotic
with a high degree of stability to most types of /^lactamases, and is highly active
against the anaerobe, B. frag His.
1-carbapenems
The 1-carbapenems (Fig. 5.5C) comprise a new family of fused /3-lactam antibiotics.
They are analogues of penicillins or clavams, the sulphur (penicillins) or oxygen
(calvams) atom being replaced by carbon. Examples are the olivanic acids (section
2.5.1) and thienamycin and imipenem (section 2.5.2).
Types of antibiotics 101
2.5.1 Olivanic acids
The olivanic acids (general structure, Fig. 5.5D) are naturally-occurring /3-lactam
antibiotics which have, with some difficulty, been isolated from culture fluids of Strep,
olivaceus. They are broad- spectrum antibiotics and are potent inhibitors of various
types of /3-lactamases.
2.5.2 Thienamycin and imipenem
Thienamycin (Fig. 5.5E) is a broad- spectrum /3-lactam antibiotic with high /3-lactamase
resistance. Unfortunately, it is chemically unstable, although the TV-formimidoyl
derivative, imipenem, overcomes this defect. Imipenem (Fig. 5.5E) is stable to most/3-
lactamases but it readily hydrolysed by kidney dehydropeptidase and is administered
with a dehydropeptidase inhibitor, cilastatin. Meropenem, which has yet to be marketed,
is more stable than imipenem to this enzyme and may thus be administered without
cilastatin. Its chemical structure is depicted in Fig. 5.5F.
2.6 1-carbacephems
In the 1-carbacephems (Fig. 5.5G), the sulphur in the six-membered dihydrothiazine
ring of the cephalosporins (based on the cephem structure, see Fig. 5.4) is replaced by
carbon. Loracarbef (Fig. 5.5H) is anew oral carbacephem which is highly active against
Gram-positive bacteria, including staphylococci.
2.7 Nocardicins
The nocardicins (A to G) have been isolated from a strain of Nocardia and comprise a
novel group of /3-lactam antibiotics (Fig. 5.6A). Nocardicin A is the most active member,
and possesses significant activity against Gram-negative but not Gram-positive bacteria.
2.8 Monobactams
The monobactams are monocyclic /3-lactam antibiotics produced by various strains
of bacteria. A novel nucleus, 3-aminomonobactamic acid (3-AMA, Fig. 5.6B), has
been produced from naturally-occurring monobactams and from 6-APA. Several
monobactams have been tested and one (aztreonam, Fig. 5.6C) has been shown to
be highly active against most Gram-negative bacteria and to be stable to most types of
/3-lactamases. It is not destroyed by staphylococcal /3-lactamases but is inactive against
all strains of Staph, aureus tested. Bacteroides fragilis, a Gram-negative anaerobe, is
resistant to aztreonam, probably by virtue of the /3-lactamase it produces, and this
conclusion is supported by the finding that a combination of the monobactam with
clavulanic acid (section 2.3) is ineffective against this organism.
2.9 Penicillanic acid derivatives
Penicillanic acid derivatives are synthetically produced /3-lactamase inhibitors.
102 Chapter 5
ooc
H,N
Vh.ch 2 .ch 2 o— ■ & ^
N.OH
H H
B
OH H 3 N
*^ N
so;
H,N
OOF^h
H^C
COOH
CDOCH 3 C.CO.C(CH 3 ^
Fig. 5.6 A, Nocardicin A; B, 3-aminomonobactamic acid (3-AMA); C, aztreonam; D, penicillanic
acid sulphone (sodium salt); E, /?-bromopenicillanic acid (sodium salt); F, tazobactam; G, sulbactam.
2.10
Penicillanic acid sulphone (Fig. 5.6D) protects ampicillin from hydrolysis by
staphylococcal / A -lactamase and some, but not all, of the A -lactamases produced by
Gram-negative bacteria, but is less potent than clavulanic acid. /3-bromopenicillanic
acid (Fig. 5.6E) inhibits some types of ^-lactamases.
Tazobactam (Fig. 5.6F) is a penicillanic acid sulphone derivative marketed as a
combination with piperacillin. Alone it has poor intrinsic antibacterial activity but is
comparable to clavulanic acid in inhibiting /J-lactamase activity.
Sulbactam (Fig. 5.6G) is a semisynthetic 6-desaminopenicillin sulphone structurally
related to tazobactam. Not only is it an effective inhibitor of many ^-lactamases but it
is also active alone against certain Gram-negative bacteria. It is used in combination
with ampicillin for clinical use.
Hypersensitivity
Some types of allergic reaction, for example immediate or delayed-type skin allergies,
serum-sickness-like reactions and anaphylactic reactions, may occur in a proportion of
patients given penicillin treatment. There is some, but not complete, cross-allergy with
cephalosporins.
Contaminants of high molecular weight (considered to have arisen from mycelial
residues from the fermentation process) may be responsible for the induction of allergy
to penicillins; their removal leads to a marked reduction in the antigenicity of the
Types of antibiotics 103
penicillin. It has also been found, however, that varying amounts of a non-protein
polymer (of unknown source) may also be present in penicillin and that this also may
be antigenic.
The interaction of a non-enzymatic degradation product, D-benzylpenicillenic
acid (formed by cleavage of the thiazolidine ring of benzylpenicillin in solution;
see Fig. 5.3B), with sulphydryl or amino groups in tissue proteins, to form hapten-
protein conjugates, is also of importance. In particular, the reaction between D-
benzylpenicillenic acid and the e-amino group of lysine (a,£-diamino-rc-caproic acid,
NH 2 (CH 2 )4.CH(NH2).COOH) residues is to be noted, because these D-benzylpenicilloyl
derivatives of tissue proteins function as complete penicillin antigens.
Tetracycline group
3.1
Tetracyclines
There are several clinically important tetracyclines, characterized by four cyclic rings
(Fig. 5.7). They consist of a group of antibiotics obtained as by-products from the
metabolism of various species of Streptomyces, although some members may now be
thought of as being semisynthetic. Thus, tetracycline (by catalytic hydrogenation) and
H,C CH-
CONH 2
Drug
R 1
R 2
R 3
Drug
R 1
R 2
R 3
1
H
OH CHo
V
OH
2
CI
OH CH 3
V
H
3
H
OH CH,
V
H
4
CI
OH H
V
H
5
H
CH 3
OH
6
H
CH 9
II
OH
7
CI
OH CH ?
V
H
8
CHo CHp
\3/ r H 2
N
H
(At 2:
CONHCH 2
OH)
9
H
^^—
H
Fig. 5.7 Tetracycline antibiotics: 1, oxytetracycline; 2, chlortetracycline; 3, tetracycline; 4,
demethylchlortetracycline; 5, doxycycline; 6, methacycline; 7, clomocycline; 8, minocycline; 9,
thiacycline (a thiatetracycline with a sulphur atom at 6).
104 Chapter 5
3.2
clomocycline are obtained from chlortetracycline, which is itself produced from
Strep, aureofaciens. Methacycline is obtained from oxytetracycline (produced from
Strep, rimosus) and hydrogenation of methacycline gives doxycycline. Demethyl-
chlortetracycline is produced by a mutant strain of Strep, aureofaciens. Minocycline is
a derivative of tetracycline.
The tetracyclines are broad-spectrum antibiotics, i.e. they have a wide range of
activity against Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria. Ps. aeruginosa is less
sensitive, but is generally susceptible to tetracycline concentrations obtainable in the
bladder. Resistance to the tetracyclines (see also Chapter 9) develops relatively slowly,
but there is cross-resistance, i.e. an organism resistant to one member is usually resistant
to all other members of this group. However, tetracycline-resistant Staph, aureus strains
may still be sensitive to minocycline. Suprainfection ('overgrowth') with naturally
tetracycline-resistant organisms, for example Candida albicans and other yeasts, and
filamentous fungi, affecting the mouth, upper respiratory tract or gastrointestinal tract,
may occur as a result of the suppression of tetracycline-susceptible microorganisms.
Thiatetracyclines contain a sulphur atom at position 6 in the molecule. One
derivative, thiacycline, is more active than minocycline against tetracycline-resistant
bacteria. Despite toxicity problems affecting its possible clinical use, thiacycline could
be the starting point in the development of a new range of important tetracycline-type
antibiotics.
The tetracyclines are no longer used clinically to the same extent as they were in
the past because of the increase in bacterial resistance.
Glycylcyclines
The glycylcyclines (Fig. 5.8) represent a new group of tetracycline analogues. They
are novel tetracyclines substituted at the C-9 position with a dimethylglycylamido side-
N(CH 3 );
(CH 3 ) 2 N
CONH ;
(CH 3 ) 2 N
(CH 3 ) 2 N
N(CH 3 );
CONH,
Fig. 5.8 Structures of two tetracycline analogues, which are members of the new glycylcycline
group of antibiotics: A, yV,A A -dimethylglycylamido-6-demethyl-6-deoxytetracycline; B, N,N-
dimethylglycylamidominocycline.
Types of antibiotics 105
chain. They possess activity against bacteria that express resistance to the older
tetracyclines by an efflux mechanism (Chapter 9).
Rifamycins
The rifamycins comprise a comparatively new antibiotic group and consist of rifamycins
A to E. From rifamycin B are produced rif amide (rifamycin B diethylamide) and
rifamycin SV, which is one of the most useful and least toxic of the rifamycins.
Rifampicin (Fig. 5.9), a bactericidal antibiotic, is active against Gram-positive
bacteria (including Mycobacterium tuberculosis) and some Gram-negative bacteria (but
not Enterobacteriaceae or pseudomonads). It has been found to have a greater bactericidal
effect against M. tuberculosis than other antituberculosis drugs, is active orally,
penetrates well into cerebrospinal fluid and is thus of use in the treatment of tuberculous
meningitis (see also section 11.5).
Rifampicin possesses significant bactericidal activity at very low concentrations
against staphylococci. Unfortunately, resistant mutants may arise very rapidly, both in
vitro and in vivo. It has thus been recommended that rifampicin should be combined
with another antibiotic, e.g. vancomycin, in the treatment of staphylococcal infections.
A newly introduced rifamycin is rifabutin. This may be used in the prophylaxis of
M. avium complex infections in immunocompromised patients and in the treatment,
with other drugs, of non-tuberculous mycobacterial infections.
Aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol antibiotics
Aminoglycoside antibiotics contain amino sugars in their structure. Deoxystreptamine-
containing members are neomycin, framycetin, gentamicin, kanamycin, tobramycin,
amikacin, netilmicin and sisomicin. Both streptomycin and dihydrostreptomycin contain
streptidine, whereas the aminocyclitol spectinomycin has no amino sugar. Examples
of chemical structures are provided in Fig. 5.10.
CH 3 CH a H
Fig. 5.9 Rifampicin.
106 Chapter 5
s
H<K\ L
*~^
^CH 2 AH
i*
^-OH
H a N
R 1
ft 3
Kanamveln A
NH 2
OH
K-anamycn B
NK 2
NH 2
KenamycLn C
OH
NH ?
D
CH 3 NH
R 1
GfifiLamiciri C^
Gentarnicin C,
Gentflinwin C a
H
HH,
LrTljji NPTu-rnjj
CHi
NH..
CH 2 .NH 2
MH 2
/^NH.OO CHJCH 2 .CH 2 .NH 2
OH
CH 2 OH
H 2 N
Fig. 5.10 Some aminoglycoside antibiotics: A, streptomycin; B, kanamycins; C, gentamicins;
D, amikacin.
Streptomycin was isolated by Waksman in 1944, and its activity against
M. tuberculosis ensured its use as a primary drug in the treatment of tuberculosis.
Unfortunately, its ototoxicity and the rapid development of resistance have tended
to modify its usefulness, and although it still remains a front-line drug against
tuberculosis it is usually used in combination with isoniazid and p(4) -aminosalicylic
acid (section 11.5). Streptomycin also shows activity against other types of bacteria,
Types of antibiotics 107
for example against various Gram-negative bacteria and some strains of staphylococci.
Dihydrostreptomycin has a similar antibacterial action but is more toxic.
Gentamicin (a mixture of three components, C, . Q a and C2; Fig. 5. IOC) is active
against many strains of Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria, including some
strains of Ps. aeruginosa. Its activity is greatly increased at pH values of about 8.
It is often administered in conjunction with carbenicillin to delay the development
of resistance. Gentamicin is the most important aminoglycoside antibiotic, is the
aminoglycoside of choice in the UK and is widely used for treating serious infections.
As with other members of this group, side-effects are dose related, dosage must be
given with care, plasma levels should be monitored and treatment should not normally
exceed 7 days.
Kanamycin (a complex of three antibiotics, A, B and C) is active in low con-
centrations against various Gram-positive (including penicillin-resistant staphylococci)
and Gram-negative bacteria. It is a recognized second-line drug in the treatment of
tuberculosis.
Paromomycin finds special use in the treatment of intestinal amoebiasis (it is
amoebicidal against Entamoeba histolytica) and of acute bacillary dysentery.
Neomycin is poorly absorbed from the alimentary tract when given orally, and is
usually used in the form of lotions and ointments for topical application against skin
and eye infections. Framycetin consists of neomycin B with a small amount of neomycin
C, and is usually employed locally.
A desirable property of newer aminoglycoside antibiotics is increased antibacterial
activity against resistant strains, especially improved stability to aminoglycoside-
modifying enzymes (Chapter 9). Alteration in the 3' position of kanamycin B (Fig.
5.1 OB) to give 3'-deoxy kanamycin B (tobramycin) changes the activity spectrum.
Amikacin (Fig. 5.10D) has a substituted aminobutyryl in the amino group at position 1
in the 2-deoxystreptamine ring and this enhances its resistance to some, but not all,
types of aminoglycoside-modifying enzymes, as it has fewer sites of modification.
Netilmicin (Af-ethylsisomicin) is a semisynthetic derivative of sisomicin but is less
susceptible than sisomicin to some types of bacterial enzymes.
The most important of these antibiotics are amikacin, tobramycin, netilmicin and
especially gentamicin.
Macrolides
6.1 Older members
The macrolide antibiotics are characterized by possessing molecular structures that
contain large (12-16-membered) lactone rings linked through glycosidic bonds with
amino sugars.
The most important members of this group are erythromycin (Fig. 5.11),
oleandomycin, triacetyloleandomycin and spiramycin. Erythromycin is active against
most Gram-positive bacteria, Neisseria, H. influenzae and Legionella pneumophila,
but not against the Enterobacteriaceae; its activity is pH-dependent, increasing with
pH up to about 8.5. Erythromycin estolate is more stable than the free base to the acid
of gastric juice and is thus employed for oral use. The estolate produces higher and
108 Chapters
Erythromycin
R
fl 1
A
OH
Me
B
H
Me
C
OH
H
Fig. 5.11 Erythromycins: erythromycin is a mixture of macrolide antibiotics consisting largely of
erythromycin A.
6.2
more prolonged blood levels and distributes into some tissues more efficiently than
other dosage forms. In vivo, it hydrolyses to give the free base.
Staphylococcus aureus is less sensitive to erythromycin than are pneumococci or
haemolytic streptococci, and there may be a rapid development of resistance, especially
of staphylococci, in vitro. However, in vivo with successful short courses of treatment,
resistance is not usually a serious clinical problem. On the other hand, resistance is
likely to develop when the antibiotic is used for long periods.
Oleandomycin, its ester (triacetyloleandomycin) and spiramycin have a similar range
of activity as erythromycin but are less active. Resistance develops only slowly in
clinical practice. However, cross-resistance may occur between all four members of
this group.
Newer members
The new macrolides are semisynthetic molecules that differ from the original com-
pounds in the substitution pattern of the lactone ring system (Table 5.3, Figs 5.12
and 5.13).
Table 5.3 New macrolide derivatives of erythromycin
Lactone ring
structure
Example
Derivative of erythromycin
14-membered
15-membered
Erythromycin
Roxithromycin
Clarithromycin
Dirithromycin
Azithromycin
Methoxy-ethoxy-methyloxine
Methyl
Oxazine
Deoxo-aza-methyl-homo
Types of antibiotics 109
CHgOCHjCHjOCHjO
B
CHs-S
-Vt
CH
3
O
ch 3 ch;
CH 3
J53
Chi
CH^
Fifir 5.12 Examples of n*u**r 14-
raernthensl macrolides: A,
clariihroirtjti-ft.
CH-
CHgCH
Ffc3»U Sirwrnjreof
azithromycin (L5-mcmbcrist
nuicrcikLdcl.
Roxithromycin has similar in vitro activity to erythromycin but enters leucocytes
and macrophages more rapidly with higher concentrations in the lysosomal component
of the phagocytic cells. It is likely to become an important drug against Legionella
pneumophila. Clarithromycin is also of potential value.
Polypeptide antibiotics
The polypeptide antibiotics comprise a rather diverse group. They include:
1 bacitracin, with activity against Gram-positive but not Gram-negative bacteria
(except Gram-negative cocci);
2 the polymyxins, which are active against many types of Gram-negative bacteria
(including Ps. aeruginosa but excluding cocci, Serratia marcescens and Proteus spp.)
but not Gram-positive organisms; and
3 the two antitubercular antibiotics, capreomycin and viomycin.
Because of its highly toxic nature when administered parenterally, bacitracin is
normally restricted to external usage.
The antibacterial activity of five members (A to E) of the polymyxin group is
of a similar nature. However, they are all nephrotoxic although this effect is much
reduced with polymyxins B and E (colistin). Colistin sulphomethate sodium is the
form of colistin used for parenteral administration. Sulphomyxin sodium, a mixture of
sulphomethylated polymyxin B and sodium bisulphite, has the action and uses of
polymyxin B sulphate, but is less toxic.
Capreomycin and viomycin show activity against M. tuberculosis and may be
regarded as being second-line antituberculosis drugs.
Glycopeptide antibiotics
Two important glycopeptide antibiotics are vancomycin and teicoplanin.
Vancomycin
Vancomycin is an antibiotic isolated from Strep, orientalis and has an empirical formula
of C 66 H7 5C1 2 N9 4 (mol. wt 1448); it has a complex tricyclic glycopeptide structure.
Modern chromatographically purified vancomycin gives rise to fewer side-effects than
the antibiotic produced in the 1950s.
Vancomycin is active against most Gram-positive bacteria, including methicillin-
resistant strains of Staph, aureus and Staph, epidermidis, Enterococcus faecalis,
Clostridium difficile and Gram-negative cocci. Gram-negative bacilli, mycobacteria
and fungi are not susceptible. Vancomycin-resistant enterococci are now posing a clinical
problem in hospitals, however.
Vancomycin is bactericidal to most susceptible bacteria at concentrations near its
minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) and is an inhibitor of bacterial cell wall
peptidoglycan synthesis, although at a site different from that of j3-lactam antibiotics
(Chapter 9).
Employed as the hydrochloride and administered by dilute intravenous injection,
vancomycin is indicated in potentially life-threatening infections that cannot be
treated with other effective, less toxic, antibiotics. Oral vancomycin is the drug
of choice in the treatment of antibiotic-induced pseudomembranous colitis asso-
ciated with the administration of antibiotics such as clindamycin and lincomycin
(section 9.3).
Types of antibiotics 111
82 Teicoplanin
Teicoplanin is a naturally occurring complex of five closely related tetracyclic molecules.
Its mode of action and spectrum of activity are essentially similar to vancomycin,
although it might be less active against some strains of coagulase-negative staphylococci.
Teicoplanin can be administered by intramuscular injection.
Miscellaneous antibacterial antibiotics
Antibiotics described here (Fig. 5.14) are those which cannot logically be considered
in any of the other groups above.
9.1 Chloramphenicol
Chloramphenicol (Fig. 5. 14A) has a broad spectrum of activity, but exerts a bacteriostatic
effect. It has antirickettsial activity and is inhibitory to the larger viruses. Unfortunately,
aplastic anaemia, which is dose-related, may result from treatment in a proportion of
patients. It should thus not be given for minor infections and its usage should be restricted
to cases where no effective alternative exists, e.g. typhoid fever (see Chapter 6). Some
bacteria (see Chapter 9) can produce an enzyme, chloramphenicol acetyltransferase,
that acetylates the hydroxyl groups in the side-chain of the antibiotic to produce, initially,
3-acetoxychloramphenicol and, finally, 1,3-diacetoxychloramphenicol, which lacks
antibacterial activity. The design of fluorinated derivatives of chloramphenicol that are
not acetylated by this enzyme could be a significant finding.
The antibiotic is administered orally as the palmitate, which is tasteless; this is
hydrolysed to chloramphenicol in the gastrointestinal tract. The highly water-soluble
chloramphenicol sodium succinate is used in the parenteral formulation, and thus acts
as a pro-drug.
9.2 Fusidic acid
Employed as a sodium salt, fusidic acid (Fig. 5.14B) is active against many types of
Gram-positive bacteria, especially staphylococci, although streptococci are relatively
resistant. It is employed in the treatment of staphylococcal infections, including strains
resistant to other antibiotics. However, bacterial resistance may occur in vitro and in vivo.
9.3 Lincomycins
Lincomycin and clindamycin (Fig. 5. 14C, D) are active against Gram-positive cocci, except
Enterococcus faecalis. Gram-negative cocci tend to be less sensitive and enterobacteria
are resistant. Cross-resistance of staphylococci may occur between lincomycins and
erythromycin, but some erythromycin-resistant organisms may be sensitive to lincomycins.
9.4 Mupirocin (pseudomonic acid A)
Mupirocin (Fig. 5. 14E) is the main fermentation product obtained from Ps.fluorescens.
112 ChapterS
CUN
CHOI.
CJ-^OH
H OH
D
CH 3
r
NK — i
"k
K OH
Ah&mQtive
C0 2 — [CH 2 ) a
J
COOH
Fig. 5.14 Miscellaneous antibiotics: A, chloramphenicol; B, fusidic acid; C, lincomycin; D,
clindamycin; E, mupirocin (pseudomonic acid A).
Other pseudomonic acids (B, C, D) are also produced. Mupirocin is active predominantly
against staphylococci and most streptococci, but Enterococcus faecalis and Gram-
negative bacilli are resistant. There is also evidence of plasmid-mediated mupirocin
resistance in some clinical isolates of Staph, aureus.
Mupirocin is employed topically in eradicating nasal and skin carriage of staphy-
lococci, including methicillin-resistant Staph, aureus colonization.
Types of antibiotics 113
10 Antifungal antibiotics
In contrast to the wide range of antibacterial antibiotics, there are very few antifungal
antibiotics that can be used systemically. Lack of toxicity is, as always, of paramount
importance, but the differences in structure of, and some biosynthetic processes in,
fungal cells (Chapter 2) mean that antibacterial antibiotics are usually inactive against
fungi.
Fungal infections are normally less virulent in nature than are bacterial or viral
ones but may, nevertheless, pose a problem in individuals with a depressed immune
system, e.g. AIDS sufferers.
10.1 Griseofulvin
This is a metabolic by-product of Penicillium griseofulvum. Griseofulvin (Fig. 5.15A)
was first isolated in 1939, but it was not until 1958 that its antifungal activity was
discovered. It is active against the dermatophytic fungi, i.e. those such as Trichophyton
causing ringworm. It is ineffective against Candida albicans, the causative agent of
oral thrush and intestinal candidasis, and against bacteria, and there is thus no disturbance
of the normal bacterial flora of the gut.
Griseofulvin is administered orally in the form of tablets. It is not totally absorbed
when given orally, and one method of increasing absorption is to reduce the particle
size of the drug. Griseofulvin is deposited in the deeper layers of the skin and in hair
keratin, and is therefore employed in chemotherapy of fungal infections of these areas
caused by susceptible organisms.
10.2 Polyenes
Polyene antibiotics are characterized by possessing a large ring containing a lactone
group and a hydrophobic region consisting of a sequence of four to seven conjugated
double bonds. The most important polyenes are nystatin and amphotericin B (Fig. 5.15B
and C, respectively).
Nystatin has a specific action on C. albicans and is of no value in the treatment of
any other type of infection. It is poorly absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract; even
after very large doses, the blood level is insignificant. It is administered orally in the
treatment of oral thrush and intestinal candidiasis infections.
Amphotericin B is particularly effective against systemic infections caused by
C. albicans and Cryptococcus neoformans. It is poorly absorbed from the gastro-
intestinal tract and is thus usually administered by intravenous injection under strict
medical supervision. Amphotericin B methyl ester (Fig. 5.15C) is water-soluble, unlike
amphotericin B itself, and can be administered intravenously as a solution. The two
forms have equal antifungal activity but higher peak serum levels are obtained with the
ester. Although the ester is claimed to be less toxic, neurological effects have been
observed. An ascorbate salt has recently been described which is water-soluble, of
similar activity and less toxic.
1 14 Chapter 5
CH.,0
TUC
Fig. 5.15 Antifungal antibiotics: A, griseofulvin; B, nystatin; C, amphotericin (R = H) and its
methyl ester (R = CH 3 ).
11
Synthetic antimicrobial agents
11.1
Sulphonamides
Sulphonamides were introduced by Domagk in 1935. It had been shown that a red azo
dye, prontosil (Fig. 5.16B), had a curative effect on mice infected with /3-haemolytic
streptococci; it was subsequently found that in vivo, prontosil was converted into
sulphanilamide. Chemical modifications of the nucleus of sulphanilamide (see Fig.
5. 16 A) gave compounds with higher antibacterial activity, although this was often
accompanied by greater toxicity. In general, it may be stated that the sulphonamides
Types of antibiotics 1 1 5
H FaNH
& \
-SG 2 HH-
K=n-JT\
SQaNH-
Su?phMf?*f7iidg
H H
Siffphadittine
SutphadirtlftinB
D
H 5 CO
HiCO
HjQQ
CH. 3 — C— CHj— CH a — O
H 3 CO
Fig. 5.16 A, some sulphonamides; B, prontosil rubrum; C, unsubstituted diaminobenzylpyrimidines;
D, trimethoprim; E, tetroxoprim; F, dapsone.
have a broadly similar antibacterial activity but differ widely in pharmacological
actions.
Bacteria which are almost always sensitive to the sulphonamides include Strep,
pneumoniae, /3-haemolytic streptococci, Escherichia coli and Proteus mirabilis; those
almost always resistant include Enterococcus faecalis, Ps. aeruginosa, indole-positive
Proteus and Klebsiella; whereas bacteria showing a marked variation in response include
Staph, aureus, gonococci, H. influenzae and hospital strains of E. coli and Pr. mirabilis.
The sulphonamides show a considerable variation in the extent of their absorption
into the bloodstream. Sulphadimidine and sulphadiazine are examples of rapidly
absorbed ones, whereas succinylsulphathiazone andphthalylsulphathiazole are poorly
absorbed and are excreted unchanged in the faeces.
From a clinical point of view, the sulphonamides are extremely useful for the
treatment of uncomplicated urinary tract infection caused by E. coli in domiciliary
practice. They have also been employed in treating meningococcal meningitis (a current
116 Chapter 5
problem is the number of sulphonamide-resistant meningococcal strains) and superficial
eye infections.
11.2 Diaminopyrimidine derivatives
Small-molecule diaminopyrimidine derivatives were shown in 1948 to have an antifolate
action. Subsequently, compounds were developed that were highly active against human
cells (e.g. the use of methotrexate as an anticancer agent), protozoa (e.g. the use of
pyrimethamine in malaria) or bacteria (e.g. trimethoprim: Fig. 5.16D). Unsubstituted
diaminobenzylpyrimidines (Fig. 5.16C) bind poorly to bacterial dihydrofolate reductase
(DHFR). The introduction of one, two or especially three methoxy groups (as in
trimethoprim) produces a highly selective antibacterial agent. A recent antibacterial
addition is tetroxoprim (2,4-diamino-5-(3',5'-dimethoxy-4'-methoxyethoxybenzyl)
pyrimidine; Fig. 5.16E) which retains methoxy groups at R 1 and R 3 and has a
methoxy ethoxy group at R" . Trimethoprim and tetroxoprim have a broad spectrum of
activity but resistance can arise from a non-susceptible target site, i.e. an altered DHFR
(see Chapter 9).
11.3 Co-trimoxazole
Co-trimoxazole is a mixture of sulphamethoxazole (five parts) and trimethoprim
(one part). The reason for using this combination is based upon the in vitro finding
that there is a 'sequential blockade' of folic acid synthesis, in which the sulphonamide
is a competitive inhibitor of dihydropteroate synthetase and trimethoprim inhibits DHFR
(see Chapter 8, especially Fig. 8.5). The optimum ratio of the two components may not
be achieved in vivo and arguments continue as to the clinical value of co-trimoxazole,
with many advocating the use of trimethoprim alone. Co-trimoxazole is the agent of
choice in treating pneumonias caused by Pneumocystis carinii, a yeast (although it had
been classified as protozoa). Pneumocystis carinii is a common cause of pneumonia in
patients receiving immunosuppressive therapy and in those suffering from AIDS.
11.4 Dapsone
Dapsone (diaminodiphenylsulphone; Fig. 5.16F) is used specifically in the treatment
of leprosy. However, because resistance to dapsone is unfortunately now well known,
it is recommended that dapsone be used in conjunction with rifampicin and clofazimine.
11.5 Antitubercular drugs
The three standard drugs used in the treatment of tuberculosis were streptomycin
(considered above), ^aminosalicylic acid (PAS) and isoniazid (isonicotinylhydrazide,
INH; synonym, isonicotinic acid hydrazine, INAH). The tubercle bacillus rapidly
becomes resistant to streptomycin, and the role of PAS was mainly that of preventing
this development of resistance. The current approach is to treat tuberculosis in two
phases: an initial phase where a combination of three drugs is used to reduce the bacterial
level as rapidly as possible, and a continuation phase in which a combination of
Types of antibiotics 117
two drags is employed. Front-line drags are isoniazid, rifampicin, streptomycin
and ethambutol. Pyrazinamide, which has good meningeal penetration, and is thus
particularly useful in tubercular meningitis, may be used in the initial phase to produce
a highly bactericidal response.
Isoniazid has no significant effect against organisms other than mycobacteria. It is
given orally. Cross-resistance between it, streptomycin and rifampicin has not been
found to occur.
When bacterial resistance to these primary agents exists or develops, treatment
with the secondary antitubercular drugs has to be considered. The latter group comprises
capreomycin, cycloserine, some of the newer macrolides (azithromycin, clarithromycin),
4-quinolones (e.g. ciprofloxacin, ofloxacin) and prothionamide (no longer marketed in
the UK). Prothionamide, pyrazinamide and ethionamide are, like isoniazid, derivatives
of isonicotinic acid. The British National Formulary no longer lists ethionamide
as being a suitable antitubercular drug. Chemical structures of the above, and of
thiacetazone (not nowadays used because of its side-effects) are presented in Fig. 5. 17.
There has, unfortunately, been a global resurgence of tuberculosis in recent years.
Multiple drug-resistant M. tuberculosis (MDRTB) strains have been isolated in which
resistance has been acquired to many drugs used in the treatment of this disease.
H-
«-~f ^
COOH
m
CO.NH.NH,
&
NHj
I
C.NH
CH^CO,NH
rn.lilH_C5.hlH
CHjCHjCmH (CH 2 ) 2 UrlCHCH 2 CH;>
CH 9 OH
CH.OH
.2na
Fig. 5.17 Antitubercular compounds (see text also for details of antibiotics): A, PAS; B, isoniazid;
C, ethionamide; D, pyrazinamide; E, prothionamide; F, thiacetazone; G, ethambutol.
11.6
Nitrofuran compounds
The nitrofuran group of drugs (Fig. 5.18) is based on the finding over 40 years ago that
a nitro group in the 5 position of 2-substituted furans endowed these compounds with
antibacterial activity. Many hundreds of such compounds have been synthesized, but
only a few are in current therapeutic use. In the most important nitrofurans, an
azomethine group, — CH=N — , is attached at C-2 and a nitro group at C-5. Less
"important nitrofurans have a vinyl group, — CH=CH — , at C-2.
Biological activity is lost if:
1 the nitro ring is reduced;
2 the — CH=N — linkage undergoes hydrolytic decomposition; or
3 the — CH=CH — linkage is oxidized.
The nitrofurans show antibacterial activity against a wide spectrum of micro-
organisms, but furaltadone has now been withdrawn from use because of its toxicity.
Furazolidone has a very high activity against most members of the Enterobacteriaceae,
and has been used in the treatment of diarrhoea and gastrointestinal disturbances of
bacterial origin. Nitrofurantoin is used in the treatment of urinary tract infections; anti-
bacterial levels are not reached in the blood and the drug is concentrated in the urine. It
is most active at acid pH. Nitrofurazone is used mainly as a topical agent in the treatment
of burns and wounds and also in certain types of ear infections. The nitrofurans are
believed to be mutagenic.
6
CHO NO s
CH=N-NH.caNHj
CH = N-
N
H»C'
\
CH^^N
HjC-
»-/
CH
CH=N
N
H a C
i
■CH,
--*
Fig. 5.18 A, furan; B, 5-nitrofurfural; C-F, nitrofuran drugs: respectively C, nitrofurazone, D,
nitrofurantoin, E, furazolidone and F, furaltadone.
Types of antibiotics 119
11.7 4-quinolone antibacterials
Over 10000 quinolone antibacterial agents have now been synthesized. Nalidixic
acid is regarded as the progenitor of the new quinolones. It has been used for
several years as a clinically important drug in the treatment of urinary tract infections.
Since its clinical introduction, other 4-quinolone antibacterials have been synthesized,
some of which show considerably greater antibacterial potency. Furthermore, this
means that many types of bacteria not susceptible to nalidixic acid therapy may be
sensitive to the newer derivatives. The most important development was the introduction
of a fluorine substituent at C-6, which led to a considerable increase in potency and
spectrum of activity compared with nalidixic acid. These second-generation quinolones
are known as fluoroquinolones, examples of which are ciprofloxacin and norfloxacin
(Fig. 5.19).
Nalidixic acid is unusual in that it is active against several different types of Gram-
negative bacteria, whereas Gram-positive organisms are resistant. However, the newer
fluoroquinolone derivatives show superior activity against Enterobacteriacease and
Ps. aeruginosa, and their spectrum also includes staphylococci but not streptococci.
Extensive studies with norfloxacin have demonstrated that its broad spectrum, high
urine concentration and oral administration make it a useful drug in the treatment of
urinary infections. Ciprofloxacin may be used in the treatment of organisms resistant
to other antibiotics; it can also be used in conjunction with a/3-lactam or aminoglycoside
antibiotic, e.g. when severe neutropenia is present.
The third and most recently developed generation of quinolones has maintained many
of the properties of the second generation; examples are lomefloxacin, sparfloxacin (both
difluorinated derivatives) and temafloxacin (a trifluorinated derivative). Lomefloxacin
has a sufficiently long half-life to allow once-daily dosing, but adverse photosensitivity
reactions are now being recognized. Sparfloxacin retains high activity against Gram-
negative bacteria but has enhanced activity against Gram-positive cocci and anaerobes.
Temafloxacin has, unfortunately, been withdrawn from clinical use because of unex-
pected severe haemolytic and nephrotoxic reactions.
11.8 Imidazole derivatives
The imidazoles comprise a large and diverse group of compounds with properties
encompassing antibacterial (metronidazole), antiprotozoal (metronidazole), antifungal
(clotrimazole, miconazole, ketoconazole, econazole) and anti-anthelmintic (mebendazole)
activity: see Table 5.4. Metronidazole (Fig. 5. 20 A) inhibits the growth of pathogenic
protozoa, very low concentrations being effective against the protozoa Trichomonas
vaginalis, Entamoeba histolytica and Giardia lamblia. It is also used to treat bacterial
vaginosis caused by Gardnerella vaginalis. Given orally, it cures 90-100% of sexually
transmitted urogenital infections caused by T. vaginalis. It has also been found that
metronidazole is effective against anaerobic bacteria, for example B.fragilis, and against
facultative anaerobes grown under anaerobic, but not aerobic, conditions. Metronidazole
is administered orally or in the form of suppositories.
Other imidazole derivatives include clotrimazole (Fig. 5.20B), miconazole (Fig.
5.20C) and econazole (Fig. 5.20D), all of which possess a broad antimycotic spectrum
120 Chapter 5
GuFnelin*
4-qiiinolona
Exompte:
NorflQxaeJn
F n* s: \ir C0OH
f J CH a CHj
Qtfwr exampJ 1 **
Ciprofloxacin
EnoxAthn
LtiiYiftflaxJtirt*
Ofloxacin
Pefloxacin
Sptrnoxacini*
To&ufloxaeirk
B-dza-4-qulnolone
Example*
Nalidixic acid
CH
X6
COOH
L^Ht-tCHb.
2-aza-4-quinolone
Example
Cinoxacin
COOH
6 H Q-dia£0-4-qii i nolone
CO
H
Examples: Pi pain i die and
pjramidlc seids
COOH
H{PlpsmJdie):f J.
r N -i
R(PiramidicH J
Ftg. 5,19 QuinoloaiJC and antihacAcriiiJ 4-<|u]iioLanjcs. Nu4e thm ihe newer fluoroqutLie deivatLvcs (e.g. norfloxacin, ciprofloxacin, ofloxacin}
htu« a 6-fluoncj and a 7-pipcrazino -subsiiuiciii. Diugs maikcd wiih an aslerisk Ate diflunriiuicdqwrailoiieSh willi a second fluDrinjc atom aj
C-8,
Table 5.4 Antimicrobial imidazoles
Antimicrobial
or other activity Examples
Antibacterial Metronidazole, tinidazole: anaerobic bacteria only
Antiprotozoal Metronidazole, tinidazole
Anthelmintic Mebendazole
Antifungal Clotrimazole, miconazole, econazole, ketoconazole
Newer imidazoles: fluconazole, itraconazole
with some antibacterial activity and are used topically. Miconazole is used topically
but can also be administered by intravenous or intrathecal injection in the treatment of
severe systemic or meningeal fungal infections. Newer imidazoles are (a) ketoconazole
(Fig. 5.20E) which is used orally for the treatment of systemic fungal infections (but
not when there is central nervous system involvement or where the infection is life-
threatening), (b) fluconazole (Fig. 5.20F), which is given orally or by intravenous
infusion in the treatment of candidiasis and cryptococcal meningitis. Itraconazole is
well absorbed when given orally after food.
11.9 Flucytosine
Flucytosine (5-fluorocytosine; Fig. 5.20G) is a narrow-spectrum antifungal agent
with greatest activity against yeasts such as Candida, Cryptococcus and Torulopsis.
Evidence has been presented which shows that, once inside the fungal cell, flucytosine
is deaminated ot 5-fluorouracil (Fig. 5.20H). This is converted by the enzyme
pyrophosphorylase to 5-fluorouridine monophosphate (FUMP), diphosphate (FUDP)
and triphosphate (FUTP), which inhibits RNA synthesis; 5-fluorouracil itself has
poor penetration into fungi. Candida albicans is known to convert FUMP to 5-
fluorodeoxyuridine monophosphate (FdUMP), which inhibits DNA synthesis by virtue
of its effect on thymidylate synthetase. Resistance can occur in vivo by reduced uptake
into fungal cells of flucytosine or by decreased accumulation of FUTP and FdUMP.
11.10 Synthetic allylamines
Terbinafine (Fig. 5.171), a member of the allylamine class of antimycotics, is an inhibitor
of the enzyme squalene epoxidase in fungal ergosterol biosynthesis. Terbinafine is
orally active, is fungicidal and is effective against a broad range of dermatophytes and
yeasts. It can also be used topically as a cream.
11.11 Synthetic thiocarbamates
The synthetic thiocarbamates, of which tolnaftate (Fig. 5.20J) is an example, also inhibit
squalene epoxidase. Tolnaftate inhibits this enzyme from C. albicans, but is inactive
against whole cells, presumably because of its inability to penetrate the cell wall.
Tolnaftate is used topically in the treatment or prophylaxis of tinea.
122 Chapter 5
B
HC— N.
\
2 N
:-/
C CH:
CH 2 .CH 2 0H
G mh.
,F
N
O
N
H
S
CI HNO a
-CI HNQ 3
OH
N
<f X N— CH ? — C— CH a — N^ ^
N
=/
H OH
F
W I
C CH
3
H
Fig. 5.20 Imidazoles (A-F): A, metronidazole; B, clotrimazole; C, miconazole; D, econazole;
E, ketoconazole; F, fluconazole; G, flucytosine; H, 5-fluorouracil; I, terbinafine; J, tolnaftate.
Types of antibiotics 123
12
Antiviral drugs
Several compounds are known that are inhibitory to mammalian viruses in tissue
culture, but only a few can be used in the treatment of human viral infections. The main
problem in designing and developing antiviral agents is the lack of selective toxicity
that is normally possessed by most compounds. Viruses literally 'take over' the
machinery of an infected human cell and thus an antiviral drug must be remarkably
selectively toxic if it is to inhibit the viral particle without adversely affecting the human
cell. Consequently, in comparison with antibacterial agents, very few inhibitors can be
considered as being safe antiviral drugs, although the situation is improving. Possible
sites of attack by antiviral agents include prevention of adsorption of a viral particle to
the host cell, prevention of the intracellular penetration of the adsorbed virus, and
inhibition of protein or nucleic synthesis.
Genetic information for viral reproduction resides in its nucleic acid (DNA or RNA:
see Chapter 3). The viral particle (virion) does not possess enzymes necessary for its
own replication; after entry into the host cell, the virus uses the enzymes already present
or induces the formation of new ones. Viruses replicate by synthesis of their separate
components followed by assembly.
Antiviral drugs are considered below with a summary in Table 5.5.
12.1
Amantadines
Amantadine hydrochloride (Fig. 5.21 A) does not prevent adsorption but inhibits
viral penetration. It has a very narrow spectrum and is used prophylactically against
infection with influenza A virus; it has no prophylactic value with other types of influenza
virus.
Table 5.5 Antiviral drugs and their clinical uses 4
Antiviral
Group
drug
Clinical uses
Nucleoside
Idoxuridine
Skin including herpes labialis
analogues
Ribavirin (tribavirin)
Severe respiratory syncytial virus
bronchiolitis in infants and
children
Zidovudine
AIDS treatment
Didanosine (DDI)
AIDS treatment
Zalcitabine (DDC)
AIDS treatment
Acyclovir (aciclovir)
Famciclovir
r Herpes simplex and varicella zoster
Ganciclovir
Cytomegalovirus infections in
immunocompromised patients only
Non-nucleoside
Fascornet
Cytomegalovirus retinitis in patients
analogues
with AIDS
Amantadines
Prophylaxis: influenza A outbreak
For further information, see the current issue of the British National Formulary.
1 24 Chapter 5
B
NNHCSWH-
F|g H 5^21 A n A m tun ad i ilc (.used
« (he bvdrwfiLorLdefc
B, me thifta wine -
12.2
Methisazone
Methisazone (Fig. 5.2IB) inhibits DNA viruses (particularly vaccinia and variola) but
not RNA viruses, and has been used in the prophylaxis of smallpox. It is now little
used, especially as, according to the World Health Organization, smallpox has now
been eradicated.
12.3
Nucleoside analogues
Various nucleoside analogues have been developed that inhibit nucleic acid synthesis.
Idoxuridine (2'-deoxy-5-iodouridine; IUdR; Fig. 5.22C) is a thymidine analogue
which inhibits the utilization of thymidine (Fig. 5.22A) in the rapid synthesis of DNA
that normally occurs in herpes-infected cells. Unfortunately, because of its toxicity,
idoxuridine is unsuitable for systemic use and it is restricted to topical treatment of
herpes-infected eyes. Other nucleoside analogues include the following: cytarabine
(cytosine arabinoside; Ara-C; Fig. 5.22D) which has antineoplastic and antiviral
properties and which has been employed topically to treat herpes keratitis resistant
to idoxuridine; adenosine arabinoside (Ara-A; vidarabine); and ribavirin (1-/3-D-
ribofuranosyl-l,2,4-triazole-3, carboxamide; Fig. 5.22E) which has a broad spectrum
of activity, inhibiting both RNA and DNA viruses. Vidarabine, in particular, has a high
degree of selectivity against viral DNA replication and is primarily active against
herpesviruses and some poxviruses. It may be used systemically or topically. It is related
structurally to guanosine (Fig. 5.22B).
Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) is a retrovirus, i.e. its RNA is converted in
human cells by the enzyme reverse transcriptase to DNA which is incorporated into the
human genome and is responsible for producing new HIV particles. Zidovudine
(azidothymidine, AZT; Fig. 5.22F) is a structural analogue of thymidine (Fig. 5.22A)
and is used to treat ADDS patients. Zidovudine is converted in both infected and
uninfected cells to the mono-, di- and eventually triphosphate derivatives. Zidovudine
triphosphate, the active form, is a potent inhibitor of HIV replication, being mis-
taken for thymidine by reverse transcriptase. Premature chain termination of viral
DNA ensues. However, AZT is relatively toxic because, as pointed out above, it
is converted to the triphosphate by cellular enzymes and is thus also activated in
uninfected cells.
2'3'-Dideoxycytidine (DDC, zalcitabine), a nucleoside analogue that also inhibits
reverse transcriptase, is more active than zidovudine in vitro, and (unlike zidovudine)
does not suppress erythropoiesis. DDC is not without toxicity, however, and a
severe peripheral neurotoxicity, which is dose-related, has been reported. The chemical
Types of antibiotics 125
HOCH
0*^M^
HOCH 2
A
H
OH OH
H
Q
^N
OHH
OH H
HO— i
OH OH
F
HOCH
i
O
w
H H
N :
HO— i
O
HO
^>
H,N
HO
5'
U^
h,n
Fig. 5.22 Thymidine (A), guanosine (B) and some nucleoside analogues (C-J). C, idoxuridine;
D, cytarabine; E, ribavirin; F, zidovudine (AZT); G, dideoxycytidine (DDC); H, dideoxyinosine
(DDI); I, acyclovir; J, ganciclovir.
structures of DDC and of another analogue with similar properties, 2'3'-dideoxyinosine
(DDI, didanosine), are presented in Fig. 5.22 (G, H, respectively).
Acyclovir (acycloguanosine, Fig. 5.221) is a novel type of nucleoside analogue
which becomes activated only in herpes-infected host cells by a herpes-specific
enzyme, thymidine kinase. This enzyme initiates conversion of acyclovir initially to a
monophosphate and then to the antiviral triphosphate which inhibits viral DNA
polymerase. The host cell polymerase is not inhibited to the same extent, and the antiviral
triphosphate is not produced in uninfected cells. Ganciclovir (Fig. 5.22J) is up to 100
126 Chapters
times more active than acyclovir against human cytomegalovirus (CMV) but is also
much more toxic; it is reserved for the treatment of severe CMV in immunocompromised
patients. Famciclovir is similar, and valociclovir is a pro-drug ester of acyclovir.
12.4 Non-nucleoside compounds
Apart from the amantadines (section 12.1) and methisazone (section 12.2), various
non-nucleoside drugs have shown antiviral activity. Two simple molecules with potent
activity are phosphonoacetic acid (Fig. 5. 23 A) and sodium phosphonoformate (foscarnet,
Fig. 5.23B). Phosphonoacetic acid has a high specificity for herpes simplex DNA
synthesis, and has been shown to be non-mutagenic in experimental animals, but is
highly toxic. Foscarnet inhibits herpes DNA polymerase and is non-toxic when applied
to the skin and is a potentially useful agent in treating herpes simplex labialis (cold
sores). It is used for cytomegalovirus retinitis in patients with AIDS in whom ganciclovir
is inappropriate. Tetrahydroimidazobenzodiazepinone (TIBO) compounds have shown
excellent activity in vitro against HIV reverse transcriptase in HIV type 1 (HIV-1) but
not HIV-2 or other retroviruses.
Reverse transcriptase inhibitors prevent DNA from being produced in newly infected
cells. They do not, however, prevent the reactivation of HIV from previously infected
cells, the reason being that the enzyme is not involved in this process. Thus, agents that
act at a later point in the replication cycle, possibly preventing reactivation, would be a
major advance in the treatment of AIDs sufferers. The HIV protease inhibitors, which
are currently receiving considerable attention, are believed to act in the manner depicted
in Fig. 5.24.
A B
HO— P— CH 2 COOH -o P C 3Na 4
I \
OH O- 0"
Fig. 5.23 A, phosphonoacetic acid; B, sodium phosphonoformate (foscarnet).
Reverse
HIV RNA • HIV DNA
transcriptase
Incorporated into
host DNA (LATENT)
Protease inhibitors?
Reactivated
Fig. 5.24 Postulated mechanism of action of HIV protease inhibitors.
Types of antibiotics 127
12.5 Interferons
Interferon is a low molecular weight protein, produced by virus-infected cells, that
itself induces the formation of a second protein inhibiting the transcription of viral
mRNA. Interferon is produced by the host cell in response to the virus particle, the
viral nucleic and non- viral agents, including synthetic polynucleides such as polyinosinic
acid: polycytidylic acid (poly I: C). There are two types of interferon.
Type I interferons. These are acid-stable and comprise two major classes, leucocyte
interferon (Le-IFN, IFN-a) released by stimulated leucocytes, and fibroblast
interferon (F-IFN, IFN-/3) released by stimulated fibroblasts.
Type II interferons. These are acid-labile and are also known as 'immune' (IFN-y)
interferons because they are produced by T-lymphocytes (see Chapter 14) in the
cellular immune system in response to specific antigens.
Type I interferons induce a virus-resistant state in human cells, whereas Type II are
more active in inhibiting growth of tumour cells.
Disappointingly low yields of F-IFN and Le-IFN are achieved from eukaryotic
cells. Recently, however, recombinant DNA technology has been employed to produce
interferon in prokaryotic cells (bacteria). This aspect is considered in more detail in
Chapter 24.
13 Drug combinations
A combination of two antibacterial agents may produce the following responses.
1 Synergism, where the joint effect is greater than the sum of the effects of each drug
acting alone.
2 Additive effect, in which the combined effect is equal to the arithmetic sum of the
effects of the two individual agents.
3 Antagonism (interference), in which there is a lesser effect of the mixture than that
of the more potent drug action alone.
There are four possible justifications as to the use of antibacterial agents in
combination.
1 The concept of clinical synergism, which may be extremely difficult to demonstrate
convincingly. Even with trimethoprim plus sulphamethoxazole, where true synergism
occurs in vitro, the optimum ratio of the two components may not always be present in
vivo, i.e. at the site of infection in a particular tissue.
2 A wider spectrum of cover may be obtained, which may be (a) desirable as an
emergency measure in life-threatening situations; or (b) of use in treating mixed
infections.
3 The emergence of resistant organisms may be prevented. A classical example here
occurs in combined antitubercular therapy (see earlier).
4 A possible reduction in dosage of a toxic drug may be achieved.
Indications for combined therapy are now considered to be much fewer than
originally thought. There is also the problem of a chemical or physical incompatibility
between two drugs. Examples where combinations have an important role to play in
antibacterial chemotherapy were provided earlier (sections 2.3 and 2.9) in which a fi-
lactamase inhibitor and an appropriate j3-lactamase-labile penicillin form a single
128 Chapter 5
pharmaceutical product. It must also be noted that a combination of two /3-lactams
does not necessarily produce a synergistic effect. Some antibiotics are excellent inducers
of /3 -lactamase, and consequently a reduced response (antagonism) may be produced.
14 Further reading
Bean B. (1992) Antiviral therapy: current concepts and practices. Clin Microbiol Rev, 5, 146-182.
Bowden K., Harris N.V. & Watson C.A. (1993) Structure-activity relationships of dihydrofolate reductase
inhibitors. / Chemother, 5, 377-388.
Bugg C.E., Carson W.M. & Montgomery J.A. (1993) Drugs by design. SciAm, 269, 92-98.
British National Formulary. London: British Medical Association & The Pharmaceutical Press. (The
chapter on drugs used in the treatment of infections is a particularly useful section. New editions of
the BNF appear at regular intervals.)
Brown A.G. (1981) New naturally occurring /J-lactam antibiotics and related compounds. J Antimicrob
Chemother, 7, 15-48.
Chopra I., Hawkey P.M. & Hinton M. (1992) Tetracyclines, molecular and clinical aspects. J Antimicrob
Chemother, 29, 245-277.
Greenwood D. (ed.) (1989) Antimicrobial Chemotherapy, 2nd end. London: Bailliere Tindall.
Hamilton-Miller J.M.T. (1991) From foreign pharmacopoeias: 'new' antibiotics from old? J Antimicrob
Chemother, 27, 702-705.
Hooper D.C. & Wolfson J.S. (eds) (1993) Quinolone Antimicrobial Agents, 2nd edn. Washington:
American Society for Microbiology.
Hunter PA., Darby G.K. & Russell N.J. (eds) (1995) Fifty Years of Antimicrobials: Past Perspectives
and Future Trends. 53rd Symposium of the Society for General Microbiology. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Kuntz I.D. (1992) Structure-based strategies for drug design and discovery. Science, 257, 1079-1082.
Lambert H.P, O'Grady F., Greenwood D. & Finch R.G. (1992) Antibiotic and Chemotherapy, 7th edn.
London & Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Neu H.C. (1985) Relation of structural properties of/ A -lactam antibiotics to antibacterial activity. Am J
Med, 79 (Suppl. 2A), 2-13.
Power E.G. M. & Russell A.D. (1998) Design of antimicrobial chemotherapeutic agents. In: Introduction
to Principles of Drug Design (ed. H.J. Smith), 3rd edn, Bristol: Wright.
Reeves D.S. & Howard A.J. (eds) (1991) New macrolides — the respiratory antibiotics for the 1990s. J
Hosp Infect, 19 (Suppl. A).
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (1996) Understanding Ant ibacteral Action and Resistance, 2nd edn. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood.
Sammes PG. (Ed.) Topics in Antibiotic Chemistry, vols 1-5. Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Shanson D.C. (1989) Microbiology in Clinical Practice, 2nd edn. London: Wright.
Wolinski E. (1992) Antimycobacterial drugs. In: Infections Diseases (eds A. Gorbach, J.G. Bartlett &
N.R. Blacklow), pp. 319-319. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.
Wood M.J. (1991) More macrolides. Br Med J, 303, 594-595.
Types of antibiotics 129
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs
1
Introduction
3.1.2
3.2
Lower respiratory tract infections
Urinary tract infections
2
Principles of use of antimicrobial
drugs
3.2.1
Pathogenesis
2.1
Susceptibility of infecting organisms
3.2.2
Drug therapy
2.2
Host factors
3.3
Gastrointestinal infections
2.3
Pharmacological factors
3.4
Skin and soft tissue infections
2.4
Drug resistance
3.5
Central nervous system infections
2.4.1
Multi-drug resistance
2.5
Drug combinations
4
Antibiotic policies
2.6
Adverse reactions
4.1
Rationale
2.7
Superinfection
4.2
Types of antibiotic policies
2.8
Chemoprophylaxis
4.2.1
4.2.2
Free prescribing policy
Restricted reporting
3
Clinical use
4.2.3
Restricted dispensing
3.1
Respiratory tract infections
3.1.1
Upper respiratory tract infections
5
Further reading
Introduction
The worldwide use of antimicrobial drugs continues to rise; in 1995 these agents
accounted for an expenditure of approximately £17000 billion. In the UK antibiotic
prescribing continues to rise. General practice use accounts for approximately 90% of
all antibiotic prescribing and largely involves oral and topical agents. Hospital use
accounts for the remaining 10% of antibiotic prescribing with a much heavier use of
injectable agents. Although this chapter is concerned with the clinical use of
antimicrobial drugs, it should be remembered that these agents are also extensively
used in veterinary practice as well as in animal husbandry as growth promoters. In
humans the therapeutic use of anti-infectives has revolutionized the management of
most bacterial infections, many parasitic and fungal diseases and, with the availability
of acyclovir and zidovudine (azido thymidine, AZT) (see Chapter 3 and 5), selected
herpesvirus infections and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection, respectively.
Although originally used for the treatment of established bacterial infections, antibiotics
have proved useful in the prevention of infection in various high-risk circumstances;
this applies especially to patients undergoing various surgical procedures where peri-
operative antibiotics have significantly reduced postoperative infectious complications.
The advantages of effective antimicrobial chemotherapy are self-evident, but this
has led to a significant problem in ensuring that they are always appropriately used.
Surveys of antibiotic use have demonstrated that more than 50% of antibiotic prescribing
can be inappropriate; this may reflect prescribing in situations where antibiotics are
either ineffective, such as viral infections, or that the selected agent, its dose, route of
administration or duration of use are inappropriate. Of particular concern is the prolonged
use of antibiotics for surgical prophylaxis. Apart from being wasteful of health resources,
prolonged use encourages superinfection by drug-resistant organisms and unnecessarily
increases the risk of adverse drug reactions. Thus, it is essential that the clinical use of
these agents be based on a clear understanding of the principles that have evolved to
ensure safe, yet effective, prescribing.
Further information about the properties of antimicrobial agents described in this
chapter can be found in Chapter 5.
Principles of use of antimicrobial drugs
Susceptibility of infecting organisms
Drug selection should be based on knowledge of its activity against infecting
microorganisms. Selected organisms may be predictably susceptible to a particular
agent, and laboratory testing is therefore rarely performed. For example, Streptococcus
pyogenes is uniformly sensitive to penicillin. In contrast, the susceptibility of many
Gram-negative enteric bacteria is less predictable and laboratory guidance is essential
for safe prescribing. The susceptibility of common bacterial pathogens and widely
prescribed antibiotics is summarized in Table 6.1. It can be seen that, although certain
bacteria are susceptible in vitro to a particular agent, use of that drug may be
inappropriate, either on pharmacological grounds or because other less toxic agents
are preferred.
Host factors
In vitro susceptibility testing does not always predict clinical outcome. Host factors
play an important part in determining outcome and this applies particularly to circulating
and tissue phagocytic activity. Infections can progress rapidly in patients suffering
from either an absolute or functional deficiency of phagocytic cells. This applies
particularly to those suffering from various haematological malignancies, such as the
acute leukaemias, where phagocyte function is impaired both by the disease and also
by the use of potent cytotoxic drugs which destroy healthy, as well as malignant, white
cells. Under these circumstances it is essential to select agents which are bactericidal,
since bacteristatic drugs, such as the tetracyclines or sulphonamides, rely on host
phagocytic activity to clear bacteria. Widely used bactericidal agents include the
aminoglycosides, broad-spectrum penicillins, the cephalosporins and quinolones (see
Chapter 5).
In some infections the pathogenic organisms are located intracellularly within
phagocytic cells and, therefore, remain relatively protected from drugs which penetrate
cells poorly, such as the penicillins and cephalosporins. In contrast, erythromycin,
rifampicin and chloramphenicol readily penetrate phagocytic cells. Legionnaires' disease
is an example of an intracellular infection and is treated with rifampicin and/or
erythromycin.
Pharmacological factors
Clinical efficacy is also dependent on achieving satisfactory drug concentrations at the
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 131
■rjds fiWJJHJB/.y
a
G
U
1
LI
£
I
■3
I
DZEtficcs^tfiiiK ^ +CK ecu
eEjuOiunmiei SuiififdOiA^ I EtKKitccCF+ff^+ffc cc oe
■ddc SBprouajaBp
aJfjfifeV fiepHUBpeg ' BC(C[E-H(ElE+£lE-H+fl+tttt Efe
■dds BsuaujopneGj
■■ddi ofi&Btif^
■dd* ffftBUGUIf&S
-ads tpp/jps
[6A|)|$0CJ-«|CipLJl)
■<ids sjho^jj
(eA||e04lJ-9|Cipu!]
dGt&ffBtBqBfM
HO? tfiijfifrtiittZ
B€zu#fr(fv* ffffflvtfGU^W
flj-pjjjUftJ^eLU BtJBfStBJij
BBBOipjcuaS Btjassreft
&Uf&Vtlf/ffrf '{ J
e*J u cmu n etU snoo awj tf eu- is
|iuftj£ jbgu ~u«Jl
|4Ai_l!SLHt -U^OJ
kekkckccheqc+cc -f+cca: +4
+■ -I- + -H
cc+cu-H+fi+ctar tt t
tcicE-tciiEfi+EaalD: 4 + tf it
£EIE-H + ++*++tttt+l+4.+ +H +
[C-H-f + + + ++^^ + +4.-t -K +
££q:-h£q:h+ > s dc £ 4 4 + i cc
tt CC CC H DC * T -t- y tt EC E f, 1
ltCC+^tf++EI^+++ 4H4-
CCtf^+|y++4IEC-H+l + + -ri +
ITE-H+l + t+ + +tf£i: + -t++ 4H 4-
-HK4^4-4H^+4--*-Htt+44-+ ^4-
4+ i t iii*-i + *ii tt i 4 +tt f| +
^ + EC t + + E +l +
+-4-4-4H4-4-4- +J + f + EC I ^H CC
+ IXfCC[Effilt[EECCCC4-++IH: -I +
4-4-*4-4-44-4-+-4-4-4H4-4-i -H4-
*: + a: K + 4- 4 4-
* 4
4 4- 4- *■ -H 4-
4- 4-
t+-44-4-*4-4-*44-* + 4l + 4- +
iz
— c
u-
m
a
|
3-
5
i
£
IT
4?
■u
a
of
o
_ 5 E §
s II II , I
n. ~ •=■ ;a £
= e E ■= S
j C = | ■
■W P
■— I
■Hi
5
4>
-s
u4
■w
-H
$
site of the infection; this is influenced by the standard pharmacological factors of
absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion. If an oral agent is selected,
gastrointestinal absorption should be satisfactory. However, it may be impaired by
factors such as the presence of food, drug interactions (including chelation), or impaired
gastrointestinal function either as a result of surgical resection or malabsorptive states.
Although effective, oral absorption may be inappropriate in patients who are vomiting
or have undergone recent surgery; under these circumstances a parenteral agent will be
required and has the advantage of providing rapidly effective drag concentrations.
Antibiotic selection also varies according to the anatomical site of infection. Lipid
solubility is of importance in relation to drug distribution. For example, the amino-
glycosides are poorly lipid-soluble and although achieving therapeutic concentrations
within the extracellular fluid compartment, penetrate the cerebrospinal fluid (CSF)
poorly. Likewise the presence of inflammation may affect drug penetration into the
tissues. In the presence of meningeal inflammation, /3-lactam agents achieve satisfactory
concentrations within the CSF, but as the inflammatory response subsides drug
concentrations fall. Hence it is essential to maintain sufficient dosaging throughout the
treatment of bacterial meningitis. Other agents such as chloramphenicol are little affected
by the presence or absence of meningeal inflammation.
Therapeutic drug concentrations within the bile duct and gall bladder are dependent
upon biliary excretion. In the presence of biliary disease, such as gallstones or chronic
inflammation, the drug concentration may fail to reach therapeutic levels. In contrast,
drugs which are excreted primarily via the liver or kidneys may require reduced dosaging
in the presence of impaired renal or hepatic function. The malfunction of excretory
organs may not only risk toxicity from drug accumulation, but will also reduce urinary
concentration of drags excreted primarily by glomerular filtration. This applies to the
aminoglycosides and the urinary antiseptics, nalidixic acid and nitrofurantoin, where
therapeutic failure of urinary tract infections may complicate severe renal failure.
2.4 Drug resistance
Drag resistance may be a natural or an acquired characteristic of a microorganism.
This may result from impaired cell wall or cell envelope penetration, enzymatic
inactivation or altered binding sites. Acquired drug resistance may result from mutation,
adaptation or gene transfer. Spontaneous mutations occur at low frequency, as in the
case of Mycobacterium tuberculosis where a minority population of organisms is
resistant to isoniazid. In this situation the use of isoniazid alone will eventually result
in overgrowth by this subpopulation of resistant organisms.
A more recently recognized mechanism of drug resistance is that of efflux in which
the antibiotic is rapidly extruded from the cell by an energy-dependent mechanism.
This affects antibiotics such as the tetracyclines and macrolides.
Genetic resistance may be chromosomally or plasmid-mediated. Plasmid-mediated
resistance has been increasingly recognized among Gram-negative enteric pathogens.
By the process of conjugation (Chapter 9), resistance plasmids may be transferred
between bacteria of the same and different species and also different genera. Such
resistance can code for multiple antibiotic resistance. For example, the penicillins,
cephalosporins, chloramphenicol and the aminoglycosides are all subject to enzymatic
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 133
inactivation which may be plasmid-mediated. Knowledge of the local epidemiology of
resistant pathogens within a hospital, and especially within high-dependency areas
such as intensive care units, is invaluable in guiding appropriate drug selection.
2.4.1 Multi-drug resistance
In recent years multi-drug resistance has increased among certain pathogens. These
include Staph, aureus, enterococci and M. tuberculosis. Staphylococcus aureus resistant
to methicillin is known as methicillin-resistant Staph, aureus (MRS A). These strains
are resistant to many antibiotics and have been responsible for major epidemics
worldwide, usually in hospitals where they affect patients in high-dependency units
such as intensive care units, burns units and cardiothoracic units. MRS A have the ability
to colonize staff and patients and to spread readily among them. Several epidemic
strains are currently circulating in the UK. The glycopeptides, vancomycin orteicoplanin,
are the currently recommended agents for treating patients infected with these organisms.
Another serious resistance problem is that of drug-resistant enterococci. These include
Enterococcus faecalis and, in particular, E. faecium. Resistance to the glycopeptides
has again been a problem among patients in high-dependency units. Four different
phenotypes are recognized (Van A, B, C and D). The Van A phenotype is resistant to
both glycopeptides, while the others are sensitive to teicoplanin but demonstrate high
(Van B) or intermediate (Van C) resistance to vancomycin; Van D resistance has only
recently been described. Those fully resistant to the glycopeptides are increasing in
frequency and causing great concern since they are essentially resistant to almost all
antibiotics.
Tuberculosis is on the increase after decades in which the incidence has been steadily
falling. Drug-resistant strains have emerged largely among inadequately treated or
non-compliant patients. These include the homeless, alcoholic, intravenous drug abusing
and immigrant populations. Resistance patterns vary but increasingly includes rifampicin
and isoniazid. Furthermore, outbreaks of multi-drug-resistant tuberculosis have been
increasingly reported from a number of hospital centres in the USA and more recently
Europe, including the UK. These infections have occasionally spread to health care
workers and is giving rise to considerable concern.
The underlying mechanisms of resistance are considered in Chapter 9.
2.5 Drug combinations
Antibiotics are generally used alone, but may on occasion be prescribed in combination.
Combining two antibiotics may result in synergism, indifference or antagonism. In the
case of synergism, microbial inhibition is achieved at concentrations below that for
each agent alone and may prove advantageous in treating relatively insusceptible
infections such as enterococcal endocarditis, where a combination of penicillin and
gentamicin is synergistically active. Another advantage of synergistic combinations is
that it may enable the use of toxic agents where dose reductions are possible. For
example, meningitis caused by the fungus Cryptococcus neoformans responds to an
abbreviated course of amphotericin B when it is combined with 5-flucytosine, thereby
reducing the risk of toxicity from amphotericin B.
134 Chapter 6
Combined drug use is occasionally recommended to prevent resistance emerging
during treatment. For example, treatment may fail when fusidic acid is used alone to
treat Staph, aureus infections, because resistant strains develop rapidly; this is prevented
by combining fusidic acid with flucloxacillin. Likewise, tuberculosis is treated with a
minimum of two agents, such as rifampicin and isoniazid; again drug resistance is
prevented which may result if either agent is used alone.
The most common reason for using combined therapy is in the treatment of
confirmed or suspected mixed infections where a single agent alone will fail to cover
all pathogenic organisms. This is the case in serious abdominal sepsis where mixed
aerobic and anaerobic infections are common and the use of metronidazole in
combination with either an aminoglycoside or a broad-spectrum cephalosporin is
essential. Finally, drugs are used in combination in patients who are seriously ill and in
whom uncertainty exists concerning the microbiological nature of their infection. This
initial 'blind therapy' frequently includes a broad-spectrum penicillin or cephalosporin
in combination with an aminoglycoside. The regimen should be modified in the light
of subsequent microbiological information.
2.6 Adverse reactions
Regrettably, all chemotherapeutic agents have the potential to produce adverse
reactions with varying degrees of frequency and severity, and these include hypersen-
sitivity reactions and toxic effects. These may be dose-related and predictable in a
patient with a history of hypersensitivity or a previous toxic reaction to a drug or its
chemical analogues. However, many adverse events are idiosyncratic and therefore
unpredictable.
Hypersensitivity reactions range in severity from fatal anaphylaxis, in which there
is widespread tissue oedema, airway obstruction and cardiovascular collapse, to minor
and reversible hypersensitivity reactions such as skin eruptions and drug fever. Such
reactions are more likely in those with a history of hypersensitivity to the drug, and are
more frequent in patients with previous allergic diseases such as childhood eczema or
asthma. It is important to question patients closely concerning hypersensitivity reactions
before prescribing, since it precludes the use of all compounds within a class, such as
the sulphonamides or tetracyclines, while cephalosporins should be used with caution
in patients allergic to penicillin since these agents are structurally related. They should
be avoided entirely in those who have had a previous severe hypersensitivity reaction
to penicillin.
Drug toxicity is often dose-related and may affect a variety of organs or tissues.
For example, the aminoglycosides are both nephrotoxic and ototoxic to varying degrees;
therefore, dosaging should be individualized and the serum assayed, especially where
renal function is abnormal, to avoid toxic effects and non-therapeutic drug concen-
trations. An example of dose-related toxicity is chloramphenicol-induced bone marrow
suppression. Chloramphenicol interferes with the normal maturation of bone marrow
stem cells and high concentrations may result in a steady fall in circulating red and
white cells and also platelets. This effect is generally reversible with dose reduction
or drug withdrawal. This dose-related toxic reaction of chloramphenicol should be
contrasted with idiosyncratic bone marrow toxicity which is unrelated to dose and occurs
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 135
at a much lower frequency of approximately 1 :40 000 and is frequently irreversible,
ending fatally. Toxic effects may also be genetically determined. For example, peripheral
neuropathy may occur in those who are slow acetylators of isoniazid, while haemolysis
occurs in those deficient in the red cell enzyme glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase,
when treated with sulphonamides or primaquine.
Superinfection
Anti-infective drugs not only affect the invading organism undergoing treatment but
also have an impact on the normal bacterial flora, especially of the skin and mucous
membranes. This may result in microbial overgrowth of resistant organisms with
subsequent superinfection. One example is the common occurrence of oral or vaginal
candidiasis in patients treated with broad-spectrum agents such as ampicilhn or
tetracycline. A more serious example is the development of pseudo-membranous colitis
from the overgrowth of toxin-producing strains of Clostridium difficile present in the
bowel flora following the use of clindamycin and other broad-spectrum antibiotics.
This condition is managed by drug withdrawal and oral vancomycin. Rarely, colectomy
(excision of part or whole of the colon) may be necessary for severe cases.
Chemoprophylaxis
An increasingly important use of antimicrobial agents is that of infection prevention,
especially in relationship to surgery. Infection remains one of the most important
complications of many surgical procedures, and the recognition that peri-operative
antibiotics are effective and safe in preventing this complication has proved a major
advance in surgery. The principles that underly the chemoprophylactic use of anti-
bacterials relate to the predictability of infection for a particular surgical procedure,
both in terms of its occurrence, microbial aetiology and susceptibility to antibiotics.
Therapeutic drug concentrations present at the operative site at the time of surgery
rapidly reduce the number of potentially infectious organisms and prevents would sepsis.
If prophylaxis is delayed to the post-operative period then efficacy is markedly impaired.
It is important that chemoprophylaxis be limited to the peri-operative period, the first
dose being administered approximately 1 hour before surgery for injectable agents and
repeated for two to three repeat doses postoperatively. Prolonging chemoprophylaxis
beyond this period is not cost-effective and increases the risk of adverse drug reactions
and superinfection. One of the best examples of the efficacy of surgical prophylaxis is
in the area of large-bowel surgery. Before the widespread use of chemoprophylaxis,
postoperative infection rates for colectomy were often 30% or higher; these have now
been reduced to around 5%.
Chemoprophylaxis has been extended to other surgical procedures where the risk
of infection may be low but its occurrence has serious consequences. This is especially
true for the implantation of prosthetic joint or heart valves. These are major surgical
procedures and although infection may be infrequent its consequences are serious and
on balance the use of chemoprophylaxis is cost-effective.
Examples of chemoprophylaxis in the non-surgical arena include the prevention of
endocarditis with amoxycillin in patients with valvular heart disease undergoing dental
surgery, and the prevention of secondary cases of meningococcal meningitis with
rifampicin among household contacts of an index case.
Clinical use
The choice of antimicrobial chemotherapy is initially dependent upon the clinical
diagnosis. Under some circumstances the clinical diagnosis implies a microbiological
diagnosis which may dictate specific therapy. For example, typhoid fever is caused by
Salmonella typhi which is generally sensitive to chloramphenicol, co-trimoxazole and
ciproflaxin. However, for many infections, establishing a clinical diagnosis implies a
range of possible microbiological causes and requires laboratory confirmation from
samples collected, preferably before antibiotic therapy is begun. Laboratory isolation
and susceptibility testing of the causative agent establish the diagnosis with certainty
and make drug selection more rational. However, in many circumstances, especially
in general practice, microbiological documentation of an infection is not possible.
Hence knowledge of the usual microbiological cause of a particular infection and its
susceptibility to antimicrobial agents is essential for effective drug prescribing. The
following section explores a selection of the problems associated with antimicrobial
drag prescribing for a range of clinical problems.
3.1 Respiratory tract infections
Infections of the respiratory tract are among the commonest of infections, and account
for much consultation in general practice and a high percentage of acute hospital
admissions. They are divided into infections of the upper respiratory tract, involving
the ears, throat, nasal sinuses and the trachea, and the lower respiratory tract (LRT),
where they affect the airways, lungs and pleura.
3.1.1 Upper respiratory tract infections
Acute pharyngitis presents a diagnostic and therapeutic dilemma. The majority of sore
throats are caused by a variety of viruses; fewer than 20% are bacterial and hence
potentially responsive to antibiotic therapy. However, antibiotics are widely prescribed
and this reflects the difficulty in discriminating streptococcal from non-streptococcal
infections clinically in the absence of microbiological documentation. Nonetheless,
Strep, pyogenes is the most important bacterial pathogen and this responds to oral
penicillin. However, up to 10 days' treatment is required for its eradication from
the throat. This requirement causes problems with compliance since symptomatic
improvement generally occurs within 2-3 days.
Although viral infections are important causes of both otitis media and sinusitis,
they are generally self-limiting. Bacterial infections may complicate viral illnesses,
and are also primary causes of ear and sinus infections. Streptococcus pneumoniae and
Haemophilus influenzae are the commonest bacterial pathogens. Amoxycillin is widely
prescribed for these infections since it is microbiologically active, penetrates the middle
ear, and sinuses, is well tolerated and has proved effective.
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 137
3.1.2 Lower respiratory tract infections
Infections of the LRT include pneumonia, lung abscess, bronchitis, bronchiectasis
and infective complications of cystic fibrosis. Each presents a specific diagnostic and
therapeutic challenge which reflects the variety of pathogens involved and the frequent
difficulties in establishing an accurate microbial diagnosis. The laboratory diagnosis
of LRT infections is largely dependent upon culturing sputum. Unfortunately this may
be contaminated with the normal bacterial flora of the upper respiratory tract during
expectoration. In hospitalized patients, the empirical use of antibiotics before admission
substantially diminishes the value of sputum culture and may result in overgrowth by
non-pathogenic microbes, thus causing difficulty with the interpretation of sputum
culture results. Alternative diagnostic samples include needle aspiration of sputum
directly from the trachea or of fluid within the pleural cavity. Blood may also be cultured
and serum examined for antibody responses or microbial antigens. In the community,
few patients will have their LRT infection diagnosed microbiologically and the choice
of antibiotic is based on clinical diagnosis.
Pneumonia. The range of pathogens causing acute pneumonia includes viruses, bacteria
and, in the immunocompromised host, parasites and fungi. Table 6.2 summarizes these
pathogens and indicates drugs appropriate for their treatment. Clinical assessment
includes details of the evolution of the infection, any evidence of a recent viral infection,
the age of the patient and risk factors such as corticosteroid therapy or pre-existing
lung disease. The extent of the pneumonia, as assessed clinically or by X-ray, is also
important.
Streptococcus pneumoniae remains the commonest cause of pneumonia and responds
well to penicillin. In addition, a number of atypical infections may cause pneumonia
and include Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, psittacosis and oc-
casionally Q fever. With psittacosis there may be a history of contact with parrots or
budgerigars; while Legionnaires' disease has often been acquired during hotel holidays
Table 6.2 Microorganisms responsible for pneumonia and the therapeutic agent of choice
Pathogen Drug(s) of choice
Streptococcus pneumoniae Penicillin
Staphylococcus aureus Flucloxacillin ± fusidic acid
Haemophilus influenzae Amoxycillin or cefuroxime
Klebsiella pneumoniae Cefotaxime ± gentamicin
Pseudomonas aeruginosa Gentamicin ± azlocillin
Mycoplasma pneumoniae Erythromycin or tetracycline
Legionella pneumophila Erythromycin ± rifampicin
Chlamydia psittaci Tetracycline
Mycobacterium tuberculosis Rifampicin + isoniazid + ethambutol +
pyrazinamide*
Herpes simplex, varicella/zoster Acyclovir
Candida or Aspergillus spp. Amphotericin B
Anaerobic bacteria Penicillin or metronidazole
* Reduce to two drugs after 6-8 weeks.
138 Chapter 6
in the Mediterranean area. The atypical pneumonias, unlike pneumococcal pneumonia,
do not respond to penicillin. Legionnaires' disease is treated with erythromycin and, in
the presence of severe pneumonia, rifampicin is added to the regimen. Mycoplasma
infections are best treated with either erythromycin or tetracycline, while the latter
drug is indicated for both psittacosis and Q fever.
Lung abscess. Destruction of lung tissue may lead to abscess formation and is a
feature of aerobic Gram-negative bacillary and Staph, aureus infections. In addition,
aspiration of oropharyngeal secretion can lead to chronic low-grade sepsis with abscess
formation and the expectoration of foul-smelling sputum which characterizes anaerobic
sepsis. The latter condition responds to high-dose penicillin, which is active against
most of the normal oropharyngeal flora, while metronidazole may be appropriate for
strictly anaerobic infections. In the case of aerobic Gram-negative bacillary sepsis,
aminoglycosides, with or without a broad-spectrum cephalosporin, are the agents of
choice. Acute staphylococcal pneumonia is an extremely serious infection and requires
treatment with high-dose flucloxacillin alone or in combination with fusidic acid.
Cystic fibrosis. Cystic fibrosis is a multi-system, congenital abnormality which often
affects the lungs and results in recurrent infections, initially with Staph, aureus,
subsequently with H. influenzae and eventually leads on to recurrent Ps. aeruginosa
infection. The latter organism is associated with copious quantities of purulent sputum
which is extremely difficult to expectorate. Pseudomonas aeruginosa is a cof actor in
the progressive lung damage which is eventually fatal in these patients. Repeated courses
of antibiotics are prescribed and although they have improved the quality and longevity
of life, infections caused by Ps. aeruginosa are difficult to treat and require repeated
hospitalization and administration of parenteral antibiotics such as an aminoglycoside,
either alone or in combination with an antipseudomonal penicillin. The dose of
aminoglycosides tolerated by these patients is often higher than in normal individuals
and is associated with larger volumes of distribution for these and other agents. Some
benefit may also be obtained from inhaled aerosolized antibiotics. Unfortunately drug
resistance may emerge and makes drug selection more dependent upon laboratory
guidance.
3.2 Urinary tract infections
Urinary tract infection is a common problem in both community and hospital practice.
Although occurring throughout life, infections are more common in pre-school girls
and women during their childbearing years, although in the elderly the sex distribution
is similar. Infection is predisposed by factors which impair urine flow. These include
congenital abnormalities, reflux of urine from the bladder into the ureters, kidney stones
and tumours and, in males, enlargement of the prostate gland. Bladder catheterization
is an important cause of urinary tract infection in hospitalized patients.
3.2.1 Pathogenesis
In those with structural or drainage problems the risk exists of ascending infection
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 139
to involve the kidney and occasionally the bloodstream. Although structural abnor-
malities may be absent in women of childbearing years, infection can become recurrent,
symptomatic and extremely distressing. Of greater concern is the occurrence of
infection in the pre-school child since normal maturation of the kidney may be
impaired and result in progressive damage which presents as renal failure in later
life.
From a therapeutic point of view, it is essential to confirm the presence of bacteriuria
(a condition in which there are bacteria in the urine) since symptoms alone are not a
reliable method of documenting infection. This applies particularly to bladder infection
where the symptoms of burning micturition (dysuria) and frequency can be associated
with a variety of non-bacteriuric conditions. Patients with symptomatic bacteriuria
should always be treated. However, the necessity to treat asymptomatic bacteriuric
patients varies with age and the presence or absence of underlying urinary tract
abnormalities. In the pre-school child it is essential to treat all urinary tract infections
and maintain the urine in a sterile state so that normal kidney maturation can proceed.
Likewise in pregnancy there is a risk of infection ascending from the bladder to involve
the kidney. This is a serious complication and may result in premature labour. Other
indications for treating asymptomatic bacteriuria include the presence of underlying
renal abnormalities such as stones which may be associated with repeated infections
caused by Proteus spp.
3.2.2 Drug therapy
The antimicrobial treatment of urinary tract infection presents a number of interesting
challenges. Drugs must be selected for their ability to achieve high urinary concentrations
and, if the kidney is involved, adequate tissue concentrations. Safety in childhood or
pregnancy is important since repeated or prolonged medication may be necessary. The
choice of agent will be dictated by the microbial aetiology and susceptibility findings,
since the latter can vary widely among Gram-negative enteric bacilli, especially in
patients who are hospitalized. Table 6.3 shows the distribution of bacteria causing urinary
tract infection in the community and in hospitalized patients. The greater tendency
towards infections caused by Klebsiella spp. and Ps. aeruginosa should be noted since
antibiotic sensitivity is more variable for these pathogens. Drug resistance has increased
substantially in recent years and has reduced the value of formerly widely prescribed
agents such as the sulphonamides and ampicillin.
Table 6.3 Urinary tract infection — distribution of pathogenic bacteria in the community and
hospitalized patients
Com mur
lity
Hospital
Organism
m
m
Escherichia coli
75
55
Proteus mirabilis
10
13
Kelbsiella or Enterobacter spp.
4
18
Enterococci
6
5
Staphylococcus
epidermidis
5
4
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
-
5
140 Chapter 6
Uncomplicated community -acquired urinary tract infection presents few problems
with management. Drugs such as trimethoprim, co-trimoxazole, ciprofloxacin and
ampicillin are widely used. Cure rates are high for ciprofloxacin and the trimethoprim-
containing regimens, although drug resistance to ampicillin has increased. Treatment
for 3 days is generally satisfactory and is usually accompanied by prompt control of
symptoms, Single-dose therapy with amoxycillin 3g or co-trimoxazole 1920mg (4
tablets) has also been shown to be effective in selected individuals. Alternative agents
include nitrofurantoin and nalidixic acid, although these are not as well tolerated.
It is important to demonstrate the cure of bacteriuria with a repeat urine sample
collected 4-6 weeks after treatment, or sooner should symptoms fail to subside.
Recurrent urinary tract infection is an indication for further investigation of the urinary
tract to detect underlying pathology which may be surgically correctable. Under these
circumstances it also is important to maintain the urine in a sterile state. This can be
achieved with repeated courses of antibiotics, guided by laboratory sensitivity data.
Alternatively, long-term chemoprophylaxis for periods of 6-12 months to control
infection by either prevention or suppressions is widely used. Trimethoprim is the most
commonly prescribed chemoprophylactic agent and is given as a single nightly dose.
This achieves high urinary concentrations throughout the night and generally ensures a
sterile urine. Nitrofurantoin is an alternative agent.
Infection of the kidney demands the use of agents which achieve adequate tissue
as well as urinary concentrations. Since bacteraemia (a condition in which there are
bacteria circulating in the blood) may complicate infection of the kidney, it is generally
recommended that antibiotics be administered parenterally. Although ampicillin was
formerly widely used, drug resistance is now common and agents such as cefotaxime
or ciprofloxacin are often preferred, since the aminoglycosides, although highly effective
and preferentially concentrated within the renal cortex, carry the risk of nephrotoxicity.
Infections of the prostate tend to be persistent, recurrent and difficult to treat. This
is in part due to the more acid environment of the prostate gland which inhibits drug
penetration by many of the antibiotics used to treat urinary tract infection. Agents which
are basic in nature, such as erythromycin, achieve therapeutic concentrations within
the gland but unfortunately are not active against the pathogens responsible for bacterial
prostatitis. Trimethoprim, however, is a useful agent since it is preferentially concentrated
within the prostate and active against many of the causative pathogens. It is important
that treatment be prolonged for several weeks, since relapse is common.
3.3 Gastrointestinal infections
The gut is vulnerable to infection by viruses, bacteria, parasites and occasionally fungi.
Virus infections are the most prevalent but are not susceptible to chemotherapeutic
intervention. Bacterial infections are more readily recognized and raise questions
concerning the role of antibiotic management. Parasitic infections of the gut are beyond
the scope of this chapter.
Bacteria cause disease of the gut as a result of either mucosal invasion or toxin
production or a combination of the two mechanisms as summarized in Table 6.4.
Treatment is largely directed at replacing and maintaining an adequate intake of fluid
and electrolytes. Antibiotics are generally not recommended for infective gastroenteritis,
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 141
Table 6.4 Bacterial gut infections — pathogenic mechanisms
Origin
Site of infection
Mechanism
Campylobacter jejuni
Small and large
bowel
Invasion
Salmonella spp.
Small and large
bowel
Invasion
Shigella spp.
Large bowel
Invasion ± toxin
Escherichia coli
enteroinvasive
Large bowel
Invasion
enterotoxigenic
Small bowel
Toxin
Clostridium difficile
Large bowel
Toxin
Staphylococcus aureus
Small bowel
Toxin
Vibrio cholerae
Small bowel
Toxin
Clostridium perfringens
Small bowel
Toxin
Yersinia spp.
Small and large
bowel
Invasion
Bacillus cereus
Small bowel
Invasion! toxin
Vibrio parahaemolyticus
Small bowel
Invasion ± toxin
but deserve consideration where they have been demonstrated to abbreviate the acute
disease or to prevent complications including prolonged gastrointestinal excretion of
the pathogen where this poses a public health hazard.
It should be emphasized that most gut infections are self-limiting. However, attacks
can be severe and may result in hospitalization. Antibiotics are used to treat severe
Campylobacter and Shigella infections; erythromycin and co-trimoxazole, respectively,
are the preferred agents. Such treatment abbreviates the disease and eliminates gut
excretion in Shigella infection. However, in severe Campylobacter infection the data
are currently equivocal, although the clinical impression favours the use of erythromycin
for severe infections. The role of antibiotics for Campylobacter and Shigella infections
should be contrasted with gastrointestinal salmonellosis, for which antibiotics are
contraindicated since they do not abbreviate symptoms and are associated with more
prolonged gut excretion and introduce the risk of adverse drug reactions. However, in
severe salmonellosis, especially at extremes of age, systemic toxaemia and bloodstream
infection can occur and under these circumstances treatment with either chloramphenicol
or co-trimoxazole is appropriate.
Typhoid and paratyphoid fevers (known as enteric fevers), although acquired by
ingestion of salmonellae, Sal. typhi and Sal. paratyphi, respectively, are largely systemic
infections and antibiotic therapy is mandatory; ciprofloxacin is now the drug of choice
although co-trimoxazole or chloramphenicol are satisfactory alternatives. Prolonged
gut excretion of Sal. typhi is a well-known complication of typhoid fever and is a major
public health hazard in developing countries. Treatment with ciprofloxacin or high-
dose ampicillin can eliminate the gall-bladder excretion which is the major site of
persistent infection in carriers. However, the presence of gallstones reduces the chance
of cure.
Cholera is a serious infection causing epidemics throughout Asia. Although a toxin-
mediated disease, largely controlled with replacement of fluid and electrolyte losses,
tetracycline has proved effective in eliminating the causative vibrio from the bowel,
thereby abbreviating the course of the illness and reducing the total fluid and electrolyte
losses.
Traveller's diarrhoea may be caused by one of many gastrointestinal pathogens
(Table 6.4). However, enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli is the most common pathogen.
Whilst it is generally short-lived, traveller's diarrhoea can seriously mar a brief period
abroad, be it for holiday or business purposes. Although not universally accepted, the
use of short-course co-trimoxazole or quinolone such as norfloxacin can abbreviate an
attack in patients with severe disease.
3.4 Skin and soft tissue infections
Infections of the skin and soft tissue commonly follow traumatic injury to the epithelium
but occasionally may be blood-borne. Interruption of the integrity of the skin allows
ingress of microorganisms to produce superficial, localized infections which on occasion
may become more deep-seated and spread rapidly through tissues. Skin trauma
complicates surgical incisions and accidents, including burns. Similarly, prolonged
immobilization can result in pressure damage to skin from impaired blood flow. It is
most commonly seen in patients who are unconscious.
Microbes responsible for skin infection often arise from the normal skin flora which
includes Staph, aureus. In addition Strep, pyogenes, Ps. aeruginosa and anaerobic
bacteria are other recognized pathogens. Viruses also affect the skin and mucosal
surfaces, either as a result of generalized infection or localized disease as in the case of
herpes simplex. The latter is amenable to antiviral therapy in selected patients, although
for the majority of patients, virus infections of the skin are self -limiting.
Streptococcus pyogenes is responsible for a range of skin infections: impetigo is a
superficial infection of the epidermis which is common in childhood and is highly
contagious; cellulitis is a more deep-seated infection which spreads rapidly through
the tissues to involve the lymphatics and occasionally the bloodstream; erysipelas is a
rapidly spreading cellulitis commonly involving the face, which characteristically has
a raised leading edge due to lymphatic involvement. Necrotizing fasciitis is a more
serious, rapidly progressive infection of the skin and subcutaneous structures including
the fascia and musculature. Despite early diagnosis and high-dose intravenous antibiotics,
this condition is often life-threatening and may require extensive surgical debridement
of devitalized tissue and even limb amputation to ensure survival. A fatal outcome is
usually the result of profound toxaemia and bloodstream spread. Penicillin is the drug
of choice for all these infections although in severe instances parenteral administration
is appropriate. The use of topical agents, such as tetracycline, to treat impetigo may fail
since drug resistance is now recognized.
Staphylococcus aureus is responsible for a variety of skin infections which require
therapeutic approaches different from those of streptococcal infections. Staphylococcal
cellulitis is indistinguishable clinically from streptococcal cellulitis and responds
to cloxacillin or flucloxacillin, but generally fails to respond to penicillin owing
to penicillinase (/3-lactamase) production. Staphylococcus aureus is an important
cause of superficial, localized skin sepsis which varies from small pustules to boils
and occasionally to a more deeply invasive, suppurative skin abscess known as a
carbuncle. Antibiotics are generally not indicated for these conditions. Pustules and
boils settle with antiseptic soaps or creams and often discharge spontaneously, whereas
carbuncles frequently require surgical drainage. Staphylococcus aureus may also cause
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 143
postoperative wound infections, sometimes associated with retained suture material,
and settles once the stitch is removed. Antibiotics are only appropriate in this situation
if there is extensive accompanying soft tissue invasion.
Anaerobic bacteria are characteristically associated with foul-smelling wounds.
They are found in association with surgical incisions following intra-abdominal
procedures and pressure sores which are usually located over the buttocks and hips
where they become infected with faecal flora. These infections are frequently mixed
and include Gram-negative enteric bacilli which may mask the presence of underlying
anaerobic bacteria. The principles of treating anaerobic soft tissue infection again
emphasize the need for removal of all foreign and devitalized material. Antibiotics
such as metronidazole or clindamycin should be considered where tissue invasion has
occurred.
The treatment of infected burn wounds presents a number of peculiar facets. Burns
are initially sterile, especially when they involve all layers of the skin. However, they
rapidly become colonized with bacteria whose growth is supported by the protein-rich
exudate. Staphylococci, Strep, pyogenes and, particularly, Ps. aeruginosa frequently
colonize burns and may jeopardize survival of skin grafts and occasionally, and more
seriously, result in bloodstream invasion. Treatment of invasive Ps. aeruginosa infections
requires combined therapy with an aminoglycoside, such as gentamicin or tobramycin,
and an antipseudomonal agent, such as azlocillin, ticarcillin or ceftazidime. This
produces high therapeutic concentrations which generally act in a synergistic manner.
The use of aminoglycosides in patients with serious burns requires careful monitoring
of serum concentrations to ensure that they are therapeutic yet non-toxic, since renal
function is often impaired in the days immediately following a serious burn. Excessive
sodium loading may complicate the use of large doses of antipseudomonal penicillins
such as carbenicillin and to a lesser extent ticarcillin.
3.5 Central nervous system infections
The brain, its surrounding covering of meninges and the spinal cord are subject to
infection, which is generally blood-borne but may also complicate neurosurgery, pen-
etrating injuries or direct spread from infection in the middle ear or nasal sinuses. Viral
meningitis is the most common infection but is generally self-limiting. Occasionally
destructive forms of encephalitis occur; an example is herpes simplex encephalitis.
Bacterial infections include meningitis and brain abscess and carry a high risk of
mortality, while, in those who recover, residual neurological damage or impairment
of intellectual function may follow. This occurs despite the availability of antibiotics
active against the responsible bacterial pathogens. Fungal infections of the brain,
although rare, are increasing in frequency, particularly among immunocompromised
patients who either have underlying malignant conditions or are on potent cytotoxic
drugs.
The treatment of bacterial infections of the central nervous system highlights a
number of important therapeutic considerations. Bacterial meningitis is caused by a
variety of bacteria although their incidence varies with age. In the neonate, E. coli
and group B streptococci account for the majority of infections, while in the pre-
school child H. influenzae is the commonest pathogen. Neisseria meningitidis has a
144 Chapter 6
peak incidence between 5 and 15 years of age, while pneumococcal meningitis is
predominantly a disease of adults.
Penicillin is the drug of choice for the treatment of group B streptococcal, meningo-
coccal and pneumococcal infections but, as discussed earlier, CSF concentrations of
penicillin are significantly influenced by the intensity of the inflammatory response.
To achieve therapeutic concentrations within the CSF, high dosages are required, and
in the case of pneumococcal meningitis should be continued for 10-14 days.
Resistance ofH. influenzae to ampicillin has increased in the past decade and varies
geographically. Thus, it can no longer be prescribed with confidence as initial therapy,
and cetotaxime or ceftriaxone are the preferred alternatives. However, once laboratory
evidence for /3-lactamase activity is excluded, ampicillin can be safely substituted.
Escherichia coli meningitis carries a mortality of greater than 40% and reflects
both the virulence of this organism and the pharmacokinetic problems of achieving
adequate CSF antibiotic levels.The broad-spectrum cephalosporins such as cefotaxime,
ceftriaxone or ceftazidime have been shown to achieve satisfactory therapeutic levels
and are the agents of choice to treat Gram-negative bacillary meningitis. Treatment
again must be prolonged for periods ranging from 2 to 4 weeks.
Brain abscess presents a different therapeutic challenge. An abscess is locally
destructive to the brain and causes further damage by increasing intracranial pressure.
The infecting organisms are varied but those arising from middle ear or nasal sinus
infection are often polymicrobial and include anaerobic bacteria, microaerophilic species
and Gram-negative enteric bacilli. Less commonly, a pure Staph, aureus abscess may
complicate blood-borne spread. Brain abscess is a neurosurgical emergency and requires
drainage. However, antibiotics are an important adjunct to treatment. The polymicrobial
nature of many infections demands prompt and careful laboratory examination to
determine optimum therapy. Drugs are selected not only on their ability to penetrate
the blood-brain barrier and enter the CSF but also on their ability to penetrate the brain
substance. Metronidazole has proved a valuable alternative agent in such infections,
although it is not active against microaerophilic streptococci which must be treated with
high-dose benzylpenicillin. The two are often used in combination. Chloramphenicol
is an alternative agent.
Antibiotic policies
Rationale
The plethora of available antimicrobial agents presents both an increasing problem of
selection to the prescriber and difficulties to the diagnostic laboratory as to which agents
should be tested for susceptibility. Differences in antimicrobial activity among related
compounds are often of minor importance but can occasionally be of greater significance
and may be a source of confusion to the non-specialist. This applies particularly to
large classes of drugs, such as the penicillins and cephalosporins, where there has been
an explosion in the availability of new agents in recent years. Guidance, in the form of
an antibiotic policy, has a major role to play in providing the prescriber with a range of
agents appropriate to his/her needs and should be supported by laboratory evidence of
susceptibility to these agents.
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 145
In recent years, increased awareness of the cost of medical care has led to a major
review of various aspects of health costs. The pharmacy budget has often attracted
attention since, unlike many other hospital expenses, it is readily identifiable in terms
of cost and prescriber. Thus, an antibiotic policy is also seen as a means whereby the
economic burden of drug prescribing can be reduced or contained. There can be little
argument with the recommendation that the cheaper of two compounds should be
selected where agents are similar in terms of efficacy and adverse reactions. Likewise,
generic substitution is also desirable provided there is bioequivalence. It has become
increasingly impractical for pharmacists to stock all the formulations of every antibiotic
currently available, and here again an antibiotic policy can produce significant savings
by limiting the amount of stock held. A policy based on a restricted number of agents
also enables price reduction on purchasing costs through competitive tendering. The
above activities have had a major influence on containing or reducing drug costs,
although these savings have often been lost as new and often expensive preparations
become available, particularly in the field of biological and anticancer therapy.
Another argument in favour of an antibiotic policy is the occurrence of drug-resistant
bacteria within an institution. The presence of sick patients and the opportunities for
the spread of microorganisms can produce outbreaks of hospital infection. The excessive
use of selected agents has been associated with the emergence of drug-resistant bacteria
which have often caused serious problems within high-dependency areas, such as
intensive care units or burns units where antibiotic use is often high. One oft-quoted
example is the occurrence of a multiple-antibiotic resistant K. aerogenes within a
neurosurgical intensive care unit in which the organism became resistant to all currently
available antibiotics and was associated with the widespread use of ampicillin. By
prohibiting the use of all antibiotics, and in particular ampicillin, the resistant organism
rapidly disappeared and the problem was resolved.
In formulating an antibiotic policy, it is important that the susceptibility of
microorganisms be monitored and reviewed at regular intervals. This applies not
only to the hospital as a whole, but to specific high-dependency units in particular.
Likewise general practitioner samples should also be monitored. This will provide
accurate information on drag susceptibility to guide the prescriber as to the most effective
agent.
4.2 Types of antibiotic policies
There are a number of different approaches to the organization of an antibiotic policy.
These range from a deliberate absence of any restriction on prescribing to a strict policy
whereby all anti-infective agents must have expert approval before they are administered.
Restrictive policies vary according to whether they are mainly laboratory controlled,
by employing restrictive reporting, or whether they are mainly pharmacy controlled,
by restrictive dispensing. In many institutions it is common practice to combine the
two approaches.
4.2.1 Free prescribing policy
The advocates of a free prescribing policy argue that strict antibiotic policies are both
146 Chapter 6
impractical and limit clinical freedom to prescribe. It is also argued that the greater the
number of agents in use the less likely it is that drug resistance will emerge to any one
agent or class of agents. However, few would support such an approach, which is
generally an argument for mayhem.
4.2.2 Restricted reporting
Another approach that is widely practised in the UK is that of restricted reporting. The
laboratory, largely for practical reasons, tests only a limited range of agents against
bacterial isolates. The agents may be selected primarily by microbiological staff or
following consultation with their clinical colleagues. The antibiotics tested will vary
according to the site of infection, since drugs used to treat urinary tract infections often
differ from those used to treat systemic disease.
There are specific problems regarding the testing of certain agents such as the
cephalosporins where the many different preparations have varying activity against
bacteria. The practice of testing a single agent to represent first generation, second
generation or third generation compounds is questionable, and with the new compounds
susceptibility should be tested specifically to that agent. By selecting a limited range of
compounds for use, sensitivity testing becomes a practical consideration and allows
the clinician to use such agents with greater confidence.
4.2.3 Restricted dispensing
As mentioned above, the most Draconian of all antibiotic policies is the absolute
restriction of drug dispensing pending expert approval. The expert opinion may be
provided by either a microbiologist or infectious disease specialist. Such a system can
only be effective in large institutions where staff are available 24 hours a day. This
approach is often cumbersome, generates hostility and does not necessarily create the
best educational forum for learning effective antibiotic prescribing.
A more widely used approach is to divide agents into those approved for unrestricted
use and those for restricted use. Agents on the unrestricted list are appropriate for
the majority of common clinical situations. The restricted list may include agents
where microbiological sensitivity information is essential, such as for vancomycin
and certain aminoglycosides. In addition, agents which are used infrequently but for
specific indications, such as parenteral amphotericin B, are also restricted in use. Other
compounds which may be expensive and used for specific indications, such as broad-
spectrum /Mactams in the treatment of Ps. aeruginosa infections, may also be justifiably
included on the restricted list. Items omitted from the restricted or unrestricted list are
generally not stocked, although they can be obtained at short notice as necessary.
Such a policy should have a mechanism whereby desirable new agents are added
as they become available and is most appropriately decided at a therapeutics com-
mittee. Policing such a policy is best effected as a joint arrangement between senior
pharmacists and microbiologists. This combined approach of both restricted reporting
and restricted prescribing is extremely effective and provides a powerful educational
tool for medical staff and students faced with learning the complexities of modern
antibiotic prescribing.
Clinical uses of antimicrobial drugs 147
Further reading
Finch R.G. (1996) Antibacterial chemotherapy: principles of use. Medicine, 24, 24-26.
Greenwood D. (1995) Antimicrobial Chemotherapy, 3rd edn. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Lambert H.P., O'Grady F., Greenwood D. & Finch R.G. (1996) Antibiotic and Chemotherapy, 7th edn.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Mandell G.L., Douglas R.G. & Bennett J.E. (eds) (1995) Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases,
4th edn. New York: John Wiley.
148 Chapter 6
Manufacture of antibiotics
1 Introduction
2 Choice of examples
3 The production of benzylpenicillin
3.1 The organism
3.2 Inoculum preparation
3.3 Thefermenter
3.3.1 Oxygen supply
3.3.2 Temperature control
3.3.3 Defoaming agents and instrumentation
3.3.4 Media additions
3.3.5 Transfer and sampling systems
3.4 Control of the fermentation
3.4.1 Batched medium
3.4.2 Fed nutrients
3.4.3 Stimulation by PAA
3.4.4 Termination
3.5 Extraction
3.5.1 Removal of cells
3.5.2 Isolation of benzylpenicillin
3.5.3 Treatment of crude extract
4 The production of penicillin V
5 The production of cephalosporin C
6 Further reading
Introduction
Industrial scale manufacture of the majority of antibiotics is fermentation-based.
Strictly speaking, fermentations are biological processes occurring in the absence of
air (oxygen). However, the term is now commonly applied to any large-scale cultivation
of microorganisms, whether aerobic (with oxygen) or anaerobic (without oxygen).
Despite the ever-increasing use of complex instrumentation, the application of
feedback control techniques and the use of computers, the science of antibiotic
fermentation is still imperfectly developed. This technology is involved with a living
cell population which is changing both quantitatively and qualitively throughout the
production cycle: optimization is difficult, because no two ostensibly 'identical' batches
are ever wholly alike. Dealing with the challenge of this variation is one of the attractions
for those who practise in this field.
Choice of examples
The manufacture of benzylpenicillin (penicillin G, originally just 'penicillin') is chosen
as a model for the antibiotic production process. It is the most renowned of antibiotics
and is the first to have been manufactured in bulk. It is still universally prescribed and
is also in demand as input material for semisynthetic antibiotics (Chapter 5).
Developments associated with the penicillin fermentation process have been a significant
factor in the development of modern biotechnology. It was a further 30 years, i.e. not
until the 1970s, before there were significant new advances in industrial fermentations.
No single product can exemplify all the important features of antibiotic manufacture.
Benzylpenicillin is a /Mactam. Brief accounts are given of the manufacture of two
other /3-lactams, penicillin V (phenoxymethylpenicillin) and cephalosporin C, to
illustrate further key points.
Manufacture of antibiotics 149
However, important as the /3-lactams are, they are but one of many families of
antibiotics (Chapter 5). Furthermore, most industrial microorganisms used to make j8-
lactams are fungi; this is atypical of antibiotics as a whole where bacteria, particularly
Streptomyces spp., predominate. Chapter 5 and some of the further reading at the end
of this chapter provide the broad perspective, including information on those antibiotics
made by total or partial chemical synthesis, against which this present account with its
necessarily selective subject matter should be read.
All the examples are of 'batched' fermentations, i.e. of processes where sterile
medium in a vessel is inoculated, the broth fermented for a defined period (usually
hours or days), the tank emptied and the proceeds extracted ('downstream processing')
to yield the antibiotic. During the fermentation, nutrients, antifoam agents and air
are supplied, the pH is controlled and exhaust gases removed. After emptying the
tank is turned around, that is cleaned and prepared for a new batch. In 'continuous'
fermentations, sterile medium is added to the fermentation with a balancing withdrawal
of broth for product extraction. This has a number of advantages providing the system
can be run clean, i.e. without contamination. One is long fermentation runs of many
weeks, hence greater productivity per vessel due to fewer turnrounds. In continuous
culture the growth rate can be held at an optimum value for product fermentation. It is
therefore suitable for products whose synthesis is proportional to cell density, but is
not generally an economical process for antibiotic production where synthesis is not
associated with growth and there are additional concerns about strain degeneration.
In this chapter there is little discussion of downstream processing operations after
the fermentation stage, i.e. the recovery, purification, quality testing and sterile packaging
of the products, even though these usually account for most of the total manufacturing
costs. The limited discussion is because, beyond the basic principles, there is no simple
model that can be used to illustrate downstream processing, no two processes are
alike and different manufacturers are likely to employ different methods for the same
product. The quality of the fermented material can markedly affect the efficiency of
all the succeeding operations, for at the end of a typical fermentation, the antibiotic
concentration will rarely exceed 20gH and may be as low as 0.5 gH.
Details of the manufacture of streptomycin and griseofulvin are to be found in
previous editions of this book.
The production of benzylpenicillin
3.1 The organism
The original organism for the production of penicillin, Penicillium notatum, was isolated
by Fleming in 1926 as a chance contaminant. In 1940, Florey and Chain produced
purified penicillin and its tremendous curative potential became apparent. However,
the liquid surface culture techniques necessary for the cultivation of this obligate aerobe
were lengthy, labour-intensive and prone to contamination. The isolation of a higher-
yielding organism, P. chrysogenum, from an infected Cantaloupe melon obtained in a
market in Peoria, Illinois, USA, was the key advance. This organism could be grown in
deep fermentations in sealed tanks under stirred and aerated conditions, in vessels as
large as 250 m .
150 Chapter 7
From this one ancestral fungus each penicillin manufacturer has evolved a particular
production strain by a series of mutagenic treatments, each followed by the selection
of improved variants. These selected variants have proved capable of producing amounts
of penicillin far greater than those produced by the 'wild' strain, especially when
fermented on media under particular control conditions developed in parallel with the
strains. These strain selection procedures have become a fundamental feature of
industrial biotechnology.
Production strains are stored in a dormant form by any of the standard culture
preservation techniques. Thus, a spore suspension may be mixed with a sterile, finely
divided, inert support and desiccated. Alternatively, spore suspensions in appropriate
media can be lyophilized or stored in a liquid culture biostat.
All laboratory operations are carried out in laminar flow cabinets in rooms in
which filtered air is maintained at a slight positive pressure relative to their outer
environment. Operators wear sterilized clothing and work aseptically. Antibiotic
fermentations are, of strict necessity, pure culture aseptic processes, without con-
taminating organisms.
3.2 Inoculum preparation
The aim is to develop for the production stage fermenter a pure inoculum in sufficient
volume and in the fast-growing (logarithmic) phase so that a high population density is
soon obtained. Figure 7.1 shows a typical route by which the inoculum is produced.
The time taken for each seed stage is measured in days and decreases as the sequence
progresses. The final inoculum to the production stage is generally 1-10% of the total
volume of the fementer. If the fermenter is under-inoculated there may be an extended
lag before growth starts and the fermentation period will be prolonged. This is both
uneconomic and may result in degenerative growth which affects performance, quality
and hence also cost.
The inoculum stage media are designed to provide the organism with all the
nutrients that it requires. Adequate oxygen is provided in the form of sterile air and the
temperature is controlled at the desired level. Principal criteria for transfer to the next
stage in the progression are freedom from contamination and growth to a pre-determined
cell density.
Typical of fungi, the organism grows as branching filaments (hyphae) and by the
time that the culture has progressed to the production stage it has a soup-like consistency.
Dpnnenr. *- Laboratory growth - — -** Liquid growth stages
spares stages on solid medie in Broken il-eskfi
C
0.5- 1.0m* +- 10 -50m 3 *- 125- 250m 3
seed stags seed stage production stage
s v '
Plant seed stages
Flgi 7.1 Slijfc.cS io [he preparation rif inoculum far 4hc bcnzylpcnicilJin fcrmentajlJOTi.
Manufacture qf antibiotics 1 5 1
3.3
The fermenter
A typical fermenter is a closed, vertical, cylindrical, stainless steel vessel with convexly
dished ends and of 25-250 m capacity. Its height is usually two to three times its
diameter. Figure 7.2 shows such a vessel diagramatically, and Fig. 7.3 gives a view
inside an actual vessel.
3.3.1
Oxygen supply
The penicillin fermentation needs oxygen, which is supplied as filter-sterilized air from
a compressor. Oxygen is critical to aerobic processes and its supply is a crucial aspect
of fementer design and batch control. As oxygen is poorly soluble in water, steps are
taken to assist its passage into the liquid phase and from aqueous solution into the
microorganism. In a conventional fermentation, air is introduced into the bottom of the
vessel via a ring 'sparger' with multiple small holes rather than through a single large
orifice. This breaks the air flow into smaller bubbles which have a greater surface area
to volume ratio and hence greater oxygen transfer. These bubbles lose oxygen as they
rise up the tank and, at the same time, carbon dioxide diffuses into them. The vessel is
kept under a positive head pressure which promotes the dissolution of oxygen and in
'Harvest' line to product recovery plant
Antifaam and
nutrient Addition*
Sample- Fin-e
Power
unit
Bank* pf cgglirig coHs
through which chilled
w-atsr circuJates
i f
iTlMuCunl fram
5«d stage
Exhaust gaaeB via filter"
fin
Air Irom
com pressor
Agitator shaft carrying ana
or morfl imp*llerj arterinfl
veS&al via sterile saal
Air sparger, annular shaped,
at end of air line;
Fjgr 7.2 Diagram of a typical fea member.
152 Chapter 7
Fig. 7.3 View looking down into a 125 nr stainless steel fermenter. (Courtesy of Glaxo Wellcome
Operations.)
3.3.2
addition reduces the chances of contamination. The transfer of oxygen is further assisted
by impellers mounted on a rotating vertical shaft driven by a powerful electric motor.
Baffles are also included to achieve the correct blend of shear and of bulk circulation
from the power supplied, and generally to promote intimate contact of cells and nutrients.
Aeration is a major expense as very large amounts of energy are consumed. The design,
size and number of impellers relative to the fermenter design and type of microorganism
form a science in their own right. There has been considerable research into novel,
energetically more efficient methods of aeration, and the next generation of fermenters
may include some that are radically different in design.
Temperature control
The production of benzylpenicillin is very sensitive to temperature. A lot of metabolic
heat is generated and the fermentation temperature has to be reduced by controlled
cooling. This heat transfer is achieved by circulating chilled water through banks of
pipes inside the vessel (which also serve as baffles) or through external 'limpet' coils
on the jacket of the vessel. These coils consist of continuous lengths of pipe welded in
a shallow spiral round the vessel. This cooling water system is also used to cool batched
medium sterilized in the vessel prior to its inoculation.
3.3.3
Defoaming agents and instrumentation
Microbial cultures may foam when they are subjected to vigorous mechanical stirring
and aeration. If this foaming is not controlled, culture is lost by entrainment in the
exhaust gases and so there are systems, often automatic, for detecting incipient foaming,
Manufacture of antibiotics 153
for temporarily applying backpressure to contain the culture within the vessel and for
the aseptic addition of defoaming agents.
Instrumentation is also fitted to provide a continuous display of important variables
such as temperature and pH, the power used by the electric motor, airflow, dissolved
oxygen and exhaust gas analysis. Manual or computer feedback control can be based
either directly on the signals provided by the probes and sensors or on derived data
calculated from those signals, such as the respiratory coefficient or the rate of change
of pH. Mass spectronomical analysis of exhaust gases can provide valuable physiological
information.
3.3.4 Media additions
Not all the nutrients required during fermentation are initially provided in the culture
medium. Some are sterilized separately by batch or continuous sterilization and then
added whilst the fermentation is in progress, usually via automatic systems that allow
a preset programme of continuous or discrete aseptic additions.
3.3.5 Transfer and sampling systems
Aseptic systems are provided to transfer the inoculum to the vessel, to allow the taking
of routine samples during fermentation, for early harvesting of aliquots when the vessel
becomes full as a consequence of the media additions and to transfer the final contents
to the extraction plant when fermentation is complete. Asepsis is assured by engineering
design and by steam, which must reach all parts of the vessels and associated pipework.
Any pockets of air or rough surfaces that steam does not penetrate could act as reservoirs
for contaminating microorganisms.
Sampling is essential to monitor the amount of growth, the running levels of key
nutrients and the penicillin concentration. It is necessary also to check that there has
been no contamination by unwanted microorganisms.
3.4 Control of the fermentation
Should oxygen availability fall below a critical level, benzylpenicillin biosynthesis is
greatly reduced although culture growth continues. Thus, if growth in the fermenter
proceeds unchecked at the rate prevailing in the seed stages, the culture would become
very dense and the available aeration would no longer be sufficient to maintain penicillin
production. Accordingly, conditions are so adjusted that fast growth is achieved only
until the cell population has reached the maximum density that the vessel can support.
Further net growth is constrained by deliberately limiting the supply of a key nutrient
(in practice, a sugar). The cells can then be stimulated to an 'overproduction' of
benzylpenicillin while restricting the amount of growth and a stable, highly productive
cell population can be sustained.
3.4.1 Batched medium
The medium initially placed in the fermenter is a complete one but designed only to
154 Chapter 7
support the desired amount of early growth. The principal nitrogen source is corn steep
liquor (CSL), a by-product of the maize starch-producing industry. This material was
originally found to be specifically useful for the penicillin fermentation, but it is
recognized as valuable in many fungal antibiotic media. Apart from its primary purpose
in supplying cheap and readily available nitrogen, CSL also contains a useful range of
carbon compounds, such as acids and sugars, inorganic ions and growth factors — in
short, it is virtually a complete growth medium in itself. However, like some of the fed
nutrients, CSL is a complex nutrient, not chemically defined, derived from natural
products and with significant batch-to-batch variation. It is therefore a source of variation
and one of the reasons why no two fermentations are ever absolutely identical.
The medium contains subsidiary nitrogen sources and additional essential nutrients
such as calcium (added in the form of chalk to counter the natural acidity of the CSL),
magnesium, sulphate, phosphate, potassium and trace metals. The medium is sterilized
with steam at 120°C either in the fermenter itself or in ancilliary plant, which may be
worked continuously.
3.4.2 Fed nutrients
The sterile medium is stirred and aerated and its pH and temperature are set to the
correct values on the process control monitors. It is then inoculated and the growth
phase begins. The initial carbon source is sufficient in quantity to maintain early growth
but not sufficient to provide the energy that penicillin production and maintenance
of the cell population need during the rest of the fermentation. Carbon for these
subsequent stages is 'fed' continuously in such a way as to limit net growth. Either
sucrose or glucose is used, possibly as cheaper, impure forms, such as molasses or
starch hydrolysate. As the concentration of residual sugar in the broth is too low to
measure, the rate of feeding has to be learnt by experience and modified on the basis
of systematic observation. An alternative way of attaining carbon limitation without
the complication of a carefully monitored carbon feed rate is to supply all the
carbohydrate at the outset as lactose. The rate-limiting hydrolysis of lactose to hexose
is then relied upon to give a steady, slow feed of assimilable carbohydrate. Originally,
all benzylpenicillin was manufactured using lactose in this way and some manufacturers
still prefer this technique.
Calcium, magnesium, phosphate and trace metals added initially are usually
sufficient to last throughout the fermentation, but the microorganisms need further
supplies of nitrogen and sulphur to balance the carbon feed. Nitrogen is often supplied
as ammonia gas. The word 'balance' is used quite deliberately; the whole system is a
balanced one. Thus, the carbon and nitrogen feeds not only satisfy the organisms'
requirements for these elements in the correct molar ratio, they also maintain an adequate
reserve of ammonium ion and contribute to pH control, the carbon metabolism being
acidogenic and balanced by the alkalinity of the ammonia. Sulphate is usually supplied
in common with the sugar feed and, by obtaining the correct ratio, there is a balanced
presentation of sulphate with an adequate pool of intermediates.
All feeds are sterilized before they are metered into the fermenter. Contaminants
resistant to the antibiotic rarely find their way into the fermenter, but when they do,
their effects are so damaging that prevention is of paramount importance. A resistant,
Manufacture of antibiotics 155
/3-lactamase-producing, fast-growing bacterial contaminant can destroy the penicillin
already made, as well as consuming nutrients intended for the fungus, causing loss of
pH control and interfering with the subsequent extraction process.
The growth phase passes rapidly into the antibiotic-production phase. The optimum
pH and temperature for growth are not those for penicillin production and there may
be changes in the control of these parameters. The only other event that marks the
onset of the production phase is the addition of phenylacetic acid (PAA) by continuous
feed.
3.4.3 Stimulation by PAA
Phenylacetic acid (PAA) supplies the side-chain of benzylpenicillin (see also Chapter
5); without PAA, the organisms synthesize only small quantities of this penicillin. Indeed,
it was the chance presence of phenylacetyl compounds in CSL (formed from phenylalanine
in the grain by the natural bacterial flora during processing) that caused it to be
established in early experiments as the best of the cheap complex nitrogen sources and
led to the use of PAA. Not only does PAA stimulate benzylpenicillin biosynthesis but it
also suppresses the formation of other (unwanted) penicillins. High levels of PAA are,
however, toxic to the organism and so it cannot be added indiscriminately. PAA is
expensive. The feed provides an adequate standing level of PAA without approaching
the toxic limit; the feed is reduced just before the end of the process so that the amount
of unused (irrecoverable) precursor in the final culture is not excessive.
The building blocks for the biosynthesis of benzylpenicillin are three amino acids,
a-aminoadipic acid, cysteine and valine, and PAA. The amino acids condense to a
tripeptide, ring closure of which gives the penicillin ring structure with an cu-aminoadipyl
side-chain, isopenicillin N. The side-chain is then displayed by a phenylacetyl group
from PAA to give benzylpenicillin.
u-Aminoadipic acid + Cysteine + Valine
a
Tdpeptide
j.
Isuptnicillin N
PAA -> 1 -> fl-Acninofldlpat acid
Heciy.ylpejiidlHn
There comes a time when sequential improvements in penicillin productivity
obtained by standard strain improvement techniques (physical and chemical mutagenesis
in conjunction with a variety of selection techniques that apply pressure for high-yielding
variants) become subject to rate-limiting returns. At first, it is easy to double the 'titre'
with each campaign; later in the genealogy even a 5% improvement would be regarded
as excellent.
Recent developments by academic and industrial geneticists may well prove to
have transformed this situation. Tremendous progress has been made since the mid-
1980s both in the isolation and manipulation of the biosynthetic genes in this pathway
and in the related routes to the cephalosporins (via the cephalosporin C-producing
156 Chapter 7
fungus Acremonium chrysogenum) and the cephamycins (via the cephamycin C-
producing bacterium Streptomyces clavuligerus). Antibiotic manufacturers can now
apply recombinant DNA technology to the industrial strains of filamentous micro-
organisms used to produce jS-lactams and there are exciting prospects of making genetic
changes that will very significantly increase productivity. These are discussed further,
later in this chapter. There is plenty of scope for improvement, because the best current
industrial strains and processes convert little more than 10% of all elemental carbon
into penicillin.
3.4.4 Termination
When to stop a fermentation is a very complex decision and several factors have to be
taken into account. Quite often a manufacturer will find it appropriate to harvest shortly
after the first signs of a faltering in the efficiency of conversion of the most costly raw
material (the carbon source, e.g. glucose) into penicillin.
3.5 Extraction
3.5.1 Removal of cells
At harvest, the benzylpenicilhn is in solution extracellularly, together with a range of
other metabolites and medium constituents. The first step in downstream processing
is to remove the cells by filtration or centrifugation. This stage is carried out under
conditions that avoid contamination with (3-lactamase-producing microorganisms which
could lead to serious or total loss of product.
3.5.2 Isolation of benzylpenicillin
The next stage is to isolate the benzylpenicillin. Solvent extraction is the generally
accepted process although other methods are available including ion-exchange
chromatography and precipitation. In aqueous solution at pH 2-2.5 there is a high
partition coefficient in favour of certain organic solvents such as amyl acetate, butyl
acetate and methyl isobutyl ketone. The extraction has to be carried out quickly, as
benzylpenicillin is very unstable at these low pH values. The penicillin is then extracted
back into an aqueous buffer at pH 7.5, the partition coefficient now being strongly in
favour of the aqueous phase. The solvent is recovered by distillation for re-use.
3.5.3 Treatment of crude extract
Benzylpenicillin is produced as various salts according to its intended use, whether as
an input to semisynthetic /3-lactam antibiotics manufacture or for clinical use in its
own right.
The treatment of the crude penicillin extract varies according to the objective but
involves formation of an appropriate salt, probably followed by treatment to remove
pyrogens, and by sterilization. This last is usually achieved by filtration but pure metal
salts of benzylpenicillin can be safely sterilized by dry heat if desired.
Manufacture of antibiotics 157
For parenteral use, the antibiotic is packed in sterile vials as a powder (reconstituted
before use) or suspension. For oral use it is prepared in any of the standard presen-
tations, such as film-coated tablets. Searching tests are carried out on an appreciable
number of random samples of the finished product to ensure that it satisfies the
stringent quality control requirements for potency, purity, freedom from pyrogens and
sterility.
All stages of antibiotic manufacture from fermentation through to finished product
are governed by the code of good manufacturing practice (GMP), of which quality
control is one aspect. GMP requires that 'there should be a comprehensive system, so
designed, documented, implemented and controlled, and so furnished with personnel,
equipment and other resources as to provide assurance that products will consistently
be of a quality appropriate to their intended use'.
The production of penicillin V
By the addition of different acyl donors to the medium, different penicillins can be
biologically synthesized. For example, penicillin V is made by a similar process to
benzylpenicillin, but with phenoxy acetic acid as the precursor instead of PAA. In the
biosynthetic pathway, the a-aminoadipyl side-chain of isopeniciUin N is replaced by a
phenoxyacetyl group.
The microorganism is again P. chrysogenum. A manufacturer may use the
same mutant strain to make both products or may have different mutants for the two
penicillins. Parallel situations of a single organism producing more than one natural
product occur with other types of antibiotics, for example strains of Streptomyces
aureofaciens are used for both chlortetracycline and demethylchlortetracycline
fermentations.
Like benzylpenicillin, penicillin V is still widely used in its own right but can also
be used as a starting material for the manufacture of the semisynthetic penicillins,
none of which can be made by direct fermentation.
The production of cephalosporin C
It is possible to convert penicillin V or benzylpenicillin to a cephalosporin by chemical
ring expansion. The first-generation cephalosporin cephalexin, for example, can be
made in this way. Most cephalosporins used in clinical practice, however, are semi-
synthetics produced from the fermentation product cephalosporin C.
The ancestral strain of Acremonium chrysogenum (at that time called
Cephalosporium acremonium) was isolated on the Sardinian coast in 1945 following
an observation that the local sewage outlet into the sea cleared at a quite remarkable
rate. Advances were slow because the activity was associated with a number of different
types of compound. Cephalosporin C was first isolated in 1952, but it was a further
decade before clinically useful semisynthetic cephalosporins became available.
The biosynthetic route to cephalosporin C is identical to that of the penicillins as
far as isopeniciUin N (section 3.4.3). The further route to cephalosporin C is shown on
p. 160. Note the branch into a third series of /3-lactam drugs, the cephamycins (see
Chapter 5).
158 Chapter 7
Sterile fH<T*[loi i
rid<i«p<vt to hetiandaw rii-B^iirAihiMnfl iKlllly
fen (ambulation Into prpdixia
l>tmJ slcnta
SuUOi
Mr. 7.4 T% piiMl producttim mate For itfphukwpnriiu,
Isopenicillin N
•
I
Penicillin N
I
Desacetoxycephalosporin C
I
Desacetylcephalosporin C — > Cephamycin C (in certain Streptomyces)
•
I
Cephalosporin C
The similarities in the routes to the three classes of antibiotics have facilitated
progress in the understanding of the underlying molecular genetics. Most of the
genes coding for the relevant enzymes have been isolated. Modern DNA techniques
are being targeted at rate-limiting biosynthetic steps. Amplification of gene copy
numbers, improving gene expression efficiencies, transferring genes to bacterial host
organisms and manipulation of pathways of antibiotic synthesis all have potential in
strain development. However, in the production of antibiotics, economic benefits from
the application of recombinant DNA technology have thus far been limited.
Manufacturing processes for cephalosporin C and benzylpenicillin are broadly
similar. In common with many other antibiotic fermentations, no specific precursor
feed is necessary for cephalosporin C. There is sufficient acetyl group substrate for the
terminal acetyltransferase reaction available from the organism's metabolic pool.
The product is extracted from the culture fluid by adsorption onto carbon or resins
rather than by solvent. This illustrates an important general point that antibiotic
manufacturing processes differ from one another much more in their product recovery
stages than in their fermentation stages. Figure 7.4 illustrates a typical production route
from inoculum to bulk antibiotic.
Further reading
Bu'Lock J.D., Nisbet L.J. & Winstanley D.J. (eds) (1983) Bioactive Microbial Products, vol. II,
Development and Production. London: Academic Press.
Calam C.T. (1987) Process Development in Antibiotic Fermentations, Cambridge Studies in
Biotechnology, 4 (eds Sir James Baddiley, N.H. Carey, J.F. Davidson, I.J. Higgins & W.G. Potter).
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hugo W.B. & Mol H. (1972) Antibiotics and chemotherapeutic agents. In Materials and Technology
(eds L.W. Codd, K. Dijkoff, J.H. Fearon, C.J. van Oss, H.G. Roeberson & E.G. Stanford). London:
Longman & de Bussy.
Peberdy J.F. (ed.) (1987) Penicillin and Acremonium, Biotechnology Handbooks, 1 (Series eds
T. Atkinson & R.F. Sherwood). New York: Plenum Press. (See, in particular, Chapters 2 and
5.)
Office for Official Publications of the European Community (1992) The Rules Governing Medicinal
Products in the European Community, vol. IV, Guide to Good Manufacturing Practice for the
Manufacture of Medicinal Products.
Queener S.W. (1990) Molecular biology of penicillin and cephalosporin biosynthesis. Antimicrob Agents
Chemother, 34, 943-948.
Rohm H.-J., Reed G., Piihler A. & StadlerP. (eds) (1993) Biotechnology, vol. Ill, Bioprocessing. New
York: VCH.
Smith J.E. (1985) Biotechnology Principles. Aspects of Microbiology Series No. 11. Wokinham: Van
Nostrand Reinhold.
160 Chapter 7
Stowell J.D., Bailey P.J. & Winstanley D.J. (eds) (1986) Bioactive Microbial Products, vol. Ill,
Downstream Processing. London: Academic Press.
Van Damme E.J. (1984) Biotechnology of Industrial Antibiotics. New York: Marcel Dekker.
Verrall M.S. (Ed) (1985) Discovery and Isolation of Microbial Products. Society of Chemical Industry
Series in Biological Chemistry and Biotechnology. Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
A good source of articles on individual antibiotics, groups of antibiotics, fermentation plant and related
topics is the series Progress in Industrial Microbiology edited originally by D.J.D. Hockenhull and
published by Heywood Books, London. These articles normally carry extensive references to the original
literature.
Manufacture of antibiotics 161
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics
1
Introduction
4.1
The basis for selective inhibition
of chromosome replication and
2
The bacterial cell wall
function
2.1
Peptidoglycan biosynthesis and its
4.1.1
Synthesis of precursors
inhibition
4.1.2
Unwinding of the chromosome
2.1.1
D-Cycloserine
4.1.3
Replication of DNA strands
2.1.2
Glycopeptides — vancomycin and
4.1.4
Transcription
teicoplanin
4.2
Quinolones
2.1.3
/3-Lactam antibiotics — penicillins,
4.3
Nitroimidazoles (metronidazole) and
cephalosporins, carbapenems and
nitrofurans (nitrofurantoin)
monobactams
4.4
Rifampicin
2.2
Mycolic acid and arabinogalactan
synthesis in mycobacteria
4.5
5-Fluorocytosine
2.2.1
Isoniazid
5
Folate antagonists
2.2.2
Ethambutol
5.1
Folate metabolism in microbial and
mammalian cells
3
Protein synthesis
5.2
Sulphonamides
3.1
Protein synthesis and selective
inhibition
5.3
DHFR inhibitors
3.2
Aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
6
The cytoplasmic membrane
antibiotics
6.1
Composition and susceptibility
3.3
Tetracyclines
of membranes to selective
3.4
Chloramphenicol
disruption
3.5
Macrolides and azalides
6.2
Polymyxins
3.6
Lincomycin and clindamycin
6.3
Polyenes
3.7
Fusidic acid
6.4
Imidazoles and triazoles
3.8
Mupirocin
6.5
Naftidine
4
Chromosome function and replication
7
Further reading
Introduction
The antibiotics described in Chapter 5 are used to treat microbial infections caused by
bacteria, fungi or protozoa. Most exert a highly selective toxic action upon their target
microbial cells but have little or no toxicity towards mammalian cells. They can therefore
be administered at concentrations sufficient to kill infecting organisms (or at least inhibit
their growth) without damaging mammalian cells. By comparison, the disinfectants,
antiseptics and preservatives described in Chapter 10 are too toxic for systemic treatment
of infections. Study of the mechanism of action of the antibiotics reveals the basis of
their selective toxicity. Table 8.1 lists the five broad target areas of action (cell wall,
ribosome, chromosome, folate metabolism, cell membrane) with the major antibiotics
which act upon them and a summary of the basis of selective action. Note that the
majority of the antibiotics are used for treatment of bacterial infections; comparatively
few agents are available for fungal or protozoal infections.
Table 8.1 Target sites for antimicrobial action
Target
Antibioticst
Mechanism of action
Basis of selective toxicity
Bacterial cell wal
j3-l_actams
Glycopeptides
Cycloserine
Isoniazid*
Ethambutol*
Inhibit peptidoglycan synthesis
inhibit peptidoglycan synthesis
Inhibits peptidoglycan synthesis
Inhibits mycolic acid synthesis
Inhibits arabinogalactan synthesis
None in mammalian cells
None in mammalian cells
None in mammalian cells
None in mammalian cells
None in mammalian cells
Bacterial ribosome
function
Aminoglycosides
Tetracyclines
Chloramphenicol
Macrolides, azalides
Fusidic acid
Mupirocin
Distort 30S ribosomal subunit
Block 30S ribosomal subunit
Inhibits peptidyl transferase
Block translocation
Inhibits elongation factor
Inhibits isoleucyl-tRNA synthesis
No action on 40S subunit
Excluded by mammalian cells
No action on mammalian equivalent
No action on mammalian equivalent
Excluded by mammalian cells
No action on mammalian equivalent
Chromosome function
Quinolones
Metronidazole (also**)
Nitrofurantoin
Rifampicin (also*)
5-Fluorocytosine***
Inhibit DNA gyrase
DNA strand breakage
DNA strand breakage
Inhibits RNA polymerase
Inhibits DNA synthesis
No action on mammalian equivalent
Requires anaerobic conditions not
present in mammalian cells
No action on mammalian equivalent
Converted to active form in fungi
Folate metabolism
Sulphonamides (also**)
Trimethoprim
Pyrimethamine**
Trimetrexate**/***
Inhibit folate synthesis
Inhibits dihydrofolate reductase
Inhibits dihydrofolate reductase
Inhibits dihydrofolate reductase
Not present in mammalian cells
Mammalian enzyme not inhibited
Mammalian enzyme not inhibited
Toxicity overcome with leucovorin
Cytoplasmic
membrane
Polymyxins
Polyenes***
Imidazoles and triazoles'
Naftidine***
Disrupt bacterial membranes
Disrupt fungal membranes
Inhibit ergosterol synthesis
Inhibits ergosterol synthesis
Bind to LPS and phospholipids
Bind preferentially to ergosterol
Pathway not in mammalian cells
Pathway not in mammalian cells
t All antibacterial except: *antimycobacterial agent; ** antiprotozoal agent; ***antifungal agent.
LPS, lipopoly saccharide.
2
2.1
The bacterial cell wall
Peptidoglycan biosynthesis and its inhibition
Peptidoglycan is a vital component of virtually all bacterial cell walls. It accounts for
approximately 50% of the weight of Gram-positive bacterial walls, around 30% of
mycobacterial cell walls and between 10 and 20% of the Gram-negative envelope. It is
a macromolecule composed of sugar (glycan) chains which are crosslinked by short
peptide bridges (Fig. 8.1).
One characteristic feature of peptidoglycan is the occurrence of D-amino acids,
particularly D-alanine and D-glutamic acid. These D-stereoisomers of amino acids are
not found in proteins. The precise nature of the peptide crosslinks varies among
organisms but the essential structure is the same. The peptidoglycan polymer is
responsible for both the shape of bacterial cells and their mechanical strength and
integrity. If the synthesis of peptidoglycan is blocked selectively by antibiotic action
p-lactams
Cytoplasm
cycloserine
Fig. 8.1 Biosynthesis of peptidoglycan. The large circles represent A A -acetylglucosamine or N-
acetylmuramic acid; to the latter is linked initially a pentapeptide chain comprising L-alanine, D-
glutamic acid and meso-diaminopiraelic acid (small circles) terminating in two D-alanine residues
(small, darker circles). The lipid molecule is undecaprenyl phosphate. In the initial (cytoplasm) stage
where inhibition by the antibiotic D-cycloserine is shown, two molecules of L-alanine (small circles)
are converted by an isomerase to the D-forms (small, darker circles), after which a ligase joins the
two D-alanines together to produce a D-alanyl-D- alanine dipeptide.
164 Chapter 8
the bacteria undergo a number of changes in shape and ultimately die following
disruption (lysis) of the cells. Mammalian cells do not possess a cell wall and contain
no other macromolecular structures resembling peptidoglycan. Consequently, antibiotics
which interfere with peptidoglycan synthesis generally have excellent selective toxicity
since the target is vital to the bacteria but absent from mammalian cells.
2.1.1 D -Cycloserine
There are three stages of peptidoglycan biosynthesis (Fig. 8.1). The first occurs in the
cytoplasm where the precursors are synthesized. The formation and assembly of a
D-alanyl-D-alanine dipeptide is the site of action of D-cycloserine. Two molecules of
L-alanine are converted to the D-forms by an isomerase in the bacterial cytoplasm. A
ligase then joins the two D-alanines together. Both of these enzymes are inhibited by
binding cycloserine, which bears some structural similarities to D-alanine. Cycloserine
binds covalently to the pyridoxal phosphate cofactor of the enzymes, effectively
preventing them from forming D-alanyl-D-alanine. The D-alanyl-D-alanine dipeptide is
then coupled to three other amino acids (in Escherichia coli these are L-alanine, D-
glutamic acid and meso-diaminopimelic acid) which have been added sequentially to
the sugar nucleotide, uridine diphosphate (UDP)-TV-acetylmuramic acid. The sugar
pentapeptide produced (A A -acetylmuramylpentapeptide) is then transferred from the
nucleotide to a hydrophobic lipid carrier molecule (undecaprenyl phosphate) which is
located exclusively in the cytoplasmic membrane. The nucleotide uridine monophosphate
(UMP) remains in the cytoplasm. Another sugar nucleotide precursor, UDP-Af-
acetylglucosamine is also produced in the cytoplasm and donates a molecule of N-
acetylglucosamine to be coupled to the lipid carrier in the membrane forming a lipid
pyrophosphate-linked disaccharide pentapeptide. This is the second stage of the
biosynthetic pathway in which the disaccharide pentapeptide is transported across the
membrane on the lipid carrier to be inserted into the cell wall at a growing point. The
lipid carrier does not leave the cell membrane and is eventually recycled. It loses a
single phosphate group whilst returning to the cytoplasmic face of the membrane to
collect another disaccharide pentapeptide from the cytoplasm.
2.7.2 Glycopeptides — vancomycin and teicoplanin
It is in the third and final stage of the pathway that the glycopeptide antibiotics act.
Here the disaccharide pentapeptide is first incorporated into the expanding cell wall
linked to its lipid carrier. The growing glycan-peptide chain is transferred in turn to
each molecule of lipid carrier as it brings its disaccharide pentapeptide precursor
across the membrane. Each lipid carrier molecule thus acts in turn to hold the growing
linear glycan strand before returning through the membrane to the cytoplasmic face.
Incorporation of each disaccharide pentapeptide is catalysed by a transglycosylase and
this step is effectively blocked by the glycopeptides. These antibiotics bind very tightly
by hydrogen bonding to the terminal D-alanyl-D-alanine on each pentapeptide inhibiting
extension of the linear glycan peptide in the cell wall. Vancomycin is thought to bind
to the pentapeptides outside the cytoplasmic membrane. Possibly two vancomycin
molecules form a back-to-back dimer which bridges between pentapeptides preventing
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 165
2.1.3
further peptidoglycan assembly. Teicoplanin is a lipoglycopeptide which may act slightly
differently by locating itself in the outer face of the cytoplasmic membrane and binding
the pentapeptide as the precursors are transferred through the membrane.
fi-Lactam
antibiotics — penicillins, cephalosporins, carbapenems and monobactams
The / A -lactam antibiotics block the final crosslinking stage of the pathway which occurs
in the cell wall. Here the linear glycan strands are crosslinked via their peptide chains
to the mature peptidoglycan in the cell wall. The crosslinking is catalysed by a group of
enzymes called transpeptidases. These enzymes are located on the outer face of the
cytoplasmic membrane. They first remove the terminal D-alanine residue from each
pentapeptide on the linear glycan. This reaction involves breakage of the peptide between
the two D-alanine residues on the linear glycan. The energy released is thought to be
used in the formation of a new peptide bond between the remaining D-alanine on the
glycan chain and an acceptor amino group on existing crosslinked peptidoglycan. In
Escherichia coli this acceptor is the free amino group on raeso-diaminopimelic acid
(the third amino acid on each ./V-acetylmuramic acid). In other organisms, for example
Staphylococcus aureus, it is the free amino group on lysine (replacing diaminopimelic
acid) which acts as the acceptor. It should be noted that although there is considerable
variation in the composition of the peptide crosslink among different species of bacteria,
the essential transpeptidase mechanism is the same. Therefore virtually all bacteria can
be inhibited by interference with this group of enzymes. The /Mactam antibiotics
effectively inhibit the transpeptidases by acting as alternative substrates. They mimic
the D-alanyl-D-alanine residues and react with the transpeptidases (Fig. 8.2).
The /3-lactam bond is broken (instead of the equivalent peptide bond joining the
alanine residues) but the remaining ring system in the /3-lactam (a thiazolidine in
penicillins) is not released (Fig. 8.3). Instead, the transpeptidase remains linked to
the hydrolysed antibiotic with a half life of 10-15 minutes. Whilst bound to the
/ A -lactam, the transpeptidase cannot participate in further rounds of peptidoglycan
-acy»-H;ONH
■aeyl— CONH
Enz
^
- Acyl -D-a lanyl -D-fllan \ne
COON
0^ Eiu
Active enzyirtfr-Eubstraie
int^rm^iitfi
Cross-link
+ f amotion
NH:
D-d Ian in?
COOH
R— CON
Pftn-ieiHin
Enz
COO hi
R— CON
^
COOH
Inactive peniciHoy I- anzyme complex
Fig. 8.2 Interaction of transpeptidase (Enz) with its natural substrate, acyl-D-alanyl-D-alanine in the
first stage of the transpeptidation reaction to form an acyl-enzyme intermediate. A similar reaction
with a penicillin results in the formation of an inactive penicilloyl-enyme complex.
166 Chapter 8
Fig. 8.3 A, comparison of the
structure of the nucleus of the
penicillin molecule with B, the
D-alanyl-D-alanine end group of
the precursor of bacterial
peptidoglycan. The broken lines
show the correspondence in
position between the labile bond
of penicillin and the bond broken
during the transpeptidation
reaction associated with the
crosslinking in peptidoglycan.
crosslinking by reaction with its true substrate. All /J-lactam antibiotics (penicillins,
cephalosporins, carbapenems and monobactams) are thought to act in a similar way
through interaction of their /Mactam ring with transpeptidases. However, there is
considerable variation in the morphological effects of different /3-lactams upon bacterial
cells which is due to the existence of several types of transpeptidases. The transpeptidase
enzymes are usually referred to as penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) because they can
be separated and studied after reaction with 14 C-labelled penicillin. This step is necessary
because there are very few copies of each enzyme present in a cell. They are usually
separated according to their size by electrophoresis and are numbered PBP1, PBP2,
etc. starting from the highest molecular weight species. In Gram-negative bacteria
the high molecular weight transpeptidases appear also to possess transglycosylase
activity, i.e. they have a dual function in the final stages of peptidoglycan synthesis.
Furthermore, the different transpeptidases have specialized functions in the cell; all
crosslink peptidoglycan but some are involved with maintenance of cell integrity, some
regulate cell shape and others produce new cross wall between elongating cells securing
chromosome segregation prior to cell division.
Recognition of the existence of multiple transpeptidase targets and their relative
sensitivity towards different /3-lactams helps to explain the different morphological
effects observed on treated bacteria. For example, benzylpenicillin (penicillin G),
ampicillin and cephaloridine are particularly effective in causing rapid lysis of Gram-
negative bacteria such as E. coli. These antibiotics act primarily upon PBP1B, the
major transpeptidase of the organism. Other /^-lactams have little activity against this
PBP, for example mecillinam binds preferentially to PBP2 and it produces a pronounced
change in the cells from a rod shape to an oval form. Many of the cephalosporins, for
example cephalexin, cefotaxime and ceftazidime bind to PBP3 resulting in the formation
of elongated, filamentous cells. The lower molecular weight PBPs, 4, 5 and 6, do not
possess transpeptidase activity. These are carboxypeptidases which remove the terminal
D-alanine from the pentapeptides on the linear glycans in the cell wall but do not catalyse
the crosslinkage. Their role in the cells is to regulate the degree of crosslinking by
denying the D-alanyl-D-alanine substrate to the transpeptidases but they are not essential
for cell growth. Up to 90% of the amount of antibiotic reacting with the cells may be
consumed in inhibiting the carboxypeptidases, with no lethal consequences to the cells.
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 167
Gram-positive bacteria also have multiple transpeptidases, but fewer than Gram-
negatives. Shape changes are less evident than with Gram-negative rod-shaped
organisms. Cell death follows lysis of the cells mediated by the action of endogenous
autolytic enzymes (autolysins) present in the cell wall which are activated following
/3-lactam action. Autolytic enzymes able to hydrolyse peptidoglycan are present in
most bacterial walls, they are needed to reshape the wall during growth and to aid cell
separation during division. Their activity is regulated by binding to wall components
such as the wall and membrane teichoic acids. When peptidoglycan assembly is disrupted
through /3-lactam action, some of the teichoic acids are released from the cells which
are then susceptible to attack by their own autolysins.
2.2 Mycolic acid and arabinogalactan synthesis in mycobacteria
The cell walls of mycobacteria contain three structures: peptidoglycan, an arabino-
galactan polysaccharide and long chain hydroxy fatty acids (mycolic acids) which are
all covalently linked. Additional non-covalently attached lipid components found in
the wall include glycolipids, various phospholipids and waxes. The lipid-rich nature of
the mycobacterial wall is responsible for the characteristic acid-fastness on staining
and serves as a penetration barrier to many antibiotics. Isoniazid and ethambutol have
long been known as specific antimycobacterial agents but their mechanisms of action
have only recently become more clearly understood.
2.2.7 Isoniazid
Mycolic acids are produced by a diversion of the normal fatty acid biosynthetic pathway
in which short chain (16 carbon) and long chain (24 carbon) fatty acids are produced
by addition of 7 or 11 malonate extension units from malonyl coenzyme A to acetyl
coenzyme A. The long chain fatty acids are further extended and condensed to produce
the 60-70 carbon /3-hydroxymycolic acids. Isoniazid is thought to inhibit a desaturase
(dehydrogenase) enzyme which inserts a double bond into the fatty acid chain at the
24 carbon stage of mycolic chain extension. Isoniazid itself is a prodrug which is
activated inside mycobacteria by a catalase-peroxidase enzyme system called KatG.
Unidentified reactive radicals then attack sensitive targets such as the C 2 4-desaturase
involved in mycolic acid synthesis. Mycobacterium tuberculosis becomes resistant
to isoniazid through loss of the activating KatG enzyme. Other targets involving
metabolism of the nucleotide nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD) and DNA
damage may also be involved in the killing mechanism.
2.2.2 Ethambutol
The antimicrobial action of ethambutol, like that of isoniazid, is specific for myco-
bacteria, suggesting a target in the unique components of the mycobacterial cell wall.
Cells treated with ethambutol accumulate an isoprenoid intermediate, decaprenyl-
arabinose which is the source of arabinose in the arabinogalactan polymer. This suggests
that ethambutol blocks assembly of the arabinogalactan through inhibition of an
arabinosyl transferase enzyme.
168 Chapter 8
3.1
Protein synthesis
Protein synthesis and selective inhibition
Figure 8.4 outlines the process of protein synthesis involving the ribosome, mRNA, a
series of aminoacyl transfer RNA (tRNA) molecules (at least one for each amino acid)
8
N-fonnyl methi o nine
tRNA
INITIATION
Q
30S
ELONGATION
TRANSLOCATION
TERMINATION
Fig. 8.4 Outline of the main events in protein synthesis; initiation, elongation, translocation and
termination. AUG is an initiation codon on the mRNA; it codes for Af-formylmethionine and initiates
the formation of the 70S ribosome. UAG is a termination codon; it does not code for any amino acid
and brings about termination of protein synthesis.
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 169
and accessory protein factors involved in initiation, elongation and termination. As the
process is essentially the same in prokaryotic (bacterial) and eukaryotic cells (i.e. higher
organisms and mammalian cells) it is surprising that there are so many selective agents
which act in this area (see Table 8.1).
Bacterial ribosomes are smaller than their mammalian counterparts. They consist
of one 3 OS and one 50S subunit (the S suffix denotes the size which is derived from the
rate of sedimentation in an ultracentrifuge). The 30S subunit comprises a single strand
of 16S rRNA and over 20 different proteins which are bound to it. The larger 50S
subunit contains two single strands of rRNA (23S and 5S) together with over 30 different
proteins. The subunits pack together to form an intact 70S ribosome. The equivalent
subunits for mammalian ribosomes are 40S and 60S making an 80S ribosome. Some
agents exploit subtle differences in structure between the bacterial and mammalian
ribosomes. The macrolides, azalides and chloramphenicol act upon the 50S subunits in
bacteria but not the 60S subunits of mammalian cells. By contrast, the tetracyclines
derive their selective action through active uptake by microbial cells and exclusion
from mammalian cells. They are equally active against both kinds of ribosomes by
binding to the respective 30S and 40S subunits.
3.2 Aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol antibiotics
Most of the information on the mechanisms of action of aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
(AG AC) antibiotics comes from studies with streptomycin. One effect of the AGACs
is to interfere with the initiation and assembly of the bacterial ribosome (Fig. 8.4).
During assembly of the initiation complex, Af-formylmethionyl-tRNA (fmet-tRNA)
binds initially to the ribosome binding site on the untranslated 5' end of the mRNA
together with the 30S ribosomal subunit. Three protein initiation factors (designated
IFj_3) and a molecule of guanosine triphosphate (GTP) are involved in positioning the
fmet-tRNA on the AUG start codon of mRNA. IFj and IF 3 are then released from the
complex, GTP is hydrolysed to guanosine diphosphate (GDP) and released with IF 2 as
the 50S subunit joins the 30S subunit and mRNA to form a functional ribosome. The
fmet-tRNA occupies the peptidyl site (P site) leaving a vacant acceptor site (A site) to
receive the next aminoacyl-tRNA specified by the next codon on the mRNA.
Streptomycin binds tightly to one of the protein components of the 30S subunit. Binding
of the antibiotic to the protein, which is the receptor for IF3, prevents initiation and
assembly of the ribosome.
Streptomycin binding to the 30S subunit also distorts the shape of the A site on
the ribosome and interferes with the positioning and the aminoacyl-tRNA molecules
during peptide chain elongation. Streptomycin therefore exerts two effects: inhibition
of protein synthesis by freezing the initiation complex, and misreading of the codons
through distortion of the 30S subunit. Simple blockage of protein synthesis would
be bacteriostatic rather than bacteriocidal. Since streptomycin and the other AGACs
exert a potent lethal action it seems that the formation of toxic, non-functional proteins
through misreading of the codons on mRNA is a more likely mechanism of action.
This can be demonstrated with cell-free translation systems in which isolated bacterial
ribosomes are supplied with an artificial mRNA template such as polyU or polyC
and all the other factors, including aminoacyl-tRNAs needed for protein synthesis.
170 Chapter 8
In the absence of an AGAC the ribosomes will produce the artificial polypeptides,
polyphenylalanine (as specified by the codon UUU) or polyproline (as specified by the
codon CCC). However, when streptomycin is added, the ribosomes produce a mixture
of polythreonine (codon ACU) and poly serine (codon UCU). The misreading of the
codons does not appear to be random: U is read as A or C and C is read as A or U. If
such misreading occurs in whole cells the accumulation of non-functional or toxic
proteins would eventually prove fatal to the cells. There is some evidence that the
bacterial cell membrane is damaged when the cells attempt to excrete the faulty proteins.
The effectiveness of the AGACs is enhanced by their active uptake by bacteria
which proceeds in three phases. First, a rapid uptake occurs within a few seconds of
contact which represents binding of the positively charged AGAC molecules to the
negatively charged surface of the bacteria. This phase is referred to as the energy-
independent phase (EIP) of uptake. In the case of Gram-negative bacteria the AGACs
damage the outer membrane causing release of some lipopolysaccharide, phospholipid
and proteins but this is not directly lethal to the cells. Second, there follows an energy-
dependent phase of uptake (EDP I) lasting about 10 minutes, in which the AGAC is
actively transported across the cytoplasmic membrane. A second energy-dependent
phase (EDP II) which leads to further intracellular accumulation follows after some
AGAC has bound to the ribosomes in the cytoplasm. Although the precise details of
uptake by EDP I and EDP II are not clear, both require organisms to be growing
aerobically . Anaerobes do not take up AGACs by EDP I or EDP II and are consequently
resistant to their action.
Tetracyclines
This group of antibiotics is actively transported into bacterial cells, possibly as the
magnesium complex, achieving a 50-fold concentration inside the cells. Mammalian
cells do not take up the tetracyclines and it is this difference in uptake that determines
the selective toxicity. Resistance to the tetracyclines is usually associated with failure
of the active uptake system or with an active efflux pump which removes the drug
from the cells before it can interfere with ribosome function. Protein synthesis by both
bacterial and mammalian ribosomes is inhibited by the tetracyclines in cell-free systems.
The action is upon the smaller subunit. Binding of just one molecule of tetracycline
to the bacterial 30S subunit occurs at a site involving the 3' end of the 16S rRNA, a
number of associated ribosomal proteins and magnesium ions. The effect is to block
the binding of aminoacyl-tRNA to the A site of the ribosome and halt protein synthesis.
Tetracyclines are bacteriostatic rather than bacteriocidal, consequently they should not
be used in combination with j8-lactams, which require cells to be growing and dividing
to exert their lethal action.
Chloramphenicol
Of the four possible optical isomers of chloramphenicol, only the o-threo form is active.
This antibiotic selectively inhibits protein synthesis in bacterial ribosomes by binding
to the 50S subunit in the region of the A site involving the 23S rRNA. The normal
binding of the aminoacyl-tRNA in the A site is affected by chloramphenicol in such a
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 171
way that the peptidyl transferase cannot form a new peptide bond with the growing
peptide chain on the tRNA in the P site. Studies with aminoacyl-tRNA fragments
containing truncated tRNA chains suggest that the shape of the region of tRNA closest
to the amino acid is distorted by chloramphenicol. The altered orientation of this region
of the aminoacyl-tRNA in the A site is sufficient to prevent peptide bond formation.
Chloramphenicol has a broad spectrum of activity which covers Gram-positive and
Gram-negative bacteria, mycoplasmas, rickettsia and chlamydia. It has the valuable
property of penetrating into mammalian cells and is therefore the drug of choice for
treatment of intracellular pathogens, including Salmonella typhi, the causative organism
of typhoid. Although it does not inhibit 80S ribosomes, the 70S ribosomes of mammalian
mitochondria are sensitive and therefore some inhibition occurs in rapidly growing
mammalian cells with high mitochondrial activity.
3.5 Macrolides and azalides
Erythromycin is a member of the macrolide group of antibiotics; it selectively inhibits
protein synthesis in a broad range of bacteria by binding to the 50S subunit. The site at
which it binds is close to that of chloramphenicol and involves the 23S rRNA. Resistance
to chloramphenicol and erythromycin can occur by methylation of different bases within
the same region of the 23 S rRNA. The sites are therefore not identical but binding of
one antibiotic prevents binding of the other. Unlike chloramphenicol, erythromycin
blocks translocation. This is the process by which the ribosome moves along the mRNA
by one codon after the peptidyl transferase reaction has joined the peptide chain to
the aminoacyl-tRNA in the A site. The peptidyl-tRNA is moved (translocated) to the P
site, vacating the A site for the next aminoacyl-tRNA. Energy is derived by hydrolysis
of GTP to GDP by an associated protein elongation factor, EF-G. By blocking the
translocation process, erythromycin causes release of incomplete polypeptides from
the ribosome. It is assumed that the azalides, such as azithromycin (Chapter 5), have a
similar action to the macrolides. The azalides have improved intracellular penetration
over the macrolides and are resistant to the metabolic conversion which reduces the
serum half life of erythromycin.
3.6 Lincomycin and clindamycin
These agents bind selectively to a region of the 50S ribosomal subunit close to that of
chloramphenicol and erythromycin. They block elongation of the peptide chain by
inhibition of peptidyl transferase.
3.7 Fusidic acid
This steroidal antibiotic does not act upon the ribosome itself, but upon one of the
associated elongation factors, EF-G. This factor supplies energy for translocation by
hydrolysis of GTP to GDP. Another elongation factor, EF-Tu promotes binding of
aminoacyl-tRNA molecules to the A site through binding and hydrolysis of GTP. Both
EF-G and EF-Tu have overlapping binding sites on the ribosome. Fusidic acid binds the
EF-G: GDP complex to the ribosome after one round of translocation has taken place.
172 Chapter 8
This prevents further incorporation of aminoacyl-tRNA by blocking the binding of
EF-Tu:GTP. Like the tetracyclines, fusidic acid owes its selective antimicrobial action
to active uptake by bacteria and exclusion from mammalian cells. The equivalent elonga-
tion factor in mammalian cells, EF-2 is susceptible to fusidic acid in cell-free systems.
Mupirocin
The target of mupirocin is one of a group of enzymes which couple amino acids to
their respective tRNAs for delivery to the ribosome and incorporation into protein. The
particular enzyme inhibited by mupirocin is involved in producing isoleucyl-tRNA.
The basis for the inhibition is a structural similarity between one end of the mupirocin
molecule and isoleucine. Protein synthesis is halted when the ribosome encounters the
isoleucine codon through depletion of the pool of isoleucyl-tRNA.
Chromosome function and replication
The basis for selective inhibition of chromosome replication and function
As with protein synthesis, the mechanisms of chromosome replication and function
are essentially the same in prokaryotes and eukaryotes. There are, however, important
differences in the detailed functioning and properties of the enzymes involved and
these differences are exploited by a number of agents as the basis of selective inhibition.
The microbial chromosome is large in comparison with the cell that contains it
(approximately 1000 times the length of E. coli). During replication the circular double
helix must be unwound to allow the DNA polymerase enzymes to synthesize new
complementary strands. The shape of the chromosome is manipulated by the cell
by the formation of regions of supercoiling. Positive supercoiling (coiling in the
same sense as the turns of the double helix) makes the chromosome more compact.
Negative supercoiling (generated by twisting the chromosome in the opposite sense to
the helix) produces localized strand separation which is required both for replication
and transcription. In a bacterium such as E. coli, four different topoisomerase enzymes
are responsible for maintaining the shape of DNA during cell division. They act by
cutting one or both of the DNA strands, they remove or generate supercoiling, then
reseal the strands. Their activity is essential for the microbial cell to relieve the complex
tangling of the chromosome (both knotting and chain link formation) which results
from progression of the replication fork around the circular chromosome. Type I
topoisomerases cut one strand of DNA and pass the other strand through the gap before
resealing. Type II enzymes cut both strands and pass another double helical section of
the DNA through the gap before resealing. In E. coli topoisomerase I and EI are both
type I enzymes whilst topoisomerases II and IV are type II enzymes. Topoisomerase II
is also known as DNA gyrase and is the site of action of the quinolones.
The basic sequence of events for microbial chromosome replication is as follows.
Synthesis of precursors
Purines, pyrimidines and their nucleosides and nucleoside triphosphates are synthesized
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 173
in the cytoplasm. At this stage the antifolate drugs (sulphonamides and dihydrofolate
reductase inhibitors) act by blocking the production of thymine. The antifungal agent
5-fluorocytosine interferes with these early stages of DNA synthesis. Through con-
version to 5-fluorouracil then to 5-fluorodeoxyuridylic acid (5-F-dUMP) it blocks
thymidylic acid production through inhibition of the enzyme thymidylate synthetase.
The antiviral nucleosides acycloguanosine (acyclovir) and iododeoxyuridine (idoxuridine)
are converted to their respective nucleoside triphosphates in the cytoplasm of infected
cells. They proceed to inhibit viral DNA replication either by inhibition of the DNA
polymerase or by incorporation into DNA with subsequent termination of chain
extension. Finally the anti-human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) drug azidothymidine
(AZT) acts in an analogous manner, being converted to the corresponding triphosphate
and inhibiting viral RNA synthesis by the HIV reverse transcriptase.
4.1.2 Unwinding of the chromosome
As described in section 4.1, the DNA double helix must unwind to allow access of the
polymerase enzymes to produce two new strands of DNA. This is facilitated by DNA
gyrase, the target of the quinolones. Some agents interfere with the unwinding of the
chromosome by physical obstruction. These include the acridine dyes, of which the
topical antiseptic proflavine is the most familiar, and the antimalarial acridine, mepacrine.
They prevent strand separation by insertion (intercalation) between base pairs from
each strand, but exhibit very poor selective toxicity.
4.1.3 Replication of DNA strands
The unwound DNA strands are kept unfolded during replication by binding a protein
called Albert's protein. A series of enzymes produce new strands of DNA using each of
the separated strands as templates. An RNA polymerase forms short primer strands of
RNA on each template strand at specific initiator sites. DNA polymerase III then
synthesizes and joins short DNA strands on to the RNA primers. These DNA strands
are called Okasaki fragments. DNA polymerase I (which possesses nucleotidase activity)
removes the RNA primers and replaces them with DNA strands. Finally a DNA ligase
joins together the DNA strands producing two daughter chromosomes. The entire process
is carefully regulated with proofreading stages to check that each nucleotide is correctly
incorporated as specified by the template sequence. There are no therapeutic agents yet
known which interfere directly with the DNA polymerases.
4.1.4 Transcription
The process of transcription, the copying of a single strand of mRNA sequence using
one strand of the chromosome as a template, is carried out by RNA polymerase. This is
a complex of four proteins (two a, one /3 and one /3'subunits) which make up the core
enzyme. Another small protein, the cfactor, joins the core enzyme, which binds to the
promoter region of the DNA preceding the gene which is to be transcribed. The correct
positioning and orientation of the polymerase is obtained by recognition of specific
marker sites on the DNA at positions - 10 and -35 nucleotide bases before the initiation
174 Chapter 8
site for transcription. The a factor is responsible for recognition of the initiation signal
for transcription and the core enzyme possesses the activity to join the nucleotides in
the sequence specified by the gene. Mammalian genes possess an analogous RNA
polymerase but there are sufficient differences in structure to permit selective inhibition
of the microbial enzyme by the semisynthetic rifamycin antibiotic, rifampicin.
Quinolones
The quinolones selectively inhibit DNA gyrase (topoisomerase II), which is not found
in mammalian cells. The gyrase, a tetramer comprising two A and two B subunits, is a
highly versatile enzyme which is capable of catalysing a variety of changes in DNA
topology. These include introduction of negative supercoiling and removal of positive
supercoiling (relaxation), unknotting, and removal of linked structures (decatenation).
Such activities ensure that the daughter chromosomes produced during replication can
segregate in the cytoplasm prior to cell division. The gyrase binds to the chromosome
at a point where two separate double stranded regions cross (this can be at a supercoiled
region, a knotted or a linked (catenane) region). The A subunits cut both DNA strands
on one chain with a 4 base pair stagger, the other chain is passed through the break
which is then resealed. The B subunits derive energy for the reaction by hydrolysis
of adenosine triphosphate (ATP). The precise details of the interaction are not clear
but it appears that the quinolones bind to the A subunits at exposed single strand ends
of the cut DNA chain. The gyrase is unable to reseal the DNA with the result that
the chromosome in treated cells becomes fragmented. The number of fragments
(approximately 100 per cell) is comparable to the number of supercoils in the
chromosome. The action of the quinolones probably triggers secondary responses in
the cells which are responsible for death. One notable morphological effect of quinolone
treatment of Gram-negative rod-shaped organisms is the formation of filaments. Some
of the quinolones may also act upon topoisomerase IV, which appears to be more
important for chromosome segregation in staphylococci.
Nitroimidazoles (metronidazole) and nitrofurans (nitrofurantoin)
These agents also cause DNA strand breakage but by a direct chemical action rather
than by inhibition of a topoisomerase. Metronidazole is active only against anaerobic
organisms. The nitro group of metronidazole is converted to a nitronate radical by the
low redox potential within cells. The activated metronidazole then attacks the DNA
producing strand breakage. Nitrofurantoin is thought to act in a similar manner.
Rifampicin
The action of rifampicin is upon the /3 subunit of RNA polymerase. Binding of just one
molecule of rifampicin inhibits the initiation stage of transcription in which the first
nucleotide is incorporated in the RNA chain. Once started, transcription itself is not
inhibited. It has been suggested that the structure of rifampicin resembles that of two
adenosine nucleotides in RNA; this may form the basis of the binding of the antibiotic
to they:? subunit. One problem is the rapid development of resistance in organisms due
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 175
to alterations in the amino acids comprising one particular region of the /3 subunit.
These changes do not affect the activity of the polymerase but render it insensitive to
rifampicin. The action of rifampicin is specific for the microbial RNA polymerase, the
mammalian version being unaffected.
45 5-Fluorocytosine
This antifungal agent inhibits DNA synthesis at the early stages involving production
of the nucleotide, thymidylic acid (dTMP). 5-Fluorocytosine (5-FC) is converted by a
deaminase inside fungi to 5-fluorouracil then to the corresponding nucleoside phosphate,
5-fluorodeoxyuridylic acid (5-F-dUMP). This compound then acts as an inhibitor of
thymidylate synthetase which normally produces dTMP from uridine monophosphate
(dUMP) by addition of a methyl group (supplied by a folate cofactor, section 5.1)
to the 5 position of the uracil ring. As this position is blocked by the fluoro group
5-F-dUMP acts as an inhibitor of the enzyme. 5-FC can be considered as a pro-drug, it
has the value of being taken up by fungi as the pyrimidine base, whereas the active
metabolite produced inside the cells would not be taken up because of its negative
charge. Although 5-FC is an important antifungal agent in treatment of life-threatening
infections, resistance can occur due to active efflux of the drug from the cells before it
can inhibit DNA synthesis.
5 Folate antagonists
5.1 Folate metabolism in microbial and mammalian cells
Folic acid is an important cofactor in all living cells. In the reduced form, tetrahydrofolate
(THF), it functions as a carrier of single carbon fragments which are used in the synthesis
of adenine, guanine, thymine and methionine. One important folate-dependent enzyme
is thymidylate synthetase, which produces dTMP by transfer of the methyl group from
THF to dUMP. In this and other folate-dependent reactions THF is converted to
dihydrofolic acid (DHF), which must be reduced back to THF before it can participate
again as a carbon fragment carrier. The enzyme responsible for the reduction of DHF
to THF is dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR; Fig. 8.5) which uses the nucleotide NADPH 2
as a cofactor. Bacteria, protozoa and mammalian cells all possess DHFR but there
are sufficient differences in the enzyme structure for inhibitors such as trimethoprim
and pyrimethamine to inhibit the bacterial and protozoal enzymes selectively without
damaging the mammalian form. In the case of protozoa such as the Plasmodium
species responsible for malaria, the DHFR is a double enzyme which also contains the
thymidylate synthetase activity.
There is another fundamental difference between folate utilization in microbial
and mammalian cells. Bacteria and protozoa are unable to take up exogenous folate
and must synthesize it themselves. This is carried out in a series of reactions involving
first the synthesis of dihydropteroic acid from one molecule each of pteridine and p-
aminobenzoic acid (PABA). Glutamic acid is then added to form DHF which is reduced
by DHFR to THF. Mammalian cells do not make their own DHF, instead they take it up
from dietary nutrients and convert it to THF using DHFR.
176 Chapter 8
o
o
HiN? \>C0O"
h^ — a — p — o — p — o
.p-amdrmbanziMtB (PA£AJ
H.N
o o
Svuthatase
I
IT "CH a NH-
^ ^
H a M — CH — COO
(CHi>,
Grutam^tB
COCr
H 3 H N
Dihyriroptcnoic
acid
CH a NH
DlhydrofolfttO
coo-
CH,MH
Titrjbyd'"of&J*i*
r%
OOHHCH — COO
(CHjl;
Qtbydrofaiate
coc-
Flg, SJS FirtaJ sisps in the biosynthesis of letrahydrofolAt* by bacteria.
Sulphonamides
Sulphonamides are structural analogues of PABA. They competitively inhibit the
incorporation of PABA into dihydropteroic acid and there is some evidence for their
incorporation into false folate analogues which inhibit subsequent metabolism. The
presence of excess PABA will reverse the inhibitory action of sulphonamides, as will
thymine, adenine, guanine and methionine. However, these nutrients are not normally
available at the site of infections for which the sulphonamides are used.
DHFR inhibitors
Trimethoprim is a selective inhibitor of bacterial DHFR. The bacterial enzyme is several
thousand times more sensitive than the mammalian enzyme. Pyrimethamine, likewise,
is a selective inhibitor of plasmodial DHFR. Both are structural analogues of the
dihydropteroic acid portion of the DHF substrate. Crystal structures of the bacterial,
plasmodial and mammalian DHFRs, each containing either bound substrate or the
inhibitors have been determined by X-ray diffraction studies. These show how inhibitors
fit tightly into the active site normally occupied by the DHF substrate, forming a pattern
of strong hydrogen bonds with amino acid residues and water molecules lining the
site. Another DHFR inhibitor is proguanil, a guanidine-containing pro-drug which is
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 111
metabolized in the liver to cycloguanil, an active selective inhibitor of plasmodial DHFR.
Methotrexate is a potent DHFR inhibitor which has an analogous structure to the whole
DHF molecule, including the glutamate residue. It has no selectivity towards microbial
DHFR and cannot therefore be used to treat infections; however, it is widely used as
an anticancer agent. A derivative of methotrexate which is used for treatment of
Pneumocystis carinii infections in acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS)
patients is trimetrexate. Although it is very toxic to mammalian cells, simultaneous
administration of leucovorin (formyl-THF or folinic acid) as an alternative source of
folate which cannot be taken up by the organism protects host tissues. DHFR inhibitors
can be used in combination with a sulphonamide to achieve a double interference with
folate metabolism. Suitable combinations with matching pharmacokinetic properties
are sulphamethoxazole and trimethoprim (the antibacterial, cotrimoxazole) and sul-
phadoxine and pyrimethamine (the antimalarial, fansidar).
6 The cytoplasmic membrane
6.1 Composition and susceptibility of membranes to selective disruption
The integrity of the cytoplasmic membrane is vital for the normal functioning of all
cells. Bacterial membranes do not contain sterols and, in this respect differ from
membranes of fungi and mammalian cells. Fungal membranes contain predominantly
ergosterol as the sterol component whereas mammalian cells contain cholesterol. Gram-
negative bacteria contain an additional outer membrane structure which provides
a protective penetration barrier to potentially harmful substances, including many
antibiotics. The outer membrane has an unusual asymmetric structure in which
phospholipids occupy the inner face and the lipopolysaccharide (LPS) occupies the
outer face. The outer membrane is attached to the peptidoglycan by proteins and
lipoproteins. The stability of all membranes is maintained by a combination of non-
covalent interactions between the constituents involving ionic, hydrophobic and
hydrogen bonding. The balance of these interactions can be disturbed by the intrusion
of molecules (membrane-active agents) which destroy the integrity of the membrane,
thereby causing leakage of cytoplasmic contents or impairment of metabolic functions
associated with the membrane. Most membrane-active agents which function in this
way, e.g. the alcohols, quaternary ammonium compounds and bisbiguanides (considered
in Chapter 10), have very poor selectivity. They cannot be used systemically because
of their damaging effects upon mammalian cells; instead they are used as skin anti-
septics, disinfectants and preservatives. A few agents can be used therapeutically: the
polymyxins, which act principally upon the outer membrane of Gram-negative bacteria,
and the antifungal polyenes, imidazoles naftidine.
6.2 Polymyxins
Polymyxin B and polymyxin E (colistin) are used in the treatment of serious Gram-
negative bacterial infections, particularly those caused by Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
They comprise a cyclic peptide containing positively charged groups linked by a
tripeptide to a hydrophobic branched chain fatty acid. They bind tightly to negatively
178 Chapter 8
charged phosphate groups on LPS in the outer membrane of Gram-negative bacteria.
The outer leaflet of the membrane structure is distorted, segments of which are released
and the permeability barrier destroyed. The polymyxins can then penetrate to the
cytoplasmic membrane where they disrupt membrane integrity, causing leakage of
cytoplasmic components. Their detergent-like properties are a key feature of this
membrane-damaging action which is similar to that of quaternary ammonium
compounds. The high affinity of polymyxins for LPS is an advantage in treatment of
P. aeruginosa lung infections where neutralization of the endotoxic action of LPS
released from the organisms reduces inflammation.
Polyenes
Amphotericin B and nystatin are the most commonly used members of this group of
antifungal agents. They derive their action from their strong affinity towards sterols,
particularly ergosterol. The hydrophobic polyene region binds to the hydrophobic sterol
ring system within fungal membranes. In so doing, the hydroxylated portion of the
polyene is pulled into the membrane interior, destabilizing the structure and causing
leakage of cytoplasmic constituents. It is possible that polyene molecules associate
together in the membrane to form aqueous channels. The pattern of leakage is
progressive, with small metal ions such as K + leaking first, followed by larger amino
acids and nucleotides. The internal pH of the cells falls as K + ions are released,
macromolecules are degraded and the cells are killed. The selective antifungal activity
of the polyenes is poor, depending on the higher affinity for ergosterol than cholesterol.
Kidney damage is a major problem when polyenes are used systemically to treat severe
fungal infections. The problem can be reduced but not eliminated by administration of
amphotericin as a lipid complex or liposome.
Imidazoles and triazoles
The azole antifungal drugs act by inhibiting the synthesis of the sterol components
of the fungal membrane. They are inhibitors of one step in the complex pathway
of ergosterol synthesis involving the removal of a methyl group from lanosterol.
The 14a-demethylase enzyme responsible is dependent upon cytochrome P 450 . The
imidazoles and triazoles cause rapid defects in fungal membrane integrity due to reduced
levels of ergosterol, with loss of cytoplasmic constituents leading to similar effects
to the polyenes. The azoles are not entirely specific for fungal ergosterol synthesis
and have some action upon mammalian steroid metabolism, for example they reduce
testosterone synthesis.
Naftidine
This synthetic allylamine derivative inhibits the enzyme squalene epoxidase at an early
stage in fungal sterol biosynthesis. Acting as a structural analogue of squalene, naftidine
causes the accumulation of this unsaturated hydrocarbon, and a decrease in ergosterol
in the fungal cell membrane.
Mechanisms of action of antibiotics 179
Further reading
Arthur M., Reynolds P. & Courvalin P. (1996) Glycopeptide resistance in enterococci. Trends Microbiol,
4,401-407.
Barry C.E. & Mdluli K. (1996) Drug sensitivity and environmental adaptation of mycobacterial cell
wall components. Trends Microbiol, 4, 275-281.
Bentley P.H. & Ponsford R. (1993) Recent Advances in the Chemistry of Antiinfective Agents. London:
Royal Society of Chemistry.
Brajtburg J., Powderly W.G., Kobayashi G.S. &Medoff G. (1990) Amphotericin B: current understanding
of mechanism of action. Antimicrob Agents Chemother, 34, 183-188.
Coulson C.J. (1994) Molecular Mechanisms of Drug Action. London: Taylor & Francis.
Franklin J.J. & Snow G.A. (1989) Biochemistry of Antimicrobial Action, 4th edn. London: Chapman &
Hall.
Greenwood D. (1995) Antimicrobial Chemotherapy, 3rd edn. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Hooper D.C. & Wolfson J.S. (1993) Quinolone Antimicrobial Agents. Washington: American Society
for Microbiology.
Lancini G., Parenti F. & Hall G.G. (1995) Antibiotics: a Multidisciplinary Approach. New York: Plenum
Press.
Nagarajan R. (1991) Antibacterial activities and modes of action of vancomycin and related
glycopeptides. Antimicrob Agents Chemother, 35, 605-609.
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (1996) Understanding Antibacterial Action and Resistance, 2nd edn. New
York: Ellis Horwood.
Sutcliffe J. A. & Georgopapadakou N.H. (1992) Emerging Targets in Antibacterial and Antifungal
Chemotherapy. New York: Chapman & Hall.
Tipper D.J. (1988) Antibiotic Inhibitors of Bacterial Cell Wall Biosynthesis, 2nd edn. Oxford:
Pergamon Press.
Williams R.A.D., Lambert P.A. & Singleton P. (1996) Antimicrobial Drug Action. Oxford: Bios.
180 Chapter 8
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics
1
Introduction
3.2.5
Fusidic acid
3.2.6
Mupirocin
2
Intrinsic and acquired resistance
3.3
Inhibitors of peptidoglycan synthesis
2.1
Genetic basis of acquired resistance
3.3.1
/3-Lactams
2.1.1
Chromosomal mutations
3.3.2
Glycopeptides
2.1.2
Plasmids
3.3.3
Fosfomycin
2.1.3
Transposons
3.4
Membrane-active antibiotics
3.4.1
Polymyxins
3
Biochemical mechanisms of resistance
3.5
Multidrug resistance pumps
3.1
Inhibitors of nucleic acid synthesis
3.6
Antibiotics with other resistance
3.1.1
Sulphonamides
mechanisms
3.1.2
Trimethoprim
3.6.1
Bacitracin
3.1.3
Quinolones
3.6.2
Antimycobacterial drugs
3.1.4
Rifampicin
3.2
Inhibitors of protein synthesis
4
The problem of antibiotic resistance
3.2.1
Aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol group
3.2.2
Tetracyclines
5
Conclusions and comments
3.2.3
Chloramphenicol
3.2.4
Macrolide, lincosamide and
streptogramin (MLS) antibiotics
6
References
Introduction
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics has been recognized since the first drugs were intro-
duced for clinical use. The sulphonamides were introduced in 1935 and approximately
10 years later 20% of clinical isolates of Neisseria gonorrhoeae had become resistant.
Similar increases in sulphonamide resistance were found in streptococci, coliforms
and other bacteria. Penicillin was first used in 1941, when less than 1 % of Staphylococcus
aureus strains were resistant to its action. By 1947,38% of hospital strains had acquired
resistance and currently over 90% of Staph, aureus isolates are resistant to penicillin.
Increasing resistance to antibiotics is a consequence of selective pressure, but the
actual incidence of resistance varies between different bacterial species. For example,
ampicillin resistance in Escherichia coli, presumably under similar selective pressure
as Staph, aureus with penicillin, has remained at a level of 30-40% for many years
with a slow rate of increase. Streptococcus pyogenes, another major pathogen, has
remained susceptible to penicillin since its introduction, with no reports of resistance
in the scientific literature. Equally, it is well recognized that certain bacteria are
unaffected by specific antibiotics. In other words, these bacteria have always been
antibiotic-resistant.
Intrinsic and acquired resistance
Antibiotic resistance is classified into two broad types: intrinsic and acquired.
1 Intrinsic resistance. This suggests that inherent properties of the bacterium are
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 181
Table 9.1 Spectrum of activity of some antibacterial antibiotics'
Antibiotic
Gram-positive bacteria
Gram-negative bacteria
Penicillin
Fusidic acid
Erythromycin
Vancomycin
Aminoglycosides
Nalidixic acidt
Polymixins
Metronidazole
Streptococci, staphylococci,
corynebacteria, Clostridia,
Listeria
Staph, aureus
Streptococci, staphylococci,
corynebacteria
Streptococci, staphylococci,
Clostridia
Staph, aureus (gentamicin)
Anaerobes only
Anaerobes
Legionella, Campylobacter
Coliforms, pseudomonads
Coliforms
Coliforms, pseudomonads
Anaerobes only
* See also Chapters 5 and 6.
t Newer quinolones have a broad spectrum of activity against Gram-positive and Gram-negative
bacteria. In general, Gram-negative bacteria tend to be more susceptible.
2.1
responsible for preventing antibiotic action (Godfrey & Bryan 1984). This type of
resistance is also termed innate. There are many antibiotics active against Gram-positive
bacteria which have no effect on Gram-negative bacteria and vice versa (Table 9.1).
This intrinsic resistance is thought to be associated with the outer cell layers, such as
the outer membrane, which are absent in Gram-positive cells. The Gram-negative cell
envelope is effectively impermeable, preventing certain antibiotics from reaching their
intracellular targets.
2 Acquired resistance. This occurs when bacteria which were previously susceptible
become resistant, usually, but not always, after exposure to the antibiotic concerned.
Intrinsic resistance is always chromosomally mediated, whereas acquired resistance
may occur by mutations in the chromosome or by the acquisition of genes coding
for resistance from an external source normally via a plasmid or transposon. Both
types are clinically important and can result in treatment failure, although acquired
resistance is more of a threat in the spread of antibiotic resistance (Russell & Chopra
1996).
Genetic basis of acquired resistance
Three genetic elements are responsible for acquired resistance: chromosomes, plasmids
and transposons (Lewis 1989). Each of these will be considered in turn.
2.7.7
Chromosomal mutations
Resistance to certain antibiotics can arise as a consequence of mutations to chromosomal
genes because of changes in the DNA sequence. Mutations can occur due to single
base pair changes. Transitions involve the substitution of one purine (A or G) for another
and therefore one pyrimidine (C or T) for another. Transversions involve a change
from a pyrimidine to a purine and vice versa. Frameshift mutations occur when one or
182 Chapter 9
two bases are inserted into the DNA sequence, resulting in an altered reading frame
and therefore an altered gene product.
More extensive changes in the DNA sequence (often referred to as macrolesions)
can also occur. Deletions result in the loss of part of the DNA sequence. Insertions add
extra base pairs to a gene. Transversions occur when a segment of the DNA is reversed
and duplications occur when a segment of the DNA is repeated. Some of these changes
also result in frameshifts.
The molecular basis of acquired chromosomal resistance for specific antibiotics is
discussed later in this chapter.
2.7.2 Plasmids
The bacterial chromosome contains all the genes necessary for the growth and replication
of cells. Many, if not most, bacteria also possess additional circular elements of DNA
which are capable of replicating and transferring independently of the chromosome.
These extrachromosomal genetic elements are known as plasmids and can code for a
number of properties including antibiotic resistance. In a bacterial population under
normal circumstances, it is not necessary for all cells within that population to harbour
plasmids. This has the effect of avoiding the production of unnecessary gene products
unless essential for the survival of the population. Assuming that a subset of the
bacterial population maintains such plasmids, selective pressure following exposure to
an antibiotic will ensure that plasmid-containing, and therefore resistant, cells and their
progeny will survive the antibiotic challenge.
Plasmids have the ability to transfer within and between species and can therefore
be acquired from other bacteria as well as a consequence of cell division. This property
makes plasmid-acquired resistance much more threatening in terms of the spread of
antibiotic resistance than resistance acquired due to chromosomal mutation. Plasmids
also harbour transposons (section 2.1.3), which enhances their ability to transfer
antibiotic resistance genes.
Plasmid transfer normally occurs by conjugation or transduction in vivo. Conjugation
requires cell-to-cell contact and involves the transfer of DNA from a donor cell to a
recipient cell. Plasmids which can mediate their own transfer are termed conjugative
plasmids. Some plasmids which do not possess this property can nevertheless be
transferred if they coexist with a conjugative plasmid. These are known as mobilizable
plasmids. Both Gram-negative and Gram-positive bacteria have the ability to conjugate.
Transduction is a process whereby DNA is transferred by bacteriophages, and plays an
important role in the transfer of antibiotic resistance in Gram-positive bacteria such as
Staph, aureus, Strep, pyogenes and the enterococci. Transduction is generally limited
to organisms of the same species and therefore its role in the transfer of antibiotic
resistance is less significant than conjugation.
A third mechanism of plasmid transfer is by transformation, which is the ability of
certain microorganisms to acquire naked DNA from the environment. This is limited
to certain bacteria, notably Neisseria gonorrhoeae, which is naturally competent to
acquire DNA in this manner. Neisseria gonorrhoeae strains have the ability to recognize
DNA from their own species, and are thus selective in their acquisition of naked DNA
from the environment.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 183
2.1.3
Transduction and transformation are generally limited to the same or related species
and are therefore not effective as a means of antibiotic resistance transfer across species
boundaries. However, our knowledge of transformation in nature is limited, and the
significance of this mechanism of gene transfer is unknown.
Transposons
Transposons are mobile genetic elements capable of transferring or transposing
independently from one DNA molecule to another. The DNA molecules may be
chromosomes or plasmids. Transposons are normally flanked by short regions of almost
identical DNA sequence known as repeats. These are termed direct repeats if they lie in
the same direction relative to each other, or inverted repeats if they face in opposite
directions. These repeats are thought to function as recognition sequences for enzymes
involved in transposition (the ability of transposons to transfer and integrate into the
recipient DNA molecule). The central region of the transposon often codes for antibiotic
resistance genes. The ability of transposons to mobilize from one DNA molecule to
another has led to them being referred to as jumping genes. Transposons do not require
homologous regions of DNA in order to integrate into a DNA molecule unlike the
normal recombination process in bacterial cells and are therefore a major cause of the
transfer and spread of antibiotic resistance genes among different bacterial species.
Furthermore, it is possible for bacteria to acquire a series of transposons coding for
different antibiotic resistances by insertion in existing plasmids or the chromosome.
Conjugative transposons which can mediate their own transfer have been described in
the last 10 years. These make the transfer and spread of resistance genes more likely
since they do not depend on insertion into conjugative plasmids for their mobilization.
Known mechanisms of acquired resistance determined by chromosomes, plasmids or
transposons are summarized in Table 9.2.
Biochemical mechanisms of resistance
Many different biochemical mechanisms of antibiotic resistance have been described,
Table 9.2 Genetic determinants of resistance
Chromosomally mediated
resistance only
Plasmid-mediated
resistance*
Transposonst
Methicillin
Quinolones
Rifampicin
Aminoglycoside-
aminocyclitols
/ A -I_actams
Tetracyclines
Sulphonamides
Trimethoprim
Chloramphenicol
Erythromycin
Fusidic acid
Single, e.g. ampicillin,
chloramphenicol, tetracycline
Multiple, e.g.
ampicillin + streptomycin +
sulphonamide
* Resistance may also be chromosomally mediated.
t Multiple resistance genes may be carried on a transposon.
184 Chapter 9
though it is worth noting that more than one mechanism may be present at any one
time in a resistant microorganism. This is particularly relevant in terms of the clinical
efficacy of antibiotics. The acquisition of a single resistance mechanism may render a
bacterium microbiologically resistant but therapeutically achievable levels of a drug
may be sufficient to overcome such resistance. The acquisition of a second resistance
mechanism may be necessary to achieve clinical resistance, i.e. the amount of antibiotic
necessary to overcome the resistance mechanism is greater than can be achieved
therapeutically.
Before considering specific mechanisms of resistance for particular classes of
antibiotic it is worth considering potential mechanisms of resistance in bacterial cells.
These are summarized in Fig. 9.1 and specific examples are listed in Table 9.3.
Gram-negative bacteria possess an outer membrane which can act as a barrier
to the penetration of antibiotics. The main route of entry of hydrophilic molecules is
via the porins, which form pores in the outer membrane. Qualitative or quantitative
alterations in these porins can result in the decreased accumulation of antibiotic.
The cytoplasmic (cell) membrane of Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria
can also act as an exclusion barrier. Alterations in membrane structure can reduce
penetration or the presence of proteins functioning as efflux pumps can actively
remove antibiotic molecules from the cytoplasm. Bacteria may produce enzymes
which inactivate antibiotics, rendering them ineffective. These may destroy or alter
the antibiotic molecule. Extracellular enzymes will be most effective in inactivating
antibiotics since they will be kept away from their target sites. Gram-negative bacteria
can also produce periplasmic enzymes which will act outside the cytoplasmic membrane.
These mechanisms of resistance rely on reducing or preventing access of antibiotic
to their target sites, but other mechanisms of resistance involving the target sites
themselves can be considered. Alterations in the target site which reduce the binding of
Gram-niwjrilive
Gr?Ett-p4$jjLive
Extracellular
Outer membrane
Periplasms sfwce
P'jptidofllycan
Cell membrane
Cytoplasm
■^bw^^
Peptidoalycai
Cell membrane
^^w^yy
Cytoplasm
intracellular
Fig. 9.1 Schematic representation of possible mechanisms of resistance in Gram-negative and
Gram-positive bacteria. 1, antibiotic-inactivating enzymes; 2, antibiotic efflux proteins; 3, alteration
or duplication of intracellular targets; 4, alteration of the cell membrane reducing antibiotic uptake;
5, alterations in porins or lipopolysaccharide reducing antibiotic uptake or binding.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 185
Table 9.3 Mechanisms of antibiotic resistance
Expression of resistance
Example(s)
Comments
Enzymatic inactivation
Enzymatic trapping
Enzymatic modification
Bacterial impermeability'
Antibiotic efflux
Decreased affinity of target
enzymes
Alteration in binding site
Some A -lactam antibiotics
Chloramphenicol
Some /3-lactam antibiotics
Some aminoglycoside
antibiotics
Some /3-lactam antibiotics
Aminoglycoside antibiotics
Tetracyclines,
chloramphenicol, fusidic acid
Hydrophobic antibiotics:
novobiocin, actinomycin D,
erythromycin, rifampicin
Tetracyclines
/ A -Lactam antibiotics
Trimethoprim
Sulphonamides
Streptomycin
Erythromycin
Glycopeptides
Hydrolysis of the /3-lactam
ring
Conversion to an inactive
compound
Penicillin-binding proteins
Alteration ofthe molecule by
phosphorylation,
adenylylation or acetylation
Mutational loss of porins
Reduced ability of cells to
take up drugs
Plasmid-mediated decreased
drug accumulation
Difficulty in entering
Gram-negative cells
Energy-dependent efflux of
accumulated drugs
Altered PBPst
Altered dihydroflolate
reductase
Altered dihydropteroate
synthetase
Protein S12 component of
30S ribosomal subunit
determines sensitivity or
resistance
Ribosomes from resistant cells
have lower affinity, resulting
from enzymatic methylation
of adenine in 23S rRNA
Acquired ligase produces
altered peptidoglycan
precursors with lower affinity
* Depends on chemical nature of drug and on type of organism,
t Penicillin-binding proteins.
antibiotics, but allow the target to retain its normal function, are well known. An
alternative is to bypass the antibiotic-sensitive step by duplicating the target site with
an antibiotic-resistant version. A third related mechanism is to overproduce the target
so that higher antibiotic concentrations are required to exert significant antibacterial
action. In certain species, an enzyme or metabolic pathway may be absent, rendering
the microorganism resistant to antibiotics effective against other bacterial species.
The following sections describe the biochemical mechanisms of resistance to
different classes of antibiotics, with the antibiotics grouped according to their mechanism
of action.
3.1
Inhibitors of nucleic acid synthesis
Antibiotics considered here can be divided into two mechanisms of action: those which
186 Chapter 9
inhibit nucleotide metabolism and those which inhibit enzymes involved in nucleic
acid synthesis.
3.1.1 Sulphonamides
Chromosomal and plasmid-mediated resistance to the sulphonamides has been described
(Huovinen et al. 1995).
Two mechanisms of chromosomal resistance have been identified. A mutation of
dihydropteroate synthetase (DHPS) in Strep, pneumoniae produces an altered enzyme
with reduced affinity for sulphonamides. Hyperproduction of p-aminobenzoic acid
(PABA) overcomes the block imposed by inhibition of DHPS. The specific cause of
PABA hyperproduction is unknown, though chromosomal mutation is the probable cause.
Duplication of DHPS, with the second version of the enzyme being resistant to the
sulphonamides, is the cause of plasmid-acquired resistance. Two different enzymes
have been identified, both with lowered affinity for the antibiotic.
3.1.2 Trimethoprim
Trimethoprim is a 2,4-diaminopyrimidine and all three genetic bases of resistance have
been described (Huovinen et al. 1995).
Chromosomal mutations in E. coli result in overproduction of dihydro folate reductase
(DHFR). Higher concentrations of trimethoprim, which may not be therapeutically
achievable, are therefore required to inhibit nucleotide metabolism. Other mutations
lower the affinity of DHFR for trimethoprim. These two mechanisms of resistance
may coexist in a single strain, effectively increasing the level of resistance to the
antibiotic.
Plasmid- and transposon-mediated resistance is akin to that described for the
sulphonamides, where the sensitive step is bypassed by duplication of the target with a
resistant version. Many different resistant enzymes have been identified thus far.
3.1.3 Quinolones
The quinolones exert their action by binding to DNA gyrase (bacterial topoisomerase
II) and inhibiting its functions. Acquired resistance to the quinolones arises due to
chromosomal mutations in the genes coding for DNA gyrase (Hooper & Wolf son 1993).
The most common mutations arise in the gyrA gene where a single base-pair change
can be sufficient to cause resistance. Levels of resistance can be increased by the presence
of multiple mutations with a region of the gyrA gene known as the quinolone resistance-
determining region. The exact mechanism of resistance is unknown but is thought to
involve a subtle conformational change in DNA gyrase which reduces binding of
quinolones. Mutations in the gyrB gene have also been identified but these lead to
lower levels of resistance. With certain gyrB mutations, bacteria become resistant to
older quinolone analogues such as nalidixic acid, but become hypersusceptible to newer
quinolones such as ciprofloxacin. Mutations in other bacterial topoisomerases have
been identified in Staph, aureus. These are thought to be as important as DNA gyrase
mutations in quinolone resistance in this microorganism.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 187
Other chromosomal mutations resulting in quinolone resistance have been found
to decrease permeability of the antimicrobial agent. norB mutants show a decrease in
ompF porin. This is one of the major porins in Gram-negative bacteria. norC mutants
have altered ompF and lipopolysaccharide, though the mutations are not in the ompF
gene itself but appear to occur in a gene or genes whose products regulate OmpF. norC
mutants are less susceptible to some quinolones such as ciprofloxacin but more
susceptible to others.
Resistance to quinolones by efflux has been described in Staph, aureus and Proteus
mirabilis. This gene has been designated nor A in Staph, aureus and is homologous to
membrane transport proteins coupled to the electromotive force. These proteins have
the ability to remove small amounts of quinolone from cells normally and nor A may
have arisen as a result of mutations under selective pressure from quinolone use, resulting
in a transport protein with increased affinity for these agents.
3.1.4 Rifamp icin
Rifampicin is the semisynthetic derivative used widely in the UK. Resistance to
rifampicin is primarily due to chromosomal mutations resulting in an altered RNA
polymerase which is less well inhibited by the drug. The mutations tend to be clustered
within short conserved regions of the j3 subunit gene of RNA polymerase. Similar
mutations have been found in all bacterial species studied thus far.
3.2 Inhibitors of protein synthesis
Inhibition of protein synthesis is the antibacterial mechanism shared by most groups of
antibiotics, though the exact action differs.
3.2.1 Amino glycoside- amino cyclitol group
Three mechanisms of resistance to the aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol (AGAC) group
of antibiotics are recognized (Shaw et al. 1993).
Alteration of the antibiotic molecule is plasmid- or transposon-encoded. Three
classes of enzyme can alter the AGAC molecule. Aminoglycoside adenylyltransferases
(AADs) use adenosine triphosphate (ATP) as a cofactor in modifying certain hydroxyl
groups in the antibiotic molecule by adenylylating them (Fig. 9.2). Aminoglycoside
phosphotransferases (APH) also use ATP to modify certain hydroxyl groups by
phosphorylating them (Fig. 9.2). Aminoglycoside acetyltransferases (AACs) use acetyl
CoA as a cofactor and acetylate susceptible amino groups on the molecule (Fig. 9.2).
These three classes of enzyme have been further subdivided according to which site
on the AGAC molecule is modified. For example, APH(6) phosphorylates the 6-hydroxyl
group on the aminohexose group of streptomycin. Most AGAC antibiotics are susceptible
to more than one modification reaction. Relatively small amounts of the antibiotic are
modified, implying that resistance is determined by the relative rates of drug uptake
and modification. A less efficient modifying enzyme will permit unmodified antibiotic
to reach its ribosomal quantity. A more efficient enzyme, or greater quantities of the
enzyme, will result in resistance.
188 Chapter 9
B-- —
[6')
.--A
/ OH
NH, -•
ij> NH.
Kanamycln
8(C OH^J^L^
NHi
B — — *■
-A
/ NH.CO.CH.CH ? .CH,NH z
OH
Amikacin
Ntt a
Fig. 9.2 Modification of AGACs (e.g. kanamycin and amikacin) by resistance enzymes.
A, acetylation (AAC); B, adenylylation (AAD); C, phosphorylation (APH).
AGAC-modifying enzymes are active outside the cytoplasmic membrane, in the
periplasmic space in Gram-negative bacteria and extracellularly in Gram-positives.
Table 9.4 summarizes some of the enzymes involved in AGAC resistance and their
spectrum of activity.
A second mechanism of resistance to the AGACs involves an alteration of the
ribosomal target site. Mutations in the gene coding forribosomal protein S12 (rpsL in
E. coli) prevent the antibiotics from binding to their target. In mycobacteria, which
possess only one ribosomal RNA operon, mutations in rpoB, coding for 16S rRNA,
also inhibit binding of the drugs.
Acquired resistance due to decreased permeability by mutations affecting membrane
transport have also been reported in other bacteria.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 189
Table 9.4 Examples of aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol susceptibility to modifying enzymes
Aminoglycoside Inactivation by
Streptomycin APH(3"), APH(6), AAD(6),
AAD{3")(9)
Spectinomycin AAD(3")(9), AAD(9)
Gentamicin APH{2"), AAD(2"), AAC(3),
AAC(2')
Kanamycin APH(3'), APH(2"), AAD<2"),
AAD(4')(4"), AAC(6')
Tobramycin APH(2"), AAD(4')(4"),
AAD(2"), AAC(3), AAC(2'),
AAC(6')
Neomycin APH(3'), AAD(4')(4"),
AAC(3), AAC(2'), AAC(6')
Amikacin AAD(4')(4"), AAC(6')
3.2.2 Tetracyclines
Three types of resistance mechanism have also been identified with this class of antibiotic
(Chopra et al. 1992).
Plasmid- or transposon-encoded tetracycline efflux proteins have been described
in a number of bacteria. These efflux proteins are thought to span the cytoplasmic
membrane and are dependent on the proton-motive force for their action. It is thought
that the efflux proteins bind tetracyclines and initiate proton transfer, although no
functional domains have been identified. Eight distinct tetracycline efflux proteins have
been identified thus far.
Plasmid- or transposon-encoded ribosomal protection factors are a second mechan-
ism of resistance to the tetracyclines. These proteins are believed to alter the tetracycline
binding site on the 30S ribosomal subunit, lowering the affinity for the drugs.
OmpF mutations in Gram-negative bacteria such as E. coli (see above) can result
in low level resistance to the tetracyclines by reducing their uptake.
3.2.3 Chloramphenicol
Plasmid- or transposon-encoded chloramphenicol acetyltransferases (CATs) are respon-
sible for resistance by inactivating the antibiotic. CATs convert chloramphenicol to an
acetoxy derivative which fails to bind to the ribosomal target. Several CATs have been
characterized and found to differ in properties such as electrophoretic mobility and
catalytic activity.
Three other mechanisms of chloramphenicol resistance have been described. First,
a transposon-encoded chloramphenicol efflux protein has been identified in E. coli.
Second, some bacterial strains have been found to possess drug-resistant ribosomes,
and third, low level resistance can arise by chromosomal mutations which reduce the
amount of porins and therefore impair uptake. This last mechanism is essentially that
described for the AG AC antibiotics.
190 Chapter 9
3.2.4 Macrolide, lincosamide and streptogramin (MLS) antibiotics
These three classes of antibiotics are often grouped together because of their similar
mode of action. They share a common mechanism of resistance, but there are some
mechanisms specific to each group (Leclerq & Courvalin 1991).
Plasmid- or transposon-mediated resistance common to the MLS group is due to
RNA methylase genes (ermA, ermB and ermC) which code for the methylation of an
adenine residue in 23 S rRNA. Methylation prevents the drugs from binding to the 50S
ribosomal subunit and confers resistance to all MLS antibiotics.
A gene designated msrA has been identified in Staph, aureus which confers resistance
to macrolides and streptogramins but not to lincosamides. Its function is unknown but
the DNA sequence is homologous to genes coding for known efflux proteins.
Chromosomal mutations in E. coli have been identified as causing macrolide
resistance. eryA alters protein L4 with a concomitant loss of binding to ribosomes.
eryB alters protein L22 with a loss of macrolide binding, though the mutation is not in
the structural gene for L22. eryC mutants are thought to alter the processing of rRNA
and a 30S ribosomal subunit protein, though the precise mechanism of resistance is
unclear. Macrolide resistance in mycobacteria is associated with point mutations in
23 S rRNA. Plasmid-mediated inactivation of erythromycin (a 14-membered macrolide)
is common in Gram-negative bacteria and has also been described in some Gram-
positives. The lactone ring is hydrolysed by esterase in Gram-negatives, although
no similar enzymes have been identified in Gram-positives. Erythromycin can also
be phosphorylated, the altered molecule being rendered inactive. Plasmid-mediated
resistance to the lincosamides is common in staphylococci. An enzyme nucleotidylates
the antibiotics at a specific position rendering them inactive. Staphylococcal resistance
to streptogramins is due to inactivation of the antibiotics by plasmid-encoded enzymes.
Streptogramin A is inactivated by an acetyltransferase and streptogramin B by a
hydrolase.
3.2.5 Fusidic acid
Gram-negative bacteria are intrinsically resistant to low levels of fusidic acid (a
steroid) due to exclusion by the outer membrane. Nevertheless, acquired resistance
does occur which has the effect of increasing the level of resistance to the antibiotic.
Acquired resistance also occurs in Gram-positive bacteria normally susceptible to fusidic
acid.
Plasmid-mediated resistance in Gram-positive bacteria is thought to involve
decreased uptake of the drug, although the precise mechanism is unknown. Resistance
to fusidic acid in Gram-negative bacteria is also poorly understood. A CAT-type
enzyme has been identified in resistant strains but no modification or inactivation of
the antibiotic has been observed. It is believed that the CAT forms a tight stoichiometric
complex with the antibiotic, sequestering it and thus rendering it inactive (Davies
1994).
Chromosomal mutations have also been described which produce a modified
translocation factor protein with lowered affinity for fusidic acid.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 191
3.2.6
Mupirocin
Mupirocin is a topical antibiotic that inhibits isoleucyl tRNA synthetase with the
subsequent inhibition of protein synthesis. Mupirocin has become a mainstay in the
treatment of Staph, aureus infection and colonization during hospital outbreaks, and it
is in this organism that acquired resistance has arisen (Gilbart et al. 1993).
High level mupirocin resistance, where strains can be up to 1000 times more resistant
than susceptible strains, is due to the presence of an additional isoleucyl tRNA synthetase
which is resistant to the antibiotic. Resistance is plasmid-encoded, but the resistant
gene differs significantly from the normal susceptible version. The origins of high
level mupirocin resistance are unclear but the low homology with existing genes would
suggest that resistance is acquired from microorganisms other than Staph, aureus. High
level mupirocin resistance is an example of duplication of the target site, the new version
being resistant to the antibiotic. Low level mupirocin resistance results in strains
approximately 50 times more resistant to the antibiotic than susceptible strains. No
extra copies of the isoleucyl tRNA synthetase gene are found, indicating that resistance
has been acquired by mutations in the normal chromosomal gene. Presumably, mupirocin
has less affinity for the altered isoleucyl tRNA synthetase.
3.3
Inhibitors of peptidoglycan synthesis
3.3.1
^-Lactams
Acquired resistance to /Mactam antibiotics can occur by three different mechanisms:
inactivation of the antibiotic, alteration of the target site and reduced permeability
(Sanders 1992; Georgopapadakou 1993).
j8-Lactams are inactivated by enzymes called / A -lactamases which hydrolyse the
cyclic amide bond in the antibiotic molecule (Fig. 9.3). Penicillins are converted to
penicilloic acid which is unable to bind to penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs: see Chapter
8). A similar reaction occurs with cephalosporins, except that the cephalosporoic acid
derivative is unstable and tends to break up. A wide variety of/ A - lactamases with different
structures and substrate profiles has been identified in recent years and classified
according to the scheme in Table 9.5. Many /3-lactamases are plasmid- or transposon-
Penicllllfi
(^Lactamase
N
Penicilloic acid
Cephalosporin
p-Lactamase
— -» ^
Ceph&lDspgrcHC ecid
Fig. 9.3 Hydrolysis of
/Mactams. Cephalosporoic acid
is unstable (see also Fig. 5.1
and sections 2.1 and 2.2 in
Chapter 5).
192 Chapter 9
Table 9.5 Examples of b-lactamases
Inhibited by:
Group of
Preferred
enzyme*
substrate
1
Cephalosporin
2a
Penicillins
2b
Penicillins,
cephalosporins
2be
Penicillins,
cephalosporins
monobactams
2br
Penicillins
2c
Penicillins,
carbenicillin
2d
Penicillins,
cloxacillin
2e
Cephalosporin
2f
Penicillins,
cephalosporins
carbapenems
3
Most /3-lactams
including
carbapenems
4
Penicillins
Clavulanic acid
EDTA
Representative
enzymes
+
+
AmpCfrom Gram-negatives
Penicillinases from Gram-positives
TEM-1t,TEM-2, SHV-1
from Gram negatives
TEM-3 to TEM-26
+/-
+
+/-
TEM-30 to TEM-36
PSE-1.PSE-3, PSE-4
OXA-1 to OX A-11
Inducible cephalosporinases
from Proteus vulgaris
N M C - A f r o m Enterobacter
cloacae, Sme-I from Serratia
marcescens
L1 from Xanthomonas
maltophilia, CcrA from
Bacteroides fragilis
Penicillinase from
Pseudomonas cepacia
* Based on Bush etal (1995).
t Plasmid-encoded /3-lactamases (TEM, PSE, OXA, SHV).
encoded but the Group 1 enzymes are mainly chromosomal. The origin of these is
unclear but they may have diverged from existing PBPs. Transfer of these chromosomal
enzymes by conjugation may be possible, but no evidence for this exists. Nevertheless,
some reports indicate that these Group 1 genes may be mobilized into plasmids and
then transferred to other bacteria. Some Group 1 enzymes are constitutive and expressed
at low levels, but in other species these enzymes are inducible by /Mactams themselves.
Mutations in regulatory genes can lead to constitutive high levels of expression. Such
mutations are of clinical significance since they have led to the development of resistance
to newer /3-lactams previously thought to be resistant to ^lactamases.
It is worth noting that in Gram-negative organisms, /3-lactamases are found in the
periplasmic space where they inactivate /Mactams before the antibiotics can bind to
their PBP targets on the cytoplasmic membrane. In Gram-positive organisms, however,
^lactamases are excreted extracellularly and therefore resistance is very much a
characteristic of the population rather than individual /3-lactamase-producing cells. If
enough enzyme is synthesized, levels of pMactam may be reduced sufficiently to permit
growth of non-pMactamase-producing strains.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 193
3.3.2
A second mechanism of resistance involves alterations in PBPs which affect
binding of /3-lactams. These changes have been found to occur by multiple substitutions
through recombination rather than point mutations. Acquired penicillin resistance in
Strep, pneumoniae is because of such gene mosaics which code for an altered yet
functional PBP with reduced affinity for penicillin. Sections of the susceptible PBP
gene have been replaced by other DNA sequences, presumably via transformation.
Clinically, one of the most important examples of /3-lactam resistance is that found
in methicillin-resistant Staph, aureus (MRS A) strains. These are causing increasing
concern in hospitals, especially because methicillin resistance is often accompanied by
multiple resistance to unrelated antibiotics. Methicillin is resistant to / A -lactamases and
is a mainstay in the treatment of Staph, aureus since over 90% of hospital strains produce
/3-lactamase. Methicillin resistance is due to a novel PBP with low affinity for /3-lactams.
It is capable of functioning when all other PBPs have been inhibited and is sufficient to
catalyse all the reactions necessary for cell growth. Resistance is mediated by the mec
gene, whose origin is unknown. This is an example of resistance by duplication of an
antibiotic target, the new version being resistant to the antibiotic.
A third resistance mechanism is akin to that described for the AGAC antibiotics
and chloramphenicol, whereby changes in the outer membrane porins of Gram-negative
bacteria reduce the penetration of /3-lactams resulting in low levels of resistance.
Glycopeptides
Glycopeptide antibiotics interfere with peptidoglycan synthesis by binding to the D-
alanyl-D-alanine terminus of peptidoglycan precursors. Resistance to glycopeptides
was thought unlikely because the changes in integral structures and functions of the
cell wall and the enzymes involved in its synthesis would render bacteria non- viable.
As is often the case, bacteria have a nasty habit of surprising us!
Acquired resistance to the glycopeptides is transposon-mediated and has so far
been largely confined to the enterococci. This has been a problem clinically because
many of these strains have been resistant to all other antibiotics and were thus effectively
unbeatable. Fortunately, the enterococci are not particularly pathogenic and infections
have been confined largely to seriously ill, long-term hospital patients. Two types of
acquired glycopeptide resistance have been described (Woodford et al. 1995). The
VanA phenotype is resistant to vancomycin and teicoplanin, whereas VanB is resistant
ORF1
ORF2 vanR vanS vanH vanA vanX
vanY vanZ
IR
IR
Transposase
Response Dehydrogenase Dipeptidase unknown
regulator ,i rw ,. TcR?
Resolvase HPK Ligase D, D-carboxy-
peptidase
I
Transposition
I
Regulation
I
Required for
glycopeptide
resistance
I
Accessory
proteins
Fig. 9.4 Organization of glycopeptide-resistance genes in transposon Tnl546. IR, invested repeats;
HPK, histidine protein kinase; TcR, low level teicoplanin resistance.
194 Chapter 9
to vancomycin only. The VanA phenotype is conferred by a transposon which harbours
nine genes coding for resistance (Fig. 9.4). The transposon is transferred by conjugative
plasmids. VanA and VanH are essential for the expression or resistance, which is due to
a modification of the peptidoglycan pathway to produce precursors with reduced affinity
for glycopeptides. VanA is a ligase which catalyzes the synthesis of D-alanyl-D-lactate
depsipeptide instead of D-alanyl-D-alanine. VanH is a dehydrogenase which catalyses
the synthesis of D-lactate as the substrate for VanA. The glycopeptides have much
reduced affinity for the depsipeptide. VanR and VanS are regulatory proteins which
allow expression of the other resistance genes in the presence of glycopeptides. The
VanX and VanY enzymes are responsible for removing D-alanyl-D-alanine dipeptides
from precursors and peptidoglycan to increase levels of resistance. It should be noted
that VanX is essential for resistance. The open reading frames (ORF1 and ORF2) code
for transposition functions. The function of VanZ is unclear but is thought to have a
role in the expression of high level teicoplanin resistance.
VanB-type has been less well-characterized but essentially operates in a similar
manner to VanA. Both inducible and constitutive forms of resistance have been
described, but the reasons for susceptibility to teicoplanin are unclear.
The origins of the glycopeptide-resistance genes are unknown and share little
homology with genes found in intrinsically glycopeptide-resistant organisms.
3.3.3 Fosfomycin
Fosfomycin inhibits pyruvil transferase, which is an enzyme involved in peptidoglycan
synthesis. Two mechanisms of acquired resistance have been described for fosfomycin
(Davies 1994).
Plasmid- or transposon-mediated resistance occurs by inactivation of the antibiotic.
Fosfomycin is combined with glutathione intracellularly to produce a compound lacking
in antibacterial activity. The gene encoding the enzyme catalysing this reaction has
been designated/or-r.
A second mechanism of acquired resistance to fosfomycin involves chromosomal
mutations in sugar phosphate uptake pathways which are responsible for transporting
fosfomycin into the cell. The alterations decrease accumulation of the antibiotic to
levels below those required for inhibition.
3.4 Membrane-active antibiotics
3.4.1 Polymyxins
Polymyxins are a group of antibiotics which disrupt bacterial cell membranes. Two
mechanisms of acquired resistance to the polymyxins have been identified (Russell &
Chopra 1996).
Acquired resistance to polymyxins in E. coli occurs because of chromosomal
mutations which cause incorporation of aminoethanol and aminocarabinose in lipo-
polysaccharide (LPS) in place of phosphate groups. The altered LPS has a decreased
ionic charge which results in lowered binding of polymyxin and thus an increase in
resistance to this group of antibiotics.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 195
The mechanism of acquired resistance in Pseudomonas aeruginosa is different.
Chromosomal mutations result in the increase of a specific outer membrane protein
with a concomitant reduction in divalent cations. Polymyxins bind to the outer membrane
at sites normally occupied by divalent cations, and therefore it is thought that a reduction
in these sites will lead to decreased binding of the antibiotic with a consequent decreased
susceptibility of the cell.
3.5 Multidrug resistance pumps
Some of the previous sections have described the acquisition of low-level resistance to
various antibiotics by alterations in the cell membrane causing decreased uptake of the
drugs. These have normally have characterized as changes in components such as porins
which result in a decrease of penetration by antibiotics.
Acquired low-level resistance to many unrelated antibiotics by efflux has also
increased in prominence in recent years (Cohtnetal. 1993, George 1996). For example,
MAR (multiple antibiotic resistance) mutants were first described in the early 1990s in
E. coli and were resistant to low levels of chloramphenicol, tetracyclines, rifampicin,
penicillins and quinolones, due to impaired uptake of the antibiotics. Increased active
efflux of the drugs has been shown to be important in this type of resistance. These
efflux pumps are normally regulated and inducible in response to external stimuli, and
often mutations causing constitutive expression are responsible for the resistance
phenotype. A number of multidrug resistance pumps (MDRs) have been identified and
are widespread among bacteria. For example, seven distinct MDRs have been described
in E. coli alone. The most common type belongs to a group of proteins involved in
membrane translocation. This type of MDR is closely related to specific efflux proteins
such as that responsible for tetracycline resistance. The origins of MDRs are unknown
but a number of factors suggest that they may have arisen by mutations in specific drug
efflux pumps causing a loss of specificity. These factors include the similarity of some
MDRs to specific drug efflux pumps such as tetracycline, and the high incidence of
apparently independent evolution of MDRs.
3.6 Antibiotics with other resistance mechanisms
3.6.1 Bacitracin
Acquired resistance to bacitracin has been observed in laboratory strains of Staph,
aureus, but resistance has been unstable and no resistant mutants have yet been isolated
in vivo. Gram-negative bacteria are intrinsically resistant to bacitracin, which inhibits
the transfer of pentapeptide units to petidoglycan.
3.6.2 Antimycobacterial drugs
The advent of multidrug resistant strains of Mycobacterium tuberculosis (MDR-TB)
has led to increased fears of untreatable infections by serious pathogens. Rifampicin,
streptomycin and, occasionally, the quinolones are drugs used in the treatment of
mycobacterial infections and resistance to those agents is as described previously. There
196 Chapter 9
are some drugs, important in the antimicrobial treatment of tuberculosis, where resistance
has arisen in MDR-TB strains, but where the mechanisms are unclear. These drugs
include isoniazid, pyrazinamide and ethambutol (Musser 1995).
There are two mechanisms of acquired resistance to isoniazid which have been
proposed. The first suggests that mutations in the katG gene inhibit the metabolism of
isoniazid into an active form which inhibits an essential protein, InhA, in mycobacteria.
The mechanism of action of isoniazid remains theoretical and therefore the mechanism
of resistance also must remain so. Nevertheless, genetic studies with laboratory strains
would tend to support the above. Mutations in the gene inhA can also confer isoniazid
resistance (and to the related drug ethionamide), presumably by reducing affinity of
isoniazid metabolic by-products for InhA. However, clinical strains of M. tuberculosis
resistant to isoniazid but with unknown mechanisms unrelated to katG or inhA have
been isolated.
Pyrazinamide is a structural analogue of isoniazid and is converted to the active
acid derivative intracellularly by a nicotinamidase. Pyrazinamide resistance has been
linked to reduced levels of nicotinamidase but the genetic determinants of resistance
have not been fully elucidated.
Mutations resulting in ethambutol resistance can arise spontaneously. The exact
changes are unknown but may involve enzymes in carbohydrate synthesis pathways.
The problem of antibiotic resistance
Antibiotic resistance is becoming a cause for increasing concern and is the most common
cause of treatment failure in bacterial infectious diseases (Tenover & Hughes 1996;
Tenover & McGowan 1996). Furthermore, infections with antibiotic-resistant bacteria
inevitably lead to the use of more expensive and often more toxic drugs, increased
length of infection and subsequent hospital stay, and, of course, increased costs. It
must be pointed out that at this time, the majority of infections, and particularly those
caused by serious pathogenes, remain susceptible to standard antibiotic treatment.
However, this should not be taken as a signal to relax and ignore the increasing problems
encountered in antimicrobial chemotherapy. The advent of MRS A must serve as a
warning to be heeded. The ability of this important pathogen to spread within, and
between, healthcare institutions is unparalleled, and the consequences to patients in
terms of morbidity and mortality can be severe. The emergence of vancomycin-resistant
enterococci (VRE) has caused great concern in the medical profession. Vancomycin
(or teicoplanin) is often the only antibiotic effective against some MRS A strains.
Acquisition of vancomycin resistance by MRS A would leave, for the first time since
the introduction of antibiotics, a serious pathogen untreatable with any existing antibiotic.
Transfer of vancomycin resistance from VRE to MRS A has already been demonstrated
in the laboratory and it is possible the emergence of clinical strains of vancomycin-
resistant MRS A will be encountered in the not-too-distant future. Some VRE strains
are already resistant to all available antibiotics, but the relatively low virulence of the
organism has meant that infections have been confined to seriously ill patients requiring
lengthy hospitalization. Other multiply antibiotic-resistant bacteria also cause serious
problems in hospitals. These tend to be Gram-negative bacteria, such as E. coli or
Klebsiella spp., but the appearance of these microorganisms tends to be cyclical.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 197
For example, gentamicin-resistant Klebsiella spp. caused problems in numerous UK
hospitals during the 1980s, but their frequency has decreased in the 1990s, with resistance
becoming more problematic in Gram-positive bacteria such as those mentioned above.
The problem is not confined to nosocomial bacteria. Certain community-acquired
pathogens have become resistant to key antibiotics in the 1990s. MDR-TB has already
been mentioned and the prospect of a resurgence of tuberculosis, especially in a drug-
resistant form, is truly frightening. The severity of the infection is particularly acute in
immunocompromised patients, such as those with human immunodeficiency virus
(HIV). MDR-TB made headline news in the US and affluent European countries but
the scale of the problem is several orders of magnitude greater in the developing world.
The ease of long-distance travel means that these problems have to be considered
globally and not in isolation.
Penicillin resistance in Strep, pneumoniae has also emerged in the 1990s. This
microorganism is a community-acquired pathogen causing serious diseases such as
pneumonia and meningitis. Penicillin is a mainstay in the treatment of infections caused
by this bacterium and is often used empirically for urgent treatment when such cases
are suspected. The delay in effective antimicrobial chemotherapy caused by infection
with a penicillin-resistant strain can often be fatal. The resistance rate in the UK is
relatively low, at around 6%, but this represents a significant increase since the 1980s.
In some European countries, resistance rates are as much as 40%.
The ability of bacteria to disseminate and acquire antibiotic resistance genes is
obviously a major cause of the spread of antibiotic resistance, but the factors involved
in the maintenance and evolution of resistance genes must be considered. The single
most important cause is selective pressure from the continuing use of antibiotics. Overuse
and misuse undoubtedly exacerbate the problem. For example, resistance rates in the
UK, which has relatively tight restrictions on the use of antibiotics, are considerably
lower than those in countries with more lenient approaches. The preponderance of
resistant organisms in healthcare institutions must be due to an environment where
exposure to antibiotics is continuous, and therefore hospital-acquired strains would
tend to be more resistant than community-acquired strains. The use of antibiotics in
hospitals is difficult to control since a medical practitioner confronted with an infection
will obviously treat the patient with the best tools at his or her disposal. Nevertheless,
certain measures can be implemented to reduce the unnecessary or misguided use of
antibiotics. These may include local antibiotic treatment policies, consultation with
experts in antimicrobial chemotherapy such as microbiologists or infectious disease
physicians, a local formulary with antibiotics restricted to those considered appropriate
for the local situation, and effective infection control policies. Measures in the
community might include restrictions of antibiotics to prescription-only status, which
is the case in the UK, but often not enforced or regulated as tightly in other countries,
and rational antibiotic prescribing by general practitioners. It is surprising how often
antibiotics are prescribed inappropriately for viral infections such as the common cold
or influenza.
The above addresses only part of the problem. The use of antibiotics is rife in areas
such as animal husbandry, agriculture, aquaculture and even in the oil industry to prevent
spoilage by contaminating microorganisms. A particularly pertinent example is the use
of avoparcin in animal feed for many years. Avoparcin is related to the glycopeptides
vancomycin and teicoplanin used for the treatment of infections in humans. There is
mounting evidence to suggest that enterococci, which are commensals in the gut, have
acquired resistance to avoparcin, and therefore cross-resistance to vancomycin and
teicoplanin, in animals first due to constant exposure to the antibiotic. Transfer of
resistance to human strains has resulted in the emergence of VRE. It seems that the
similarities between avoparcin and the other two glycopeptides was not recognized
initially because of their application in apparently unconnected areas. The prospect of
legislating to avoid such occurrences appears daunting, but attempts must be made
because the consequences may be disastrous.
Conclusions and comments
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics is often achieved by the constitutive possession or
inducibility of drug -inactivating or -modifying enzymes. This problem can, at least to
some extent, be overcome by designing new drugs that:
1 are unsusceptible to this enzyme attack; or
2 will inactivate the enzyme concerned thereby protecting susceptible antibiotics that,
in the absence of the enzyme, would be highly active antibacterially.
Some degree of success has been achieved in both aspects, but the development of new
antibiotics has concentrated on modifications to existing classes of drug rather than
using completely novel compounds. The ability of bacteria to evolve mechanisms to
surmount these derivatives should surprise us no longer, as the emergence of resistance
to all known antibiotics has proved. The variety of resistance mechanisms and their
ease of transfer is likely to overwhelm current attempts at producing 'new' antibiotics
effective against resistant microorganisms. Rational design of novel antibiotics would
require the elucidation of three-dimensional structures of essential bacterial enzymes
with clues as to the important functional domains for potential targets.
Another problem concerns the lack of penetration of many drugs into Gram-negative
bacteria. On the basis of current knowledge, it would seem logical that any design of
new agents should at least consider the need for compounds that can penetrate
the outer membrane of these cells even when there is a decrease in porins. In
this context, the development of peptides with antibacterial activity is worthy of
consideration. These are transported into cells via relatively non-specific permeases.
One such example is alaphosphin which is rapidly accumulated by, and concentrated
within, bacteria, where it is converted to L- 1 -aminoethylphosphonic acid which acts as
an inhibitor of peptidoglycan synthesis. Alaphosphin belongs to a group of compounds,
the phosphonopeptides, which are peptide mimics with C-terminal residues that simulate
natural amino acids. Their mechanism of action results from transport into the bacterial
cell followed by release of the alanine mimetic. These agents were considered as
being an important concept in designing new antibacterially active compounds, but
unfortunately these findings do not appear to have been followed by the development
of any significant new drugs. There is, however, growing interest in other antibacterial
peptides, many of which occur naturally in a wide range of eukaryotic organisms, but
their full potential has yet to be established. Despite extensive research, the design of
clinically effective antimetabolites seems to have been restricted largely to viruses,
with little, if any, research into possible applications to bacteria.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics 199
At the present time we are faced with the real and frightening threat of a post-
antibiotic era in years to come, where our existing antibiotic arsenal will become largely
ineffective against bacterial infections.
References
Bush K., Jacoby G.A. & Medeiros A. (1995) A functional classification scheme for /3-lactamases and
its correlation with molecular structure. Antimicrob Agents Chemother, 39, 1211-1233.
Chopra I., Hawkey P.M. & Hinton M. (1992) Tetracyclines, molecular and clinical aspects. J Antimicrob
Chemother, 29, 245-277.
Cohen S.P., Yan W. & Levy S.B. (1993) A multidrug resistance regulatory locus is widespread among
enteric bacteria. J Infect D is, 168, 484-488.
Davies J. (1994) Inactivation of antibiotics and the dissemination of resistance genes. Science, 264,
375-382.
George A.M. (1996) Multidrug resistance in enteric and other Gram-negative bacteria. FEMS Microbiol
Lett, 139, 1-10.
Georgopapadakou N.H. (1993) Penicillin-binding proteins and bacterial resistance to /Mactams.
Antimicrob Agents Chemother, 37, 2045-2053.
Gilbart J., Perry CR. & Slocombe B. (1993) High-level mupirocin resistance in Staphylococcus aureus:
evidence for two distinct isoleucyl-tRNA synthetases. Antimicrob Agents Chemother, 37, 32-38.
Godfrey A.J. & Bryan L.E. (1984) Intrinsic resistance and whole cell factors contributing to antibiotic
resistance. In: Antimicrobial Drug Resistance (ed. L.E. Bryan), pp. 1 13-145. New York: Academic
Press.
Hooper D.C. & Wolfson J.S. (eds) (1993) Quinolone Antimicrobial Agents. Washington: American
Society for Microbiology.
Huovinen P., Sundstrom L., Swedberg G. & Skold O. (1995) Trimethoprim and sulphonamide resistance.
Antimicrob Agents Chemother, 39, 279-289.
Leclerq R. & Courvalin P. (1991) Bacterial resistance to macrolide, lincosamide and streptogramin
antibiotics by target modification. Antimicrob Agents Chemother, 35, 1267-1272.
Lewis M.J. (1989) The genetics of resistance. In: Antimicrobial Chemotherapy (ed. D. Greenwood),
2nd edn, pp. 146-152. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Musser J.M. (1995) Antimicrobial agent resistance in mycobacteria: molecular genetic insights. Clin
Microbiol Rev, 8, 496-514.
Power E.G.M. & Russell A.D. (1998) Design of antimicrobial chemotherapeutic agents. In Introduction
to Principles of Drug Design (ed. H.J. Smith), 3rd edn, London: Gordon & Breach.
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (eds) (1996) Understanding Antibacterial Action and Resistance. London:
Ellis Horwood.
Sanders C.C. (1992) /^lactamases of Gram-negative bacteria: new challenges for new drugs. Clin
InfectDis, 14, 1089-1099.
Shaw K.J., Rather P.N., Hare R.S. & Miller G.H. (1993) Molecular genetics of aminoglycoside
resistance genes and familial relationships of the aminoglycoside-modifying enzymes. Microbiol
Rev, 57, 138-163.
Tenover EC. & Hughes J.M. (1996) The challenges of emerging infectious diseases. Development and
spread of multiplty resistant bacterial pathogens. J Am Med Assoc, 275, 300-304.
Tenover EC. & McGowan J.E., Jr. (1996) Reasons for the emergence of antibiotic resistance. Am J
MedSd, 311, 9-16.
Woodford N., Johnson A.P., Morrison D. & Speller D.C. (1995) Current perspectives on glycopeptide
resistance. Clin Microbiol Rev, 8, 585-615.
200 Chapter 9
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and
preservatives
1
Introduction
3.3.3
3.4
Formaldehyde-releasing agents
Biguanides
2
Factors affecting choice of
3.4.1
Chlorhexidine and alexidine
antimicrobial agent
3.4.2
Polyhexamethylene biguanides
2.1
Properties of the chemical
agent
3.5
Halogens
2.2
Microbiological challenge
3.5.1
Chlorine
2.2.1
Vegetative bacteria
3.5.2
Hypochlorites
2.2.2
Mycobacterium tuberculosis
3.5.3
Organic chlorine compounds
2.2.3
Bacterial spores
3.5.4
Chloroform
2.2.4
Fungi
3.5.5
Iodine
2.2.5
Viruses
3.5.6
lodophors
2.2.6
Protozoa
3.6
Heavy metals
2.2.7
Prions
3.6.1
Mercurials
2.3
Intended application
3.7
Hydrogen peroxide and peroxygen
2.4
Environmental factors
compounds
2.5
Toxicity of the agent
3.8
3.8.1
Phenols
Phenol (carbolic acid)
3
Types of compound
3.8.2
Tar acids
3.1
Acids and esters
3.8.3
Non-coal tar phenols (chloroxylenol
3.1.1
Benzoic acid
and chlorocresol)
3.1.2
Sorbicacid
3.8.4
Bisphenols
3.1.3
Sulphur dioxide, sulphites
and
3.9
Surface-active agents
metabisulphites
3.9.1
Cationic surface-active agents
3.1.4
Esters of p-hydroxybenzoic
acid
3.10
Other antimicrobials
(parabens)
3.10.1
Diamidines
3.2
Alcohols
3.10.2
Dyes
3.2.1
Alcohols used for disinfecti
on and
3.10.3
Quinoline derivatives
antisepsis
3.11
Antimicrobial combinations
3.2.2
Alcohols as preservatives
3.3
Aldehydes
4
Disinfection policies
3.3.1
Glutaraldehyde
3.3.2
Formaldehyde
5
Further reading
Introduction
Disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives are chemicals which have the ability to
destroy or inhibit the growth of microorganisms and which are used for this purpose.
Disinfectants. Disinfection is the process of removing microorganisms, including
potentially pathogenic ones, from the surfaces of inanimate objects. The British Standards
Institution further defines disinfection as not necessarily killing all microorganisms,
but reducing them to a level acceptable for a defined purpose, for example a level
which is harmful neither to health nor to the quality of perishable goods. Chemical
disinfectants are capable of different levels of action. The term high level disinfection
indicates destruction of all microorganisms but not necessarily bacterial spores;
intermediate level disinfection indicates destruction of all vegetative bacteria including
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 201
Mycobacterium tuberculosis but may exclude some viruses and fungi and have little
or no sporicidal activity; low level disinfection can destroy most vegetative bacteria,
fungi and viruses, but this will not include spores and some of the more resistant
microorganisms. Some high level disinfectants have good sporicidal activity and have
been ascribed the name 'liquid chemical sterilant' or 'chemosterilant' to indicate that
they can effect a complete kill of all microorganisms, as in sterilization.
Antiseptics. Antisepsis is defined as destruction or inhibition of microorganisms on
living tissues having the effect of limiting or preventing the harmful results of infection.
It is not sl synomym for disinfection (British Standards Institution). The chemicals
used are applied to skin and mucous membranes, therefore as well as having adequate
antimicrobial activity, they must not be toxic or irritating for skin. Antiseptics are mostly
used to reduce the microbial population on the skin prior to surgery or on the hands to
help prevent spread of infection by this route. Antiseptics are often lower concentrations
of the agents used for disinfection.
Preservatives. These are included in pharmaceutical preparations to prevent microbial
spoilage of the product and to minimize the risk of the consumer acquiring an infection
when the preparation is administered. Preservatives must be able to limit proliferation
of microorganisms that may be introduced unavoidably during manufacture and use of
non-sterile products such as oral and topical medications. In sterile products such as
eye drops and multidose injections, preservatives should kill any microbial contaminants
introduced inadvertently during use. It is essential that a preservative is not toxic
in relation to the intended route of administration of the preserved preparation.
Preservatives therefore tend to be employed at low concentrations and consequently
levels of antimicrobial action also tend to be of a lower order than for disinfectants or
antiseptics. This is illustrated by the requirements of the British Pharmacopoeia (1993)
for preservative efficacy where a degree of bactericidal activity is necessary, although
this should be obtained within a few hours or over several days of microbial challenge
depending on the type of product to be preserved.
Other terms are considered in Chapter 11 (see section 1.1 and Fig. 11.1).
There are around 250 chemical entities that have been identified as active
components of microbiocidal products in the European Union. The aim of this chapter
is to introduce the range of chemicals in common use and to indicate their activities
and applications.
Factors affecting choice of antimicrobial agent
Choice of the most appropriate antimicrobial compound for a particular purpose depends
on:
1 properties of the chemical agent;
2 microbiological challenge;
3 intended application;
4 environmental factors;
5 toxicity of the agent.
202 Chapter 10
Properties of the chemical agent
The process of killing or inhibiting the growth of microorganisms using an antimicrobial
agent is basically that of a chemical reaction, and the rate and extent of this reaction
will be influenced by the factors of concentration of chemical, temperature, pH and
formulation. The influence of these factors on activity is discussed fully in Chapter 11
and is referred to in discussing the individual agents. Tissue toxicity influences whether
a chemical can be used as an antiseptic or preservative and this unfortunately limits the
range of chemicals for these applications or necessitates the use of lower concentrations
of the chemical.
Microbiological challenge
The types of microorganism present and the levels of microbial contamination (the
bioburden) both have a significant effect on the outcome of chemical treatment. If the
bioburden is high, long exposure times or higher concentrations of antimicrobial may
be required. Microorganisms vary in their sensitivity to the action of chemical agents.
Some organisms, either because of their resistance to disinfection (for further discussion
see Chapter 13) or because of their significance in cross-infection or nosocomial (hospital
acquired) infections, merit attention.
The efficacy of an antimicrobial agent must be investigated by appropriate capacity,
challenge and in-use tests to ensure that a standard is obtained which is appropriate to
the intended use (Chapter 11). In practice, it is not usually possible to know which
organisms are present on the articles being treated. Thus, it is necessary to categorize
chemicals according to their antimicrobial capabilities and for the user to have an
awareness of what level of antimicrobial action is required in a particular situation
(Table 10.1).
Table 10.1 Levels of disinfection attainable
Disinfection level
Low
Intermediate
High
Microorganisms
killed
Microorganisms
surviving
Most vegetative
bacteria
Some viruses
Some fungi
M. tuberculosis
Bacterial spores
HBV and prions
as in Creutzfeldt-
Jakob disease
Most vegetative
bacteria including
M. tuberculosis
Most viruses
including hepatitis
B virus (HBV)
Most fungi
Bacterial spores
Prions
All microorganisms
unless extreme
challenge or
resistance exhibited
Extreme challenge
of resistant bacterial
spores
Prions?
(insufficient data)
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 203
2.2.1 Vegetative bacteria
At in-use concentrations, chemicals used for disinfection should be capable of
killing most vegetative bacteria within a reasonable contact period. This includes
'problem' organisms such as Listeria, Campylobacter, Legionella and methicillin-
resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRS A). Antiseptics and preservatives are also expected
to have a broad spectrum of antimicrobial activity but at the in-use concentrations,
after exerting an initial biocidal effect, their main function may be biostatic. Gram-
negative bacilli, which are the main causes of nosocomial infections, are often more
resistant than Gram-positive species. Pseudomonas aeruginosa, an opportunistic
pathogen (i.e. is pathogenic if the opportunity arises; see also Chapter 1), has gained a
reputation as the most resistant of the Gram-negative organisms. However, problems
mainly arise when a number of additional factors such as heavily soiled articles or
diluted or degraded solutions are involved.
2.2.2 Mycobacterium tuberculosis
Mycobacterium tuberculosis (the tubercle bacillus) and other mycobacteria are resistant
to many bactericides. Resistance is either (a) intrinsic, mainly due to reduced cellular
permeability or (b) acquired, due to mutation or possibly the acquisition of plasmids,
although this has yet to be shown: see also Chapter 13. Tuberculosis remains an important
public health hazard, and indeed the annual number of tuberculosis cases is rising
in many countries. The greatest risk of acquiring infection is from the undiagnosed
patient. Equipment used for respiratory investigations can become contaminated with
mycobacteria if the patient is a carrier of this organism. It is important to be able to
disinfect the equipment to a safe level to prevent transmission of infection to other
patients (Table 10.2). A synergistic mixture of alkyl polyguanides and alkyl quaternaries
has recently been shown to be more effective than glutaraldehyde against M. tuberculosis
and M. avium- intracellular (see also section 3.11).
2.2.3 Bacterial spores
Bacterial spores are the most resistant of all microbial forms to chemical treatment.
The majority of antimicrobial agents have no useful sporicidal action, with the exception
of the aldehydes, halogens and peroxygen compounds. Such chemicals are sometimes
used as an alternative to physical methods for sterilization of heat sensitive equipment.
In these circumstances, correct usage of the agent is of paramount importance
since safety margins are lower in comparison with physical methods of sterilization
(Chapter 20).
The antibacterial activity of disinfectants and antiseptics is summarized in Table
10.2.
2.2.4 Fungi
The vegetative fungal form is often as sensitive as vegetative bacteria to antimicrobial
agents. Fungal spores (conidia and chlamydospores; see Chapter 2) may be more
204 Chapter 10
Table 10.2 Antibacterial activity of commonly used disinfectants and antiseptics
Activity against:
Bacterial
General level*
Class of compound
Mycobacteria spores
of antibacterial activity
Alcohols
Ethanol/isopropyl
+
Intermediate
Aldehydes
Glutaraldehyde
+ +
High
Formaldehyde
+ +
High
Biguanides
Chlorhexidine
-
Intermediate
Halogens
Hypochlorite/
+ +
High
chloramines
lodine/iodophor
+ +
Intermediate, problems
with Ps. aeruginosa
Peroxygens
Peracetic acid
+ +
High
Hydrogen peroxide
+
Intermediate
Phenolics
Clear soluble fluids
+
High
Chloroxylenol
-
Low
Bisphenols
Low, poor against
Ps. aeruginosa
Quaternary ammonium
compounds
Benzalkonium
_
Intermediate
Cetrimide
-
Intermediate
* Activity will depend on concentration, time of contact, temperature, etc. (see Chapter 11) but these
are activities expected if in-use concentrations were being employed.
resistant but this resistance is of much lesser magnitude than for bacterial spores.
The ability to rapidly destroy pathogenic fungi such as the opportunistic yeast,
Candida albicans, and filamentous fungi such as Trichophyton mentagrophytes, and
spores of common spoilage moulds such as Aspergillus niger, is put to advantage in
many applications of use. Many disinfectants have good activity against these fungi
(Table 10.3).
2.2.5
Viruses
Susceptibility of viruses to antimicrobial agents can depend on whether the viruses
possess a lipid envelope. Non-lipid viruses are frequently more resistant to disinfectants
and it is also likely that such viruses cannot be readily categorized with respect to their
sensitivities to antimicrobial agents. These viruses are responsible for many nosocomial
infections, e.g. rotaviruses, picornaviruses and adenoviruses (see Chapter 3), and it
may be necessary to select an antiseptic or disinfectant to suit specific circumstances.
Certain viruses, such as Ebola and Marburg which cause haemorrhagic fevers, are
highly infectious and their safe destruction by disinfectants is of paramount importance.
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 205
Table 10.3 Antifungal activity of disinfectants and antiseptics (adapted from Scott et al. 1986)
Time (imin) to give >99.99% kill*
of
Aspergillus
Trichophyton
Candida
Antimicrobial agent
niger
mentagrophytes
albicans
Phenolic (0.36%)
<2
<2
<2
Chlorhexidine gluconate (0.02%,
<2
<2
<2
alcoholic)
Iodine (1 %, alcoholic)
<2
<2
<2
Povidone-iodine (10%, alcoholic and
10
<2
<2
aqueous)
Hypochlorite (0.2%)
10
<2
5
Cetrimide (1%)
<2
20
<2
Chlorhexidine gluconate (0.05%) +
20
>20
>2
cetrimide (0.5%)
Chlorhexidine gluconate (0.5%, aqueous)
20
>20
>2
* Initial viable counts were ca. 1x10.
There is much concern for the safety of personnel handling articles contaminated
with pathogenic viruses such as hepatitis B virus (HBV) and human immunodeficiency
virus (HIV) which causes acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS). Some
agents have been recommended for disinfection of HBV and HIV depending on the
circumstances and level of contamination; these are listed in Table 10.4. Disinfectants
must be able to treat rapidly and reliably accidental spills of blood, body fluids or
secretions from HIV infected patients. Such spills may contain levels of HIV as high as
10 4 infectious units/ml. Recent evidence from the Medical Devices Agency evaluation
of disinfectants against HIV indicated that few chemicals could destroy the virus in a
Table 10.4 Chemical disinfection of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) and hepatitis B virus (HBV). Adapted from
ACDP (1990) and Anon (1991)
Disinfecting agent
Application
Comment
Chlorine-releasing preparations,
e.g. hypochlorite lOOOOppm av. Cl 2 ,
at least 30min at room temperature
Hypochlorite 1000ppm av. Cl 2
Aldehydes, e.g. glutaraldehyde
2% (w/v), 30m in at room
temperature
Alcohol 70% ethanol, at least 2min
for HIV but evaporation a
problem
Spillage of HIV contaminated
blood and body fluid
Minor contamination of
inanimate surfaces
Reserved for non-corrosive
treatment of delicate items
Limited application
Use fresh solution
Deteriorates on storage and
may be adversely affected
by organic matter
Corrosive to metals
Bleaches fabrics
Must be freshly activated
Not recommended for surface
decontamination due to
vapour toxicity (see Table 10.5)
Use alternative if possible as
activity in presence of protein
questionable
206 Chapter 10
short time in the presence of high serum levels; only two of 13 products (glutaraldehyde
and dichloroisocyanurate) were effective under the most stringent test conditions.
The virucidal activity of chemicals is difficult to determine in the laboratory. Tissue
culture techniques are the most common methods for growing and estimating viruses;
however, antimicrobial agents may also adversely affect the tissue culture: see also
Chapter 11.
2.2.6 Protozoa
Acanthamoeba spp. can cause acanthamoeba keratitis with associated corneal scarring
and loss of vision in soft contact lens wearers. The cysts of this protozoan, in particular,
present a problem in respect of lens disinfection. The chlorine-generating systems in
use are generally inadequate. Although polyhexamethylene biguanide shows promise
as an acanthamoebacide, only hydrogen peroxide-based disinfection is considered
completely reliable and consistent in producing an acanthomoebacidal effect.
2.2.7 Prions
Prions (small proteinaceous infectious particles, also known as unconventional slow
viruses) are a unique class of infectious agent associated with causing spongiform
encephalopathies such as bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE) in cattle and
Creutzfeldt Jakob disease (CJD) in humans. There is considerable concern about the
transmission of these agents from infected animals or patients. Risk of infectivity is
highest in brain and spinal cord tissues. There are still many unknown factors regarding
destruction of prions. It appears that they are resistant to most disinfectant procedures
and that autoclaving or exposure to IN sodium hydroxide is required for decontamination.
However, current advice is to destroy surgical instruments where procedures involve
brain, spinal cord or eye in patients with confirmed or suspected CJD.
2.3 Intended application
The intended application of an antimicrobial agent, whether for preservation, antisepsis
or disinfection, will influence its selection and also affect its performance. For example,
in medicinal preparations the ingredients in the formulation may antagonize preservative
activity. The risk to the patient will depend on whether the antimicrobial is in close
contact with a break in the skin or mucous membranes or is introduced into a sterile
area of the body.
In disinfection of instruments, the chemicals used must not adversely affect the
instruments, e.g. cause corrosion of metals, affect clarity or integrity of lenses, or change
texture of synthetic polymers. Many materials such as fabrics, rubber, plastics are capable
of adsorbing certain disinfectants, e.g. quaternary ammonium compounds (QACs), are
adsorbed by fabrics, while phenolics are adsorbed by rubber, the consequence of this
being a reduction in concentration of active compound. A disinfectant can only exert
its effect if it is in contact with the item being treated. Therefore access to all parts of an
instrument or piece of equipment is essential. For small items, total immersion in the
disinfectant must also be ensured.
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 207
2.4 Environmental factors
Organic matter can have a drastic effect on antimicrobial activity either by adsorption
or chemical inactivation, thus reducing the concentration of active agent in solution or
by acting as a barrier to the penetration of the disinfectant. Blood, body fluids, pus,
milk, food residues or colloidal proteins, even present in small amounts, all reduce the
effectiveness of antimicrobial agents to varying degrees and some are seriously affected.
In their normal habitats, microorganisms have a tendency to adhere to surfaces and
are thus less accessible to the chemical agent. Some organisms are specific to certain
environments and their destruction will be of paramount importance in the selection
of a suitable agent, e.g. Legionella in cooling towers and non-potable water supply
systems, Listeria in the dairy and food industry and hepatitis in blood-contaminated
articles.
Dried organic deposits may inhibit penetration of the chemical agent. Where
possible, objects to be disinfected should be thoroughly cleaned. The presence of ions
in water can also affect activity of antimicrobial agents, thus water for testing biocidal
activity can be made artificially 'hard' by addition of ions.
These factors can have very significant effects on activity and are summarized in
Table 10.5.
2.5 Toxicity of the agent
In choosing an antimicrobial agent for a particular application some consideration must
be given to its toxicity. Increasing concern for health and safety is reflected in the
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations which specify the
precautions required in handling toxic or potentially toxic agents. In respect of
disinfectant use these regulations affect, particularly, the use of phenolics, formaldehyde
and glutaraldehyde. Toxic volatile substances, in general, should be kept in covered
containers to reduce the level of exposure to irritant vapour and they should be used
with an extractor facility. Limits governing the exposure of individuals to such substances
are now listed, e.g. 0.7mg/m (0.2 ppm) glutaraldehyde for both short- and long-term
exposure. The aldehydes, glutaraldehyde less so than formaldehyde, may affect the
eyes and skin (causing contact dermatitis), and may induce respiratory distress. Face
protection and impermeable nitrile rubber gloves should be worn when using these
agents. Table 10.5 lists the toxicity of many of the disinfectants in use and other concerns
of toxicity are described for individual agents below.
Where the atmosphere of a workplace is likely to be contaminated, sampling and
analysis of the atmosphere may need to be carried out on a periodic basis with a frequency
determined by conditions.
Types of compound
The following section presents in alphabetical order by chemical grouping the agents
most often employed for disinfection, antisepsis and preservation. This information is
summarized in Table 10.6.
208 Chapter 10
Table 10.5 Properties of commonly used disinfectants and antiseptics
Effect of
Class of
organic
Toxicity and
compound
matter
pH optimum
OES*
Alcohols
Slight
Avoid broken
Ethanol
skin, eyes
OES: 1000ppm/1900
mgrrr 3 , 8h only
Other factors
Aldehydes
Glutaraldehyde
Biguanides
Chlorhexidine
Chlorine
compounds
Hypochlorite
Iodine
preparations
lodophors
Phenolics
Clear soluble
fluids
Black/white
fluids
Chloroxylenol
QACs
Cetrimide and
benzalkonium
Chloride
Slight
Severe
Severe
Severe
Slight
Moderate/
severe
Severe
Severe
pH8
pH7-8
Acid/neutral
pH
Acid pH
Acid pH
Alkaline pH
Respiratory complaints and
contact dermatitis reported
Eyes, sensitivity
OES: 0.2 ppm/0.7 mg rrr 3 ,
1 Omin only
Avoid contact with eyes and
mucous membranes
Sensitivity may develop
Irritation of skin, eyes and
lungs
OES: 1 ppm/3mgirr 3 ,
10min; 0.5ppm/1 ,5mgm" 3 ,
8h
Eye irritation
OES:0.1ppm/1mg
m~ 3 , 10min only
Protect skin and eyes
Very irritant
Sensitivity. May
irritate skin
OES: 10ppm/38 mgrrr 3 ,
10min; 5ppm/1 9mgnrr 3 , 8h
Avoid contact with eyes
Poor penetration,
good cleansing
properties
Non-corrosive,
useful for heat
sensitive
instruments
Incompatible with
soap and anionic
detergents
Inactivated by hard
water, some
materials and plastic
Corrosive to metals
May corrode
metals
Adsorbed by
rubber/plastic
Greatly reduced by
dilution
Adsorbed by
rubber/plastic
Incompatible with
soap and anionic
detergents
Adsorbed by fabrics
* From the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (1988).
OES, occupational exposure standard; QAC, quaternary ammonium compound.
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 209
Table 10.6 Examples of the main antimicrobial groups as antiseptics, disinfectants and preservatives
Antiseptic activity
Disinfectant Activity
Preservative activity
Antimicrobial agent
Concentration
Typical formulation/
application
Concentration
Typical formulation/
application
Concentration
Typical formulation/
application
Acids and esters.
e.g. benzoic acid,
parabens
Alcohols,
e.g. ethyl or isopropyl
Aldehydes,
e.g. glutaraldehyde
Biguanides,
e.g. chlorhexidinef
(gluconate, acetate etc)
Chlorine,
e.g. hypoclorite
Hydrogen peroxide
50-90%
in water
10%
Skin prep.
Gel for warts
50-90%
in water
2.0%
0.02%
Bladder irrigation
0.05%
0.2%
Mouthwash
0.5% (in
70%
Skin prep.
alcohol)
0.5% (in 70%
1 .0%
Dusting powder,
cream dental gel
alcohol)
4.0%
Pre-op. scrub in
surfactant
<0.5%
Solution for skin and
1 -1 0%
avCI 2
wounds
1 .5%
Stabilized cream
3.0%
3-6%
Solution for wounds
Clean surface prep.,
thermometers
Solution for instruments
Storage of instruments,
clean instrument
disinfection (30min)
Emergency instrument
disinfection (2min)
Solution for surfaces and
instruments
Disinfection of soft contact
lenses
0.05-0.1%
0.25%
0.0025%
0.01%
For oral and topical
formulations
Solution for hard
contact lenses
Eye-drops
and ulcers, mouthwash
Iodine compounds,
e.g. free iodine,
povidone-iodine
Phenolics,
e.g. tar acids (clear
soluble phenolics),
non-coal tar
(chloroxylenol),
bisphenol (triclosan)
QACs,
e.g. cetyltrimethyl
ammonium
bromide (cetrimide)
1 .0%
Aqueous or alcoholic
(70%) solution
1 .0%
Mouthwash
2.5%
Dry powder spray
7.5%
Scalp and skin
cleanser
10%
Pre-op. scrub, fabric
dressing
0.5%
Dusting powder
1 .3%
Solution
2.0%
Skin cleanser
10.0%
Aqueous or ale. solution
1 -2%
0.1%
Solution for wounds
and burns
0.1%
0.5%
Cream
1 .0%
1 .0%
Skin solution
Solution
Storage or sterile
instruments
Instruments (1 h)
0.01%
Eye-drops
* Also used in combination with other agents e.g. chlorhexidine, iodine,
t Several forms available having x% chlorhexidine and 10x% cetrimide.
QAC, quaternary ammonium compound.
3.1 Acids and esters
Antimicrobial activity, within a pharmaceutical context, is generally found only in the
organic acids. These are weak acids and will therefore dissociate incompletely to give
the three entities HA, H + and A" in solution. As the undissociated form, HA, is the
active antimicrobial agent, the ionization constant, K a , is important and the pK a of the
acid must be considered especially in formulation of the agent.
3.1.1 Benzoic acid
This is an organic acid, C6H5COOH, which is included, alone or in combination with
other preservatives, in many pharmaceuticals. Although the compound is often used as
the sodium salt, the non-ionized acid is the active substance. A limitation on its use is
imposed by the pH of the final product as the pK a of benzoic acid is 4.2 at which pH
50% of the acid is ionized. It is advisable to limit use of the acid to preservation of
pharmaceuticals having a maximum final pH of 5.0 and if possible less than 4.0.
Concentrations of 0.05-0.1 % are suitable for oral preparations. A disadvantage of the
compound is the development of resistance by some organisms, involving in some
cases metabolism of the acid resulting in complete loss of activity. Benzoic acid also
has some use in combination with other agents, salicylic acid among others, in the
treatment of superficial fungal infections.
3.1.2 Sorbic acid
This compound is a widely used preservative as the acid or its potassium salt. The pK a
is 4.8 and, as with benzoic acid, activity decreases with increasing pH and ionization.
It is most effective at pH 4 or below. Pharmaceutical products such as gums, mucilages
and syrups are usefully preserved with this agent.
3.1.3 Sulphur dioxide, sulphites and metabisulphites
Sulphur dioxide has extensive use as a preservative in the food and beverage industries.
In a pharmaceutical context, sodium sulphite and metabisulphite or bisulphite have a
dual role acting as preservatives and antioxidants.
3.1.4 Esters of p -hydroxy benzoic acid (parabens)
A series of alkyl esters (Fig. 10.1) of/?(4)-hydroxybenzoic acid was originally prepared
to overcome the marked pH-dependence on activity of the acids.
These parabens, the methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl esters, are less readily ionized
having pK a values in the range 8-8.5 and exhibit good preservative activity even at pH
COQ A pig 10.I p-Hydroxybenzoates (R is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl
or benzyl).
212 Chapter 10
levels of 7-8, although optimum activity is again displayed in acidic solutions. This
broader pH range allows extensive and successful use of the parabens as pharmaceutical
preservatives. The agents are active against a wide range of fungi but are less active
against bacteria, especially the pseudomonads which may utilize the parabens as a
carbon source. They are frequently used as preservatives of emulsions, creams and
lotions where two phases exist. Combinations of esters are most successful for this
type of product in that the more water-soluble methyl ester (0.25%) protects the aqueous
phase whereas the propyl or butyl esters (0.02%) give protection to the oil phase. Such
combinations are also considered to extend the range of activity. As inactivation of
parabens occurs with non-ionic surfactants, due care should be taken in formulation
of these.
3.2 Alcohols
3.2.1 Alcohols used for disinfection and antisepsis
The aliphatic alcohols, notably ethanol and isopropanol, which are used for disinfection
and antisepsis, are bactericidal against vegetative forms, including Mycobacterium spp.,
but are not sporicidal. Alcohols have poor penetration of organic matter and their use is
therefore restricted to clean conditions. They possess properties such as a cleansing
action and volatility, are able to achieve a rapid and large reduction in skin flora and
have been widely used for skin preparation prior to injection or other surgical procedures.
However, the contact time of an alcohol-soaked swab with the skin prior to venepuncture
is so brief that it is thought to be of doubtful value.
Ethanol (CH3CH2OH) is widely used as a disinfectant and antiseptic. The presence
of water is essential for activity, hence 100% ethanol is ineffective. Concentrations
between 60 and 95% are bactericidal but a 70% solution is usually employed for the
disinfection of skin, clean instruments or surfaces. At higher concentrations, e.g. 90%,
ethanol is also active against most viruses, including HIV. Ethanol is also a popular
choice in pharmaceutical preparations and cosmetic products as a solvent and
preservative.
Isopropyl alcohol (isopropanol, CH3CHOH.CH3) has slightly greater bactericidal
activity than that of ethanol but is also about twice as toxic. It is less active against
viruses, particularly non-enveloped viruses, and should be considered a limited-spectrum
virucide. Used at concentrations of 60-70%, it is an acceptable alternative to ethanol
for preoperative skin treatment and is also employed as a preservative for cosmetics.
3.2.2 Alcohols as preservatives
The aralkyl alcohols and more highly substituted aliphatic alcohols (Fig. 10.2) are
used mostly as preservatives. These include:
1 Benzyl alcohol (C6H5CH2OH). This has antibacterial and weak local anaesthetic
properties and is used as an antimicrobial preservative at a concentration of 2%, although
its use in cosmetics is restricted.
2 Chlorbutol (trichlorobutanol; trichloro-r-butanol; trichlorobutanol). Typical in-use
concentration: 0.5%. It has been used as a preservative in injections and eyedrops. It is
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 213
B
CH z .CH 2 0H // y— O.CH z .CH 3 0H
C D
CI CH a Br
I I I
Cr— C— C— OH.^HjO HOHjC— C— CH 2 0H
J t I
CI CHj NO a
Fig. 10.2 Structural formulae of alcohols used in preserving and disinfection: A, 2-phenylethanol;
B, 2-phenoxyethanol; C, chlorbutol (trichlonw-butanol); D, Bronopol (2-bromo-2-nitropropan-l,3-
diol).
unstable, decomposition occurring at acid pH during autoclaving, while alkaline
solutions are unstable at room temperature.
3 Phenylethanol (phenylethy 1 alcohol; 2-phenylethanol). Typical in-use concentration:
0.25-0.5%. It is reported to have greater activity against Gram-negative organisms and
is usually employed in conjunction with another agent.
4 Phenoxyethanol (2-phenoxyethanol). Typical in-use concentration: 1%. It is more
active against Ps. aeruginosa than against other bacteria and is usually combined
with other preservatives such as the hydroxybenzoates to broaden the spectrum of
antimicrobial activity.
5 Bronopol (2-bromo-2-nitropropano-l,3-diol). Typical in-use concentration: 0.01-
0.1%. It has a broad spectrum of antibacterial activity, including activity against
Pseudomonas spp. The main limitation on the use of bronopol is that when exposed to
light at alkaline pH, especially if accompanied by an increase in temperature, solutions
decompose, turning yellow or brown. A number of decomposition products including
formaldehyde are produced. In addition, nitrite ions may be produced and react with
any secondary and tertiary amines present forming nitrosamines, which are potentially
carcinogenic.
Aldehydes
A number of aldehydes possess antimicrobial properties, including sporicidal activity;
however, only two, formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, are used for disinfection. Both
these aldehydes are highly effective biocides and their use as 'chemosterilants' reflect
this.
Glutaraldehyde
Glutaraldehyde (CHO(CH2)3CHO) has abroad spectrum of antimicrobial activity and
rapid rate of kill, most vegetative bacteria being killed within a minute of exposure,
although bacterial spores may require 3 hours or more. The latter depends on the
intrinsic resistance of spores which may vary widely. It has the further advantage
of not being affected significantly by organic matter. The glutaraldehyde molecule
214 Chapter 10
possesses two aldehyde groupings which are highly reactive and their presence is an
important component of biocidal activity. The monomelic molecule is in equilibrium
with polymeric forms, and the physical conditions of temperature and pH have a
significant effect on this equilibrium. At a pH of 8, biocidal activity is greatest but
stability is poor due to polymerization. By contrast, acid solutions are stable but
considerably less active, although as temperature is increased, there is a breakdown in
the polymeric forms which exist in acid solutions and a concomitant increase in free
active dialdehyde, resulting in better activity. In practice, glutaraldehyde is generally
supplied as an acidic 2% aqueous solution, which is stable on prolonged storage. This
is then 'activated' prior to use by addition of a suitable alkylating agent to bring the pH
of the solution to its optimum for activity. The activated solution will have a limited
shelf-life, in the order of 2 weeks, although more stable formulations are available.
Glutaraldehyde is employed mainly for the cold, liquid chemical sterilization of medical
and surgical materials that cannot be sterilized by other methods. Endoscopes, including
for example, arthroscopes, laparoscopes, cystoscopes and bronchoscopes may be
decontaminated by glutaraldehyde treatment. Contact times employed in practice for
high level disinfection are often considerably less than the many hours recommended
by manufacturers to achieve sterilization. The British Association of Urological Surgeons
recommends that cystoscopes be routinely immersed for at least 10 minutes but that
this should be increased to 1 hour if mycobacterial infection is known or suspected.
Similarly, the British Thoracic Society recommends immersion of bronchoscopes for
20 minutes between immunocompetent patients one hour with immunocompromised
patients to avoid opportunistic mycobacteria. Whilst M. tuberculosis is successfully
eliminated from instruments after 1 hour with 2% glutaraldehyde, M. avium-intracellulare
strains take much longer to inactivate as they are as much as 12 times more resistant to
glutaraldehyde than M. tuberculosis. Gastroscopes from HIV-positive patients are
required by the British Society of Gastroenterology to be immersed in 2% glutaraldehyde
for 1 hour.
3.3.2 Formaldehyde
Formaldehyde (HCHO) can be used in either the liquid or gaseous state for disinfection
purposes. In the vapour phase it has been used for decontamination of safety cabinets
and rooms; however, recent trends have been to combine formaldehyde vapour with
low temperature steam (LTSF) for the sterilization of heat-sensitive items (Chapter
20). Formaldehyde vapour is highly toxic and potentially carcinogenic if inhaled,
thus its use must be carefully controlled. It is not very active at temperatures below
20°C and requires a relative humidity of at least 70%. The agent is not supplied as a
gas but as either a solid polymer, paraformaldehyde, or a liquid, formalin, which is a
34-38% aqueous solution. The gas is liberated by heating or mixing the solid or
liquid with potassium permanganate and water. Formalin, diluted 1:10 to give 4%
formaldehyde, may be used for disinfecting surfaces. In general, however, solutions of
either aqueous or alcoholic formaldehyde are too irritant for routine application to
skin, while poor penetration and a tendency to polymerize on surfaces limit its use as a
disinfectant.
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 215
3.3.3 Formaldehyde-releasing agents
Various formaldehyde condensates have been developed to reduce the irritancy
associated with formaldehyde while maintaining activity and these are described as
formaldehyde-releasing agents or masked-formaldehyde compounds.
Of these, noxythiolin (N-hydroxy-Af-methylthiourea) has the greatest pharmaceutical
use as an antimicrobial agent. The compound is supplied as a dry powder and on aqueous
reconstitution slowly releases formaldehyde and iV-mefhylthiourea. Antimicrobial
activity is considered to be due to both the noxythiolin molecule and the released
formaldehyde. Noxythiolin is used both topically and in accessible body cavities as an
irrigation solution and in the treatment of peritonitis. The compound has extensive
antibacterial and antifungal properties.
Polynoxylin (poly[methylenedi(hydroxymethyl)urea]) is a similar compound
available in gel and lozenge formulations.
Taurolidine (bis-[l,l-dioxoperhydro-l,2,4-thiadiazinyl-4] methane) is a condensate
of two molecules of the amino acid taurine and three molecules of formaldehyde. It is
more stable than noxythiolin in solution and has similar uses. The activity of taurolidine
is stated to be greater than that of formaldehyde.
3.4 Biguanides
3.4.1 Chlorhexidine and alexidine
Chlorhexidine is an antimicrobial agent first synthesized at Imperial Chemical
Industries in 1954 in a research program to produce compounds related to the biguanide
antimalarial, proguanil. Compounds containing the biguanide structure could be
expected to have good antibacterial effect; thus, the major part of the proguanil structure
is found in chlorhexidine. The chlorhexidine molecule, a bisbiguanide, is symmetric. A
hexamethylene chain links two biguanide groups to each of which a p-chlorophenyl
radical is bound (Fig. 10.3). A related compound is the bisbiguanide alexidine which
has use as an oral antiseptic and antiplaque agent. Alexidine (Fig. 10.3 A) differs from
chlorhexidine (Fig. 10.3B) in that it possesses ethylhexyl end- groups.
H H H H H H
1 I I
R — N — C — N — C — N — (CHjL — N — C — N — C — N — R
II II II |
NH WH NH NH
r\
R = CHj — CH — tCH^ — CH a H -
Fig. 10.3 Bisbiguanides: A, alexidine; B, chlorhexidine.
216 Chapter 10
Chlorhexidine base is not readily soluble in water therefore the freely soluble salts,
acetate, gluconate and hydrochloride, are used in formulation. Chlorhexidine exhibits
the greatest antibacterial activity at pH 7-8 where it exists exclusively as a di-cation.
The cationic nature of the compound results in activity being reduced by anionic
compounds including soap and many anions due to the formation of insoluble salts.
Anions to be wary of include bicarbonate, borate, carbonate, chloride, citrate and
phosphate with due attention being paid to the presence of hard water. Deionized or
distilled water should preferably be used for dilution purposes. Reduction in activity
will also occur in the presence of blood, pus and other organic matter.
Chlorhexidine has widespread use, in particular as an antiseptic. It has significant
antibacterial activity though Gram-negative bacteria are less sensitive than Gram-
positive. A concentration of 1:2000000 prevents growth of, for example, Staph, aureus
whereas a 1:50000 dilution prevents growth of Ps. aeruginosa. Reports of pseudomonad
contamination of aqueous chlorhexidine solutions have prompted the inclusion of small
amounts of ethanol or isopropanol. Chlorhexidine is ineffective at ambient temperatures
against bacterial spores and M. tuberculosis. A limited antifungal activity has been
demonstrated which unfortunately restricts its use as a general preservative. Skin
sensitivity has occasionally been reported, although, in general, chlorhexidine is well
tolerated and non-toxic when applied to skin or mucous membranes and is an important
preoperative antiseptic.
3.4.2 Polyhexamethylene biguanides
The antimicrobial activity of chlorhexidine, a bisbiguanide, exceeds that ofmonomeric
biguanides. This has stimulated the development of polymeric biguanides containing
repeating biguanide groups linked by hexamethylene chains. One such compound is a
commercially available heterodisperse mixture of polyhexamethylene biguanides
(PHMB, polyhexanide) having the general formula shown in Fig. 10.4, where n varies
with a mean value of 5.5. The compound has a broad spectrum of activity against
Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria and has low toxicity. PHMB is employed
as an antimicrobial agent in various ophthalmic products.
— (OVu — NH— C — NH — C — NH — |CHj) 3
NH NKHCI
Fir. 10.4 PcLyticiairuechyleite biguanide (PHMB J.
_ n
3.5 Halogens
Chlorine and iodine have been used extensively since their introduction as disinfecting
agents in the early 19th century. Preparations containing these halogens such as Dakin's
solution and tincture of iodine were early inclusions in many pharmacopoeiae and
national formularies. More recent formulations of these elemens have improved activity,
stability and ease of use.
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 217
3.5.1 Chlorine
A large number of antimicrobially active chlorine compounds are commercially
available, one of the most important being liquid chlorine. This is supplied as an amber
liquid by compressing and cooling gaseous chlorine. The terms liquid and gaseous
chlorine refer to elemental chlorine whereas the word 'chlorine' is normally used to
signify a mixture of OC1-, CI2, HOC1 and other active chlorine compounds in aqueous
solution. The potency of chlorine disinfectants is usually expressed in terms of parts
per million (ppm) or percentage of available chlorine (avCl).
3.5.2 Hypochlorites
Hypochlorites are the oldest and remain the most useful of the chlorine disinfectants
being readily available and inexpensive. They exhibit a rapid kill against a wide spectrum
of microorganisms including fungi and viruses. High levels of available chlorine will
enable eradication of acid-fast bacilli and bacterial spores. The compounds are
compatible with most anionic and cationic surface-active agents and are relatively
inexpensive to use. To their disadvantage they are corrosive, suffer inactivation by
organic matter and can become unstable. Hypochlorites are available as powders or
liquids, most frequently as the sodium or potassium salts of hypochlorous acid (HOC1).
Sodium hypochlorite exists in solution as follows:
NaOCl + H 2 A HOC1 + NaOH
Undissociated hypochlorous acid is a strong oxidizing agent and its potent
antimicrobial activity is dependent on pH as shown:
HOCl A H + + OC1-
At low pH the existence of HOC 1 is favoured over OC1" (hypochlorite ion). The
relative microbiocidal effectiveness of these forms is of the order of 100: 1 . By lowering
the pH of hypochlorite solutions the antimicrobial activity increases to an optimum at
about pH 5; however, this is concurrent with a decrease in stability of the solutions.
This problem may be alleviated by addition of NaOH (see above equation) in order to
maintain a high pH during storage for stability. The absence of buffer allows the pH to
be lowered sufficiently for activity on dilution to use- strength. It is preferable to prepare
use-dilutions of hypochlorite on a daily basis.
3.5.3 Organic chlorine compounds
A number of organic chlorine, or chloramine, compounds are now available for
disinfection and antisepsis. These are the N-chloro (=N-C1) derivatives of, for example,
sulphonamides giving compounds such as chloramine-T and dichloramine-T and
halazone (Fig. 10.5), which may be used for the disinfection of contaminated drinking
water.
A second group of compounds, formed by N-chloro derivatization of heterocyclic
compounds containing a nitrogen in the ring, includes the sodium and potassium salts
of dichloroisocyanuric acid (e.g. NaDCC). These are available in granule or tablet
218 Chapter 10
HOOC ( \ />— SO*. N CI:
^ *■* Fit IUlS Haluumc.
form and, in contrast to hypochlorite, are very stable on storage, if protected from
moisture. In water they will give a known chlorine concentration. The antimicrobial
activity of the compounds is similar to that of the hypochlorites when acidic conditions
of use are maintained. It is, however, important to note that where inadequate ventilation
exists, care must be taken not to apply the compound to acidic fluids or large spills of
urine in view of the toxic effects of chlorine production. The Health and Safety Executive
(HSE) has set the occupational exposure standard (OES) short-term exposure limit at
1 ppm (see section 2.5 also).
3.5.4 Chloroform
Chloroform (CHC1 3 ) has a narrow spectrum of activity. It has been used extensively as
a preservative in pharmaceuticals since the last century though recently has had
limitations placed on its use. Marked reductions in concentration may occur through
volatilization from products resulting in the possibility of microbial growth.
3.5.5 Iodine
Iodine has a wide spectrum of antimicrobial activity. Gram-negative and Gram-positive
organisms, bacterial spores (on extended exposure), mycobacteria, fungi and viruses
are all susceptible. The active agent is the elemental iodine molecule, I2. As elemental
iodine is only slightly soluble in water, iodide ions are required for aqueous solutions
such as aqueous iodine solution, BP 1988 (Lugol's Solution) containing 5% iodine in
10% potassium iodide solution. Iodine (2.5%) may also be dissolved in ethanol (90%)
and potassium iodide (2.5%) solution to give weak iodine solution, BP 1988 (Iodine
Tincture).
The antimicrobial activity of iodine is less dependent than chlorine on temperature
and pH, though alkaline pH should be avoided. Iodine is also less susceptible to
inactivation by organic matter. Disadvantages in the use of iodine in skin antisepsis are
staining of skin and fabrics coupled with possible sensitizing of skin and mucous
membranes.
3.5.6 Iodophors
In the 1950s iodophors (iodo meaning iodine and phor meaning carrier) were developed
to eliminate the side-effects of iodine while retaining its antimicrobial activity. These
allowed slow release of iodine on demand from the complex formed. Essentially, four
generic compounds may be used as the carrier molecule or complexing agent. These
give polyoxymer iodophors (i.e. with propylene or ethyene oxide polymers), cationic
(quaternary ammonium) surfactant iodophors, non-ionic (ethoxylated) surfactant
iodophors and polyvinylpyrrolidone iodophors (PVP-I or povidone-iodine). The
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 219
non-ionic or cationic surface-active agents act as solubilizers and carriers, combining
detergency with antimicrobial activity. The former type of surfactant especially, produces
a stable, efficient formulation the activity of which is further enhanced by the addition
of phosphoric or citric acid to give a pH below 5 on use-dilution. The iodine is present
in the form of micellar aggregates which disperse on dilution, especially below the
critical micelle concentration (cmc) of the surfactant, to liberate free iodine.
When iodine and povidone are combined, a chemical reaction takes place forming
a complex between the two entities. Some of the iodine becomes organically linked to
povidone though the major portion of the complexed iodine is in the form of tri-iodide.
Dilution of this iodophor results in a weakening of the iodine linkage to the carrier
polymer with concomitant increases in elemental iodine in solution and antimicrobial
activity.
The amount of free iodine the solution can generate is termed the 'available iodine'.
This acts as a reservoir for active iodine releasing it when required and therefore largely
avoiding the harmful side-effects of high iodine concentration. Consequently, when
used for antisepsis, iodophors should be allowed to remain on the skin for 2 minutes to
obtain full advantage of the sustained-release iodine.
Cadexomer-I 2 is an iodophor similar to povidone-iodine. It is a 2-hydroxymethylene
crosslinked (1-4) a-D-glucan carboxymethyl ether containing iodine. The compound
is used especially for its absorbent and antiseptic properties in the management of leg
ulcers and pressure sores where it is applied in the form of microbeads containing
0.9% iodine.
3.6 Heavy metals
Mercury and silver have long been known to have antibacterial properties and
preparations of these metals were among the earliest used antiseptics, but have been
replaced by less toxic compounds. Other metals such as zinc, copper, aluminium and
tin have weak antibacterial properties but are used in medicine for other functions, e.g.
aluminium acetate and zinc sulphate are employed as astringents.
3.6.1 Mercurials
The organomercurial derivatives which are still in use in pharmacy are thiomersal and
phenlymercuric nitrate or acetate (PMN or PMA) (Fig. 10.6).
Thiomersal is employed as a preservative for eye-drops and in lower concentration,
0.001-0.004%, as a preservative for contact lens solutions. The phenylmercuric salts
(0.002%) are also used for preservation of eye-drops but long-term use has led to
B
COQNe ^^. >lgGOCCH 3
Fig. 10.6 Some- ijiganomCTDuriaJs:
A, rtiiome»a] (sodium
^^ JJ ethyl iiwcunftiOMliLyUujeh fl,
S Kg Cy H & phenyl mercuric aceuji.
220 Chapter 10
keratopathy and they are not recommended for prolonged use. Use of both mercurials
has declined considerably due to risk of hypersensitivity and local irritation. They are
absorbed from solution by rubber closures and plastic containers to a significant extent.
Hydrogen peroxide and peroxygen compounds
The germicidal properties of hydrogen peroxide (H 2 2 ) have been known for more
than a century, but use of low concentrations of unstable solutions did little for its
reputation. However, stabilized solutions are now available and due to its unusual
properties and antimicrobial activity, hydrogen peroxide has a valuable role for specific
applications. It is used as an antiseptic for open wounds and ulcers where it provides
additional cleansing due to its oxidation of organic debris. Its activity against the
protozoa, Acanthamoeba, which can cause keratitis in contact lens wearers, has made
it popular for disinfection of soft contact lenses. Concentrations of 3-6% are effective
for general disinfection purposes. At high concentrations (up to 30%) and increased
temperature hydrogen peroxide is sporicidal. Use has been made of this in vapour-
phase hydrogen peroxide decontamination of laboratory equipment and enclosed spaces.
Peracetic acid (CH3COOOH) is the peroxide of acetic acid and is a more potent
biocide than hydrogen peroxide, with excellent rapid biocidal activity against bacteria,
including mycobacteria, fungi, viruses and spores. It can be used in both the liquid and
vapour phases and is active in the presence of organic matter. It is finding increasing
use at concentrations of 0.2-0.35% as a chemosterilant of medical equipment. Its
disadvantages are that it is corrosive to some metals. It is also highly irritant and must
be used in an enclosed system.
Of the other peroxygen compounds with antimicrobial activity, potassium
monoperoxysulphate is the main product marketed for disinfectant use. It is used for
body fluid spillages and equipment contaminated with body fluids, but its activity against
mycobacteria and some viruses is limited.
Phenols
Phenols (Fig. 10.7) are widely used as disinfectants and preservatives. The phenolics
for disinfectant use have good antimicrobial activity and are rapidly bactericidal but
generally are not sporicidal. Their activity is markedly diminished by dilution and is
also reduced by organic matter. They are more active at acid pH. The main disadvantages
of phenols are their caustic effect on skin and tissues and their systemic toxicity. The
more highly substituted phenols are less toxic and can be used as preservatives and
antiseptics; however, they are also less active than the simple phenolics, especially
against Gram-negative organisms.
Phenol (carbolic acid)
Phenol no longer plays any significant role as an antibacterial agent. It is of historical
interest, since it was introduced by Lister in 1867 as an antiseptic and has been used as
a standard for comparison with other disinfectants, which are then given a phenol
coefficient in tests such as the Rideal-Walker test.
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 221
Phenol
Xylftnpl-g
Ethylphienpla
B
Butvlphenols
Ri.a.a.-q Propyl phenols
Diethyl phenols
C 2 H 5
2-methvl r 3-etnyl pheno I
fl 1 R a R 3 R*
■p2H 6 CjHfc
rw Trlmerthylphgnplfr CH3 CH 3 CHj
Tetremgtliylph^riols CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
INapfithols
Methyl r wo rci no Is Methyl i nda n ols
D
OH
HO
CI
CH 3 H 3 C
CI
Chloiocreaol Chloroxylenol
[4-qhlorD-3-nieth y I ph &no I \ [4-chln ro-3, 5-
dlinathylphftnol)
^iy-c„,^Q
CI
Haxachlorophane
1di-(3 r 5, 6-Trichloro-2-
liydr&Ky phenol} m&thane)
Fig. 10.7 Structural formulae of phenolic disinfectants: A, clear soluble fluids; B, black and white
fluids; C, chlorinated phenols; D, bisphenols.
3.8.2 Tar acids
Many of the phenols which are used in household and other commercial disinfectant
products are produced from the tar obtained by distillation of coal or more recently
petroleum. They are known as the tar acids. These phenols are separated by fractional
distillation according to their boiling point range into phenol, cresols, xylenols and
high boiling point tar acids. As the boiling point increases the properties of the products
alter as shown:
Phenols Boiling point increases
Cresols Bactericidal activity increases
Xylenols Inactivation by organic matter increases
High boiling point Water solubility decreases
Tar acids Tissue toxicity decreases
The phenols from the higher boiling point fractions have greater antimicrobial activity
but must be formulated so as to overcome their poor solubility. A range of solubilized
and emulsified phenolic disinfectants are available including the clear soluble fluids,
black fluids and white fluids.
Clear soluble fluids. Cresol is a mixture of o-, m- and p-methyl phenol (Fig.
10.7 A). Because of its poor solubility, it is solubilized with a soap prepared from
linseed oil and potassium hydroxide. It forms a clear solution on dilution. This
preparation, known as Lysol (Cresol and Soap Solution BP 1968) has been widely
used as a general purpose disinfectant but has largely been superseded by less irritant
phenolics.
By using a higher boiling point fraction than cresols, consisting of xylenols and
ethylphenols (Fig. 10.7 A), a more active, less corrosive product which retains activity
in the presence of organic matter, is obtained. It is also solubilized with a soap to
give a clear soluble fluid. A variety of proprietary products for general disinfection
purposes are available with these phenols as active ingredients. They possess rapid
bactericidal activity, including mycobacteria, providing a major use for the terminal
disinfection of rooms occupied by patients with open tuberculosis. Similarly, further
use is made of these compounds for spills of faeces containing pathogens such as
salmonellae and shigellae and for controlling outbreaks of methicillin-resistant Staph,
aureus (MRSA).
Black fluids and white fluids. Black fluids and white fluids are prepared by solubilizing
the high boiling point tar acids (Fig. 10.7B). Black fluids are homogenous solutions,
which form an emulsion on dilution with water. White fluids are finely dispersed
emulsions of tar acids, which on dilution with water produce more stable emulsions
than do black fluids. Both types of fluid have good bactericidal activity. Preparations
are very irritant and corrosive to the skin and are strong smelling; however, they are
relatively inexpensive and are useful for household and general disinfection purposes.
They must be used in adequate concentrations as activity is reduced by organic matter
and is markedly affected by dilution.
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 223
3.8.3 Non-coal tar phenols (chloroxylenol and chlorocresol)
Many derivatives of phenol are now made by a synthetic process. Homologous series
of substituted derivatives have been prepared and tested for antimicrobial activity. A
combination of alkyl substitution and halogenation has produced useful derivatives
including clorinated phenols which are constituents of a number of proprietary
disinfectants. Two of the most widely used derivatives are/?-chloro-m-cresol (4-chloro-
3-methylphenol, chlorocresol, Fig. 10. 7C) which is mostly employed as a preservative
at a concentration of 0.1%, and /?-chloro-m-xylenol (4-chloro-3,5-dimethylphenol,
chloroxylenol, Fig. 10. 7C) which is used for skin disinfection, although less than
formerly. Chloroxylenol is sparingly soluble in water and must be solubihzed, for
example in a suitable soap solution in conjunction with terpineol or pine oil. Its
antimicrobial capacity is weak and is reduced by the presence of organic matter.
3.8.4 Bisphenols
Bisphenols are composed of two phenolic groups connected by various linkages.
Hydroxy halogenated derivatives, such as hexachlorophane (Fig. 10. 7D) and triclosan,
are the most active microbiologically, but are bacteriostatic at use-concentrations and
have little antipseudomonal activity. The use of hexachlorophane is also limited by its
serious toxicity. Both hexachlorophane and trichlosan have limited application in
medicated soaps and washing creams.
3.9 Surface-active agents
Surface-active agents or surfactants are classified as anionic, cationic, non-ionic or
ampholytic according to the ionization of the hydrophilic group in the molecule. A
hydrophobic, water-repellent group is also present. Within the various classes a range
of detergent and disinfectant activity is found. The anionic and non-ionic surface- active
agents, for example, have strong detergent properties but exhibit little or no antimicrobial
activity. They can, however, render certain bacterial species more sensitive to some
antimicrobial agents, possibly by altering the permeability of the outer envelope.
Ampholytic or amphoteric agents can ionize to give anionic, cationic and zwiterionic
(positively and negatively charged ions in the same molecule) activity. Consequently,
they display both the detergent properties of the anionic surface-active agents and the
antimicrobial activity of the cationic agents. They are used quite extensively in Europe
for pre-surgical hand scrubbing, medical instrument disinfection and floor disinfection
in hospitals.
Of the four classes of surface-active agents, however, the cationic compounds
arguably play the most important role in an antimicrobial context.
3.9.1 Cationic surface-active agents
The cationic agents used for their antimicrobial activity all fall within the group known
as the quaternary ammonium compounds which are variously described as QACs, quats
or onium ions. These are organically substituted ammonium compounds as shown in
224 Chapter 10
5
-li-
ft- 1 -
R 1
l!l-H 2
CH 3
N^C n Hj n+1 CI
CH,
CH 3
CH 3 -N + -C n H 2fl ^ Br
CH a
-HCHsJis — CH a Cl H a
Fig. 10.8 Quaternary ammonium compounds (QACs): A, general structure of QACs; B,
benzalkonium chloride (n - 8 - 18); C, cetrimide (n - 12 - 14 or 16); D, cetylpyridinium chloride.
3.10
Fig. 10.8 A where the R substituents are alkyl or heterocyclic radicals to give compounds
such as cetyltrunethylammonium bromide (cetrimide), cetylpyridinium chloride and
benzalkonium chloride. Inspection of the structures of these compounds (Fig. 10. 8B)
indicates the requirement for good antimicrobial activity of having a chain length in
the range Cg to Q 8 in at least one of the R substituents. In the pyridinium compounds
(Fig. 10. 8C) three of the four covalent links may be satisfied by the nitrogen in a
pyridine ring. Polymeric quaternary ammonium salts such as polyquaternium 1 are
finding increasing use as preservatives.
The QACs are most effective against microorganisms at neutral or slightly alkaline
pH and become virtually inactive below pH 3.5. Not surprisingly, anionic agents greatly
reduce the activity of these cationic agents. Incompatibilities have also been recorded
with non-ionic agents, possibly due to the formation of micelles. The presence of organic
matter such as serum, faeces and milk will also seriously affect activity.
QACs exhibit greatest activity against Gram-positive bacteria with a lethal effect
observed using concentrations as low as 1:200000. Gram-negative bacteria are more
resistant requiring a level of 1:30000 or higher still if Ps. aeruginosa is present.
Bacteriostasis is obtained at higher dilutions. A limited antifungal activity, more in the
form of a static than a cidal effect, is exhibited. The QACs have not been shown to
possess any useful sporicidal activity. This narrow spectrum of activity therefore limits
the usefulness of the compounds. Since they are generally well tolerated and non-toxic
when applied to skin and mucous membranes the compounds have considerable use in
treatment of wounds and abrasions and they are used as preservatives in certain
preparations. Benzalkonium chloride and cetrimide are employed extensively in surgery,
urology and gynaecology as aqueous and alcoholic solutions and as creams. In many
instances they are used in conjunction with a biguanide disinfectant such as
chlorhexidine. The detergent properties of the QACs are also useful, especially in
hospitals, for general environmental sanitation.
Other antimicrobials
The range of chemicals which can be shown to have antimicrobial properties is beyond
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 225
the scope of this chapter. The agents included in this section have limited use or are of
historic interest.
3.10.1 Diamidines
The activity of diamidines is reduced by acid pH and in the presence of blood and
serum. Microorganisms may acquire resistance by serial subculture in the presence of
increasing doses of the compounds. Propamidine and dibromopropamidine, as the
isethionate salts, are the major diamidine derivatives employed as antimicrobial
agents; propamidine in the form of eye-drops (0.1%) for amoebic infection and
dibromopropamidine for topical treatment of minor infections.
3.10.2 Dyes
Crystal violet (Gentian violet), brilliant green and malachite green are triphenyl-
methane dyes widely used to stain bacteria for microscopic examination. They
also have bacteriostatic and fungistatic activity and have been applied topically
for the treatment of infections. Staining of skin and clothes is a disadvantage of
these agents. Due to concern about possible carcinogenicity, they are now rarely
used.
The acridine dyes, including proflavine, acriflavine and aminacrine, have also been
employed for skin disinfection and treatment of infected wounds or burns. They are
slow-acting and mainly bacteriostatic in effect, with no useful fungicidal or sporicidal
activity.
3.10.3 Quinoline derivatives
The quinoline derivatives of pharmaceutical interest are little used now. The
antimicrobial activity of the derivatives is generally good against the Gram-positive
bacteria though less so against Gram-negative species. The compound most frequently
used in a pharmaceutical context is dequalinium chloride, a bisquaternary ammonium
derivative of 4-aminoquinaldinium. As it is a cationic surface-active agent it is
incompatible with anionic agents. It is formulated as a lozenge for the treatment of
oropharyngeal infections.
3.11 Antimicrobial combinations
As is apparent from the above information, there is no ideal disinfectant, antiseptic or
preservative. All chemical agents have their limitations either in terms of their
antimicrobial activity, resistance to organic matter, stability, incompatibility, irritancy,
toxicity or corrosivity. To overcome the limitations of an individual agent, formulations
consisting of combinations of agents are available. For example, ethanol has been
combined with chlorhexidine and iodine to produce more active preparations. The
combination of chlorhexidine and cetrimide is also considered to improve activity.
QACs and phenols have been combined with glutaraldehyde so that the same effect
can be achieved with lower, less irritant concentrations of glutaraldehyde. Some
226 Chapter 10
combinations are considered to be synergistic, e.g. hydrogen peroxide and peroxygen
compounds.
Disinfection policies
The aim of a disinfection policy is to control the use of chemicals for disinfection and
antisepsis and give guidelines on their use. The preceeding descriptions within this
chapter of the activities, advantages and disadvantages of the many disinfectants
available allow considerable scope for choice and inclusion of agents in a policy to be
applied to such areas as industrial plant, walls, ceilings, floors, air, cleaning equipment
and laundries and to the extensive range of equipment in contact with hospital patients.
The control of microorganisms is of prime importance in hospital and industrial
environments. Where pharmaceutical products (either sterile or non-sterile) are
manufactured, contamination of the product may lead to its deterioration and to infection
in the user. In hospital there is the additional consideration of patient care, therefore
protection from nosocomial (hospital-acquired) infection and prevention of cross-
infection must also be covered. Hospitals generally have a disinfection policy, though
the degree of adherence to, and implementation of, the policy content can vary. A
specialized Infection Control Committee comprising the pharmacist, the consultant
medical microbiologist and senior nurse responsible for infection control should
formulate a suitable policy. This core team may usefully be expanded to include, for
example, a physician, a surgeon, nurse teachers and nurses from several clinical
areas, the sterile services manager and the domestic superintendent. Purchasing may
also be represented. This expanded committee will meet regularly to help with the
implementation of the policy and reassess its efficiency. Reference to Tables 10.2-10.4
indicates the susceptibility of various microorganisms to the range of agents available.
Table 10.6 presents examples of the range of formulations and uses of the agents
available.
Although scope exists for choice of disinfectant in many of the areas covered by
a policy, in certain instances specific recommendations are made as to the type,
concentration and usage of disinfectant in particular circumstances. For example, the
Working Party of the British Society of Gastroenterology recommended aldehyde
preparations as the first line antibacterial and antiviral disinfectant with a 4 minute
soak of endoscopes sufficient for inactivation of hepatitis B virus and HIV. Similarly,
the area of use of hypochlorite solutions will dictate the strength of solution (avCl)
required. Where blood and body fluid spill occurs, a 1% avCl (lOOOOppm) solution is
required. Lower strengths, 0.1% and 0.125% avCl, are recommended for disinfection
of general working surfaces and baby feeding bottles, respectively.
Categories of risk (to patients) may be assigned to equipment coming into contact
with a patient, dictating the level of decontamination required and degree of concern.
High-risk items have close contact with broken skin or mucous membrane or are those
introduced into a sterile area of the body and should therefore be sterile. These include
sterile instruments, gloves, catheters, syringes and needles. Liquid chemical disinfectants
should only be used if heat or other methods of sterilization are unsuitable. Intermediate-
risk items are in close contact with skin or mucous membranes and disinfection will
normally be applied. Endoscopes, respiratory and anaesthetic equipment, wash bowls,
Chemical disinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives 227
bed-pans and similar items are included in this category. Low -risk items or areas include
those detailed earlier such as walls, floors, etc., which are not in close contact with the
patient. Cleaning is obviously important with disinfection being required, for example,
in the event of contaminated spillage.
Further reading
Advisory Committee on Dangerous Pathogens (ACDP) (1990) HIV — The Causative Agent of AIDS
and Related Conditions. Second revision of guidelines. London: Health and Safety Executive.
Anon (1991) Decontamination of Equipment, Linen or other Surfaces Contaminated with Hepatitis B
and/or Human Immunodeficiency Viruses. Department of Health HC 33.
Anon (1988) Cleaning and disinfection of equipment for gastrointestinal flexible endoscopy:
interim recommendations of a Working Party of the British Society of Gastroenterology. Gut, 29,
1134-1151.
Ayliffe G.A.J. , Coates D. & Hoffman P.N. (1993) Chemical Disinfection in Hospitals. London: PHLS.
British Medical Association (1989) A Code of Practice for Sterilization of Instruments and Control of
Cross Infection. London: BMA (Board of Science and Education).
British Standards Institution (1986) Terms Relating to Disinfectants. BS 5283: 1986 Glossary. London:
British Standards Institution.
Block S.S. (Ed) (199 1) Disinfection, Sterilization and Preservation, 4th edn. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger.
Coates D. & Hutchinson D.N. (1994) How to produce a hospital disinfection policy. JHosp Infect, 26,
57-68.
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (1988). Statutary Instrument No.
1657.
Eggers H.J. (1990) Experiments on antiviral activity of hand disinfectants. Some theoretical and practical
considerations. Zentralblatt Bakt, 273, 36-51.
Health and Safety Executive (1991) Occupational Exposure Limits EH40/91. London: Health and
Safety Executive.
Holton J., Nye P. & McDonald V. (1994) Efficacy of selected disinfectants against Mycobacteria and
Cryptosporidia. / Hosp Infect, 27, 105-115.
Russell A.D. (1990) Bacterial spores and chemical sporicidal agents. Clin Microbiol Rev, 3, 99-119.
Russell A.D. (1996) Activity ofbiocides against mycobacteria. JAppl Bacteriol Symp Suppl, 81, 87S-
101S.
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (1996) Understanding Antibacterial Action and Resistance, 2nd edn.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Russell A.D., Hugo W.B. & Ayliffe G.A.J, (ed.) (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Scott E.M., Gorman S.P. & McGrath S.J. (1986) An assessment of the fungicidal activity of antimicrobial
agents used for hard- surface and skin disinfection. / Clin Hosp Pharm, 11, 199-205.
Sterilization, Disinfection and Cleaning of Medical Equipment: Microbiology Advisory Committee
(1993) Guidance on Decontamination from the Microbiology Advisory Committee to Department
of Health Medical Devices Directorate. Part 1 Principles. London: HMSO.
van Bueren J., Salman H. & Cookson B.D. (1995) The Efficacy of Thirteen Chemical Disinfectants
against Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV). Medical Devices Agency Evaluation Report.
228 Chapter 10
Evaluation of non-antibiotic
antimicrobial agents
1
Introduction
3.7.1
1.1
Definition of terms
3.7.2
1.2
Dynamics of disinfection
3.7.3
3.8
2
Factors affecting the disinfection
3.8.1
process
3.8.2
2.1
Effect of temperature
3.8.3
2.1.1
Practical meaning of the temperature
coefficient
3.8.4
2.2
Effect of dilution
2.2.1
Practical meaning of the concentration
3.8.5
exponent
3.8.6
2.3
Effect of pH
3.8.7
2.3.1
Rate of growth of the inoculum
3.8.8
2.3.2
Potency of the antibacterial agent
2.3.3
Effect on the cell surface
4
2.4
Effect of surface activity
4.1
2.5
Presence of interfering substances
4.2
2.6
Effect of inoculum size
4.3
4.4
3
Evaluation of liquid disinfectants
3.1
Suspension tests
5
3.1.1
Phenol coefficient tests
3.1.2
Capacity use-dilution test
6
3.2
Quantitative suspension tests
6.1
3.3
Mycobactericidal activity
3.4
Sporicidal activity
6.2
3.5
In vivo tests
3.5.1
Skin tests
7
3.5.2
Other in vivo tests
7.1
3.5.3
Toxicity tests
7.2
3.6
Estimation of bacteriostasis
7.2.1
3.6.1
Serial dilution
7.2.2
3.6.2
Ditch-plate technique
7.2.3
3.6.3
Cup-plate technique
3.6.4
Solid dilution method
8
3.6.5
Gradient-plate technique
3.7
Tests for antifungal activity
9
Fungicidal activity
Fungistatic activity
Choice of test organism
Virucidal activity
Tissue culture or egg inoculation
Plaque assays
'Acceptable'animal model
Duck hepatitis B virus: a possible
model of infectivity of human hepatitis
B virus
Immune reaction
Virus morphology
Endogenous reverse transcriptase
Bacteriophage
Semi-solid antibacterial preparations
Tests for bacteriostatic activity
Tests for bactericidal activity
Tests on skin
General conclusions
Solid disinfectants
Evaluation of air disinfectants
Determination of viable airborne
microorganisms
Experimental evaluation
Preservatives
Evaluation of preservatives
Preservative combinations
Synergy in preservative combinations
Evaluation of synergy
Rapid methods
Appendix: British Standards
Further reading
Introduction
Definition of terms
• Bactericide. An agency which kills bacteria.
• Sporicide. An agency which kills spores.
• Bacteriostat. An agency which prevents the reproduction and multiplication of
bacteria.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 229
• Virucide (viricide). An agency which kills viruses.
• Fungicide. An agency which kills fungi.
• Fungistat. An agency which prevents fungal proliferation.
The foregoing terms are unequivocal and are the terms of choice in scientific writing;
however, other terms are also in common use.
Disinfectant. This term implies a substance with bactericidal action. Clearly, if an
environment is to be made free from the ability to reinfect, its bacterial population
must be destroyed. A detailed description of the meaning of the terms'disinfectant' and
'disinfection' is provided in Chapter 10.
Sanitizer. This term, sometimes used in the public health context, refers to an agent
that reduces the number of bacterial contaminants to a safe level.
Antiseptic. This term means 'against sepsis' which in general means wound infection.
A bacteriostatic agent may prevent sepsis developing in the body especially if the normal
body defences against sepsis are operative. For further details, see Chapter 10.
Another common usage of the terms disinfectant and antiseptic is to use the former
for preparations to be applied to inert surfaces and the latter to preparations for
application to living tissues.
Many of the standard works include only the word 'disinfection' in their title yet
deal with all classes of compounds and with a wide range of application. It is unrewarding
to be too dogmatic about these terms; many substances can function in both capacities
depending upon their concentration and time of contact. A more general term, biocide,
is now widely used to denote a chemical agent that, literally, kills microorganisms.
It is doubtful if there is a difference other than degree between bacteriostatic
and bactericidal action. The three situations, growth, bacteriostasis and killing, are
represented graphically in Fig. 11.1. The question posed by this notion, to which often
there is no precise answer, is: How long will a culture of bacteria remain viable when
prevented from reproducing?
12 Dynamics of disinfection
Changes in the population of viable bacteria in an environment are determined by
means of a viable count, and a plot of this count against time gives a dynamic picture of
any pattern of change (see Fig. 11.1, curve A). The typical growth curve of a bacterial
culture is constructed from data obtained in this way. The pattern of bacterial death in
a lethal environment may be obtained by the same technique, when a death or mortality
curve is obtained (Fig. 11.1, curve C).
Inspection of the death curves obtained from viable count data had early elicited
the idea that because there was usually an approximate, and under some circumstances
a quite excellent, linear relationship between the logarithm of the number of survivors
and time, then the disinfection process was comparable to a unimolecular reaction.
This implied that the rate of killing was a function of the amount of one of the participants
in the reaction only, i.e. in the case of the disinfection process the number of viable
cells. From this observation there followed the notion that the principles of first-order
230 Chapter 11
2
-Q
E
Time-
Fig. 11.1 The fate of a bacterial population when inoculated into: A, nutrient medium, normal
growth curve. B, bacteriostatic environment. No change in viable population; after a prolonged time-
interval the viable population will probably begin to fall. C, bactericidal environment. A sigmoid
death curve is shown.
kinetics could be applied to the disinfection process and that a rate or velocity constant
in an equation of the type shown below could be used as a measure of the efficiency of
a disinfectant:
(11.1)
where K is the rate or velocity constant, N Q is the initial number of organisms, Af is the
final number of organisms, and t is the time for the viable count to fall from No to N.
This may be understood more fully by reference to Fig. 11.2. Curve A shows the
type of response which would be obtained if the lethal process followed precisely the
pattern of a first- order reaction. Some experimental curves do, in fact, follow this pattern
quite closely, hence the genesis of the original theory.
The more usual pattern found experimentally is that shown by B, which is called a
sigmoid curve. Here the graph is indicative of a slow initial rate of kill, followed by a
faster, approximately linear rate of kill where there is some adherence to first-order
reaction kinetics; this is followed again by a slower rate of kill. This behaviour is
compatible with the idea of a population of bacteria which contains a portion of
susceptible members which die quite rapidly, an aliquot of average resistance, and a
residue of more resistant members which die at a slower rate. When high concentrations
of disinfectant are used, i.e. when the rate of death is rapid, a curve of the type shown
by C is obtained; here the bacteria are dying more quickly than predicted by first-order
kinetics and the rate 'constant' diminishes in value continuously during the disinfection
process.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 231
■a
EL
i5
"5
4Ji
>
2
Time
Fig. 11.2 Survivor/time curves
for the disinfection process.
A, obtained if the disinfection
process obeyed the first-order
kinetic law. B, sigmoid curve.
This shows a slow initial rate of
kill, a steady rate and finally a
slower rate of kill. This is the
form of curve most usually
encountered. C, obtained if
bacteria are dying more quickly
than first-order kinetics would
predict. The 'constant', K,
diminishes in value continuously
during the process.
The reason for this varied behaviour is not difficult to find. A population of bacteria
does not possess the uniformity of properties inherent in pure chemical substances.
This fact, together with the varied manner in which bactericides exert their effect and
the complex nature of the bacterial cell, should provide adequate and satisfying reasons
why the precise theories of reaction kinetics should have failed to explain the disinfection
process.
The application of kinetic data is now being increasingly used in the evaluation of
biocidal activity. As pointed out later (section 3.2), for example, data derived from
viable counting procedures form the basis of modern suspension test methods.
The effects of temperature, pH and dilution on biocidal activity are of considerable
significance and are dealt with in section 2.
Factors affecting the disinfection process
Apart from the obvious effect of concentration there are other important factors which
affect the action of disinfectants.
2.1
Effect of temperature
In 1880, the bacteriologist Robert Koch had noted that anthrax spores were more rapidly
killed by the same concentrations of phenol if the temperature was elevated. A former
pharmacopoeial sterilization process 'heating with a bactericide' used an elevated tem-
perature, 80-100°C, maintained for 30 minutes, to ensure that quite low concentrations
of bactericides would sterilize parenteral injections and eye-drops.
The idea that disinfection could be treated as a first-order chemical reaction led to
ideas equating the effect of heat on the process to the effect of heat on chemical reactions,
232 Chapter 11
invoking the Arrhenius equation. For reasons already given, attempts to fit equations
derived from chemical reactions to the disinfection process are unrewarding, although
as a generalization it is true that as the temperature is increased in arithmetical
progression, the rate of disinfection (rate of kill) increases geometrically.
The effect of temperature on bactericidal activity may be expressed quantitatively
by means of a temperature coefficient, either the temperature coefficient per degree
rise in temperature, denoted by 6, or the coefficient per 10° rise, the Q w value.
may be calculated from the equation
<r rt, = A. ( i L2)
where t x is the extinction time at T A C, and h the extinction time at 7? °C (i.e. T x + 1 °C).
<2 10 values may be calculated easily by determining the extinction time at two
temperatures differing exactly by 10°C. Then
_ ___1 1 imcto_k[ll_M(r e
10 " Time to kill &t(T-H0) a (U3)
An overall picture of the whole process may be obtained by plotting rate of kill against
temperature.
The value for Qi Q of chemical and enzyme-catalysed reactions lies between 2 and
3. The Q w values of disinfectants vary widely; thus, for phenol it is 4, for butanol 28,
for ethanol 45, and for ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, nearly 300. These figures
alone should suggest that pushing the analogy of disinfection and chemical reaction
kinetics too far is unwarranted.
Practical meaning of the temperature coefficient
The value of Q lQ for phenol is 4, which means that over the 10°C range used to determine
the <2 10 (actually 20-30°C) the activity will be increased by a factor of 4.
Effect of dilution
The effects of concentration or dilution of the active ingredient on the activity of a
disinfectant are of paramount importance. Failure to be aware of these changes in activity
is responsible for many misleading claims concerning the properties of a disinfectant.
It was realized at the end of the nineteenth century that there was an exponential
relationship between potency and concentration. Thus, if the log,o of a death time, that
is the time to kill a standard inoculum, is plotted against the log ]0 of the concentration,
a straight line is usually obtained, the slope of which is the concentration exponent (77)
{Viler 1 1 "XI TH*vr\Tv*oci3rl oc on pnnotinn
_ {Log death time at concentration C 2 ) - (lot death time at concentration C L ) (1 1 41
Thus, 77 may be obtained from experimental data either graphically or by substitutioi
in the above equation. Some numerical values of 77 are given in Table 11.1.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 233
KB
s
Log concentration
Fig. 11.3 Graphical determination of the
concentration exponent, 77, of a disinfectant.
Table 11.1 Concentration exponents, 77, for some disinfectant substances
2.2.1
Antimicrobial
agent
r\
Antimicrobial agent
n
Hydrogen peroxide
0.5
Parabens
2.5
Silver nitrate
0.9-1.0
Sorbic acid
2.6-3.2
Mercurials
0.03-3.0
Potassium laurate
2.3
Iodine
0.9
Benzyl alcohol
2.6-4.6
Crystal violet
0.9
Aliphatic alcohols
6.0-12.7
Chlorhexidine
2
Glycolmonophenyl ethers
5.8-6.4
Formaldehyde
1
Glycolmonoalkyl ethers
6.4-15.9
QACs
0.8-2.5
Phenolic agents
4-9.9
Acridines
0.7-1.9
Formaldehyde
donors
0.8-0.9
Bronopol
0.7
Polymeric biguanides
1.5-1.6
QAC, quaternary ammonium compound.
Practical meaning of the concentration exponent
Mercuric chloride has a concentration exponent of 1; thus, the activity will be reduced
by the power of 1 on dilution, and a threefold dilution means the disinfectant activity
will be reduced by the value 3\ or 3, that is to a third. Put another way the disinfection
time will be three times as long. In the case of phenol, however, with a concentration
exponent of 6, a threefold dilution will mean a decrease in activity of 3 6 = 729, a figure
243 times the value for mercuric chloride. This explains why phenols may be rapidly
inactivated by dilution and should sound a warning bell regarding claims for diluted
phenol solutions based on data obtained at high concentrations.
2.3
Effect of pH
During the disinfection process a change of pH can, at one and the same time, affect:
1 the rate of growth of the inoculum;
234 Chapter 11
2.3.1
2.3.2
2 the potency of the antibacterial agent itself;
3 the ability of the drug to combine with sites on the cell surface.
Rate of growth of the inoculum
In general, bacterial growth is optimal in the pH range 6-8; on either side of this bracket
the rate of growth declines.
Potency of the antibacterial agent
If the agent is an acid or a base its degree of ionization will depend on the pH. If its acid
dissociation constant, pK& is known, the degree of ionization at any pH may be calculated
or determined by reference to published tables.
It has been shown that in some compounds the active species is the non-ionized
molecule while the ion is inactive (benzoic acid, phenols, nitrophenols, salicylic acid,
acetic acid). Thus, conditions of pH which favour the formation of the ions of these
compounds will also reduce their activity. The effect of pH on the ability of acetic acid
and phenol to inhibit the growth of a mould is shown in Fig. 11.4.
In other cases the activity of the drug is due to the ionized molecule. For example,
with the antibacterial acridine dyestuffs it is the cation which is the active agent and
factors favouring ionization, all other things being equal, enhance their antibacterial
activity (see Chapter 12).
Thus, at pH 7.3, 9-aminoacridine, which exists at this pH entirely as the cation,
will inhibit the growth of Streptococcus pyogenes at a dilution of 1:160000; the
0-12
o
008
c
V
■LP
o
«
o
cm
Ph^rtQl
pH
Fig. 11.4 The effect of pH on the
concentration of phenol (pK a 10) and
of acetic acid (pJf a 4.7) to inhibit
mould growth.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 235
corresponding figure for 5-aminoacridine-3-carboxylic acid, which does not form cations
atpH7.3,is 1:5000.
Usually the antibacterial activity of cationic detergents such as cetrimide and the
acridines increases with increase of pH (section 2.3.3).
2.3.3 Effect on the cell surface
Before an antibacterial agent can exert its effect on a cell it must combine with
that cell. This process often follows the pattern of an adsorption isotherm. Clearly,
factors which affect the state of the cell surface, as the pH of the cell's environment
must do, must affect, to some extent, the adsorption process. An increase in the external
pH renders the cell surface more negatively charged. Biocidal agents that are cationic
in nature thus bind more strongly to the cell surface with a consequent increase in
activity.
In most situations of practical disinfection, pH may not be a significant variable
but it has long been recognized that phenols are less active in alkaline solution, an
effect readily explained by the foregoing account.
2.4 Effect of surface activity
The possession of surface activity per se may be an important factor in the
antibacterial action of a group of drugs, for example the cationic detergents. The
addition of low concentrations of surface-active compounds may potentiate the
biological effect of an antibacterial agent. Thus, phenols are often more active in the
presence of soaps.
2.5 Presence of interfering substances
It has already been stated (section 2.3) that in most instances, before an antibacterial
agent can act on a cell, it must first combine with it. It is not difficult to envisage the
fact that the presence of other material, often referred to as organic matter, may reduce
the effect of such an agent by adsorbing or inactivating it and thus reducing the amount
available for combining with the cells it is desired to kill. Extraneous matter may be
able to form a protective coat around the cell, thereby preventing the penetration of the
active agent to its site of action. The possible influence, therefore, of other matter in the
environment should not be overlooked.
2.6 Effect of inoculum size
This variable is often the one least controlled in the performance of tests upon
disinfectants. Clearly, if it is postulated that disinfectant substances are first adsorbed
on to a cell and thereafter kill it, the number of cells added to a given quantity of
disinfectant may well be of significance. This is illustrated in Table 11.2.
In all experiments the inoculum size should be controlled and clearly stated in any
account of the experiment.
236 Chapter 11
Table 11.2 Effect of inoculum size on the minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) of three
antiseptics against Staphylococcus aureus
MIC (ug ml" 1 )
vs. inoculum size
Antiseptic
1 x10 6
4x10 9
Increase^,)
Chlorocresol
225
350
55
Phenylethanol
3250
4750
65
Phenylmercuric
acetate
3.5
5
70
Evaluation of liquid disinfectants
This evaluation may conveniently be classified into suspension tests (section 3.1) and
counting methods, although the latter themselves use suspensions of microorganisms
and hence are referred to here as quantitative suspension tests (section 3.2).
3.1
Suspension tests
These are essentially tests for sterility (Chapter 23) upon bacterial suspensions performed
after treatment with the antibacterial agent for a prescribed time and under controlled
conditions. They differ in the manner in which the experimental findings are calculated
as well as in the details of experimental procedure.
They may be subdivided into phenol coefficient-type tests, of which there are many,
quantitative suspension tests (which measure the rate at which test organisms are killed)
and tests carried out at use-dilutions.
3.1.1
Phenol coefficient tests
The Rideal- Walker (RW) and Chick-Martin (CM) tests, long quoted, often in
inappropriate circumstances, as standards for all disinfectants, were introduced at a
time when typhoid fever was endemic. The tests were an attempt to standardize phenolic
disinfectant claims or to kill the causal organism (Salmonella typhi) of typhoid fever.
In the case of the CM test, account was taken of the presence of organic matter. During
the first decade of the twentieth century, when the RW and CM tests were first described,
it is true to say that these were valid tests. Phenols were the disinfectants almost
invariably used, typhoid fever was still a present, although declining, menace to public
health and it was utensils, rooms and surfaces at room temperature which were to be
disinfected. The greatest single abuse of this type of test has been in the extrapolation
of data to other situations and to disinfectants very different from phenol. Thus, it was
not uncommon to find a preparation recommended for the treatment of wounds and
declared able to kill staphylococci on the skin (at 37°C) in the presence of serum
(organic matter), claimed as being six times as effective as pure phenol as judged by
the RW test. If it is reiterated that the latter gives information about Sal. typhi at
17-18°C in an aqueous environment in the absence of organic matter, the extravagance
of the extrapolation is plain. To use a phenol coefficient to evaluate non-phenolic
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 237
disinfectants also contravened the fundamental concept of a biological assay, that is,
that the standard and unknown should be of like mode of action. Not surprisingly,
therefore, the RW and CM tests are falling into disuse, but full accounts will be found
in the appropriate British Standards (BS 541: 1985 and BS 808: 1986). Both tests were
fully described in the fourth edition (pp. 261-264) of the present book.
3.1.2 Capacity use-dilution test
The Kelsey-Sykes (KS) test. Having regard to the many disadvantages alleged against
the RW and CM tests, attempts were made and published in the early 1960s to find
improved test methods. The foundations for the new test were laid by Kelsey et al. in
1965, and with the collaboration of the late G. Sykes and of Isobel M. Maurer, the
Kelsey-Sykes test was evolved. This test embodied several principles. Firstly, it was a
capacity test. Here a bacterial inoculum was added to the disinfectant in three successive
lots at 0, 1 and 5 minutes. This is the principle of a capacity test where the capacity or
lack of capacity of the disinfectant to destroy successive additions of abacterial culture
is tested.
The total test is performed in separate repeats using four test organisms:
Staphylococcus aureus, Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Proteus
vulgaris. These were considered a more realistic choice than Sal. typhi, employed as
the sole test organism in the RW and CM tests. The organisms, furthermore, are grown
on a synthetic medium and survival is tested in a broth containing the non-ionic surface-
active agent sorbitan mono-oleate (Tween 80). The disinfectant reaction is at 20°C and
recovery of organisms at 32°C. Calibrated and dropping pipettes rather than loops are
used for inoculation and other liquid manipulations, and disinfectants diluted at
approximately the dilutions recommended for use are made in hard water. The test
outlined above is carried out under clean and dirty conditions (compare RW, clean, and
CM, dirty), the latter being simulated by dried yeast as in the CM test.
The disinfectant is assessed on its overall performance, namely its ability to kill
microorganisms, as judged by subculture recovery or lack of it and not by comparison
with phenol, i.e. a disinfectant would pass or fail according to its performance. A use-
dilution concentration of a disinfectant must pass the test at three replications.
In summary, therefore, the KS suspension test differs from the RW and CM tests in
that it is a capacity test, it reports the data as a pass or fail and not as a numerical cipher,
i.e. not as a coefficient, and it uses a range of microorganisms. It combines an individual
feature of the RW and CM tests in that it can report on disinfectant activity under both
clean and dirty conditions.
This account highlights the main features of the test. It is described in detail by
Kelsey and Maurer (1974).
Criticisms of the KS test. An extensive collaborative trial was carried out on the KS
test and the conclusion (Cowen, 1978) was that the test was suitable for white and
clear, soluble disinfectants providing due care was taken in interpreting the pass
concentration. Further modification of the test is necessary before it can be applied to
other disinfectants.
238 Chapter 11
3.2 Quantitative suspension tests
There is no doubt that the maximum information concerning the fate of a bacterial
population is obtained by performing viable counts at selected time intervals.
Alternatively, the number of survivors expressed as the percentage remaining viable at
the end of a given period of time may be determined by viable counts and this parameter
is often used in assessing bactericidal activity.
Viable counting is a technique used in all branches of pure and applied bacteriology.
Essentially, the method consists of dispersing the sample in a solid nutrient which is
then incubated. Any developing colonies are counted and if the assumption is made
that each countable colony arises from a single viable cell in the original sample and
that each viable cell is capable of, eventually, producing a colony, the viable bacterial
content of that sample is thus determined. Viable numbers are usually expressed as
colony-forming units (cfti) per millilitre.
This type of test may be used to investigate bactericidal, sporicidal or fungicidal
activity.
It will be recalled (section 1) that research on the time course of the disinfection
process was carried out making extensive use of viable counts, and notions concerning
the dynamics of the disinfection process were gathered by these means.
A far more useful parameter for practical disinfectant evaluation is to perform a
viable count at the end of a chosen period and to determine the concentration of
disinfectant to achieve a 99, 99.9, 99.99 or 99.999% kill. The use of a percentage kill
calculated to three places of decimals may sound pedantic but these become significant
when dealing with large populations. Thus, if 99.999% of a population of bacteria
originally containing 1000000 cells are killed in a given time there are still 10 survivors.
Expressed in another way, 90, 99, 99.9, 99.99 and 99.999% kills represent logio
reductions of 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 respectively. This aspect provides the basis of a new
European suspension test, currently being designed and still debated. The principle of
this method is that a test bacterial suspension is exposed to a test disinfectant; after a
specified time the numbers of cells remaining viable are compared with control
(untreated) cells. A hypothetical example is provided in Table 11.3 together with an
explanation of the calculation involved.
Tests should also be done in the presence of organic matter (e.g. albumin) and
in hard water. It is important to remember when performing viable counts that care
must be taken to ensure that, at the moment of sampling, the disinfection process
is immediately arrested by the use of a suitable neutralizer or ensuring inactivation
by dilution (Table 11.4). Membrane filtration is an alternative procedure, the principle
of which is that treated cells are retained on the filter whilst the disinfectant forms
the filtrate. After washing in situ, the membrane is transferred to the surface of a
solid (agar) recovery medium and the colonies that develop on the membrane are
counted.
A major source of error in performing viable counts results from clumping of the
organism so that one colony on the final plate may arise, not from one organism, but
perhaps from numbers which may be of the order of 100. Unfortunately, many
antibacterial agents, by affecting the surface charge on the bacterial cell, actually promote
clumping and steps must be taken to overcome this.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 239
Table 11.3 Hypothetical example of a quantitative suspension test procedure (disinfectant used for 5
minutes at 20 °C)
Subculture
dilution
Control series (C)
cfu
cfu ml" 1
Disinfectant series (D)
cfu
cfu ml" 1
o
o
o
o
o
o
TNTC
TNTC
TNTC
TNTC
110
11
1.1 x10 7
1.1 x10 7
88
8
8.8
x10'
8x10 2
* TKrC r tao numerous. In cuunt.
Microbicidal effect (M F } = tog iV c - tog # t
' =log WxHf ..bog 8.8 x I0 1
= 7.04 - T.94
= 4. 10 (a far 5 mimics)
where .V c and W D represent the numher of cfu ml J in the control arid tiisinfeizcarn scries,, respectively.
Table 11.4 Neutralizing agents for some antimicrobial agents"
Antimicrobial agent
Benzoic acid and esters of
p-hydroxybenzoic acid
Bronopol
Chlorhexidine
Formaldehyde
Glutaraldehyde
Halogens
Hexachlorophane
Mercurials
Phenolic disinfectants
QACs
Sulphonamides
Neutralizing agent
Dilution o/Tween 80
Cysteine hydrochloride
Lubrol W and egg lecithin orTween 80 and lecithin
Ammonium ions
Glycine
Sodium thiosulphate
Tween 80
Thioglycollic acid
Dilution orTween 80
Lubrol W and lecithin orTween 80 and lecithin
p-Aminobenzoic acid
QAC, quaternary ammonium compound.
* This table should be read in conjunction with Table 23.3 in Chapter 23.
Quaternary ammonium compounds (QACs; Chapter 10) such as cetrimide, and
also the bisbiguanide, chlorhexidine, are notoriously prone to promote clumping. A
non-ionic surface-active agent of the type formed by condensing ethylene oxide with a
long -chain fatty acid such as Cirrasol ALN-WF (ICI Ltd), formerly known as Lubrol
W, together with lecithin, added to the diluting fluid has been used to overcome this
effect.
A British Standard (BS 3286: 1960) dealt specifically with the laboratory evaluation
of the biocidal activity of QACs. This has now been revised (BS 6471: 1984) and a
specification (BS 6424: 1984) for QAC-based aromatic disinfectants introduced.
In certain instances it will be necessary to subject data obtained from viable counts
to statistical analysis or, more sensibly, experiments should be designed so as to render
them amenable to statistical treatment.
3.3 Mycobactericidal activity
Because of their hydrophobic nature, it is often difficult to prepare homogeneous
suspensions of mycobacteria. Moreover, some, e.g. Mycobacterium tuberculosis, are
slow-growing strains. It has been suggested that the non-pathogenic M. terrae can be
used as an indicator organism for M. tuberculosis. Generally, the principle of testing
methods is the same as for other non-sporing bacteria.
3.4 Sporicidal activity
Sporicidal activity can be determined against spores in liquid suspension or against
spores dried on carriers. In principle, techniques are similar to those described for
bactericidal tests. However, it should be realized that spores must germinate and outgrow
before colony formation is observed. For this reason, incubation of recovery media
should be continued for several days.
3.5 In vivo tests
Tests considered above have all been conducted in artificial or laboratory conditions.
This may be satisfactory when disinfectants are required to act in non-living
environments. However, many antibacterials are used on living tissue and on the skin,
and so tests to evaluate them in these situations are called for.
3.5.1 Skin tests
The test organism may be placed on the skin, e.g. on the back of the hand, and the
preparation to be evaluated placed on the same area. After a given time interval the
area is swabbed with sterile cotton wool and the swab incubated in a suitable medium
or washed in a suitable fluid, and viable counts are subsequently made.
One type of test measures the inhibition of respiration of bacterial cells on pieces
of pig skin by the substance under test. Here, the factor of correlation between cell
death and cessation of respiration should be borne in mind.
Hygienic hand disinfection. Hygienic hand disinfection is a term used to denote the
killing and removal of transient microorganisms on the skin, i.e. those germs that literally
'come and go' and which do not therefore form part of the resident skin population.
Essentially, hygienic hand disinfection is a measure to prevent the transmission of
these organisms. It can be achieved in two ways.
1 Use of a hygienic hand rub, in which a suitable disinfectant or disinfectant-detergent
is rubbed into dry hands for not more than 30 seconds. A suitable test method is to
compare a product with a standard (70% ethanol or 60% isopropanol): the product
must not be less effective than the standard.
2 Use of a hygienic hand wash, in which a suitable disinfectant or disinfectant-
detergent is rubbed into wet or dry hands for not more than 30 seconds and then washing
the hands in water. A suitable test method is to compare a product with a standard (soap
and water): the product must be significantly more effective than the control.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 241
Surgical hand disinfection. This term refers to the pre-operative disinfection of surgeons'
hands, with the aim of preventing surgical wound infection. The most important criteria
associated with surgical hand disinfection are:
1 a reduction of the resident skin flora to low levels;
2 a prolonged effect (lasting several hours);
3 minimal irritation to the skin.
The principle of tests evaluating the efficacy of surgical hand disinfectants is to
sample the resident flora of the hands before and after surgical hand disinfection.
3.5.2 Other in vivo tests
Tests have been published for determining toxicity towards leucocytes. Evaluation on
the infected chorioallantoic membrane of hens' eggs was suggested as being a useful
method of testing potential wound disinfectants.
3.5.3 Toxicity tests
It is prudent to make an assessment of the systematic toxicity of a preparation to be
used on wounds to guard against the possibility of general poisoning which may follow
absorption of the medicament.
3.6 Estimation of bacteriostasis
Tests considered to date have, without exception, measured unequivocally the
bactericidal effect. In some instances it is useful to know the minimum concentration
which inhibits growth (reproduction) rather than those concentrations which achieve a
rapid kill. The implications of the terms 'bactericide' and 'bacteriostat' were discussed
earlier (see section 1.1, Fig. 11.1).
Methods which measure only growth inhibition (bacteriostasis) are given below.
3.6.1 Se rial dilution
Graded doses of the test substance are incorporated into broth dispensed in McCartney
boules and the bottles inoculated with the test organism and incubated. The point at
which no growth occurs is taken as the bacteriostatic concentration (minimum inhibitory
concentration, MIC). It is essential when performing these tests to determine the size
of the inoculum as the position of the end-point varies considerably with inoculum
size, which should always be defined in any description of result.
The test is carried out in practice by mixing the appropriate volume of the solution
under test with double-strength broth and making it up to volume with water as illustrated
in Table 11.5. If the volume of the inoculum is greater than 1-3 drops, this must be
compensated for in planning a table of dilutions.
3.6.2 Ditch-plate technique
The test solution is placed in a ditch cut in nutrient agar contained in a Petri dish, or it
242 Chapter 11
Table 11.5 Contents of containers for determining the MIC of phenol
Fina volume (ml) in container
Double-strength broth
5
5
5
5
5
5
0.5% phenol solution
1
2
3
4
5
Sterile distilled water
5
4
3
2
1
Final cone, of phenol (% w/v)
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
Fig. 11.5 Plates for the assessment of bacteriostatic effect of semi-solid preparations: A, cup-plate;
B, ditch-plate.
3.6.3
may be mixed with a little agar before pouring into the ditch. The test organisms (as
many as six may be tested) are streaked up to the ditch. The plate is then incubated. A
typical result is shown in Fig. 1 1.5B. Organisms growing up to the ditch are considered
resistant.
Cup-plate technique
The solution is placed in contact with agar, which is already inoculated with the test
organism and after incubation zones of inhibition observed. The solution may be placed
in a small cup sealed to the agar surface (a method used widely in antibiotic assays) in
a well cut from the agar with a sterile cork-borer, or applied in the form of an impregnated
disc of filter paper (Fig. 1 1.5 A).
3.6.4
Solid dilution method
In this method the dilutions of the substance under test are made in agar instead of
broth. The agar containing the substance under test is subsequently poured onto a Petri
dish. It has the advantage that for any one concentration of the test substance, several
organisms may be tested. Multipoint inoculators enable several organisms to be tested
on one plate.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 243
3.6.5 Gradient-plate technique
In this technique the concentration of a drug in an agar plate may (theoretically) be
varied infinitely between zero and a given maximum. To perform the test, nutrient agar
is melted, the solution under test added, and the mixture poured into a sterile Petri dish
and allowed to set in the form of a wedge (Fig. 1 1.6A).
A second amount of agar is then poured onto the wedge and allowed to set with the
Petri dish flat on the bench, giving the effect shown in Fig. 11.6B. The plates are
incubated overnight to allow diffusion of the drag and to dry the surface. The test
organisms must be streaked in a direction running from the highest to the lowest
concentration. Up to six organisms may be tested in this way.
To calculate the result, the length of growth and the total length of the agar
surface streaked is measured; then if total length of possible growth is x cm and total
length of actual growth is v cm, the inhibitory concentration as determined by this
method is:
where c is the final concentration, in fig or mgml" , of the drug in the total volume of
the medium. It should always be borne in mind that, in comparing results obtained on
solid and in a liquid environment, the factor of drug diffusion may have a bearing on
all results using solid environments.
3.7 Tests for antifungal activity
Fungi may be potential pathogens or occur as contaminants in pharmaceutical products.
In performing tests on potential antifungal preparations the differing culture requirements
of the fungi should be borne in mind, otherwise tests similar to those used for antibacterial
activity may be employed.
Two typical media for growth of fungi are Sabouraud liquid medium and Czapek-
Dox medium. Both these media may be solidified with agar if required.
A
v;
B
Maximum Concentration gradient Zero — «
Fig. 11.6 Gradient-plate technique.
244 Chapter 11
7.1 Fungicidal activity
Fungal spores or mycelium may be added to the solution under test. At selected time
intervals, samples can be subcultured into suitable media and the presence or absence
of growth noted after incubation. A quantitative assessment similar to that described
for bactericidal activity (section 3.2, Table 11.3) can also be undertaken.
7.2 Fungistatic activity
Both the liquid and the solid dilution tests described above for bacteria (sections 3.6.1
and 3.6.4) may be used; suitable media must, of course, be employed.
7.3 Choice of test organism
For the evaluation of preparations to be used against pathogenic fungi, suitable cultures
of these pathogens should be used. To test substances intended to inhibit general
contaminants, cultures of common fungi obtained conveniently by exposing Petri dishes
of solid media to the atmosphere may be used, or alternatively dust or soil may be used
as a source of a mixed inoculum.
8 Virucidal activity
The testing of disinfectants for virucidal activity is not an easy matter. As pointed out
earlier (Chapter 3), viruses are unable to grow in artificial culture media and thus some
other system, usually employing living cells, must be considered. One such example is
tissue culture, but not all virus types can propagate under such circumstances and so an
alternative approach has to be adopted in specific instances. The principles of such
methods are given below.
8.1 Tissue culture or egg inoculation
A standardized viral suspension is exposed, in the presence of yeast suspension, to
appropriate dilutions of disinfectant in WHO hard water. At appropriate times, dilutions
are made in inactivated horse serum and each dilution is inoculated into tissue cell
culture or embryonated eggs (as appropriate for the test virus). The drop in infectivity
of the treated virus is compared with that of the control (untreated) virus.
Since disinfectant itself might be toxic to the tissue culture or eggs, a toxicity test
must also be carried out. Here, appropriate dilutions of disinfectant are mixed with
inactivated horse serum and inoculated into tissue cells or eggs (as appropriate). These
are examined daily for damage.
8.2 Plaque assays
Plaque assays, at present, apply to only a very limited number of viruses, e.g. poliovirus,
herpes virus, human rotavirus. The principle of these assays is as follows: test virus is
dried on to coverslips which are immersed in various concentrations of test disinfectant
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 245
b
A
Fig. 11.7 A, diagrammatic representation of
plaque assay for evaluating virucidal activity
and B, monolayers of baby hamster kidney
(BHK) cells; C, virus titre: untreated virus
(o represents a plaque-forming unit, pfu, in
BHK cells): D, virus titre: disinfectant-
treated virus (before plating onto BHK, the
disinfectant must be neutralized in an
appropriate manner). Note the greatly
reduced number of pfu in D, indicative of
fewer uninactivated virus particles than in C.
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
for various time intervals and a plaque-counting method used to determine surviving
viral particles. The plaques are similar to those described in Chapter 3, except that a
host cell other than bacteria (Chapter 3) has to be employed.
For assaying herpes virus, monolayers of baby hamster kidney (BHK) cells are
used. Virus titre is expressed as the number of plaque-forming units (pfu) per millilitre
before and after exposure to a disinfectant, so that the virucidal efficacy of the test
agent can be determined. A diagrammatic representation is given in Fig. 1 1.7.
'Acceptable' animal model
The hepatitis B virus (HB V) does not grow in tissue culture and an 'acceptable' animal
model has been found to be the chimpanzee. This is observed for clinical infection
after inoculation with treated and untreated virus, care being taken in the test series that
residual disinfectant is removed by adequate means before inoculation into the animal.
This procedure is limited by the number of animals that can be used and by the
strictures imposed by a humane approach. HBV has not yet been transmitted to non-
primate animals.
Duck hepatitis B virus: a possible model of infectivity of human hepatitis B virus
Duck hepatitis B virus (DHBV) has been proposed as a possible model for the
inactivation of human HBV by chemical disinfectants. The principle of the test method
uses viral DNA polymerase (DNAP) as a target, total inhibition in vitro of DNAP by
chemical disinfectants being predictive of inactivation of infectivity in vivo.
Immune reaction
Three types of particles are associated with HBV: small spherical particles, 22 nm in
diameter; tubular particles, also having a diameter of 22 nm; and larger spherical particles
(42 nm diameter) known as the Dane particles. The Dane particle alone has a typical
virus structure and appears to be infectious but is the least common form. It consists of
246 Chapter 11
a complex, double-layered sphere with an electron-dense core. It contains partially
double- stranded circular DNA and is regarded as the putative virion (for further
information on virions see Chapter 3). The Dane particles contain three antigens:
hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg) which is also present on 22-nm particles, hepatitis
B core antigen (HBcAg) found in the inner core and hepatitis B e antigen (HBeAg)
found in the core and responsible for infectivity.
The specific immunological detection of the HBV surface antigen (HBsAg) is
considered as being presumptive evidence for the presence of viable HBV. The
hypothesis, then, on which this method is based is that if the disinfectant can destroy
the reactivity of the HBsAg, it can also destroy the infectivity of HBV. A problem with
some disinfectants, e.g. formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, is that their actions are
essentially fixative in nature. The HBsAg immunological reaction is thus not destroyed
at concentrations known to be high enough to kill the most resistant forms (bacterial
spores) of microorganisms. Furthermore, concentrations of disinfectants necessary to
inactivate HBsAg within a reasonable period of time are often comparatively high.
This type of procedure may thus suggest that an unnecessarily high disinfectant
concentration (so-called overkill) may be employed in practice to achieve a virucidal
effect.
3.8.6 Virus morphology
The serum from patients with clinical symptoms of hepatitis B commonly contain
three distinct structures that possess HBsAg (section 3.8.5 above). The effects of different
concentrations of various disinfectants on the structure of Dane particles have been
studied, but it is unlikely that morphological changes can be related to virucidal activity.
3.8.7 Endogenous reverse transcriptase
The human immunodeficiency virus (HIV; lymphadenopathy-associated virus, LAV;
human T-cell lymphotrophic virus type 3, HTLV III) is responsible for acquired immune
deficiency syndrome (AIDS; see Chapter 3). Because of the hazard and difficulties of
growing the virus outside humans, a different approach has to be examined for
determining viral sensitivity to disinfectants.
Studies have demonstrated that one such method is to examine the effects of dis-
infectants on endogenous RNA-dependent DNA polymerase (i.e. reverse transcriptase)
activity. In essence, HIV is an RNA virus; after it enters a cell the RNA is converted to
DNA under the influence of reverse transcriptase. The virus induces a cytopathic effect
on T lymphocytes, and in the assay reverse transcriptase activity is determined after
exposure to different concentrations of various disinfectants. However, it has been
suggested that monitoring residual viral reverse transcriptase activity is not a satisfactory
alternative to tests whereby infectious HIV can be detected in systems employing fresh
human peripheral blood mononuclear cells.
3.8.8 Bacteriophage
A model for evaluating virucidal agents has been described which employs
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 247
bacteriophages as indicator organisms. Bacteriophages used include those infecting
Escherichia coli, Bactewides fragHis mdPseudomonas aeruginosa.
Semi-solid antibacterial preparations
The use of the term 'semi- solid' has been coined to embrace a group of pharmaceutical
preparations known as pastes, ointments, creams and gels. The chief feature which
distinguishes the first three is their viscosity or, to use a more descriptive word, their
stiffness, which decreases in the order: paste, ointment, cream. They may consist of an
intimate mixture of the active agent with either an oleaginous base or, alternatively, an
emulsion with either water or an oleaginous substance as a continuous phase. Gels are
preparations in which the base is usually a carbohydrate polymer (starch, pectin,
methylcellulose, tragacanth, sterculia gum) and water, or more rarely having a base
of protein origin, such as gelatin, with a suitable quantity of water. More recently
polyethylene glycols and other organic polymers have been used.
When formulating antibacterial preparations it is imperative to realize that the
properties of the base may seriously modify the antibacterial activity of the medicament.
It is quite useless to formulate a well-proven antiseptic into an otherwise elegant
pharmaceutical preparation without determining if the final formulation is, itself, an
effective antibacterial agent.
4.1 Tests for bacteriostatic activity
The first official test was published by the Food, Drug and Insecticide Administration
of the US Department of Agriculture, in which portions of the preparation were placed
on the surface of nutrient agar inoculated with Staph, aureus. After incubation the
zones of inhibition, if any, around the preparation were measured. This test was modified
later by incorporating 10% of horse serum in the agar 'to simulate conditions in a
wound' and a control consisting of unmedicated base was also used in each experiment.
This test is known as the cup-plate test (see also section 3.6.3 and Fig. 1 1.5).
In addition to placing the test preparation onto sectors of seeded agar, it may be
placed in a trough cut in uninoculated agar and test organisms streaked in parallel
lines up to the edge of the trough. Failure to grow up to the edge is indicative of
inhibition.
Thus, the cup-plate method is useful to test several preparations or varying
formulations of the same preparation against one organism under identical conditions,
and the ditch-plate method enables one preparation to be tested against several organisms
(see Fig. 11.5A,B).
4.2 Tests for bactericidal activity
A number of tests have been described which imitate, at least in part, the principle of
the phenol coefficient test for liquid disinfectants. A culture of the test organism is
mixed intimately with the semi-solid preparation, and the mixture subcultured by means
of a loop into a suitable broth designed to disperse the base and neutralize the antibacterial
activity of the medicament.
248 Chapter 11
Thus, the culture may be mixed and transferred to a hypodermic syringe sur-
rounded by a constant- temperature jacket; at desired intervals, the mixture is
subcultured by ejecting small volumes from the syringe nozzle into subculture
medium.
A technique, devised by one of the authors (W.B.H.), was designed to test the
preparation when spread on to an infected surface. The surface of a nutrient agar plate
was inoculated evenly with the test organism and incubated to produce an even surface
growth. The preparation under test was spread evenly upon this, and at selected time
intervals a core of agar, cells and preparation were removed with a sterile cork-borer
and the disc of agar and cell removed by means of a sterile needle and inoculated into
recovery medium, which was then incubated. As much of the preparation is removed
as is possible and care taken to ensure its dispersal in the medium. The organism should,
if still viable, grow through the back of the agar disc to give growth in the subculture
tube also.
Tests on skin
It is possible to also test semi-solid antibacterial preparations on the skin itself, as
described for liquid disinfectants (section 3.5.1). A portion of the skin — the backs of
the fingers between the joints is a useful spot — is treated with the test organism, the
preparation is then applied and after a suitable interval the area is swabbed and the
swab incubated in a suitable medium. Alternatively, the method employing pig skin,
described in section 3.5.1, may well be adapted to the problem of testing semi- solid
skin disinfectants.
General conclusions
It is suggested that, as a minimum routine for the final test of an alleged antibacterial
semi-solid formulation, the following be used.
1 The cup-plate technique for bacteriostatic activity (section 3.6.3).
2 A test for bactericidal activity.
3 A skin test.
For routine assessment of test formulations during development work the cup-plate
and ditch-plate methods are adequate.
Solid disinfectants
Solid disinfectants (disinfectant powders) usually consist of a disinfectant substance
diluted by an inert powder. For example phenolic substances adsorbed onto kieselguhr
form the basis of many disinfectant powders, while another widely used powder of
respectable antiquity is hypochlorite powder. Disinfectant or antiseptic powders for
use in medicine include substances such as acriflavine, or antifungal compounds such
as zinc undecenoate or salicylic acid mixed with talc.
Solid disinfectants may be evaluated in vitro by applying them to suitable test
organisms growing on solid medium. Discs may be cut from the agar and subcultured,
observing the usual precautions.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 249
To test their inhibitory power, the powders may be dusted onto the surface of
seeded agar plates, using the inert diluent as a control and noting the extent of
growth.
Disinfectant and sanitary powders are the subject of a British Standard (BS
1013:1946), now withdrawn, which describes a method of determining the RW
coefficient of such powders. A weighed quantity was shaken with distilled water at
18°C for 30 minutes and this suspension was used in the test already described (section
3.1.1).
6 Evaluation of air disinfectants
One of the most potent routes for transmission of bacterial disease is via the air. Cross-
infection in hospital wards, infection in operating theatres, the transmission of disease
in closed spaces such as cinemas and other places of assembly, in the ward rooms and
crew's quarters of ships and in submarines are all well known. Of equal importance is
the provision of a bacteria-free environment for aseptic manipulations generally. Clearly,
the disinfection of atmospheres is a worthwhile field of study and to this end much
research has been done. It is equally clearly important to be able to evaluate preparations
claimed to be air disinfectants.
Heretofore the milieu on or in which the disinfectant has been required to act has
been either solid or liquid; now antibacterial action in the gas or vapour phase or in the
form of aerosol (colloidal) interaction must be considered, and this presents the problem
of determining the viable airborne population.
6.1 Determination of viable airborne microorganisms
The simplest way of assessing the viable microbial population of the air is to expose
Petri dishes containing a solid nutrient medium to the air, followed by incubation;
indeed this method was used in 1881 by Koch. Although this method does depend on
the organisms or organism-bearing particles actually falling on the plate by gravity it is
a method which is still used to assess the general cleanliness of air in pharmaceutical
factories where aseptic operations are taking place, in food processing areas or in hospital
wards. More positive data may be obtained, however, if a force other than gravity is
used to collect airborne particles.
An early attempt at quantification consisted of placing a Petri dish containing a
nutrient agar in a box beneath an inverted funnel, the stem of which passed out of the
box into the atmosphere. By applying a partial vacuum to the box, air was drawn in
through the stem of the funnel and impinged on the agar. The plate could be incubated
directly and developing colonies counted. Provided the air drawn in was metered, a
direct quantitative assessment of the viable airborne population could be made. This
idea led logically to the development of the slit sampler illustrated in Fig. 11.8. The
principle is similar to that described immediately above, but the Petri dish is placed on
a turntable which can be revolved at varying speeds and the funnel is replaced by a
cylinder in which the end nearest the nutrient medium is furnished with a slit ca. 2.5 mm
wide. The arrangement is set so that the slit runs parallel to a radius of the dish but
leaves a clear space around the circumference and at the centre of the plate. In operation,
250 Chapter 11
Fig. 11.8 Slit sampler (C.F. Casella & Co., Ltd).
a vacuum is applied to the chamber containing the turntable, air passes in through the
slit and the nutrient medium revolves so that the airborne particles, if any, are trapped
on the medium and spread in a sector over the medium.
Experimental evaluation
In brief, the experimental technique is to create a bacterial population in a close chamber,
obtain a quantitative assessment of the viable airborne bacterial population by means
of a suitable sampling device, submit the population to the disinfectant action, whether
ultraviolet light, chemical vapour or aerosol, and then determine the airborne population
at suitable intervals.
Preservatives
Preservatives may include disinfectant and antiseptic chemicals together with certain
compounds used almost exclusively as preservatives. They are added to many industrial,
including pharmaceutical, products which may, by their nature, support the growth of
bacteria and moulds causing spoilage of the product and possibly infection of the user.
In the field of pharmaceutical preservation, addition of an inhibitory substance to a
multidose injection (Chapter 21) or the prevention of growth in aqueous suspensions
of drugs intended for oral administration (Chapter 18) are prime examples.
Preservatives are widely employed in cosmetic preservation for lotions, creams
and shampoos. Preservation is also an important aspect of formulation in emulsion
paints and cutting fluids, i.e. fluids used to cool and lubricate lathe and drilling
tools.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 251
7.1 Evaluation of preservatives
Potential chemical preservatives may be evaluated in the first place by the methods
outlined above, especially by determining MIC values (section 3.6) or by viable counts
(section 3.2). The RW, CM and KS tests (sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.2) have no relevance in
preservative evaluation. It will be recalled (section 2.5) that formula ingredients may
reduce the efficiency of a preservative which has shown up well in conventional tests
using culture media as the suspending fluid.
Emulsions, especially oil-in-water emulsions which, incidentally, figure widely
in cosmetic products, are especially prone to failure because the preservative may
partition into the oily phase of the emulsion while contaminants will flourish in the
aqueous phase now deprived of preservative by partitioning (see Chapter 18 for further
details).
The cardinal requirement, therefore, for preservative efficacy is the evaluation of
the finally preserved preparation and this may be performed by means of a challenge
test. In essence, the (hopefully) preserved product is deliberately inoculated (challenged)
with suitable test organisms and incubated and examined to see if the inoculum has
been able to grow or if its growth has been successfully suppressed. There has been
extensive debate on challenge testing and the subject has been reviewed by Cowen and
Steiger(1976).
The British Pharmacopoeia (1993) contains a test for efficacy of preservatives. In
essence, the product is deliberately challenged separately by the fungus Aspergillus
niger, the yeast Candida albicans and the bacteria Ps. aeruginosa and Staph, aureus.
These organisms represent potential contaminants in the environment in which products
are prepared, stored or used. Other organisms may be used in specified circumstances,
e.g. the osmophilic yeast, Zygosaccharomyces rouxii for preparations with a high sucrose
content, and E. coli for oral liquid preparations.
Different performance criteria are laid down for injectable and ophthalmic
preparations, topical preparations and oral liquid preparations. Inhibition of the challenge
organism is determined by viable counting techniques. The British Pharmacopoeia
(1993) should be consulted for full details of the experimental procedures to be used.
The United States Pharmacopeia (1995, 23rd edn) also gives procedures for
evaluating the efficacy of antimicrobial preservatives in pharmaceutical products.
7.2 Preservative combinations
The use of preservative combinations may be used to extend the range and spectrum of
preservation. Thus, in the series of alkyl esters of 4-hydroxybenzoic (/?-hydroxybenzoic)
acid (parabens), water solubility decreases in the order: methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl
ester. By combining these products it is possible to achieve a situation where both the
aqueous and oil phase of an emulsion are protected.
Combinations may also be used to extend the spectrum of a preservative system.
Thus, the preservative Germall 115 has an essentially antibacterial activity and very
low, if not zero, antifungal activity. By combining Germall 115 with parabens, which
possess antifungal activity, a broader spectrum (antibacterial/antifungal) preservative
system is obtained.
252 Chapter 11
7.2.1
Synergy in preservative combinations
Very occasionally a combination of antimicrobial agents exhibits synergy. Synergy is
measured against a single microorganism and is exhibited when a combination of two
compounds exerts a greater inhibitory effect than could be expected from a simple
additive effect of the two compounds in the mixture.
7.2.2
Evaluation of synergy
Synergy may be evaluated and displayed by preparing mixtures of the two compounds
being investigated and determining their growth inhibitory power by means of an MIC
determination (section 3.6.1).
The results may be plotted in the form of a graph (called an isobologram) and an
example is given in Fig. 1 1.9. This graph may be interpreted as follows: 50 x 10" mg%
and 35 mg% of phenylmercuric acetate and chlorocresol, respectively, used alone,
inhibits the growth of Staph, aureus. In combination, 20 x 10""mg% of phenylmercuric
acetate and 5 mg% of chlorocresol inhibit the growth of this organism. Thus, growth
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Chlorocresol concentration (mg %f
Fig. 11.9 Isobologram (•-•) drawn from minimum growth inhibitory concentrations (MIC values)
of chlorocresol and phenylmercuric acetate used alone and in combination against Staph, aureus,
showing synergy. A, result if combination was merely additive; B, result if combination was
antagonistic.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 253
inhibition is obtained with a lower total quantity of preservative. If the combinations
were merely additive, the isobologram plot would follow the course of the dashed line
(A), and if antagonistic the dashed curve (B).
Synergy has been discussed in depth by Denyer et al. (1985) and Hodges & Hanlon
(1991).
7.2.3 Rapid methods
In many cases, especially in the food industry, it would be very useful if the performance
of a biocide or the extent of contamination of product, apparatus and working surfaces
could be deduced sooner than that provided by a method which depends on visible
microbial growth (12-24 hours). Many methods have been devised to secure a more
rapid result and have been designated rapid tests. They have recently been reviewed by
Denyer (1990).
Two such methods will be mentioned here.
1 Epifluorescence depends on the fact that certain dyes, acridine orange being widely
used, will stain cellular material. When examined in fluorescent light any living cells
present will fluoresce green or greenish yellow, whereas dead cells will appear orange
to red. The methods will be found in the literature under direct epifluorescent microscopy
(DEM) and direct epifluorescent filter technique (DEFT). In DEM, material suspected
of being contaminated or a sample in which living bacteria are sought are examined
directly; in DEFT the sample being examined is filtered and the residue on the filter
examined as above.
2 Bioluminescence. In another method, luminous bacteria, or bacteria not normally
luminous but which have been manipulated genetically to become luminous, are used.
Their death under chemical stress or presence in hygiene studies are assessed in a
sensitive light meter. A variant of mis method depends on the fact that bacterial adenosine
triphosphatase (ATPase), present in bacteria, will catalyse the normal biological light-
producing reaction to give detectable light in a sensitive meter.
This is a very brief summary but is included as readers may come across these
methods or a reference to rapid methods in their general reading or work experience.
8 Appendix: British Standards
British Standards relating to disinfectants (date in brackets at end of an entry means that the Standard
was confirmed on that date without further revision).
(1986) 'Specification for black and white disinfectants'. BS 2462: 1986 [1991].
(1986) 'Glossary of terms relating to disinfectants'. BS 5283: 1986 [1991].
(1976) 'Aromatic disinfectant fluids'. BS 5197: 1976 [1991].
(1984) 'Method for determination of the antimicrobial activity ofQAC disinfectant formulations'. BS
6471: 1984 [1994].
(1990) 'Specification for QAC based aromatic disinfectant fluids'. BS 6424: 1984 [1990].
(1985) Method for determination of the Rideal-Walker coefficient of disinfectants'. BS 541: 1985
[1991].
(1986) 'Method for assessing the efficacy of disinfectants by the modified Chick-Martin test: BS 808:
1986 [1991].
254 Chapter 11
Further reading
Akers M.J. & Taylor C.J. (1990) Official methods of preservative evaluation and testing. In: Guide to
Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals (eds S.R Denyer & R.M. Baird), pp. 292-303.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Cowen R.A. (1978) Kelsey-Sykes capacity test: a critical review. Pharm J, 220, 202-204.
Cowen R.A. & Steiger B. (1976) Antimicrobial activity — a critical review of test methods of preservative
efficiency. J Soc Cosmet Chem, 27, 467-481.
Croshaw B. (1981) Disinfectant testing — with particular reference to the Rideal-Walker and Kelsey-
Sykes tests. In: Disinfectants: Their Use and Evaluation of Effectiveness (eds C.H. Collins, M.C.
Allwood, S.F. Bloomfield & A. Fox), pp. 1-15. London: Academic Press.
Denyer S.P. (1990) Monitoring microbiological quality: application of rapid microbiological methods
to pharmaceuticals. In: Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals (eds S.P. Denyer &
R.M. Baird), pp. 146-156. Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Denyer S.P. & Hugo W.B. (eds) (1991) Mechanisms of Action of Chemical Biocides. Society for Applied
Bacteriology Technical Series No. 27. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Denyer S.P, Hugo W.B. & Harding V.D. (1985) Synergy in preservative combinations. Int J Pharm,
25,245-253.
Hodges N.A. & Hanlon G.W. (1991) Detection and measurement of combined biocide action. In:
Mechanisms of Action of Chemical Biocides (eds S.P. Denyer & W.B. Hugo), Society for Applied
Bacteriology Technical Series No. 27, pp. 297-310. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Jones M.V., Bellamy K., Alcock R. & Hudson R. (1991) The use of bacteriophage MS2 as a model
system to evaluate virucidal hand disinfectants. J Hosp Infect, 17, 270-285.
Kelsey J.C. & Maurer I.M. (1974) An improved Kelsey-Sykes test for disinfectants. Pharm J, 207,
528-530.
Leak R.E. & Leech R. (1988) Challenge tests and their predictive stability. In: Microbial Quality
Assurance in Pharmaceuticals, Cosmetics and Toiletries (eds S.F. Bloomfield, R. Baird, R.E. Leak
& R. Leach), pp. 129-146. Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Maillard J.Y., Beggs T.S., Day M.J., Hudson R.A. & Russell A.D. (1993). Effect of biocides on
Pseudomonas aeruginosa phage Fl 16. LettAppl Microb, 17, 167-170.
Orth D.S. (1990) Preservative evaluation and testing: the linear regression method. In: Guide to
Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals (eds S.P. Denyer & R.M. Baird), pp. 304-312.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Pinto R.M., Abad EX., Roca R.M., Riera J.M. & Bosch A. (1991) The use of Bacte roides frag His
phages as indicators of the efficiency of virucidal products. FEMS Microb Lett, 82, 61-66.
ResnickL., Veren K., Salahuddin S.Z., Tondreau S. & Markham P.D. (1986) Stability and inactivation
of HTLV-III/LAV under clinical and laboratory environments. J Am Med Assoc, 255, 1887-1891.
Reybrouck G. (1992) The evaluation of the antimicrobial activity of disinfectants. In: Principles and
Practice of Disinfection, Preservation and Sterilization (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J.
Ayliffe), 2nd edn, pp. 114-133. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Russell A.D. (1981) Neutralization procedures in the evaluation of bactericidal activity. In: Disinfectants:
Their Use and Evaluation of Effectiveness (eds C.H. Collins, M.C. Allwood, S.F. Bloomfield & A.
Fox), pp. 45-59. London: Academic Press.
Russell A.D. (1982) The Destruction of Bacterial Spores. London: Academic Press.
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (1996) Understanding Antibacterial Action and Resistance. Chichester: Ellis
Horwood.
Russell A.D., Hugo W.B. & Ayliffe G.A.J, (eds) (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Stannard C.J., Petitt S.B. & Skinner F.A. (eds) (1989) Rapid Microbiological Methods for Foods,
Beverages and Pharmaceuticals. Society for Applied Bacteriology Technical Series No. 25. Oxford:
Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Tyler R. & Ayliffe G.A.J. (1987) A surface test for virucidal activity of disinfectants: preliminary study
with herpes virus. J Hosp Infect, 9, 22-29.
Evaluation of non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 255
Mode of action of non-antibiotic
antibacterial agents
1
Cell wall
3.1
General coagulation
3.2
Ribosomes
2
Cytoplasmic membrane
3.3
Nucleic acids
2.1
Action on membrane potentials
3.4
Thiol groups
2.2
Action on membrane enzymes
3.5
Amino groups
2.2.1
Electron transport chain
2.2.2
Adenosine triphosphatase
4
Highly reactive com
2.2.3
Enzymes with thiol groups
reactors
2.3
Action on general membrane
permeability
5
Conclusions
2.3.1
Permeabilization
6
Further reading
Cytoplasm
This group of drugs has often been classified as non-specific protoplasmic poisons and
indeed such views are still expressed today. Such a broad generalization is, however,
very far from the true position.
It is convenient to consider the modes of action in terms of the drugs' targets within
the bacterial cell, and in the following pages various examples will be given. The targets
to be considered are the cell wall, the cytoplasmic membrane and the cytoplasm. Much
more detailed treatments of the subject will be found in the references at the end of this
chapter. Experimental methods for determining the mode of action of an antimicrobial
substance have recently been compiled (Denver & Hugo, 1991).
Cell wall
This structure is the traditional target for a group of antibiotics which include the
penicillins (Chapter 5), but a little-noticed report which appeared in 1948 showed that
low concentrations of disinfectant substances caused cell wall lysis such that a normally
turbid suspension of bacteria became clear. It was thought that these low concentrations
of disinfectant cause enzymes whose normal role is to synthesize the cell wall to reverse
their role in some way and effect its disruption or lysis.
In the original report, the disinfectants (at the following percentages: formalin,
0.12; phenol, 0.32; mercuric chloride, 0.0008; sodium hypochlorite, 0.005 and
merthiolate, 0.0004) caused lysis of Escherichia coli, streptococci and staphylococci.
Glutaraldehyde also owes part of its mode of action to its ability to react with, and
provide irreversible crosslinking in, the cell wall. As a result, other cell functions are
impaired. This phenomenon is especially found in Gram-positive cells.
Cytoplasmic membrane
Actions on the cytoplasmic membrane may be divided into three categories.
1 Action on membrane potentials.
2 Action on membrane enzymes.
3 Action on general membrane permeability.
2.1 Action on membrane potentials
Recent work has shown that bacteria, in common with chloroplasts and mitochondria,
are able, through the membrane-bound electron transport chain aerobically, or the
membrane-bound adenosine triphosphate (ATP) anerobically, to maintain a gradient of
electrical potential and pH such that the interior of the bacterial cell is negative and
alkaline. This potential gradient and the electrical equivalent of the pH difference (1 pH
unit = 58 mV at 37 °C) give a potential difference across the membrane of 100-1 80 mV,
with the inside negative. The membrane is impermeable to protons, whose extrusion
creates the potential described.
These results may be expressed in the form of an equation, thus:
A/7 = Ai/A-ZApH
where Ap is the protonmotive force, Ay/the membrane electrical potential and ApH the
transmembrane pH gradient, i.e. the pH difference between the inside and outside of
the cytoplasmic membrane. Z is a factor converting pH units to millivolts so that all the
units of the equation are the same, i.e. millivolts. Z is temperature-dependent and at
37°C has a value of 62.
This potential, or protonmotive force as it is also called, in turn drives a number of
energy-requiring functions which include the synthesis of ATP, the coupling of oxidative
processes to phosphorylation, a metabolic sequence called oxidative phosphorylation
and the transport and concentration in the cell of metabolites such as sugars and amino
acids. This, in a few simple words, is the basis of the chemiosmotic theory linking
metabolism to energy-requiring processes.
Certain chemical substances have been known for many years to uncouple
oxidation from phosphorylation and to inhibit active transport, and for this reason
they are named uncoupling agents. They are believed to act by rendering the membrane
permeable to protons hence short-circuiting the potential gradient or protonmotive
force.
Some examples of antibacterial agents which owe at least a part of their activity
to this ability are tetrachlorosalicylanilide (TCS), tricarbanilide, trichlorocarbanilide
(TCC), pentachlorophenol, di-(5-chloro-2-hydroxyphenyl) sulphide (fentichlor) and
2-phenoxy ethanol.
2.2 Action on membrane enzymes
2.2.1 Electron transport chain
Hexachlorophane inhibits the electron transport chain in bacteria and thus will inhibit
all metabolic activities in aerobic bacteria.
Action of non-antibiotic antibacterial agents 257
2.2.2 Adenosine triphosphatase
Chlorhexidine has been shown to inhibit the membrane ATPase and could thus inhibit
anaerobic processes.
2.2. 3 Enzymes with thiol groups
Mercuric chloride, other mercury-containing antibacterials and silver will inhibit
enzymes in the membrane, and for that matter in the cytoplasm, which contain thiol,
-SH, groups. A similar action is shown by 2-bromo-2-nitropropan-l,3-diol (bronopol)
and iso-thiazolones. Under appropriate conditions the toxic action on cell thiol groups
may be reversed by addition of an extrinsic thiol compound, for example cysteine or
thiogly collie acid (see also Chapters 12 and 23).
2.3 Action on general membrane permeability
This lesion was recognized early as being one effect of many disinfectant substances.
The membrane, as well as providing a dynamic link between metabolism and transport,
serves to maintain the pool of metabolites within it.
Treatment of bacterial cells with appropriate concentrations of such substances
as cetrimide, chlorhexidine, phenol and hexylresorcinol, causes a leakage of a group
of characteristic chemical species. The potassium ion, being a small entity, is the first
substance to appear when the cytoplasmic membrane is damaged. Amino acids, purines,
pyrimidines and pentoses are examples of other substances which will leak from treated
cells.
If the action of the drug is not prolonged or exerted in high concentration the damage
may be reversible and leakage may only induce bacteriostasis.
2.3.1 Permeabilization
Drugs able to affect outer membrane integrity have also been exploited as potentiators
of antimicrobial agents (biocides, i.e. redisinfectants, antiseptics and preservatives, and
antibiotics) thereby helping these to penetrate the outer membrane of Gram-negative
organisms and especially Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
Chelators, especially ethylenediamine tetra-acetic acid (EDTA), have been used
as potentiators of the action of chloroxylenol. Vaara has extensively reviewed the
subject of permeabilization and Ayres, Furr and Russell have described a rapid
method of evaluating the permeabilization of Ps. aeruginosa (see Further Reading,
Section 6).
Cytoplasm
Within the cytoplasm are a number of important subcellular particles which include
the ribosome and oxy- and deoxyribonucleic acids. Enzymes other than those in the
membrane are also present in the cytoplasm.
258 Chapter 12
Many early studies measured overall enzyme inhibition in bacterial cultures and a
search was made for a peculiarly sensitive enzyme which might be identified as a
target, interference with which would cause death. No such enzyme has been found.
3.1 General coagulation
High concentrations of disinfectants, for example chlorhexidine, phenol or mercury
salts, will coagulate the cytoplasm and in fact it was this kind of reaction which gave
rise to the epithet 'general protoplasmic poison', already referred to, providing an
uncritical and dismissive definition of the mode of action of disinfectants. There is
little doubt, however, that the disinfectants in use in the 1930s had just this effect when
applied at high concentrations.
3.2 Ribosomes
These organelles, the sites of protein synthesis, are well-established targets for antibiotic
action.
Both hydrogen peroxide andp-chloromercuribenzoate will dissociate the ribosome
into its two constituent parts but whether this is a secondary reaction of the two chemicals
is difficult to assess. There is no real evidence that the ribosome is a prime target for
disinfectant substances.
3.3 Nucleic acids
Acridine dyes used as antiseptics, i.e. proflavine and acriflavine, will react specifically
with nucleic acids, by fitting into the double helical structure of this unique molecule.
In so doing they interfere with its function and can thereby cause cell death.
3.4 Thiol groups
Mention has been made of thiol groups in the cytoplasmic membrane as targets for
certain antibacterial compounds. Thiol groups also occur in the cytoplasm and these
groups will also serve as targets.
Bronopol, wo-thiazolones, chlorine, chlorine-releasing agents, hypochlorites and
iodine will oxidize or react with thiol groups.
3.5 Amino groups
Formaldehyde, sulphur dioxide and glutaraldehyde react with amino groups. If these
groups are essential for metabolic activity, cell death will follow reactions of this nature.
Chlorinated /'so-thiazolones as well as acting on -SH groups, (Section 3.4), can react
with -NH 2 groups.
Highly reactive compounds: multitarget reactors
There are one or two chemical sterilants in use whose chemical reactivity is so high
Action of non-antibiotic antibacterial agents 259
Table 12.1 Cellular-targets for non-antibiotic antibacterial drugs
Agent
o
o
i>
J2 <o
= t o x : o 5
>--
Target o r reaction attacked
<<coooujijLUXXx
2 S
1 Cell wall
2 Cytoplasmic membrane
2.1 Action on membrane potentials
2.2 Action on membrane enzymes
2.2.1 Electron transport chain
2.2.2 Adenosine triphosphatase
2.2.3 Enzymes with thiol groups
2.3 Action on general membrane
permeability
3 Cytoplasm
3.1 General coagulation
3.2 Ribosomes
3.3 Nucleic acids
3.4 Thiol groups
3.5 Amino groups
4 High reactive compounds:
multitarget reactors
+
+
+
+
+
+++ +++
++
+++
+ +
+
+
++
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+++
+
+
Crosses, indicating activity, which appear in several rows for a given compound, demonstrate the multiple actions for the compound c
concentration-dependent, and the number of crosses indicates the order of concentration at which the effect is elicited, i.e. +, elicited a
high concentrations.
When a cross appears in only one target row, this is the only known site of action of the drug.
QAC, quaternary ammonium compound.
Formaldehyde
Hg 1 *
Sodium hypochlorite .
Very low
concentrations
cause [ysra
Cytoplasmic
constituents,
_fwbggei_leak_ed
Sronopoi
Ctf\Ag+
Efhytene oxide
Hydrogen peroxide
HytxtvhtQrit&s
iotfine
Chlorinated
isomjazolones
Formaldehyde
Ethylene pJrid*
Gitrtareidetiyde
Chlorinated
ivoth/azolones
Cytoplasmic
-SH groups
XXXXXXXpwa
Detergents
Chiorriaxidtne
Ateortots
U
M&Tnbrahd ATPhh
oyrds
ShQrt-vhairt
organic acids
w
ptbtQfi motive
force
phosphorylation
2&QmitroprtQnot
Cartsartfiidas
Ssfjcyfgijtfide
Soma phonoia
P&raberta
Long-chain
organic adds
-Cytoplasm
Higri
PhenQts
Chforhaxidine
GiutarAldehy&e
Cfltfanic ngQfits
CNorhsxidina Hexachiarophan&
Electron transport
system
£%, 12.1 Diagram showing main Lafgets f-or non-antLbtoiic antitactenaE agents
that they have a very wide spectrum of cell interactions and it is difficult to pin-point
the fatal reaction. In fact, it is safe to say that there is no single fatal reaction but that
death results from the accumulated effects of many reactions; one or two specific
reactions of compounds in this category have already been referred to.
/3-Propiolactone is one example. It will alkylate amino, imino, hydroxyl and carboxyl
groups, all of which occur in proteins, and react also with thiol and disulphide groups
responsible for the secondary structure of proteins and the activity of some enzymes.
Another example is ethylene oxide, which has a very similar range of chemical
activity.
Sulphur dioxide, sulphites and bisulphites, used as preservatives in fruit juices,
ciders and perrys are yet other examples.
Conclusions
The above account, Table 12.1 and Fig. 12.1 all indicate the range and complexity of
the reactions involved in the action of some non-antibiotic antibacterial agents.
The concentration-dependent dual or even multiple role of many of these substances
should be noted. For a more detailed treatment the reader is directed to the references
given below.
Further reading
Ayres H., Furr J.R. & Russell A.D. (1993) A rapid method of evaluating permeabilizing activity against
Pseudomonas aeruginosa. Lett Ap pi Microbiol, 17, 149-187.
Collier P.J., Ramsey A.J., Austin P. & Gilbert P. (1991) Uptake and distribution of some isothiazolone
biocides in Escherichia coli and Schizosaccharomycespom.be NCYC 1354. Int J Pharm, 66, 201-
206 and preceding two papers.
Denyer S.P. & Hugo W.B. (eds) (1991) Mechanisms of Action of Chemical Biocides: their Study and
Exploitation. Society for Applied Bacteriology Technical Series No. 27. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific
Publications.
Fuller S J., Denyer S.P, Hugo W.B., Pemberton D., Woodcock P.M., & Buckley A.J. (1985) The mode
of action of l,2-benzisothiazolin-3 one on Staphylococcus aureus. Lett Ap pi Microbiol, 1, 13-15.
Hugo W.B. (1967) The mode of action of antiseptics. J Appl Bacteriol, 30, 17-50.
Hugo W.B. (ed.) (1971) The Inhibition and Destruction of the Microbial Cell. London: Academic Press.
Hugo W.B. (1976a) Survival of microbes exposed to chemical stress. In: The Survival of Vegetative
Microbes (eds T.R.G. Gray & J.R. Postgate), pp. 383-413. 26th Symposium of the Society for
General Microbiology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hugo W.B. (1976b) The inactivation of vegetative bacteria by chemicals. In: The Inactivation of
Vegetative Bacteria (eds F.A. Skinner & W.B. Hugo), pp. 1-11. Symposium of the Society of Applied
Bacteriology. London: Academic Press.
Hugo W.B. (1980) The mode of action of antiseptics. In: Wirkungmechanisma von Antiseptica (eds H.
Wigert & W Weufen), pp. 39-77. Berlin: VEB Verlag.
Hugo W.B. (1992) Disinfection mechanisms. In: Principles and Practice of Disinfection, Preservation
and Sterilization, 2nd edn. (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J. Ayliffe), pp. 187-210. Oxford:
Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (1996) Understanding Antibacterial Action and Resistance 2nd edn. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood.
Russell A.D. & Hugo W.B. (1994) Antimicrobial activity and action of silver. In Progress in Medicinal
Chemistry (eds G.P. Ellis & D.K. Luscombe), vol. 39, pp. 351-370. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Vaara M. (1992) Agents that increase the permeability of the outer membrane. Microbiol Rev, 56,
395-41 1 .
262 Chapter 12
Resistance to non-antibiotic
antimicrobial agents
1 Introduction
2 Relative microbial responses to
biocides
3 Bacterial resistance to biocides:
general mechanisms
4 Intrinsic bacterial resistance
4.1 Gram-positive cocci
4.2 Gram-negative bacteria
4.2.1 Enterobacteriaceae
4.2.2 Pseudomonads
4.3 Mycobacteria
4.4 Bacterial spores
4.4.1 Spore structure
4.4.2 Spore development (sporulation) and
resistance
4.4.3 Mature spores and resistance
4.4.4 Germination, outgrowth and
susceptibility
4.5 Physiological (phenotypic) adaptation
to intrinsic resistance
5 Acquired bacterial resistance to
biocides
5.1 Resistance acquired by mutation
5.2 Plasmid-encoded resistance
5.2.1 Resistance to cations and anions
5.2.2 Resistance to other biocides
6 Sensitivity and resistance of fungi
6.1 General comments
6.2 Mechanisms of fungal resistance
7 Sensitivity and resistance of protozoa
8 Sensitivity and resistance of viruses
9 Activity of biocides against prions
10 Pharmaceutical and medical
relevance
11 Further reading
Introduction
Biocides are widely used as antiseptics, disinfectants and preservatives in a variety of
fields, e.g. industrial, medical and pharmaceutical, dental, veterinary, food microbiology.
Several factors are known to influence biocidal activity: these include the period of
contact, biocide concentration, pH, temperature, the presence of organic matter and the
nature and condition of the microorganisms being treated. Bacterial resistance to
antibiotics is a well-established phenomenon and has been widely studied for many
years. By contrast, the mechanisms of insusceptibility to non-antibiotic chemical agents
are less well understood.
Relative microbial responses to biocides
Different types of microbes show varying responses to biocides. This is demonstrated
clearly in Table 13.1. Additionally, it must be noted that Gram-positive bacteria such as
staphylococci and streptococci are generally more sensitive to biocides than are Gram-
negative bacteria. Enterococci are frequently antibiotic-resistant, but are not necessarily
more resistant to biocides than are streptococci. Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus
aureus (MRS A) strains are rather more resistant to biocides, especially cationic ones,
than are methicillin-sensitive Staph, aureus (MSSA) strains. Amongst Gram-negative
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 263
Table 13.1 Comparative responses of microorganisms to biocides
Type of microorganism
Biocide susceptibility or
resistance
Bacteria
Fungi
Viruses
Parasites
Prions
Non-sporing most susceptible, acid-
fast bacteria intermediate, spores most
resistant
Fungal spores may be resistant
Non-enveloped more resistant than
enveloped
Coccidia may be highly resistant
Usually highly resistant
bacteria, the most marked resistance is shown by Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Providencia
stuartii and Proteus species.
Mycobacteria are more resistant than other non-sporulating bacteria to a wide range
of biocides. Examples of such organisms axe Mycobacterium tuberculosis, theM avium-
intracellulare (MAI) group and M. chelonae (M. chelonei). Of the bacteria, however,
the most resistant of all to biocides are bacterial spores, e.g. Bacillus subtilis, B. cereus.
Moulds and yeasts show varying responses to biocides. These organisms are often
important in the pharmaceutical context because they may cause spoilage of formulated
products. Various types of protozoa are potentially pathogenic and inactivation by
biocides may be problematic. Viral response to biocides depends upon the type and
structure of the virus particle and on the nature of the biocide.
The most resistant of all infectious agents to chemical inactivation are the prions,
which cause transmissible degenerative encephalopathies.
These different types of microorganisms are considered below; whenever possible,
the mechanisms of resistance will be considered and the clinical or pharmaceutical
relevance discussed.
Bacterial resistance to biocides: general mechanisms
Bacterial resistance to biocides (Table 13.2) is usually considered as being of two types:
(a) intrinsic (innate, natural), a natural property of an organism, or (b) acquired, either
by chromosomal mutation or by the acquisition of plasmids or transposons. Intrinsic
resistance to biocides is usually demonstrated by Gram-negative bacteria, mycobacteria
and bacterial spores whereas acquired resistance can result by mutation or, more
frequently, by the acquisition of genetic elements, e.g. plasmid- (or transposon-)
mediated resistance to mercury compounds. Intrinsic resistance may also be exemplified
by physiological (phenotypic) adaptation, a classical example of which is biofilm
production.
264 Chapter 13
Intrinsic bacterial resistance
As already pointed out, staphylococci and streptococci are generally more sensitive to
biocides than are Gram-negative bacteria; examples are provided in Table 13.3. On the
Table 13.2 Intrinsic and acquired bacterial resistance to biocides
Distinguishing
feature
Intrinsic
resistance
Acquired
resistance
General property
Natural property
Mechanisms*
(1) Alteration of
biocide (enzymatic
inactivation)
(2) Impaired uptake
(3) Efflux
Biofilm production
Pharmaceutical/clinical
significance
Chromosomally mediated,
but not usually
relevant
Applies to several biocides
Not known
Phenotypic adaptation
High
Achieved by mutation or
by acquisition of plasmid
or transposon (Tn)
Plasmid/Tn-mediated
e.g. mercurials
Less important
Cationic biocides and
antibiotic-resistant staphylococci
Plasmid transfer may occur
within biofilms
Could be high in certain
circumstances
See Table 13.4 for additional information.
rable 13.3 Sensitivity of microorganisms to chlorhexidine
Drganism
Minimum inhibitory
concentration *(ugmh')
3ram-negative bacteria
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
Proteus mirabilis
Pseudomonas cepacia
Serratia marcescens
Salmonella typhimurium
Klebsiella aerogenes
Escherichia coli
3ram-positive bacteria
Staphylococcus aureus
Enterococcus faecalis
Bacillus subtilis
Streptococcus mutans
Mycobacterium tuberculosis
: ungi
Candida albicans
Trichophyton mentagrophytes
Penicillium notatum
10-500
25-100
5-100
3-50
H
1-12
1-5
1-2
1-3
1-3
0.1
0.7-6
7-15
3
200
* The minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) is the lowest concentration of an antimicrobial agent
that prevents growth. The lower the MIC value, the more active the agent.
other hand, mycobacteria and especially bacterial spores are much more resistant. A
major reason for this variation in response is associated with the chemical composition
and structure of the outer cell layers such that there is restricted uptake of a biocide. In
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 265
consequence of this cellular impermeability, a reduced concentration of the antimicrobial
compound is available at the target site(s) so that the cell may escape severe injury.
Another, less frequently observed, mechanism is the presence of constitutive, biocide-
degrading enzymes.
Intrinsic resistance may than be defined as a natural, chromosomally controlled
property of a bacterial cell that enables it to circumvent the action of a biocide (see
Table 13.2). A summary of intrinsic resistance mechanisms is provided in Table 13.4.
4.1 Gram-positive cocci
The cell wall of staphylococci is composed essentially of peptidoglycan and teichoic
acids. Substances of high molecular weight can traverse the wall, a ready explanation
for the sensitivity of these organisms to most biocides. However, the plasticity of the
bacterial cell envelope is well known and the growth rate and any growth-limiting
nutrient will affect the physiological state of the cells. The thickness and degree of
crosslinking of peptidoglycan may be modified and hence the sensitivity of the cells to
antibacterial agents. Likewise 'fattened' cells of Staph, aureus which have been trained
in the laboratory to contain much higher levels of cell wall lipid than normal cells, are
less sensitive to higher phenols. Normally, staphylococci contain little or no cell wall
lipid and consequently the lipid-enriched cells represent physiologically adapted cells
which present an intrinsic resistance to certain biocidal agents.
4.2 Gram-negative bacteria
4.2.1 Enter obacteriaceae
A great deal of our current understanding of the structure and function of the outer
membrane of Gram-negative bacteria has come from studies with Escherichia coli and
Salmonella typhimurium. The permeability barrier function of the outer membrane can
Table 13.4 Examples of intrinsic resistance mechanisms to biocides in bacteria
Type of
resistance
Bacteria
Mechanism
Examples
Impermeability
Gram-negative
OM barrier
QACs, triclosan,
diamidines
Mycobacteria
Waxy cell wall
QACs, chlorhexidine,
organomercurials
i
Bacterial spores
Spore coats and
QACs, chlorhexidine,
i
cortex
organomercurials,
phenols
Other Gram-positive
Phenototypic
adaptation
Chlorhexidine
Enzymatic
Gram-negative
Chemical
inactivation
Chlorhexidine
OM, outer membrane; QAC, quaternary ammonium compound.
266 Chapter 13
be demonstrated by treatment of E. coli cells with ethylenediamine tetra-acetic acid
(EDTA), which greatly enhances their permeability and sensitivity towards antimicrobial
agents. By binding metal ions such as magnesium, which is essential for the stability of
the outer membrane, EDTA releases 30-50% of the lipopolysaccharide (LPS) from the
outer membrane together with some phospholipid and protein. The permeability barrier
is effectively removed and the cells, which retain their viability, then become sensitive
to large hydrophobic antibiotics such as fucidin and rifampicin against which they are
normally resistant. More complete removal of the outer membrane and peptidoglycan
with EDTA and lysozyme (a muramidase enzyme which degrades peptidoglycan)
produces spheroplasts in Gram-negative bacteria. These osmotically fragile, but viable,
cells are equivalent to protoplasts of Gram-positive bacteria, which are cells where the
wall has been completely removed with lysozyme. Both spheroplasts and protoplasts
are equally sensitive to lysis by membrane-active agents such as quaternary ammonium
compounds (QACs), phenols and chlorhexidine. This demonstrates that the difference
in sensitivities of whole cells to these agents is not due to a difference in sensitivity of
the target cytoplasmic membrane but in the different permeability properties of the
overlying wall or envelope structures.
The outer membrane of Gram-negative bacteria plays an important role in limiting
access of susceptible target sites to antibiotics and biocides. This means that, as pointed
out earlier (see Table 13.3), Gram-negative bacteria are usually less sensitive to many
antibacterial agents than are Gram-positive organisms. This is particularly marked with
inhibitors such as hexachlorophane, diamidines, QACs, triclosan and some lipophilic
acids.
The surface of deep rough (heptose-less) mutants of E. coli and Sal. typhimurium
is more hydrophobic than the surface of smooth, wild-type bacteria because of the
presence of phospholipid patches on the surface of the former. Deep rough mutants are
hypersensitive to hydrophobic drugs and biocides. In wild-type bacteria, the porins
and intact LPS molecules prevent ready access of hydrophobic molecules to the
underlying phospholipid molecules. Studies with a homologous series of parabens
(the methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl esters of /?-hydroxybenzoic acid) of increasing
lipophilicity have demonstrated that activity increases from methyl to butyl against
smooth strains and considerably more against rough strains of both E. coli and Sal.
typhimurium. The butyl ester has the greatest, and the methyl ester the least, effect on
the cytoplasmic membrane.
The hydrated nature of amino acid residues lining the porin channels presents an
energetically unfavourable barrier to the passage of hydrophobic molecules. In the
rough strains the reduction in the amount of polysaccharide on the cell surface allows
hydrophobic molecules to approach the surface of the outer membrane and cross the
outer membrane lipid bilayer by passive diffusion. This process is greatly facilitated in
the deep rough and heptose-less strains which have phospholipid molecules on the
outer face of their outer membranes as well as on the inner face. The exposed areas of
phospholipids favour the absorption and penetration of the hydrophobic agents.
Two pathways now emerge for penetration of antibacterial agents across the outer
membrane:
1 hydrophilic, which is porin-mediated;
2 hydrophobic, involving diffusion.
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 267
This picture holds for all Gram-negative bacteria. It is especially important for the
Enterobacteriaceae which survive the antibacterial action of hydrophobic bile salts and
fatty acids in the gut by the combined effects of the penetration barrier of their smooth
LPS and the small size of their porin channels (which restricts passage of hydrophilic
molecules to those of molecular weight less than 650). By contrast, an organism like
Neisseria gonorrhoeae, which does not produce an O-antigen polysaccharide on its
LPS and is naturally rough, is very sensitive to hydrophobic molecules. Natural fatty
acids help to defend the body against these organisms.
Cationic biocides which have strong surface-active properties and which attack the
inner (cytoplasmic) membrane, e.g. chlorhexidine and QACs, also damage the outer
membrane and thus are believed to mediate their own uptake into the cells. Segments
of the outer membrane are removed, thereby allowing access of these antibacterial
agents to the periplasm and vulnerable cytoplasmic membrane. Their effect can be
seen quite dramatically under the electron microscope. Small bulges or blebs appear
on the outer face of the outer membrane. The blebs increase in size and are released
from the cells as vesicles containing LPS, protein and phospholipid. The outer membrane
has a limited capacity to reassemble itself; this it does with phospholipids spontaneously
re-forming into a bilayer. If the amount of outer membrane material released is too
great to be compensated for by phospholipid, the cells lose their protective barrier, and
the agents penetrate to the cytoplasmic membrane and cause irreversible damage.
It must also be pointed out that the QACs are considerably less active against wild-
type than against deep rough strains of E. coli and Sal. typhimurium. It is clear, then,
that the outer membrane must act as a permeability barrier against these compounds.
Studies with porin-deficient mutants of many Gram-negative species have confirmed
that detergents do not use the porin channels to gain access to the cytoplasmic membrane.
Porin-deficient strains in general show no difference in sensitivity to detergents compared
with their parent strains, even though the permeability of their outer membrane to
small hydrophilic molecules is reduced up to 100-fold. Other mutations affecting the
stability of the outer membrane, such as loss of the lipoprotein which anchors it to the
peptidoglycan, are associated with extreme sensitivity to membrane-active agents. Some
mutants of E. coli are highly permeable and sensitive to a wide range of antimicrobial
agents, but have no major defect in envelope composition. The explanation presumably
lies in the way the individual components are organized in the envelope. Since
components are not covalently linked together, ionic interactions mediated by divalent
metal ions play an important part in maintaining the integrity of the outer membrane.
For this reason, EDTA is particularly effective in destabilizing the outer membrane and
making it permeable to agents. EDTA potentiates the action of many antimicrobials
and for this purpose is a valuable additive to preservatives, especially QACs. One
disinfectant formulation that has been available commercially has EDTA and the
phenolic agent chloroxylenol as its active constituents.
Hospital isolates of Serratia marcescens may be highly resistant to chlorhexidine,
hexachlorophane liquid soaps and detergent creams. The outer membrane probably
determines resistance to biocides.
Members of the genus Proteus are unusually resistant to high concentrations of
chlorhexidine and other cationic biocides and are more resistant to EDTA than most
other types of Gram-negative bacteria. A less acidic type of LPS may be responsible
for reduced binding of, and hence increased resistance to, cationic biocides. Decreased
susceptibility to EDTA may result from the reduced divalent cation content of the Proteus
outer membrane.
Pseudomonads
Pseudomonas aeruginosa is notorious for its ability to survive in the environment,
particularly in moist conditions. It is a dangerous contaminant of medicines, surgical
equipment, clothing and dressings, with the ability to cause serious infections in
immunocompromised patients. The intrinsic resistance of Gram-negative bacteria is
especially apparent with Ps. aeruginosa; many disinfectants and preservatives possess
insufficient activity against it to be of any use. Added to the problem of natural resistance
to antimicrobials is the organism's extensive repertoire of phenotypic variation.
The basis of the greater resistance of Ps. aeruginosa compared with other Gram-
negative bacteria (see Table 13.3) is not at all clear. The answer presumably lies in the
properties of the envelope because when this is removed, the resulting spheroplasts are
just as sensitive as those of other organisms. The outer membrane is not significantly
different from that of other organisms in terms of overall composition. The same
components (LPS, proteins, phospholipid, peptidoglycan) are present. One difference
is the number of phosphate groups present in the lipid A region of the LPS. This is
significantly higher in Ps. aeruginosa than in members of the Enterobacteriaceae and
might account for the unusual sensitivity of the organism to EDTA. The high phosphate
content means that the outer membrane is unusually dependent upon divalent metal
ions for stability; their removal by EDTA therefore has a dramatic effect upon cell
integrity. Magnesium-depleted cells of Ps. aeruginosa are extremely resistant to EDTA.
Presumably the lower magnesium content of the cell envelope reflects a decreased
phosphorylation of lipid A. Other effects follow from magnesium depletion, including
complex changes in lipid composition and increased production of an outer membrane
protein known as HI, which is believed to replace magnesium ions in binding together
LPS molecules on the cell surface.
Burkholderia (formerly Pseudomonas) cepacia is intrinsically resistant to a number
of biocides, notably benzalkonium chloride and chlorhexidine. Again, the outer
membrane is likely to act as a permeability barrier. By contrast, Ps. stutzeri (an organism
implicated in eye infections caused by some cosmetic products) is invariably intrinsically
sensitive to a range of biocides, including QACs and chlorhexidine. This organism
contains less wall muramic acid than other pseudomonads but it is unclear as to whether
this could be a contributory factor in its enhanced biocide susceptibility.
Mycobacteria
Mycobacteria consist of a fairly diverse group of acid-fast bacteria. The best-known
members are M. tuberculosis andM. leprae, the causative agents of tuberculosis and
leprosy, respectively. Other mycobacteria can also cause serious infection, e.g. members
of the MAI group, and there are many opportunistic species.
Mycobacteria show a high level of resistance to inactivation by biguanides
(e.g. chlorhexidine), QACs and organomercurials. Phenols may or may not be
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 269
mycobactericidal. Alkaline glutaraldehyde exerts a lethal effect but more slowly than
against other non-sporulating bacteria, but MAI is more resistant than M. tuberculosis.
Recently, glutaraldehyde-resistant M. chelonae strains have been isolated from
endoscope washers.
The mycobacterial cell wall is highly hydrophobic, with a mycoylarabinogalactan-
peptidoglycan skeleton composed of two covalently linked polymers, an arabinagalactan
mycolate (my colic acid, D-arabinose and D-galactose) and a peptidoglycan containing
Af-glycomuramic acid instead of A A -acetylmuramic acid. The mycolic acids have an
important role to play in reducing cell wall permeability to hydrophilic molecules.
However, porins are present which are similar to those found in Ps. aeruginosa cell
envelopes so that only low molecular weight hydrophilic substances can enter the cell
via this route.
Overall, the mechanisms involved in the role of the mycobacterial cell wall as a
permeability barrier are poorly understood and it is not known why MAI and
M. chelonae, in particular, are more resistant than other species of mycobacteria.
4.4 Bacterial spores
Bacterial spores, of the genera Bacillus and Clostridium, are invariably the most resistant
of all types of bacteria to biocides. Many biocides, e.g. biguanides and QACs, will kill
(or at low concentrations be bacteriostatic to) non-sporulating bacteria but not bacterial
spores. Other biocides such as alkaline glutaraldehyde are sporicidal, although higher
concentrations for longer contact periods may be necessary than for a bactericidal effect
4.4. 1 Spore structure
A typical bacterial spore has several components (Chapter 1, see Fig. 1.8). The germ
cell (protoplast or core) and germ cell wall are surrounded by the cortex, external to
which are the inner and outer spore coats. An exosporium is present in some spores but
may surround just one spore coat. The protoplast is the location of RNA, DNA,
dipicolinic acid (DPA) and most of the calcium, potassium, manganese and phosphorus
present in the spore. Also present are substantial amounts of low molecular weight
basic proteins, the small acid-soluble spore proteins (S ASPs) which are rapidly degraded
during germination. The cortex consists largely of peptidoglycan, some 45-60% of the
muramic acid residues not having either a peptide or an TV-acetyl substituent but instead
forming an internal amide known as muramic lactam. The cortical membrane (germ
cell wall, primordial cell wall) is a dense inner layer of the cortex that develops into
the cell wall of the emergent cell when the cortex is degraded during germination.
Two membranes, the inner and outer forespore membranes, surround the forespore
during germination. The inner forespore membrane eventually becomes the cytoplasmic
membrane of the germinating spore, whereas the outer forespore membrane persists in
the spore integuments.
The spore coats make up a major portion of the spore, consisting mainly of protein
with smaller amounts of complex carbohydrates and lipid and possibly large amounts
of phosphorus. The outer spore coat contains the alkali-resistant protein fraction and is
associated with the presence of disulphide-rich bonds. The alkali-soluble fraction is
270 Chapter 13
found in the inner spore coats and consists predominantly of acidic polypeptides
which can be dissociated to their unit components by treatment with sodium dodecyl
sulphate.
Spore development (sporulation) and resistance
Response to a biocide depends upon the cellular stage of development. Sporulation, a
process in which a bacterial spore develops from a vegetative cell, involves seven
stages (I- VII; Chapter 1, see Fig. 1.9); of these, stages IV- VII (cortex and coat
development) are the most important in relation to the development of biocide resistance.
Resistance to biocidal agents develops during sporulation and may be an early,
intermediate or late/very late event. For example, resistance to chlorhexidine occurs at
an intermediate stage, at about the same time as heat resistance, whereas decreasing
susceptibility to glutaraldehyde is a very late event.
Mature spores and resistance
Spore coatless forms, produced by treatment of spores under alkaline conditions with
UDS (urea plus dithiothreitol plus sodium lauryl sulphate), have been of value in
estimating the role of the coats in limiting access of biocides to their target sites.
However, this treatment removes a certain amount of spore cortex also. The amount of
cortex remaining can be further reduced by subsequent use of lysozyme. These findings,
taken as a whole, demonstrate that the spore coats have an undoubted role to play in
conferring resistance of spores to biocides and that the cortex, also, is an important
barrier especially since (UDS + lysozyme)-treated spores are much more sensitive to
chlorine- and iodine-releasing agents than are UDS -exposed spores.
SASPs comprise about 10-20% of the protein in the dormant spore, exist in two
forms {a Ifi and y) an d are degraded during germination. They are essential for
expression of spore resistance to ultraviolet radiation and also appear to be involved in
resistance to some biocides, e.g. hydrogen peroxide. Spores (a~ /3~) deficient in a//3-
type SASPs are much more peroxide-sensitive than are wild-type (normal) spores. It
has been proposed that in wild-type spores DNA is saturated with a/j3-type SASPs and
is thus protected from free radical damage.
Germination, outgrowth and susceptibility
During germination and/or outgrowth, cells regain their sensitivity to antibacterial agents.
Some inhibitors act at the germination stage (e.g. phenolics, parabens), whereas others
such as chlorhexidine and the QACs do not affect germination but inhibit outgrowth.
Glutaraldehyde, at low concentrations, is an effective inhibitor of both stages. During
germination, several degradative changes occur in the spore, e.g. loss of dry weight,
decrease in optical density, loss of dipicolinic acid, increase in stainability, increase in
oxygen consumption; whereas biosynthetic processes (RNA, DNA, protein, cell wall
syntheses) become apparent during outgrowth. It is difficult, at present, to put forward
a theory that will account for the relatively specific activity of most biocides during
these two very dissimilar cellular changes.
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 271
4.5 Physiological (phenotypic) adaptation to intrinsic resistance
Bacteria grown under different conditions may show wide response to biocides. For
example, fattened cells of Staph, aureus obtained by repeated subculturing in glycerol-
containing media are more resistant to benzylpenicillin and higher phenols.
Both nutrient limitation and reduced growth rates may alter the sensitivity of bacteria
to biocides. These changes in susceptibility can be considered as the expression of
intrinsic resistance brought about by exposure to environmental conditions. These
aspects assume greater importance when organisms existing as biofilms are considered.
The association of microorganisms with solid surfaces leads to the generation of
biofilms, which may be considered as consortia of bacteria organized within an extensive
exopoly saccharide polymer (glycocalyx). The physiology of bacteria existing at different
parts of biofilm is affected because the cells experience different nutrient conditions.
Growth rates are likely to be reduced within the depths of a biofilm, one reason being
the growth-limiting concentrations of essential nutrients that are available. Consequently,
the sessile organisms present differ phenotypically from the planktonic-type cells found
in liquid cultures. Frequently, bacteria within a biofilm are less sensitive to a biocide
than planktonic cells.
Apart from nutrient limitation and diminished growth rates, another reason for this
decreased susceptibility is the prevention of access of a biocide to the underlying cells.
Thus, in this mechanism, the glycocalyx as well the rate of growth of the biofilm micro-
colony in relation to the diffusion rate of the biocide across the biofilm, can affect
susceptibility. A possible third mechanism involves the increased production of degra-
dative enzymes by attached cells, but the importance of this has yet to be determined.
The non-random distribution of bacteria in biofilms has important applications for
industry (biofouling, corrosion) and in medical practice (use of appliances within the
human body).
5 Acquired bacterial resistance to biocides
Acquired resistance to biocides results from genetic changes in a cell and arises either
by mutation or by the acquisition of genetic material (plasmids, transposons) from
another cell (Table 13.5).
5.1 Resistance acquired by mutation
Acquired, non-plasmid-encoded resistance to biocides can result when bacteria are
exposed to gradually increasing concentrations of a biocide. Examples are provided by
highly QAC -resistant Serratia marcescens, and chlorhexidine-resistant Ps. mirabilis,
Ps. aeruginosa and Ser. marcescens.
5.2 Plasmid-encoded resistance
5.2.7 Resistance to cations and anions
Amongst the Enterobacteriaceae, plasmids may carry genes specifying resistance to
272 Chapter 13
Table 13.5 Examples of acquired resistance mechanisms to biocides in bacteria
Type of
resistance
Bacteria
Mechanism
Examples
Enzymatic
Gram-positive*
Plasm id/Tn-encoded
Mercury compounds
Gram-negative
inactivation
Mercury compounds,
formaldehyde
Impaired uptake
Gram-negative
Plasmid-encoded
porin modification
QACs
Efflux
Gram-positive*
Plasmid-encoded
QACs
expulsion from cells
Chlorhexidine?
QAC, quaternary ammonium compound.
* Non-mycobacterial, non-sporing bacteria.
antibiotics and in some instances to mercury, organomercury and other cations and
some anions. Mercury resistance is inducible and is not the result of training or tolerance.
Transposon (Tn) 501 conferring mercury resistance has been widely studied. Plasmids
conferring resistance to mercury are of two types:
1 'narrow spectrum', conferring resistance to Hg(II) and to a few specified
organomercurials;
2 'broad spectrum', encoding resistance to those in (1) plus other organomercury
compounds.
There is enzymatic reduction of mercury to Hg metal and its vaporization in 1, and
enzymatic hydrolysis followed by vaporization in 2. Plasmid-encoded resistance to
other metallic ions has also been described but, apart from silver, is probably of little
clinical relevance.
Plasmid-mediated resistance to silver salts is of particular importance in the hospital
environment, because silver nitrate and silver sulphadiazine may be used topically for
preventing infections in severe burns. Silver reduction is not a primary resistance
mechanism since sensitive and resistant cells can equally convert Ag + to metallic silver.
Plasmid-mediated resistance to silver salts is, in fact, difficult to demonstrate, but where
it has been shown to occur, decreased accumulation rather than silver reduction is
believed to be the mechanism involved.
5.2.2
Resistance to other biocides
Plasmid-mediated resistance to other biocides has not been widely studied and
the results to date may be somewhat conflicting. Plasmid-encoded resistance to
formaldehyde has been described in Ser. marcescens, presumably due to aldehyde
degradation. There is evidence that some plasmids are responsible for producing surface
changes in cells and that the response depends not only on the plasmid but also on the
host cell. Gram-negative bacteria showing high resistance to QACs and chlorhexidine
as well as to antibiotics have been isolated but it has not been possible to establish a
linked association of resistance in these organisms.
MRSA strains are a frequent problem in hospital infection, such strains often
showing multiple antibiotic resistance. Furthermore, increased resistance to some
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 273
cationic biocides (chlorhexidine, QACs, diamidines and the now little-used crystal
violet and acridines) and to another cationic agent, ethidium bromide, is found in MRS A
strains carrying genes encoding gentamicin resistance. At least three determinants
have been identified as being responsible for biocide resistance in clinical isolates of
Staph, aureus: qacA, which encodes resistance to QACs, acridines, ethidium bromide
and low-level resistance to chlorhexidine; qacB, which is similar but specifies resistance
to the intercalating dyes and QACs; and the genetically unrelated qacC which specifies
resistance to QACs and low-level resistance to ethidium bromide.
Evidence has been presented to show the expulsion (efflux) of acridines, ethidium
bromide, crystal violet and diamidines (and possibly chlorhexidine). Recombinant
Staph, aureus plasmids transferred into E. coli cells are responsible for conferring
resistance in the latter organisms to these agents. Multidrug resistance to antibiotics
and cationic biocides has also been described in coagulase-negative staphylococci
{Staph, epidermidis) mediated by multidrug export genes qacA and qacC.
The clinical relevance of biocide resistance of antibiotic-resistant staphylococci is,
however, unclear. It has been claimed that the resistance of these organisms to cationic-
type biocides confers a selective advantage, i.e. survival, when such disinfectants are
employed clinically. However, the in-use concentrations are several times higher than
those to which the organisms are resistant.
Sensitivity and resistance of fungi
6.1 General comments
Surprisingly little is known about the resistance of yeasts, fungi and fungal spores to
disinfectants and preservatives. They are a major source of potential contamination in
pharmaceutical product preparation and aseptic processing since they abound in the
environment. It is, however, possible to make some general observations:
1 moulds are often, but not invariably, more resistant than yeasts, e.g. to chlorhexidine
and organomercurials;
2 fungicidal concentrations are often much higher than those needed to inhibit growth,
and inactivation may be comparatively slow;
3 biocides are often considerably less active against yeasts and moulds than against
non-sporulating bacteria.
For example, Candida albicans and (especially) Aspergillus niger are much more
resistant to a variety of biocides than Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria.
6.2 Mechanisms of fungal resistance
By analogy with bacteria, two basic mechanisms of fungal resistance to biocides can
be envisaged:
1 Intrinsic (natural, innate) resistance. In one form of intrinsic resistance, the fungal
cell wall (see Chapter 2) is considered to present a barrier to exclude or, more likely, to
reduce the penetration by biocide molecules. The evidence to date is sketchy but the
available information tentatively links cell wall glucan, wall thickness and consequent
relative porosity to the sensitivity of Saccharomyces cerevisiae to chlorhexidine.
274 Chapter 13
Another type of intrinsic resistance is shown by organisms that are capable of
producing constitutive enzymes which degrade biocide molecules. Heavy metal activity
is reduced by some strains of Sacch. cerevisiae which produce hydrogen sulphide;
this combines with heavy metals (e.g. copper, mercury) to form insoluble sulphides
thereby rendering the organisms less tolerant than non-enzyme-producing counterparts.
Inactivation of other fungitoxic agents has also been described, e.g. the role of formal-
dehyde dehydrogenase in resistance to formaldehyde and the degradation of potassium
sorbate by a Penicillium species. Degradation by fungi of biocides such as chlorhexidine,
QACs and other aldehydes does not appear to have been recorded.
2 Acquired resistance. This term is used to denote resistance arising as a consequence
of mutation or via the acquisition of genetic material. There is no evidence linking the
presence of plasmids in fungal cells and the ability of the organisms to acquire resistance
to fungicidal or fungistatic agents. The development of resistance to antiseptic-type
agents has not been widely studied, but acquired resistance to organic acids has been
demonstrated, presumably by mutation.
Sensitivity and resistance of protozoa
Several distinct types of protozoa (e.g. Giardia, Cryptosporidium, Naegleria, Entamoeba
and Acanthamoeba) are potentially pathogenic and may be acquired from water. A
resistant cyst stage is included in their life cycle, the trophozoite form being sensitive
to biocides. Little is known about mechanisms of inactivation by chemical agents and
there appear to have been few significant studies linking excystment and encystment
with the development of sensitivity and resistance, respectively.
From the evidence currently available, it is likely that the cyst cell wall acts in
some way as a permeability barrier, thereby conferring intrinsic resistance to the cyst
form.
8 Sensitivity and resistance of viruses
An important hypothesis was put forward in the USA by Klein and Deforest in 1963
and modified in 1983. Essentially the original concept was based on whether viruses
could be classified as:
1 'lipophilic', i.e. those, such as herpes simplex virus, which possessed a lipid
envelope; and
2 'hydrophilic', e.g. poliovirus, which did not contain a lipid envelope.
In the later (1983) modification, three groups were considered (Fig. 13.1):
1 lipid-enveloped viruses, which were inactivated by lipophilic biocides;
2 non-lipid picomaviruses (pico = very small, e.g. polio and Coxsackie viruses all of
which are RNA viruses);
3 other, larger, non-lipid viruses, e.g. adenoviruses.
Viruses in groups 2 and 3 are much more resistant to biocides.
Although many papers have been published on the virucidal (viricidal) activity of
biocides there is little information available about the uptake of biocides and their
penetration into viruses of different types, or of their interaction with viral protein and
nucleic acid.
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 275
(A) (B) t tC)
Lipid enveloped Non-liprd Othflr, larfle-r
vifUfiSB plcofnsvirusti-s non-liped viruses
i
Inactivated by More resistant
I IpQ ptii lie biocides to bi ocides
Fijj. 13lI Viral neapoDBCH tatHDcidet.
Activity of biocides against prions
Prions are responsible for the so-called 'slow virus diseases', a distinct group of
unusual neurological disorders. They are believed to be markedly resistant to
inactivation by many chemical and physical agents but because they have not been
purified, it is at present difficult to state whether this is an intrinsic property of prions
or whether it results from the protective effect of host tissue present. Certainly very
high concentrations of a biocide acting for long periods may be necessary to produce
inactivation.
10 Pharmaceutical and medical relevance
The inherent variability in biocidal sensitivity of microorganisms has several important
practical implications. For example, the population of bacteria making up the normal
flora of organisms contaminating the working surfaces, floor, air or water supply in an
environment such as a hospital pharmacy will probably contain a very low number of
naturally resistant organisms. These might be resistant to the agent used as a disinfectant
because they have acquired additional genetic information or lost, by mutation, genes
involved in controlling the expression of other genes. In the absence of the antimicrobial
agent, the resistant strains would have no competitive advantage over the sensitive
strains, and in fact they might grow more slowly and would not predominate in the
population. Under the selective pressure introduced by continual use of one kind of
disinfectant, resistant strains would predominate as the sensitive strains are eliminated.
Eventually the entire population would be resistant to the disinfectant and a serious
contamination hazard would arise. This fact is of significance in the design of suitable
hospital disinfection policies.
Tuberculosis is on the increase in developed countries such as the USA and
UK; furthermore, MAI may be associated with ADDS sufferers. Hospital-acquired
opportunistic mycobacteria may cause disseminated infection and also lung infections,
endocarditis and pericarditis. Transmission of mycobacterial infection by endoscopy
is rare, despite a marked increase in the use of flexible fibreoptic endoscopes, but
bronchoscopy is probably the greatest hazard for the transmission of M. tuberculosis
and other mycobacteria. Thus, biocides used for bronchoscope disinfection must be
chosen carefully to ensure that such transmission does not occur.
276 Chapter 13
11 Further reading
Bloomfield S.F. & Arthur M. (1994) Mechanisms of inactivation and resistance of spores to chemical
biocides. JAppl Bact Symp Suppl, 76, 91S-104S.
Brown M.R.W. & Gilbert P. (1993) Sensitivity ofbiofilms to antimicrobial agents. JAppl Bact Symp
Suppl, 74, 87S-97S.
Klein M. & Deforest A. (1983) Principles of viral inactivation. In: Disinfection, Sterilization and
Preservation (ed. S.S. Block), 3rd edn, pp. 422-434. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger.
Nikaido H., Kim S.-H. & Rosenberg E.Y. (1993) Physical organization of lipids in the cell wall of
Mycobacterium chelonae. Mol Microbiol, 8, 1025-1030.
Nikaido H. & Vaara M. (1985) Molecular basis of bacterial outer membrane permeability. Microbiol
Rev, 49, 1-32.
Russell A.D. (1995) Mechanisms of bacterial resistance to biocides. Int Biodet Biodeg, 36, 247-265.
Russell A.D. & Chopra I. (1996) Understanding Antibacterial Action and Resistance, 2nd edn.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Russell A.D. & Day M.J. (1996) Antibiotic and biocide resistance in bacteria. Microbios, 85, 45-65.
Russell A.D. & Furr J.R. (1996) Biocides: mechanisms of antifungal action and fungal resistance. Sci
Progr, 79, 27-48.
Russell A.D. & Russell N.J. (1995) Biocides: activity, action and resistance. In: Fifty Years of
Antimicrobials: Past Perspectives and Future Trends (eds P.A. Hunter, G.K. Derby & NJ. Russell)
53rd Symposium of the Society for General Microbiology, pp. 327-365. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Russell A.D., Hugo W.B. & Ayliffe G.A.J, (eds) (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Setlow P. (1994) Mechanisms which contribute to the long-term survival of spores of Bacillus species.
JAppl Bact Symp Suppl, 76, 49S-60S.
Stickler D.J. & King J. B. (1998) Intrinsic resistance to non-antibiotic antibacterial agents. In: Principles
and Practice of Disinfection, Preservation and Sterilisation (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J.
Ayliffe), 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Taylor D.M. (1998) Inactivation of unconventional agents of the transmissible degenerative
encephalopathies. In: Principles and Practice of Disinfection, Preservation and Sterilization (eds
A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J. Ayliffe), 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Resistance to non-antibiotic antimicrobial agents 211
14
Fundamentals of immunology
1 Introduction
1.1 Historical aspects of immunology
1.2 Definitions
2
Non-specific defence mechanisms
(innate immune system)
2.1
Skin and mucous membranes
2.2
Phagocytosis
2.2.1
Role of phagocytosis
2.3
The complement system and other
soluble factors
2.4
Inflammation
2.5
Host damage
2.5.1
Exotoxins
2.5.2
Endotoxins
3 Specific defence mechanisms (adaptive
immune system)
3.1 Antigenic structure ofthe microbial cell
4 Cells involved in immunity
4.1 Humoral immunity
4.2 Monoclonal antibodies
4.2.1 Uses of monoclonal antibodies
4.3 Immunoglobulin classes
4.3.1 Immunoglobulin M (IgM)
4.3.2 Immunoglobulin G (IgG)
4.3.3 Immunoglobulin A (IgA)
4.3.4 Immunoglobulin D (IgD)
4.3.5 Immunoglobulin E (IgE)
4.4 Humoral antigen-antibody reactions
4.5 Complement
4.5.1 The classical pathway
4.5.2 The alternative pathway
4.5.3 Regulation of complement activity
4.6 Cell-mediated immunity (CMI)
4.6.1 Helper T cells (TH cells)
4.6.2 Suppressor T cells (Ts cells)
4.6.3 Cytotoxic T cells (Tc cells)
4.7 Immunoregulation
4.8 Natural killer (NK) cells
4.9 Immunological tolerance
4.10 Autoimmunity
5 Hypersensitivity
5.1 Type I (anaphylactic) reactions
5.2 Type II (cytolytic or cytotoxic) reactions
5.3 Type III (complex-mediated) reactions
5.4 Type IV (delayed hypersensitivity)
reactions
5.5 Type V (stimulatory hypersensitivity)
reactions
6 Tissue transplantation
6.1 Immune response to tumours
7
Immunity
7.1
Natural immunity
7.1.1
Species immunity
7.1.2
Individual immunity
7.2
Acquired immunity
7.2.1
Active acquired immunity
7.2.2
Passive acquired immunity
8
Further reading
Introduction
The science of immunology is one ofthe most rapidly expanding sciences and represents
a vast area of knowledge and research; thus, in a short chapter it is impossible to deal in
depth with its theory and application and a list of further reading is given at the end of
the chapter.
Historical aspects of immunology
From almost the first written observations by man it was recognized that persons who
had contracted and recovered from certain diseases were not susceptible (i.e. were
immune) to further attacks. Thucydides, over 2500 years ago, described in detail an
epidemic in Athens (which could have been typhus or plague) and noted that sufferers
were 'touched by the pitying care of those who had recovered because they were
themselves free of apprehension, for no-one was ever attacked a second time or with a
fatal result'.
Many attempts were made to induce this immune state. In ancient times the process
of variolation (the inoculation of live organisms of smallpox obtained from diseased
pustules from patients who were recovering from the disease) was practised extensively
in India and China. The success rate was very variable and often depended on the skill
of the variolator. The results were sometimes disastrous for the recipient. The father of
immunology was Edward Jenner, an English country doctor who lived from 1749 to
1823. He had observed on his rounds the similarity between the pustules of smallpox
and those of cowpox, a disease that affected cows' udders. He also observed that
milkmaids who had contracted cowpox by handling the diseased udders were immune
to smallpox. Deliberate inoculation of a young boy with cowpox and a later subsequent
challenge, after the boy had recovered, with the contents of a pustule taken from a
person who was suffering from smallpox failed to induce the disease and subsequent
rechallenges also failed. The process of vaccination (Latin, vacca, cow) was adopted
as a preventative measure against smallpox, even though the mechanism by which this
immunity was induced was not understood.
In 1 801, Jenner prophesied the eradication of smallpox by the practice of vaccination.
In 1967 the disease infected 10 million people. The World Health Organization (WHO)
initiated a programme of confinement and vaccination with the object of eradicating
the disease. In Somalia in 1977 the last case of naturally acquired smallpox occurred,
and in 1979 the WHO announced the total eradication of smallpox, thus fulfilling
Jenner's prophecy.
The science of immunology not only encompasses the body's immune responses
to bacteria and viruses but is extensively involved in: tumour recognition and subsequent
rejection; the rejection of transplanted organs and tissues; the elimination of parasites
from the body; allergies; and autoimmunity (the condition when the body mounts a
reaction against its own tissues).
12 Definitions
Disease in humans and animals may be caused by a variety of microorganisms, the
three most important groups being bacteria, rickettsia and viruses.
An organism which has the ability to cause disease is termed a. pathogen. The term
virulence is used to indicate the degree of pathogenicity of a given strain of
microorganism. Reduction in the normal virulence of a pathogen is termed attenuation;
this can eventually result in the organism losing its virulence completely and it is then
termed avirulent. Conversely, any increase in virulence is termed exaltation.
The body possesses an efficient natural defence mechanism which restricts
microorganisms to areas where they can be tolerated. A breach of this mechanism,
allowing them to reach tissues which are normally inaccessible, results in an infection.
Invasion and multiplication of the organism in the infected host may result in a
pathological condition, the clinical entity of disease.
Fundamentals of immunology 279
Non-specific defence mechanisms (innate immune system)
The body possesses a number of non-specific antimicrobial systems which are operative
at all times against potentially pathogenic microorganisms. Prior contact with the
infectious agent has no intrinsic effect on these systems.
2.1 Skin and mucous membranes
The intact skin is virtually impregnable to microorganisms and only when damage
occurs can invasion take place. Furthermore, many microorganisms fail to survive on
the skin surface for any length of time due to the inhibitory effects of fatty acids and
lactic acid in sweat and sebaceous secretions. Mucus, secreted by the membranes lining
the inner surfaces of the body, acts as a protective barrier by trapping microorganisms
and other foreign particles and these are subsequently removed by ciliary action linked,
in the case of the respiratory tract, with coughing and sneezing.
Many body secretions contain substances that exert a bactericidal action, for example
the enzyme lysozyme which is found in tears, nasal secretions and saliva; hydrochloric
acid in the stomach which results in a low pH; and basic polypeptides such as spermine
which are found in semen.
The body possesses a normal bacterial flora which, by competing for essential
nutrients or by the production of inhibitory substances such as monolactams or colicins,
suppresses the growth of many potential pathogens.
2.2 Phagocytosis
Metchnikoff (1883) recognized the role of cell types (phagocytes) which were
responsible for the engulfment and digestion of microorganisms. They are a major line
of defence against microbes that breach the initial barriers described above. Two types
of phagocytic cells are found in the blood, both of which are derived from the totipotent
bone marrow stem cell.
1 The monocytes, which constitute about 5% of the total blood leucocytes. They
migrate into the tissues and mature into macrophages (see below).
2 The neutrophils (also called polymorphonuclear leucocytes, PMNs), which are the
professional phagocytes of the body. They constitute >70% of the total leucocyte
population, remaining in the circulatory system for less than 48 hours before migrating
into the tissues, in response to a suitable stimulus, where they phagocytose material.
They possess receptors for Fc and activated C3 which enhance their phagocytic ability
(see later in chapter).
Another group of phagocytic cells are the macrophages. These are large, long-
lived cells found in most tissues and lining serous cavities and the lung. Other
macrophages recirculate through the secondary lymphoid organs, spleen and lymph
nodes where they are advantageously placed to filter out foreign material. The total
body pool of macrophages constitutes the so-called reticuloendothelial system (RES).
Macrophages are also involved with the presentation of antigen to the appropriate
lymphocyte population (see later).
280 Chapter 14
Role of phagocytosis
The microorganism initially adheres to the surface of the phagocytic cell, and this is
then followed by engulfment of the particle so that it lies within a vacuole (phagosome)
within the cell. Lysosomal granules within the phagocyte fuse with the vacuole to form
a phagolysosome. These granules contain a variety of bactericidal components which
destroy the ingested microorganism by systems that are oxygen-dependent or oxygen-
independent.
When a microorganism breaches the initial barriers and enters the body tissues, the
phagocytes form a formidable defence barrier. Phagocytosis is greatly enhanced by a
family of proteins called complement.
The complement system and other soluble factors
Complement comprises a group of heat-labile serum proteins which, when activated,
are associated with the destruction of bacteria in the body in a variety of ways. It is
present in low concentrations in serum but, as its action is linked intimately with a
second (specific) set of defence mechanisms, its composition and role will be dealt
with later in the chapter.
Proteins produced by virally infected cells have been shown to interfere with viral
replication. They also activate leucocytes that can recognize these infected cells and
subsequently kill them. These leucocytes are known as natural killer (NK) cells and the
proteins are termed interferons (see also Chapters 3, 5 and 24).
The serum concentration of a number of proteins increases dramatically during
infection. Their levels can increase by up to 100-fold compared with normal levels.
They are known collectively as acute phase proteins and certain of them have been
shown to enhance phagocytosis in conjunction with complement.
Inflammation
One early symptom of injury to tissue due to a microbial infection is inflammation.
This begins with the dilatation of local arterioles and capillaries which increases the
blood flow to the area and causes characteristic reddening. Fluid accumulates in the
area of the injury due to an increase in the permeability of the capillary walls and this
leads to localized oedema, which creates a pressure on nerve endings resulting in pain.
This early oedema may actually promote bacterial growth. Fibrin is deposited which
tends to limit the spread of the microorganisms. Blood phagocytes adhere to the inside
of the capillary walls and penetrate through into the surrounding tissue. They are attracted
to the focus of the infection by chemotactic substances in the inflammatory exudate
originating from complement.
Inflammation is a non-specific reaction which can be induced by a variety of
agents apart from microorganisms. Lymphokines and derivatives of arachidonic acid,
including prostaglandins, leukotrienes and thromboxanes are probable mediators of
the inflammatory response. The release of vasoactive amines such as histamine and
serotonin (5 -hydroxy tryptamine) from activated or damaged cells also contribute to
inflammation.
Fundamentals of immunology 281
Fever is the most common manifestation. The thermoregulatory centre in the
hypothalamus regulates body temperature and this can be affected by endotoxins
(heat-stable lipopolysaccharides) of Gram-negative bacteria and also by a monokine
secreted by monocytes and macrophages called interleukin-1 (IL-1) which is also
termed endogenous pyrogen. Antibody production and T-cell proliferation have been
shown to be enhanced at elevated body temperatures and thus are beneficial effects of
fever.
2.5 Host damage
Microorganisms that escape phagocytosis in a local lesion may now be transported to
the regional lymph nodes via the lymphatic vessels. If massive invasion occurs with
which the resident macrophages are unable to cope, microorganisms may be transported
through the thoracic duct into the bloodstream. The appearance of viable microorganisms
in the bloodstream is termed bacteraemia and is indicative of an invasive infection and
failure of the primary defences.
Pathogenic organisms possess certain properties which enable them to overcome
these primary defences. They produce metabolic substances, often enzymic in nature,
which facilitate the invasion of the body. The following are examples of these.
1 Hyaluronidase and streptokinase are produced by the haemolytic streptococci and
enable the organism to spread rapidly through the tissue. Hyaluronidase dissolves
hyaluronic acid (intercellular cement), whereas streptokinase (Chapter 25) dissolves
blood clots.
2 Coagulase is produced by many strains of staphylococci and causes the coagulation
of plasma surrounding the organism. This can act as a barrier protecting the organism
against phagocytosis. The presence of a capsule outside the cell wall serves a similar
function. The production of coagulase (Chapter 1) is used as an indication of the
pathogenicity of the strain.
3 Lecithinase is produced by Clostridium perfringens. This is a calcium-dependent
lecithinase whose activity depends on the ability to split lecithin. Since lecithin is present
in the membrane of many different kinds of cells, damage can occur throughout the
body. Lecithinase causes the hydrolysis of erythrocytes and the necrosis of other tissue
cells.
4 Collagenase is also produced by CI. perfringens and this degrades collagen, which
is the major protein of fibrous tissue. Its destruction promotes the spread of infection in
tissues.
5 Leucocidins kill leucocytes and are produced by many strains of streptococci, most
strains of Staphylococcus aureus and likewise most strains of pathogenic Gram- negative
bacteria, isolated from sites of infection.
Damage to the host may arise in two ways. First, multiplication of the micro-
organisms may cause mechanical damage to the tissue cells through interference with
the normal cell metabolism, as seen in viral and some bacterial infections. Second, a
toxin associated with the microorganism may adversely affect the tissues or organs of
the host. Two types of toxins, called exotoxins and endotoxins, are associated with
bacteria.
282 Chapter 14
2.5.1 Exotoxins
These are produced inside the cell and diffuse out into the surrounding environment.
They are produced by both Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria. They are
extremely toxic and are responsible for the serious effects of certain diseases; for
example, the toxin produced by CI. tetani (the causal organism of tetanus) is neurotoxic
and causes severe muscular spasms due to impairment of neural control. Examples of
other toxins identified are necrotoxins (causing tissue damage), enterotoxins (causing
intestinal damage) and haemolysins (causing haemolysis of erythrocytes). Gram-positive
bacteria producing exotoxins are certain members of the genera Clostridium,
Streptococcus and Staphylococcus whilst an example of a Gram-negative bacterium is
Vibrio cholerae (the causal organism of cholera). Several exotoxins consist of two
moieties: one aids entrance of the exotoxin into the target cell whilst the toxic activity
is associated with the other fraction.
2.5.2 Endotoxins
These are lipopolysaccharide-protein complexes associated mainly with the cell
envelope of Gram-negative bacteria (see Chapter 1). They are responsible for the general
non-specific toxic and pyrogenic reactions (Chapters 1 and 18) common to all organisms
in this group. The specific toxic reactions for different pathogenic Gram-negative
bacteria are due to the production of a toxin in vivo. Organisms of interest in this group
are those causing cholera, plague, typhoid and paratyphoid fever, and whooping-cough.
Specific defence mechanisms (adaptive immune system)
Microorganisms which successfully overcome the non-specific defence mechanisms
then have to contend with a second line of defence, the specific defence mechanisms.
These involve the stimulation of a specific immune response by the invading
microorganism and are evoked by what are termed immunogens. These may cause
the appearance in the serum of modified serum globulins called immunoglobulins.
The term antigen is given to a substance that stimulates immunoglobulins that have
the ability to combine with the antigen that stimulated their production. These
immunoglobulins are then termed antibodies. All antibodies are immunoglobulins but
it is not certain that all immunoglobulins have antibody function. Antigens associated
with microorganisms consist of proteins, polysaccharides, lipids or mixtures of the
three and invariably have a high molecular weight. The antigen-antibody reaction is a
highly specific one and this specificity is due to differences in the chemical composition
of the outer surfaces of the organism. Bacteria, rickettsia and viruses all have the ability
to induce antibody formation. The synthesis and release of free antibody into the blood
and other body fluid is termed the humoral immune response.
Antigens, however, can induce a second type of response which is known as the
cell-mediated immune response. The antigenic agent stimulates the appearance of
'sensitized' lymphocytes in the body which confer protection against organisms that
have the ability to live and replicate inside the cells of the host. Certain of these
lymphocytes are also involved in the rejection of tissue grafts.
Fundamentals of immunology 283
3.1 Antigenic structure of the microbial cell
The microbial cell surface constitutes a multiplicity of different antigens. These antigens
may be common to different species or types of microorganisms or may be highly
specific for that one type only.
Three groups of antigens are found in the intact bacterial cell.
H-antigens. These are associated with the flagella and are therefore only found
on motile bacteria (H, Hauch, a film, and refers to the film-like swarming seen
originally in cultures of flagellated Proteus). The precise chemical composition of
flagella can vary between bacteria, resulting in a range of different antibodies being
produced and use is made of these differences in the typing of different strains of
Salmonella.
O-antigens. These are associated with the surface of the bacterial cell wall and are
often referred to as the somatic antigens (O, ohne Hauch, without film, and refers to
non-swarming cultures, i.e. absence of flagella). The specificity of the reaction between
these antigens and the corresponding antibodies in Gram-negative bacteria is due to
the nature and number of the type-specific polysaccharide side-chains attached to the
lipid A and core polysaccharide portion of the lipopoly saccharide (LPS) (see Chapter
1). This group of organisms is, however, very liable to mutate during cultivation in
artificial media and the resultant mutant may lose the O-specific side-chain antigens,
resulting in the exposure of the more deep-seated core polysaccharide, the R (rough)
antigens, which may share a common structure with other unrelated Gram-negative
bacteria and so are no longer type-specific. This change is known as the S — > R change
and is so called because of an alteration in the appearance of the colonies of the organism
from the normal, smooth, glistening colony to a rough-edged, matt colony. This S — > R
change represents a loss of the type-specific O-antigens with a concomitant loss in the
specificity of the antigen-antibody reaction.
The major type-specific antigens of Gram-positive bacteria are the teichoic acid
moieties associated with the cell wall (see Chapter 1).
Surface antigens. Many bacteria possess a characteristic polysaccharide capsule external
to the cell wall and this too has antigenic properties. Over 80 serological types of the
Gram-positive Pneumococcus group have been differentiated by immunologically
distinct polysaccharides in the capsule. Certain Gram-negative organisms of the enteric
bacteria, e.g. salmonellae, may possess a polysaccharide microcapsule which is also
antigenic and is thought to be responsible for the virulence of the bacteria. It is termed
the Vi antigen and its presence is important in relation to the production of the typhoid
vaccines.
4 Cells involved in immunity
The cells that make up the immune system are distributed throughout the body but are
found mainly in the lymphoreticular organs, which may be divided into the primary
lymphoid organs, i.e. the thymus and bone marrow, and the secondary or peripheral
284 Chapter 14
organs, e.g. lymph nodes, spleen, Peyer's patches (which are collections of lymphoid
tissue in the submucosa of the small intestine) and the tonsils.
A large number of cells are involved in the immune response and all are derived
from the multipotential stem cells of the bone marrow. The predominant cell is the
lymphocyte but monocytes -macrophages, endothelial cells, eosinophils and mast cells
are also involved with certain immune responses. The two types of immunity (humoral
and cell-mediated) are dependent on two distinct populations of lymphocytes, the B
cells and the T cells respectively. Both the humoral and the cell -mediated systems
interact to achieve an effective immune response.
4.1 Humoral immunity
Humoral immunity, known as antibody -mediated immunity, is due directly to a reaction
between circulating antibody and inducing antigen and may involve complement. The
B cells originate in the bone marrow. In chickens, a lymphoid organ embryonically
derived from gut epithelium and known as the bursa of Fabricius is responsible for the
maturation of the B cells into immunocompetent cells, which subsequently can
synthesize antibody after stimulation by antigen. The bursal equivalent in humans is
the bone marrow itself. An antigen (e.g. a bacterium) may possess multiple determinants
(epitopes) and each one of these epitopes will stimulate an antibody which will
subsequently react with that epitope and with closely related epitopes only. Each B cell
is only capable of recognizing one epitope via a specific receptor on its surface. This
receptor has been shown to be antibody itself. Activation of the B cell occurs by binding
of the antigen to the receptor and the resultant complex is endocytosed. For activation
to proceed, additional signals are now required.
These are supplied by the secretion of peptide molecules (termed cytokines or
lymphokines) from a subset of the T-cell family (the helper T cells, TH cells). These
peptide molecules (interleukins (IL) 2,4,5 and 6) stimulate the B cells to proliferate,
undergo clonal expansion and mature into plasma cells which secrete antibody and
also into the longer-living, non-dividing memory cells.
Antigens requiring the assistance of TH cells are termed T-dependent (TD) antigens.
Subsequent antigenic stimulation results in high antibody titres (secondary or
memory response) as there is now an expanded clone of cells with memory of the
original antigen available to proliferate into mature plasma cells (Fig. 14.1).
Some antigens, such as type 3 pneumococcal polysaccharide, LPS and other
polymeric substances such as dextrans (poly-D-glucose) and levan (poly-D-fructose)
can induce antibody synthesis without the assistance of TH cells. These are known as
T-independent (Ti) antigens. Only one class of immunoglobulin (IgM) is synthesized
and there is a weak memory response.
Immunoglobulins are associated with the y-globulin fraction of plasma proteins
but, as stated earlier, not all immunoglobulins exhibit antibody activity.
The immunoglobulin (Ig) molecules can be subdivided into different classes on the
basis of their structure, and in humans five major structural types can be distinguished.
Each type has been distinguished on the basis of a polypeptide chain structure consisting
of one pair of heavy (large) chains and one pair of light (small) chains joined by
disulphide bonds. The heavy chains are given the name of the corresponding Greek
Fundamentals of immunology 285
1=
c
!?
o
+-■
Primary
immunization
3 4
Time (w«eks>
i
Secondary
immunisation
Hf* 1^*1 Apubody response (a primary and secondary immunization doses.
4.2
letter (/chain in IgG, fi in IgM, a in IgA, 5 in IgD and e in IgE). All classes have
similar sets of light chains consisting of one of two types, the kappa (K) or lambda (A)
chains. A suggested ground plan for the most abundant Ig, IgG, is illustrated in Fig. 14.2.
IgG consists of four polypeptide subunits held together by disulphide bonds. Native
immunoglobulins are rather resistant to proteolytic digestion but certain enzymes have
been useful in elucidating their structure. Papain cleaves the molecule into three
fragments of similar size:
1 two Fab fragments each carrying a single antigen-combining site and comprising
the variable regions of both chains, the constant region of the light chains and the first
constant domain of the heavy chain;
2 one Fc fragment composed of the terminal halves of the heavy chains which have
no affinity for antigen but can be crystallized.
Cleavage with pepsin yields two fragments only, one consisting of two Fab fragments
and the other an Fc fragment which is partially degraded by the enzyme. The variable
regions on both the heavy and light chains contribute towards antigen recognition,
whilst the constant regions of the heavy chain, particularly the Fc part of the heavy-
chain backbone, direct the biological activity of the molecule, e.g. complement fixation
(see later) and the interaction with a variety of tissue cells, via membrane receptors for
the Fc region.
Intrastrand bonding via disulphide links cause the molecule to fold into 'globular
domains' and it is these that direct the biological activity of the molecule.
Monoclonal antibodies
After antigenic stimulation, the normal antibody response involves the activation of a
286 Chapter 14
Light chain
Heavy chain
Heavy chain
Light chain
Fig. 14.2 Diagramniatie representation of IgG.
large number of clones of antibody-secreting cells (i.e. it is polyclonal). This is due to
the fact that antigens possess multiple epitopes. In 1975 Kohler and Milstein successfully
developed cell fusion techniques which enabled them to isolate clones of cells which
synthesized identical antibody molecules (Fig. 14.3).
The principles of the technique rely on the fact that an antibody-secreting cell can
become cancerous and the unchecked proliferation of such a cell is called a myeloma.
Progeny of the original transformed cell will continue to secrete a single kind of antibody
molecule only. Myeloma cells, like other malignant cells, grow indefinitely in tissue
culture. However, the specificity of the antibody is unknown. Mutant myeloma cells
have been isolated which have lost the ability to secrete antibody while still retaining
their cancerous growth properties.
Mouse myeloma cells are nosed with an antibody-secreting cell from the spleen of
a mouse immunized with the required antigen. The technique is called somatic cell
hybridization and the resultant cell is termed a 'hybridoma'. The rate of successful
hybrid formation is low and a technique is necessary which can select these successful
fusions. The standard technique is to use a myeloma cell line that has lost the capacity
to synthesize hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyl-transferase (HGPRT). This enzyme
enables cells to synthesize nucleotides using an extracellular source of hypoxanthine
as a precursor. The absence of HGPRT is normally no problem as cells can use an
alternative pathway. When, however, these cells are exposed to aminopterin (a folic
acid analogue; see Chapter 8) they are unable to use this other pathway and become
fully dependent on HGPRT.
Fundamentals of immunology 287
■Antigen
Misuse
i
Spleen ea-lls
removed
-*■ Fuse *-
Myeloma cells
(HGPRT -we)
Sendai virus
PnJyGthrylBne CjJyCOl
HAT medium
i
Growth
i
Tea-t supernatant for required antibody
i
Select porrtci clone
i
Redone
i
Pro peg ate
Tipsu$ culture
Mouse Ascites- fluid
tmcjml" 1 }
i n f£. 14 J Production of monocloiHiJ antibodiM (see text for details j
The cell fusion mixture is transferred to a culture medium containing hypoxanthine,
aminopterin and thymidine (HAT medium). Unfused myeloma cells are unable to grow
as they lack HGPRT. Unfused normal spleen cells can grow but their proliferation is
limited and they eventually die out. The hybridoma cell can proliferate in the HAT
medium as the normal spleen cell supplies the enzyme which enables the hybridoma to
utilize extracellular hypoxanthine.
The hybridoma is now screened for the production of the desired antibody by testing
the supernatant from each culture. A single culture, even though positive for antibody
production, can contain the progeny of two or more successful fusions. Therefore, it is
necessary to dilute positive cultures so that fresh cultures can be started with a single
hybridoma cell. When successful, such cultures are truly monoclonal and the antibody
is directed against a single epitope on a preselected antigen. Once established, these
cell lines are immortal.
The concentration of antibody in tissue cultures of the hybridoma is low (10-
60 A gml _1 ) but the use of large culture vessels can obviate this. The hybridoma can
also be propagated in mice where the antibody concentration in the serum and other
body fluids can reach lOmgrnl" 1 .
4.2.1 Uses of monoclonal antibodies
Monoclonal antibodies are very sensitive, specific reagents and have applications in
many areas of the biological sciences. They revolutionized immunology within a few
years of their discovery.
The investigation and characterization of cell surfaces by probing with monoclonal
antibodies is one of the most vital areas of application. In this context they have been
used in the following ways:
1 To study the ABO and rare blood groups.
2 To detect HLA antigens and consequently to type tissues for transplantation.
3 To classify cell lines, e.g. the T-cell subsets, and thence to separate these cell
subpopulations.
4 To study cell-cell interactions and differentiation, e.g. embryology.
5 In oncology, to study the relationship between the normal and the tumour cell, to
detect tumour-associated antigens (CEA, carcino-embryonic antigen, and AFP, a-
fetoprotein) and subsequently to enable cancer therapy to be monitored, to locate tumour
metastases, and to deliver cytotoxic drugs, toxins, radionuclides, or liposomes to tumour
cells.
6 To identify and characterize bacterial and viral antigens which can then be purified
and used to prepare subunit vaccines.
Monoclonal antibodies have further been employed for studying drug and hormone
receptors, enzymes and proteins. A whole range of immunoassay techniques using
monoclonals have been developed to detect low levels of materials in body fluids, e.g.
oxytocin can be detected in human blood using a radioimmunoassay down to 1 pmoll" 1 .
Similar assays are used to monitor antibiotic therapy using potentially toxic drugs, e.g.
gentamicin. The future of monoclonal antibodies continues to be one of enormous
potential and excitement.
4.3 Immunoglobulin classes
The synthesis of antibodies belonging to the various classes of immunoglobulin proceeds
at different rates after the initial and subsequent antigenic stimuli.
4.3.1 Immunoglobulin M (IgM)
Synthesis of this class occurs after the primary antigenic stimulus. IgMs are polymers
of five four-peptide subunits and have a theoretical valency of 10, although against
large antigens such as bacteria their effective valency is five. They are extremely ef-
fective agglutinating agents and, as they are largely confined to the bloodstream and
they appear early in the response to infection, they are of particular importance in
bacteraemia.
Fundamentals of immunology 289
Serum concentrations lie between 0.5 and 2.5mgml _1 . IgM can fix complement
and a single molecule can initiate the complement cascade. IgM (with IgD) is the
major immunoglobulin expressed on the surface of B cells where it acts as an antigen
receptor.
4.3.2 Immunoglobulin G (IgG)
This is the major immunoglobulin synthesized during the secondary response and in
normal human adults is present at serum concentrations between 10 and 15mgmH.
Within this class there are four subclasses, designated IgGj, IgG2, IgG3 and IgG4.
It has the ability to cross the placenta and therefore provides a major line of defence
against infection for the newborn. This can be reinforced by transfer of colostral IgG
across the gut mucosa of the neonate. It diffuses readily into the extravascular spaces
where it can act in the neutralization of bacterial toxins and can bind to microorganisms
enhancing the process of phagocytosis (opsonization). This is due to the presence on
the phagocytic cell surface of a receptor for Fc.
Complexes of IgG with the bacterial cell activate complement with the resultant
advantages to the host.
4.3.3 Immunoglobulin A (IgA)
This occurs in the seromucous secretions such as saliva, tears, nasal secretions, sweat,
colostrum and secretions of the lung, urinogenital and gastrointestinal tracts. Its purpose
appears to be to protect the external surfaces of the body from microbial attack. It
occurs as a dimer in these secretions but as a monomer in human plasma, where its
function is not known. The function of IgA appears to be to prevent the adherence of
microorganisms to the surface of mucosal cells thus preventing them entering the body
tissues. It is protected from proteolysis by combination with another protein — the
secretory component.
It is present at serum levels between 0.5 and 3mgmH but higher concentrations
are found in secretions. There are two subclasses of this immunoglobulin.
4.3.4 Immunoglobulin D (IgD)
i-i
This occurs in normal serum at very low levels (30-50 fjg ml" ) but is the predominant
surface component of B cells. Immature B cells express surface IgM without IgD but
as these cells mature IgD is also expressed. After activation of the B cells, surface IgD
can no longer be detected and it would appear that IgD may be involved with the
differentiation of B cells.
4.3.5 Immunoglobulin E (IgE)
This is a very minor serum component (0.1-0.3 fig mY ) but is a major class of
immunoglobulins. It binds with very high affinity to mast cells and basophils via
a site in the Fc region of the molecule. Crosslinking of the cell-bound IgE
antibodies by antigen triggers the degranulation of these cells with the release of
290 Chapter 14
histamine, leukotrienes and other vasoactive compounds. This class may play a role
in immunity to helminthic parasites but in the western world it is more commonly
associated with immediate hypersensitivity reactions such as hay fever and extrinsic
asthma.
Humoral antigen-antibody reactions
Antibody molecules are bivalent whilst antigens can be multivalent. The resultant
combination may result in either small, soluble complexes, or large insoluble aggregates,
depending on the nature of the two molecules in the system. The following are examples
of the reactions that can occur.
1 Neutralization. Small soluble complexes neutralize microbial toxins.
2 Precipitation. The formation of insoluble precipitates which enable the phagocytes
to eliminate soluble antigen from the body.
3 Agglutination. The aggregation of bacterial cells into agglutinates enabling
phagocytes to eliminate these cells rapidly from the body.
4 Cytotoxic reactions. The antibody and cell react, with resultant lysis of the cell. It
was found that the presence of a third component, called complement, was necessary
for this reaction to take place.
Complement
Complement activity was first recognized by Bordet, who showed that the lytic activity
of rabbit anti-sheep erythrocyte serum was lost on heating to 56°C but was restored by
the addition of fresh serum from an unimmunized rabbit. Thus, two factors were
necessary, a heat-stable factor, antibody, plus a heat-labile factor, complement, which
is present in all sera.
Complement is not a single protein but comprises a group of functionally linked
proteins that interact with each other to provide many of the effector functions of humoral
immunity and inflammation. Most of the components of the system are present in the
serum as proenzymes, i.e. enzyme precursors. Activation of a complement molecule
occurs as a result of proteolytic cleavage of the molecule, which in itself confers
proteolytic activity on the molecule. Thus, many components of the system serve as
the substrate of a prior component and, in turn, activate a subsequent component. This
pattern of sequential activation results in the system being called the 'complement
cascade'.
Complement can be activated by two pathways, the classical pathway and the
alternative pathway (Fig. 14.4).
The classical pathway
The first component of complement is CI. This is a complex of three molecules
designated Clq, Clr and Cls. The classical pathway is only initiated by an immune
complex (antibody bound to antigen) when Clq binds to the Fc portion of the complexed
antibody (IgM or IgG). The binding of Clq activates the Clr and Cls molecules
associated with it to yield activated CI which now cleaves C4 and then C2 (subunits of
Fundamentals of immunology 291
CLASSICAL PATHWAY
ALTERNATIVE PATHWAY
Antibody/antigen
complex
CI
i
Activated Cl
<*<
C2<
C4a
C4b
C2a
C2b
C4b.2a
C3a
T
r
Factor G
Factor D
C3Coiw&rta*G
Spootaieoug pJeavaga
i
C3 C3a
I
I
C3b Activating surface
C3b.&
M
C3b.Bb
T
Factor P
-i- Ba
/
C3b
C3b ^ — — C3
C3b
r
C4b.2a.3b
CE Convertass -*■
C3b.Bb.3b
C5a
C5
ce
C7
ca
cat
C5b
C5S
C6
C5b
C5-9
Membrane attack co-mpte* [MACS
Fig. 144 Complement activation, partways-
complement that possess enzymatic activity have a bar over the subunits name).
Cleavage of C4 yields a small fragment (C4a) and a large fragment, designated C4b,
which binds to the cell surface near the CI molecule.
Cleavage of C2 yields two fragments: a larger one, C2a, and a smaller one, C2b.
C2a binds to a site on C4b to yield C4b2a, which is a C3 convertase as it can now
cleave C3 into C3a and C3b. C3b is bound to the C4b2a complex to yield C4b2a3b.
This complex is enzymatically active against C5 and for this reason is described as a
C5 convertase. C5 is cleaved into C5a and C5b; it is the latter molecule that serves as
a locus for the assembly of a single molecule each of C6, CI and C8. The resulting
C5b.6.7.8 complex allows the polymerization of C9 into a tubular hydrophobic structure
that is inserted into the lipid bilayer of the cell membrane which forms a transmembrane
channel through which ions and small molecules are able to diffuse freely. This structure
is termed the membrane attack complex (MAC).
C3a and C5a are released into the fluid surroundings where they serve as potent
anaphylotoxins in that they cause vasoactive substances such as histamines to be released
from mast cells and basophils. C5a is also strongly chemo tactic for neutrophils.
292 Chapter 14
Free C3b fragments bind to the surface of the target cell. There are specific receptors
for membrane-bound C3b on polymorphs and macrophages. This allows immune
adherence of the complexes to these cells, thus facilitating subsequent phagocytosis.
While antibodies alone bring about phagocytosis of antibody-coated particles through
Fc receptors that are also found on phagocytes, the presence of C3b markedly enhances
the phagocytic process.
4.5.2 The alternative path way
The cleavage of C3 and the activation of the remainder of the complement cascade can
be triggered, in the absence of complement-fixing antibody, by agents such as bacterial
polysaccharide. C3 in the serum cleaves spontaneously and the C3b generated is rapidly
inactivated (factors I and H). However, C3b bound to the surface of many microbes is
able to bind to a serum protein designated factor B, which is now, in turn, cleaved by
another serum protease, factor D. The resulting complex, C3b.Bb, is stabilized by another
protein called/? roperdein (P). The resultant stable complex, C3b.Bb, is a C3 convertase,
analogous to C4b.2a. It cleaves C3 to form a multimolecular complex, C3b.Bb.3b,
which is a C5 convertase and can generate C5b which is the focal point for the assembly
of the MAC.
Proteins B, D and P also amplify the effects of the classical pathway in that some of
the 3b generated by this pathway interacts with these proteins to form additional C3
convertase that supplements that provided by C4b.2a. Likewise, enhanced cleavage of
C5 occurs due to the dual activity of C4. 2a. 3b and C3b.Bb.C3b complexes.
4.5.3 Regulation of complement activity
The spontaneous generation of C3b creates the potential for the triggering of the entire
complement cascade. Two regulatory proteins prevent this. Factor I inactivates C3b
unless it is bound to a surface. This action is enhanced by factor H, which also removes
Bb from the C3b.Bb complex, thus inactivating the C3 convertase. The classical pathway
is also under regulatory control as activated CI could theoretically continue to cleave
C4 and C2 molecules until they were entirely consumed. The presence in the serum of
a CI inhibitor (CI INH) prevents this by binding to activated CI, allowing only a brief
interval during which it can cleave C4 and C2 before it is deactivated by CI INH.
Complement plays a significant part in the defence of the body. It can cause lysis of
Gram-negative organisms by allowing lysozyme to reach the peptidoglycan layer of
the organism. The generation of the C3b complex on the surface of the cell facilitates
phagocytosis as the phagocytes possess a receptor for C3b, whilst C3a and C5a cause
the release of histamine with the resultant increase in vascular permeability increasing
the flow of serum antibody into the infected area. C3a and C5a also attract phagocytic
cells to the focus of the infection.
4.6 Cell-mediated immunity (CMI)
The term cell-mediated immunity is used to describe the localized reactions that
occur to those microorganisms that have the ability to live and multiply within the
Fundamentals of immunology 293
cells of the host, e.g. the tubercle bacillus, viruses and protozoal parasites. These
reactions are mediated by lymphocytes and phagocytes and antibody plays a subordinate
role.
When immunologists recognized that there were different classes of lymphocytes
that were functionally and developmentally different, attempts were made to develop
methods to distinguish them. This was initially done by raising antibodies to the cell
surface proteins using animals of a different strain or type, i.e. 'alloantibodies'. The
advent of hybridoma technology allowed the production of monoclonal antibodies
that reacted specifically with defined populations of lymphocytes via cell surface
molecules which acted as antigens (markers). Some of these markers are specific
for cells of a particular lineage, whereas others indicate the state of activation or
differentiation of the same cells. Thus, a marker that is recognized by a group ('cluster')
of monoclonal antibodies is called a member of a cluster of differentiation and given
a 'CD' designation.
The lymphocytes involved in CMI originate from the multipotential stem cell and
are processed by the thymus gland; hence the name 'T cells. The role of the thymus is
to rearrange the genes associated within the T cell receptor (TCR) so that the mature T
cells recognize foreign but not self antigens. This receptor has been isolated using
monoclonal antibody probes and has been shown to consist of two disulphide-linked
polypeptide chains termed the a and (3 chain. This receptor is associated with a
characteristic cell surface marker, CD3. Antigen recognition occurs via this membrane
structure CD3/TCR. Mature T cells also express other antigenic markers, notably CD4
or CD 8. Thymectomized neonate mice do not exhibit the CMI response indicating the
importance of the thymus gland.
Infection with a human immunodeficiency virus (HIV-1 and HIV-2; see Chapter 3)
can cause the destruction of the TH cell, which is the critical cell of the immune system.
This leads to the condition known as acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS).
At present, it is still not known why, in some cases, infection with HIV leaves the
immune system intact whereas in others it is irreversibly destroyed, giving rise to AIDS.
The immune system must be able to distinguish between antigens against which an
immune response would be beneficial and those where such a response would be harmful
to the host, i.e. it must be able to distinguish between 'self and 'non-self. This is
achieved via molecules of the major histocompatibility complex (MHC). The human
MHC is located on chromosome 6 and is known as the HLA (human leucocyte antigen).
It is divided into four main regions, designated A, B, C and D. Products of this region
are expressed on the surface of cells and these enable cells of the immune system to
recognize and signal to each other. Three main groups of these molecules have been
identified.
1 Class 1 MHC molecules are integral membrane proteins found on the surface of all
nucleated cells and platelets. They are the classical antigens involved in graft rejection.
2 Class 2 MHC molecules are expressed on the surface of B cells, macrophages,
monocytes, various antigen-presenting cells ( APCs) and certain cells of the T-cell family.
3 Class 3 MHC molecules consist of several complement components.
T cells only respond to protein antigens when the antigen has been processed by
the APCs. The resultant small peptide molecules are then bound to the Class 2 molecules
on the surface of the APCs. Monocytes, macrophages, B cells, dendritic cells and some
T cells all have the ability to internalize and degrade proteins into peptide fragments
and can all therefore act as APCs.
The major T cell classes and their functions are listed below.
4.6.1 Helper T cells (TH cells)
These are the central cells of the immune system as they are essential for activation of
the other cells associated with an effective immune response by the secretion of peptide
mediators termed cytokines. Cytokines produced by macrophages and monocytes are
termed monokines whilst those produced by lymphocytes are termed lymphokines. TH
cells express CD4 on their surface.
CD4 is a transmembrane glycoprotein, approximately 55 kDa in size; it serves as a
cell-cell adhesion molecule by virtue of its specific affinity for Class 2 MHC molecules.
Likewise, it may transduce signals or facilitate TCR complex-mediated signal
transduction upon binding Class 2 MHC molecules. CD4 is also the receptor for HIV
(see Chapter 3).
Activation of the TH cells requires two signals. The first is the binding of CD3/
TCR to the Class 2 MHC-antigen complex on the surface of the APC. This stimulates
the APC to secrete a monokine (IL-1), This represents the second signal as the now
activated TH cell secretes a lymphokine (IL-2) together with a series of other cyto-
kines associated with cell growth and differentiation. IL-2 induces the growth of
cells expressing IL-2 receptors which include the TH cells actually producing it, i.e.
an autocatalytic effect. Cytokines secreted by activated TH cells are also associated
with the proliferation and differentiation of B cells associated with the humoral
response.
T cells responsible for delayed-type hypersensitivity secrete lymphokines which
recruit and activate non-specific cells like macrophages into the area of the reaction.
Examples of some of these lymphokines are listed below.
1 A macrophage chemotactic factor (MAC) which causes an accumulation of
mononuclear phagocytes at the site of the antigen-mediated lymphokine release.
2 A macrophage migration inhibitory factor (MIF) which encourages the macrophages
to remain in the area.
3 A macrophage-activating factor (MAF) which enhances the cell's ability to kill
ingested intracellular organisms.
4.6.2 Suppressor T cells (Ts cells)
These are a class of lymphocytes thought to be distinct from helper and cytolytic T
cells. Their function is to inhibit the activation phase of the immune responses. Their
existence as a distinct population of cells has been doubted by many investigators, but
they may be lymphocytes that can inhibit immune responses in different ways.
This may occur by the production of cytokines with inhibitory function; the ability
to absorb necessary growth and differentiation factors; the possible lysis of cells bearing
the stimulatory antigens in association with MHC molecules (Class I and Class II); the
possible release of specific soluble factors (TsF) which may be directed at either the TH
cell or the B cell.
Fundamentals of immunology 295
The receptors on the Ts cell may recognize antigen which will then act as a bridge
between the Ts and its target (the antigen receptor) or, alternatively, the Ts receptor
may be a mirror image of the receptor on the target cell and produce direct suppression
by binding to it. This recognition is termed 'idiotype recognition'. Ts cells express
CD 8 on their surface.
4.6.3 Cytotoxic T cells (Tc cells)
Virally infected host cells, and also tissue grafts from a genetically dissimilar donor,
have been shown to stimulate the formation of T cells that are cytotoxic for these cells
(Tc cells). Tc cells express CD8 on their cell surface.
On human Tc cells, the C8 molecules consist of two distinct glycoproteins, called
CD8aand CD8/3. The molecule may be a homodimer of CD8achains or a disulphide-
linked heterodimer. Like the CD4 molecule on TH cells, it is thought to serve as an
adhesion molecule, but now binding to MHC Class 1 molecules which would be on the
target cell. The CD8 molecule may transduce signals or facilitate TCR: CD3-mediated
transduction upon binding Class 1 MHC molecules.
These T cells recognize peptide antigens bound to Class 1 MHC molecules on the
surface of the target cell. During viral infections, viral peptides bind to self MHC 1
molecules and are subsequently expressed on the cell surface. The MHC1 molecules
of transplanted tissues are themselves recognized by the Tc cells.
Like TH cells, two signals are required to activate the Tc cell. The first is an
interaction between the TCRs and the Class 1 MHC molecule/foreign epitope complex
on the surface of the target cell. The second signal is that of IL-2 produced by
the activated TH cell with the resultant release of cytotoxins which destroy the target
cell.
4.7 Immunoregulation
An ongoing immune response can be regulated by three mechanisms.
Suppressor T cells. These cells can be specific for the antigen receptors on both B and
T cells and thereby can suppress the activity of these two groups of cells.
Antibody feedback. Antibodies produced in response to an antigen are capable of
inhibiting further immune responses to that antigen. This may occur due to diminishing
antigen levels as a result of its combination with antibody or through an idiotypic
network.
Idiotypic network. Idiotypic determinants (idiotypes) are unique antigenic epitopes
characteristic of the antigen receptors on the surface of T and B cells. They are associated
with the variable regions of these receptors. Antibodies produced by B cells as the
result of antigenic stimulation can themselves stimulate the production of auto-anti-
idiotypic antibodies which have the ability to combine with the B-cell receptor (Ig) and
thus can dampen down the immune response. Idiotypes may likewise stimulate the
production of T cells specific for idiotypic determinants. Jerne (1974) postulated his
296 Chapter 14
network hypothesis consisting of a series of complementary anti-idiotypic responses
which modulate the immune response.
Natural killer (NK) cells
NK cells are a subset of lymphocytes found in blood and lymphoid tissues, especially
the spleen. They are about 15 A an in diameter, possess a kidney-shaped nucleus and
have two or three large granules in the cytoplasm. They are derived from the bone
marrow. NK cells have the ability to kill certain tumour lines and normal cells infected
by virus. Killing by NK cells is not specific for viral antigenic epitopes, and is not
restricted by MHC molecules. They do not possess CD3 but do express CD2, CD 16
and CD56, together with a low-affinity receptor for the Fc portion of IgG.
The most important role of NK cells is to provide a first line of defence against
viral infections as they do not require prior exposure to antigen in order to respond.
They are therefore effective against virally infected cells prior to the development of
antibodies and antigen-specific Tc cells. NK cells operate independently of MHC
antigens on the target cell and their activity is markedly enhanced by IL-2, a-
interferon and other agents that activate macrophages, such as BCG vaccine. They
may play an important part in controlling the development of neoplastic cells in the
body.
NK cells possess a receptor for Fc/and this enables them to adhere to target cells
coated in antibody with the resultant destruction of that cell. This phenomenon is known
as antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC). This was attributed to a
separate cell population known as killer (K) cells but these have now been shown to be
in effect NK cells.
Immunological tolerance
The administration of antigenic material does not always evoke an immunological
response, a condition termed 'tolerance'. The classic example of this is the exposure
of the immature lymphoid system of neonates to antigen, inducing a state of
unresponsiveness to later challenge by the same antigen after the animal has reached
immunological maturity. This could be the means whereby, during gestation, the body
becomes unresponsive to its own constituents enabling the mature lymphoid system to
distinguish in later life between 'self and 'non-self.
Tolerance can also be induced in adults, but higher doses of the antigen are required
where it has been shown that both T and B cells are made unresponsive. As most
antibody responses are T-dependent it is likely that it is these cells which are the ones
affected. In order to maintain this state of tolerance it is necessary for the antigen to
persist in the animal, as in its absence immunocompetent cells which are being produced
throughout life are not being rendered tolerant.
Tolerance can occur in several ways.
1 Genetic unresponsiveness. If the animal lacks the necessary genetic ability to
recognize antigenic material it will be 'immunologically' silent.
2 T-suppression. Ts cells may be activated more effectively than TH cells, thereby
suppressing the immune response.
Fundamentals of immunology 297
3 Helplessness. T cells are more readily tolerated than B cells and if they are unable
to activate the B cells these cells could be described as 'helpless'.
4 Clonal deletion. Contact with antigen in the neonate results in death or permanent
inactivation of the developing lymphocytes.
4.10 Autoimmunity
One fundamental property of an animal's immune system is that it does not normally
react against its own body constituents, i.e. it exhibits tolerance. However, clinical and
experimental evidence shows that certain diseases exist in which the patient apparently
destroys his/her own cells. The reactions could involve Tc cells, B cells or NK cells,
and the result of the reaction with antigen may result in a pathological condition arising
(autoimmune disease). Autoimmunity is the mirror-image of tolerance and reflects the
loss of tolerance to 'self.
Autoimmunity can arise by the following.
1 Evasion of tolerance to self antigens. Hidden or sequestered antigens do exist, for
instance spermatozoa and eye-lens tissue. These are confined to anatomical sites which
do not have access to lymphoid tissue, and exposure of the above to lymphoid cells as
a result of surgery or accident results in the production of the corresponding antibodies.
Drugs frequently bind to blood elements directly (e.g. penicillin to erythrocytes)
and the antibodies to the resultant complex react with, and damage, cells coated with
the drug. Viruses, especially those that bud, become associated with the host cell surface
antigens with the resultant generation of Tc cells.
2 Breakdown of tolerance mechanisms. There are at least two mechanisms for
maintaining unresponsiveness to self. The first is by specific deletion of self-reactive
clones and the second by suppression. A failure of either of these two may result in an
autoimmune disease. In normal, healthy individuals, antigen-binding, self-reactive B
cells and the resultant low titres of autoantibodies are not uncommon. The origin of the
self-reactive B cells is not clear, but there are four ways in which they may become
activated.
(a) Polyclonal activation. High concentrations of polyclonal activators, such as
LPS and high molecular weight dextrans, activate B cells irrespective of the
immunoglobulin receptor on the B cell surface. Polyclonal activation occurs in
parasitic infections and in certain viral infections with the production of a wide
spectrum of autoantibodies.
(b) Non-specific helper factors. T-cell activation results in the production of a variety
of lymphokines which can activate these B cells.
(c) Cross-reactive antigens. These are shared by host and microorganism and this
cross-reaction can activate autoreactive B cells.
(d) Absence of T-cell suppression. The sudden depletion or elimination of Ts cells
can lead to the spontaneous development of autoantibodies due to the maturation
of the autoreactive B cells.
Types of autoimmune diseases vary widely, from 'organ-specific' diseases such as
thyroiditis where there may be stimulation (thyrotoxicosis) by antibody against the
receptor for pituitary thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) or inhibition (myxoedema)
by cell destruction probably mediated by NK cells and autoantibody, through to 'non-
298 Chapter 14
organ-specific' diseases such as systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), where both lesions
and autoantibodies are not confined to any one organ. In SLE, antibodies have been
detected to DNA, erythrocytes and platelets, and cytotoxic antibodies to T lymphocytes
have also been demonstrated. A strong case can be made for rheumatoid arthritis resulting
from an autoimmune response to the Fc portion of IgG which gives rise to complexes
which are ultimately responsible for the pathological changes characteristic of the
rheumatoid j oint.
Hypersensitivity
Not all antigen-antibody reactions are of benefit to the body, as sometimes the
complexes (or their subsequent interaction with body tissues) may result in tissue
damage. This must be regarded as a malfunction of the immune system and is known
as a hypersensitive reaction. These reactions can be categorized into five main types.
The first three involve the interaction between antigen and humoral antibody, and as
the onset of the reaction is rapid, the condition is termed immediate hypersensitivity.
The fourth type (delayed hypersensitivity) involves T cells and the symptoms of
the reaction appear after 24 hours. The fifth type is where antibody stimulates cell
function.
Type I (anaphylactic) reactions
In these reactions the antigen reacts with antibodies that are bound to the surface of
mast cells through the Fc portion. This leads to the degranulation of the mast cells with
the resultant release of vasoactive amines which give rise to the characteristic reactions
of inflammation. The symptoms of the reaction that appear depend on the distribution
of the cell-bound antibody, for example allergic reactions affecting the skin (urticaria),
nasal mucosa (rhinitis), eyes (angioneurotic oedema), bronchioles (extrinsic asthma)
and the cardiovascular system (anaphylactic shock). Antibodies involved in these
reactions are mainly IgE but sometimes IgG. They are called homocytotropic or reaginic
antibodies and are responsible for the common allergic reactions that affect nearly
10% of the population.
Type II (cytolytic or cytotoxic) reactions
These reactions involve damage to particular cells or tissues. The combination of
circulating antibody with the antigen on the cell surface results in the destruction of the
cell by phagocytosis either by opsonic adherence through Fc or by immune adherence
through C3b. Activation of the full complement system results in lysis. ADCC reactions
involving NK cells may also occur. Type II reactions include the destruction of
erythrocytes by cytolytic antibodies induced by incompatible blood transfusion;
Rhesus incompatibility; autoimmune reactions which result in autoantibodies being
produced against the patient's own red cells; and cells whose surface has been altered
by sensitizing drugs. Antibodies involved in these reactions are of the IgG and IgM
classes.
Fundamentals of immunology 299
5.3 Type in (complex-mediated) reactions
These reactions are due to the presence of immune complexes either in the circulation
or extravascular space. The complexes may localize in capillary networks (lungs, kidney,
joints) where, together with complement and polymorphs, they may produce extensive
tissue damage. Two main types of reactions fall into this group.
1 The Arthus reaction. The phenomenon is a local one and occurs if a soluble antigen
is introduced into the body when there is a great excess of antibody. The union between
the two results in an acute inflammatory reaction which may involve complement,
polymorphs, lymphokines or platelet aggregation, all of which enhance the inflammatory
response.
2 Serum sickness. This occurs when there is an excess of antigen to antibody, resulting
in the formation of soluble complexes. These may circulate and cause systemic reactions
or be widely deposited in the kidneys, joints and skin. A rise in temperature, swollen
lymph nodes, a generalized urticarial rash and painful swollen joints occur. The repeated
administration of foreign serum (e.g. antidiphtheria serum or antitetanus serum prepared
in horses) can lead to this condition due to antibodies being produced to the horse
protein material.
5.4 Type IV (delayed hypersensitivity) reactions
These reactions are slow to manifest themselves (1-3 days after contact with antigen).
Many allergic reactions to bacteria, viruses and fungi, sensitization to simple chemicals
and the rejection of transplanted tissues result. The reactions are initiated by reaction
between antigen-specific T cells and antigen, with the resultant release of lymphokines
that affect a variety of accessory cells, especially macrophages. Antibody and
complement are not involved. The classic example of this type of reaction may arise in
persons subjected to the tuberculin test. Subjects who have previously been in contact
with Mycobacterium tuberculosis have T cells sensitized to a protein extract of the
tubercle bacillus. Intradermal injections of this protein extract induce an inflammatory
response in the skin, at the site of the injection, which appears after 24 hours and
may persist for several months. It is taken as an indication of immunity to the disease
due to prior exposure to the organism, and a rough indication of the quality of this
immunity can be interpreted according to the response to varying concentrations of the
protein.
Reaction against virally infected or transplanted cells results in stimulated
lymphocytes transforming into Tc cells which can eliminate target cells bearing the
sensitizing antigen.
55 Type V (stimulatory hypersensitivity) reactions
Cells possess surface receptor sites for the chemical messengers of the body. Should an
autoantibody be produced against this site, it can combine with it and cause the same
effect as the chemical messenger, e.g. thyrotoxicosis caused by autoantibody to the
receptor site to TSH as previously described (section 4.10).
300 Chapter 14
Tissue transplantation
The replacement of certain diseased or damaged organs by healthy ones is now a fairly
routine occurrence, but the immunological nature of graft rejection was only accepted
when it was shown that second grafts from the same donor were more rapidly rejected
than first grafts. Tissue transferred from one site to another within the same individual
(autografts) or between genetically identical individuals, e.g. uniovular twins (isografts),
are invariably successful. Grafts between genetically different individuals of the
same species (allografts) or between different species (xenografts) evoke an intense
immunological response and are rejected.
The specificity of transplantation antigens is under genetic control and these genes
can be divided into two categories. The first are those that control the 'strong'
transplantation antigens which induce intense allograft reactions where incompatibility
between donor and recipient leads to rapid graft rejection. In mice this locus is termed
the H-2 complex and in humans the HLA system. These constitute the MHC, which
dominates all transplantation reactivity.
As previously described, four principal loci have been identified in the HLA
system, namely HLA-A, B, C and D, and their products occur as transmembrane
glycoprotein antigens. The second category of histocompatibility genes codes for 'minor'
transplantation antigens where differences between donor and recipient lead to relatively
slow graft rejection. Successful organ grafting relies on matching donor and recipient
antigens as closely as possible but often the clinical urgency of the transplant does not
permit this. Graft rejection is mediated by T and/or B cells with their usual associated
systems such as complement, NK cells, etc., and the time taken for rejection to
occur depends on whether the recipient has previously been sensitized to the antigens
of the donor. The major routine measures to prevent graft rejection are the use of anti-
inflammatory and immunosuppressive drugs such as steroids, azathioprine and
cyclosporin A, where the rationale is to destroy cells responding to antigen. The use of
antibodies to host lymphocytes (antilymphocyte serum, ALS) in conjunction with
chemotherapy has proved successful in heart grafts.
Tissue-typing studies have revealed that there is a large range of diseases, mostly
of presumed immunologic origin, that are associated with the presence of a specific
HLA antigen. The most overwhelming relationship occurs in the disease ankylosing
spondylitis, where 95% of sufferers possess the HLA-B27 antigen compared with an
incidence of only 5% in the controls. The precise reason for the relationship is not
known but many divergent theories have been postulated.
Immune response to tumours
It is suggested that altered cells which could be potentially malignant are recognized
by the immune system and eliminated. This must mean that cancer cells possess new
antigens on their cell surface. These antigens have been identified and can be categorized
into three groups.
1 Virally induced antigens result from a malignant transformation occurring in the
cell, due to an oncogenic virus. These evoke powerful immune responses in experimental
animals.
Fundamentals of immunology 301
2 Cells transformed by chemical carcinogens possess antigens that evoke a weak
response.
3 Naturally occurring tumours evoke little or no immune response in experimental
animals. This is disappointing but it must be remembered that these cells have already
escaped the normal immune surveillance.
The possible use of immunotherapy for the prevention or treatment of malignant
disease relies on the stimulation of the natural immune response and this is an area of
exciting research, but has, as yet, proved to have limited success.
7 Immunity
Immunity, the state of relative resistance to an infection, can be divided into two main
groups, natural and acquired immunity.
7.1 Natural immunity
This is subdivided into the following.
7.1.1 Species immunity
Humans are susceptible to diseases to which other animals are immune and vice versa.
This is due to body temperature, biochemical differences, etc.
7.1.2 Individual immunity
Variation in natural immunity between individuals can depend on the state of health,
age, hormonal balance, etc.
7.2 Acquired immunity
This is subdivided into actively acquired and passively acquired immunity, each of
which may be induced naturally or artificially.
7.2.7 Active acquired immunity
This is produced as a result of an antigenic stimulus. This stimulus may occur naturally
by means of a clinical or subclinical infection, or artificially by the deliberate introduction
into the body of the appropriate antigen in the form of a vaccine or toxoid (Chapter 16).
This type of immunity is normally long-lasting.
7.2.2 Passive acquired immunity
Passively acquired immunity involves no 'work' on the part of the body's defence
mechanisms, and produces immediate protection of short duration.
It involves the transfer into the recipient of preformed antibody, i.e. there is no
antigenic stimulus. This can occur (a) naturally, by transplacental passage of antibody
302 Chapter 14
from mother to child and also by antibodies being transmitted in breast milk; or (b)
artificially, by means of the administration of antibodies preformed in another human
(human A -globulin) or in animals, e.g. horses, which are used for the production of
antitoxic sera (antitoxins such as tetanus, diphtheria, etc.; see Chapter 15). The length
of the immunity depends on the rate of degradation of the antibody and is only short-
lived.
8 Further reading
Abbas A.K., Lichtman A.H. & Pober J.S. (1994) Cellular and Molecular Immunology, 2ndedn. London:
W.B. Saunders.
Alzari P.M., Lascombe M. & Poljak R.J. (1988) Three-dimensional structure of antibodies. Ann Rev
Immunol, 6, 555-580.
Arai K., Lee E, Miyajima A., Miyatake S., Arai N. & Yokota T. (1990) Cytokines: coordinators of
immune and inflammatory responses. Ann Rev Biochem, 59, 783-836.
Baldwin R.W. (1985) Monoclonal antibody targeting of anti-cancer agents. Eur J Cancer Clin Oncol,
21, 1281-1285.
Bloom B.R., Salgame P. & Diamond B. (1992) Revisiting and revising suppressor T cells. Immunol
Today, 13,131-136.
Campbell R.D. & Trowsdale J. (1993) Map of the human MHC. Immunol Today, 14, 349-352.
Germain R.H. & Marguiles D.M. (1993) The biochemistry and cell biology of antigen processing and
presentation. Ann Rev Immunol, 1 1 , 403-450.
Ikuta K., Uchida N., Friedman J. & Weissman I.L. (1992) Lymphocyte development from stem cells.
Ann Rev Immunol, 10,759-783.
Jerne N.K. (1974) Towards a network theory of the immune system. Ann Immunol (Instit Pasteur),
125C, 373-389.
Kohler G. & Milstein C. (1975) Continuous cultures of fused cells secreting antibody of predefined
specificity. Nature, 256, 495- A 97.
Leder P. (1982) The genetics of antibody diversity. SciAm, 246, 72-83.
Liddell J.E. & Cryer A. (1991) A Practical Guide to Monoclonal Antibodies. Chichester: John Wiley.
Micell M.C. & Parnes J.R. (1993) The role of CD4 and CD8 in T cell activation and differentiation.
Adv Immunol, 53, 59-122.
Morgan B.P & Walport M.J. (1991) Complement deficiency and disease. Immunol Today, 12, 301 —
306.
MullerG. (Ed.) (1984) Idiotype networks. Immunol Rev, 79.
Parker D.C. (1993) T cell-dependent B cell activation. Ann Rev Immunol, 11, 331-360.
Playfair J.H.L. (1992) Immunology at a Glance, 5th edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Roitt I.M. (1994) Essential Immunology, 8th edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Schreiber S.L. & Crabtree G.R. (1992) The mechanisms of action of cyclosporin A and FK506. Immunol
Today, 13, 136-142.
Sprent J.E., Gao E.-K. & Webb S.R. (1990) T cell reactivity to MHC molecules: immunity versus
tolerance. Science, 248, 1357-1363.
Tomlinson E. & Davis S.S. (eds) (1986) Site Specific Drug Delivery. Chichester: John Wiley. (This
deals in part with monoclonal antibodies.)
Tonegawa S. (1993) Somatic generation of antibody diversity. Nature, 302, 575-581.
Trinchieri G. (1989) Biology of natural killer cells. A dv Imm unol, 47, 187-376.
Weiss R.A. (1993) How does HIV cause AIDS? Science, 260, 1273-1279.
Fundamentals of immunology 303
The manufacture and quality control
of immunological products
2
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Introduction
2.4
Blending
2.5
Filling and drying
Vaccines
2.6
Quality control
The seed lot system
2.6.1
In-process control
Production of the bacteria and the
2.6.2
Final-product control
bacterial components of bacterial
vaccines
3
Immunosera
Fermentation
Processing of bacterial harvests
4
Human immunoglobulins
Production of the viruses and the viral
components of viral vaccines
5
Tailpiece
Growth of viruses
Processing of viral harvests
6
Further reading
Introduction
Immunological products comprise a group of pharmaceutical preparations with
diverse origins but with a common pharmacological purpose: the enhancement of a
recipient's immune status in a manner that provides immunity to infectious disease.
The immunological products that are generally available today are of three types:
vaccines, immunosera and human immunoglobulins.
Vaccines are by far the most important immunological products. They induce
immunity to many diseases and in so doing they have provided benefits for human-
kind, and for its animals, comparable with the benefits provided by anaesthetics and
antibiotics. Smallpox vaccine, relentlessly deployed under the aegis of the World Health
Organization, has made possible the eradication of one of the world's most terrible
infections. Diphtheria, tetanus, whooping-cough, poliomyelitis, measles, and German
measles vaccines have been wonderfully effective in those countries in which there
have been the resources and the will to deploy them in health care programmes. Vaccines
that provide protection against many other infections are available for use in appropriate
circumstances.
Immunosera, which were once very widely used in the prophylaxis and treatment
of many infections, are little used today, as vaccines have made some immunosera
unnecessary and lack of proven therapeutic benefit has caused others to be relegated to
immunological history. Tetanus antitoxin is an exception in that it is a very effective
prophylactic that is still used in countries where there are inadequate supplies of tetanus
immunoglobulin. Human immunoglobulins have important but limited uses.
Vaccines achieve their protective effects by stimulating a recipient's immune system
to synthesize antibodies that promote the destruction of infecting microbes or neutralize
bacterial toxins. This form of protection, known as active immunity, develops in the
course of days and in the cases of many vaccines develops adequately only after two or
three doses of vaccine have been given at intervals of days or weeks. Once established,
this immunity lasts for years but it may need to be reinforced by 'booster' doses of
vaccine given at relatively long intervals.
Immunosera and human immunoglobulins depend for their protective effects on
their content of antibodies derived, in the case of immunosera, from immunized
animals and, in the case of immunoglobulins, from humans who have been immunized
or who have high antibody titres consequent upon prior infection. This form of
immunity, known as passive immunity, is achieved immediately but is limited in its
duration to the time that protective levels of antibodies remain in the circulation: see
also Chapter 16.
A feature that is common to vaccines, immunosera and human immunoglobulins is
the marked specificity of their actions. Each provides immunity to only one infection.
This specificity has led to the development of vaccines and immunosera with several
different components such as are present in the widely used diphtheria/tetanus/pertussis
vaccines that are used to prevent the infectious diseases that commonly afflict infants
and young children.
In addition to the three types of immunological product that are generally available
there are two further types: synthetic peptide vaccines and monoclonal antibodies. Both
have been extensively investigated but neither has, as yet, a place in conventional
prophylaxis or therapeutics.
Principles of immunity were discussed in Chapter 14, whereas Chapter 16 describes
a vaccination and immunization programme.
Vaccines
The vaccines currently used for the prevention of the infectious diseases of humans all
originate, albeit in a variety of ways, from pathogenic microbes. The essence of vaccine
manufacture thus consists of procedures which produce from dangerous pathogens,
their components or their products, the immunogens that are devoid of pathogenic
properties but which, nonetheless, retain the property of inducing a protective response
in those to whom they are administered. The methods that are used by vaccine
manufacturers are constrained by costs, by problems of delivery to the vaccinee and,
most of all, by the biological properties of the pathogens from which vaccines are
derived. Even so, the vaccines used in conventional vaccination programmes today are
of only five readily recognizable types.
1 Live vaccines. Live vaccines are preparations of live bacteria or viruses which,
when administered in an appropriate way, cause symptomless or almost symptomless
infections. In the course of such an infection the constituents of the microbes in a
vaccine evoke an immune response which provides protection against a serious natural
disease. Live vaccines have a long history. The very first vaccine, smallpox vaccine,
was a live vaccine. It was introduced in 1796 by the Gloucestershire doctor, Edward
Jenner, who recognized that an attack of the mild condition known as cowpox protected
milkmaids from smallpox during epidemics of this dreaded disease. He therefore took
some fluid, the lymph, from a cowpox pustule on the hand of a milkmaid and used it to
inoculate a small boy. A little later he courageously inoculated the boy with lymph
from a case of smallpox — and nothing happened! The boy, protected as he was by the
cowpox infection, remained well. Jenner's use of the causative organism of one disease
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 305
to provide protection against another is paralled by the use of the bacille Calmette-
Guerin (BCG) strain of bovine tubercle bacilli to protect against infections with the
human strain. However, in this case, there is the difference that the ability of the BCG
strain to cause disease, its pathogenicity or virulence, has been reduced by many
sequential subcultivations on laboratory media. Live vaccines such as smallpox and
BCG vaccines that rely on the phenomenon of 'cross-protection' are exceptions to the
generality that most vaccines are derived from the causative organisms of the diseases
against which each is intended to provide protection. Thus, a virulent typhoid bacillus
that was enzymically crippled by the action of nitrosoguanosine on its DNA gave rise
to the live typhoid vaccine Ty21a. Likewise polio viruses from human infections were
grown in the laboratory in such a way that it was possible to select infectious but
innocuous progeny viruses suitable for use in live (oral) polio vaccines. Comparable
procedures have been used to obtain the viruses that are currently used in live measles,
mumps, rubella and yellow fever vaccines. The microbes with the reduced ability to
cause disease that are used in live vaccines are said to have attenuated virulence and
are often referred to as attenuated or vaccine strains.
2 Killed vaccines. Killed vaccines are suspensions of bacteria or of viruses that have
been killed by heat or by disinfectants such as phenol or formaldehyde. Killed microbes
do not replicate and cause an infection and so it is necessary that, in each dose of a
killed vaccine, there are sufficient microbes to stimulate a vaccinee's immune system.
Killed vaccines have therefore to be relatively concentrated suspensions. Even so, such
preparations are rather poor antigens and, at the same time, tend to be somewhat toxic.
It is thus necessary to divide the total amount of vaccine that is needed to induce
protection into two or three doses that are given at intervals of a few days or weeks.
Such a course of vaccination takes advantage of the enhanced 'secondary' response
that occurs when a vaccine is administered to a person whose immune system has been
sensitized by a previous dose of the same vaccine. The best known killed vaccines are
whooping-cough (pertussis), typhoid, cholera, Salk type polio vaccine and rabies vaccine.
3 Toxoid vaccines. Toxoid vaccines are preparations derived from the toxins that are
secreted by certain species of bacteria. In the manufacture of such vaccines, the toxin
is separated from the bacteria and treated in a way that eliminates toxicity without
eliminating immunogenicity . Formalin (ca. 38% of formaldehyde gas in water) is used
for this purpose and consequently the treated toxins are often referred to as formol
toxoids. Toxoid vaccines are very effective in the prevention of those diseases such as
diphtheria and tetanus in which the harmful effects of the infecting bacteria are due to
the deleterious action of bacterial toxins on physiology and biochemistry.
4 Bacterial cell component vaccines. Several bacterial vaccines that consist, not of
whole bacterial cells as in conventional whooping-cough vaccine, but of components
of the bacterial cells, are now available. The potential advantage of such vaccines is
that they evoke an immune response only to the component, or components, in the
vaccine and thus induce a response that is more specific and effective. At the same time,
the amount of adventitous material in the vaccine is reduced and with it the likelihood
of adverse reactions. Among the vaccines prepared from cell components are various
acellular whooping-cough (pertussis) vaccines which have either a single component
or several bacterial components. Other vaccines based on bacterial components, in
each case on one or more capsular polysaccharides, are the Haemophilus influenzae
Type B vaccine, the Neisseria meningitidis Type A and C vaccine, the 23-valent
pneumococcal polysaccharide vaccine and an acellular typhoid vaccine.
5 Viral subunit vaccines. Three viral subunit vaccines are widely available, two
influenza vaccines and a hepatitis B vaccine. The influenza vaccines are prepared by
treating intact influenza virus particles from embryonated hens' eggs infected with
influenza virus with a surface acting agent. The virus particles are disrupted and release
the two virus subunits, haemagglutinin and neuraminidase, that are required in the
vaccine. The hepatitis B vaccine was, at one time, prepared from hepatitis B surface
antigen (HBsAg) obtained from the blood of the victims of hepatitis B. This very
constrained source of antigen has been replaced by yeast cells that have been genetically
engineered to express HBsAg during fermentation.
2.1 The seed lot system
The starting point for the production of all microbial vaccines is the isolation of the
appropriate microbe. Such isolates have been mostly derived from human infections
and in some cases have yielded strains suitable for vaccine production very readily; in
other cases a great deal of manipulation and selection in the laboratory have been
needed before a suitable strain has been obtained.
Once a suitable strain is available, the practice is to grow, often from a single
organism, a sizeable culture which is distributed in small amounts in a large number of
ampoules and then stored at ~70°C or freeze-dried. This is the seed lot. From this seed
lot, one or more ampoules are taken and used as the seed to originate a limited number
of batches of vaccine which are first examined exhaustively in the laboratory and then,
if found to be satisfactory, tested for safety and efficacy in clinical trials. Satisfactory
results in the clinical trials validate the seed lot as the seed from which batches of
vaccine for routine use can subsequently be produced.
2.2 Production of the bacteria and the bacterial components of bacterial vaccines
The bacteria and bacterial components needed for the manufacture of bacterial vaccines
are readily prepared in laboratory media by well-recognized fermentation methods.
The end-product of the fermentation, the harvest, is processed to provide a concentrated
and purified vaccine component that may be conveniently stored for long periods or
even traded as an article of commerce.
2.2.1 Fermentation
The production of a bacterial vaccine batch begins with the resuscitation of the bacterial
seed contained in an ampoule of the seed lot stored at -70°C or freeze dried. The
resuscitated bacteria are first cultivated through one or more passages in preproduction
media. Then, when the bacteria have multiplied sufficiently, they are used to inoculate
a batch of production medium. This is usually contained in a large fermenter, the contents
of which are continuously stirred. Usually the pH and the oxidation-reduction potential
of the medium are monitored and adjusted throughout the growth period in a manner
intended to obtain the greatest bacterial yield. In the case of rapidly growing bacteria
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 307
the maximum yield is obtained after about a day but in the case of bacteria that grow
slowly the maximum yield may not be reached before 2 weeks. At the end of the growth
period the contents of the fermenter, which are known as the harvest, are ready for the
next stage in the production of the vaccine.
2.2.2 Processing of bacterial harvests
The harvest is a very complex mixture of bacterial cells, metabolic products and
exhausted medium. In the case of a live attenuated vaccine it is innocuous and all that
is necessary is for the bacteria to be separated and resuspended in an appropriate
menstruum, possibly for freeze-drying. In a vaccine made from a pathogen the harvest
may be intensely dangerous and great care is necessary in the following procedures.
1 Killing. The process by which the live bacteria in the culture are killed and thus
rendered harmless. Heat and disinfectants are employed. Heat and/or formalin are
required to kill the cells of Bordetella pertussis used to make whooping-cough vaccines,
and phenol is used to kill the Vibrio cholerae in cholera vaccine and the Salmonella
typhi in typhoid vaccine.
2 Separation. The process by which the bacterial cells are separated from the culture
fluid. Centrifugation using either a batch or continuous flow process is commonly
used, but precipitation of the cells by reducing the pH is an alternative. In the case of
vaccines prepared from cells, the fluid is discarded and the cells are resuspended in a
saline mixture; where vaccines are made from a constituent of the fluid, the cells are
discarded.
3 Fractionation. The process by which components are extracted from bacterial
cells or from the medium in which the bacteria are grown and obtained in a purified
form. The polysaccharide antigens of Neisseria meningitidis are separated from the
bacterial cells by treatment with hexadecyltrimethylammonium bromide and those of
Streptococcus pneumoniae with ethanol. The purity of an extracted material may be
improved by resolubilization in a suitable solvent and precipitation. After purification,
a component may be dried to a powder, stored indefinitely and, as required, incorporated
into a vaccine in precisely weighed amounts at the blending stage.
4 Detoxification. The process by which bacterial toxins are converted to harmless
toxoids. Formalin is used to detoxify the toxins of both Corynebacterium diphtheriae
and Clostridium tetani. The detoxification may be performed either on the whole culture
in the fermenter or on the purified toxin after fractionation.
5 Adsorption. The adsorption of the components of a vaccine on to a mineral adjuvant.
The mineral adjuvants, or carriers, most often used are aluminium hydroxide, aluminium
phosphate and calcium phosphate and their effect is to increase the immunogenicity
and decrease the toxicity, local and systemic, of a vaccine. Diphtheria vaccine, tetanus
vaccine, diphtheria/tetanus vaccine and diphtheria/tetanus/pertussis vaccine are
generally prepared as adsorbed vaccines.
6 Conjugation. The linking of a vaccine component that induces only a poor immune
response, with a vaccine component that induces a good immune response. The
immunogenicity for infants of the capsular polysaccharide of//, influenzae Type b is
greatly enhanced by the conjugation of the polysaccharide with diphtheria and tetanus
toxoids, and with the outer membrane protein of Neisseria meningitidis.
308 Chapter 15
2.3 Production of the viruses and the viral components of viral vaccines
Viruses replicate only in living cells so the first viral vaccines were necessarily made
in animals: smallpox vaccine in the dermis of calves and sheep; and rabies vaccines in
the spinal cords of rabbits and the brains of mice. Such methods are no longer used in
advanced vaccine production and the only intact animal hosts that are used are
embryonated hens' eggs. Almost all of the virus that is needed for viral vaccine
production is obtained from cell cultures infected with virus of the appropriate strain.
2. 3. 1 Growth of viruses
Embryonated hens' eggs are still the most convenient hosts for the growth of the viruses
that are needed for influenza and yellow fever vaccines. Influenza viruses accumulate
in high litre in the allantoic fluid of the eggs and yellow fever virus accumulates in the
nervous systems of the embryos.
2.3.2 Processing of viral harvests
The processing of the virus-containing material from infected embryonated eggs may
take one or other of several forms. In the case of influenza vaccines the allantoic fluid
is centrifuged to provide a concentrated and partially purified suspension of virus. This
concentrate is treated with ether or other disruptive agents to split the virus into its
components when split virion or surface antigen vaccines are prepared. The chick
embryos used in the production of yellow fever vaccine are homogenized in water to
provide a virus-containing puree. Centrifugation then precipitates most of the embryonic
debris and leaves much of the yellow fever virus in an aqueous suspension.
Cell cultures provide infected fluids that contain little debris and can generally be
satisfactorily clarified by filtration. Because most viral vaccines made from cell cultures
consist of live attenuated virus, there is no inactivation stage in their manufacture.
There are, however, two important exceptions: inactivated poliomyelitis virus vaccine
is inactivated with dilute formalin or /3-propiolactone and rabies vaccine is inactivated
with /3-propiolactone. The preparation of these inactivated vaccines also involves a
concentration stage, by adsorption and elution of the virus in the case of poliomyelitis
vaccine and by ultrafiltration in the case of rabies vaccine. When processing is complete
the bulk materials may be stored until needed for blending into final vaccine. Because
of the lability of many viruses, however, it is necessary to store most purified materials
at temperatures of-70°C.
2.4 Blending
Blending is the process in which the various components of a vaccine are mixed to
form a final bulk. It is undertaken in a large, closed vessel fitted with a stirrer and ports
for the addition of constituents and withdrawal of the final blend. When bacterial
vaccines are blended, the active constituents usually need to be greatly diluted and
the vessel is first charged with the diluent, usually containing a preservative such as
thiomersal. A single-component final bulk is then made by adding bacterial suspension,
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 309
bacterial component or concentrated toxoid in such quantity that it is at the desired
concentration in the final product. A multiple-component final bulk of a combined
vaccine is made by adding each required component in sequence. When viral vaccines
are blended, the need to maintain adequate antigenicity or infectivity may preclude
dilution and tissue culture fluids or concentrates made from them are often used undiluted
or, in the case of multicomponent vaccines, merely diluted one with another. After
thorough mixing a final bulk may be broken down into a number of moderate sized
volumes to facilitate handling.
2.5 Filling and drying
As vaccine is required to meet orders, bulk vaccine is distributed into single dose
ampoules or into multidose vials as necessary. Vaccines that are filled as liquids are
sealed and capped in their containers, whereas vaccines that are provided as dried
preparations are freeze-dried before sealing.
The single-component bacterial vaccines are listed in Table 15.1. For each vaccine,
notes are provided of the basic material from which the vaccine is made, the salient
production processes and tests for potency and for safety. The multicomponent vaccines
that are made by blending together two or more of the single component vaccines are
required to meet the potency and safety requirements for each of the single components
that they contain. The best known of the combined bacterial vaccines is the adsorbed
diphtheria, tetanus and pertussis vaccine (DTPer/Vac/Ads) that is used to immunize
infants, and the adsorbed diphtheria and tetanus vaccine (DT/Vac/Ads) that is used to
reinforce the immunity of school entrants.
The single-component viral vaccines are listed in Table 15.2 with notes similar to
those provided with the bacterial vaccines. The only combined viral vaccine that is
widely used is the measles, mumps and rubella vaccine (MMR Vac). In a sense, however,
both the inactivated (Salk) poliovaccine (Pol/Vac (inactivated)) and the live (Sabin)
poliovaccine (Pol/Vac (oral)) are combined vaccines in that they are both mixtures of
virus of each of the three serotypes of poliovirus. Influenza vaccines, too, are combined
vaccines in that many contain components from as many as three virus strains, usually
from two strains of influenza A and one strain of influenza B.
2.6 Quality control
The quality control of vaccines is intended to provide assurances of both the efficacy
and the safety of every batch of every product. It is executed in three ways:
1 in-process control;
2 final-product control; and
3 a requirement that for each product the starting materials, intermediates, final product
and processing methods are consistent.
The results of all quality control tests are always recorded in detail as, in those
countries in which the manufacture of vaccines is regulated by law, they are part of the
evidence on which control authorities judge the suitability or otherwise of each batch
of each preparation.
310 Chapter 15
Table 15.1 Bacterial vaccines used for the prevention of infectious disease in humans. Vaccines marked * are those used in
conventional immunization schedules; those marked f are used to provide additional protection when circumstances
indicate a need
Vaccine
Source material
Processing
Potency assay
Safety tests
Anthrax'
BCG*
Diphtheria
(adsorbed)'
Haemophilus
influenzae
type b*
Neisseria
meningitidis
Types A and Ct,
Pneumococcal
polysaccharidet
Tetanus
(adsorbed)'
Medium from
cultures of
B. anthracis
Cultures of live
BCG cells in
liquid or on
solid media
Cultures of
C. diphtheriae in
liquid medium
Cultures of
H. influenzae
type b
Cultures of
N. meningitidis
of serotypes
A and C
Cultures of
23 serotypes of
Strep, pneumoniae
Cultures of
CI. tetani'm
liquid medium
1 Separation of
protective
antigen from
medium
2 Adsorption
1 Bacteria
centrifuged
from medium
2 Resuspension
in stabilizer
3 Freeze-drying
1 Separation and
concentration of
toxin
2 Conversion of
toxin to toxoid
3 Adsorption of
toxoid to adjuvant
1 Separation of
capsular
polysaccharide
2 Conjugation
with a protein
1 Precipitation
with hexadecyl-
trimethyammonium
bromide
2 Solubilization
and purification
3 Blending
4 Freeze-drying
1 Precipitation
of polysaccharides
with ethanoi
2 Blending into
polyvalent
vaccine
1 Conversion of
toxin to toxoid
2 Separation and
purification of
toxoid
3 Adsorption to
adjuvant
3 + 3 quantal
assay in
guinea-pigs
using challenge
with B. anthracis
Viable count;
induction of
sensitivity to
tuberculin in
guinea-pigs
3 + 3 quantal
assay in
guinea-pigs
using intra-
dermal challenge
Estimation of
capsular poly-
saccharide
content
Estimation of
capsular poly-
saccharide
content
Physico-chemical
estimation of
polysaccharides
3 + 3 quantal
assay in mice
using subcutaneous
challenge
with tetanus
toxin
Exclusion of
live B. anthracis
and of
anthrax toxin
Exclusion of
virulent mycobacteria;
absence of
excessive dermal
reactivity
Inoculation of
guinea-pigs to
exclude residual
toxin
Inoculation of
guinea-pigs to
exclude presence
of untoxoided
toxin
continued on p. 312
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 311
Table 15.1 Continued
Vaccine
Source material
Processing
Potency assay
Safety tests
Typhoidt
whole eel
Typhoid
Vi capsular
polysaccharide
antigent
Typhoid
live vaccinet
Whooping-cough
(Pertussis)
whole cell*
Whooping-cough
(Pertussis)
(acellular)t
Cultures of
Sal. typhi
grown in
liquid media
Cultures of
Sal. typhi
grown in
liquid medium
Cultures of
Sal. typhi strain
Ty21A
Cultures of
B. pertussis
grown in liquid
or on solid
media
Cultures of
Bord. pertussis
1 Killing with
heat or phenol
2 Separation and
resuspension of
bacteria in saline
Extraction of
capsular antigen
Encapsulation
1 Harvest
2 Killing with
formalin
3 Resuspension
1 Harvest
2 Extraction and
blending of cell
components
Induction of
antibodies in
rabbits
Estimation of
capsular
antigen
Estimation of
content of
live bacteria
3 + 3 quantal
assay in mice
using intra-
cerebral
challenge with live
Bord. pertussis
As for whole-cell
whooping-cough
vaccine
Exclusion of live
Sal. typhi
Estimation of
bacteria to limit
content to 20 x 10 9 per
human dose;
weight gain test in
mice to exclude
excess toxicity
Weight gain test in
mice to exclude
excess toxicity
Notes: Diphtheria and whooping cough vaccines are seldom used as single-component preparations but as components of
diphtheria/tetanus vaccines and diphtheria/tetanus/pertussis vaccines. A combined diphtheria/tetanus/pertussis/Hib vaccine
is available.
Bacterial vaccines less generally available than those listed in the table include botulism vaccine, necrotizing enteritis
(pigbel) vaccine, Pseudomonas aeruginosa vaccine and tularaemia vaccine.
2.6.1
In-process control
In-process quality control is the control exercised over starting materials and
intermediates. Its importance stems from the opportunities that it provides for the
examination of a product at the stages in its manufacture at which testing is most likely
to provide the most meaningful information. The WHO Requirements and national
authorities stipulate many in-process controls but manufacturers often perform tests in
excess of those stipulated, especially sterility tests (Chapter 23) as, by so doing, they
obtain assurance that production is proceeding normally and that the final product is
likely to be satisfactory. Examples of in-process control abound but three of different
types should suffice.
1 The quality control of both diphtheria and tetanus vaccines requires that the products
are tested for the presence of free toxin, that is for specific toxicity due to inadequate
detoxification with formalin, at the final-product stage. By this stage, however, the
toxoid concentrates used in the preparation of the vaccines have been much diluted
and, as the volume of vaccine that can be inoculated into the test animals (guinea-pigs)
312 Chapter 15
Table 15.2 Viral vaccines used for the prevention of infectious disease in humans. The vaccines marked * are those used
in conventional immunization programmes, those marked t are used to provide additional protection when circumstances
indicate a need
Vaccine
Source material
Processing
Potency assay
Safety tests
Hepatitis At
Hepatitis Bt
Influenza
(split virion)t
Influenza
(surface
antigen)t
Measles'
Mumps'
Poliomyelitis
(inactivated)t
(Salktype)
Human diploid
cells infected
with hepatitis
A virus
Yeast cells
genetically
modified to express
surface
antigen
Allantoic fluid
from embryonated
hens' eggs
infected with
influenza
viruses A and B
Allantoic fluid
from embryonated
hens' eggs
infected with
influenza
viruses A and B
Chick embryo
cell cultures
infected with
attenuated
measles virus
Chick embryo
cell cultures
infected with
attenuated
mumps virus
Human diploid
cell cultures
infected with
each of the
three serotypes
of poliovirus
1 Separation of
virus from
cells
2 Inactivation
with HCHO
3 Adsorption
toAI(OH) 3 gel
1 Separation of
HBsAg from
yeast cells
2 Adsorption to
AI(OH) 3 gel
1 Harvest of
viruses
2 Disruption
with surface
active agent
3 Blending of
components of
different serotypes
1 Inactivation
and disruption
2 Separation of
haemagglutinin
and neuraminidase
3 Blending of
haemagglutinins
and neuraminidase
of different
serotypes
1 Clarification
2 Freeze-drying
1 Clarification
2 Freeze-drying
1 Clarification
2 Inactivation
with formalin
3 Concentration
4 Blending of
virus of each
serotype
Assay of
antigen content
by ELISA
Immunogenicity
assay or HBsAg
assay by ELISA
Assay of haemagglutinin
content by
immunodiffusion
Assay of haemagglutinin
content by
immunodiffusion
Infectivity
titration in
cell cultures
Infectivity titration
in cell
cultures
Induction of
antibodies to
polioviruses
in chicks or
guinea-pigs
Inoculation of
cell cultures to
exclude presence
of live virus
Test for presence
of yeast DNA
Inoculation of
embryonated hens'
eggs to exclude
live virus
Inoculation of
embryonated hens'
eggs to exclude
live virus
Tests to exclude
presence of extraneous
viruses
Tests to exclude
presence of
extraneous
viruses
Inoculation of
cell cultures and
monkey spinal cords
to exclude live
virus
continued on p. 314
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 313
Table 15.2 Continued
Vaccine
Source material
Processing
Potency assay
Safety tests
Poliomyelitis
(live or oral)*
(Sabin type)
Rabiest
Rubella*
(German
measles)
Varicellat
Cell cultures
infected with
attenuated
poliovirus
of each of the
three serotypes
Human diploid
cell cultures
infected with
rabies virus
Human diploid
cell cultures
infected with
attenuated
rubella virus
Human diploid
cell cultures
infected with
attenuated
varicella virus
1 Clarification
2 Blending of
virus of three
serotypes in
stabilizing
medium
1 Clarification
2 Inactivation
with beta-
propiolactone
1 Clarification
2 Blending with
stabilizer
3 Freeze-drying
1 Clarification
2 Freeze-drying
Infectivity titration
of each of three
virus serotypes
3 + 3 quantal
assay in mice
Infectivity titration
in cell cultures
Infectivity titration
in cell cultures
Yellow fevert Aqueous homogenate 1 Centrifugation Infectivity-
titration in
cell cultures
by plaque
assay
of chick embryos
infected with
attenuated yellow
fever virus 170
to remove cell
debris
2 Freeze drying
Test for attenuation
by inoculation of
spinal cords of
monkeys and comparison
of lesions with
those produced by
a reference vaccine
Inoculation of
cell cultures to
exclude live virus
Tests to exclude
presence of
extraneous
viruses
Tests to exclude
presence of
extraneous
viruses
Tests to exclude
extraneous
viruses
Notes: Measles, mumps and rubella vaccines are generally administered in the form of a combined measles/mumps/rubella
vaccine (MMR vaccine).
Viral vaccines less generally available than those listed in the table include Congo Crimean haemorrhagic fever vaccine,
dengue fever vaccine, Japanese encephalitis B vaccine, smallpox vaccine, tick borne encephalitis vaccine, and Venezuelan
encephalitis vaccine.
ELISA, enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay.
is limited, the tests are relatively insensitive. In-process control, however, provides for
tests on the undiluted concentrates and thus increases the sensitivity of the method at
least 100-fold.
2 An example from virus vaccine manufacture is the titration, prior to inactivation,
of the infectivity of the pools of live poliovirus used to make inactivated poliomyelitis
vaccine. Adequate infectivity of the virus from the tissue cultures is an indicator of the
adequate virus content of the starting material and, since infectivity is destroyed in the
inactivation process, there is no possibility of performing such an estimation after
formolization.
3 A more general example from virus vaccine production is the rigorous examination
of tissue cultures to exclude contamination with infectious agents from the source animal
or, in the cases of human diploid cells or cells from continuous cell lines, to detect
3 1 4 Chapter 15
cells with abnormal characteristics. Monkey kidney cell cultures are tested for simian
herpes B virus, simian virus 40, mycoplasma and tubercle bacilli. Cultures of human
diploid cells and continuous line cells are subjected to detailed karyological examination
(examination of chromosomes by microscopy) to ensure that the cells have not
undergone any changes likely to impair the quality of a vaccine or lead to undesirable
side-effects.
2.6.2 Final-product control
Vaccines containing killed microbes or their products are generally tested for potency
in assays in which the amount of the vaccine that is required to protect animals from a
defined challenge dose of the appropriate pathogen, or its product, is compared with
the amount of a standard vaccine that is required to provide the same protection. The
usual format of the test is the 3 + 3 dose quantal assay that is used to estimate the
potency of whooping-cough vaccine (British Pharmacopoeia 1993). Three logarithmic
serial doses of the test vaccine and three logarithmic serial doses of the standard vaccine
are made and each is used to inoculate a group of 16 mice. In the case of both the
vaccine and the standard the middle dose is chosen, on the basis of experience, so that
it is sufficient to induce a protective response in about 50% of the animals to which it
is given. Each lower dose may then be expected to protect fewer than 50% of the mice
to which it is given and each higher dose to protect more than 50% of the animals to
which it is given. Fourteen days later all of the mice are infected ('challenged') with
Bordetella pertussis and, after a further 14 days, the number of mice surviving in each
of the six groups is counted. The number of survivors in each group is then used to
calculate the potency of the test vaccine relative to the potency of the standard vaccine
by the statistical method of probit analysis (Finney 1971). The potency of the test
vaccine may be expressed either as a percentage of the potency of the standard vaccine
but, as the standard vaccine will have an assigned potency in International Units (IU),
the potency of the test vaccine may be expressed in similar units. Tests similar to that
used to estimate the potency of whooping-cough vaccine are prescribed for the estimation
of the potencies of diphtheria vaccine and of tetanus vaccine. In the cases of these two
vaccines the bacterial toxins are used as the challenge material (British Pharmacopoeia
1993).
Vaccines containing live microorganisms are generally tested for potency by counts
of their viable particles. In the case of the only live bacterial vaccine in common use,
BCG vaccine, dilutions of vaccine are made and dropped in fixed volumes on to solid
media capable of supporting the microorganisms' growth. After a fortnight the colonies
generated by the drops are counted and the live count of the undiluted vaccine is
calculated. The potency of live viral vaccines is estimated in much the same way except
that a substrate of living cells is used. Dilutions of vaccine are inoculated on to tissue
culture monolayers in Petri dishes or in plastic trays, and the live count of the vaccine
is calculated from the infectivity of the dilutions and dilution factor involved.
Safety tests. Because many vaccines are derived from basic materials of intense
pathogenicity — the lethal dose of a tetanus toxin for a mouse is estimated to be 3 x
10" (ig — safety testing is of paramount importance. Effective testing provides a
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 315
guarantee of the safety of each batch of every product and most vaccines in the final
container must pass one or more safety tests as prescribed in a pharmacopoeial
monograph. This generality does not absolve a manufacturer from the need to perform
'in-process' tests as required, but it is relaxed for those preparations which have a final
formulation that makes safety tests on the final product either impractical or meaningless.
Bacterial vaccines are regulated by relatively simple safety tests. Those vaccines
composed of killed bacteria or bacterial products must be shown to be completely free
from the living microbes used in the production process and inoculation of appropriate
bacteriological media with the final product provides an assurance that all organisms
have been killed. Those containing diphtheria and tetanus toxoids require in addition,
a test system capable of revealing inadequately detoxified toxins; inoculation of guinea-
pigs, which are exquisitely sensitive to both diphtheria and tetanus toxins, is always
used for this purpose. Inoculation of guinea-pigs is also used to exclude the presence of
abnormally virulent organisms in BCG vaccine.
Viral vaccines present problems of safety testing far more complex than those
experienced with bacterial vaccines. With killed viral vaccines the potential hazards
are those due to incomplete virus inactivation and the consequent presence of residual
live virus in the preparation. The tests used to detect such live virus consist of the
inoculation of susceptible tissue cultures and of susceptible animals. The cultures are
examined for cytopathic effects and the animals for symptoms of disease and histological
evidence of infection at autopsy. This test is of particular importance in inactivated
poliomyelitis vaccine, the vaccine being injected intraspinally into monkeys. At autopsy,
sections of brain and spinal cord are examined microscopically for the histological
lesions indicative of proliferating poliovirus.
With attenuated viral vaccines the potential hazards are those associated with
reversion of the virus during production to a degree of virulence capable of causing
disease in vaccinees. To a large extent this possibility is controlled by very careful
selection of a stable seed but, especially with live attenuated poliomyelitis vaccine, it is
usual to compare the neurovirulence of the vaccine with that of a vaccine known to be
safe in field use. The technique involves the intraspinal inoculation of monkeys with a
reference vaccine and with the test vaccine and a comparison of the neurological lesions
and symptoms, if any, that are caused. If the vaccine causes abnormalities in excess of
those caused by the reference it fails the test.
Tests of general application. In addition to the tests designed to estimate the potency
and to exclude the hazards peculiar to each vaccine there are a number of tests of more
general application. These relatively simple tests are as follows.
1 Sterility. In general, vaccines are required to be sterile. The exceptions to this
requirement are smallpox vaccine made from the dermis of animals and bacterial
vaccines such as BCG, Ty21A and tularaemia vaccine which consist of living but
attenuated microbes. WHO requirements and pharmacopoeial standards stipulate, for
vaccine batches of different size, the numbers of containers that must be tested and
found to be sterile. The preferred method of sterility testing is membrane filtration as
this technique permits the testing of large volumes without dilution of the test media.
The test system must be capable of detecting aerobic and anaerobic organisms and
fungi (see Chapter 23).
2 Freedom from abnormal toxicity. The purpose of this simple test is to exclude the
presence in a final container of a highly toxic contaminant. Five mice of 17-22g and
two guinea-pigs of 250-350 g are inoculated with one human dose or 1.0ml, whichever
is less, of the test preparation. All must survive for 7 days without signs of illness.
3 Presence of aluminium and calcium. The quantity of aluminium in vaccines
containing aluminium hydroxide or aluminium phosphate as an adjuvant is limited to
125 mg per dose and it is usually estimated compleximetrically. The quantity of calcium
is limited to 1.3 mg per dose and is usually estimated by flame photometry.
4 Free formalin. Inactivation of bacterial toxins with formalin may lead to the presence
of small amounts of free formalin in the final product. The concentration, as estimated
by colour development with acetylacetone, must not exceed 0.02%.
5 Phenol concentration. When phenol is used to preserve a vaccine its concentration
must not exceed 0.25% w/v or, in the case of some vaccines, 0.5% w/v. Phenol is
estimated by the colour reaction with amino-phenazone and hexacyanoferrate.
Immunosera
Immunosera are preparations derived from the blood of animals, usually from the blood
of horses. To prepare an immunoserum a horse is injected with a sequence of spaced
doses of an antigen until a trial blood sample shows that the injections have induced a
high titre of antibody to the injected antigen. A large volume of blood is then removed
by venepuncture and collected into a vessel containing sufficient citrate solution to
prevent clotting. The blood cells are allowed to settle and the supernatant plasma is
drawn off. The plasma is then fractionated by the addition of ammonium sulphate
and the globulin fraction is recovered and treated with pepsin to yield a refined
immunoserum, Harms (1948). This refined immunoserum contains no more than a
trace of the albumin that was present in the plasma. The refined immunoserum is
titrated for the potency of its antibody content, diluted to the required concentration
and transferred into ampoules. Two or more monovalent immunosera may be blended
together to provide a multivalent immunoserum.
The quality of immunosera is controlled by potency tests and by conventional tests
for safety and sterility. The potency tests have a common design in that, in the case of
all immunosera, the potency is estimated by comparing the amount of an immunoserum
that is required to neutralize an effect of an homologous antigen with the amount of a
standard preparation that is required to achieve the same effect. Serial dilutions of the
immunoserum and of a standard preparation are made and to each is added a constant
amount of the homologous antigen. Each mixture is then inoculated into a group of
animals, usually guinea-pigs or mice, and the dilutions of the immunoserum and of the
standard which neutralize the effects of the antigen are noted. As the potencies of the
standard preparations are expressed in IU the potencies of the immunosera are determined
in corresponding units per millilitre j British Pharmacopoeia 1993).
Table 15.3 lists the immunosera for which there is a need, or a potential need, today
and indicates the required potencies of these immunosera and the salient features of the
potency assay methods.
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 317
Table 15.3 Immunosera used in the prevention of infections in humans
Immunoserum
Potency assay method
Potency requirement
Botulinum antitoxin
Diphtheria antitoxin
Tetanus antitoxin
Neutralization of the lethal
effects of botulinum
toxins A, B and E in mice
500IUm|- 1 of type A
500IU mM ofType B
50IU ml-' ofType E
Neutralization of the erythrogenic
1000 IU ml"' if prepared
effect of diphtheria toxin
in horses
in the skin of guinea-pigs
500IU mM if prepared in
other species
Neutralization of the
1000 IU ml" 1 for prophylaxis
paralytic effect of tetanus
3000 IU ml" 1 fortreatment
toxin in mice
In each of the assays of potency the amount of the immunoserum and the amount of a corresponding
standard antitoxin that are required to neutralize the effects of a defined dose of the corresponding
toxin are determined. The two determined amounts and the assigned unitage of the standard antitoxin
are then used to calculate the potency of the immunoserum in International Units (IU).
Human immunoglobulins
Human immunoglobulins are preparations of the immunoglobulins, principally
immunoglobulin G (IgG), that are present in human blood. They are derived from the
plasma of donated blood and from plasma obtained by plasmapheresis. Normal
immunoglobulin, that is immunoglobulin that has relatively low titres of antibodies, is
prepared from pools of plasma obtained from not fewer than a thousand individuals;
specific immunoglobulins, that is immunoglobulins with a high titre of a particular
antibody, are usually prepared from smaller pools of plasma obtained from individuals
who have suffered recent infections or who have undergone recent immunization and
who thus have a high titre of a particular antibody. Each contribution of plasma to a
pool is tested for the presence of hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg), for antibodies to
human immunodeficiency viruses I and II (HIV I and II) and for antibodies to hepatitis
C virus in order to identify, and to exclude from a pool, any plasmas capable of
transmitting infection from donor to recipient.
The immunoglobulins are obtained from the plasma pools by fractionation methods
that are based on ethanol precipitation in the cold with rigorous control of protein
concentration, pH and ionic strength (Cohn etal. 1946; Kistler & Nitschmann 1962).
Some of the fractionation steps may contribute to the safety of immunoglobulins by
inactivating or removing contaminating viruses that have not been recognized by testing
of the blood donations. The immunoglobulin may be presented either as a freeze-dried
or a liquid preparation at a concentration that is 10 to 20 times that in plasma. Glycine
may be added as a stabilizer and thiomersal as a preservative.
The quality control of immunoglobulins includes potency tests and conventional
tests of safety and sterility. The potency tests consist of neutralization tests that parallel
those used for the potency assay of immunosera, except that in the cases of some
immunoglobulins the assays are made in vitro. In addition to the safety and sterility
tests, total protein is determined by nitrogen estimations, the protein composition by
3 1 8 Chapter 15
Table 15.4 Immunoglobulins used in the prevention and treatment of infections in humans
Immunoglobulin
Potency assay method
Potency requirement
Hepatitis B
Measles
Normal
Radioimmunoassay or
enzymoimmunoassay
Neutralization of the
infectivity of measles virus
for cell cultures
Neutralization tests in cell
cultures or in animals
Not less than lOOIUmh 1
Not less than 50IU ml
Rabies
Tetanus
Varicella/zoster
Neutralization of the
infectivity of rabies virus for mice
Neutralization of the
paralytic effect of tetanus toxin
in mice
ELISA in paralled with
a standard varicella-zoster
immunoglobulin
Measurable amounts of one
bacterial antibody and of one
viral antibody for which there
are international standards
Not less than 150111ml-'
Not less than SOIUml
Not less than lOOIUmh'
In each of the assays of potency the amount of the immunoglobulin and the amount of a
corresponding standard preparation that are required to neutralize the infectivity or other biological
activity of a defined amount of virus or to neutralize a defined amount of a bacterial toxin are
determined. The two determined amounts and the assigned unitage of the standard preparation are
then used to calculate the potency of the immunoglobulin in International Units (IU). ELISA,
enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay.
cellulose acetate electrophoresis and molecular size by liquid chromatography. The
presence of immunoglobulins derived from species other than humans is excluded by
precipitin tests. Table 15.4 lists six human immunoglobulins and their requisite potencies
and indicates the methods in which the potencies are determined.
Tailpiece
Immunological products, notably vaccines, provide very secure protection from diseases
caused by small pathogenic entities such as bacterial toxins and many viruses. They
provide somewhat less secure protection from larger pathogens such as bacteria and
little protection, if any, from much larger pathogens such as malaria parasites. There
thus appears to be a rough inverse correlation between the efficacies of vaccines and
the sizes of the pathogens from which each vaccine is intended to provide protection.
This relationship may reflect the way in which vaccine-induced antibodies react with a
toxin or pathogen. Small homogeneous tetanus toxin molecules may be completely
invested by tetanus antitoxin molecules and thus wholly neutralized. In contradistinction
malarial parasites may be unaffected by antibodies that attach only to a cell component
that is not essential for the parasite's survival. It has recently been suggested (Beverly
1996) that in order to make effective vaccines against larger pathogens it may first be
necessary to identify those molecules in the pathogens that are essential for each
Manufacture and quality control of immunological products 3 1 9
pathogen's survival. A vaccine containing such molecules might induce antibodies to a
pathogen's essential molecules and thus provide immunity against larger pathogens
comparable with that provided by the vaccines against toxins and small pathogens.
The cost of the vaccines used in the routine immunization of infants, children and
adolescents is roughly equivalent to the cost of 100 loaves of bread. In the industrialized
countries that is a small price to pay for what is virtually life-long protection from
diphtheria, tetanus, whooping-cough, H. Influenzae type B infection, poliomyelitis,
measles, mumps and rubella. In many developing countries it is a price far beyond the
reach of either individuals or health authorities but a price that is in large part borne by
the World Health Organization's Expanded Programme of Immunization.
Further reading
Beverley P.C.L. (1996) A job in time. MRC News Winter, 1996.
British Medical Association and Pharmaceutical Press (1997) The British National Formulary. London:
BMA. (This publication contains a useful section on immunological products. New editions appear
at intervals.)
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) London: Her Majesty's Stationery Office. (The British Pharmacopoeia
contains edited versions of the monographs for immunological products that appear in the European
Pharmacopoeia. )
Cohn E.J., Strong L.E., Hughes W.L., Hulford D.J., Ashworth J.N., Melin M. & Taylor H.I. (1946)
Preparation and properties of serum proteins IV. J Am Chem Soc, 68, 459-475.
Datapharm Publications Ltd (1996) The Data Sheet Compendium. London. (This publication contains
reproductions of the Data Sheets of immunological products that are licensed by the Medicines
Control Authority.)
Finney D.J. (1971) P rob it Analysis. London: Cambridge University Press.
Harms A.J. (1948) The purification of antitoxic plasmas by enzyme treatment and heat denaturation.
BiochemJ, 42, 340-347.
Kistler P. & Nitschmann HS. (1962) Large scale production of human plasma fractions. Vox Sang, 7,
414-424.
Sheffield F. (1990) The measurement of immunity. In: Topley and Wilson's Principles of Bacteriology,
Virology and Immunity (eds M.T. Parker & L.H. Collier), 8th edn. pp. 437-448. London: Edward
Arnold.
Vaccination and immunization
1
Introduction
6.1
Poliomyelitis vaccination
6.2
Measles, mumps and rubella
2
Spread of infection
vaccination (MMR)
2.1
Common source infections
6.2.1
Measles
2.2
Propagated source infections
6.2.2
Mumps
6.2.3
Rubella
3
Objectives of a vaccine/immunization
6.2.4
MMR vaccine
programme
6.3
Tuberculosis
3.1
Severity of the disease
6.4
Diphtheria, tetanus and pertussis (DTP)
3.2
Effectiveness of the vaccine/
immunization
immunogen
6.4.1
Diphtheria
3.3
Safety
6.4.2
Tetanus
3.4
Cost
6.4.3
Pertussis (whooping-cough)
3.5
Longevity of the immunity
6.4.4
DTP vaccine combinations and
administration
4
Classes of immunity
6.5
Haemophilus influenza Type B (HiB)
4.1
Passive acquired immunity
immunization
4.2
Active acquired immunity
7
Juvenile immunization schedule
5
Classes of vaccine
5.1
Live vaccines
8
Immunization of special risk groups
5.2
Killed and component vaccines
Further reading
Routine immunization against
infectious disease
Introduction
People rarely suffer from the same infectious disease twice. When such re-infection
does occur it is usually either with an antigenically modified strain (common cold,
influenza), the patient is immunocompromised (immunosuppressive drugs, immu-
nological disorders) or a long time has elapsed since the first infection. Alternatively
the patient may have failed to eliminate the primary infection which has then remained
latent and emerges in a modified or similar form (herpes simplex, cold sores; herpes
zoster, chickenpox). Immunity towards re-infection was recognized long before
the discovery of the causal agents of infectious disease. Efforts were therefore made
towards developing treatment strategies that might generate immunity to infection.
An early development was the attempted control of smallpox (Variola major) through
the deliberate introduction, into the skin of healthy individuals, of material taken
from active smallpox lesions. Such treatments produced single localized lesions and
commonly, but not always, protected the recipient from contracting full-blown smallpox.
The process became known as variolation, and, unknown to its practitioners, attenuated
the disease through changing the route of infection of the causal organism. Unfortunately,
occasional cases of smallpox resulted from such treatment. Further developments
Vaccination and immunization 321
recognized that immunity developed towards one disease often brings with it cross-
immunity towards another related condition. Cowpox is a disease of cattle that can be
transmitted to man. Symptoms are similar but less severe than those of smallpox.
Material taken from active cowpox (Vaccinia) lesions was therefore substituted into
the variolation procedures. This conferred much of the protection against smallpox
that had become associated with variolation but without the associated risk. Edward
Jenner's discovery, made over two centuries ago, became known as vaccination
and heralded a new era in disease control. The term vaccination is now widely used
to describe prophylactic measures that use live microorganisms or their products
to induce immunity. The more general term immunization describes procedures that
induce immunity in the recipient but which do not necessarily involve the use of
microorganisms. Nowadays vaccination and immunization procedures are used not
only to protect the individual against infection but also to protect communities
against epidemic disease. Such public health measures have met with spectacular
success as illustrated in Fig. 16.1 for the incidence of paralytic poliomyelitis. In
instances, where there is no reservoir of the pathogen other than in infected
individuals, and survival outside the host is limited (i.e. smallpox, poliomyelitis and
measles) then such programmes, worldwide, have the potential to eradicate the disease
permanently.
o
■«
.a
■§
c
.52
I
E
o
~6
Q-
o
!■
eooor
700G 1
6OT0
54M0
-WJQ -
&alk v&ccJr>e
3C0G -
2000 -
1000 -
Sabin vaccina
TWO
1955
13W
1965
1970
Y&«
Fig. 16.1 Reported incidence of paralytic poliomyelitis in England and Wales during the 1950s and
1960s. After introduction of vaccination programmes the incidence of disease dropped from an
endemic incidence of ca. 5000 cases per year to fewer than 10.
322 Chapter 16
2.1
Spread of infection
Infectious diseases may either be spread from a common reservoir of the infectious
agent that is distinct from diseased individuals (common source) or they might transfer
directly from a diseased individual to a healthy one (propagated source).
Common source infections
In common source infections, the reservoir of infection might be animate (i.e. insect
vectors of malaria and yellow fever) or they might be inanimate (infected drinking
water, cooling towers, contaminated food supply). In the simplest of cases the source
of infection is transient (i.e. food sourced to a single retail outlet or to an isolated event
such as a wedding reception). In such instances the onset of new cases is rapid,
phased over 1-1.5 incubation periods, and the decline in new cases closely follows the
elimination of the source (Fig. 16.2). This leads to an acute outbreak of infection limited
socially and geographically to those linked with the source. Such an incident was
epitomized by the outbreak of Escherichia coli0l51 infections, in Lanarkshire, in the
winter of 1996.
If the source of the infection persists, after onset, then the incidence of new cases is
maintained at a level which is commensurate with the infectivity of the pathogen and
the frequency of exposure of individuals. In this manner, if cases of the variant
Creutzfeldt- Jacob disease (vCJD), first recognized in the mid-1990s, relates to human
exposure to bovine spongiform encephalopathy-infected beef in the early 1980s, then
12
in
10 -
8
On^et over 1-1 .&
incubation p*Tlods
Incubation periods (time)
Fig. 16.2 Incidence pattern for common-source outbreaks of infection where the source persists (•)
and where it is short-lived (•).
Vaccination and immunization 323
2.2
the incidence of vCJD will increase over 1-1.5 incubation periods (i.e. 10-15 years)
and be sustained for many years before a decline. In such a scenario vCJD, related to a
single common-source outbreak, would persist well into the next millenium.
For those infectious diseases that are transmitted to humans via insect vectors the
onset and decline phases of epidemics are rarely observed other than as a reflections of
the seasonal variation in the prevalence of the insect. Rather, the disease is endemic
within the population group and has a steady incidence of new cases. Diseases such as
these are generally controlled by public health measures and environmental control of
the vector with vaccination and immunization being deployed to protect individuals
(e.g. yellow fever vaccination).
Propagated source infections
Propagated outbreaks of infection relate to the direct transmission of an infective
agent from a diseased individual to a healthy, susceptible one. Mechanisms of such
transmission were described in Chapter 4 and include inhalation of infective aerosols
(measles, mumps, diphtheria), direct physical contact (syphilis, herpes virus) and, where
sanitation standards are poor, through the introduction of infected faecal material into
drinking water (cholera, typhoid). The ease of transmission, and hence the rate of onset
of an epidemic (Fig. 16.3) relates not only to the susceptibility status, and general state
of health of the individuals but also to the virulence properties of the organism, the
route of transmission, the duration of the infective period associated with the disease,
1QQ i-
a
BQ -
J> 60 h
40 -
20 -
incubation periods
4 G 8
Incubation periods (time)
Fig. 163 Propagated outbreaks of infection showing the incidence of new cases (•), diseased
individuals (•) , and recovered immune (A). The dotted line indicates the incidence pattern for an
incompletely mixed population group.
324 Chapter 16
behavioural patterns, age of the population group and population density (i.e. urban
versus rural). Each infective individual will be capable of transmitting the disease to
those susceptible individuals that they encounter during their infective period. The
number of persons to which a single infective individual might transmit the disease,
and hence the rate of occurence of the infection within the population, will depend
upon the population density with respect to susceptible and infective individuals, the
degree and nature of their social interaction, and the duration and timing of the infective
period. Clearly if infectivity precedes the manifestation of disease then spread of the
infection will be greater than if these were concurrent. Since each infected individual
will, in turn, become a source of infection then this leads to a near exponential increase
in the incidence of disease. Fig. 16.3 shows the incidence of disease within a theoretical
population group. This hypothetical group is perfectly mixed, and all individuals are
susceptible to the infection. The model infection has an incubation period of 1 day
and an infective period of 2 days commencing at the onset of symptoms and recovery
1 day later. For the sake of this illustration it has been assumed that each infective
individual will infect two others per day until all of the population group have
contracted the disease. In practice, however, the rate of transmission will decrease as
the epidemic progresses since the recovered individuals will become immune to further
infection and reduce the population density with respect to susceptible individuals.
Epidemics therefore often cease before all members of the community have been
infected (Fig. 16.3, dotted line). If the proportion of immune individuals within a
population group can be maintained above this threshold level then the likelihood of an
epidemic arising from a single isolated infection incident is small (herd immunity).
The threshold level itself is a function of the infectivity of the agent and the population
density. Outbreaks of measles and chickenpox therefore tend to occur annually in the
late summer amongst children attending school for the first time. This has the effect of
concentrating all susceptible individuals in one, often confined, space and thereby
reducing the proportion of immune subjects to below the threshold for propagated
transmission.
An effective vaccination programme is therefore one that can maintain the proportion
of individuals who are immune to a given infectious disease above the critical level.
Such a programme will not prevent isolated cases of infection but will prevent these
from becoming epidemic.
Objectives of a vaccine/immunization programme
There is the potential to develop a protective vaccine/immunization programme for
each and every infectious disease. Whether or not such vaccines are developed and
deployed is related to the severity and economic impact of the disease upon the
community as well as the effects upon the individual. Principles of immunity and of
the production and quality control of immunological products are discussed in Chapters
14 and 15, respectively.
Severity of the disease
The severity of the disease, not only in terms of its morbidity and mortality and the
Vaccination and immunization 325
probability of permanent injury to its survivors, but also in the likelihood of infection,
must be sufficient to warrant the development and routine deployment of a vaccine and
its subsequent use. Thus, whilst influenza vaccines are constantly reviewed and stocks
maintained, the control of influenza epidemics through vaccination is not recommended.
Rather, those groups of individuals, such as the elderly, who are at special risk from the
infection are protected.
Vaccines to be included within a national immunization and vaccination programme
are chosen to reflect the infection risks within that country. Additional immunization,
appropriate for persons travelling abroad, is intended not only to protect the at-risk
individual, but also to prevent importing the disease into an unprotected home
community.
3.2 Effectiveness of the vaccine/immunogen
Vaccination and immunization programmes seldom confer 100% protection against
the target disease. More commonly the degree of protection is ca. 60-95%. In such
instances whilst individuals receiving treatment will have a high probability of becoming
immune, virtually all members of a community must be treated in order to reduce the
proportion of susceptibles to below the threshold for epidemic spread of the disease.
Antidiphtheria and antitetanus prophylaxis, which utilize toxoids, are amongst the most
efficient immunization programmes whereas the performance of BCG is highly variable,
and cholera vaccine (killed) gives little personal protection and is virtually useless in
combating epidemics.
3.3 Safety
No medical or therapeutic procedure comes without some risk to the patient. All possible
steps are taken to ensure safety, quality and efficacy of vaccines and immunological
products (Chapter 15). The risks associated with immunization procedures must be
constantly reviewed and balanced against the risks of, and associated with, contracting
the disease. In this respect, smallpox vaccination in the UK was abandoned in the mid
1970s as the risks associated with vaccination then exceeded the predicted number of
deaths that would follow importation of the disease. Shortly after this, in May 1980,
The World Health Assembly pronounced the world to be free of smallpox. Similarly,
the incidence of paralytic poliomyelitis in the USA and UK in 1996 was low but the
majority of cases related to vaccine use. As the worldwide elimination of poliomyelitis
approaches, there is much debate as to the value of the vaccine outside of an endemic
area.
Public confidence in the safety of vaccines and immunization procedures is essential
if compliance is to match the needs the community. In this respect public concern and
anxiety, in the mid 1970s, over the perceived safety of pertussis vaccine led to a reduction
in coverage of the target group from ca. 80% to ca. 30%. Major epidemics of whooping-
cough, with over 100000 notified cases, followed in 1977/1979 and 1981/83. By 1992,
public confidence had returned, coverage had increased to 92% and there were only
4091 reported cases.
326 Chapter 16
Cost
Cheap effective vaccines are an essential component of the global battle against
infectious disease. It was estimated that the 1996 costs of the USA childhood vaccination
programme, directed against polio, diphtheria, pertussis, tetanus, measles and tuber-
culosis, was $1 for the vaccines and $14 for the programme costs. The newer vaccines,
particularly those that have been genetically engineered, are considerably more expensive,
putting the costs beyond many budgets of developing countries.
Longevity of the immunity
The ideal of any vaccine is to provide life-long protection to the individual against
disease. Immunological memory (Chapter 14) depends upon the survival of cloned
populations of small B and T lymphocytes (memory cells). These small lymphocytes
have a lifespan in the body of ca. 15-20 years. Thus, if the immune system is not
boosted, either by natural exposure to the organism or by re -immunization, then
immunity gained in childhood will be attenuated or lost completely by the age of 30.
Those vaccines which provide only poor protection against disease have proportionately
reduced time-spans of effectiveness. Yellow fever vaccination, which is highly effective,
must therefore be repeated at 10-year intervals, whilst typhoid vaccines are only effective
for 1-3 years. Whether or not immunization in childhood is boosted at adolescence or
in adult life depends on the relative risks associated with the infection as a function of
age.
Classes of immunity
The theoretical background which underlies immunity to infection has been discussed
in detail in Chapter 14. Immunity to infection may be passively acquired through the
receipt of preformed, protective antibodies or it may be actively acquired through an
immune response following deliberate or accidental exposure to microorganisms or
their component parts. Active acquired immunity might involve either or both humoral
and cell-mediated responses.
Passive acquired immunity
Humoral antibodies of the IgG class are able to cross the placenta from mother to
fetus. These antibodies will provide passive protection of the new-born against those
diseases which involve humoral immunity and to which the mother is immune. In this
fashion, new-born infants in the UK have passive protection against tetanus but not
against tuberculosis which requires cell-mediated immunity. Secretory antibodies are
also passed to the new-born together with the first deliveries of breast milk (colostrum).
Such antibodies provide some passive protection against infections of the gastro-
intestinal tract.
Maternally acquired antibodies will react not only with antigen associated with
a threatening infection but also with antigens introduced to the body as part of
an immunization programme. Premature immunization, i.e. before degradation and
Vaccination and immunization 327
elimination of the maternal antibodies, will therefore reduce the potency of an
administered vaccine. This aspect of the timing of a course of vaccinations is discussed
later.
Administration of preformed antibodies, taken from animals, from pooled human
serum, or from human cell-lines is often used to treat an existing infection (e.g. tetanus,
diphtheria) or condition (venomous snake-bite). Pooled human serum may also be
administered prophylactically, within a slow-release vehicle, for those persons entering
parts of the world where diseases such as hepatitis A are endemic. Such administrations
confer no long-term immunity and will interfere with concurrent vaccination procedures.
4.2 Active acquired immunity
Active acquired immunity (Chapter 14) relates to exposure of the immune system to
antigenic materials. Such exposure might be related to a naturally occurring, or vaccine-
associated infection, or it might be associated with direct introduction of non-viable
antigenic material to the body. The latter might occur through insect or animal bites
and stings, inhalation, ingestion or deliberate injection. The route of exposure to antigen
will influence the nature of the subsequent immune response. Thus, injection of antigen
will lead primarily to humoral (IgG, IgM) production, whilst exposure of epithelial
tissues (gut, respiratory tract) will lead not only to the production of secretory antibodies
(IgA, IgE) but also, through the common immune response, to a stimulation of humoral
antibody.
The magnitude and specificity of an immune response depends not only upon the
duration of the exposure to antigen but also upon its time -concentration profile. During
a naturally occurring infection the levels of antigen are very small at onset and localized
to the portal of entry to the host. Since the amounts of antigen are small they will react
only with a small, highly defined group of small lymphocytes. These will undergo
transformation to produce various antibody classes specific to the antigen together
with cloned B and T cells. The immune responses and the infection will progress
simultaneously. The microorganisms will release greater amounts of antigenic materials
as the infection progresses. These will, in turn, react with an increasing number of
cloned lymphocytes, to produce yet more antibody. Eventually the antibody levels will
be sufficient to bring about the elimination, from the host, of the infecting organism.
The net result of this encounter is that the host has developed a highly specific
immunological memory of the encounter.
This situation should be contrasted with the injection of a non-replicating im-
munogen. Often the amount of antigen introduced is large when compared with the
levels present during the initial stages of an infection. In a non-immune animal these
antigens will react not only with those lymphocytes that are capable of producing
antibody of high specificity but also with those of a lower specificity. Antibody (high
and low specificity) produced will react with and remove the residual antigen. The
immune response will cease after this initial (primary) challenge. On a subsequent
(secondary) challenge the antigen will react with residual preformed antibody relating
to the first challenge together with a more specific subgroup of the original cloned
lymphocytes. As the number of challenges is increased the proportion of lymphocytes
specific to the antigen is also increased. After a sufficient number of consecutive
328 Chapter 16
challenges the magnitude and specificity of the immune response matches that which
would occur during a natural infection with an organism bearing the antigen. This
pattern of exposure brings with it certain problems. Firstly, since introduced immunogen
will react preferentially with preformed antibody rather than lymphocytes then sufficient
time must elapse between exposures so as to allow the natural loss of antibody to
occur. Secondly, immunity to infection will only be complete after the final challenge
with immunogen. Thirdly, low specificity antibody produced during the early exposures
to antigen might cross-react with host tissues to produce adverse reactions to the vaccine.
Classes of vaccine
Vaccines may be considered as representing live microorganisms, killed microorganisms
or purified bacterial and viral components (component vaccines). These vaccine classes
have been described in detail in Chapter 15. Some additional points about their use are
discussed below.
Live vaccines
Vaccines may be live, infective microorganisms, attenuated with respect to their
pathogenicity but retaining their ability to infect or they might be genetically engineered
such that one mildly infective organism carries with it antigens from an unrelated
pathogen.
Two major advantages stem from the use of live vaccines. Firstly, the immunization
mimics a natural infection such that only a single exposure is required to render an
individual immune. Secondly, the exposure may be mediated through the natural route
of infection (e.g. oral) thereby stimulating an immune response that is appropriate to a
particular disease (e.g. secretory antibody as primary defence against poliomyelitis
virus in the gut).
Disadvantages associated with the use of live vaccines are also apparent. Live
attenuated vaccines, administered through the natural route of infection, will be
replicated in the patient and could be transmitted to others. If attenuation is lost during
this replicative process then infections might result (see poliomyelitis, below). A second,
major disadvantage of live vaccines is that the course of their action might be affected
by the infection and immunological status of the patient.
Killed and component vaccines
Since these vaccines are unable to evoke a natural infection profile with respect to the
release of antigen they must be administered on a number of occasions. Immunity is
not complete until the course of immunization is complete and, with the exception of
toxin-dominated diseases (diphtheria, tetanus) where the immunogen is a toxoid, will
never match the performance of live vaccine delivery. Specificity of the immune response
generated in the patient is initially low. This is particularly the case when the vaccine is
composed of a relatively crude cocktail of killed cells where the immune response is
directed only partly towards antigenic components of the cells that are associated with
the infection process. This increases the possibility of adverse reactions in the patient.
Vaccination and immunization 329
Release profiles of these immunogens can be improved through their formulation with
adjuvants (Chapters 14, 15), and the immunogenicity of certain purified bacterial
components such as polysaccharides can be improved by their conjugation to a carrier.
Routine immunization against infectious disease
6.1 Poliomyelitis vaccination
Poliovirus, a picornavirus, has three immunologically distinct types (I, II & III). The
first phase of poliomyelitis infection is an acute infection of the gastrointestinal tract,
during which time the virus is found in the throat and in faeces. The second phase is
characterized by an invasion of the bloodstream, and in the third phase the virus migrates
from the bloodstream into the meninges. Infections range in severity from clinically
inapparent (>90%) to paralytic. Paralytic poliomyelitis is a major illness, but only occurs
in 0.1-2% of infected individuals. It is characterized by the destruction of large nerve
cells in the anterior horn of the brain resulting in varying degrees of paralysis. The
infection is transmitted by the faecal-oral route and unvaccinated adults are at greatest
risk from paralytic infection than children.
Polio is the only disease, at present, for which both live and killed vaccines compete.
Since the introduction of the killed virus (Salk) in 1956 and the live attenuated virus
(Sab in) in 1962 there has been a remarkable decline in the incidence of poliomyelitis
(Fig. 16.1). The inactivated polio vaccine (IPV) contains formalin-killed poliovirus of
all three serotypes. On injection, the vaccine stimulates the production of antibodies of
the IgM and IgG class which neutralize the virus in the second stage of infection. A
course of three injections at monthly intervals produces long-lasting immunity to all
three poliovirus types.
A live, oral polio vaccine (OPV) is widely used in many countries, including the
UK and USA. Its main advantages over the IPV vaccine are its lower cost and easier
administration. OPV contains attenuated poliovirus of each of the three types and is
administered, as a liquid, onto the tongue. The vaccine strains infect the gastrointestinal
mucosa and oropharynx, promoting the common immune response, and involving both
humoral and secretory antibodies. IgA, secreted within the gut epithelium, provides
local resistance to the first stages of poliomyelitis infection. Infection of epithelial cells
with one strain of enterovirus often, however, inhibits simultaneous infection by related
strains. At least three administrations of OPV are therefore required with each dosing
conferring immunity to one of the vaccine serotypes. These doses must be separated by
a period of at least 1 month in order to allow the previous infection to elapse. Booster
vaccinations are also provided to cover the eventuality that some other enterovirus
infection, present at the time of vaccination, had reduced the response to the vaccine
strains.
Faecal excretion of vaccine virus will occur and may last for up to 6 weeks. Such
released virus will spread to close contacts and infect/(re)immunize them. Since the
introduction of OPV, notifications of paralytic poliomyelitis in the UK have dropped
spectacularly. From 1985-95, 19 of the 28 notified cases of paralytic poliomyelitis
were associated with vaccine strains (14 recipients, 5 contacts). Vaccine-associated
poliomyelitis may occur through reversion of the attenuated strains to the virulent wild-
330 Chapter 16
type, particularly with types II and III and is estimated to occur once per 4 million
doses. Since the wild-type virus can be isolated in faeces, infection may occur in
unimmunized contacts as well as vaccine recipients. Since the risks of natural infections
with poliomyelitis within developed countries has now diminished markedly, the greater
risk resides with the live vaccine strains. Proposals are therefore now being considered
in the USA that OPV should be replaced with IPV.
Measles, mumps and rubella vaccination (MMR)
Measles, mumps and rubella (German measles) are infectious diseases, with respiratory
routes of transmission and infection, caused by members of the paramyxovirus group.
Each virus is immunologically distinct and has only one serotype. Whilst the primary
multiplication sites of these viruses is within the respiratory tract, the diseases are
associated with viral multiplication elsewhere in the host.
Measles
Measles is a severe, highly contagious, acute infection that frequently occurs in epidemic
form. After multiplication within the respiratory tract the virus is transported throughout
the body, particularly to the skin where a characteristic maculopapular rash develops.
Complications of the disease can occur, particularly in malnourished children, the most
serious being measles encephalitis which can cause permanent neurological injury and
death.
A live vaccine strain of measles (Chapter 15) was introduced in the USA in 1962
and to the UK in 1968. A single injection produces high-level immunity in over 95% of
recipients. Moreover, since the vaccine induces immunity more rapidly than the
natural infection, it may be used to control the impact of measles outbreaks. The measles
virus cannot survive outside of an infected host. Widespread use of the vaccine therefore
has the potential, as with smallpox, of eliminating the disease worldwide. Mass immu-
nization has reduced the incidence of measles to almost nil, although a 15-fold increase
in the incidence was noted in the USA between 1989 and 1991 because of poor compliance.
Mumps
Mump virus infects the parotid glands to cause swelling and a general viraemia.
Complications include pancreatitis, meningitis and orchitis, the latter occasionally
leading to male sterility. Infections can also cause permanent unilateral deafness at any
age. In the absence of vaccination, infection occurs in >90% of individuals by age 15
years. A live attenuated mumps vaccine has been available since 1967 and has been
part of the juvenile vaccination programme in the UK since 1988 when it was included
as part of the MMR triple vaccine (see below).
Rubella
Rubella is a mild, often subclinical infection that is common amongst children aged
between 4 and 9 years. Infection during the first trimester of pregnancy brings with it a
Vaccination and immunization 331
major risk of abortion or congenital deformity in the fetus (congenital rubella syndrome
(CRS)).
Rubella immunization was introduced to the UK in 1970 for pre-pubeftal girls and
non-immune women. The vaccine utilizes a live cold-adapted Wistar RA27/3 vaccine
strain of the virus. The major disadvantage of the vaccine is that, as with the wild type,
the fetus is infected. Whilst there have been no reports of CRS associated with use of
the vaccine, the possible risk makes it imperative that women do not become pregnant
within 1 month of vaccination. Until 1988 boys were not routinely protected against
rubella. Their susceptibility to the virus was thought to maintain the natural prevalence
of the disease in the community and thereby reinforce the vaccine-induced immunity
in vaccinated, adult females. This proved not to be the case, rather cases of CRS could
be related to incidence of the disease in children. Rubella vaccine is now given to both
sexes at the age of 15 months.
6.2.4 MMR vaccine
MMR vaccine was introduced to the UK in 1988 for young children of both sexes,
replacing single-antigen measles vaccine. It consists of a single dose of a lyophilized
preparation of live attenuated strains of the measles, mumps and rubella viruses.
Immunization results in sero-con version to all three viruses in over 95% of recipients.
For maximum effect MMR vaccine is recommended for children of both sexes aged
12-15 months but can also be given to non-immune adults. From October 1996 a
second dose of MMR was recommended for children aged 4 years in order to prevent
the re-accumulation of sufficient susceptible children to sustain future epidemics. Single-
antigen rubella vaccine will continue to be given to girls aged 10-14 years if they have
not previously received MMR vaccine.
6.3 Tuberculosis
Tuberculosis (TB) is a major cause of death and morbidity worldwide, particularly
where poverty, malnutrition and poor housing prevail. Human infection is acquired by
inhalation of Mycobacterium tuberculosis andM. bovis. Tuberculosis is primarily a
disease of the lungs, causing chronic infection of the lower respiratory tract, but may
spread to other sites or proceed to a generalized infection (miliary tuberculosis). Active
disease can result either from a primary infection or from a subsequent reactivation
of a quiescent infection. Following inhalation, the mycobacteria are taken up by
alveolar macrophages where they survive and multiply. Circulating macrophages and
lymphocytes, attracted to the site, carry the organism to local lymph nodes where a
cell-mediated immune response is triggered. The host, unable to eliminate the pathogen,
contains them within small granulomas or tubercles. If high numbers of mycobacteria
are present then the cellular responses can result in tissue necrosis. The tubercles contain
viable pathogens which may persist for the remaining life of the host. Reactivation of
the healed primary lesion is thought to account for over two-thirds of all newly reported
cases of the disease.
The incidence of TB in the UK declined 10-fold between 1948 and 1987, since
when just over 5000 new cases have been notified each year. Those most at risk include
332 Chapter 16
pubescent children, health service staff and individuals intending to stay for more than
1 month in countries where TB is endemic.
A live vaccine is required to elicit protection against TB since both antibody and
cell-mediated immunity are required for protective immunity. Vaccination with BCG
(bacille Calmette-Guerin) derived from an attenuated M. bovis strain is commonly
used in countries where TB is endemic. The vaccine was introduced in the UK in 1953
and was administered intradermally to children aged 13-14 years and unprotected adults.
Efficacy in the UK has been shown to be greater than 70% with protection lasting at
least 15 years. In other countries, where the general state of health and well-being of
the population is less than in the developed world, the efficacy of the vaccine has been
shown to be significantly less than this.
Because of the risks of adverse reaction to the vaccine by persons who had already
been exposed to the disease a sensitivity test must be carried out prior to immunization
with BCG. A Mantoux skin test assesses an individual's sensitivity to a purified protein
derivative (PPD) prepared from heat-treated antigens (tuberculin) extracted from
M. tuberculosis. A positive test implies past infection or past, successful immunization.
Those with strongly positive tests may have active disease and should be referred to a
chest clinic. Many people with active TB, especially disseminated TB, however, sero-
convert from skin test positive to skin test negative. Results of the skin test must therefore
be interpreted with care.
Much debate surrounds the use of BCG vaccine, a matter of some importance,
considering that TB kills ca. 3 million people annually and that drug-resistant strains
have emerged. Whilst the vaccine has demonstrated some efficacy in preventing juvenile
TB, it has little prophylactic effect against post-primary TB in those already infected.
One solution is to bring forward the BCG immunization to include neonates.
Immunization at 2-4 weeks of age will ensure that immunization precedes infection,
and will also negate the requirement for a skin test. Passive-acquired maternal antibody
to TB is unlikely to interfere with the effectiveness of the immunization since immunity
relates to a cell-mediated response. Alternative strategies involve improvement of the
vaccine possibly through the introduction, into the BCG strain, of genes that encode
protective antigens of M. tuberculosis.
6.4 Diphtheria, tetanus and pertussis (DTP) immunization
Immunization against these three, unrelated diseases, is considered together since the
vaccines are all non-living and are often co-administered as a triple vaccine as part of
the juvenile vaccination programme.
6.4.1 Diphtheria
This is an acute, non-invasive infectious disease associated with the upper respiratory
tract (Chapter 4). The incubation period is from 2 to 5 days although the disease remains
communicable for up to 4 weeks. A low molecular weight toxin is produced which
affects myocardium, nervous and adrenal tissues. Death results in 3-5% of infected
children. Diphtheria immunization protects by stimulating the production of an antitoxin.
This antitoxin will protect against the disease but not against infection of the respiratory
Vaccination and immunization 333
tract. The immunogen is a toxoid, prepared by formaldehyde treatment of the purified
toxin (Chapter 15) and administered whilst adsorbed to an adjuvant, usually aluminium
phosphate or aluminium hydroxide. The primary course of diphtheria prophylaxis
consists of three doses starting at 2 months of age and separated by an interval of at
least 1 month. The immune status of adults may be determined by administration of
Schick test toxin, which is essentially a diluted form of the vaccine.
6.4.2 Tetanus
Tetanus is not an infectious disease but relates to the production of a toxin by germinating
spores and vegetative cells of Clostridium tetani that might infect a deep puncture
wound. The organism, which may be introduced into the wound from the soil, grows
anaerobically at such sites. The toxin is adsorbed into nerve cells and acts like strychnine
on nerve synapses (Chapter 4). Tetanus immunization employs a toxoid and protects
by stimulating the production of antitoxin. This antitoxin will neutralize toxin as it is
released by the organisms and before it can be adsorbed into nerves. Since the toxin is
produced only slowly following infection then the vaccine, which acts rapidly, may be
used prophylactically in those unimmunized persons who have recently suffered a
candidate injury. The toxoid, as with diphtheria toxoid, is formed by reaction with
formaldehyde and adsorbed onto an adjuvant. The primary course of tetanus prophylaxis
consists of three doses starting at 2 months of age and separated by an interval of at
least 1 month.
6.4.3 Pertussis (whooping-cough)
Caused by the non-invasive respiratory pathogen Bordetella pertussis, whooping-cough
(Chapter 4) may be complicated by bronchopneumonia, repeated post-tussis vomiting
leading to weight loss and to cerebral hypoxia associated with a risk of brain damage.
Until the mid 1970s the mortality from whooping-cough was about one per 1000 notified
cases with a higher rate for infants under 1 year of age. A full course of vaccine, which
consists of a suspension of killed Bord. pertussis organisms (Chapter 15), gives complete
protection in over 80% of recipients. The primary course of pertussis prophylaxis consists
of three doses starting at 2 months of age and separated by an interval of at least 1
month.
6.4.4 DTP vaccine combinations and administration
The primary course of DTP protection consists of three doses of a combined vaccine,
each dose separated by at least 1 month and commencing not earlier than 2 months of
age. In such combinations the pertussis component of the vaccine acts as an additional
adjuvant for the toxoid components. Monovalent pertussis and tetanus vaccines, and
combined vaccines lacking the pertussis component (DT) are available. If pertussis
vaccination is contraindicated or refused then DT vaccine alone should be offered. The
primary course of pertussis vaccination is considered sufficient to confer life-long
protection, especially since the mortality associated with disease declines markedly
after infancy. The risks associated with tetanus and diphtheria infection persist
334 Chapter 16
6.5
throughout life. DT vaccination is therefore repeated before school entry, at 4-5 years
of age, and once again at puberty.
Haemophilus influenzae Type B (HiB) immunization
Seven different capsular serotypes of Haemophilus influenza Type B are associated
with respiratory infection in young children. The most common presentation of these
infections is as meningitis, frequently associated with bacteraemia. The sequelae
following HiB infection include deafness, convulsions and intellectual impairment.
The fatality rate is ca. 4-5% with 8-11% of survivors having permanent neurological
disorders. The disease, which is rare in children under 3 months, peaks both in its
incidence and severity at 12 months of age. Infection is uncommon after 4 years of
age. Before the introduction of HiB vaccination the incidence of the disease in the UK
was estimated at 34 per 100000. The vaccine utilizes purified preparations of the
polysaccharide capsule of the major serotypes. Polysaccharides are poorly immunogenic
and must be conjugated onto a protein carrier in order to enhance their efficacy. HiB
vaccines are variously conjugated onto diphtheria and tetanus toxoids (above), group
B meningococcal outer membrane protein and a non-toxic derivative of diphtheria toxin
(CRM197) and can now be mixed and co-administered with the DTP vaccine. Three
doses of the vaccine are recommended separated by 1 month. No reinforcement is
recommended at 4 years of age since the risks from infection are negligible at this time.
Juvenile immunization schedule
The timing of the various components of the juvenile vaccination programme is subject
to continual review. In the 1960s, the primary course of DTP vaccination consisted of
three doses given at 3, 6 and 12 months of age, together with OPV. This separation
gave adequate time for the levels of induced antibody to decline between successive
doses of the vaccines. Current recommendations (Table 16.1) accelerate the vaccination
programme with no reductions in its efficacy. Thus, MMR vaccination has replaced
separate measles and rubella prophylaxis and BCG vaccination may now be given at
Table 16.1 Children's immunization schedule for UK (1996)
Vaccine
Age
Notes
BCG
Neonatal (1st
month)
If not at 13-14 years
DTP and HiB
1st dose 2 mo
nths
Primary course
Poliomyelitis
2nd dose 3 months
3rd dose 4 months
MMR
12-15 months
Anytime over 12 months
Booster DT
3-5 years
3 years after primary course
Poliomyelitis
MMR booster
BCG
10-14 years
If not in infancy
Booster DT
13-18 years
Vaccination and immunization 335
birth. DTP vaccination occurs at 2, 3 and 4 months to coincide with administration of
HiB. It is imperative that as many individuals as possible benefit from the vaccination
programme. Fewer visits to the doctor's surgery translate into improved patient
compliance and less likelihood of epidemic spread of the diseases in question. The
current recommendations minimize the number of separate visits to the clinic whilst
maximizing the protection generated.
8 Immunization of special risk groups
Whilst not recommended for routine administration, vaccines additional to those
represented in the juvenile programme are available for individuals in special risk
categories. These categories relate to occupational risks or risks associated with travel
abroad. Such immunization protocols include those directed against cholera, typhoid,
meningitis (types A, C), anthrax, hepatitis A and B, influenza, Japanese encephalitis,
rabies, tick-borne encephalitis, and yellow fever.
Further reading
Salisbury D.M. & Begg N.T. (eds) (1996) Immunisation Against Infectious Disease. HMSO: London.
(Updated every 2-3 years).
Mims C.A. (1987) The Pathogenesis of Infectious Disease, 3rd edn. London: Academic Press.
Salyers A.A. & Whitt D.D. (1994) Bacterial Pathogenesis: A Molecular Approach. Washington:
American Society for Microbiology Press.
336 Chapter 16
Part 3
Microbiological Aspects of
Pharmaceutical Processing
Many failures in pharmaceutical processing have arisen because of the inability of
those responsible for its design to be aware of the distribution and survival potential of
microorganisms in the environment and in the raw materials and equipment used in a
pharmaceutical factory.
The first chapter in this section provides a unique account of the ecology,
i.e. distribution, survival and life-style, of microorganisms in the factory environment,
and should enable process designers, controllers and quality control personnel to
comprehend, trace and eradicate the sources of failure due to extraneous microbial
contaminants in the finished product. Much of the information given here is applicable
to hospital manufacture also, and this is extended in a contribution (Chapter 19) dealing
with contamination in hospital pharmaceutical products and in the home.
The dire consequences of failure to heed the precepts enunciated in Chapter 17
are considered in Chapters 18 and 19 which review the spoilage wreaked upon
pharmaceutical products as a consequence of microbial infestation. The wide, and at
first sight bizarre, range of substrates used by contaminating microorganisms and the
range of biochemical reactions that follow and which, in turn, give rise to the overall
picture of spoilage are well documented; it would be no exaggeration to state that
microbial spoilage and its prevention, through both good working conditions and the
use of preservatives, represent the major problem of pharmaceutical microbiology.
An important group of pharmaceutical products, including those intended for
parenteral administration for instillation into the eye, are required to be free from living
microorganisms, and with parenteral products, from those residues of the bacterial cell
which may give rise to fever. The principles of their preparation and sterilization are
considered in Chapter 2 1 , while the theory of sterilization processes is dealt with in the
preceding chapter. These two chapters in to to cover the most exacting operation in
medicine preparation, and one in which failure has given rise to several disasters ranging
from patient death, for instance as a result of sterilization failure in intravenous drips,
to blindness in the case of contaminated eyedrops.
Chapter 22 deals with general factory and hospital hygiene and the principles of
good manufacturing practice (GMP) which if adhered to go a long way towards
compounding the success of the processes described in Chapters 17 and 20.
The subject of quality control and surveillance is discussed in a chapter on
sterilization control and sterility testing, which deals with aspects Of in-process and
post-process control.
Finally, lest it be thought that microorganisms are always harmful, two chapters
(24 and 25) describe ways in which they can be harnessed for the benefit of mankind.
17
Ecology of microorganisms as it affects
the pharmaceutical industry
Introduction
Raw materials
2
Atmosphere
6
Packaging
2.1
Microbial content
2.2
Reduction of microbial count
7
Buildings
2.3
Compressed air
7.1
Walls and ceilings
7.2
Floors and drains
3
Water
7.3
Doors, windows and fittings
3.1
Raw or mains water
3.2
Softened water
8
Equipment
3.3
Deionized or demineralized water
8.1
Pipelines
3.4
Distilled water
8.2
Cleansing
3.5
Water produced by reverse osmosis
8.3
Disinfection and sterilization
3.6
Distribution system
8.4
Microbial checks
3.7
Disinfection of water
9
Cleaning equipment and ute
4
Skin and respiratory-tract flora
4.1
Microbial transfer from operators
10
Further reading
4.2 Hygiene and protective clothing
Introduction
The microbiological quality of pharmaceutical products is influenced by the
environment in which they are manufactured and by the materials used in their
formulation. With the exception of preparations which are terminally sterilized in their
final container, the microflora of the final product may represent the contaminants
from the raw materials, from the equipment with which it was made, from the
atmosphere, from the person operating the process or from the final container into
which it was packed. Some of the contaminants may be pathogenic whilst others may
grow even in the presence of preservatives and spoil the product. Any microorganisms
which are destroyed by in-process heat treatment may still leave cell residues
which may be toxic or pyrogenic (Chapter 1), since the pyrogenic fraction, lipid A,
which is present in the cell wall is not destroyed under the same conditions as the
organisms.
In parallel to improvements in manufacturing technology there have been
developments in Good Manufacturing Practices to minimize contamination by a study
of the ecology of microorganisms, the hazards posed by them and any points in the
process which are critical to their control. This approach has been distilled into the
concept of Hazard Analysis of Critical Control Points (HACCP), with the objective
of improving the microbiological safety of the product in a cost-effective manner,
which has been assisted by the development of rapid methods for the detection of
microorganisms.
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 339
The type of formulation being prepared determines the microbiological standard of
the air supply required and the hazard it poses. In areas where products for injection
and ophthalmic use which cannot be terminally sterilized by moist heat are being
manufactured, the air count should be very low and regarded as a critical control point
in the process since although these products are required to pass a test for sterility
(Chapter 23), the test itself is destructive, and therefore only relatively few samples are
tested. An unsatisfactory air count may lead to the casual contamination of a few
containers and be undetected by the test for sterility. In addition if the microbiological
air quality is identified as a critical point, it may also give an early warning of potential
contamination and permit timely correction. The manufacture of liquid or semi-solid
preparations for either oral or topical use requires a clean environment for both the
production and filling stages. Whilst many formulations are adequately protected by
chemical preservatives or a pH unfavourable to airborne bacteria that may settle in
them, preservation against mould spores is more difficult to achieve.
2.2 Reduction of microbial count
The microbial count of air may be reduced by filtration, chemical disinfection and to a
limited extent by ultraviolet (UV) light. Filtration is the most commonly used method
and filters may be made of a variety of materials such as cellulose, glass wool, fibreglass
mixtures or polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) with resin or acrylic binders. For the most
critical aseptic work, it may be necessary to remove all particles in excess of 0.1 /mi in
size, but for many operations a standard of less than 100 particles per 3.5 litres (1.0ft )
of 0.5 A im or larger (class 100) is adequate. Such fine filtration is usually preceded by
a coarse filter stage, or any suspended matter is removed by passing the air through
an electrostatic field. To maintain efficiency, all air filters must be kept dry, since
microorganisms may be capable of movement along continuous wet films and may be
carried through a damp filter.
Filtered air may be used to purge a complete room, or it may be confined to a
specific area and incorporate the principle of laminar flow, which permits operations to
be carried out in a gentle current of sterile air. The direction of the airflow may be
horizontal or vertical, depending upon the type of equipment being used, the type of
operation and the material being handled. It is important that there is no obstruction
between the air supply and the exposed product, since this may result in the deflection
of microorganisms or particulate matter from a non-sterile surface and cause
contamination. Airflow gauges are essential to monitor that the correct flow rate is
obtained in laminar flow units and in complete suites to ensure that a positive pressure
from clean to less clean areas is always maintained.
The integrity of the air-filtration system must be checked regularly, and the most
common method is by counting the particulate matter both in the working area and
across the surface of the filter. For systems which have complex ducting or where the
surfaces of the terminal filters are recessed, smoke tests using a chemical of known
particle size may be introduced just after the main fan and monitored at each outlet.
The test has a twofold application as both the terminal filter and any leaks in the ducting
can be checked. These methods are useful in conjunction with those for determining
the microbial air count as given earlier.
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 341
Chemical disinfectants are limited in their use as air sterilants because of their
irritant properties when sprayed. However, some success has been achieved with
atomized propylene glycol at a concentration of 0.05-0.5 mgH and quaternary
ammonium compounds (QACs) at 0.075% may be used. For areas which can be
effectively sealed off for fumigation purposes, formaldehyde gas at a concentration of
1-2 mg H of air at a relative humidity of 80-90% is effective.
Ultraviolet (UV) irradiation at wavelengths between 280 and 240 nm (2800 and
2400 A) is used to reduce bacterial contamination of air, but is only active at a relatively
short distance from source. Bacteria and mould spores, in particular those with heavily
pigmented spore coats, are often resistant to such treatment.
2.3 Compressed air
Compressed air has many applications in the manufacture of pharmaceutical products.
A few examples of its uses are the conveyance of powders and suspension, providing
aeration for some fermentations and as a power supply for the reduction of particle size
by impaction. Unless it is sterilized by filtration or a combination of heat and filtration,
microorganisms present will be introduced into the product. The microbial content of
compressed air may be assessed by bubbling a known volume through a nutrient liquid
and either filtering through a membrane, which is then incubated with a nutrient agar
and a total viable count made, or the microbial content may be estimated more rapidly
using techniques developed to detect changes in physical or chemical characteristics in
the nutrient liquid.
Water
The microbial ecology of water is of great importance in the pharmaceutical industry
due to its multiple uses as a constituent of many products as well as for various washing
and cooling processes. Two main aspects are involved: the quality of the raw water and
any processing it receives and the distribution system. Both should be taken into
consideration when reviewing the hazards to the finished product and any critical control
points.
Microorganisms indigenous to fresh water include Pseudomonas spp., Alcaligenes
spp., Flavobacterium spp., Chromobacter spp. and Serratia spp. Such bacteria
are nutritionally undemanding and often have a relatively low optimum growth
temperature. Bacteria which are introduced as a result of soil erosion, heavy rainfall
and decaying plant matter include Bacillus subtilis, B. megaterium, Klebsiella aerogenes
and Entewbacter cloacae. Contamination by sewage results in the presence of Proteus
spp., Escherichia coli and other enterobacteria, Streptococcus faecalis and Clostridium
spp. Bacteria which are introduced as a result of animal or plant debris usually die as a
result of the unfavourable conditions.
An examination of stored industrial water supplies showed that 98% of the
contaminants were Gram-negative bacteria; other organisms isolated were Micrococcus
spp., Cytophaga spp., yeast, yeast-like fungi and actinomycetes.
342 Chapter 17
Raw or mams water
The quality of the water from the mains supply varies with both the source and the
local authority, and whilst it is free from known pathogens and from faecal contaminants
such as E. coli, it may contain other microorganisms. When the supply is derived from
surface water the flora is usually more abundant and faster-growing than that of supplies
from a deep water source such as a well or spring. This is due to surface waters receiving
both microorganisms and nutrients from soil and sewage whilst water from deep sources
has its microflora filtered out. On prolonged storage in a reservoir, water-borne organisms
tend to settle out, but in industrial storage tanks the intermittent through-put ensures
that, unless treated, the contents of the tank serve as a source of infection. The bacterial
count may rise rapidly in such tanks during summer months and reach 10 -10 6 ml J .
One of the uses of mains water is for washing chemicals used in pharmaceutical
preparations to remove impurities or unwanted by-products of a reaction, and although
the bacterial count of the water may be low, the volume used is large and the material
being washed may be exposed to a considerable number of bacteria.
The microbial count of the mains water will be reflected in both softened and
deionized water which may be prepared from it.
Softened water
This is usually prepared by either a base-exchange method using sodium zeolite, by a
lime-soda ash process, or by the addition of sodium hexametaphosphate. In addition to
the bacteria derived from the mains water, additional flora of Bacillus spp. and
Staphylococcus aureus may be introduced into systems which use brine for regeneration
and from the chemical filter beds which, unless treated, can act as a reservoir for bacteria.
Softened water is often used for washing containers before filling with liquid or
semi- solid preparations and for cooling systems. Unless precautions are taken, the
microbial count in a cooling system or jacketed vessel will rise rapidly and if
faults develop in the cooling plates or vessel wall, contamination of the product may
occur.
Deionized or demineralized water
Deionized water is prepared by passing mains water through anion and cation exchange
resin beds to remove the ions. Thus, any bacteria present in the mains water will also
be present in the deionized water, and beds which are not regenerated frequently with
strong acid or alkali are often heavily contaminated and add to the bacterial content of
the water. This problem has prompted the development of resins able to resist
microbiological contamination. One such resin, a large-pore, strong-base, macroreticular,
quaternary ammonium anion exchange resin which permits microorganisms to enter
the pore cavity and then electrostatically binds them to the cavity surface, is currently
being marketed. The main function is as a final cleaning bed downstream of conventional
demineralizing columns.
Deionized water is used in pharmaceutical formulations, for washing containers
and plant, and for the preparation of disinfectant solutions.
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 343
Distilled water
As it leaves the still, distilled water is free from microorganisms, and contamination
occurs as a result of a fault in the cooling system, the storage vessel or the distribution
system. The flora of contaminated distilled water is usually Gram-negative bacteria
and since it is introduced after a sterilization process, it is often a pure culture. A level
of organism up to 10 6 mH has been recorded.
Distilled water is often used in the formulation of oral and topical pharmaceutical
preparations and a low bacterial count is desirable. It is also used after distillation
with a specially designed still, often made of glass, for the manufacture of parenteral
preparations and a post-distillation heat sterilization stage is commonly included in
the process. Water for such preparations is often stored at 80°C in order to prevent
bacterial growth and the production of pyrogenic substances which accompany such
growth.
Water produced by reverse osmosis
Water produced by reverse osmosis (RO) is forced by an osmotic pressure through a
semi-permeable membrane which acts as a molecular filter. The diffusion of solubles
dissolved in the water is impeded, and those with a molecular weight in excess of 250
do not diffuse at all. The process, which is the reverse of the natural process of osmosis,
thus removes microorganisms and their pyrogens. Post-RO contamination may occur
if the plant after the membrane, the storage vessel or the distribution system is not kept
free from microorganisms.
Distribution system
If microorganisms colonize a storage vessel, it then acts as a microbial reservoir and
contaminates all water passing through it. It is therefore important that the contents of
all storage vessels are tested regularly. Reservoirs of microorganisms may also build
up in booster pumps, water meters and unused sections of pipeline. Where a high positive
pressure is absent or cannot be continuously maintained, outlets such as cocks and taps
may permit bacteria to enter the system.
An optimum system for reducing the growth of microbial flora is one that ensures
a constant recirculation of water at a positive pressure through a ring-main without
'dead-legs' (areas which due to their location are not regularly used) and only very
short branches to the take-off points. In addition there should be a system to re-sterilize
the water, usually by membrane filtration or UV light treatment, just prior to return to
the main storage tank.
Some plumbing materials used for storage vessels, pipework and jointing may
support microbial growth. Some plastics, in particular plasticized polyvinylchlorides
and resins used in the manufacture of glass-reinforced plastics, have caused serious
microbiological problems when used for water storage and distribution systems. Both
natural and synthetic rubbers used for washers, O-rings and diaphragms are susceptible
to contamination if not sanitized regularly. For jointing, packing and lubricating
materials, PTFE and silicone-based compounds are superior to those based on
natural products such as vegetable oils or fibres and animal fats, and petroleum-based
compounds.
3.7 Disinfection of water
Three methods are used for treating water, namely chemicals, filtration or UV light.
1 Chemical treatment is applicable usually to raw, mains and softened water, but is
also used to treat the storage and distribution systems of distilled and deionized water
and of water produced by reverse osmosis (section 3.5).
Sodium hypochlorite and chlorine gas are the most common agents for treating the
water supply itself, and the concentration employed depends both upon the dwell time
and the chlorine demand of the water. For most purposes a free residual chlorine level
of 0.5-5 p. p.m. is adequate. For storage vessels, pipelines, pumps and outlets a higher
level of 50-100 p.p.m. may be necessary, but it is usually necessary to use a descaling
agent before disinfection in areas where the water is hard. Distilled, deionized and RO
systems and pipelines may be treated with sodium hypochlorite or 1 % formaldehyde
solution. With deionized systems it is usual to exhaust the resin beds with brine before
sterilization with formaldehyde to prevent its inactivation to paraformaldehyde. If
only local contamination occurs, live steam is often effective in eradicating it. During
chemical sterilization it is important that no 'dead-legs' remain untreated and that all
instruments such as water meters are treated.
2 Membrane filtration is useful where the usage is moderate and a continuous
circulation of water can be maintained. Thus, with the exception of that drawn off for
use, the water is continually being returned to the storage tank and refiltered. As many
water-borne bacteria are small, it is usual to install a 0.22- A um pore-size membrane as
the terminal filter and to use coarser prefilters to prolong its life. Membrane filters
require regular sterilization to prevent microbial colonization and 'grow through'. They
may be treated chemically with the remainder of the storage/distribution system or
removed and treated by moist heat. The latter method is usually the most successful for
heavily contaminated filters.
3 UV light at a wavelength of 254 nm is useful for the disinfection of water of
good optical clarity. Such treatment has an advantage over chemical disinfection as
there is no odour or flavour problem and, unlike membrane filters, is not subject to
microbial colonization. The siting in the distribution system is important since any
insanitary fittings downstream of the unit will recontaminate the water. Industrial
in-line units with sanitary type fittings which replace part of the water pipeline are
manufactured.
One of the most useful techniques for checking the microbial quality of water is by
membrane filtration, since this permits the concentration of a small number of organisms
from a large volume of water. When chlorinated water supplies are tested it is necessary
to add an inactivating agent such as sodium thiosulphate. Although an incubation
temperature of 37°C may be necessary to recover some pathogens or faecal contaminants
from water, many indigenous species fail to grow at this temperature, and it is usual to
incubate at 20-26°C for their detection.
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 345
Skin and respiratory-tract flora
Microbial transfer from operators
Microorganisms may be transferred to pharmaceutical preparations from the process
operator. This is undesirable in the case of tablets and. powders, and may result in
spoilage of solutions or suspensions, but in the case of parenterals it may have serious
consequences for the patient. Of the natural skin flora organisms, Staph, aureus is
perhaps the most undesirable. It is common on the hands and face and, since it resides
in the deep layers of the skin, is not eliminated by washing. Other bacteria present are
Sarcina spp. and diphtheroids, but occasionally Gram-negative rods such as Mima spp.
(Acinetobacter) and Alcaligenes spp. achieve resident status in moist regions. In the
fatty and waxy sections of the skin, lipophilic yeast are often present, Pityrosporum
ovale on the scalp and P. orbiculare on glabrous skin. Various dermatophyte fungi
such as Epidermophyton spp., Microsporon spp. and Trichophyton spp. may be present.
Ear secretions may also contain saprophytic bacteria.
Bacteria other than the natural skin flora may be transferred from the operator
as a result of poor personal hygiene, such as faecal organisms from the anal region
or bacteria from a wound. Open wounds without clinical manifestation of bacterial
growth often support pathogenic bacteria and Staph, aureus has been found in
20%; other contaminants include micrococci, enterococci, a-haemolytic and non-
haemolytic streptococci, Clostridium spp., Bacillus spp. and Gram-negative intestinal
bacteria. Clostridium perfringens in such circumstances is usually present as a
saprophyte and dies fairly rapidly. Wounds showing signs of infection may support
Staph, aureus, Strep, pyogenes, enterococci, coliforms, Proteus spp. and Pseudomonas
aeruginosa.
The nasal passages may contain large numbers of Staph, aureus and a limited number
of Staph, albus, whilst the nasopharynx is often colonized by streptococci of the viridans
group, Strep, salivarius or Neisseria pharyngis. Occasionally, pathogens such as
Haemophilus influenzae and K. pneumoniae may be present. The most common
organisms secreted during normal respiratory function and speech are saprophytic
streptococci of the viridans group.
The hazard of the transfer of microorganisms from humans to pharmaceutical
preparations may be reduced by comprehensive training in personal hygiene coupled
with regular medical checks to prevent carriers of pathogenic organisms from coming
in contact with any product.
Hygiene and protective clothing
Areas designed for the manufacture of products intended for injection and eye or ear
preparations usually have washing facilities with foot-operated taps, antiseptic soap
and hot-air hand driers at the entrance to the suite, which must be used by all process
operators. For the manufacture of such products it is also necessary for the operators to
wear.sterilized clothing including gowns, trousers, boots, hoods, face masks and gloves.
For the production of products for oral and topical use, staff should be made to wash
their hands before entering the production area. The requirements for protective clothing
are usually less stringent but include clean overalls, hair covering and gloves, and
where possible, face masks are an advantage.
Raw materials
Raw materials account for a high proportion of the microorganisms introduced during
the manufacture of pharmaceuticals, and the selection of materials of a good
microbiological quality aids in the control of contamination levels in both products
and the environment. It is, however, common to have to accept raw materials which
have some non-pathogenic microorganisms present and an assessment must be made
as to the risk of their survival to spoil the finished product by growing in the presence
of a preservative system, or the efficacy of an in-process treatment stage to destroy or
remove them. Whatever the means of prevention of growth or survival by chemical or
in-process treatment, it should be regarded as critical and controlled accordingly.
Untreated raw materials which are derived from a natural source usually support
an extensive and varied microflora. Products from animal sources such as gelatine,
desiccated thyroid, pancreas and cochineal may be contaminated with animal-borne
pathogens. For this reason some statutory bodies such as the British Pharmacopoeia
(1993) require freedom of such materials from Escherichia coli and Salmonella spp. at
a stated level before they can be used in the preparation of pharmaceutical products.
The microflora of materials of plant origin such as gum acacia and tragacanth, agar,
powdered rhubarb and starches may arise from that indigenous to plants and may include
bacteria such as Erwinia spp., Pseudomonas spp., Lactobacillus spp., Bacillus spp.
and streptococci, moulds such as Cladosporium spp., Alternaria spp. and Fusarium
spp., and non-mycelated yeasts, or those introduced during cultivation. For example,
the use of untreated sewage as a fertilizer may result in animal-borne pathogens such
as Salmonella spp. being present. Some refining processes modify the microflora of
raw materials, for example drying may concentrate the level of spore-forming bacteria
and some solubilizing processes may introduce water-borne bacteria such as E. coli.
Synthetic raw materials are usually free from all but incidental microbial
contamination.
The storage condition of raw materials, particularly hygroscopic substances, is
important, and since a minimum water activity (A w ) of 0.70 is required for osmophilic
yeasts, 0.80 for most spoilage moulds and 0.91 for most spoilage bacteria, precautions
should be taken to ensure that dry materials are held below these levels. Some packaging
used for raw materials, such as unlined paper sacks, may absorb moisture and may
itself be subject to microbial deterioration and so contaminate the contents. For this
reason polythene-lined sacks are preferable. Some liquid or semi-solid raw materials
contain preservatives, but others such as syrups depend upon osmotic pressure to prevent
the growth of osmophiles which are often present. With this type of material it is
important that they are held at a constant temperature since any variation may result in
evaporation of some of the water content followed by condensation and dilution of the
surface layers to give an A w value which may permit the growth of osmophiles and
spoil the syrup.
The use of natural products with a high non-pathogenic microbial count is possible
if a sterilization stage is included either before or during the manufacturing process.
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 347
Such sterilization procedures (see also Chapter 20) may include heat treatment, filtration,
irradiation, recrystallization from a bactericidal solvent such as an alcohol, or for dry
products where compatible, ethylene oxide gas. If the raw material is only a minor
constituent and the final product is adequately preserved either by lack of A w chemically
or by virtue of its pH, sugar or alcohol content, an in-process sterilization stage may
not be necessary. If, however, the product is intended for parenteral or ophthalmic use
a sterilization stage is essential.
The handling of contaminated raw materials as described previously may increase
the airborne contamination level, and if there is a central dispensing area precautions
may be necessary to prevent airborne cross-contamination, as well as that from infected
measuring and weighing equipment. This presents a risk for all materials but in particular
those stored in the liquid state where contamination may result in the bulk being spoiled.
Packaging
Packaging material has a dual role and acts both to contain the product and to prevent
the entry of microorganisms or moisture which may result in spoilage, and it is therefore
important that the source of contamination is not the packaging itself. The microflora
of packaging materials is dependent upon both its composition and storage conditions.
This, and a consideration of the type of pharmaceutical product to be packed, determine
whether a sterilization treatment is required.
Glass containers are sterile on leaving the furnace, but are often stored in dusty
conditions and packed for transport in cardboard boxes. As a result they may contain
mould spores of Penicillium spp., Aspergillus spp. and bacteria such as Bacillus spp. It
is commonplace to either airblow or wash glass containers to remove any glass spicules
or dust which may be present, and it is often advantageous to include a disinfection
stage if the product being filled is a liquid or semi-solid preparation. Plastic bottles
which are either blow- or injection-moulded have a very low microbial count and may
not require disinfection. They may, however, become contaminated with mould spores
if they are transported in a non-sanitary packaging material such as unlined cardboard.
Packaging materials which have a smooth, impervious surface, free from crevices
or interstices, such as cellulose acetate, polyethylene, polypropylene, poly vinylchloride,
and metal foils and laminates, all have a low surface microbial count. Cardboard and
paperboard, unless treated, carry mould spores of Cladosporium spp., Aspergillus spp.
and Penicillium spp. and bacteria such as Bacillus spp. said Micrococcus spp.
Closure liners of pulpboard or cork, unless specially treated with a preservative,
foil or wax coating, are often a source of mould contamination for liquid or semi-solid
products. A closure with a plastic flowed-in linear is less prone to introduce or support
microbial growth than one stuck in with an adhesive, particularly if the latter is based
on a natural product such as casein. If required, closures can be sterilized by either
formaldehyde or ethylene oxide gas.
In the case of injectables and ophthalmic preparations which are manufactured
aseptically but do not receive a sterilization treatment in their final container the
packaging has to be sterilized. Dry heat at 170°C is often used for vials and ampoules.
Containers and closures may also be sterilized by moist heat, chemicals and irradiation,
but consideration for the destruction or removal of bacterial pyrogens may be necessary.
348 Chapter 17
Regardless of the type of sterilization, the process must be validated and critical control
points established.
Buildings
Walls and ceilings
Moulds are the most common flora of walls and ceilings and the species usually found
are Cladosporium spp., Aspergillus spp., in particular A. niger and A. flavus, Penicillium
spp. and Aurebasidium (Pullularia) spp. They are particularly common in poorly
ventilated buildings with painted walls. The organisms derive most of their nutrients
from the plaster on to which the paint has been applied and a hard gloss finish is more
resistant than a softer, matt one. The addition of up to 1% of a ftingistat such as
pentachlorophenol, 8-hydroxyquinoline or salicylanilide is an advantage. To reduce
microbial growth, all walls and ceilings should be smooth, impervious and washable
and this requirement may be met by cladding with a laminated plastic. In areas where
humidity is high, glazed bricks or tiles are the optimal finish, and where a considerable
volume of steam is used, ventilation at ceiling level is essential.
To aid cleaning, all electrical cables and ducting for other services should be installed
deep in cavity walls where they are accessible for maintenance but do not collect dust.
All pipes which pass through walls should be sealed flush to the surface.
Floors and drains
To minimize microbial contamination, all floors should be easy to clean, impervious to
water and laid on aflat surface. In some areas it may be necessary for the floor to slope
towards a drain, in which case the gradient should be such that no pools of water form.
Any joints in the floor, necessary for expansion, should be adequately sealed. The
floor-to- wall junction should be coved.
The finish of the floor usually relates to the process being carried out and in an area
where little moisture or product is liable to be split, poly vinylchloride welded sheeting
may be satisfactory, but in wet areas or where frequent washing is necessary, brick
tiles, sealed concrete or a hard ground and polished surface like terazzo is superior. In
areas where acid or alkaline chemicals or cleaning fluids are applied, a resistant sealing
and jointing material must be used. If this is neglected the surface becomes pitted and
porous and readily harbours microorganisms.
Where floor drainage channels are necessary they should be open if possible, shallow
and easy to clean. Connections to drains should be outside areas where sensitive products
are being manufactured and, where possible, drains should be avoided in areas where
aseptic operations are being carried out. If this cannot be avoided, they must be fitted
with effective traps, preferably with electrically operated heat-sterilizing devices.
Doors, windows and fittings
To prevent dust from collecting, all ledges, doors and windows should fit flush with
walls. Doors should be well fitting to reduce the entry of microorganisms, except where
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 349
a positive air pressure is maintained. Ideally, all windows in manufacturing areas should
serve only to permit light entry and not be used for ventilation. In areas where aseptic
operations are carried out, an adequate air-control system, other than windows, is
essential.
Overhead pipes in all manufacturing areas should be sited away from equipment to
prevent condensation and possible contaminants from falling into the product. Unless
neglected, stainless steel pipes support little microbial growth, but lagged pipes present
a problem and unless they are regularly treated with a disinfectant they will support
mould growth.
8 Equipment
Each piece of equipment used to manufacture or pack pharmaceuticals has its own
peculiar area where microbial growth may be supported, and knowledge of its weak
points may be built up by regular tests for contamination. The type and extent of growth
will depend on the source of the contamination, the nutrients available and the
environmental conditions, in particular the temperature and pH.
The following points are common to many pieces of plant and serve as a general
guide to reduce the risk of microbial colonization.
1 All equipment should be easy to dismantle and clean.
2 All surfaces which are in contact with the product should be smooth, continuous
and free from pits, with all sharp corners eliminated and junctions rounded or coved.
All internal welding should be polished out and there should be no dead ends. All
contact surfaces require routine inspection for damage, particularly those of lagged
equipment, and double-walled and lined vessels, since any crack or pinholes in the
surface may allow the product to seep into an area where it is protected from cleaning
and sterilizing agents, and where microorganisms may grow and contaminate subsequent
batches of product.
3 There should be no inside screw threads and all outside threads should be readily
accessible for cleaning.
4 Coupling nuts on all pipework and valves should be capable of being taken apart
and cleaned.
5 Agitator blades and the shaft should preferably be of one piece and be accessible
for cleaning. If the blades are bolted onto the shaft, the product may become entrained
between the shaft and blades and support microorganisms. If the shaft is packed into a
housing and this fitting is within a manufacturing vessel it also may act as a reservoir
of microorganisms.
6 Mechanical seals are preferable to packing boxes since packing material is
usually difficult to sterilize and often requires a lubricant which may gain access to
the product. The product must also be protected from lubricant used on other moving
parts.
7 Valves should be of a sanitary design, and all contact parts must be treated during
cleaning and sanitation, and a wide variety of plug type valves are available for general
purpose use. For aseptically manufactured and filled products valves fitted with steam
barriers are available. If diaphragm valves are used, it is essential to inspect the
diaphragm routinely. Worn diaphragms can permit seepage of the product into the seat
350 Chapter 17
of the valve, where it is protected from cleaning and sterilizing agents and may act as a
growth medium for microorganisms, in addition if diaphragm valves are used in very
wet area, a purpose-made cover may be useful to prevent access of water and potential
microbial growth occurring under the diaphragm.
8 All pipelines should slope away from the product source and all process and storage
vessels should be self -draining. Run-off valves should be as near to the tank as possible
and sampling through them should be avoided, since any nutrient left in the valve may
encourage microbial growth which could contaminate the complete batch. A separate
sampling cock or hatch is preferable.
9 If a vacuum exhaust system is used to remove the air or steam from a vessel, it is
necessary to clean and disinfect all fittings regularly. This prevents residues which
may be drawn into them from supporting microbial growth, which may later be returned
to the vessel in the form of condensate and contaminate subsequent batches of product.
If air is bled back into the vessel it should be passed through a sterilizing filter.
10 If any filters or straining bags made from natural materials such as canvas, muslin
or paper are used, care must be taken to ensure that they are cleaned and sterilized
regularly to prevent the growth of moulds such as Cladosporium spp., Stachybotrys
spp., mdAureobasidium (Pullularia)pullulans, which utilize cellulose and would impair
them.
8.1 Pipelines
The most common materials used for pipelines are stainless steel, glass and plastic,
and the latter may be rigid or flexible. Continuous sections of pipework are often
designed to be cleaned and sterilized in place by the flow of cleansing and
sterilizing agents at a velocity of not less than 1.5ms -1 through the pipe of the largest
diameter in the system. The speed of flow coupled with a suitable detergent removes
microorganisms by a scouring action. To be successful, stainless steel pipes must be
welded to form a continuous length and must be polished internally to eliminate any
pits or crevices which would provide a harbour for microorganisms. However, as
soon as joints and cross-connections are introduced they provide a harbour for
microorganisms, particularly behind rubber or teflon O-rings. In the case of plastic
pipes, bonded joints can form an area where microorganisms are protected from cleaning
and sterilizing agents.
The 'in-place' cleaning system described for pipelines may also be used for both
plate and tubular types of heat exchange units, pumps and some homogenizers. However,
valves and all T-piece fittings for valves and temperature and pressure gauges may
need to be cleaned manually. Tanks and reaction vessels may be cleaned and sterilized
automatically by rotary pressure sprays which are sited at a point in the vessel where
the maximum area of wall may be treated. If spray balls are incorporated into a system
which re-uses the cleansing-in-place (CIP) fluids, then it may be necessary to incorporate
a filter to remove particles which may block the pores of the spray ball. Fixtures such
as agitators, pipe inlets, outlets and vents may have to be cleaned manually. The nature
of many products or the plant design often renders cleaning in place impracticable and
the plant has to be dismantled for cleaning and sterilizing.
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 351
Cleansing
There are several cleansing agents available to suit the product to be removed, and the
agents include acids, alkalis and anionic, cationic and non-ionic detergents. The agent
selected must fulfil the following criteria.
1 It must suit the surface to be cleaned and not cause corrosion.
2 It must remove the product without leaving a residue.
3 It must be compatible with the water supply.
Sometimes a combined cleansing and sterilizing solution is desirable, in which case
the two agents must be compatible.
Disinfection and sterilization
Equipment may be sterilized or disinfected by heat, chemical disinfection or a
combination of both. Many tanks and reaction vessels are sterilized by steam under
pressure, and small pieces of equipment and fittings may be autoclaved, but it is
important that the steam has access to all surfaces. Equipment used to manufacture and
pack dry powder is often sterilized by dry heat. Chemical disinfectants commonly
include sodium hypochlorite and organochlorines at50-100p.p.m. free residual chlorine,
QACs (0.1-0.2%), 70% (v/v) ethanol in water and 1% (v/v) formaldehyde solution.
The method of disinfection may be by total immersion for small objects or by spraying
the internal surfaces of larger equipment. When plant is dismantled for cleaning and
sterilizing, all fittings such as couplings, valves, gaskets and O-rings also require
treatment. The removal of chemical disinfectants is very important in fermentation
processes where residues may affect sensitive cultures.
All disinfection and sterilization processes for equipment should be validated, for
preference using a microbiological challenge with an organism of appropriate resistance
to the disinfectant, sterilant or sterilizing conditions. Once the required log reduction
of the challenge organism has been achieved, physical and/or chemical parameters can
be set which form the critical control points for the process.
Microbial checks
Either as part of an initial validation or as an ongoing exercise, the efficacy of OP
systems can be checked by plating out a sample of the final rinse water with a nutrient
agar, or by swab tests. Swabs may be made of either sterile cotton wool or calcium
alginate. The latter is used in conjunction with a diluent containing 1% sodium
hexametaphosphate which dissolves the swab and releases the organisms removed from
the equipment; these organisms may then be plated out with a nutrient agar or alternative
methods of evaluation used. Swabs are useful for checking the cleanliness of curved
pieces of equipment, pipes, orifices, valves and connections, but unless a measuring
guide is used the results cannot be expressed quantitatively. Such measurement can be
made by pressing a nutrient agar against a flat surface. The agar is usually poured into
specially designed Petri dishes or contact plates, or is in the form of a disc sliced from
a cylinder of a solid nutrient medium. The nutrient agar or plate or section, when
incubated, replicates the contamination on the surface tested. Since this technique leaves
a nutrient residue on the surface tested, the equipment must be washed and resterilized
before use. The development of methods for the rapid detection of microorganisms
has advantages over more traditional methods if quantitative results are used as part
of a critical control programme, but not all methods lend themselves to identifying the
contaminant, and it may be necessary to use a combination of methods if qualitative
determinations are required.
Cleaning equipment and utensils
The misuse of brooms and mops can substantially increase the microbial count of
the atmosphere by raising dust or by splashing with water-borne contaminants. To
prevent this, either a correctly designed vacuum cleaner or a broom made of synthetic
material, which is washed regularly, may be used. Hospital trials have shown that,
when used, a neglected dry mop redistributes microorganisms which it has picked up,
but a neglected wet mop redistributes many times the number of organisms it picked
up originally, because it provides a suitable environment for their growth. In order to
maintain mops and similar non-disposable cleaning equipment in a good hygienic
state, it was found to be necessary first to wash and then to boil or autoclave the items,
and finally to store them in a dry state. Disinfectant solutions were found to be
inadequate.
Many chemical disinfectants (see also Chapter 10), in particular the halogens, some
phenolics and QACs, are inactivated in the presence of organic matter and it is essential
that all cleaning materials such as buckets and fogging sprays are kept clean. Halogens
rapidly deteriorate at their use-dilution levels and QACs are liable to become
contaminated with Ps. aeruginosa if stored diluted. For such reasons it is preferable to
store the bulk of the disinfectant in a concentrated form and to dilute it to the use
concentration only as required.
Further reading
Anderson J.D. & Cox C.S. (1967) Microbial survival. In: Airborne Microbes (eds P.H. Gregory & J.L.
Monteith), pp. 203-226. Seventeenth Symposium of the Society for General Microbiology,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Pres.
Burman N.P. & Colboume J.S. (1977) Techniques for the assessment of growth of microorganisms
on plumbing materials used in contact with potable water supplies. J Appl Bacteriol, 43, 137 —
144.
Chambers C.W. & Clarke N.A. (1968) Control of bacteria in non-domestic water. Adv Appl Microbiol,
8, 105-143.
Collings V.G. (1964) The freshwater environment and its significance in industry. J Appl Bacteriol, 27,
143-150.
Denyer S.P. & Baird R.M. (Eds) (1990) Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Favero M.S., McDade J.J., Robertson J.A., Hoffman R.V. & Edward R.W. (1968) Microbiological
sampling of surfaces. J Appl Bacteriol, 31, 336-343.
Gregory P.H. (1973) Microbiology of the Atmosphere, 2nd edn. London: Leonard Hill.
Maurer I.M. (1985) Hospital Hygiene, 3rd edn. London: Edward Arnold.
Nishannon A. & Pokja M.S. (1977) Comparative studies of microbial contamination of surfaces by the
contact plate and swab methods. J Appl Bacteriol, 42, 53-63.
Packer M.E. & Litchfield J.H. (1972) Food Plant Sanitation. London: Chapman & Hall.
Microorganism ecology and the pharmaceutical industry 353
Russell A.D., Hugo W.B. & Ayliffe G.A.J, (eds) (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection.
Preservation and Sterilization, 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Skinner F.A. & Carr F.G. (eds) (1974) The Normal Microbial Flora of Man. Society for Applied
Bacteriology Symposium No. 5. London: Academic Press.
Underwood E. (1998) Good manufacturing practice. In: Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.AJ. Ayliffe), 3rd edn. Oxford:
Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Microbial spoilage and preservation
of pharmaceutical products
i Microbial spoilage
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Types of spoilage
1.2.1 Infection induced by contaminated
medicines
1.2.2 Chemical and physico-chemical
deterioration of pharmaceutical
products
1.2.3 Pharmaceutical ingredients susceptible
to microbial attack
1.2.4 Observable effects of microbial attack
on pharmaceutical products
1.3 Factors affecting microbial spoilage of
pharmaceutical products
1.3.1 Types, and size, of contaminant
inoculum
1.3.2 Nutritional factors
1.3.3 Moisture content: water activity (>4w)
1.3.4 Redox potential
1.3.5 Storage temperature
1 .3.6 P H
1.3.7 Packaging design
1.3.8 Protection of microorganisms within
pharmaceutical products
Preservation of medicines using
antimicrobial agents: basic principles
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Effect of preservative concentration,
temperature andsize of inoculum
2.3 Factors affecting the 'availability' of
preservatives
2.3.1 Effect of product pH
2.3.2 Efficiency in multiphase systems
2.3.3 Effect of container or packaging
3
Quality assurance and the control of
microbial risk in medicines
3.1
Introduction
3.2
Quality assurance in formulation design
and development
3.3
Good pharmaceutical manufacturing
practice
3.4
Quality control procedures
3.5
Post-market surveillance
4
Further reading
Microbial spoilage
Introduction
Many medicines contain a wide variety of ingredients, often in quite complex physico-
chemical states, included to create formulations which are efficacious, stable and
sufficiently elegant to be acceptable to patients. Should microbial contaminants survive
manufacture, or enter during storage or use they are likely to meet conditions which
are often conducive to survival and even replication of an appreciable assortment of
non-fastidious bacteria, fungi and yeasts, and microbial spoilage may ensue unless
steps are taken to control it. Microbial spoilage may include:
1 survival of low levels of acutely pathogenic microorganisms, or higher levels of
opportunist pathogens;
2 the presence of toxic microbial metabolites; or
3 microbial growth and initiation of chemical and physico-chemical deterioration of
the formulation.
Such spoilage usually results in major financial problems for the manufacturer, either
through direct loss of the faulty product or, possibly, expensive litigation with aggrieved
users of the medicine.
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 355
12 Types of spoilage
7.2.7 Infection induced by contaminated medicines
Although infrequently reported as pharmaceutical contaminants, acute human pathogens
attract considerable attention when they are present. For example, Salmonella spp.
infections have arisen from contaminated tablets and capsules of yeast, carmine,
pancreatin, thyroid extract and powdered vegetable drugs, where low levels of
pathogens encountered in the finished medicines were traced to the raw ingredients
used. A cholera outbreak in a West African country was traced to an oral liquid medicine
which had been prepared with contaminated water. Of commoner practical concern are
a wide variety of common saprophytic and non-fastidious opportunist contaminants
which, although of limited pathogenicity to healthy individuals, may replicate readily
in some medicines and present a significant infective hazard to certain groups of
compromised patients. For example, whilst the intact cornea is quite resistant to infection,
it offers little resistance to pseudomonads and related bacteria when scratched, or
damaged by irritant chemicals, and numerous eyes have been lost following the
use of inadequately designed ophthalmic solutions which had become contaminated
by Pseudomonas aeruginosa and even supported its active growth. Pseudomonads
contaminating 'antiseptic' solutions have infected the skin of badly burnt patients,
resulting in the failure of skin grafts and even death from Gram-negative septicaemia.
Infections of eczematous skin and respiratory infections in neonates have been traced
to ointments and creams contaminated with Gram-negative bacteria. Oral mixtures
and antacid suspensions can support the growth of Gram-negative bacteria and there
are reports of serious consequences when administered to patients who were immuno-
compromised as a result of antineoplastic chemotherapy. Candida spp. in intravenous
medicines have also been reported to have caused fatal septicaemia in transplant patients
receiving supportive immunosuppressant therapy. Growth of Gram-negative bacteria
in bladder washout solutions have been responsible for very painful infections. Recently,
several children died in the UK from Pseudomonas septicaemia caused by contamination
of parenteral nutritional fluids during their aseptic compounding.
Fatal viral infections are well recorded resulting from the use of contaminated
human tissue or fluids as components of medicines. Examples of this include human
immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection of haemophiliacs by contaminated and
inadequately treated Factor VIII products made from pooled human blood, and
Creutzfeld-Sakob disease (CJD) from injections of human growth hormone made with
human pituitary glands, some of which were infected.
Gram-negative bacteria contain lipopolysaccharides (endotoxins) in their outer
membranes that can remain in an active condition in products even after cell death and
some can survive moist heat sterilization. Although inactive by the oral route, endotoxins
can induce acute and often fatal febrile shock if they enter the bloodstream via
contaminated infusion fluids, even in nanogram quantities, or via diffusion across
membranes from contaminated haemodialysis solutions.
The acute bacterial toxins associated with food poisoning episodes are not commonly
reported in pharmaceutical products, although aflatoxin-producing aspergilli have been
detected in some vegetable ingredients. However, many of the metabolites of microbial
356 Chapter 18
deterioration have quite unpleasant tastes and smell even at low levels, and would
deter most from using such a medicine.
1.2.2 Chemical and physico-chemical deterioration of pharmaceutical products
Microorganisms form a major part of the natural recycling processes for biological
matter in the environment. As such, they possess a wide variety of degradative
capabilities, which they are able to exert under relatively mild physico-chemical
conditions. Mixed natural communities are often far more effective co-operative
biodeteriogens than the individual species alone, and sequences of attack of complex
substrates occur where initial attack by one group of microorganisms renders them
susceptible to further deterioration by secondary, and subsequent, microorganisms.
Under suitable environmental selection pressures even novel degradative pathways
emerge, able to attack newly introduced synthetic chemicals (xenobiotics). However,
the rates of degradation of materials released into the environment can vary
greatly, from half lives of hours (phenol) to months ('hard' detergents) to years
(halogenated pesticides). The overall rate of deterioration of a chemical will depend
upon:
1 its chemical structure;
2 the physico-chemical properties of a particular environment;
3 the type and quantity of microbes present;
4 whether the metabolites produced can serve as sources of usable energy and
precursors for biosynthesis of cellular components, and hence the creation of more
microorganisms.
Pharmaceutical formulations may be considered as specialized micro-environments
and their susceptibility to microbial attack assessed using conventional ecological
criteria. Some naturally-occurring ingredients are particularly sensitive to attack, and
quite a few synthetic components, such as modern surfactants, have been deliberately
constructed to be readily degraded after disposal into the environment. Crude vegetable
and animal drug extracts often contain wide assortments of microbial nutrients besides
the therapeutic agents. This, combined with frequently conducive and unstable physico-
chemical characteristics, leaves many formulations with a high potential for microbial
attack, unless steps are taken to minimize it.
1.2.3 Pharmaceutical ingredients susceptible to microbial attack
Surface-active agents. Anionic surfactants such as the alkali metal and amine soaps of
fatty acids are generally stable due to the slightly alkaline pH of the formulations,
although readily degraded once diluted out into sewage. Alkyl and alkylbenzene
sulphonates and sulphate esters are metabolized by co-oxidation of their terminal methyl
groups followed by sequential /3-oxidation of the alkyl chains and fission of the aromatic
rings. The presence of chain branching involves additional a-oxidative processes.
Generally, ease of degradation decreases with increasing chain length and complexity
of branching of the alkyl chain. Sulphonate and sulphate ester residues are converted
to sulphate, although sulphonate residues are significantly more recalcitrant than the
esters.
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 357
Non-ionic surfactants such as alkylpolyoxyethylene alcohol emulsifiers are readily
metabolized by a wide variety of microorganisms. Increasing chain lengths and
branching again decreases ease of attack. Alkylphenol polyoxyethylene alcohols are
similarly attacked, but are significantly more resistant. Lipolytic cleavage of the fatty
acids from sorbitan esters, polysorbates and sucrose esters is often followed by
degradation of the cyclic nuclei, producing numerous small molecules readily utilizable
for microbial growth.
Ampholytic surfactants based on phosphatides, betaines and alkylamino-substituted
amino acids are an increasingly important group of surfactants and are generally reported
to be reasonably biodegradable.
The cationic surfactants used as antiseptics and preservatives in pharmacy are usually
only slowly degraded, at high dilution, in sewage. Pseudomonads have been found
growing readily in quaternary ammonium antiseptic solutions, largely at the expense
of other ingredients such as buffering materials, although some metabolism of the
surfactant has also been observed.
Organic polymers. Many of the thickening and suspending agents used in pharmacy
are subject to microbial depolymerization by specific classes of extracellular enzymes,
yielding nutritive fragments and monomers. Examples of such enzymes, with their
substrates in parentheses are: amylases (starches), pectinases (pectins), cellulases
(carboxymethylcelluloses, but not alkylcelluloses), uronidases (polyuronides such as
in tragacanth and acacia), dextranases (dextrans) and proteases (proteins). Agar (complex
polysaccharides) is an example of a relatively inert polymer and, as such, is used as a
support for solidifying microbiological culture media. The lower molecular weight
polyethylene glycols are readily degraded by sequential oxidation of the hydrocarbon
chain, but the larger congeners are rather more recalcitrant. Synthetic packaging
polymers such as nylon, polystyrene and polyester are extremely resistant to attack,
although cellophane (modified cellulose) is susceptible under some humid conditions.
Humectants. Low molecular weight materials such as glycerol and sorbitol are included
in some products to reduce water loss and are usually readily metabolized unless present
in high concentrations (see section 1.3.3).
Fats and oils. These hydrophobic materials are usually attacked extensively when
dispersed in aqueous formulations such as oil-in- water emulsions, although fungal attack
is reported in condensed moisture films on the surface of oils in bulk, or where water
droplets have contaminated the bulk oil phase. Oil-in-water emulsion-based medicines
are less commonly encountered than in food formulations where their microbial attack
can also occur, aided by the high solubility of oxygen in many oils. Lipolytic rupture of
triglycerides liberates glycerol and fatty acids, the latter often then undergoing fi-
oxidation of the alkyl chains and the production of odiferous ketones. While the microbial
metabolism of pharmaceutical hydrocarbon oils is rarely reported, this is a problem in
engineering and fuel technology when water droplets have accumulated in oil storage
tanks and subsequent ftingal colonization has catalysed serious corrosion.
Sweetening, flavouring and colouring agents. Many of the sugars and other sweetening
agents used in pharmacy are ready substrates for microbial growth. However, some
are used in very high concentrations to reduce water activity in some aqueous products
and inhibit microbial attack (see section 1.3.3). At one time, a variety of colouring
agents (such as tartrazine and amaranth) and flavouring agents (such as peppermint
water) were kept as stock solutions for extemporaneous dispensing purposes but they
frequently supported the growth of Pseudomonas spp. including Ps. aeruginosa. It
is now recommended that such stock solutions contain preservatives or are made
freshly as required by dilution of alcoholic solutions which are much less susceptible
to microbial attack.
Therapeutic agents. It is possible to demonstrate that a variety of microorganisms under
laboratory conditions can metabolize a wide assortment of drugs, resulting in loss of
activity. Materials as diverse as alkaloids (morphine, strychnine, atropine), analgesics
(aspirin, paracetamol), thalidomide, barbiturates, steroid esters and mandelic acid can
be metabolized and serve as substrates for growth. Indeed the use of microorganisms
to carry out subtle transformations on steroid molecules forms the basis of the
commercial production of potent therapeutic steroidal agents (see Chapter 25). Reports
of drug destruction in actual medicines are less frequent. However, examples include
the metabolism of atropine in eye drops by contaminating fungi, inactivation of penicillin
injections by /3-lactamase-producing bacteria (see Chapter 5), steroid metabolism in
damp tablets and creams by fungi, the microbial hydrolysis of aspirin in suspension by
esterase-producing bacteria, and chloramphenicol deactivation in an oral medicine by
a chloramphenicol acetylase-producing contaminant.
Preservatives and disinfectants. Many preservatives and disinfectants can be metab-
olized by a wide variety of Gram-negative bacteria, although more commonly at
concentrations below their effective 'use' levels. However, quaternary ammonium
antimicrobial agents are only slowly attacked. Organomercurial preservatives discharged
into rivers from paper mills have been extensively converted to insidiously toxic
alkylmercury compounds which could reach humans via an ascending food chain.
Degradation of agents at 'use' concentrations in pharmacy and medicine is less
commonly reported, but there are incidents of the growth of pseudomonads in stock
solutions of quaternary ammonium antiseptics and chlorhexidine with resultant infection
of patients. Pseudomonas spp. have metabolized 4-hydroxybenzoate ester preservatives
contained in eye-drops and caused serious eye infections, and metabolized them in oral
suspensions and solutions. It is important to remember this possibility when selecting
preservatives for formulations.
1.2.4 Observable effects of microbial attack on pharmaceutical products
Microbial contaminants will usually need to be able to attack ingredients of a medicine
and create substrates necessary for biosynthesis and energy production before they can
replicate to levels where obvious spoilage becomes apparent since, for example, 10
microbes will have an overall degradative effect around 10 6 time faster than one cell.
However, growth and attack may well be localized in surface moisture films or very
unevenly distributed within the bulk of viscous formulations such as creams. Early
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 359
Fig. 18.1 Section (xl.5)
through an inadequately
preserved olive oil, oil-in-water,
emulsion in an advanced state of
microbial spoilage showing:
A, discoloured, oil-depleted,
aqueous phase; B, oil globule-
rich creamed layer; C, coalesced
oil layer from 'cracked'
emulsion; D, fungal mycelial
growth on surface. Also present
are a foul taste and evil smell!
1.3
indications of spoilage are often organoleptic, with the release of very unpleasant
smelling and tasting metabolites such as 'sour' fatty acids, 'fishy' amines, 'bad eggs',
bitter, 'earthy' or sickly tastes and smells. Products frequently become unappealingly
discoloured by microbial pigments of various shades. Thickening and suspending agents
such as tragacanth, acacia or carboxymethylcellulose can be depolymerized, resulting
in loss of viscosity, and sedimentation of suspended ingredients. Alternatively, microbial
polymerization of sugars and surfactant molecules can produce slimy, viscous, masses
in syrups, shampoos and creams, and fungal growth in creams has produced 'gritty'
textures. Changes in product pH can occur depending on whether acidic or basic
metabolites are released, and become so modified as to permit secondary attack by
microbes previously inhibited by the initial product pH. Gaseous metabolites may be
seen as trapped bubbles within viscous formulations.
When a complex formulation such as an oil-in-water emulsion is attacked, a gross
and progressive spoilage sequence may be observed. Metabolism of surfactants will
reduce stability and accelerate 'creaming' of the oil globules. Lipolytic release of fatty
acids from oils will lower pH and encourage coalescence of oil globules and 'cracking'
of the emulsion. Fatty acids and their ketonic oxidation products will provide a sour
taste and unpleasant smell, whilst bubbles of gaseous metabolites may be visible, trapped
in the product, and pigments may discolour the product (see Fig. 18.1).
Factors affecting microbial spoilage of pharmaceutical products
An understanding of the influence of the chemical and physico-chemical parameters of
an environment on microorganisms might allow for subtle manipulation of a formulation
to create conditions which are as unfavourable as possible for growth and spoilage,
360 Chapter 18
within the limitations of patient acceptability and therapeutic efficacy. Additionally,
the overall characteristics of a particular formulation will indicate its susceptibility to
attack by various classes of microorganisms.
1.3.1 Types, and size, of contaminant inoculum
Whilst there will be some chance that a particularly aggressive microbe may enter and
contaminate a medicine, some element of prediction is possible if one considers the
environment and usage to which the product is likely to be subjected during its life and
the history of similar medicines (see Chapters 17 and 19). A formulator can then build
in as much protection as possible against non-standard encounters, such as additional
preservation for a syrup if osmotolerant yeast contamination is particularly likely.
Should failure subsequently occur, a knowledge of microbial ecology and careful
identification of the contaminant(s) can be most useful in tracking down the defective
steps in the design or production process. Very low levels of contaminants which are
unable to replicate in a product might not cause appreciable spoilage but, should an
unexpected surge in the contaminant bioburden occur, the built-in protection could
become swamped and spoilage ensue. This might arise if:
1 raw materials were unusually contaminated;
2 a lapse of the plant-cleaning protocol occurred;
3 large microbial growths detached themselves from within supplying pipework;
4 a change in production procedures allowed unexpected growth of contaminants
during the modified operation;
5 there was demolition work in the vicinity of the manufacturing site or;
6 there had been gross misuse of the product during administration.
However, inoculum size alone is not always a reliable indicator of likely spoilage
potential. A very low level of, say, aggressive pseudomonads in a weakly preserved
solution may suggest a greater risk than tablets containing fairly high numbers of fungal
and bacterial spores.
When an aggressive contaminant enters a medicine, there may be an appreciable
lag period before significant spoilage begins, the duration of which decreases
disproportionately with increasing contaminant loading. It is possible to provide some
control over extemporaneously dispensed formulations by specifying short shelf-lives
of, say, 2 weeks. However, since there is usually a long delay between manufacture
and administration of factory-made medicines, growth and attack could ensue during
this period unless additional steps are taken to prevent it.
The isolation of a particular microorganism from a markedly spoiled product does
not necessarily mean that it was the initiator of the attack. It could be a secondary
opportunist contaminant which has overgrown the primary spoilage organism once the
physico-chemical properties had been favourably modified by the primary spoiler.
1.3.2 Nutritional factors
The simple nutritional requirements and metabolic adaptability of many common
saprophytic spoilage microorganisms enable them to utilize many of the components
of medicines as substrates for biosynthesis and growth, including not only the intended
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 361
ingredients but also the wide array of trace materials contained in them. The use of
crude vegetable or animal products in a formulation provides an additionally nutritious
environment. Even demineralized water prepared by good ion-exchange methods will
normally contain sufficient nutrients to allow significant growth of many water-borne
Gram-negative bacteria such as Pseudomonas spp. When such contaminants fail to
grow in a medicine it is unlikely to be as a result of nutrient limitation but due to other,
non-supportive, physico-chemical or toxic properties.
Most acute pathogens require specific growth factors normally associated with the
tissues they infect but which are often normally absent in pharmaceutical formulations.
They are thus unlikely to multiply in them, although they may remain viable and infective
for an appreciable time in some dry products where the conditions are suitably protective.
1.3.3 Moisture content: water activity (A )
Microorganisms require ready access to water in appreciable quantities for growth.
Although some solute-rich medicines such as syrups may appear to be 'wet', microbial
growth in them may be difficult since the microbes have to compete for water molecules
with the vast numbers of sugar and other molecules of the formulation which also
readily interact with water via hydrogen bonding. An estimate of the proportion of the
uncomplexed water in a formulation available to equilibrate with any microbial
contaminants and facilitate growth can be obtained by measuring its water activity
(A w ). (This can be calculated from: A w = vapour pressure of formulation -*- vapour
pressure of water under similar conditions). The greater the solute concentration,
the lower is the water activity. With the exception of halophilic bacteria, most
microorganisms grow best in dilute solutions (high A w ) and, as solute concentration
rises (lowering A w ), growth rates decline until a minimal, growth-inhibitory A w is
reached. Limiting A w values are of the order of Gram-negative rods, 0.95; staphylococci,
micrococci and lactobacilli, 0.9; and most yeasts, 0.88. Syrup-fermenting osmotolerant
yeasts have been found spoiling products with A w levels as low as 0.73, whilst some
filamentous fungi can grow at even lower values, with Aspergillus glaucus as low as
0.61.
The A w of aqueous formulations can be lowered to increase resistance to microbial
attack by the addition of high concentrations of sugars or polyethylene glycols. However,
even Syrup BP (66% sucrose; A w = 0.86) has been reported to fail occasionally to inhibit
osmotolerant yeasts and additional preservation may be necessary. With a trend towards
the elimination of sucrose from medicines continuing, alternative solutes are being
investigated, such as sorbitol and fructose, which are not thought to encourage dental
caries. The use of brine to preserve some meats would be organoleptically unacceptable
for medicines. A w can also be reduced by drying, although the dry, often hygroscopic
medicines (tablets, capsules, powders, vitreous 'glasses') will require suitable packaging
to prevent resorption of water and consequent microbial growth (Fig. 18.2). Tablet
film coatings are now available which greatly reduce water vapour uptake during storage
whilst allowing ready dissolution in bulk water. These might contribute to increased
microbial stability during storage in particularly humid climates, although suitable foil
strip packing may be more effective, if also more expensive.
362 Chapter 18
Fig. 18.2 Fungal growth on a
tablet which has become damp
(raised A w ) during storage under
humid conditions. Note the
sparseness of mycelium, and
conidiophores. The contaminant
is thought to be a Penicillium sp
-
1
p* *
Mr
1
• v
1
•
•
•
■
1
1
^
•
1
7J.4
Condensed water films can accumulate on the surface of otherwise 'dry 5 products
such as tablets or bulk oils following storage in damp atmospheres with fluctuating
temperatures, resulting in sufficiently high localized A w to initiate fungal growth. More
water, produced from respiration, may then raise A w even further, encouraging growth.
Dilute aqueous films similarly formed on the surface of viscous products such as syrups
and creams, or exuded by syneresis from hydrogels, can and do reach sufficiently high
A w to permit surface yeast and fungal spoilage.
Inhibition of microbial growth by reduction of A w is more complex than by a simple
binding of water molecules alone as some solutes are more effective than others at
inhibiting microbial attack by particular types of microorganisms even when used to
generate similar A w levels. Mechanisms are thought to involve interference with cellular
osmoregulation and energy production.
Redox potential
The ability of microbes to grow in an environment is influenced by its oxidation-
reduction balance (redox potential) since they will require compatible terminal electron
acceptors to permit function of their respiratory pathways. Vacuum packing of foodstuffs,
or the inclusion of oxygen absorbers in the package to minimize oxygen levels, reduces
attack by some of the obligate aerobic spoilage bacteria, but does not eliminate all spoilage.
Oxygen removal to control spoilage in medicines is not a practical proposition although
it is used to control non-biological oxidation. The use of pressurized carbon dioxide for
soft drinks preservation relies more on the specific antimicrobial action of carbonic
acid than to removal of oxygen. Some viscous foodstuffs, particularly those containing
meat, have sufficiently low redox potentials to permit growth of dangerous anaerobic
Clostridia, but this is unlikely in most pharmaceuticals. The redox potential even in
fairly viscous emulsions may be quite high due the appreciable solubility of oxygen in
most fats and oils.
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 363
7.3.5 Storage temperature
Spoilage of pharmaceuticals could occur over the range of about -20° to 60°C, although
much less likely at the extremes. The actual storage temperature may selectively
determine spoilage by particular types of microorganisms. Storage in a deep freeze at
-20°C or lower is used for long-term storage of foodstuffs and some pharmaceutical
raw materials, and dispensed total parenteral nutrition (TPN) feeds have been stored in
hospitals for short periods at -20°C to even further minimize the risk of growth of any
contaminants which might have been introduced during their aseptic compounding.
Reconstituted syrups and multi-dose eyedrop packs are sometimes dispensed with the
instruction to 'store in a cool place' such as a domestic fridge (8°-12°C), partly to
reduce the risk of in-use contamination growing before the expiry date. Conversely,
pharmacopoeial Water for Injections is recommended to be held at 80°C or above after
distillation and prior to packing and sterilization to prevent possible regrowth of Gram-
negative bacteria, and the release of endotoxins.
1.3.6 pH
Extremes of pH prevent microbial attack, although feeble mould growth even in
dilute hydrochloric acid necessitates the preservation of analytical acid standards.
Around neutrality bacterial spoilage is more likely, with reports of pseudomonads and
related Gram-negative bacteria growing in antacid mixtures, flavoured mouth washes
and in distilled or demineralized water. Above pH 8, for instance with soap-based
emulsions, spoilage is rare. For products with low pH levels such as the fruit juice-
flavoured syrups (ca. pH 3-4) mould or yeast attack is more likely. Yeasts can metabolize
organic acids and raise the pH to levels where secondary bacterial growth can occur.
Although the use of low pH adjustment to preserve foodstuffs is well established
(pickling, coleslaw, yoghurt etc.) it is not practicable to make deliberate use of this for
medicines.
1.3.7 Packaging design
Packaging can have a major influence on microbial stability of some formulations, to
control the entry of contaminants during both storage and use. Enormous efforts have
gone into the design of containers to prevent the ingress of contaminants into medicines
for parenteral administration because of the high risks of infection by this route. Self-
sealing rubber wads must be used to prevent microbial entry into multi-dose injection
containers (Chapter 21) following withdrawals with a hypodermic needle. Wide-
mouthed cream jars will allow the entry of fingers with their concomitant high bioburden
of contamination, and this can be reduced by replacement with narrow nozzle and
flexible screw capped tubes. Where medicines rely on their low A w to prevent spoilage,
packaging such as strip foils must be of water vapour-proof materials with fully efficient
seals. Cardboard outer packaging and labels themselves can become substrates for
microbial attack under humid conditions, and preservatives are often included to reduce
their risk of damage.
364 Chapter 18
1.3.8 Protection of microorganisms within pharmaceutical products
The survival of microorganisms in particular environments is influenced by the presence
of various relatively inert materials. Thus, microbes can be more resistant to heat or
desiccation in the presence of some polymers such as starch, acacia or gelatin. Adsorption
onto naturally occurring particulate material may aid establishment and survival in
some environments. There is a belief, but limited hard evidence, that the presence of
suspended particles such as kaolin, magnesium trisilicate or aluminium hydroxide gel
may influence contaminant longevity in medicines containing them, and that the presence
of some surfactants, suspending agents and proteins can increase the resistance of
microorganisms to preservatives, over and above their direct inactivating effect on the
agents.
2 Preservation of medicines using antimicrobial agents:
basic principles
2.1 Introduction
An antimicrobial 'preservative' may be included in a formulation to further reduce the
risk of spoilage and, preferably, kill any anticipated low levels of contaminants remaining
in a non-sterile medicine after manufacture or which might enter while stored, or during
the repeated withdrawal of doses from a multi-dose container. If a medicine is unlikely
to encourage growth or survival of contaminants and the infective risk is low, such as
with tablets, capsules and dry powders, then a preservative might be pointless.
Preservatives should not be added to deal with erratic failures in poorly controlled
manufacturing processes, due to the uncertainty of success, and their possible depletion
before fulfilling their intended role (see section 2.2). The bad practice of including
preservatives in medicines sterilized by filtration to guard against undetected failure of
the filter did not tackle the real problem of the need for properly validated filtration
systems.
Ideally, such preservatives should:
1 be able to kill rapidly all microbial contaminants as they enter the medicine;
2 not be irritant or toxic to the patient;
3 be stable and effective throughout the life of the medicine; and,
4 be selective in reacting with the contaminants and not the ingredients of the medicine.
Unfortunately, the most active antimicrobial agents are often generally non-selective
in action, inter-reacting significantly with formulation ingredients and patients as well
as microorganisms. Once the more toxic, irritant and reactive agents are excluded,
those remaining generally have only modest antimicrobial efficacy, and there are now
no preservatives considered sufficiently non-toxic for use in highly sensitive areas,
e.g. for injection into central nervous system tissues or for use within the eye. A number
of microbiologically effective preservatives used in cosmetics are reported to cause
significant incidences of contact dermatitis, and are thus precluded from use in
pharmaceutical creams. Although it may be preferable to rapidly kill all contaminants
as they enter a medicine, this may only be possible for relatively simple aqueous solutions
such as eye-drops or injections. For physico-chemically complex systems such as
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 365
emulsions and creams, only inhibition of growth and rather slow, or no, rates of killing
may be realistically achieved.
In order to maximize what preservative efficiency is possible, an appreciation of
those parameters which influence antimicrobial activity within medicines is essential.
2.2 Effect of preservative concentration, temperature and size of inoculum
Changes in the efficacy of preservatives vary exponentially with changes in
concentration (see concentration exponent, 77, Chapter 11), the extent of variation
depending upon the type of agent. For example, halving the concentration of phenol
(rj = 6) gives a 64-fold (2 6 ) reduction in activity, whilst a similar dilution for
chlorhexidine (71 = 2) reduces killing power by only fourfold (2 ). Changes in product
temperature will alter efficacy in proportions, related to different types of preservative
and certain groups of microorganisms (see temperature coefficient, Q 10 , Chapter 11).
Thus, a drop in temperature from 30 to 20°C could result in fivefold and 45 -fold
losses of killing power towards Escherichia coli by phenol (Q 10 =5) or ethanol
(Q = 45), respectively. If both temperature and concentration vary concurrently, the
situation is more complex, but it has been suggested, for example, that if a 0.1%
chlorocresol (77 = 6, Q l0 = 5) solution completely killed a suspension of E. coli at
30°C in 10 minutes, it would require around 90 minutes to achieve a similar effect if
the temperature was lowered to 20°C and slight overheating during production had
resulted in a 10% loss by vaporization in the chlorocresol concentration (other
factors remaining constant).
Preservative molecules are used up as they inactivate microorganisms and as they
interact non-specifically with the significant quantities of contaminant 'dirt' also
introduced during use. This will result in a progressive and exponential decline in the
efficiency of the remaining preservative. Preservative 'capacity' is a term used to describe
the cumulative level of contamination that a preserved formulation is likely to cope
with before becoming so depleted as to become ineffective. This will vary with
preservative type and complexity of the formulation.
2.3 Factors affecting the 'availability' of preservatives
Most preservatives interact in solution with many of the commonly used ingredients of
pharmaceutical formulations to varying extents via a number of weak bonding attractions
as well as with any microorganisms present. This can result in unstable equilibria in
which only a small proportion of the total preservative present is 'available' to inactivate
the relatively small microbial mass, and the resultant rate of killing may be far lower
than might be anticipated from the performance of simple aqueous solutions. The
'unavailable' preservative may still, however, contribute to the general irritancy of the
product. It is commonly believed that where the solute concentrations are very high,
and A w is appreciably reduced, the efficiency of preservatives is often appreciably
reduced and may be virtually inactive at very low A w . A practice of including pre-
servatives in very low A w products such as tablets and capsules misses the point.
This would only offer minimal protection for the dry tablets, and if they should be-
come damp they will be spoiled for other, non-microbial, reasons.
366 Chapter 18
2.3.1 Effect of product pH
In the weakly acidic preservatives, activity resides primarily in the unionized molecules
and they only have significant efficacy at pHs where ionization is low. Thus, benzoic
and sorbic acids (pK a = 4.2 and 4.75, respectively) have limited preservative usefulness
above pH 5, while the 4(p)-hydroxybenzoate esters with their non-ionizable ester group
and poorly ionizable hydroxyl substituent (pK a ca. 8.5) have moderate protective effect
even at neutral pH levels. The activity of quaternary ammonium preservatives and
chlorhexidine probably resides with their cations and are effective in products of neutral
pH. Formulation pH can also directly influence the sensitivity of microorganisms to
preservatives (see Chapter 11).
2.3.2 Efficiency in multiphase systems
In a multiphase formulation, such as an oil-in-water emulsion, preservative molecules
will distribute themselves in an unstable equilibrium between the bulk aqueous phase
and (i) the oil phase by partition, (ii) the surfactant micelles by solubilization, (iii)
polymeric suspending agents and other solutes by competitive displacement of water
of solvation, (iv) particulate and container surfaces by adsorption and, (v) any
microorganisms present. Generally, the overall preservative efficiency can be related
to the small proportion of preservative molecules remaining unbound in the bulk
aqueous phase, although as this becomes depleted some slow re-equilibration between
the components can be anticipated. The loss of neutral molecules into oil and micellar
phases may be favoured over ionized species, although considerable variation in
distribution is found between different systems.
In view of these potentials for major reductions in preservative efficacy,
considerable effort has gone into attempts to devise equations in which one might
substitute variously derived system parameters such as partition coefficients, surfactant
and polymer binding constants and oil: water ratios in order to obtain estimates of
residual preservative levels in aqueous phases. Although some modestly suc-
cessful predictions have been obtained for very simple laboratory systems, they
have proved of limited practical value as data for many of the required parameters
are unavailable for technical grade ingredients or for the more complex commercial
systems.
2.3.3 Effect of container or packaging
Preservative availability may be appreciably reduced by interaction with packaging
materials. Examples include the permeation of phenolic preservatives into the rubber
wads and teats of multi-dose injection or eye-drop containers and by their interaction
with flexible nylon tubes for creams. Quaternary ammonium preservative levels in
formulations have been significantly reduced by adsorption onto the surfaces of plastic
and glass containers. Volatile preservatives such as chloroform are so readily lost by
the routine opening and closing of containers that their usefulness is somewhat restricted
to preservation of medicines in sealed, impervious containers during storage, with quite
short use lives once opened.
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 367
Quality assurance and the control of microbial risk
in medicines
3.1 Introduction
Quality assurance (QA) relates to a scheme of management which embraces all the
procedures necessary to provide a high probability that a medicine will conform
consistently to a specified description of quality (a formalized measure of its fitness for
the purpose intended) on every occasion. It includes formulation design and development
(R&D), good pharmaceutical manufacturing practice (GPMP), which includes quality
control (QC), and post-marketing surveillance. Since many microorganisms may be
hazardous to patients and/or spoil formulations if they enter and remain active in
medicines it is necessary to perform a contamination risk assessment for each product
by examining every stage of its anticipated life from raw materials to administration,
and develop strategies calculated to reduce the overall risk(s) to acceptably low levels.
Risk assessments concerning microorganisms are complicated by uncertainties about
the exact infective and spoilage hazards and risks likely for many contaminants, and
by difficulties in measuring their precise performance in complex systems. As the
consequences of product failure and patient damage will be severe for a manufacturing
company, it is usual to make worst-case presumptions and design strategies to
cover them fully; lesser problems are also then encompassed. Since, for example,
it is impossible to guarantee that any particular microorganism will not be infective,
the presumption is made that all microbes are potentially infective for routes of
administration where the likelihood of infection from contaminants is high; such
medicines are then supplied in a sterile form. One must also presume that those
administering medicines may not be highly skilled or motivated in contamination control
techniques, and incorporate additional safeguards to control risks more appropriate to
these situations. This may include detailed information on administration and even
training, in addition to providing a high quality formulation.
3.2 Quality assurance in formulation design and development
Possibly, the majority of risks of microbial infection and spoilage arising from microbial
contamination during manufacture, storage and use could be eliminated by presenting all
medicines in sterile, impervious, single dosage units. However, the high cost of this strategy
restricts its use to situations where there is a high risk of consequent infection from any
contaminant microbes. Where the infective risk is assessed as much lower, less efficient,
but less expensive, strategies are adopted. The high risk of infection by contaminants in
parenteral medicines, combined with concerns about the systemic toxicity of preservatives
almost always demands sterile single dosage units. With eyedrops for domestic use the
risks are perceived to be lower, and sterile multi-dose products containing a preservative
to combat the anticipated in-use contamination are accepted, although for the higher risk
environment of hospitals sterile single dose units are more common. Oral and topical
routes of administration are generally perceived to present relatively low risks of infection
and the emphasis is more on the control of microbial content during manufacture and
protection of the formulation from chemical and physico-chemical spoilage.
368 Chapter 18
As part of the design process, it is necessary to include features in the formulation
and delivery system to provide as much protection as possible against microbial
contamination and spoilage. Because of potential toxicity and irritancy problems,
antimicrobial preservatives should only be considered where there is clear evidence
of positive benefit. Manipulation of physico-chemical parameters, such as A , the
elimination of particularly susceptible ingredients, the selection of a preservative or
the choice of container may contribute significantly to overall medicine stability.
For 'dry' dosage forms, since it is their very low A w which is their protection against
microbial attack, the moisture vapour properties of packaging materials requires careful
examination.
Preservatives are intended to offer further protection against environmental microbial
contaminants. However, since they are relatively non-specific in their reactivity
(see section 2), it is difficult to calculate with any certainty what proportion of
preservative added to all but the simplest medicine will be available for inactivating
such contamination. The only realistic solution to deciding whether a formulation
is likely to be adequately preserved, without exposing it to the rigours of the real world
over a fair period of time, is to devise a laboratory test where it is challenged with
viable microorganisms, and see whether they are inactivated. Such tests should fqrm
part of formulation development and stability trials to ensure that suitable activity is
likely to remain throughout the life of the medicine. They would not normally be used
for routine manufacturing quality control.
Some 'preservative challenge tests' add relatively large inocula of various laboratory
cultures to aliquots of the medicine and determine their rate of inactivation by viable
counting methods (single challenge tests), whilst others re-inoculate repeatedly at set
intervals, monitoring the efficiency of inactivation until the system fails (multiple
challenge test). This latter technique may give a better estimate of the preservative
capacity of the system than the single challenge approach, but is very time consuming
and expensive. The problems arise when deciding whether performance in such tests
gives reliable predictions of real in-use efficacy. Although the test organisms should
bear some similarity in type and spoilage potential to those to be met in use, it is known
that repeated cultivation on conventional microbiological media (nutrient agar etc.)
frequently results in marked reductions in aggressiveness. Attempts to maintain spoilage
activity by inclusion of formulation ingredients in the culture media gives varied results.
Some manufacturers have been able to maintain active spoilage strains by cultivation
in unpreserved, or diluted aliquots, of formulations.
The British Pharmacopoeia and the European Pharmacopoeia contain a preservative
single challenge test which uses four stock cultures of bacteria, a yeast and a mould,
none of which has any significant history of spoilage potential and which are to be
cultivated on conventional media. However, extension of the basic testis recommended
in some situations, such as the inclusion of an osmotolerant yeast if it is thought such
in-use spoilage might be a problem. Despite its limitations and the cautious indications
given as to what the tests might suggest about the formulation, several manufacturers
have indicated that the test does provide some basic, but useful, indicators of likely in-
use stability. UK Product Licence applications for preserved medicines must demonstrate
that the formulation at least meets the preservative efficacy criteria of the British
Pharmacopoeia, or similar, test.
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 369
Orth has applied the concepts of the D-value as used in sterilization technology
(Chapter 20) to the interpretation of challenge testing. Expressing of the rate of microbial
inactivation in a preserved system in terms of a D-value enables estimation of the
nominal time to achieve a prescribed proportionate level of kill. Problems arise when
trying to predict the behaviour of very low levels of survivors, and the method has its
detractors as well as its advocates.
3.3 Good pharmaceutical manufacturing practice
GPMP is concerned with the manufacture of medicines, and includes control of
ingredients, plant construction, process validation, production, and cleaning (see also
Chapter 22). QC is that part of GPMP dealing with specification, documentation and
assessing conformance to specification.
With traditional QC, a high reliance was placed on testing samples of finished
products to determine the overall quality of a batch. This practice can, however, result
in considerable financial loss if non-compliance is detected only at this late stage, leaving
the expensive options of discarding, or reworking (often not possible), the batch.
Additionally, a few microbiological test methods have poor precision and/or accuracy.
Validation can be complex or impossible, and interpretation of results can prove difficult
For example, although a sterility assurance level of less than one failure in 10 6 items
submitted to a terminal sterilization process is considered appropriate, conventional
'tests for sterility' for finished products (such as in the British Pharmacopoeia) could
not possibly be relied upon to find one damaged, but not dead, microbe somewhere in
10 6 items let alone allow for its cultivation with any precision (Chapter 23). End-product
testing may also not prevent or even detect the isolated rogue processing failure.
It is now generally accepted that a high assurance of overall product quality can
only come from a detailed specification, control and monitoring of all the stages which
contribute to the manufacturing process. More realistic decisions about conformance
to specification can then be made using information for all relevant parameters
(parametric release method), not just results from the selective testing of finished
products. Thus, a more realistic estimate of the microbial quality of a batch of tablets
would be achieved from a knowledge of such parameters as the microbial bioburden of
the starting materials, temperature records from granule drying ovens, the moisture
level of the dried granules, compaction data, validation records for the foil strip sealing
machine and microbial levels in the finished tablets than from the contaminant content
of the finished tablets alone.
It may be necessary to exclude certain undesirable contaminants from starting
materials, such as pseudomonads from bulk aluminium hydroxide gel, or to include
pre-treatment to reduce overall bioburdens by irradiation, such as for ispaghula husk
and spices. For biotechnology-derived drugs produced in human or animal tissue culture,
considerable investigation is made to exclude cell lines contaminated with latent host
viruses. Official guidelines to limit the risk of prion contamination in medicines require
bovine-derived ingredients to be obtained from sources where bovine spongiform
encephalopathy (BSE) is not endemic.
If one considers manufacturing plant and its environs from the ecological and
physiological viewpoint of microorganisms it should be possible to identify areas where
370 Chapter 18
contaminants might accumulate and even thrive to create hazards for subsequent batches
of medicine, and then manipulate design and operating conditions to discourage such
colonization. The ability to clean and dry equipment thoroughly is a very useful deterrent
to growth. Design considerations must include the reductions of obscure nooks and
crannies and the ability to be able to clean thoroughly into all areas. Some larger
equipment now has cleansing-in-place (CIP) and sterilization-in-place (SIP) systems
installed in place to improve decontamination capabilities.
It may be necessary to include intermediate steps within processing to reduce the
bioburden and improve the efficiency of lethal sterilization cycles, or to prevent
swamping of the preservative in a non-sterile medicine after manufacture. With some
of the newer and fragile biotechnology-derived products processing may include
chromatographic and/or ultrafiltration stages to ensure adequate reductions of viral
contamination levels rather than conventional sterilization cycles.
In a validation exercise, it must be demonstrated that each stage of the system is
capable of providing the degree of intended efficiency within the limits of variation for
which it was designed. Microbial spoilage aspects of process validation might include
examination of the cleaning system for its ability to remove deliberately introduced
contamination. Chromatographic removal of viral contaminants would be validated by
determining the log reduction achievable against a known titre of added viral particles.
3.4 Quality control procedures
Whilst there is general agreement on the need to control total microbial levels in non-
sterile medicines and to exclude certain species which have proved troublesome
previously, the precision and accuracy of current methods for counting (or even
detecting) some microbes in complex products is poor. Acute pathogens, present in
low numbers, and often damaged by processing, can be very difficult to isolate. Products
showing active spoilage can yield surprisingly low viable counts on testing; although
present in high numbers, a particular organism may be neither pathogenic nor the primary
spoilage agent, but may be relatively inert, e.g. ungerminated spores or a secondary
contaminant which has outgrown the initiating spoiler. Very unevenly distributed growth
in viscous formulations will present serious sampling problems. The type of culture
media (even different batches of the same media) and conditions of incubation may
greatly influence any viable counts obtained from products.
A major problem is that of when to sample. If an antacid suspension contains, say,
two pseudomonad cells per 100 cm shortly after manufacture does this represent a
spoilage hazard? If they die out slowly as a consequence of the preservative present
then it might not, but if on the other hand they grow slowly during storage over a year
levels might be attained when spoilage will be significant.
Recognizing these problems, UK food regulatory authorities have generally
abandoned the use of quantitative microbial counts as enforceable standards of food
quality. Despite this, the European Pharmacopoeia has introduced both quantitative
and qualitative microbial standards for non-sterile medicines, which might become
enforceable in some member states. It prescribes varying maximum total microbial
levels and exclusions of particular species according the routes of administration. The
British Pharmacopoeia has now included these tests, but suggest they should be used
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 371
to assist in validating GPMP processing procedures and not as conformance standards
for routine end-product testing. Thus, for a medicine to be administered orally, there
should not be more than 10 aerobic bacteria or more than 10' fungi per gram or cm of
product, and there should be an absence of Escherichia coli. Higher levels may be
permissible if the product contains raw materials of natural origin.
Most manufacturers perform periodic tests on their products for total microbial
bioburden and for the presence of known problem microorganisms, to be used for in-
house confirmation of the continuing efficiency of their GPMP systems, rather than as
conventional end-product conformance tests. Fluctuation in values, or the appearance
of specific and unusual species, can warn of defects in procedure and impending
problems.
In order to reduce the costs of testing and shorten quarantine periods, there is
considerable interest in alternatives to conventional test methods for the detection and
determination of microorganisms, preferably which could be automated. Although none
would appear to be in widespread use at present, some of promise include electrical
impedance, microcalorimetry, use of fluorescent dyes and epi-fluorescence, and the
use of 'vital' stains. Considerable advances in the sensitivity of methods for estimating
microbial adenosine triphosphate (ATP) using luciferase now allows the estimation of
extremely low bioburdens. The recent development of highly sensitive laser scanning
devices for detecting bacteria variously labelled with selective fluorescent probes enable
the apparent detection even of single cells.
Endotoxin (pyrogen) levels in parenteral and similar products must be phenomenally
low in order to prevent serious endotoxic shock on administration. Formerly, this was
checked by injecting rabbits and noting any febrile response. Most determinations
are now performed using the Limulus test in which an amoebocyte lysate from the
horse-shoe crab (Limulus polyphemus) reacts extremely specifically with microbial
lipopolysaccharides to give a gel and opacification even at very high dilutions. A variant
of the test using a chromogenic substrate gives a coloured end-point which can be
detected spectroscopically . Tissue culture tests are under development where the ability
of endotoxins to directly induce cytokine release is measured.
Sophisticated and very sensitive methods have been developed in the food industry
for detecting many other microbial toxins. For example, aflatoxin detection in seedstuffs
and their oils is performed by solvent extraction, adsorption onto columns containing
selective antibodies for them, and detected by exposure to ultraviolet light.
Although it would be unusual to test for signs of active physico-chemical or chemical
spoilage of products as part of routine quality control procedures for medicines, this
may be necessary in order to examine an incident of anticipated product failure, or
during formulation development. Many volatile and unpleasant-tasting metabolites are
generated during active spoilage which are readily apparent. Their characterization by
HPLC or GC can be used to distinguish microbial spoilage from other, non-biological
deterioration. Spoilage often results in physico-chemical changes which can be
monitored by conventional methods. Thus, emulsion spoilage may be followed by
monitoring changes in creaming rates, pH changes, particle sedimentation and viscosity.
Post-market surveillance
Despite extensive development and a rigorous adherence to procedures, one cannot
guarantee absolutely that a medicine will never fail under the harsh abuses of real-life
usage. A proper quality assurance system must include procedures for monitoring in-
use performance and for responding to customer complaints. These must be followed
up in great detail in order to decide whether one's carefully constructed schemes for
product safety require modification, to prevent the incident recurring.
Further reading
The chapter sections to which each reference is particularly relevant are indicated in parentheses at the
end of the reference, although this section is also intended as a general suggestion of routes to material
for those who wish to develop the topic in more detail.
Anon. (1997) Rules and Guidance for Pharmaceutical Manufacturers. London: The Stationery Office
and Distributors. (3)
Attwood D. & Florence A.T. (1983) Surfactant Systems, Their Chemistry, Pharmacy and Biology.
London: Chapman & Hall. (2.3.2)
Bloomfield S.F. & Baird R. (eds) (1996) Microbial Quality Assurance in Pharmaceuticals, Cosmetics
and Toiletries, 2nd edn. Chichester: Ellis Horwood. (3)
Brannan D.K. (1995) Cosmetic preservation. J Soc Cosmet Chem, 46, 199-220. (2)
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) Appendix XVIC: Efficacy of Antimicrobial Preservation, A191-A192,
(and BP 1993, 1995 Addendum; Appendix XVIIF, A407). London: HMSO. (3.2)
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) Appendix XVIB: Tests for Microbial Contamination, A184-A190 (and
BP 1993, 1995 Addendum, Appendix XIV B, A405-A406). London: HMSO. (3.4)
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) (1996 Addendum) Introduction: Microbial Contamination, ixxxiii, and
Appendix XVI D: Microbial Quality of Pharmaceutical Preparations, A519. London: HMSO.
(3.4)
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) Appendix XVI A: Test for Sterility, A180-A184. London: HMSO. (3.4)
Denyer S. & Baird R. (eds) (1990) Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood. (3)
Gould G.W. (ed.) (1989) Mechanisms of Action of Food Preservation Procedures. Barking: Elsevier
Science Publishers. (2)
Hugo W.B. (1995) A brief history of heat, chemical and radiation preservation and disinfectants. Intl
Biodet Biodeg, 36, 197-217.
Martidale The Extra Pharmacopoeia, 31st edn. (1996) Disinfectants and Preservatives pp. 1111-11 49.
London: The Royal Pharmaceutical Society. (2)
Russell A.D., Hugo W.B. & Ayliffe G.A.J, (eds) (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications. (2)
Stebbing L. (1993) Quality Assurance: The Route to Efficiency and Competitiveness, 2nd edn. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood. (3)
Microbial spoilage and preservation of pharmaceutical products 373
Contamination of non-sterile
pharmaceuticals in hospital and
community environments
Introduction
4
The extent of microbial contamination
4.1
Contamination in manufacture
The significance of microbial
4.2
Contamination in use
contamination
2.1
Spoilage
5
Factors determining the outcome of a
2.2
Hazard to health
medicament-borne infection
5.1
Type and degree of microbial
3
Sources of contamination
contamination
3.1
In manufacture
5.2
The route of administration
3.1.1
Water
5.3
Resistance of the patient
3.1.2
Environment
3.1.3
Packaging
6
Prevention and control of
3.2
In use
contamination
3.2.1
Human sources
3.2.2
Environmental sources
7
Further reading
3.2.3
Equipment sources
Introduction
Pharmaceutical products are used in a variety of ways in the prevention, treatment and
diagnosis of disease. In recent years, manufacturers of pharmaceuticals have improved
the quality of non-sterile products such that today the majority contain only a minimal
microbial population. Nevertheless, a few rogue products with an unacceptable level
and type of contamination will occasionally escape the quality control net and when
used may, ironically, contribute to the spread of disease in patients.
Although the occurrence of product contamination has been well documented in
medical literature, the significance for the patient has not always been clear. Evidence
accumulated in the past 30 years or so has, however, enabled a better understanding of
why and how contamination occurs, its extent and frequency, the factors determining
the outcome for the patient and finally what preventive steps may be taken to control
the problems.
The significance of microbial contamination
Spoilage
It has been known for many years that microbial contaminants may effect the spoilage
of pharmaceutical products through chemical, physical or aesthetic changes in the nature
of the product, thereby rendering it unfit for use (see Chapter 18). Active drug
constituents may be metabolized to less potent or chemically inactive forms. Physical
changes commonly seen are the breakdown of emulsions, visible surface growth on
solids and the formation of slimes, pellicles or sediments in liquids, sometimes
accompanied by the production of gas, odours or unwanted flavours, thereby rendering
the product unacceptable and possibly even dangerous to the patient. It may, indeed,
affect patient compliance with the prescribed course of therapy. Finally, spoilage and
subsequent wastage of a product have serious economic implications for the
manufacturer.
2.2
Hazard to health
Nowadays, it is well recognized that a contaminated pharmaceutical product may also
present a potential health hazard to the patient. Although isolated outbreaks of
medicament-related infections have been reported since the early part of this century, it
is only in the past three decades or so that the significance of this contamination to the
patient has been more fully understood. Recognition of these infections presents its
own problems. It is a fortunate hospital physician who can, at an early stage, recognize
contamination manifest as a cluster of infections of rapid onset, such as that following
the use of a contaminated intravenous fluid in a hospital ward. The chances of a general
practitioner recognizing a medicament-related infection of insidious onset, perhaps
spread over several months, in a diverse group of patients in the community, are much
more remote. Once recognized, there is of course a moral obligation to withdraw the
offending product, and subsequent investigations of the incidence therefore become
retrospective.
Pharmaceutical products of widely differing forms are susceptible to contamination
by a variety of microorganisms, as shown by a few examples given in Table 19.1.
Disinfectants, antiseptics, powders, tablets and other products providing an inhospitable
Table 19.1 Contaminants found in pharmaceutical products
Year
Product
Contaminant
1907
Plague vaccine
Clostridium tetani
1943
Fluorescein eye-drops
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
1946
Talcum powder
Clostridium tetani
1948
Serum vaccine
Staphylococcus aureus
1955
Chloroxylenol disinfectant
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
1966
Thyroid tablets
Salmonella muenchen
1966
Antibiotic eye ointment
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
1966
Saline solution
Serratia marcescens
1967
Carmine powder
Salmonella cubana
1967
Hand cream
Klebsiella pneumoniae
1969
Peppermint water
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
1970
Chlorhexidine-cetrimide
antiseptic solution
Pseudomonas cepacia
1972
Intravenous fluids
Pseudomonas, Erwinia and Enterobacter spp.
1972
Pancreatin powder
Salmonella agona
1977
Contact-lens solution
Serratia and Enterobacter spp.
1981
Surgical dressings
Clostridium spp.
1982
lodophor solution
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
1983
Aqueous soap
Pseudomona stutzeri
1984
Thymol mouthwash
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
1986
Antiseptic mouthwash
Conforms
Contamination of non-sterile pharmaceuticals 375
environment to invading contaminants are known to be at risk, as well as products with
more nutritious components, such as creams and lotions with carbohydrates, amino
acids, vitamins and often appreciable quantities of water. Contaminants isolated from
products have ranged from true pathogens, such as CI. tetani, to opportunist pathogens,
such as Ps. aeruginosa and other free-living Gram-negative organisms, which are
capable of causing disease under special circumstances. The outcome of using a
contaminated product may vary from patient to patient, depending on the type and
degree of contamination and how the product is to be used. Undoubtedly the most
serious effects have been seen with contaminated injected products where generalized
bacteraemic shock and in some cases death of patients have been reported. More likely,
a wound or sore in broken skin may become locally infected or colonized by the
contaminant; this may in turn result in extended hospital bed occupancy, with ensuing
economic consequences. It must be stressed, however, that the majority of cases of
medicament-related infections are probably not recognized or reported as such.
Sources of contamination
3.1 In manufacture
The same principles of contamination control apply whether manufacture takes place
in industry (Chapter 17) or on a smaller scale in the hospital pharmacy. As discussed in
Chapter 22, quality must be built into the product at all stages of the process and not
simply assessed at the end of manufacture; (i) raw materials, particularly water and
those of animal origin, must be of a high microbiological standard; (ii) all processing
equipment should be subject to planned preventive maintenance and should be properly
cleaned after use to prevent cross-contamination between batches; (iii) manufacture
should take place in suitable premises in a clean, tidy work area supplied with filtered
air; (iv) staff involved in manufacture should not only have good health but also a
sound knowledge of the importance of personal and production hygiene; and (v) the
end-product requires suitable packaging which will protect it from contamination during
its shelf -life and is itself free from contamination.
Manufacture in hospital premises raises certain additional problems with regard to
contamination control.
3.1.1 Water
Mains water in hospitals is frequently stored in large roof tanks, some of which may be
relatively inaccessible and poorly maintained. Water for pharmaceutical manufacture
requires some further treatment, usually by distillation, reverse osmosis (Chapter 17,
section 3.5) or deionization or a combination of these, depending on the intended use
of water. Such processes need careful monitoring, as does the microbiological quality
of the water after treatment. Storage of water requires particular care, since some Gram-
negative opportunist pathogens can survive on traces of organic matter present in treated
water and will readily multiply at room temperature; water should therefore be stored
at a temperature in excess of 80°C and circulated in the distribution system at a flow
rate of l-2m/sec to prevent the build-up of bacterial biofilms in the piping.
376 Chapter 19
3.1.2 Environment
The microbial flora of the pharmacy environment is a reflection of the general hospital
environment and the activities undertaken there. Free-living opportunist pathogens,
such as Ps. aeruginosa can normally be found in all wet sites, such as drains, sinks and
taps. Cleaning equipment, such as mops, buckets, cloths and scrubbing machines, may
be responsible for distributing these organisms around the pharmacy; if stored wet
they provide a convenient niche for microbial growth, resulting in heavy contamination
of equipment. Contamination levels in the production environment may, however, be
minimized by observing good manufacturing practices, by installing heating traps in
sinkU-bends, thus destroying one of the main reservoirs of contaminants, and by proper
maintenance and storage of equipment, including cleaning equipment. Additionally,
cleaning of production units by contractors should be carried out to a pharmaceutical
specification.
3.1.3 Packaging
Sacking, cardboard, card liners, corks and paper are unsuitable for packaging
pharmaceuticals, as they are heavily contaminated, for example with bacterial or
fungal spores. These have now been replaced by non-biodegradable plastic materials.
Packaging in hospitals is frequently re-used for economic reasons. Large numbers of
containers may be returned to the pharmacy, bringing with them microbial contaminants
introduced during use in the wards. Particular problems have been encountered in
the past with disinfectant solutions where residues of old stock have been 'topped
up' with fresh supplies, resulting in the issue of contaminated solutions to wards.
Re-usable containers must, therefore, be thoroughly washed and dried, and never
refilled directly.
Another common practice in hospitals is the repackaging of products purchased in
bulk into smaller containers. Increased handling of the product inevitably increases the
risk of contamination, as shown by one survey when hospital-repacked items were
found to be contaminated twice as often as those in the original pack (Public Health
Laboratory Service Report 1971).
3.2 In use
Pharmaceutical manufacturers may justly argue that their responsibility ends with
the supply of a well-preserved product of high microbiological standard in a
suitable pack and that the subsequent use, or indeed abuse, of the product is of
little concern to them. Although much less is known about how products become
contaminated during use, there is reasonable evidence that continued use of such products
is undesirable, particularly in hospitals where it may result in the spread of cross-
infection.
All multidose products are subject to contamination from a number of sources
during use. The sources of contamination are the same whether products are used in
hospital or in the community environment, but opportunities for observing it are, of
course, greater in the former.
Contamination of non-sterile pharmaceuticals 377
3.2.1
Human sources
During normal usage, the patient may contaminate his/her medicine with his/her
own microbial flora; subsequent use of the product may or may not result in self-
infection (Fig. 19.1). Topical products are considered to be most at risk, since the
product will probably be applied by hand thus introducing contaminants from the
resident skin flora of staphylococci, Micrococcus spp. and diphtheroids but also perhaps
transient contaminants, such as Pseudomonas, which would normally be removed during
effective handwashing. Opportunities for contamination may be reduced by using
disposable applicators for topical products or by taking oral products by disposable
spoon.
In hospitals, multidose products, once contaminated, may serve as a vehicle of
cross-contamination or cross-infection between patients. Zinc-based products packed
in large stock-pots and used in the treatment and prevention of bed-sores in long-stay
and geriatric patients may become contaminated during use with organisms such as
Ps. aeruginosa and Staphylococcus aureus. These unpreserved products will allow
multiplication of contaminants, especially if water is present either as part of the
formulation, for example in oil/water (o/w) emulsions, as a film in w/o emulsions
which have undergone local cracking, or as a condensed film from atmospheric water,
and appreciable numbers may then be transferred to other patients when re-used. Clearly
the economics and convenience of using stock-pots need to be balanced against the
risk of spreading cross-infection between patients and the inevitable increase in length
of the patients' stay in hospital. The use of stock-pots in hospitals has noticeably declined
over the past decade or so.
A further potential source of contamination in hospitals is the nursing staff
responsible for medicament administration. During the course of their work, nurses'
hands become contaminated with opportunist pathogens which are not part of the normal
skin flora but are easily removed by thorough handwashing and drying. In busy wards,
handwashing between attending to patients may be omitted and any contaminants may
subsequently be transferred to medicaments during administration. Hand lotions and
creams used to prevent chapping of nurses' hands may similarly become contaminated,
especially when packaged in multidose containers and left at the side of the handbasin,
frequently without a lid. The importance of thorough handwashing cannot be over-
emphasized in the control of hospital cross-infection. Hand lotions and creams should
be well preserved and, ideally, packaged in disposable dispensers. Other effective control
methods include the supply of products in individual patient's packs and the use of a
non-touch technique for medicament administration.
1. SalMnfuDiimi
PfltiBFit =r^** Medicine
2. Cross-infection
Patiant X ^ ■ ^ Medicine-
\
+ Patient v r z
/
Niirsos" tiancfe
Fig. I9rl Mcthaiuana uf
contamination -diving wtt-uf
medicinal products.
378 Chapter 19
3.2.2 Environmental sources
Small numbers of airborne contaminants may settle out in products left open to the
atmosphere. Some of these will die during storage, with the rest probably remaining
at a static level of about 10-10 colony forming units (cfu) g~ or ml" . Larger
numbers of water-borne contaminants may be accidentally introduced into topical
products by wet hands or by a 'splash-back mechanism', if left at the side of a basin.
Such contaminants generally have simple nutritional requirements and, following
multiplication, levels of contamination may often exceed 10 6 cfug~' or ml' 1 . This
problem is encountered particularly when the product is stored in warm hospital wards
or in hot steamy bathroom cupboards at home. Products used in hospitals as soap
substitutes for bathing patients are particularly at risk, and soon not only become
contaminated with opportunist pathogens such as Pseudomonas spp., but also provide
conditions conducive for their multiplication. The problem is compounded by using
stocks in multidose pots for use by several patients in the same ward over an extended
period of time.
The indigenous microbial population is quite different in the home and in hospitals.
Pathogenic organisms are found much more frequently in the latter and consequently
are isolated more often from medicines used in hospital. Usually, there are fewer
opportunities for contamination in the home, as patients are generally issued with
individual supplies in small quantities.
3.2.3 Equipment sources
Patients and nursing staff may use a range of applicators (pads, sponges, brushes,
spatulas) during medicament administration, particularly for topical products. If re-
used, these easily become contaminated and may be responsible for perpetuating
contamination between fresh stocks of product, as has indeed been shown in
studies of cosmetic products. Disposable applicators or swabs should therefore always
be used.
In hospitals today a wide variety of complex equipment is used in the course
of patient treatment. Humidifiers, incubators, ventilators, resuscitators and other
apparatus require proper maintenance and decontamination after use. Chemical
disinfectants used for this purpose have in the past through misuse become contaminated
with opportunist pathogens, such as Ps. aeruginosa, and ironically have contributed
to, rather than reduced, the spread of cross-infection in hospital patients. Disinfectants
should only be used for their intended purpose and directions for use must be followed
at all times.
The extent of microbial contamination
Detailed examination of reports in the literature of medicament-borne contamination
reveals that the majority of these are anecdotal in nature, referring to a specific product
and isolated incident. Little information is available, however, as to the overall risk of
products becoming contaminated and causing patient infections when subsequently
used. As with risk analysis in food microbiology (assessment of the hazards of
Contamination of non-sterile pharmaceuticals 379
consumption of a contaminated preparation) this information is considered invaluable
not only because it indicates the effectiveness of existing practices and standards, but
also because the value of potential improvements in quality from a patient's point of
view can be balanced against the inevitable cost of such processes. Thus, the old
argument that all pharmaceutical products, regardless of their use, should be produced
as sterile products, although sound in principle, is kept in perspective by the fact that it
cannot be justified on economic grounds alone.
Contamination in manufacture
Investigations carried out by the Swedish National Board of Health in 1965 revealed
some startling findings on the overall microbiological quality immediately after
manufacture of non-sterile products made in Sweden. A wide range of products was
routinely found to be contaminated with Bacillus subtilis, Staph, albus, yeasts and
moulds, and in addition large numbers of coliforms were found in a variety of tablets.
Furthermore, two nationwide outbreaks of infection were subsequently traced to the
inadvertent use of contaminated products. Two hundred patients were involved in an
outbreak of salmonellosis, caused by thyroid tablets contaminated with Salmonella
bareilly and Sal. muenchen; and eight patients had severe eye infections following
the use of hydrocortisone eye ointment contaminated with Ps. aeruginosa. The results
of this investigation have not only been used as a yardstick for comparing the
microbiological quality of non-sterile products made in other countries, but also as a
baseline upon which international standards could be founded.
In the UK, the microbiological and chemical quality of pharmaceutical products
made by industry has since been governed by the Medicines Act 1968. The majority of
products have been found to be made to a high standard, although spot checks have
occasionally revealed medicines of unacceptable quality and so necessitated product
recall. By contrast, the manufacture of pharmaceutical products in hospitals has in the
past been much less rigorously controlled, as shown by the results of surveys in the
1970s in which significant numbers of preparations were found to be contaminated
with Ps. aeruginosa. In 1974, hospital manufacture also came under the terms of the
Medicines Act and, as a consequence, considerable improvements have been seen in
recent years not only in the conditions and standard of manufacture, but also in the
chemical and microbiological quality of finished products.
Furthermore, in the past decade hospital manufacturing operations have been
rationalized. Economic restraints have resulted in a critical evaluation of the true cost
of these activities; competitive purchasing from industry has in many cases produced
cheaper alternatives and small-scale manufacturing has been largely discouraged. Where
licensed products are available, NHS policy now dictates that these are purchased from
a commercial source and not made locally. Hospital manufacturing is at present
concentrated on the supply of bespoke products from a regional centre or small-scale
specialist manufacture of those items currently unobtainable from industry. Repacking
of commercial products into more convenient pack sizes is still, however, common
practice.
Removal of Crown immunity from the NHS in 1991 meant that manufacturing
operations in hospitals were then subject to the full licensing provisions of the Medicines
Act 1968, i.e. hospital pharmacies intending to manufacture were required to obtain a
manufacturing licence and to comply fully with the EC Guide to Good Pharmaceutical
Manufacturing Practice (1989, revised in 1992); amongst other requirements, this
included the use of appropriate environmental manufacturing conditions and associated
environmental monitoring. Subsequently, the Medicines Control Agency (MCA) issued
guidance in 1992 on certain manufacturing exemptions, by virtue of the product batch
size or frequency of manufacture. At the same time the need for extemporaneous
dispensing of 'one-off special formulae continues in hospital pharmacies today, although
this work has largely been transferred from the dispensing bench to dedicated preparative
facilities with appropriate environmental control.
Contamination in use
Higher rates of contamination are invariably seen in products after opening and use,
and, amongst these, medicines used in hospitals are more likely to be contaminated
than those used in the general community. The Public Health Laboratory Service Report
of 1971 expressed concern at the overall incidence of contamination in non-sterile
products used on hospital wards (327 of 1220 samples) and the proportion of samples
found to be heavily contaminated (18% in excess of 10 4 cfug ' or ml" 1 ). The presence
of Ps. aeruginosa in 2.7% of samples (mainly oral alkaline mixtures) was considered
to be highly undesirable.
By contrast, medicines used in the home are not only less often contaminated but
also contain lower levels of contaminants and fewer pathogenic organisms. Generally,
there are fewer opportunities for contamination here since smaller quantities are used
by individual patients. Medicines in the home may, however, be hoarded and used for
extended periods of time. Additionally, storage conditions may be unsuitable and expiry
dates ignored and thus problems other than those of microbial contamination may be
seen in the home.
Factors determining the outcome of a
medicament-borne infection
A patient's response to the microbial challenge of a contaminated medicine may be
diverse and unpredictable, perhaps with serious consequences. In one patient, no clinical
reactions may be evident, yet in another these may be indisputable, illustrating one
problem in the recognition of medicament-borne infections. Clinical reactions may
range from inconvenient local infections of wounds or broken skin, caused possibly
from contact with a contaminated cream, to gastrointestinal infections from the ingestion
of contaminated oral products, to serious widespread infections, such as a bacteraemia
or septicaemia, leading perhaps to death, as have resulted from infusion of contaminated
fluids. Undoubtedly, the most serious outbreaks of infection have been seen in the past
where contaminated products have been injected directly into the bloodstream of patients
whose immunity is already compromised by their underlying disease or therapy. The
outcome of any episode is determined by a combination of several factors, amongst
which the type and degree of microbial contamination, the route of administration and
the patient's resistance are of particular importance.
Contamination of non-sterile pharmaceuticals 381
5.1 Type and degree of microbial contamination
Microorganisms that contaminate medicines and cause disease in patients may be
classified as true pathogens or opportunist pathogens. Pathogenic organisms like
Clostridium tetani and Salmonella spp. rarely occur in products, but when present
cause serious problems. Wound infections from using contaminated dusting powders
have been reported, including several cases of neonatal death from talcum powder
containing CI. tetani. Outbreaks of salmonellosis have followed the inadvertent ingestion
of contaminated thyroid and pancreatic powders. On the other hand, opportunist
pathogens like Ps. aeruginosa, Klebsiella, Serratia and other free-living organisms
are more frequently isolated from medicinal products and, as their name suggests,
may be pathogenic if given the opportunity. The main concern with these organisms is
that their simple nutritional requirements enable them to survive in a wide range of
pharmaceuticals, and thus they tend to be present in high numbers, perhaps in excess
of 10 6 -10 7 cfug m or ml" 1 ; nevertheless, the product itself may show no visible sign of
contamination. Opportunist pathogens can survive in disinfectants and antiseptic
solutions which are normally used in the control of hospital cross-infection but which
when contaminated may even perpetuate the spread of infection. Compromised hospital
patients, i.e. the elderly, burned, traumatized or immunosuppressed, are considered to
be particularly at risk from infection with these organisms, whereas healthy patients in
the general community have given little cause for concern.
The critical dose of microorganisms which will initiate an infection is largely
unknown and varies not only between species but also within a species. Animal and
human volunteer studies have indicated that the infecting dose may be reduced
significantly in the presence of trauma or foreign bodies or if accompanied by a drug
having a local vasoconstrictive action.
5.2 The route of administration
As stated previously, contaminated products injected directly into the bloodstream or
instilled into the eye cause the most serious problems. Intrathecal and epidural injections
are potentially hazardous procedures. In practice, epidural injections are frequently
given through a bacterial filter. Injectable and ophthalmic solutions are often simple
solutions and provide Gram-negative opportunist pathogens with sufficient nutrients
to multiply during storage; if contaminated, numbers in excess of 10 cfti and endotoxins
should be expected. Total parenteral nutrition fluids, formulated for individual patients'
nutritional requirements, can also provide more than adequate nutritional support for
invading contaminants. Pseudomonas aeruginosa, the notorious contaminant of eye-
drops, has caused serious ophthalmic infections, including the loss of sight in some
cases. The problem is compounded when the eye is damaged through the improper use
of contact lenses or scratched by fingernails or cosmetic applicators.
The fate of contaminants ingested orally in medicines may be determined by several
factors, as is seen with contaminated food. The acidity of the stomach may provide a
successful barrier, depending on whether the medicine is taken on an empty or full
stomach and also on the gastric emptying time. Contaminants in topical products may
cause little harm when deposited on intact skin. Not only does the skin itself provide an
382 Chapter 19
excellent mechanical barrier but, furthermore, few contaminants normally survive in
competition with its resident microbial flora. Skin damaged during surgery or trauma
or in patients with burns or pressure sores may, however, be rapidly colonized and
subsequently infected by opportunist pathogens. Patients treated with topical steroids
are also prone to local infections, particularly if contaminated steroid drugs are
inadvertently used.
Resistance of the patient
A patient's resistance is crucial in determining the outcome of a medicament-borne
infection. Hospital patients are more exposed and susceptible to infection than
those treated in the general community. Neonates, the elderly, diabetics and patients
traumatized by surgery or accident may have impaired defence mechanisms. People
suffering from leukaemia and those treated with immunosuppressants are most
vulnerable to infection; there is a strong case for providing all medicines in a sterile
form for these patients.
Prevention and control of contamination
Prevention is undoubtedly better than cure in minimizing the risk of medicament-borne
infections. In manufacture the principles of good manufacturing practice must be
observed, and control measures must be built in at all stages. Initial stability tests should
show that the proposed formulation can withstand an appropriate microbial challenge;
raw materials from an authorized supplier should comply with in-house microbial
specifications; environmental conditions, appropriate to the production process, require
regular microbiological monitoring; finally, end-product analysis should indicate that
the product is microbiologically suitable for its intended use and conforms to accepted
in-house and international standards.
Based on present knowledge, contaminants, by virtue of their type or number, should
not present a potential health hazard to patients when used.
Contamination during use is less easily controlled. Successful measures in the
hospital pharmacy have included the packaging of products as individual units, thereby
discouraging the use of multidose containers. Unit packaging (one dose per patient)
has clear advantages, but economic constraints prevent this desirable procedure from
being realized. Ultimately, the most fruitful approach is through the training and
education of patients and hospital staff, so that medicines are used only for their intended
purpose. The task of implementing this approach inevitably rests with the clinical and
community pharmacists of the future.
Further reading
Baird R.M. (1981) Drugs and cosmetics. In: Microbial Biodeterio rat ion (ed. A.H. Rose), pp. 387-426.
London: Academic Press.
Baird R.M. (1985) Microbial contamination of pharmaceutical products made in a hospital pharmacy.
PharmJ, 234, 54-55.
Baird R.M. (1985) Microbial contamination of non- sterile pharmaceutical products made in hospitals
in the North East Regional Health Authority. J Clin Hosp Pharm, 10, 95-100.
Contamination of non-sterile pharmaceuticals 383
Baird R.M. & Shooter R.A. (1976) Pseudomonas aeruginosa infections associated with the use of
contaminated medicaments. Br Med J, 2, 349-350.
Baird R.M., Brown W.R.L. & Shooter R.A. (1976) Pseudomonas aeruginosa in hospital pharmacies.
BrMedJ, 1,511-512.
Baird R.M., Elhag K.M. & Shaw E.J. (1976) Pseudomonas thomasii in a hospital distilled water supply.
J Med Microbiol, 9, 493-495.
Baird R.M., Parks A. & Awad Z.A. (1977) Control of Pseudomonas aeruginosa in pharmacy
environments and medicaments. Pharm J, 119, 164-165.
Baird R.M., Crowden C.A., O'Farrell S.M. & Shooter R.A. (1979) Microbial contamination of
pharmaceutical products in the home. J Hyg, 83, 277-283.
Baird R.M. & Bloomfield S.F.L. (eds) (1996) Microbial Quality Assurance of Cosmetics, Toiletries
and Non-sterile Pharmaceuticals. London: Taylor and Francis.
Bassett D.C.J. (1971) Causes and prevention of sepsis due to Gram-negative bacteria: common sources
of outbreaks. ProcRSocMed, 64, 980-986.
Crompton D.O. (1962) Ophthalmic prescribing. A ustralas J Pharm, 43, 1020-1028.
Denyer S.P. & Baird R.M. (eds) (1990) Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood.
EC Guide to Good Manufacturing Practice (1992).
Hills S. (1946) The isolation of CI. tetani from infected talc. NZMedJ, 45, 419-423.
Kallings L.O., Ringertz O., Silverstolpe L. & Ernerfeldt F. (1966) Microbiological contamination of
medicinal preparations. 1965 Report to the Swedish National Board of Health. Acta Pharm Suecica,
3,219-228.
Maurer I.M. (1985) Hospital Hygiene, 3rd edn. London: Edward Arnold.
Meers P.D., Calder M.W., Mazhar M.M. & Lawrie G.M. (1973) Intravenous infusion of contaminated
dextrose solution: the Devonport incident. Lancet, ii, 1 189-1 192.
Morse L.J., Williams H.I., Grenn F.P., Eldridge E.F. & Rotta J.R. (1967) Septicaemia due to Klebsiella
pneumoniae originating from a handcream dispenser. N Engl J Med, 217, 472-473.
Myers G.E. & Pasutto F.M. (1973) Microbial contamination of cosmetics and toiletries. Can J Pharm
Sci, 8, 19-23.
Noble W.C. & Savin J. A. (1966) Steroid cream contaminated with Pseudomonas aeruginosa. Lancet,
i f 347-349.
Parker M.T. (1972) The clinical significance of the presence of microorganisms in pharmaceutical and
cosmetic preparations. JSoc Cosm Chem, 23, 415-426.
Report of the Public Health Laboratory Service Working Party (1971) Microbial contamination of
medicines administered to hospital patients. Pharm J, 207, 96-99.
Russell A.D., Hugo W.G. & Ayliffe G.A.J, (eds) (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Smart R. & Spooner D.F. (1972) Microbiological spoilage in pharmaceuticals and cosmetics. / Soc
Cosm Chem, 23, 721-737 .
Principles and practice of sterilization
1
Introduction
2
Sensitivity of microorganisms
2.1
Survivor curves
2.2
Expressions of resistance
2.2.1
D-value
2.2.2
z-value
2.3
Sterility assurance
Sterilization methods
4
Heat sterilization
4.1
Sterilization process
4.2
Moist heat sterilization
4.2.1
Steam as a sterilizing agent
4.2.2
Sterilizer design and operation
4.3
Dry heat sterilization
4.3.1
Sterilizer design
4.3.2
Sterilizer operation
5
Gaseous sterilization
5.1
Ethylene oxide
5.1.1 Sterilizer design and operation
5.2 Formaldehyde
5.2.1 Sterilizer design and operation
6 Radiation sterilization
6.1 Sterilizer design and operation
6.1.1 Gamma-ray sterilizers
6.1.2 Electron accelerators
6.1.3 Ultraviolet irradiation
7
Filtration sterilization
7.1
Filtration sterilization of liquids
7.2
Filtration sterilization of gases
8
Conclusions
9
Acknowledgements
10
Appendix
11
Further reading
Introduction
Sterilization is an essential stage in the processing of any product destined for parenteral
administration, or for contact with broken skin, mucosal surfaces or internal organs,
where the threat of infection exists. In addition, the sterilization of microbiological
materials, soiled dressings and other contaminated items is necessary to minimize the
health hazard associated with these articles.
Sterilization processes involve the application of a biocidal agent or physical
microbial removal process to a product or preparation with the object of killing or
removing all microorganisms. These processes may involve elevated temperature,
reactive gas, irradiation or filtration through a microorganism-proof filter. The success
of the process depends upon a suitable choice of treatment conditions, e.g. temperature
and duration of exposure. It must be remembered, however, that with all articles to be
sterilized there is a potential risk of product damage, which for a pharmaceutical
preparation may result in reduced therapeutic efficacy or patient acceptability. Thus,
there is a need to achieve a balance between the maximum acceptable risk of failing to
achieve sterility and the maximum level of product damage which is acceptable. This
is best determined from a knowledge of the properties of the sterilizing agent, the
properties of the product to be sterilized and the nature of the likely contaminants. A
suitable sterilization process may then be selected to ensure maximum microbial kill/
removal with minimum product deterioration.
Principles and practice of sterilization 385
1 Sensitivity of microorganisms
The general pattern of resistance of microorganisms to biocidal sterilization processes
is independent of the type of agent employed (heat, radiation or gas), with vegetative
forms of bacteria and fungi, along with the larger viruses, showing a greater sensitivity
to sterilization processes than small viruses and bacterial or fungal spores. The choice
of suitable reference organisms for testing the efficiency of sterilization processes (see
Chapter 23) is therefore made from the most durable bacterial spores, usually represented
by Bacillus stearothermophilus for moist heat, certain strains of B. subtilis for dry heat
and gaseous sterilization, and B. pumilus for ionizing radiation.
Ideally, when considering the level of treatment necessary to achieve sterility a
knowledge of the type and total number of microorganisms present in a product, together
with their likely response to the proposed treatment, is necessary. Without this
information, however, it is usually assumed that organisms within the load are no more
resistant than the reference spores or than specific resistant product isolates. In the
latter case, it must be remembered that resistance may be altered or lost entirely by
laboratory subculture and the resistance characteristics of the maintained strain must
be regularly checked.
A sterilization process may thus be developed without a full microbiological
background to the product, instead being based on the ability to deal with a 'worst
case' condition. This is indeed the situation for official sterilization methods which
must be capable of general application, and modern pharmacopoeial recommendations
are derived from a careful analysis of experimental data on bacterial spore survival
following treatments with heat, ionizing radiation or gas.
However, the infectious agents responsible for spongiform encephalopathies such
as bovine spongiform encehalopathy (BSE) and Creutzfeldt- Jacob disease (CJD) exhibit
exceptional degrees of resistance to all known lethal agents. Recent work has even cast
doubts on the adequacy of the process of 18min exposure to steam at 134-138°C
which has been officially recommended for the destruction of these agents (and which
far exceeds the lethal treatment required to achieve adequate destruction of bacterial
spores).
2.1 Survivor curves
When exposed to a killing process, populations of microorganisms generally lose their
viability in an exponential fashion, independent of the initial number of organisms.
This can be represented graphically with a 'survivor curve' drawn from a plot of the
logarithm of the fraction of survivors against the exposure time or dose (Fig. 20. 1). Of
the typical curves obtained, all have a linear portion which may be continuous (plot A),
or may be modified by an initial shoulder (B) or by a reduced rate of kill at low survivor
levels (C). Furthermore, a short activation phase, representing an initial increase in
viable count, may be seen during the heat treatment of certain bacterial spores. Survivor
curves have been employed principally in the examination of heat sterilization methods,
but can equally well be applied to any biocidal process.
386 Chapter 20
c
1?
>
Heating time or radiation dose
Fig. 20.1 Typical survivor
curves for bacterial spores
exposed to moist heat or
gamma-radiation.
Expressions of resistance
D-value
The resistance of an organism to a sterilizing agent can be described by means of the
D-value. For heat and radiation treatments, respectively, this is defined as the time
taken at a fixed temperature or the radiation dose required to achieve a 90% reduction
in viable cells (i.e. a 1 log cycle reduction in survivors; Fig. 20.2A). The calculation of
the D-value assumes a linear type A survivor curve (Fig. 20.1), and must be corrected
to allow for any deviation from linearity with type B or C curves. Some typical D-
values for resistant bacterial spores are given in Table 23.2 (Chapter 23).
z-value
For heat treatment, a D-value only refers to the resistance of a microorganism at a
particular temperature. In order to assess the influence of temperature changes on thermal
resistance a relationship between temperature and log D-value can be developed leading
to the expression of a z-value, which represents the increase in temperature needed to
reduce the D-value of an organism by 90% (i.e. 1 log cycle reduction; Fig. 20.2B). For
bacterial spores used as biological indicators for moist heat (B. stearothermophilus)
Principles and practice of sterilization 387
D-value
Time (minutes)
Cor rsdifltton dose]
FI&2A2 €s!«iLtttio« of: (\) t}-\alut; (B) i-raJue.
D-valua {minutes, log seal*)
and dry heat (B. subtilis) sterilization processes, mean z- values are given as 10°C and
22°C, respectively. The z-value is not truly independent of temperature but may be
considered essentially constant over the temperature ranges used in heat sterilization
processes.
2.3
Sterility assurance
The term 'sterile', in a microbiological context, means no surviving organisms
whatsoever. Thus, there are no degrees of sterility; an item is either sterile or it is not,
and so there are no levels of contamination which may be considered negligible or
insignificant and therefore acceptable.
From the survivor curves presented, it can be seen that the elimination of viable
microorganisms from a product is a time-dependent process, and will be influenced by
the rate and duration of biocidal action and the initial microbial contamination level. It
is also evident from Fig. 20. 2A that true sterility, represented by zero survivors, can
only be achieved after an infinite exposure period or radiation dose. Clearly, then, it is
illogical to claim, or expect, that a sterilization procedure will guarantee sterility. Thus,
the likelihood of a product being produced free of microorganisms is best expressed in
terms of the probability of an organism surviving the treatment process, a possibility
not entertained in the absolute term 'sterile'. From this approach has arisen the concept
of sterility assurance or a microbial safety index which gives a numerical value to the
probability of a single surviving organism remaining to contaminate a processed product.
For pharmaceutical products, the most frequently applied standard is that the probability,
post- sterilization, of a non-sterile unit is A l in 1 million units processed (i.e. =sl0~ ).
The sterilization protocol necessary to achieve this with any given organism of known
D-value can be established from the inactivation factor (IF) which may be defined as:
IF= 10
H:0
388 Chapter 20
Gl
2
n.
i me
Fig. 20.3 Sterility assurance. At Y, there is (literally) 10" bacterium in one bottle, i.e. in 10 loads of
single containers, there would be one chance in 10 that one load would be positive. Likewise, at Z,
there is (literally) 10 bacterium in one bottle, i.e. in 1 million (10 ) loads of single containers, there
is one chance in 1 million that one load would be positive.
where t is the contact time (for a heat or gaseous sterilization process) or dose (for
ionizing radiation) and D is the D-value appropriate to the process employed.
Thus, for an initial burden of 10 spores an inactivation factor of 10 will be needed
to give the required sterility assurance of 10' (Fig. 20.3). The sterilization process will
therefore need to produce sufficient lethality to achieve an 8 log cycle reduction in
viable organisms; this will require exposure of the product to eight times the D-value
of the reference organism (8D). In practice, it is generally assumed that the contaminant
will have the same resistance as the test spores unless full microbiological data are
available to indicate otherwise. The inactivation factors associated with certain
sterilization protocols and their biological indicator organisms (Chapter 23) are given
in Table 20.1.
Sterilization methods
The British Pharmacopoeia (1993) recognizes five methods for the sterilization of
pharmaceutical products. These are: (i) dry heat; (ii) heating in an autoclave (steam
sterilization); (iii) filtration; (iv) ethylene oxide gas; and (v) gamma or electron radiation.
In addition, other approaches involving steam and formaldehyde and ultraviolet (UV)
light have evolved for use in certain situations. For each method, the possible
permutations of exposure conditions are numerous, but experience and product stability
Principles and practice of sterilization 389
Table 20.1 Inactivation factors (IF) for selected sterilization protocols and their corresponding
biological indicator (Bl) organisms
Sterilization protocol Bl organism D-value IF
Moist heat B. stearothermophilus 1.5min 10
<121°Cfor 15 minutes)
Dry heat B. subtilis Max. 10min Min. 12
(160°Cfor2 hours) var. niger
Irradiation B. pumilus 3 kGy (0.3 Mrad) 8.3
(25kGy;2.5Mrad)
requirements have generally served to limit this choice. Nevertheless, it should be
remembered that even the recommended methods and regimens do not necessarily
demonstrate equivalent biocidal potential, but simply offer alternative strategies for
application to a wide variety of product types. Thus, each should be validated in their
application to demonstrate that the minimum required level of sterility assurance can
be achieved (section 2.3 and Chapter 23).
In the following sections, factors governing the successful use of these sterilizing
methods will be covered and their application to pharmaceutical and medical products
considered. Methods for monitoring the efficacy of these processes are discussed in
Chapter 23.
Heat sterilization
Heat is the most reliable and widely used means of sterilization, affording its
antimicrobial activity through destruction of enzymes and other essential cell
constituents. These lethal events proceed at their most rapid in a fully hydrated state,
thus requiring a lower heat input (temperature and time) under conditions of high
humidity where denaturation and hydrolysis reactions predominate, rather than in the
dry state where oxidative changes take place. This method of sterilization is limited to
thermostable products, but can be applied to both moisture-sensitive and moisture-
resistant products for which the British Pharmacopoeia (1993) recommends dry (160-
180°C) and moist (121-134°C) heat sterilization, respectively. Where thermal
degradation of a product might possibly occur, it can usually be minimized by selecting
the higher temperature range since the shorter exposure times employed generally result
in a lower fractional degradation.
4.1 Sterilization process
In any heat sterilization process, the articles to be treated must first be raised to
sterilization temperature and this involves a heating-up stage. In the traditional approach,
timing for the process (the holding time) then begins. It has been recognized, however,
that during both the heating-up and cooling-down stages of a sterilization cycle (Fig.
20.4), the product is held at an elevated temperature and these stages may thus contribute
to the overall biocidal potential of the process.
390 Chapter 20
tb
5
Or
E
Cooling gia^e
Time
Fig. 20.4 Typical temperature profile of a heat sterilization process.
A method has been devised to convert all the temperature-time combinations
occurring during the heating, sterilizing and cooling stages of a moist heat (steam)
sterilization cycle to the equivalent time at 121 °C. This involves following the
temperature profile of a load, integrating the heat input (as a measure of lethality), and
converting it to the equivalent time at the standard temperature of 121°C. Using this
approach the overall lethality of any process can be deduced and is defined as the F-
value, which expresses heat treatment at any temperature as equal to that of a certain
number of minutes at 121 °C. In other words, if a moist heat sterilization process has an
F- value of x, then it has the same lethal effect on a given organism as heating at 121 °C
for x minutes, irrespective of the actual temperature employed or of any fluctuations in
the heating process due to heating and cooling stages. The F- value of a process will
vary according to the moist heat resistance of the reference organism; when the reference
spore is that of B. stearothermophilus with a z- value of 10°C, then the F- value is known
as the F - value.
A relationship between F- and D-values, leading to an assessment of the probable
number of survivors in a load following heat treatment, can be established from the
following equation:
F = F>(log;V -logAO
in which D is the D- value at 121 °C, and iVo and N represent, respectively, the initial and
final number of viable cells per unit volume.
The F-concept has evolved from the food industry and principally relates to the
sterilization of articles by moist heat. Because it permits calculation of the extent to
which the heating and cooling phases contribute to the overall killing effect of the
autoclaving cycle, the F-concept enables a sterilization process to be individually
developed for a particular product. This means that adequate sterility assurance can be
achieved in autoclaving cycles in which the traditional pharmacopoeial recommendation
of 15 min at 121 Q C is not achieved. The holding time may be reduced below ,15 min if
there is a substantial killing effect during the heating and cooling phases, and an adequate
cycle can be achieved even if the 'target' temperature of 121 °C is not reached. Thus, F-
values offer both a means by which alternative sterilizing cycles can be compared in
terms of their microbial killing efficiency, and a mechanism by which over-processing
of marginally thermolabile products can be reduced without compromising sterility
Principles and practice of sterilization 391
assurance. They have found application in the sterilization of medical and pharmaceutical
products by moist heat where, for aqueous preparations, the British Pharmacopoeia
(1993) generally requires a minimum F -value of 8 from a steam sterilization process.
There is an apparent anomaly in that it also states that the 'preferred' combination
of temperature and time is a minimum of 121 °C maintained for 15 minutes, which, by
definition, equates to an F value of 15. The latter, however, is applicable where the
material to be sterilized may contain relatively large numbers of thermophilic bacterial
spores, and an F of 8 is appropriate for a 'microbiologically validated' process where
the bioburden is low and the spores likely to be present are those of (the generally more
heat sensitive) mesophilic species.
Fq values may be calculated either from the 'area under the curve' of a plot of
autoclave temperature against time constructed using special chart paper on which the
temperature scale is modified to take into account the progressively greater lethality of
higher temperatures, or by use of the equation below:
F = AtZW T -" ,A
where A? = time interval between temperature measurements; T = product temperature
at time t; z is (assumed to be) 10°C.
Thus, if temperatures were being recorded from a thermocouple at 1.00 minute
intervals then At= 1.00, and a temperature of, for example, 115°C maintained for
1 minute would give an Fq value of 1 minute x 10 (1 15 ~ 121)/10 which is equal to 0.251
minutes. In practice, such calculations could easily be performed on the data from
several thermocouples within an autoclave using PC-driven software, and, in a
manufacturing situation, these would be part of the batch records. Such a calculation
facility is offered as an optional extra by most autoclave manufacturers.
Application of the F- value concept has been largely restricted to steam sterilization
processes although there is a less frequently employed, but direct parallel in dry heat
sterilization (see section 4.3).
4.2 Moist heat sterilization
Moist heat has been recognized as an efficient biocidal agent from the early days of
bacteriology, when it was principally developed for the sterilization of culture media.
It now finds widespread application in the processing of many thermostable products
and devices. In the pharmaceutical and medical sphere it is used in the sterilization of
dressings, sheets, surgical and diagnostic equipment, containers and closures, and
aqueous injections, ophthalmic preparations and irrigation fluids, in addition to the
processing of soiled and contaminated items (Chapter 21).
Sterilization by moist heat usually involves the use of steam at temperatures in the
range 121-134°C, and while alternative strategies are available for the processing of
products unstable at these high temperatures, they rarely offer the same degree of sterility
assurance and should be avoided if at all possible. The elevated temperatures generally
associated with moist heat sterilization methods can only be achieved by the generation
of steam under pressure.
By far the most commonly employed standard temperature/time cycles for bottled
fluids and porous loads (e.g. surgical dressings) are 121 °C for 15 minutes and 134°C
392 Chapter 20
Table 20.2 Pressure-temperature relationships and antimicrobial efficacies of alternative steam
sterilization cycles
Holding time
(minutes)
Steam
pressure
Inactivation factor*
(decimal reductions)
Temperature
(«C)
(kPa)
(psi)
115
30
69
10
5.2
121
15
103
15
10
126
10
138
20
21
134
3
207
30
40
* Calculated for a spore suspension having a Dm of 15 minutes and a Z value of 10°C.
for 3 minutes, respectively. Not only do high temperature-short time cycles often result
in lower fractional degradation (see section 4), they also afford the advantage of
achieving higher levels of sterility assurance due to greater inactivation factors (Table
20.2). The 1 15°C for 30 minute cycle was considered an acceptable alternative to 121 °C
for 15 minutes prior to the publication of the 1988 British Pharmacopoeia, but it is no
longer considered sufficient to give the desired sterility assurance levels for products
which may contain significant concentrations of thermophilic spores.
4.2.1 Steam as a sterilizing agent
To act as an efficient sterilizing agent, steam should be able to provide moisture and
heat efficiently to the article to be sterilized. This is most effectively done using saturated
steam, which is steam in thermal equilibrium with the water from which it is derived,
i.e. steam on the phase boundary (Fig. 20.5). Under these circumstances, contact with
a cooler surface causes condensation and contraction drawing in fresh steam and leading
to the immediate release of the latent heat, which represents approximately 80% of the
heat energy. In this way heat and moisture are imparted rapidly to articles being sterilized
and dry porous loads are quickly penetrated by the steam.
Steam for sterilization can either be generated within the sterilizer, as with portable
bench or 'instrument and utensil' sterilizers, in which case it is constantly in contact
with water and is known as 'wet' steam, or can be supplied underpressure (350-400kPa)
from a separate boiler as 'dry' saturated steam with no entrained water droplets. The
killing potential of 'wet' steam is the same as that of 'dry' saturated steam at the same
temperature, but it is more likely to soak a porous load creating physical difficulties for
further steam penetration. Thus, major industrial and hospital sterilizers are usually
supplied with 'dry' saturated steam and attention is paid to the removal of entrained
water droplets within the supply line to prevent introduction of a water 'fog' into the
sterilizer.
If the temperature of 'dry' saturated steam is increased, then, in the absence of
entrained moisture, the relative humidity or degree of saturation is reduced and the
steam becomes superheated (Fig. 20.5). During sterilization this can arise in a number
of ways, for example by overheating the steam jacket (see section 4.2.2), by using too
dry a steam supply, by excessive pressure reduction during passage of steam from the
boiler to the sterilizer chamber, and by evolution of heat of hydration when steaming
Principles and practice of sterilization 393
150
Pressure above atmospheric (fcPa>
50 100 150 200
T
250
Prasfijf* lib per sq inch)
Fign 20+5 P^SAWra-tEmperatgie di^gj^m for water v^pogr.
over-dried cotton fabrics. Superheated steam behaves in the same manner as hot air
since condensation and release of latent heat will not occur unless the steam is cooled
to the phase boundary temperature. Thus, it proves to be an inefficient sterilizing agent,
and although a small degree of transient superheating can be tolerated, a maximum
acceptable level of 5°C superheat is set, i.e. the temperature of the steam is never
greater than 5°C above the phase boundary temperature at that pressure.
The relationship between temperature and pressure holds true only in the presence
of pure steam; adulteration with air contributes to a partial pressure but not to the
temperature of the steam. Thus, in the presence of air the temperature achieved
will reflect the contribution made by the steam and will be lower than that normally
attributed to the total pressure recorded. Addition of further steam will raise the
temperature but residual air surrounding articles may delay heat penetration or, if a
large amount of air is present, it may collect at the bottom of the sterilizer, completely
altering the temperature profile of the sterilizer chamber. It is for these reasons that
efficient air removal is a major aim in the design and operation of a boiler-fed steam
sterilizer.
4.2.2
394 Chapter 20
Sterilizer design and operation
Steam sterilizers, or autoclaves as they are sometimes known, are stainless steel vessels
designed to withstand the steam pressures employed in sterilization. They can be: (i)
'portable' sterilizers, where they generally have internal electric heaters to produce
steam and are used for small pilot or laboratory-scale sterilization and for the treatment
of instruments and utensils; or (ii) large-scale sterilizers for routine hospital or industrial
use, operating on 'dry' saturated steam from a separate boiler (Fig. 20.6). Because of
their widespread use within pharmacy this latter type will be considered in greatest
detail.
There are two main types of large sterilizers, those designed for use with porous
loads (i.e. dressings) and generally operated at a minimum temperature of 134°C, and
those designed as bottled-fluid sterilizers employing a minimum temperature of 121 °C.
The stages of operation are common to both and can be summarized as air removal and
steam admission, heating-up and exposure, and drying or cooling. Many modifications
of design exist and in this section only general features will be considered. Fuller
treatments of sterilizer design and operation can be found in Health Technical
Memorandum 2010 (1994).
General design features. Steam sterilizers are constructed with either cylindrical or
oblong chambers, with preferred capacities ranging from 400 to 800 litres. They can be
sealed by either a single door or by doors at both ends (to allow through-passage of
processed materials; see Chapter 22, section 3.2.3). During sterilization the doors are
held closed by a locking mechanism which prevents opening when the chamber is
under pressure and until the chamber has cooled to a pre-set temperature, typically
80°C.
In the larger sterilizers the chamber may be surrounded by a steam-jacket which
can be used to heat the autoclave chamber and promote a more uniform temperature
throughout the load. The same jacket can also be filled with water at the end of the
cycle to facilitate cooling and thus reduce the overall cycle time. The chamber floor
slopes towards a discharge channel through which air and condensate can be removed.
Temperature is monitored within the opening of the discharge channel and by
thermocouples in dummy packages; jacket and chamber pressures are followed using
pressure gauges. In hospitals and industry, it is common practice to operate sterilizers
on an automatic cycle, each stage of operation being controlled by a timer responding
to temperature- or pressure-sensing devices.
Operation
1 Air removal and steam admission. Air can be removed from steam sterilizers either
by downward displacement with steam, evacuation or a combination of the two. In the
downward displacement sterilizer, the heavier cool air is forced out of the discharge
channel by incoming hot steam. This has the benefit of warming the load during air
removal which aids the heating-up process. It finds widest application in the sterilization
of bottled fluids where bottle breakage may occur under the combined stresses of
evacuation and high temperature. For more air-retentive loads (i.e. dressings), however,
this technique of air removal is unsatisfactory and mechanical evacuation of the air is
essential before admission of the steam. This can either be to an extremely high level
(e.g. 2.5 kPa) or can involve a period of pulsed evacuation and steam admission, the
latter approach improving air extraction from dressings packs. After evacuation, steam
penetration into the load is very rapid and heating-up is almost instantaneous. It is
Principles and practice of sterilization 395
Chamber
pressure
gauge
©
Boiler
steam
Discharge channel
thermometer
Reducing
valve
!- Steem
Baffle
To vatiium
pump or a>Mtor
Nsar-tQ-et&flm
thermostatic va!ve
Air and condensed
water to wast*
Flfr 20l6 Main Mtis4iiJctiafLaJ feature of a 1hi£b-eca(* sieam sterilizer {autoclave).
axiomatic that packaging and loading of articles within a sterilizer be so organized as
to facilitate air removal.
During the sterilization process, small pockets of entrained air may still be released,
especially from packages, and this air must be removed. This is achieved with a near-
to-steam thermostatic valve incorporated in the discharge channel. The value operates
on the principle of an expandable bellows containing a volatile liquid which vaporizes
at the temperature of saturated steam thereby closing the valve, and condenses on the
passage of a cooler air-steam mixture, thus reopening the valve and discharging the
air. Condensate generated during the sterilization process can also be removed by this
device. Small quantities of air will not, however, lower the temperature sufficiently to
operate the valve and so a continual slight flow of steam is maintained through a bypass
around the device in order to flush away residual air.
It is common practice to package sterile fluids, especially intravenous fluids, in
flexible plastic containers. During sterilization these can develop a considerable internal
pressure in the airspace above the fluid and it is therefore necessary to maintain a
proportion of air within the sterilizing chamber to produce sufficient overpressure to
prevent these containers from bursting (air ballasting). In sterilizers modified or designed
to process this type of product, air removal is therefore unnecessary but special attention
must be paid to the prevention of air 'layering' within the chamber. This is overcome
by the inclusion of a fan or through a continuous spray of hot water within the chamber
to mix the air and steam. Air ballasting can also be employed to prevent bottle breakage.
2 Heating -up and exposure. When the sterilizer reaches its operating temperature
and pressure the sterilization stage begins. The duration of exposure may include a
heating-up time in addition to the holding time and this will normally be established
using thermocouples in dummy articles.
3 Drying or cooling. Dressings packs and other porous loads may become dampened
during the sterilization process and must be dried before removal from the chamber.
This is achieved by steam exhaust and application of a vacuum, often assisted by heat
from the steam-filled jacket if fitted. After drying, atmospheric pressure within the
chamber is restored by admission of sterile filtered air.
For bottled fluids the final stage of the sterilization process is cooling, and this needs to
be achieved as rapidly as possible to minimize thermal degradation of the product and
to reduce processing time. In modern sterilizers, this is achieved by circulating water
in the jacket which surrounds the chamber or by spray-cooling with retained condensate
delivered to the surface of the load by nozzles fitted into the roof of the sterilizer
chamber. This is often accompanied by the introduction of filtered, compressed air to
minimize container breakage due to high internal pressures (air ballasting). Containers
must not be removed from the sterilizer until the internal pressure has dropped to a safe
level, usually indicated by a temperature of less than 80°C. Occasionally, spray-cooling
water may be a source of bacterial contamination and its microbiological quality must
be carefully monitored.
4.3 Dry heat sterilization
The lethal effects of dry heat on microorganisms are due largely to oxidative processes
which are less effective than the hydrolytic damage which results from exposure to
steam. Thus, dry heat sterilization usually employs higher temperatures in the range
160-180°C and requires exposure times of up to 2 hours depending upon the temperature
employed (section 10).
Again, bacterial spores are much more resistant than vegetative cells, and their
recorded resistance varies markedly depending upon their degree of dryness. In many
early studies on dry heat resistance of spores their water content was not adequately
controlled, so conflicting data arose regarding the exposure conditions necessary to
achieve effective sterilization. This was partly responsible for variations in recommended
exposure temperatures and times in different pharmacopoeias.
Its application is generally restricted to glassware and metal surgical instruments
(where its good penetrability and non-corrosive nature are of benefit), non-aqueous
thermostable liquids and thermostable powders (see Chapter 21). In practice, the range
of materials which are actually subjected to dry heat sterilization is quite limited, and
consists largely of items used in hospitals. The major industrial application is in the
sterilization of glass bottles which are to be filled aseptically, and here the attraction of
the process is that it not only achieves an adequate sterility assurance level, but that it
also destroys bacterial endotoxins (products of Gram-negative bacteria, also known as
pyrogens, that cause fever when injected into the body). These are difficult to eliminate
by other means. For the purposes of depyrogenation of glass, temperatures of
approximately 250°C are used.
Principles and practice of sterilization 397
The F-value concept which was developed for steam sterilization processes has an
equivalent in dry heat sterilization although its application has been limited. The F H
designation describes the lethality of a dry heat process in terms of the equivalent
number of minutes exposure at 170°C, and in this case a z value of 20°C has been
found empirically to be appropriate for calculation purposes; this contrast with the
value of 10°C which is typically employed to describe moist heat resistance.
4.3.1 Sterilizer design
Dry heat sterilization is usually carried out in a hot air oven which comprises an insulated
polished stainless steel chamber, with a usual capacity of up to 250 litres, surrounded
by an outer case containing electric heaters located in positions to prevent cool spots
developing inside the chamber. A fan is fitted to the rear of the oven to provide circulating
air, thus ensuring more rapid equilibration of temperature. Shelves within the chamber
are perforated to allow good air flow. Thermocouples can be used to monitor the
temperature of both the oven air and articles contained within. A fixed temperature
sensor connected to a chart recorder provides a permanent record of the sterilization
cycle. Appropriate door-locking controls should be incorporated to prevent interruption
of a sterilization cycle once begun.
Recent sterilizer developments have led to the use of dry-heat sterilizing
tunnels where heat transfer is achieved by infra-red irradiation or by forced convection
in filtered laminar airflow tunnels. Items to be sterilized are placed on a conveyer belt
and pass through a high-temperature zone (250 - 300 + °C) over a period of several
minutes.
4.3.2 Sterilizer operation
Articles to be sterilized must be wrapped or enclosed in containers of sufficient strength
and integrity to provide good post-sterilization protection against contamination. Suitable
materials are paper, cardboard tubes or aluminium containers. Container shape and
design must be such that heat penetration is encouraged in order to shorten the heating-
up stage; this can be achieved by using narrow containers with dull non-reflecting
surfaces. In a hot-air oven, heat is delivered to articles principally by radiation and
convection; thus, they must be carefully arranged within the chamber to avoid obscuring
centrally placed articles from wall radiation or impending air flow. The temperature
variation within the chamber should not exceed ±5°C of the recorded temperature.
Heating-up times, which may be as long as 4 hours for articles with poor heat-conducting
properties, can be reduced by preheating the oven before loading. Following sterilization,
the chamber temperature is usually allowed to fall to around 40°C before removal of
sterilized articles; this can be accelerated by the use of forced cooling with filtered
air.
Gaseous sterilization
The chemically reactive gases ethylene oxide (CI^^O, and formaldehyde (methanal,
H.CHO) possess broad-spectrum biocidal activity, and have found application in the
398 Chapter 20
sterilization of re-usable surgical instruments, certain medical, diagnostic and electrical
equipment, and the surface sterilization of powders. Sterilization processes using
ethylene oxide sterilization are far more commonly used on an international basis than
those employing formaldehyde.
Ethylene oxide treatment can also be considered as an alternative to radiation
sterilization in the commercial production of disposable medical devices (Chapter 21).
These techniques do not, however, offer the same degree of sterility assurance as heat
methods and are generally reserved for temperature-sensitive items.
The mechanism of antimicrobial action of the two gases is assumed to be through
alkylation of sulphydryl, amino, hydro xyl and carboxyl groups on proteins and imino
groups of nucleic acids. At the concentrations employed in sterilization protocols, type
A survivor curves (section 2.1, Fig. 20.1) are produced, the lethality of these gases
increasing in a non-uniform manner with increasing concentration, exposure temperature
and humidity. For this reason, sterilization protocols have generally been established
by an empirical approach using a standard product load containing suitable biological
indicator test strips (Chapter 23). Concentration ranges (given as weight of gas per unit
chamber volume) are usually in the order of 800-1200mgl -1 for ethylene oxide and
15-100 mg l" 1 for formaldehyde, with operating temperatures in the region of 45-63 °C
and 70-75 °C, respectively. Even at the higher concentrations and temperatures, the
sterilization processes are lengthy and therefore unsuitable for the resterilization of
high-turnover articles. Further delays occur because of the need to remove toxic residues
of the gases before release of the items for use. In addition, because recovery of survivors
in sterility tests is more protracted with gaseous sterilization methods than with other
processes, an extended quarantine period may also be required.
As alkylating agents, both gases are potentially mutagenic and carcinogenic (as is
the ethylene chlorohydrin which results from ethylene oxide reaction with chlorine),
they also produce symptoms of acute toxicity including irritation of the skin, conjunctiva
and nasal mucosa; consequently, strict control of their atmospheric concentrations is
necessary and safe working protocols are required to protect personnel. Formaldehyde
can normally be detected by smell at concentrations lower than those permitted in the
atmosphere, whereas this is not true for ethylene oxide. Table 20.3 summarizes the
comparative advantages afforded by ethylene oxide and low-temperature steam
formaldehyde (LTSF) processes.
5.1 Ethylene oxide
Ethylene oxide gas is highly explosive in mixtures of >3.6% v/v in air; in order to
reduce this explosion hazard it is usually supplied for sterilization purposes as a 10%
mix with carbon dioxide, or as an 8.6% mixture with HFC 124 (2 chloro-1, 1,1,2
tetrafluoroethane) which has replaced fluorinated hydrocarbons (freons). Alternatively,
pure ethylene oxide gas can be used at below atmospheric pressure in sterilizer chambers
from which all air has been removed.
The efficacy of ethylene oxide treatment depends upon achieving a suitable
concentration in each article and this is assisted greatly by the good penetrating powers
of the gas, which diffuses readily into many packaging materials including rubber,
plastics, fabric and paper. This is not without its drawbacks, however, since the level of
Principles and practice of sterilization 399
Table 20.3 Relative merits of ethylene oxide and low-temperature steam formaldehyde (LTSF)
processes
Advantages of ethylene
oxide over LTSF
Advantage of LTSF
over ethylene oxide
Wider international
regulatory acceptance
Better gas penetration into
plastics and rubber
Relatively slow to form solid
polymers (with the potential to
block pipes etc.)
With long exposure times it
is possible to sterilize at
ambient temperatures
Very low incidence of
product deterioration
Less hazardous because formaldehyde
is not flammable and is more readily
detected by smell
Cycle times may be shorter
The gas is obtained readily from
aqueous solution (formalin) which is a
more convenient source than gas in
cylinders
ethylene oxide in a sterilizer will decrease due to absorption during the process and the
treated articles must undergo a desorption stage to remove toxic residues. Desorption
can be allowed to occur naturally on open shelves, in which case complete desorption
may take many days, e.g. for materials like PVC, or it may be encouraged by special
forced aeration cabinets where flowing, heated air assists gas removal, reducing
desorption times to between 2 and 24 hours.
Organisms are more resistant to ethylene oxide treatment in a dried state, as are
those protected from the gas by inclusion in crystalline or dried organic deposits. Thus,
a further condition to be satisfied in ethylene oxide sterilization is attainment of a
minimum level of moisture in the immediate product environment. This requires a
sterilizer humidity of 30-70% and frequently a preconditioning of the load at relative
humidities of greater than 50%.
5.1.1
Sterilizer design and operation
An ethylene oxide sterilizer consists of a leak-proof and explosion-proof steel chamber,
normally of 100-300 litre capacity, which can be surrounded by a hot- water jacket
to provide a uniform chamber temperature. Successful operation of the sterilizer
requires removal of air from the chamber by evacuation, humidification and con-
ditioning of the load by passage of subatmospheric pressure steam followed by a
further evacuation period and the admission of preheated vaporized ethylene oxide
from external pressurized canisters or single-charge cartridges. Forced gas circulation
is often employed to minimize variations in conditions throughout the sterilizer chamber.
Packaging materials must be air-, steam- and gas-permeable to permit suitable conditions
for sterilization to be achieved within individual articles in the load. Absorption of
ethylene oxide by the load is compensated for by the introduction of excess gas at the
beginning or by the addition of more gas as the pressure drops during the sterilization
400 Chapter 20
process. The A ame may also be true for moisture absorption, which is compensated for
by supplementary addition of water to maintain appropriate relative humidity.
After treatment, the gases are evacuated either directly to the outside atmosphere
or through a special exhaust system. Filtered, sterile air is then admitted either for a
repeat of the vacuum/air cycle or for air purging until the chamber is opened. In this
way, safe removal of the ethylene oxide is achieved reducing the toxic hazard to the
operator. Sterilized articles are removed directly from the chamber and arranged for
desorption.
The operation of an ethylene oxide sterilizer should be monitored and controlled
automatically. A typical operating cycle for pure ethylene oxide gas is given in Fig.
20.7, and general conditions are summarized in section 10.
5.2 Formaldehyde
Formaldehyde gas for use in sterilization is produced by heating formalin (37% w/v
aqueous solution of formaldehyde) to a temperature of 70-7 5 °C with steam, leading to
the process known as LTSF. Formaldehyde has a similar toxicity to ethylene oxide and
although absorption to materials appears to be lower similar desorption routines are
recommended. A major disadvantage of formaldehyde is low penetrating power and
this limits the packaging materials that can be employed to principally paper and cotton
fabric.
5. 2. 1 Sterilizer design and operation
An LTSF sterilizer is designed to operate with subatmospheric pressure steam. Air is
removed by evacuation and steam admitted to the chamber to allow heating of the load
and to assist in air removal. The sterilization period starts with the release of
formaldehyde by vaporization from formalin (in a vaporizer with a steam jacket) and
continues through either a simple holding stage or through a series of pulsed evacuations
and steam and formaldehyde admission cycles. The chamber temperature is maintained
by a thermostatically controlled water jacket, and steam and condensate are removed
via a drain channel and an evacuated condenser. At the end of the treatment period
formaldehyde vapour is expelled by steam flushing and the load dried by alternating
stages of evacuation and admission of sterile, filtered air. A typical pulsed cycle of
operation is shown in Fig. 20.8 and general conditions are summarized in section 10.
Radiation sterilization
Several types of radiation find a sterilizing application in the manufacture of
pharmaceutical and medical products, principal among which are accelerated electrons
(particulate radiation), gamma-rays and ultraviolet (UV) light (both electromagnetic
radiations). The major target for these radiations is believed to be microbial DNA, with
damage occurring as a consequence of ionization and free radical production (gamma-
rays and electrons) or excitation (UV light). This latter process is less damaging and
less lethal than ionization, and so UV irradiation is not as efficient a sterilization method
as electron or gamma-irradiation. As mentioned earlier (section 2), vegetative bacteria
Principles and practice of sterilization 401
0|-
Pura ethylene
oxide admitted
150 1W 170
180 190
Time (mini
Meuum
Prahest
Pulaed
humidi-f icHti en
Gas exposure
Final
vacuum
Air
purga-
J
Dear
open
■fig. 24.V l\pkiJ cpcf^tii^. cycle for pure ethylene oxtije gets.
E
■s
e;
£
"E
c
M-
E
F
E
-D
■n
m
E
a
LL
■a-
I
Or
ft
d j> a.
"Sfl
> a £
1
a
Zl
u
m
Prfl-v^ttiu-m
Initial
si bam
fluih
FtfrrnpJdcltyiclfltatfljm pulsing
[73^C 2fl mgJI formsldBhvdtfpuiBel
Final
Nu&h
flulwd
2CS Tirrw I'minj
□GOT
Qfuan
Fljt 2ftfl TypicaJ Operating -tycle fur law- temperature, slcang and fontfflldehyde irentinaiL
402 CtKipler 20
generally prove to be the most sensitive to irradiation (with notable exceptions, e.g.
Deinococcus (Micrococcus) radiodurans), followed by moulds and yeasts, with bacterial
spores and viruses as the most resistant (except in the case of UV light where mould
spores prove to be most resistant). The extent of DNA damage required to produce cell
death can vary and this, together with the ability to carry out effective repair, probably
decides the resistance of the organism to radiation. With ionizing radiations (gamma-
ray and accelerated electrons), microbial resistance decreases with the presence of
moisture or dissolved oxygen (as a result of increased free radical production) and also
with elevated temperatures.
Radiation sterilization with high-energy gamma-rays or accelerated electrons has
proved to be a useful method for the industrial sterilization of heat- sensitive products.
However, undesirable changes can occur in irradiated preparations, especially those in
aqueous solution where radiolysis of water contributes to the damaging processes. In
addition, certain glass or plastic (e.g. polypropylene, PTFE) materials used for packaging
or for medical devices can also suffer damage. Thus, radiation sterilization is generally
applied to articles in the dried state; these include surgical instruments, sutures,
prostheses, unit-dose ointments, plastic syringes and dry pharmaceutical products
(Chapter 21). With these radiations, destruction of a microbial population follows the
classic survivor curves (see Fig. 20.1) and a D- value, given as a radiation dose, can be
established for standard bacterial spores (e.g. Bacillus pumilus) permitting a suitable
sterilizing dose to be calculated. In the UK it is usual to apply a dose of 25 kGy (2.5 Mrad)
for pharmaceutical and medical products, although lower doses are employed in the
USA and Canada.
UV light, with its much lower energy, causes less damage to microbial DNA. This,
coupled with its poor penetrability of normal packaging materials, renders UV light
unsuitable for sterilization of pharmaceutical dosage forms. It does find applications,
however, in the sterilization of air, for the surface sterilization of aseptic work areas,
and for the treatment of manufacturing-grade water.
6.1 Sterilizer design and operation
6.1.1 Gamma-ray sterilizers
Gamma-rays for sterilization are usually derived from a cobalt-60 C Co) source
(caesium- 137 may also be used), with a half-life of 5.25 years, which on disintegration
emits radiation at two energy levels of 1.33 and 1.17 MeV. The isotope is held as pellets
packed in metal rods, each rod carefully arranged within the source and containing up
to 20kCi (740 x 10 Bq) of activity; these rods are replaced or rearranged as the activity
of the source either drops or becomes unevenly distributed. A typical 60 Co installation
may contain up to 1 MCi (3.7 x 10 l6 Bq) of activity. For safety reasons, this source is
housed within a reinforced concrete building with walls some 2 m thick, and it is only
raised from a sunken water-filled tank when required for use. Control devices operate
to ensure that the source is raised only when the chamber is locked and that it is
immediately lowered if a malfunction occurs. Articles being sterilized are passed
through the irradiation chamber on a conveyor belt or monorail system and move
around the raised source, the rate of passage regulating the dose absorbed (Fig. 20.9).
Principles and practice of sterilization 403
Source hoist
Source pass
mechanism
Cobalt 60
source submerged
En sloragu pod!
Concrete- shielded chamber
Prgduei bo<es
DiscftgrgB
conveyor
Supply conveyor
Control
console
Cuba It dO trtfniipGrl
conlairrer
Fla- 211.9 llitt^raifi »t ji typical eohalt^M) Linuluiliab pfiml.
Radiation monitors are continually employed to detect any radiation leakage during
operation or source storage, and to confirm a return to satisfactory background levels
within the sterilization chamber following operation. The dose delivered is dependent
upon source strength and exposure period, with dwell times typically up to 20 hours
duration.
The difference in radiation susceptibilities of microbial cells and humans may be
gauged from the fact that a lethal human dose would be delivered by an exposure of
seconds or minutes.
6.1.2 Electron accelerators
Two types of electron accelerator machine exist, the electrostatic accelerator and the
microwave linear accelerator, producing electrons with maximum energies of 5 MeV
and 10 MeV, respectively. Although higher energies would achieve better penetration
into the product, there is a risk of induced radiation, and so they are not used. In the
first, a high-energy electron beam is generated by accelerating electrons from a hot
filament down an evacuated tube under high potential difference, while in the second,
additional energy is imparted to this beam in a pulsed manner by a synchronized
travelling microwave. Articles for treatment are generally limited to small packs and
are arranged on a horizontal conveyor belt, usually for irradiation from one side but
sometimes from both. The sterilizing dose is delivered more rapidly in an electron
accelerator than in a 60 Co plant, with exposure times for sterilization usually amounting
to only a few seconds or minutes. Varying extents of shielding, depending upon the
size of the accelerator, are necessary to protect operators from X-rays generated by the
bremsstrahlung effect.
6.1.3 Ultraviolet irradiation
The optimum wavelength for UV sterilization is around 260 nm. A suitable source for
UV light in this region is a mercury lamp giving peak emission levels at 254 nm. These
sources are generally wall- or ceiling-mounted for air disinfection, or fixed to vessels
for water treatment. Operators present in an irradiated room should wear appropriate
protective clothing and eye shields.
Filtration sterilization
The process of filtration is unique amongst sterilization techniques in that it removes,
rather than destroys, microorganisms. Further, it is capable of preventing the passage
of both viable and non-viable particles and can thus be used for both the clarification
and sterilization of liquids and gases. The principal applications of sterilizing-grade
filters are the treatment of heat-sensitive injections and ophthalmic solutions, biological
products and air and other gases for supply to aseptic areas (see Chapters 21 and 22).
They may also be required in industrial applications where they become part of
venting systems on fermenters, centrifuges, autoclaves and freeze- dryers. Certain types
of filter (membrane filters) also have an important role in sterility testing, where they
can be employed to trap and concentrate contaminating organisms from solutions under
Principles and practice of sterilization 405
Table 20.4 Some characteristics of membrane and depth filters
Characteristic Membrane Depth
Absolute retention of microorganisms greater than + _
rated pore size
Rapid rate of filtration +
High dirt-handling capacity . +
Grow-through of microorganisms Unlikely +
Shedding of filter components . +
Fluid retention . +
Solute adsorption . +
Good chemical stability Variable (depends +
on membrane)
Good sterilization characteristics + +
+ , applicable; -, not applicable.
test. These filters are then placed on the surface of a solid nutrient medium and incubated
to encourage colony development (Chapter 23).
The major mechanisms of filtration are sieving, adsorption and trapping within the
matrix of the filter material. Of these, only sieving can be regarded as absolute since it
ensures the exclusion of all particles above a defined size. It is generally accepted that
synthetic membrane filters, derived from cellulose esters or other polymeric materials,
approximate most closely to sieve filters, while fibrous pads, sintered glass and sintered
ceramic products can be regarded as depth filters relying principally on mechanisms of
adsorption and entrapment. Some of the characteristics of filter media are summarized
in Table 20.4. The potential hazard of microbial multiplication within a depth filter and
subsequent contamination of the filtrate (microbial grow-through) should be recognized.
7.1 Filtration sterilization of liquids
In order to compare favourably with other methods of sterilization, the microorganism
removal efficiency of filters employed in the processing of liquids must be high. For
this reason, membrane filters of 0.2-0.22 fim nominal pore diameter are chiefly used,
while sintered filters are used only in restricted circumstances, i.e. for the processing
of corrosive liquids, viscous fluids or organic solvents. It may be tempting to assume
that the pore size is the major determinant of filtration efficiency and two filters of
0.2jimi pore diameter from different manufacturers will behave similarly. This is not so
because, in addition to the sieving effect, trapping within the filter matrix, adsorption
and charge effects all contribute significantly towards the removal of particles.
Consequently, the depth of the membrane, its charge and the tortuosity of the channels
are all factors which can make the performance of one filter far superior to that of
another. The major criterion by which filters should be compared, therefore, is their
titre reduction values, i.e. the ratio of the number of organisms challenging a filter
under defined conditions to the number penetrating it. In all cases, the filter medium
employed must be sterilizable, ideally by steam treatment; in the case of membrane
filters this may be for once-only use, or, in the case of larger industrial filters, a small
406 Chapter 20
Table 20.5 Effect of membrane
disc filter diameter on filtration
Filter
diameter
Effective
filtration
Typical batch
volumes
(mm)
area (cm
2 >
volume (litres)
13
0.8
<0.01
25
3.9
0.05-0.1
47
11.3
0.1-0.3
90
45
0.3-5
142
97
5-20
293
530
>20
fixed number of resterilizations; sintered filters may be resterilized many times. Filtration
sterilization is an aseptic process and careful monitoring of filter integrity is necessary
as well as final product sterility testing (Chapter 23).
Membrane filters, in the form of discs, can be assembled into pressure-operated
filter holders for syringe mounting and in-line use or vacuum filtration tower devices.
Filtration under pressure is generally considered most suitable since filling at high
flow rates directly into the final containers is possible without problems of foaming,
solvent evaporation or air leaks. The filtration capacity of a range of membrane filter
discs is given in Table 20.5. To increase the filtration area, and hence process volumes,
several discs can be used in parallel in multiple-plate filtration systems or, alternatively,
membrane filters can be fabricated into plain or pleated cylinders and installed in
cartridges. Membrane filters are often used in combination with a coarse-grade fibreglass
depth prefilter to improve their dirt-handling capacity.
7.2
Filtration sterilization of gases
The principal application for filtration sterilization of gases is in the provision of sterile
air to aseptic manufacturing suites, hospital isolation units and some operating theatres.
Filters employed generally consist of pleated sheets of glass microfibres separated and
supported by corrugated sheets of Kraft paper or aluminium; these are employed in
ducts, wall or ceiling panels, overhead canopies, or laminar airflow cabinets (Chapter
22). These high-efficiency particulate air (HEP A) filters can remove up to 99.997% of
particles greater than 0.3 fim in diameter and thus are acting as depth filters. In practice
their microorganism removal efficiency is rather better since the majority of bacteria
are found associated with dust particles and only the larger fungal spores are found in
the free state. Air is forced through HEPA filters by blower fans, and prefilters are used
to remove larger particles to extend the lifetime of the HEPA filter. The operational
efficiency and integrity of a HEPA filter can be monitored by pressure differential and
airflow rate measurements, and dioctylphthalate smoke particle penetration tests.
Other applications of filters include sterilization of venting or displacement air in
tissue and microbiological culture (carbon filters and hydrophobic membrane filters);
decontamination of air in mechanical ventilators (glass fibre filters); treatment of
exhausted air from microbiological safety cabinets (HEPA filters); and the clarification
and sterilization of medical gases (glass wool depth filters and hydrophobic membrane
filters).
Principles and practice of sterilization 407
Conclusions
A sterilization process should always be considered a compromise between achieving
good antimicrobial activity and maintaining product stability. It must, therefore, be
validated against a suitable test organism and its efficacy continually monitored during
use. Even so, a limit will exist as to the type and size of microbial challenge which can
be handled by the process without significant loss of sterility assurance. Thus,
sterilization must not be seen as a 'catch-all' or as an alternative to good manufacturing
practices but must be considered as only the final stage in a programme of
microbiological control.
Acknowledgements
The assistance of the following is gratefully acknowledged: F.J. Ley, Isotron
pic, Swindon (for discussions and permission to reproduce Fig. 20.9); M.S. Copson,
Albert Browne Ltd, Leicester (for discussions and permission to reproduce Fig.
20.6).
Appendix
Examples of typical conditions employed in the sterilization of pharmaceutical and
medical products
Sterilization method
Conditions
Moist heat (autoclaving)
Dry heat
Ethylene oxide
Low-temperature steam and formaldehyde
Irradiation
Gamma-rays or accelerated
electrons
Filtration
121°Cfor 15min
134°Cfor3min
160°Cfor 120min
170°Cfor60min
180°Cfor30min
Gas concentration:
800-1200 mgl" 1
45-63 °C
30-70% relative humidity
1-4 hours sterilizing time
Gas concentration:
15-100 mgl" 1
Steam admission to 73°C
40-180min sterilizing time
depending on type of process
25kGy (2.5 Mrad) dose
=s0.22,um pore size, sterile
membrane filter
10 Further reading
Baird R.M. & Bloomfield S.F. (eds) (1996) Microbial Quality Assurance in Cosmetics, Toiletries and
Non-sterile Pharmaceuticals. London: Taylor & Francis.
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) London: HMSO.
British Standards Institution (1991) Specification for Steam Sterilizers for Aqueous Fluids in Rigid
Sealed Containers: BS 3970. London: BSI.
British Standards Institution (1990) Sterilizing and Disinfecting Equipment for Medical Products. BS
3970, Parts, 1, 3,4, 5. London: BSI.
Denyer S.P. & Baird R.M. (eds) (1990) Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood. (Chapters 7, 8 and 9 provide additional information.)
European Pharmacopoeia, 3rd edn. (1997) Maisonneure: SA.
Gardner J.F. & Peel M.M. (1991) Introduction to Sterilisation, Disinfection and Infection Control.
Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Gilbert P. & Allison D. (1996) Redefining the 'sterility' of sterile products. Eur J Parenteral Sci, 1,
19-23.
Health Technical Memorandum (1994) Sterilisers. HTM 2010. London: Department of Health.
Russell A.D. (1982) The Destruction of Bacterial Spores. London: Academic Press.
Russell A.D., Hugo W.B. & Ayliffe G.AJ. (eds) (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Stumbo CR. (1973) Thermobacteriology in Food Processing, 2nd edn. London: Academic Press.
United States Pharmacopeia (1995) 23rd revision. Rockville MD: US Pharmacopeial Convention.
Principles and practice of sterilization 409
Sterile pharmaceutical products
1
Introduction
2 Injections
2.1 Design philosophy
2.2 Intravenous infusions
2.2.1 Intravenous additives
2.2.2 Total parenteral nutrition (TPN)
2.3 Small-volume aqueous injections
2.3.1 Problems of drug stability
4.5 Contact-lens solutions
4.5.1 Wetting solutions
4.5.2 Cleaning solutions
4.5.3 Soaking solutions
5 Dressings
6 Implants
2.4
Small-volume oily injections
7
7.1
Absorbable haemostats
Oxidized cellulose
3
Non-injectable sterile fluids
7.2
Absorbable gelatin foam
3.1
Non-injectable water
7.3
Human fibrin foam
3.2
Urological (bladder) irrigation
solutions
7.4
Calcium alginate
3.3
Peritoneal dialysis and haemo
dialysis
solutions
8
Surgical ligatures and sutures
3.4
Inhaler solutions
8.1
8.2
Sterilized surgical catgut
Non-absorbable types
4
Ophthalmic preparations
4.1
Design philosophy
9
Instruments and equipment
4.2
Eye-drops
4.3
Eye lotions
10
Further reading
4.4
Eye ointments
Introduction
Certain forms of drug administration and other pharmaceutical products, such as
dressings and sutures, must be sterile in order to avoid the possibility of nosocomial
(hospital-induced) infection arising from their usage. This applies particularly to
medicines which are administered parenterally but also to any material or instrument
likely to contact broken skin or internal organs. While inoculation of human pathogenic
bacteria, fungi or viruses poses the most obvious danger to the patient, it should also be
realized that microorganisms usually regarded as non-pathogenic which inadvertently
gain access to body cavities in sufficiently large numbers can also result in a severe,
often fatal, infection. Consequently, injections, ophthalmic preparations, irrigation fluids,
dialysis solutions, sutures and ligatures, implants, certain surgical dressings, as well as
instruments necessary for their use or administration, must be presented for use in a
sterile condition and in such a way that they remain sterile throughout the period of
use.
Principles of the methods employed to sterilize pharmaceutical products are
described in Chapter 20. The British Pharmacopoeia (1993) recommends autoclaving
and filtration as suitable methods applicable to aqueous liquids, and dry heat for non-
aqueous and dry solid preparations. The choice is determined largely by the ability of
the formulation and container to withstand the physical stresses applied by moist heat
treatment. The use of ionizing radiation or ethylene oxide is also appropriate in specific
instances. The primary considerations relate to the ability of active ingredients to
withstand the applied stress and of the container to maintain the product in a sterile
condition until use. It should be realized that all products intended to be sterilized must
be rendered and kept thoroughly clean and therefore of low microbial content prior to
sterilization. Thus, the process itself is not overtaxed and is generally well within safety
limits to guarantee sterility with minimal stress applied to the product. Because of the
clinical consequences (such as granuloma in the lung) of injecting solid particles into
the bloodstream, the numbers of particles present in injections and in other solutions
used in body cavities must be restricted. The British Pharmacopoeia (1993) set
limits for injections based on operation of a particle-detecting apparatus. The European
Pharmacopoeia (1997) describes a microscope method for particulate contamination
of injections and intravenous infusions, i.e. extraneous, mobile, undissolved particles,
other than bubbles, unintentionally present in the solutions. The test method provides
a qualitative method for identifying and detecting the characteristics of such particles
together with an indication of their possible origin. It might then be possible to
develop means of avoiding such contamination. Limits are given in the United States
Pharmacopoeia (1995) for large- volume injections, using this method.
Injections
Design philosophy
Any injectable product must be designed and produced to the highest possible
pharmaceutical standards. Not only must the product have the minimum possible levels
of particles and pyrogenic substances, but also the formulation and packaging must
maintain product integrity throughout the production processes, the shelf-life and during
administration. The formulation must be such as to ensure that the product remains
physically and chemically stable over the designated shelf-life. To achieve this,
excipients such as buffers and antioxidants may be required to ensure chemical stability,
and solubilizers, such as propylene glycol or polysorbates, may be necessary for drugs
with poor aqueous solubility to maintain the drug in solution. The packaging must
prevent water, excipient or drug loss during sterilization and storage and, in addition,
retain microbiological integrity. Axiomatically, ingress of microorganisms must be
prevented. The packaging must not contribute any significant amounts of extractable
chemicals to the contents, for example vulcanizing agents from rubber or plasticizers
from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) infusion containers.
Most injections are formulated as aqueous solutions, with Water for Injections BP
as the vehicle. The formulation of injections depends upon several factors, namely the
aqueous solubility of the active ingredient, the dose to be employed, thermal stability
of the solution, the route of injection and whether the product is to be prepared as a
multidose one (i.e. with a dose or doses removed on different occasions) or in a single-
dose form (as the term suggests, only one dose is contained in the injection). Nowadays,
most injections are prepared as single-dose forms and this is mandatory for certain
routes, e.g. spinal injections such as the intrathecal route and large- volume intravenous
infusions (section 2.2). Multidose injections may require the inclusion of a suitable
Sterile pharmaceutical products 411
preservative to prevent contamination following the removal of a dose on different
occasions. Single-dose injections are usually packed in glass ampoules containing 1, 2
or 5 ml of product; to ensure removal of the correct volume by syringe, it is necessary
to add an appropriate overage to an ampoule. Thus, a 1-ml ampoule will actually contain
1.1 ml of product, with 2.15 ml in a 2-ml ampoule. Full details are to be found in the
British Pharmacopoeia (1993).
Some types of injections must be made iso-osmotic with blood serum. This applies
particularly to large-volume intravenous infusions if at all possible; hypotonic solutions
cause lysis of red blood corpuscles and thus must not be used for this purpose.
Conversely, hypertonic solutions can be employed: these induce shrinkage, but not
lysis, of red cells which recover their shape later. Intraspinal injections must also be
isotonic, and to reduce pain at the site of injection so should intramuscular and
subcutaneous injections. Adjustment to isotonicity can be determined by the following
methods.
1 Depression of freezing-point, which depends on the number of dissolved particles
present in solution. A useful equation is given by:
52 a
W= ~ ~
b
in which W is the percentage (w/v) of adjusting substance, a the freezing-point of
unadjusted solution and b the depression of the freezing-point of water by 1 % w/v of
adjusting substance.
2 Sodium chloride equivalent, which is produced by dividing the value for the
depression of freezing-point produced by a solution of the substance by the cor-
responding value of a solution of sodium chloride of the same strength.
For details of these and other methods, the Pharmaceutical Codex (1993) should
be consulted.
2.2 Intravenous infusions
These consist of large-volume injections or drips (500 ml or more) that are infused at
various rates (e.g. 50-500 ml h _1 ) into the venous system; they are sterilized in an
autoclave (see Chapter 20). The most commonly used infusions are isotonic sodium
chloride and glucose. These are used to maintain fluid and electrolyte balance, for
replacement of extracellular body fluids (e.g. after surgery or during prolonged periods
of fluid loss), as a supplementary energy source (1 litre of 5% w/v glucose = 714kJ)
and as a vehicle for drugs. Such solutions are prepared using freshly distilled water as
a vehicle under rigidly controlled conditions to minimize pyrogen (see Chapters 1 and
18) and particle content, and filtered to remove remaining particles immediately before
distribution to the final clean container.
Other important examples are blood and blood products, which are collected and
processed in sterile containers, and plasma substitutes, for example dextrans and
degraded gelatin. Dextrans, glucose polymers consisting essentially of (1 - A 6) a-links,
are produced as a result of the biochemical activities of certain bacteria of the genus
Leuconostoc, e.g. L. mesenteroides (see Chapter 25).
A small range of intravenous infusions, e.g. those containing amino acids or
412 Chapter 21
chlormethiazole, are prepared in glass containers. These are sealed with a rubber closure
held on by an aluminium screw cap or crimp-on ring. The rubber should be non-
fragmenting, not release soluble extractives, and be sufficiently soft and pliable to
seal around the giving set needle inserted immediately prior to use. Although bottles
are sterilized by autoclaving, it is still possible for the infusion in glass bottles to become
contaminated with microorganisms before use. For instance, during the final part of
the autoclave process, bottles may be spray-cooled with water to hasten the cooling
process and therefore reduce the total autoclaving time. However, due to the poor fit
between bottle lip and rubber plug (a skirted insert type is used) it is possible for the
spray-cooling water to spread by capillary movement between bottle thread and screw
cap and even enter the bottle contents. This process is encouraged if the bottle contains
a vacuum as a consequence of rubber seal failure during heating-up. It should also be
remembered that autoclaving leads to considerable heat and pressure stresses on the
container. Failure may result from any imperfection in the bottle or plug. Microbes
may also gain access to the contents of bottles during storage if hair-line cracks (a
result of bad handling and rough treatment) are present, through which fluid may seep
outwards and microorganisms inwards to contaminate the fluid. Finally, contamination
may occur during use due to poor aseptic techniques when setting up the infusion, via
an ineffective air inlet (allowing replacement of infused fluid with air) or when changing
the giving set or bottle.
Most infusions are now packed in plastic containers. The plastic material should be
pliable, thermoresistant, transparent and non- toxic. Plasticized PVC and polyethylene
are commonly used. The former is transparent and very pliable, allowing the pack to
collapse as the contents are withdrawn (consequently no air inlet is required). These
packs are also amenable to the inclusion of ports into the bag, allowing greater safety
during use. Such ports can be protected by sterile overseals. Two problems arise: (i) the
possibility of toxic extractives, e.g. diethyl phthalate, from the plastic entering the
fluid if poor quality PVC is used; and (ii) moisture permeability leading to loss of
water if the packs are not protected by a water-impermeable outer wrap. Bags of high-
quality polyethylene are readily moulded (although separate ports cannot be included),
translucent and free from potential toxic extractives. As stated, these packs normally
collapse readily during infusion. An important advantage of all plastic packs is that the
containers are hermetically sealed prior to autoclaving and, therefore, spray-cooling
water cannot enter the pack unless there is seal failure, an easily detected occurrence.
However, the autoclaving of plastic bags is more complex than that of bottled fluids
because a steam-air mixture is necessary to prevent bursting of the bags when heated
(air-ballasting); adequate mixing of the steam and air is therefore required to prevent
layering of gases inside the chamber.
2.2.1 Intravenous additives
A common practice in hospitals is to add drugs to infusions immediately prior to, or
during, administration. The most common additives are potassium chloride, lignocaine,
heparin, certain vitamins and antibiotics.
Potentially, this can be a hazardous practice. For instance, the drug may precipitate
in the infusion fluid because of the pH (e.g. amphotericin) or the presence of calcium
Sterile pharmaceutical products 413
salts (e.g. thiopentone). The drug may degrade rapidly (e.g. ampicillin in 5% w/v
glucose). Multiple additions may lead to precipitation of one or both of the drugs or to
accelerated degradation. Finally, drug loss may occur because of absorption by the
container. For instance, insulin is absorbed by glass or PVC, glyceryl trinitrate and
diazepam are absorbed by PVC. Apart from these problems, if the addition is not
carried out under strict aseptic conditions the fluid can become contaminated with
microorganisms during the procedure. Thus, any addition should be made in a laminar-
flow work station or isolator, preferably in the pharmacy, and the fluid administered
within 24 hours, unless prepared under strict aseptic conditions.
Another approach to the problem of providing an intravenous drug additive service
is to add the drug to a small-volume (50-100 ml) infusion in a collapsible plastic
container and store the preparation at -20°C in a freezer. The infusion can be removed
when required and thawed rapidly by microwave. Many antibiotics are stable for several
months when stored in minibags at -20°C and are unaffected by the thawing process in
a suitable microwave oven. Other antibiotics, e.g. ampicillin, are degraded when frozen.
2.2.2 Total parenteral nutrition (TPN)
Total parenteral nutrition is the use of concentrated mixtures of amino acids, vitamins,
inorganic salts and an energy source (carbohydrate or fat emulsion, e.g. soyabean oil
with lecithin as emulsifying agent) for the long-term feeding of patients who are
unconscious or unable to take food. Many hospital pharmacies operate a TPN service.
All or most of the ingredients to feed a patient for 1 day are combined in one large (3-
litre capacity) collapsible plastic bag. The contents are infused over a 12-24 hour period.
Transfer of amino acid, glucose and electrolyte infusions, and the addition of vitamins
and trace elements, must be carried out with great care under aseptic conditions to
avoid microbial contamination. These solutions often provide good growth conditions
for bacteria and moulds. Fats are administered as oil-in-water emulsions, comprising
small droplets of a suitable vegetable oil (e.g. soyabean) emulsified with egg lecithin
and sterilized by autoclaving. In many cases, the fat emulsion may be added to the 3-
litre bag.
2.3 Small-volume aqueous injections
This category comprises single-dose injections, usually of 1-2 ml but as high as 50 ml,
dispensed in borosilicate glass ampoules, plastic (polyethylene or polypropylene)
ampoules or, rarely, multidose glass vials of 5-15 ml capacity stoppered with a rubber
closure through which a hypodermic needle can be inserted, e.g. insulins, vaccines.
The closure is designed to reseal after withdrawal of the needle. It is unwise to include
too many doses in a multidose container because of the risk of microbial contamination
during repeated use. Bactericides must be added to injections in multidose containers
to prevent contamination during withdrawal of successive doses, except as detailed
below. Bactericides may not be used in injections in which the total volume to be
injected at one time exceeds 15 ml. This may occur if the solubility of a drug is such
that a therapeutic dose is only soluble in this order of volume (e.g. Bemegride Injection).
There is also an absolute prohibition on the inclusion of bactericides in injections of
414 Chapter 21
the following categories: intra-arterial, intracardiac, intrathecal or subarachnoid,
intracisternal and peridural.
Small-volume injections may be sterilized by the following methods.
1 Heating in an autoclave for injections packed in glass ampoules.
2 Filtration followed by aseptic sealing (plastic containers). Since the product is not
sterilized in its final container, a bactericide may be included to reduce the risks of
contamination.
2. 3. 1 Problems of drug stability
1 Thermostability. The choice of sterilization method depends on the thermostability
of the active ingredient, autoclaving being applied only to drugs that are heat stable in
aqueous solution.
2 Chemical stability. Some medicaments undergo chemical change in aqueous
solutions. If the change is due to oxidation, a reducing agent such as sodium
metabisulphite is included (e.g. Adrenaline Injection BP).
Aqueous solutions of some drugs are so unstable that chemical stabilization is
impossible. In this case the drug itself, not its aqueous solution, is sterilized by dry heat
(160°C for 2 hours or its equivalent at higher temperatures) in its final container and
dissolved immediately before use by the addition of sterile water (Water for Injections
BP). For drugs which are both thermolabile and unstable in aqueous solution, a sterile
solution of the drug is freeze-dried in the final container and is reconstituted as above
just before use (e.g. many antibiotics, Hyaluronidase BP).
Details of time-temperature regimens as dictated by injection volume and heat
transfer to the whole of the product (section 2.2) and of possible interactions between
active ingredients and containers must be considered (see also Chapter 20).
2.4 Small-volume oily injections
Certain small-volume injections are available where the drug is dissolved in a viscous
oil because it is insoluble in water; non-aqueous solvent must be used. In addition,
drags in non-aqueous solvents provide a depot effect, for example for hormonal
compounds. The intramuscular route of injection must be used. The vehicle may be a
metabolizable fixed oil such as arachis or sesame oil (but not a mineral oil) or an ester
such as ethyl oleate which is also metabolizable. The latter is less viscous and therefore
easier to administer but the depot effect is of shorter duration. The drug is normally
dissolved in the oil, filtered under pressure and distributed into ampoules. After sealing,
the ampoules are sterilized by dry heat, for example, at 160°C for 2 hours. A bactericide
is probably ineffective in such a medium and therefore offers very little protection
against contamination in a multidose oily injection.
Non-injectable sterile fluids
There are many other types of solution required in a sterile form for use particularly in
hospitals.
Sterile pharmaceutical products 415
3.1 Non-injectable water
This is sterile water, not necessarily of injectable water standards, which is used widely
during surgical procedures for wound irrigation, moistening of tissues, washing of
surgeons' gloves and instruments during use and, when wanned, as a haemostat. Isotonic
saline may also be used. Topical water (as it is often called) is prepared in 500-ml and
1 -litre polyethylene or polypropylene containers with a wide neck, to allow for ease
for pouring, and tear-off cap. Hospitals in the UK probably use larger quantities of
topical fluids than of intravenous infusions.
3.2 Urological (bladder) irrigation solutions
These are used for the rinsing of the urinary tract to aid tissue integrity and cleanliness
during or after surgery. Either water or glycine solution is used, the latter eliminating
the risk of intravascular haemolysis when electro surgical instruments are used. These
are sterile solutions produced in collapsible or semi-rigid plastic containers of up to 3-
litre capacity.
3.3 Peritoneal dialysis and haemodialysis solutions
Peritoneal dialysis solutions are admitted into the peritoneal cavity as a means of
removing accumulated waste or toxic products following renal failure or poisoning.
They contain electrolytes and glucose (1.4-7% w/v) to provide a solution equivalent to
potassium-free extracellular fluid. Lactate or acetate is added as a source of bicarbonate
ions. Slightly hypertonic solutions are usually employed to avoid increasing the water
content of the intravascular compartment. A more hypertonic solution, containing a
higher glucose concentration, is used to achieve a more rapid removal of water. In fact,
the peritoneal cavity behaves as if it were separated from the body organs by a semi-
permeable membrane. Warm peritoneal solution (up to 5 litres) is perfused into the
cavity for 30-90 minutes and then drained out completely. This procedure can then be
repeated as often as required. Since the procedure requires large volumes, these fluids
are commonly packed in 2.5 -litre containers. It is not uncommon to add drugs (for
instance potassium chloride or heparin) to the fluid prior to use.
Haemodialysis is the process of circulating the patient's blood through a machine
via tubing composed of a semi-permeable material such that waste products permeate
into the dialysing fluid and the blood then returns to the patient. Haemodialysis solutions
need not be sterile but must be free from heavy bacterial contamination.
3.4 Inhaler solutions
In cases of severe acute asthmatic attacks, bronchodilators and steroids for direct delivery
to the lungs may be needed in large doses. This is achieved by direct inhalation via a
nebulizer device; this converts a liquid into a mist or fine spray. The drug is diluted in
small volumes of Water for Injections BP before loading into the reservoir of the machine.
This vehicle must be sterile and preservative-free and is therefore prepared as a terminally
sterilized unit dose in polyethylene nebules.
416 Chapter 21
Ophthalmic preparations
Design philosophy
Medication intended for instillation on to the surface of the eye is formulated in aqueous
solution as eye-drops or lotion or in an oily base as an ointment. Because of the possibility
of eye infection occurring, particularly after abrasion or damage to the corneal surface,
all ophthalmic preparations must be sterile. Since there is a very poor blood supply to
the anterior chamber, defence against microbial invasion is minimal; furthermore, it
appears to provide a particularly good environment for growth of bacteria. As well as
being sterile, eye products should also be relatively free from particles which might
cause damage to the cornea. However, unlike aqueous injections, the recommended
vehicle is purified water since the presence of pyrogens (Chapter 1) is not clinically
significant.
Another type of sterile ophthalmic product is the contact lens solution (section
4.5); however, unlike the other types, this is not used for medication purposes but
merely as wetting, cleaning and soaking solutions for contact lenses.
Eye-drops
Eye-drops are presented for use in: (i) sterile single-dose plastic sachets containing
0.3-0.5 ml of liquid; (ii) multidose amber fluted eye-dropper bottles including the
rubber teat as part of the closed container or supplied separately (British Pharmacopoeia
1993); or (iii) plastic bottles with integral dropper. It should be covered with a
breakable seal to indicate that the dropper or cap has not been removed prior to initial
use. Although a standard design of bottle is used in hospitals, many proprietory products
are manufactured in plastic bottles designed to improve safety and care of use. The
maximum volume in each container is limited to 10 ml. Because of the likelihood of
microbial contamination of eye-dropper bottles during use (arising from repeated
opening or contact of the dropper with infected eye tissue or the hands of the patient),
it is essential to protect the product against inopportune contamination. Eye-drops for
surgical theatre use should be supplied in single-dose containers (British Pharmacopoeia
1993).
Examples of preservatives are: phenylmercuric nitrate or acetate (0.002% w/v),
chlorhexidine acetate (0.01 % w/v), thiomersal (0.01 % w/v) and benzalkonium chloride
(0.01 % w/v). Chlorocresol is too toxic to the corneal epithelium, but 8-hydroxyquinoline
and thiomersal may be used in specific instances. The principal consideration in relation
to antimicrobial properties is the activity of the bactericide against Pseudomonas
aeruginosa, a major source of serious nosocomial eye infections. Although benzal-
konium chloride is probably the most active of the recommended preservatives, it cannot
always be used because of its incompatibility with many compounds commonly used
to treat eye diseases, nor should it be used to preserve eye-drops containing anaesthetics.
Since benzalkonium chloride reacts with natural rubber, silicone or butyl rubber teats
should be substituted. Since silicone rubber is permeable to water vapour, products
should not be stored for more than 3 months after manufacture. As with all rubber
components, the rubber teat should be pre-equilibrated with the preservative prior to
Sterile pharmaceutical products All
use. Thermostable eye-drops and lotions are sterilized at 121°C for 15 minutes. For
thermolabile drugs, filtration sterilization followed by aseptic filling into sterile
containers is necessary. Eye-drops in plastic bottles are prepared aseptically.
In order to lessen the risk of eye-drops becoming heavily contaminated either by
repeated inoculation or growth of resistant organisms in the solution, use is restricted,
after the container is first opened, to 1 month. This is usually reduced to 7 days for
hospital ward use on one eye of a single patient. The period is shorter in the hospital
environment because of the greater danger of contamination by potential pathogens,
particularly pseudomonads.
Finally, eye-drops for use during open-eye surgery must not contain a preservative
because of their cytotoxicity. Single-dose preparations are, therefore, ideally suited for
this purpose.
4.3 Eye lotions
Eye lotions are isotonic solutions used for washing or bathing the eyes. They are sterilized
in relatively large-volume containers (100ml or greater). Eye lotions are sterilized by
autoclaving in coloured fluted glass bottles with a rubber closure and screw cap, or
plastic container with screw cap or tear-off seal. They may contain a bactericide if
intended for intermittent domiciliary use for up to 7 days. If intended for first aid or
similar purposes, however, no bactericide is included and any remaining solution
discarded after 24 hours.
4.4 Eye ointments
Eye ointments are prepared in a semi-solid base (e.g. Simple Eye Ointment BP, which
consists of yellow soft paraffin, eight parts; liquid paraffin, one part; wool fat, one
part). The base is filtered when molten to remove particles and sterilized at 160°C for
2 hours. The drug is incorporated prior to sterilization if heat stable, or added aseptically
to the sterile base. Finally, the product is aseptically packed in clear sterile aluminium
or plastic tubes. Since the product contains virtually no water, the danger of bacteria
proliferating in the ointment is negligible. Therefore, there is no recommended maximum
period during which they can be used.
4.5 Contact-lens solutions
Most contact lenses are worn for optical reasons as an alternative to spectacles.
Contact lenses are of two types, namely hard lenses, which are hydrophobic, and soft
lenses, which may be either hydrophilic or hydrophobic. The surfaces of lenses must
be wetted before use, and wetting solutions (section 4.5.1) are used for this purpose.
Hard and, more especially, soft lenses become heavily contaminated with protein
material during use and must therefore be cleaned (section 4.5.2) before disinfection
(section 4.5.3). Contact lenses are potential sources of eye infection and consequently
microorganisms should be removed before the lens is again inserted into the eye.
Lenses must also be clean and easily wettable by the lacrimal secretions. Contact-lens
solutions are thus sterile solutions of the various types described below. Apart from
418 Chapter 21
achieving their stated functions, either singly or in combination, all solutions must
be non-irritating and must protect against microbial contamination during use and
storage.
4. 5. 1 Wetting solutions
These are used to hydrate the surfaces of hard lenses after disinfection. Since they must
also cope with chance contamination, they must contain a preservative as well as a
wetting agent. They may be isotonic with lacrimal secretions and be formulated to a
pH of about 7.2 for compatibility with normal tears.
4.5.2 Cleaning solutions
These are responsible for the removal of ocular debris and protein deposits, and contain
a cleaning agent that consists of a surfactant and/or an enzyme product. Since they
must also cope with chance contamination, they contain a preservative, are isotonic,
and have a pH of about 7.2.
4.5.3 Soaking solutions
These are responsible for disinfection of lenses but also maintain the lenses in a hydrated
state. The antimicrobial agents used for disinfecting hard lenses are those used in eye-
drops (benzalkonium, chlorhexidine, phenylmercuric acetate or nitrate, thiomersal and
chlorbutol). Ethylene diamine tetra-acetic acid (EDTA) is usually present as a synergist
(see Chapter 12). Benzalkonium chloride and chlorbutol are strongly bound to
hydrophilic soft contact lenses and therefore cannot be used in storage solutions for
these. Chlorhexidine and thiomersal are usually employed. It must be added that the
concentrations of all preservatives used in contact-lens solutions are lower than those
employed in eye-drops, in order to minimize irritancy. Hydrogen peroxide is now
becoming commonly used, but must be inactivated prior to lens insertion on to the
eye.
Finally, heat may be utilized as an alternative method to disinfect soft contact lenses,
especially the hydrophilic type. Lenses are boiled in isotonic saline.
Dressings
Dressings and surgical materials are used widely in medicine, both as a means of
protecting and providing comfort for wounds and for many associated activities such
as cleaning, swabbing, etc. They may or may not be used on areas of broken skin. If
there is a potential danger of infection arising from the use of a dressing then it must be
sterile. For instance, sterile dressings must be used on all open wounds, both surgical
and traumatic, on burns and during and after catheterization at a site of injection. It is
also important to appreciate that sterile dressings must be packaged in such a way that
they can be applied to the wound aseptically.
Dressings are described in the British Pharmacopoeia (1993). Methods for their
sterilization include autoclaving, dry heat, ethylene oxide and ionizing radiation. Any
Sterile pharmaceutical products 419
Table 21.1 Uses of surgical dressings and methods of sterilization
Dressing
Uses
Method of sterilization
Required to be sterile
Chlorhexidine gauze
dressing
Framycetin gauze
dressing
Knitted viscose primary
dressing
Paraffin gauze dressing
Perforated film absorbent
dressing
Polyurethane foam
dressing
Semi-permeable adhesive
film
Sodium fusidate gauze
dressing
May be sterile for use in
certain circumstances
Absorbent cotton wool
Elastic adhesive dressing
Plastic wound dressings
Absorbent cotton gauze
Gauze pads
Absorbent viscose
wadding
Medicated open-wound
dressing, burns, grafts
Medicated open wound
dressing, burns, grafts
Ulcerative and granulating
wounds
Burns, scalds, grafts
Postoperative wounds
Burns, ulcers, grafts,
granulating wounds
Adhesive dressing for open
wounds, i.v. sites, stoma
care, etc.
Medicated open wound
dressing, burns, grafts
Swabbing, cleaning,
medication application
Protective wound dressing
Protective dressing
(permeable or occlusive)
Absorbent wound dressing
Swabbing, dressing, wound
packing
Wound cleaning, swabbing,
skin antiseptic application
Any combination of dry
heat, gamma-radiation
and ethylene oxide
Any method
Ethylene oxide or
gamma-radiation
Ethylene oxide or
gamma-radiation
Any method
Any method
Any method
other effective method may be used. The choice is governed principally by the stability
of the dressing constituents to the stress applied and the nature of their components.
Most cellulosic and synthetic fibres withstand autoclaving but there are exceptions.
For instance, boric acid tenderizes cellulose fibres during autoclaving, and dressings
containing waxes cannot be sterilized by moist heat. Certain constituents are also
adversely affected on exposure to large doses of gamma-radiation. Those dressings
that are required to be sterile are listed in Table 21.1, together with other dressings and
materials that may be sterilized when required.
A very important aspect of dressings production is packaging. The packaging
material must allow correct sterilization conditions (for example permeation of moisture
or ethylene oxide), retain the dressing in a sterile condition and allow for its removal
without contamination prior to use. All dressings intended for aseptic handling and
application must be double-wrapped. For steam sterilization they may be individually
wrapped in fabric, paper or nylon and sterilized in metal drums, cardboard boxes or
bleached Kraft paper. The choice of method also determines the design of the autoclave
cycle. Dressings may be sterilized in downward displacement autoclaves, which rely
on displacement of air by steam, or in the more modern high pre vacuum autoclaves in
which virtually all the air is removed before the admission of steam. This method
ensures rapid heating-up of the dressings, reduces the time needed to achieve sterilization
(e.g. 134°C for 3 minutes) and shortens the overall sterilization cycle.
A recent development is the use of spray-on dressings. A convenient type is an
acrylic polymer dissolved in ethyl acetate and packed as an aerosol. This should be
self-sterilizing. The film after application is able to maintain the sterility of a clean
wound for up to 2 weeks. However, they can only be used on clean, relatively dry
wounds.
Implants
Implants are small, sterile cylinders of drug, inserted beneath the skin or into muscle
tissue to provide slow absorption and prolonged action therapy. This is principally
based on the fact that such drugs, invariably hormones, are almost insoluble in water
and yet the implant provides a rate of dissolution sufficient for a therapeutic effect. The
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) describes one implant, testosterone. The United States
National Formulary (1990) also includes oestradiol. Implants are made from the pure
drug into tablet form by compression or fusion. No other ingredient can be included
since this may be insoluble or toxic or, most importantly, may influence the rate of
drug release.
Compression of sterile drugs must be conducted under aseptic conditions using
sterile machine parts and materials. After manufacture, the outer surface of the implant
is sterilized by immersion in 0.002% w/v phenylmercuric nitrate at 75 °C for 12 hours.
After the surface has been dried, each implant is placed aseptically into a sterile glass
phial with a cotton- wool plug at both ends. This prevents damage and reduces the risk
of glass spicules, formed when the phial is opened, adhering to the implant. This
compression process is not ideal. The absence of a lubricant increases the difficulties
of making tablets; the hardness of the implant is difficult to regulate, which consequently
leads to variations in the rate of drug release. The alternative method, fusion, can be
used provided the drug is heat-stable. The pure drug is melted at 5-10°C above its
melting temperature and poured into moulds. Note that if the melting temperature is
high enough the interior of the implant will automatically be sterilized by this process.
It is also possible to sterilize the implant after packaging, by dry heat, provided the
melting temperature is above 160°C. Clearly, it is easier to manufacture sterile implants
by fusion since the process does not require presterilized ingredients or aseptic
processing. The implant hardness is also very consistent.
Absorbable haemostats
The reduction of blood loss during or after surgical procedures where suturing or ligature
is either impractical or impossible can often be accomplished by the use of sterile,
absorbable haemostats. These consist of a soft pad of solid material packed around and
over the wound which can be left in situ, being absorbed by body tissues over a period
of time, usually up to 6 weeks. The principal mechanism of action of these is the ability
to encourage platelet fracture because of their fibrous or rough surfaces, and to act as a
Sterile pharmaceutical products 42 1
matrix for complete blood clotting. Four products commonly used are: oxidized
cellulose, absorbable gelatin sponge, human fibrin foam and calcium alginate.
7.1 Oxidized cellulose
This consists of cellulosic material which has been partially oxidized. White gauze is
the most common form, although lint is also used. It can be absorbed by the body in 2-
7 weeks, depending on the size. Its action is based principally on a mechanical effect
and it is used in the dry state. Since it inactivates thrombin, its activity cannot be enhanced
by thrombin incorporation.
7.2 Absorbable gelatin foam
This is an insoluble gelatin foam produced by whisking warm gelatin solution to a
uniform foam, which is then dried. It can be cut into suitable shapes, packed in metal or
paper containers and sterilized by dry heat (150°C for 1 hour). Moist heat destroys the
physical properties of the material. Immediately before use, it can be moistened with
normal saline containing thrombin. It behaves as a mechanical haemostat providing
the framework on which blood clotting can occur.
7.3 Human fibrin foam
This is a dry sponge of human fibrin prepared by clotting a foam of human fibrinogen
solution with human thrombin. It is then freeze-dried, cut into shapes and sterilized by
dry heat at 130°C for 3 hours. Before use, it is saturated with thrombin solution. Blood
coagulation occurs in contact with the thrombin in the interstices of the foam.
7.4 Calcium alginate
This is composed of the sodium and calcium salts of alginic acid formed into a powder
or fibrous material and sterilized by autoclaving. It aids clotting by forming a sodium-
calcium alginate complex in contact with tissue fluids, acting principally as a mechanical
haemostat. It is relatively slowly absorbed and some residues may occasionally remain
in the tissues.
8 Surgical ligatures and sutures
The use of strands of material to tie off blood or other vessels (ligature) and to stitch
wounds (suture) is an essential part of surgery. Both absorbable and non-ab sorb able
materials are available for this purpose.
8.1 Sterilized surgical catgut
This consists of absorbable strands of collagen derived from mammalian tissue,
particularly the intestine of sheep. Because of its source, it is particularly prone to
bacterial contamination, and even anaerobic spores may be found in such material.
422 Chapter 21
Therefore, sterilization is a particularly difficult process. Since collagen is converted
to gelatin when exposed to moist heat, autoclaving cannot be used. The official method
is to pack the 'plain' catgut strands (up to 350 cm) on a metal spindle in a glass or other
suitable container with a tubing fluid, the purpose of which is to maintain both flexibility
and tensile strength after sterilization. Probably the most suitable method is to expose
the material to gamma-radiation. There is minimal loss of tensile strength and the
container can be overwrapped prior to sterilization to provide a sterile container surface
for opening aseptically. The alternative method involves placing the coiled suture
immersed in a tubing fluid (commonly 96% ethyl alcohol with or without 0.002% w/v
phenylmercuric nitrate) and stored for sufficient time to ensure sterilization. The outer
surface of the phial must be sterilized before opening to avoid contamination of the
suture when removed. Therefore, the phial is immersed in 1% w/v formaldehyde in
ethanol for 24 hours prior to use. It cannot be heated. A non-official method of
sterilization is to immerse the catgut in a non-aqueous solvent (naphthalene or toluene)
and heat at 160°C for 2 hours. The catgut becomes hard and brittle during this process,
and is aseptically transferred to an aqueous tubing fluid to restore its flexibility and
tensile strength.
Catgut is packed in single threads, up to 350 cm in length, of various thicknesses
related to tensile strength, in single-use glass or plastic containers which cannot be
resealed after use. Any remaining material should be discarded. Hardened catgut is
prepared by treating strands with certain agents to prolong resistance to digestion. If
hardened with chromium compounds, the material is known as 'chromicized' catgut.
Non-absorbable types
Sutures and ligatures are also made from many materials not absorbed by the body
tissues. These consist of uniform strands of metal or organic material which will not
cause any tissue reactions and are capable of sterilization. Depending on the physical
stability of each material, they are preferably sterilized by autoclaving or gamma-
radiation. They are packed in single-use glass or plastic containers which may contain
a tubing fluid with or without a bactericide. The different materials are described in the
British Pharmacopoeia (1993). These include linen (adversely affected by gamma-
rays), nylon (either monofilament or plaited), silk and stainless steel (monofilament or
twisted).
Instruments and equipment
The method chosen for sterilization of instruments (see also Table 21.2) depends on
the nature of the components and the design of the item. The wide range of instruments
that may be required in a sterile condition includes syringes (glass and plastic disposable),
needles, giving sets, metal surgical instruments (scalpels, scissors, forceps, etc.), rubber
gloves, catheters, etc. Relatively complicated equipment, such as pressure transducers,
pacemakers, kidney dialysis equipment, incubators and aerosol machine parts may
also be sterilized. Artificial joints could also be included in the vast range of items
required in modern medical practice in a sterile condition. The choice of method depends
largely on the physical stability of the items and the appropriate technique in particular
Sterile pharmaceutical products 423
Table 21.2 Methods* commonly used to sterilize or disinfect equipment
Equipment
Syringes
(disposable)
Needles (all
metal)
Needles
(disposable)
Metal
instruments
(including
scalpels)
Disposable
instruments
Rubber gloves
Administration
(giving) sets
Respirator
parts
Dialysis
machines
Fragile, heat-
sensitive
equipment
Method of
treatment
Disinfection or
sterilization
Preferred
method
Comments
Syringes (glass)
Dry heat
Sterilization
Dry heat using
assembled
Autoclave not recommended:
difficulty with steam
Syringes (glass),
Moist heat
Sterilization
syringes
penetration unless plungers
dismantled
and barrels sterilized
separately
Gamma-radiation
Ethylene oxide
Dry heat
Gamma-radiation
Ethylene oxide
Autoclave
Dry heat
Gamma-radiation
Ethylene oxide
Autoclave
Gamma-radiation
Ethylene
oxide
Gamma-radiation
Ethylene oxide
Moist heat
(autoclave)
Moist heat
(low-
temperature
steam, or hot
water at
80 'C)
Chemical
Ethylene oxide
Chemical
Sterilization
Sterilization
Sterilization
Sterilization
Sterilization
Sterilization
Sterilization
Sterilization
Disinfection
Disinfection
Sterilization
Disinfection
Gamma-radiation
Dry heat
Gamma-radiation
Dry heat
Gamma-radiation
Gamma-radiation
Gamma-radiation
Sterilization by
steam where
possible
Formalin
Ethylene oxide
under expert
supervision
Possibility of 'crazing' of
syringes after ethylene oxide
Cutting edges should be
protected from mechanical
damage during the process
If autoclave used, care with
drying at end of process.
Little oxidative degradation
when high-vacuum autoclave
used
Chemicals not recommended:
may be microbiplogically
ineffective, may present
hazard to patient safety by
compromising the safety
devices on the machine
Ethylene oxide not
recommended in NHS for
practical reasons
*1 Disposable equipment should not be resterilized or re-used.
2 Ethylene oxide is a difficult process to control, and the Department of Health discourages its use in hospitals.
3 Low-temperature steam with formaldehyde is of value in the disinfection/sterilization of some heat-sensitive materials
(see also Chapter 20).
4 Chemical agents, e.g. glutaraldehyde, hypochlorite.
424 Chapter 21
situations. For instance, incubators necessitate a chemical method of sterilization. On
the other hand, even delicate instruments like pressure transducers are now available
that can withstand autoclaving. This is a new and developing field of medical technology
in which many factors may have to be considered before the choice is made as to the
most appropriate method of sterilization in any particular situation.
10 Further reading
Allwood M.C. (1990) Package design and product integrity. In: Guide to Microbiological Control in
Pharmaceuticals (eds S. Denyer & R. Baird), pp. 341-355. Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Allwood M.C. (1990) Adverse reactions to parenterals. In: Topics in Pharmacy: Formulation Factors
in Adverse Reactions (eds A.T. Florence & A.G. Salole). London: Wright.
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) and Addenda. London: HMSO.
Denyer S. & Baird R. (eds) (1990) Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals. London:
Ellis Horwood.
Pharmaceutical Codex (1993) London: Pharmaceutical Press.
European Pharmacopoeia (1997) 3rd edn. Strasbourg: Council of Europe.
Phillips I., Meers P.D. & D'Arcy P.F. (1976) Microbiological Hazards of Infusion Therapy. Lancaster:
MTP Press.
Russell A.D., Hugo W.B. & Ayliffe G.A.J. (1998) Principles and Practice of Disinfection, Preservation
and Sterilization, 3rd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Turco S. & Young R.E. (1987) Sterile Dosage Forms, 3rd edn. Easton, Philadelphia: Lea and Febiger.
United States Pharmacopoeia (1995) 23rd revision. Rockville, MD: US Pharmacopoeia Convention.
Sterile pharmaceutical products 425
Factory and hospital hygiene and
good manufacturing practice
1
Introduction
3.1.2
Internal surfaces, fittings and
1.1
Definitions
equipment
1.1.1
Manufacture
3.1.3
Services
1.1.2
Quality assurance
3.1.4
Air supply
1.1.3
Good manufacturing practice (GMP)
3.1.5
Clothing
1.1.4
Quality control
3.1.6
Changing facilities
1.1.5
In-process control
3.1.7
Cleaning and disinfection
3.1.8
Operation
2
Control of microbial contamination
3.2
Aseptic areas: additional requirements
during manufacture: general aspects
3.2.1
Clothing
2.1
Environmental cleanliness and hygiene
3.2.2
Entry to aseptic areas
2.2
Quality of starting materials
3.2.3
Equipment and operation
2.3
Process design
3.2.4
Isolator and blow/fill/seal technology
2.4
Quality control and documentation
2.5
Packaging, storage and transport
4
Guide to Good Pharmaceutical
Manufacturing Practice
3
Manufacture of sterile products
3.1
Clean and aseptic areas: general
requirements
5
Conclusions
3.1.1
Design of premises
6
Further reading
Introduction
The quality of a pharmaceutical product, whether manufactured in industry or in a
hospital, cannot be ensured solely by examining in detail a small number of units taken
from a completed batch. For instance, a low level or uneven distribution of microbial
contamination may not be detected by conventional methods of sampling and sterility
testing (Chapter 23). Instead, a product must be manufactured in a suitable environment
by a procedure which minimizes the possibility of contamination occurring, at the end
of which tests can be performed as an additional safeguard. This chapter describes
measures essential for the control, during manufacture, of one important feature of
product quality, the level of microbial contamination. It is designed to be read in
conjunction with Chapters 17, 18, 20, 21 and 23.
Definitions
Several terms used in industrial and hospital production must be defined for an
understanding of this chapter. These definitions are given in sections 1.1.1-1.1.5.
Manufacture
Manufacture is the complete cycle of production of a medical product. This cycle
includes the acquisition of all raw materials, their processing into a final product and
its subsequent packaging and distribution.
1.1.2 Quality assurance
This term refers to the sum total of the arrangements made to ensure that the final
product is of the quality required for its intended purpose. It consists of good
manufacturing practice plus factors such as original product design and development.
1.1.3 Good manufacturing practice (GMP)
Good manufacturing practice (GMP) comprises that part of quality assurance which is
aimed at ensuring that a product is consistently manufactured to a quality appropriate
to its intended use. GMP requires that: (i) the manufacturing process is fully defined
before it is commenced; and (ii) the necessary facilities are provided. In practice, this
means that personnel must be adequately trained, suitable premises and equipment
employed, correct materials used, approved procedures adopted, suitable storage and
transport facilities available and appropriate records made.
1.1.4 Quality control
Quality control refers to that part of GMP which ensures that: (i) at each stage of
manufacture the necessary tests are made; and (ii) the product is not released until it
has passed these tests.
7.7.5 In-process control
This comprises any test on a product, the environment or the equipment that is made
during the manufacturing process.
2 Control of microbial contamination during manufacture:
general aspects
A pharmaceutical product may become contaminated by various means and at different
points during the course of manufacture. There are several important ways in which
this risk can be minimized in both industrial and hospital production, and these are
considered below.
2.1 Environmental cleanliness and hygiene
Microorganisms may be transferred to a product from working surfaces, fixtures and
equipment. In this context, pooled stagnant water is a frequent source of contamination.
Thus, all premises, including processing areas, stores and laboratories, should be
maintained in a clean, dry and tidy condition. For easy cleaning, walls and ceilings
should have an impervious and washable surface, and floors should be made of
impervious materials free from cracks and open joints where microorganisms could be
Factory and hospital hygiene ATI
harboured. For the same reasons, coving should be used at the junction between walls
and floors or ceilings. All services, including pipelines, light fittings and ventilation
points, should be sited so that inaccessible recesses are avoided. Procedures for cleaning
and disinfection of premises are required and must be enforced. All equipment involved
in the manufacturing process should be easy to dismantle and clean. It should be
inspected for cleanliness before use.
Fall-out of dust- and droplet-borne microorganisms from the atmosphere is an
obvious avenue whereby contamination of products may occur; therefore, 'clean' air is
a prerequisite during manufacturing processes. In this context, the spread of dust during
manufacturing or packaging must be avoided. Microorganisms may thrive in certain
liquid preparations and in creams and ointments (Chapter 18). The manufacture of
such products should thus, as far as possible, be in a closed system; this serves a dual
purpose in that it protects the product not only against airborne microbial contamination
but also against evaporative loss.
Potentially harmful organisms could be transferred to a product by its direct contact
with personnel. High standards of personal hygiene are therefore very important,
especially where sterile products (section 3) are being manufactured. Consequently,
operatives should be free from communicable diseases and should have no open lesions
on the exposed body surfaces. To ensure high standards of personal cleanliness, adequate
handwashing facilities and protective garments, including headgear, must be provided.
Direct contact between the materials and the operative's hands must be avoided; where
necessary gloves should be worn.
Staff should be trained in the principles of GMP and in the practice (and theory) of
the tasks assigned to them. Personnel employed in the manufacture of sterile products
(section 3) should also receive basic training in microbiology.
2.2 Quality of starting materials
Raw materials, including water supplies, are an important source of microorganisms in
the manufacturing area (Chapter 17) and can lead to the contamination of both the
environment and the final product. Materials of natural origin are usually associated
with an extensive microbial flora and require careful storage to prevent growth of the
organisms and spoilage of the material. If stable, natural products with a high microbial
count may undergo sterilization before use. Staff handling raw materials must receive
adequate training to prevent the transfer of contaminants from one raw material to
another or to the final product (cross-contamination).
Water for manufacturing may be potable mains water, water purified by ion-exchange
or reverse osmosis or distillation, or water suitable for injection purposes. When required
for parenteral products it must be pyrogen-free (apyrogenic) and is usually prepared in
a specially designed still. Although pyrogens are not volatile, they are not removed by
ordinary distillation since some will be carried over mechanically into the distillate
with the entrainment (spray). Thus, a spray trap, consisting of a series of baffles, is
fitted to the distilling flask to prevent spray and pyrogens from entering the condenser
tubes. Water prepared in this manner can be used immediately for the preparation of
injections, provided that these are sterilized within 4 hours of water collection.
Alternatively, the water can be kept for longer periods at a temperature above 65 °C
428 Chapter 22
(usually 80°C) to prevent bacterial growth, with consequent pyrogen production.
Ultraviolet irradiation (Chapter 20) may be useful in reducing the bacterial content but
it is not to be regarded as a sterilizing agent.
Process design
The manufacturing process must be fully defined and capable of yielding, with the
facilities available, a product that is microbiologically acceptable and conforms to
its specifications. This demands that a process be sufficiently evaluated before
commencement to ensure that it is suitable for routine production operations. Processes
and procedures should be subject to frequent reappraisal and should be re-evaluated
when any significant changes are made in the equipment or materials used.
Quality control and documentation
Selection of starting materials with a low microbial content aids in the control
of contamination levels in the environment and the final product. One aspect of
quality control is to set acceptable microbiological standards for all raw materials,
together with microbial limits for in-process samples and the final product. Further
microbiological quality control covers the validation of cleaning and disinfecting
procedures and the monitoring of the production environment by microbial counts.
Such monitoring should be carried out whilst normal production operations are in
progress. In addition, sterile product manufacture will require extra safeguards in the
form of tests on the operator's aseptic technique and the monitoring of both air filter
and sterilizer efficiency (Chapter 23). Sterility testing (Chapter 23) on the finished
product constitutes the final check on the sterilization process. Injectable products may
also be tested for pyrogens.
A system of documentation should exist such that the history of each batch of the
product, including details of starting materials, packaging materials, and intermediate,
bulk and finished products, may be determined. Distribution records must be kept.
This information is of paramount importance should a defective batch need to be recalled.
Packaging, storage and transport
Even when a product has been prepared under stringent conditions such as those outlined
above, contamination could still arise during storage and transport. For this reason, the
packaging used and the conditions employed during storage and transportation should
be such as to minimize or, preferably, prevent deterioration or contamination.
Manufacture of sterile products
Sterilization methods have been discussed in Chapter 20 and the various types of sterile
products have been described in Chapter 2 1 . For manufacturing purposes an important
distinction exists between a sterile product which is terminally sterilized and one which
is not. Terminally sterilized means that, after preparation, the product is transferred to
containers which are sealed and then immediately sterilized by heat (or radiation or
Factory and hospital hygiene 429
ethylene oxide, as appropriate). In general, such a product must be prepared in a clean
area (sections 3. 1 . 1-3. 1 .8). A product which is not to be terminally sterilized is prepared
under aseptic conditions either from previously sterilized materials or by filtration
sterilization. In either case, filling into sterilized final containers is a post-sterilization
manipulation. Strict aseptic conditions are needed throughout (sections 3.2.1-3.2.4).
Vaccines consisting of dead microorganisms, microbial extracts or inactivated viruses
(see Chapter 16) may be filled in the same premises as other sterile medicinal products.
The completeness of inactivation (or killing or removal of live organisms) must be
proven before processing. Separate premises are needed for the filling of live or
attenuated vaccines and for the preparation of biological medicinal products derived
from live organisms (Chapter 16). Non-sterile products should not be processed in the
same areas as sterile products.
3.1 Clean and aseptic areas: general requirements
3.1.1 Design of premises
Sterile production should be carried out in a purpose-built unit separated from other
manufacturing areas and thoroughfares. The unit should be designed to encourage the
segregation of each stage of production but should ensure a safe and organized workflow
(Fig. 22.1). Sterilized products held in quarantine pending sterility test results (Chapter
23) must be kept separate from those awaiting sterilization.
3.1.2 Internal surfaces, fittings and equipment
Particulate, as well as microbial, contamination must be guarded against when sterile
products are being manufactured. Thus, walls, ceilings and floors should possess smooth,
impervious surfaces which will: (i) prevent the accumulation of dust or other particulate
matter; and (ii) allow for easy and repeated cleaning and disinfection. For the same
reasons, where walls and floors or ceilings meet, covings should be used.
A suitable flooring material is provided for by welded sheets of polyvinyl chloride
(PVC); cracks and open joints, which may harbour dirt and microorganisms, must be
eliminated. The preferred surface materials for walls are plastic, epoxy-coated plaster,
plastic fibreglass or glass-reinforced polyester. Frequently, the final finish for floor,
wall and ceiling is achieved using continuous welded PVC sheeting. False ceilings
must be adequately sealed to prevent contamination from the space above them. Use
should be made of well-sealed glass panels, especially in dividing walls, to ensure
good visibility and satisfactory supervision. Doors and windows should fit flush with
the walls. Windows should not be openable.
Internal fittings such as cupboards, drawers and shelves must be kept to a minimum.
These may be made from stainless steel or a laminated plastic, which may be easily
cleaned or disinfected; bare wood is to be avoided, although painted or otherwise sealed
woodwork may be satisfactory. Stainless steel trolleys can be used to transport equipment
and materials within the clean and aseptic areas but these must remain confined to their
respective units. Equipment should be so designed as to be easily cleaned and sterilized
(or disinfected).
430 Chapter 22
Changing
ar#a i
Staff - — -
IngrediantJ — ■ "
Sl«rillfcation+>
Assptic ire-a
Weiflhing
B
4ti)
Mixing and preparation
4[»i)
Filling
1 ■ l ■ H A + 1 4 a 4 B •■ r I-
t t
4(ii)
*[iv)
Wash
Containers
Fig. 22.1 Example of a diagrammatic representation of the layout and workflow of a sterile products
manufacturing unit: 1, The changing area in this example is built on the black (A)-grey (B)- white
(C) principle; passage into the clean area is through A and B (see section 3.1.6) whereas entry to the
aseptic area is first through A and B followed by C (see section 3.2.2). 2, Dividing step-over sill.
3, For details of aseptic area requirements, see text; a laminar airflow work station would be
included in this area. 4i — 4iv, These areas are clean areas. In filling rooms for terminally sterilized
products, care should be exercised to protect containers from airborne contamination. The final rinse
point (i.e. where the containers are finally washed) should be sited as near as possible to the filling
point. 5, Articles which are to be transferred directly to the aseptic area from elsewhere must be
sterilized by passage through a double-ended sterilizer. Solutions manufactured in the clean area may
be brought into the aseptic area through a sterilizing-grade membrane filter. 6, Double-doored
hatchway through which presterilized articles may be passed into the aseptic area (see section 3.2.3).
Note: Inspection, holding and final packaging areas have been omitted. Direction of workflow:
— • — , for terminally sterilized products; •••>•••, for aseptically prepared products; — • — , shared
stages of preparation.
Factory and hospital hygiene 43 1
3.1.3
Services
3.1.4
Clean and aseptic areas must be adequately illuminated; lights are best housed above
transparent panels set in a false ceiling. Electrical switches and sockets should fit flush
to the wall. When required, gases should be piped into the area from outside the unit.
Pipes and ducts, if they have to be brought into the clean area, must be effectively
sealed through the walls. Additionally they must either be boxed in (which prevents
dust accumulation) or readily cleanable. Alternatively, pipes and ducts may be sited
above false ceilings.
Sinks supplied to clean areas should be made of stainless steel and have no overflow,
and the water should be of at least potable quality. Wherever possible, drains in clean
areas should be avoided. If installed, however, they should be fitted with effective,
easily cleanable traps and with air breaks to prevent backflow. Any floor channels in a
clean area should be open, shallow and cleanable and should be connected to drains
outside the area. They should be monitored microbiologically. Sinks and drains should
be excluded from aseptic areas except where radiopharmaceutical products are being
processed when sinks are a requirement.
Air supply
Areas for the manufacture of sterile products are classified according to the required
characteristics of the environment. Each manufacturing operation requires an appropriate
level of microbial and particulate cleanliness; four grades (Table 22.1) are specified in
the Rules and Guidance for Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Distributors (1997),
defined by measures of airborne contamination (Table 22.2). Environmental quality is
substantially influenced by the air supplied to the manufacturing environment.
Filtered air (Chapter 17) is used to achieve the necessary standards; this should be
maintained at positive pressure throughout a clean or aseptic area, with the highest
Table 22.1 Environmental grades and typical manufacturing operations
Typical operations
Area
Environmental
Aseptically prepared
Terminally sterilized
designation in
grade
products
products (TSP)
Fig. 22.1
A
Aseptic preparation and
Filling of products at
3
filling in a protective
particular
work unit
microbiological risk
B
Background
Background
3
environment to grade A
environment to grade A
preparation areas
preparation areas
C
Preparation of solutions
Preparation of 'at risk'
4ii
to be filtered
solutions
Filling of products
4ii
D
Handling of
Preparation of solutions
4iv (aseptic)
components after
and components for
washing
subsequent filling
4ii (TSP)
432 Chapter 22
Table 22.2 Basic operating standards for the manufacture of sterile products
Operating standards*
Maximum permitted number of airborne
particles/m 3 equal to or above specified size Recommended limit of vie)ble
Environmental • .
airborne microorganisms
grade 0.5um 5um (cfu rrr )
A 3500 <1
B 350000 2000 10
C 3500000 20000 100
D ND ND 200
* Particulate burdens for the manufacturing environment 'at rest' are more rigorous for grades B, C
andD.
ND, not defined.
pressure in the most critical rooms (aseptic or clean filling rooms) and a progressive
reduction through the preparation and changing rooms (Fig. 22.1); a minimum 10-kPa
pressure differential is normally required between each class of room. A minimum of
20 air changes per hour is usual in clean and aseptic rooms. The air inlet points should
be situated in or near the ceiling, with the final filters placed as close as possible to the
point of input to the room.
The greatest risk of contamination of a pharmaceutical product comes from its
immediate environment. Additional protection from particulate and microbial
contamination is therefore essential in both the filling area of the clean room and in the
aseptic unit. This can be provided by a protective work station supplied with a
unidirectional flow of filtered sterile air. Such a facility is known as a laminar airflow
unit in which the displacement of air is either horizontal (i.e. from back to front)
or vertical (i.e. from top to bottom) with a minimum homogenous airflow rate of
0.45 ms" 1 at the working position. Thus, airborne contamination is not added to the
work space and any generated by manipulations within that area is swept away by the
laminar air currents.
The efficacy of the filters through which the air is passed should be monitored at
predetermined intervals (Chapter 17).
3.1.5 Clothing
Cotton material is comfortable to wear but because of the possibility of the shedding of
fibres it is regarded as being unsuitable in the present context. Terylene, which sheds
virtually no fibres, is suitable. Airborne particulate and microbial contamination is
reduced when trouser suits, close-fitting at the neck, wrists and ankles, are worn. Clean
suits for clean areas should be provided at least once daily, but fresh headwear, overshoes
and powder-free gloves are necessary for each working session. Special laundering
facilities for this clothing is desirable. Additional requirements for clothing worn in
grade A/B areas are considered in section 3.2.1.
Factory and hospital hygiene 433
3.1.6
3.1.7
Changing facilities
Entry to clean or aseptic areas should be through a changing room fitted with interlocking
doors; this acts as an airlock to prevent the influx of air from outside. This access route
is intended for personnel only and does not constitute a means for regularly transferring
materials and equipment into these areas. Staff entering the changing rooms should
already be clad in the standard factory or hospital protective garments.
For a clean area, passage through the changing room should be from a 'black' area
to a 'grey area', via a dividing step-over sill (Fig. 22. 1). Movement through these areas
and finally into the clean room is permitted only on observance of a strict protocol. In
this, outer garments are removed in the 'black' area and clean-room trouser suits donned
in the 'grey' area. After handwashing in a sink fitted with hand or foot-operated taps
the operator may enter the clean room.
The changing procedure for personnel entering an aseptic area is dealt with in
section 3.2.2.
Cleaning and disinfection
A strict cleaning and disinfection policy is essential if microbial contamination is to be
kept to a minimum. Cleaning agents include alkaline detergents and ionic and non-
ionic surfactants. A wide range of disinfectants is available commercially (Chapter 10)
and a selection of those suitable for use in the sterile product manufacturing environment
is given in Table 22.3. Different types of disinfectants should be employed in rotation
to help prevent the development of resistant strains of microorganisms. In-use dilutions
should not be stored unless sterilized. Disinfectants and detergents for use in grade
A/B areas must be sterile prior to use.
As already mentioned, smooth, polished surfaces are cleaned most easily. Floors
and horizontal surfaces should be cleaned and disinfected daily, walls and ceilings as
often as required, but the interval should not exceed 1 month. Regular microbiological
monitoring should be carried out to determine the efficacy of disinfection procedures.
Records should be kept and immediate remedial action taken should normal levels for
that area be exceeded.
3.1.8
Operation
The number of persons involved in sterile manufacturing should be as small as possible
Table 22.3 Disinfectants used during the manufacture of sterile products
Disinfectant
Application
Clear soluble phenols
Halogens, e.g. sodium hypochlorite
Alcohols: ethanol or isopropanol (usually
as 70% solutions)
Cationic agents (usually in 70% alcohol),
e.g. cetrimide, chlorhexidine
Interior surfaces and fittings
Working surfaces (limited use)
Working surfaces, equipment, gloved
hands (rapid action)
Skin, gloved hands (rapid action with
residual activity)
434 Chapter 22
so as to avoid the inevitable turbulence and shedding of particles and organisms
associated with operatives. All operations should be undertaken in a controlled and
methodical manner as excessive activity may also increase turbulence and shedding of
particles and organisms.
Containers made from fibrous materials such as paper, cardboard and sacking, are
generally heavily contaminated (especially with moulds and bacterial spores) and should
not be taken into clean or aseptic areas where fibres or microorganisms shed from them
could contaminate the product. Ingredients which must be brought into clean areas
must first be transferred to suitable metal or plastic containers.
Containers and closures for terminally sterilized products must be thoroughly cleaned
before use and should undergo a final washing and rinsing process in apyrogenic distilled
water (which has been passed through a bacteria-proof membrane filter) immediately
prior to filling. Those containers and closures destined for use in aseptic manufacture
must, in addition, be sterilized after washing and rinsing in preparation for aseptic
filling.
3.2 Aseptic areas: additional requirements
Additional requirements for aseptic areas, over and above those discussed in sections
3.1.1-3.1.8, are considered below.
3.2.1 Clothing
Section 3. 1.5 considered the general requirements for clothing. Additional requirements
are demanded for aseptic areas. Since the operative is a potential source of contamination,
it is axiomatic that steps must be taken to minimize this. Accordingly, the operative
must wear sterile protective clothing including headwear (which should totally enclose
hair and beard), powder-free rubber or plastic gloves, a non-fibre-shedding facemask
(to prevent the release of droplets) and footwear. A suitable garment is a single or two-
piece trouser suit. Fresh sterile clothing should normally be provided each time a person
enters an aseptic area.
3.2.2 Entry to aseptic areas
Entry to an aseptic suite is usually by a 'black-grey-white' changing procedure. In
this scheme, progress through from 'black' to 'white' represents passage into areas of
increasing cleanliness, with the 'grey' area acting as an intermediate stage before entry
to the 'white' (aseptic) changing area. Movement from 'black' to 'white' is generally
through two changing rooms, the 'grey' area also serving as an entry to the clean room
(Fig. 22.1 and section 3.1.6). In the 'black' area, the operative removes outer shoes and
clothing, swings the legs over a dividing sill and dons slippers. He or she then enters
the 'grey' area where, after washing, hands and forearms are dried, a sterile hood and
mask donned, and the hands and forearms rewashed and redried. The operative next
enters the 'white' area where a sterile-area suit, overboots and gloves are put on; the
gloved hands are rinsed in a disinfectant solution. The aseptic area may then be entered
and work commenced.
Factory and hospital hygiene 435
3.2.3 Equipment and operation
Articles which are to be discharged from the clean room (or elsewhere) to the aseptic
area must be sterilized. To achieve this they should be transferred via a double-ended
sterilizer (i.e. with a door at each end). If it is not possible, or required, that they be
discharged directly to the aseptic area, they should be (i) double-wrapped before
sterilization; (ii) transferred immediately after sterilization to a clean environment until
required; and (iii) transferred from this clean environment via a double-doored hatch
(where the outer wrapping is removed) to the aseptic area (where the inner wrapper is
removed at the workbench). Hatchways and sterilizers should be arranged so that only
one side of the entry into an aseptic area may be opened at any one time. Solutions
manufactured in the clean room may be brought into the aseptic area through a sterile
0.22-/im bacteria-proof membrane filter.
Workbenches, including laminar airflow units, and equipment, should be disinfected
immediately before and after each work period. Equipment used should be of the simplest
design possible commensurate with the operation being undertaken.
Aseptic manipulations should be performed in the sterile air of a laminar airflow
unit. Speed, accuracy and simplicity of movement, in accordance with a complete
understanding of what is required, are essential features of a good aseptic technique.
Under no circumstances should living cultures of microorganisms, whether they be
for vaccine preparation (Chapter 16) or for use in monitoring sterilization processes
(Chapter 23), be taken into aseptic areas. As already pointed out, separate premises are
needed for the aseptic filling of live or of attenuated vaccines.
3.2.4 Isolator and blow/fill/seal technology
Advances in technology now permit self-contained work stations to be created which
incorporate many of the design principles of clean rooms and laminar air flow units.
Isolators are designed to minimize direct human interventions in processing areas by
internally providing grade A positive-pressure zoned laminar air flow and transfer
devices accessed by means of a glove/sleeve system. As the name suggests, the work
area can be isolated from the surrounding environment and a controlled background of
grade D is usually adequate for aseptic processing in an isolator. Blow/fill/seal units
are purpose-built machines providing, in one continuous operation, the automated
formation of containers from thermoplastic granules, their subsequent filling and heat
sealing. For aseptic production, these are fitted with a grade A air shower and operated
in a grade C environment; for products subject to terminal sterilization a background
grade D environment is sufficient.
4 Guide to Good Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Practice
Between 1971 and 1983 the essential features of GMP were covered in the UK by three
editions of the Guide to Good Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Practice. This guide
was prepared by the UK Medicines Inspectorate in consultation with industrial, hospital,
professional and other interested parties. The principles of this national guide were
subsequently assimilated into the EC Guide to Good Manufacturing Practice for
436 Chapter 22
Medicinal Products in 1989 and are now published in the UK as Rules and Guidance
for Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Distributors (1997) by the Medicines Control
Agency, Department of Health.
Compliance with the principles of GMP is one of the major factors considered
by the Licensing Authority when examining an application for a licence to manu-
facture under the Medicines Act (1968). Similar codes exist in the USA and other
countries.
Conclusions
The sole objective of all hygiene and manufacturing controls is to ensure the quality of
the pharmaceutical product for the safety and protection of the patient. The manufacture
of non-sterile pharmaceutical products requires that certain criteria of cleanliness,
personal hygiene, production methods and storage must be met. Many such products
are for oral and topical use and the question may fairly be posed as to the point of what
are now quite stringent conditions. Nevertheless, some carefully controlled hospital
studies have indeed shown that both types of medicine may be associated with
nosocomial (hospital-acquired) infections and this risk can be minimized by the
application of GMP principles.
A greater degree of stringency is required for the production of terminally sterilized
products. Again, as the final product is subjected to a sterilization process (usually
thermal), it may be asked why so much emphasis is placed upon process and
environmental controls. The single most important reason is to ensure the lowest possible
microbial burden to the sterilizer, thereby ensuring the highest sterility assurance levels
attainable (Chapter 20). It must also be realized (as reiterated in Chapter 23) that it is
far better to control a process from beginning to end, i.e. with frequent checks all along
the line, than to rely solely on tests which can only determine whether a small proportion
of the final products in a batch are satisfactory.
Even further criteria must be satisfied when products are being prepared aseptically
where microbiological quality is entirely dependent upon observance of the highest
possible production standards. It is essential that operatives have a sound working
knowledge of the properties of microorganisms, and that they appreciate the importance
of personal hygiene, of the techniques that will be adopted, and of the possible sources
of contamination and error. In this respect, it is a sobering thought to realize that the
great majority of reported defective medicinal products has resulted from human error
or carelessness, not from technology failure.
Further reading
Denyer S.P. (1988) Clinical consequence?, of microbial action on medicines. In: Biodeterioration (eds
D.R. Houghton, R.N. Smith & H.O W. Eggins), vol. 7, pp. 146-151. London: Elsevier Applied
Science.
Denyer S.R (1992) Filtration sterilization. In: Principles and Practice of Disinfection, Preservation
and Sterilization, 2nd edn (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J. Ayliffe), pp. 573-604. Oxford:
Blackwell Science.
Denyer S.R & Baird R.M. (eds) (1990) Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood. (Chapters 4 and 5 provide additional information.)
Factory and hospital hygiene 437
Neiger J. (1997) Life with the UK pharmaceutical isolator guidelines: a manufacturer's viewpoint. Eur
J Parenteral Sci, 2, 13-20.
Ringertz O. & Ringertz S.H. (1982) The clinical significance of microbial contamination in
pharmaceutical and allied products. Adv Pharm Sci, 5, 201-226.
Rules and Guidance for Pharmaceutical Manufacturers and Distributors (1997) London: HMSO.
Spooner D.F. (1996) Hazards associated with the microbiological contamination of cosmetics, toiletries
and non- sterile pharmaceuticals. In: Microbial Quality Assurance in Cosmetics, Toiletries and Non-
sterile Pharmaceuticals, 2nd edn (eds R.M. Baird & S.F. Bloomfield), pp. 9-27. London: Taylor &
Francis.
Underwood E. (1992) Good manufacturing practice. In: Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 2nd edn (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J. Ayliffe), pp. 274-
29 1 . Oxford: Blackwell Science.
United States Pharmacopeia (1995) 23rd revision. Rockville, MD: US Pharmacopeial Convention.
(Note the section dealing with microbial limit tests.)
Sterilization control and
sterility assurance
Introduction
Bioburden determinations
Environmental monitoring
Sterilization monitors
Physical indicators
Chemical indicators
Biological indicators
Sterility testing
Methods
Antimicrobial agents
5.2.1 Specific inactivation
5.2.2 Dilution
5.2.3 Membrane filtration
5.3 Positive controls
5.4 Specific cases
5.5 Sampling
6 Conclusions
7 Acknowledgements
8 Further reading
Introduction
A product to be labelled 'sterile' must be free of viable microorganisms. To achieve
this, the product, or its ingredients, must undergo a sterilization process of sufficient
microbiocidal capacity to ensure a minimum level of sterility assurance (Chapter 20).
It is essential that the required conditions for sterilization be achieved and maintained
through every operation of the sterilizer.
Historically, the quality control of sterile products consisted largely, or, in some
cases, even exclusively, of a sterility test, to which the product was subjected at the end
of the manufacturing process. However, a growing awareness of the limitations of
sterility tests in terms of their ability to detect low concentrations of microorganisms,
has resulted in a shift in emphasis from a crucial dependence on end-testing to a situation
in which the conferment of the status 'sterile' results from the attainment of satisfactory
quality standards throughout the whole manufacturing process. In other words, the
quality is 'assured' by a combination of process monitoring and performance criteria;
these may be considered under four headings:
Bioburden determinations (section 2)
Environmental monitoring (section 3)
In-process monitoring of sterilization procedures (section 4)
Sterility testing (section 5).
In well-understood and well-characterized sterilization processes (e.g. heat and
irradiation), where physical measurements may be accurately made, sterility can be
assured by ensuring that the manufacturing process as a whole conforms to the
established protocols for the first three of the above headings. In this case the process
has satisfied the required parameters thereby permitting parametric release of the
product without recourse to a sterility test.
Sterilization control and sterility assurance 439
This chapter will discuss briefly the principles and applications of the various
methods of monitoring and validating sterilization processes.
Bioburden determinations
The term 'bioburden' is used to describe the concentration of microorganisms in a
material; this may be either a total number of organisms per millilitre or per gram,
regardless of type, or a breakdown into such categories as aerobic bacteria or yeasts
and moulds. Bioburden determinations are normally undertaken by the supplier of the
raw material, whose responsibility it is to ensure that the material supplied conforms
to the agreed specification, but they may also be checked by the recipient. The
maximum permitted concentrations of contaminants may be those specified in various
pharmacopoeias or the levels established by the manufacturer during product development.
The level of sterility assurance which is achieved in a terminally sterilized
product is dependent upon the design of the sterilization process itself and upon
the bioburden immediately prior to sterilization (see Chapter 19). However, the
adoption of high standards for the quality of the raw materials is not, in itself, a strategy
which will ensure that the product has an acceptably low bioburden immediately prior
to sterilization. It is necessary also to ensure that the opportunities for microbial
contamination during manufacture are restricted (see below), and those organisms that
are present initially do not normally find themselves in conditions conducive to
growth. It is for these reasons that manufacturing processes are designed to utilize
adverse temperatures, extreme pH values and organic solvent exposures in order to
prevent an increase in the microbial load. For example, water is the most common,
and potentially the most significant, source of contamination in the manufactured
product, and maintenance of water at elevated temperatures is commonly employed as
a means of limiting the growth of organisms such as Pseudomonas spp. which can
proliferate during storage, even in distilled or deionized water. Precautions such as
these ensure that chemically synthesized raw materials have bioburdens which are
generally much lower than those found in 'natural' products of animal, vegetable or
mineral origin.
Environmental monitoring
The levels of microbial contamination in the manufacturing areas (Chapter 22) are
monitored on a regular basis to confirm that the numbers do not exceed specified limits.
The concentrations of bacteria and of yeasts/moulds in the atmosphere may be
determined either by use of 'settle plates' (Petri dishes of suitable media exposed for
fixed periods, on which the colonies are counted after incubation) or by use of air
samplers which cause a known volume of air to be passed over the agar surface.
Similarly, the contamination on surfaces, including manufacturing equipment, may be
measured using swabs or contact plates (also known as Rodac — replicate organism
detection and counting — plates) which are specially designed Petri dishes slightly
overfilled with agar, which, when set, projects very slightly above the plastic wall of
the dish. This permits the plate to be inverted onto, or against, any solid surface, thereby
allowing transfer of organisms from the surface onto the agar.
440 Chapter 23
Less commonly, environmental monitoring can extend also to the operators in the
manufacturing area whose clothing, e.g. gloves or face masks, may be sampled in
order to estimate the levels and types of organisms which may arise as product
contaminants from those sources.
Sterilization monitors
Monitoring of the sterilization process can be achieved by the use of physical, chemical
or biological indicators of sterilizer performance. Such indicators are frequently
employed in combination.
Physical indicators
In heat-sterilization processes, a temperature record chart is made of each sterilization
cycle with both dry and moist heat (i.e. autoclave) sterilizers; this chart forms part of
the batch documentation and is compared against a master temperature record (MTR).
It is recommended that the temperature be taken at the coolest part of the loaded sterilizer.
Further information on heat distribution and penetration within a sterilizer can be gained
by the use of thermocouples placed at selected sites in the chamber or inserted directly
into test packs or bottles. Since autoclaving depends also upon steam under pressure as
well as temperature, pressure measurements form an essential part of the physical
monitoring of this process. In addition, periodic leak tests are performed on pre vacuum
steam sterilizers to assess the efficiency of air removal prior to the introduction of
steam.
For gaseous sterilization procedures, elevated temperatures are monitored for each
sterilization cycle by temperature probes, and routine leak tests are performed to ensure
gas-tight seals. Pressure and humidity measurements are recorded. Gas concentration
is measured independently of pressure rise, often by reference to weight of gas used.
In radiation sterilization, aplastic (often perspex) dosimeter which gradually darkens
in proportion to the radiation absorbed gives an accurate measure of the radiation dose
and is considered to be the best technique currently available for following the
radiosterilization process.
Sterilizing filters are subject to a bubble point pressure test, which is a technique
employed for determining the pore size of filters, and may also be used to check the
integrity of certain types of filter device (membrane and sintered glass; see Chapter 20)
immediately after use. The principle of the test is that the wetted filter, in its assembled
unit, is subjected to an increasing air or nitrogen gas pressure differential. The pressure
difference recorded when the first bubble of gas breaks away from the filter is related
to the maximum pore size. When the gas pressure is further increased slowly, there is a
general eruption of bubbles over the entire surface. The pressure difference here is
related to the mean pore size. A pressure differential below the expected value would
signify a damaged or faulty filter. A modification to this test for membrane filters involves
measuring the diffusion of gas through a wetted filter at pressures below the bubble
point pressure (diffusion rate test); a faster diffusion rate than expected would again
indicate a loss of filter integrity. In addition, a filter is considered ineffective when an
unusually rapid rate of filtration occurs.
Sterilization control and sterility assurance 441
4.2
Efficiency testing of high-efficiency particulate air (HEP A) filters used for the supply
of sterile air to aseptic workplaces (Chapter 22) is normally achieved by the generation
upstream of dioctylphthalate (DOP) or sodium chloride particles of known dimension,
followed by detection in downstream filtered air. Retention efficiency is recorded as
the percentage of particles removed under defined test conditions. Microbiological
tests are not normally performed.
Chemical indicators
Chemical monitoring of a sterilization process is based on the ability of heat, steam,
sterilant gases and ionizing radiation to alter the chemical and/or physical characteristics
of a variety of chemical substances. Ideally, this change should take place only when
satisfactory conditions for sterilization prevail, thus confirming that a sterilization cycle
has been successfully completed. In practice, however, the ideal indicator response is
Fig. 23.1 Examples of biological and chemical indicators used for monitoring sterilization
processes. (A and B) A spore strip (in a glassine envelope) and a spore disc, respectively; the spores
are dried onto absorbent paper or fabric. (C) Attest™ indicator comprising a plastic vial containing a
spore strip together with a sealed glass ampoule of culture medium; the ampoule is crushed after
exposure and the medium immerses the strip. (D) Chemspor™ indicator in which bacterial spores
are suspended in culture medium; the horizontal band on the ampoule also darkens on autoclaving to
enable steam-exposed and non-exposed ampoules to be distinguished. (E) Plastic carrier with dried
Bacillus stearothermophilus spores designed for monitoring low-temperature steam and
formaldehyde cycles. (F) Browne's tube™; the liquid within the tube changes colour on heat
exposure. (G) Thermalog™ strip in which a blue dye progresses from left to right during heat
exposure. (H) Chemdi™ displays colour change in arrowed section of the strip after heating.
(I) Chemspor™ which is a combined chemical and biological indicator; the ampoule contains a
spore suspension in culture medium together with a second, smaller ampoule which contains a
chemical indicator.
442 Chapter 23
4.3
not always achieved and so a necessary distinction is made between (i) those chemical
indicators which integrate several sterilization parameters (i.e. temperature, time and
saturated steam) and closely approach the ideal; and (ii) those which measure only one
parameter and consequently can only be used to distinguish processed from unprocessed
articles. Thus, indicators which rely on the melting of a chemical substance show that
the temperature has been attained but not necessarily maintained.
Chemical indicators generally undergo melting or colour changes (some examples
are given in (Fig. 23.1)), the relationship of this change to the sterilization process
being influenced by the design of the test device (Table 23.1). It must be remembered,
however, that the changes recorded do not necessarily correspond to microbiological
sterility and consequently the devices should never be employed as sole indicators in a
sterilization process. Nevertheless, when included in strategically placed containers or
packages, chemical indicators are valuable monitors of the conditions prevailing at the
coolest or most inaccessible parts of a sterilizer.
Biological indicators
Biological indicators (Bis) for use in thermal, chemical or radiation sterilization
processes consist of standardized bacterial spore preparations which are usually in the
form either of suspensions in water or culture medium or of spores dried on paper,
aluminium or plastic carriers. As with chemical indicators, they are usually placed in
dummy packs located at strategic sites in the sterilizer. Alternatively, for gaseous
sterilization these may also be placed within a tubular helix (Line-Pickerill) device.
After the sterilization process, the aqueous suspensions or spores on carriers are
aseptically transferred to an appropriate nutrient medium which is then incubated and
periodically examined for signs of growth. Spores of Bacillus stearothermophilus in
sealed ampoules of culture medium are used for steam sterilization monitoring, and
these may be incubated directly at 55 °C; this eliminates the need for an aseptic transfer.
Table 23.1 Examples of chemical indicators for monitoring sterilization processes
Sterilization
method
Principle
Device
Parameter(s)
monitored
Heat
Autoclaving or
dry heat
Dry heat only
Temperature-sensitive
coloured solution
Temperature-sensitive
chemical
Sealed tubes partly filled with a
solution which changes colour at
elevated temperatures; rate of
colour change is proportional to
temperature, e.g. Browne's tubes
Usually a temperature-sensitive
white wax concealing a black
marked or printed (paper) surface;
at a predetermined temperature the
wax rapidly melts exposing the
background mark(s)
Temperature, time
Temperature
Continued on p. 444
Sterilization control and sterility assurance 443
Table 23.1 Continued!
Sterilization
method
Principle
Device
Parameter(s)
monitored
Heating in an
autoclave only
Steam-sensitive
chemical
Capillary principle
(Thermalog S)
Usually an organic chemical in a
printing ink base impregnated into a
carrier material. A combination of
moisture and heat produces a
darkening ofthe ink, e.g. autoclave
tape. Devices of this sort can be
used within dressings packs to
confirm adequate removal of air and
penetration of saturated steam
(Bowie-Dick test)
Consists of a blue dye in a waxy
pellet, the melting-point of which is
depressed in the presence of
saturated steam. At autoclaving
temperatures, and in the continued
presence of steam, the pellet melts
and travels along a paper wick
forming a blue band the length of
which is dependent upon both
exposure time and temperature
Saturated steam
Temperature,
saturated steam, time
Gaseous
sterilization
Ethylene oxide
(EO)
Low
temperature
steam and
formaldehyde
Reactive chemical
Capillary principle
(Thermalog G)
Reactive chemical
Indicator paper impregnated with a
reactive chemical which undergoes a
distinct colour change on reaction
with EO in the presence of heat and
moisture. With some devices rate of
colour development varies with
temperature and EO concentration
Based on the same 'migration along
wick' principle as Thermalog S.
Optimum response in a cycle of
600 mgl" 1 EO, temperature 54 °C, rh
40-80%. Lower EO levels and/or
temperature will slow response time,
blue colour of band is fugitive at rh
<30%
Indicator paper impregnated with a
formaldehyde-, steam- and
temperature-sensitive reactive
chemical which changes colour
during the sterilization process
Gas concentration,
temperature, time
(selected devices); NB
a minimum relative
humidity (rh) is
required for device to
function
Gas concentration,
temperature, time
(selected cycles)
Gas concentration,
temperature, time
(selected cycles)
Radiation
sterilization
Radiochromic
chemical
Dosimeter device
Plastic devices impregnated with
radiosensitive chemicals which
undergo colour changes at relatively
low radiation doses
Acidified ferric ammonium sulphate
or eerie sulphate solutions respond
to irradiation by dose-related
changes in their optical density (see
also section 2.1.3)
Only indicate
exposure to radiation
Accurately measure
radiation doses
Aseptic transfers are also avoided by the use of self-contained units where the spore
strip and nutrient medium are present in the same device ready for mixing after use.
The bacterial species to be used in a BI must be selected carefully, since it must
be non-pathogenic and should possess above-average resistance to the particular
sterilization process. Resistance is adjudged from the spore destruction curve obtained
upon exposure to the sterilization process; recommended BI spores and their decimal
reduction times (D-values; Chapter 20) are shown in Table 23.2. Great care must be
taken in the preparation and storage of Bis to ensure a standardized response to
sterilization processes. Indeed, while certainly offering the most direct method of
monitoring sterilization processes, it should be realized that Bis may be less reliable
monitors than physical methods and are not recommended for routine use, except in
the case of gaseous sterilization.
One of the long-standing criticisms of Bis is that the incubation period required in
order to confirm a satisfactory sterilization process imposes an undesirable delay on
the release of the product. This problem has been overcome, with respect to steam
sterilization at least, by the use of a detection system in which a spore enzyme, a-
glucosidase (reflective of spore viability), converts a non-fluorescent substrate into a
fluorescent product in as little as lhour.
Filtration sterilization requires a different approach from biological monitoring,
the test effectively measuring the ability of a filter to produce a sterile filtrate from a
culture of a suitable organism. For this purpose, Serratia marcescens, a small Gram-
negative rod-shaped bacterium (minimum dimension 0.5 fim), has been recommended
in the Pharmaceutical Codex (1979). The bacterial challenge test is the most severe to
which a filter of any construction can be subjected. In the membrane- filter industry, the
test using Ser. marcescens is usually reserved for filters of 0.45-jUm pore size, and a
more rigorous test involving Brevundimonas diminuta — formerly Pseudomonas
diminuta — having a minimum dimension of 0.3 jjxa is applied to filters of 0.22-jjm
Table 23.2 Biological indicators for monitoring sterilization processes*
Sterilization process
Species
Inoculum size
D-value
Heating in an
autoclave (121*C)
Dry heat (160°C)
Ethylene oxide (EO)t
(EO600mg|- 1 ,
temperature 54 °C and
60% relative humidity)
Low temperature
steam (73^) and
formaldehyde
(^mgl- 1 )*
Ionizing radiation
Bacillus stearothermophilus
Clostridium sporogenes
Bacillus subtil is var. niger
Bacillus subtil is var. niger
Bacillus stearothermophilus
>10 £
>10 e
>10 3
>5x10'
1 .5min
0.8min
5-1 Omin
2.5 min
5min
Bacillus pumilus
10 7 -10 £
3kGy(0.3Mrad)
* British Pharmacopoeia (1993).
f European Pharmacopoeia (1997).
$Soper&Davies(1990).
Sterilization control and sterility assurance 445
pore size. The latter filters are defined as those capable of completely removing Brev.
diminuta from suspension. In this test, using this organism, a realistic inoculum level
must be adopted, since the probability of bacteria appearing in the filtrate rises as the
number of Brev. diminuta cells in the test challenge increases; a standardized inoculum
size of 10 7 cells cm* 2 is normally employed. The extent of the passage of this organism
through membrane filters is enhanced by increasing the filtration pressure. Thus,
successful sterile filtration depends markedly on the challenge conditions.
Sterility testing
A sterility test is basically a test which assesses whether a sterilized pharmaceutical or
medical product is free from contaminating microorganisms, by incubation of either
the whole or a part of that product with a nutrient medium. It thus becomes a destructive
test and raises the question as to its suitability for testing large, expensive or delicate
products or equipment. Furthermore, by its very nature such a test is a statistical process
in which part of a batch is randomly* sampled and the chance of the batch being passed
for use then depends on the sample passing the sterility test.
A further limitation is that which is inherent in a procedure intended to demonstrate
a negative. A sterility test is intended to demonstrate that no viable organisms are present,
but failure to detect them could simply be a consequence of the use of unsuitable media
or inappropriate cultural conditions. To be certain that no organisms are present it
would be necessary to use a universal culture medium suitable for the growth of any
possible contaminant and to incubate the sample under an infinite variety of conditions.
Clearly, no such medium, or combination of media, are available, and, in practice, only
media capable of supporting non-fastidious bacteria, yeasts and moulds are employed.
Furthermore, in pharmacopoeial tests, no attempt is made to detect viruses, which , on
a size basis, are the organisms most likely to pass through a sterilizing filter. Nevertheless,
the sterility test does have an important application in monitoring the microbiological
quality of filter-sterilized, aseptically filled products and does offer a final check on
terminally sterilized articles. In the UK, test procedures laid down by the European
Pharmacopoeia must be followed; this provides details of the sample sizes to be adopted
in particular cases. The principles of these tests are discussed in brief below.
Methods
There are three alternative methods available when conducting sterility tests.
1 The direct inoculation procedure involves introducing test samples directly into
nutrient media. The British Pharmacopoeia recommends two media: (i) fluid
mercaptoacetate medium, which contains glucose and sodium mercaptoacetate (sodium
thioglycollate) and is particularly suitable for the cultivation of anaerobic organisms
(incubation temperature 30-35°C); and (ii) soyabean casein digest medium, which
will support the growth of both aerobic bacteria (incubation temperature 30-35°C) and
* It has been proposed that random sampling be applied to products which have been processed and
filled aseptically. With products sterilized in their final containers, samples should be taken from the
potentially coolest or least sterilant-accessible part of the load.
fungi (incubation temperature 20-25 °C). Other media may be used provided they can
be shown to be suitable alternatives.
2 Membrane filtration is the technique recommended by most pharmacopoeias and
involves filtration of fluids through a sterile membrane filter (pore size ^ED.45 lim),
any microorganism present being retained on the surface of the filter. After washing
in situ, the filter is divided aseptically and portions transferred to suitable culture media
which are then incubated at the appropriate temperature for the required period of
time. Water-soluble solids can be dissolved in a suitable diluent and processed in this
way.
3 A sensitive method for detecting low levels of contamination in intravenous infusion
fluids involves the addition of a concentrated culture medium to the fluid in its original
container, such that the resultant mixture is equivalent to single strength culture medium.
In this way, sampling of the entire volume is achieved.
With the techniques discussed above, the media employed should previously have
been assessed for nutritive (growth-supporting) properties and a lack of toxicity using
specified organisms. It must be remembered that any survivors of a sterilization process
may be damaged and thus must be given the best possible conditions for growth.
As a precaution against accidental contamination, product testing must be carried
out under conditions of strict asepsis using, for example, a laminar airflow cabinet to
provide a suitable environment (Chapter 22).
Both the British and European pharmacopoeias indicate that it is necessary to conduct
control tests which confirm the adequacy of the facilities by sampling of air and surfaces
and carrying out control tests using samples 'known' to be sterile. In reality, this means
Fig. 23.2 Isolators used for sterility testing. The operator works within the hood which is
suspended inside the cubicle; the hydrogen peroxide generator which is used to sterilize
the isolators is shown in the left foreground. (Courtesy of SmithKline Beecham
Pharmaceuticals.)
Sterilization control and sterility assurance 447
samples that have been subjected to a very reliable sterilization process, e.g. radiation,
or samples that have subjected to a sterilization procedure more than once. In order
to minimize the risk of introducing contaminants from the surroundings or from the
operator during the test itself, isolators are often employed which physically separate
the operator from the materials under test. These are designed on the same principle as
a glove box, but on a much larger and more sophisticated scale, so the operator works
inside a sterile cubicle but is separated from the atmosphere within it by a flexible
moulded covering (rather like a space suit) which is an integral part of the cubicle base
(Fig. 23.2).
5.2 Antimicrobial agents
Where an antimicrobial agent comprises the product or forms part of the product, for
example as a preservative, its activity must be nullified in some way during sterility
testing so that an inhibitory action in preventing the growth of any contaminating
microorganisms is overcome. This is achieved by the following methods (sections 5.2. 1-
5.2.3).
5.2.1 Specific inactivation
An appropriate inactivating (neutralizing) agent (Table 23.3) is incorporated into the
culture media. The inactivating agent must be non-toxic to microorganisms as must
any product resulting from an interaction of the inactivator and the antimicrobial agent.
Although Table 23.3 lists only benzylpenicillin and ampicillin as being inactivated
by /3-lactamase (from B. cereus), other /Mactams may also be hydrolysed by their
appropriate /3-lactamase. Other antibiotic-inactivating enzymes are also known (Chapter
9) and have been considered as possible inactivating agents, e.g. chloramphenicol
acetyltransferase (inactivates chloramphenicol) and enzymes that modify amino-
glycoside antibiotics. In addition, encouraging results have been obtained by the use of
antibiotic-absorbing resins.
Table 23.3 Inactivating agents"
Inhibitory agents Inactivating agents
Phenols, cresols None (dilution)
Alcohols None (dilution)
Parabens Dilution and Tween
Mercury compounds -SH compounds
Quaternary ammonium Lecithin + Lubrol W;
compounds Lecithin + Tween (Letheen)
/5-Lactamase from Bacillus cereus
Benzylpenicillint 1
Ampicillin J
Other antibioticst None (membrane filtration)
Sulphonamides p-Aminobenzoic acid
* Neutralizing agents; see also Table 11.4 (Chapter 11).
f See text.
448 Chapter 23
5.2.2 Dilution
The antimicrobial agent is diluted in the culture medium to a level at which it ceases to
have any activity, for example phenols, cresols and alcohols (see Chapter 11). This
method applies to substances with a high dilution coefficient, rl.
5.2.3 Membrane filtration
This method has traditionally been used to overcome the activity of antibiotics for
which there are no inactivating agents, although it could be extended to cover other
products if necessary, e.g. those containing preservatives for which no specific or
effective inactivators are available. Basically, a solution of the product is filtered
through a hydrophobic-edged membrane filter which will retain any contaminating
microorganisms. The membrane is washed in situ to remove any traces of antibiotic
adhering to the membrane and is then transferred to appropriate culture media.
5.3 Positive controls
It is essential to show that microorganisms will actually grow under the conditions of
the test. For this reason positive controls have to be carried out; in these, the ability of
small numbers of suitable microorganisms to grow in media in the presence of the
sample is assessed. The microorganism used for positive control tests with a product
containing or comprising an antimicrobial agent must, if at all possible, be sensitive to
that agent, so that growth of the organism indicates a satisfactory inactivation, dilution
or removal of the agent. The British Pharmacopoeia suggests the use of appropriate
strains of Staphylococcus aureus, CI. sporogenes and Candida albicans for aerobic,
anaerobic and fungal positive controls, respectively.
In practice, a positive control (media with added test sample) and a negative control
(media without it) are inoculated simultaneously, and the rate and extent of growth
arising in each should be similar. However, the negative control without the test sample,
is, in effect, exactly the same as the nutritive properties control which is also described
in the test procedure, so, for the organisms concerned, it is not necessary to do both.
All the controls may be conducted either before, or in parallel with, the test itself,
providing that the same batches of media are used for both. If the controls are carried
out in parallel with the tests and one of the controls gives an unexpected result, the test
for sterility attempt is recorded as invalid, and, when the problem is resolved, the test is
'recommenced' as if for the first time. It is important to recognize that the terms
'recommenced' and 'retest' have different meanings. A 'retest' may, under certain
circumstances, be performed when the first (and, exceptionally, even the second) valid
test shows signs of product contamination.
5.4 Specific cases
Specific details of the sterility testing of parenteral products, ophthalmic and other
non-injectable preparations, catgut, surgical dressings and dusting powders will be
found in the British and European pharmacopoeias.
Sterilization control and sterility assurance 449
55
Sampling
A sterility test attempts to infer the state (sterile or non-sterile) of a batch from the
results of an examination of part of a batch, and is thus a statistical operation.
Suppose that/? represents the proportion of infected containers in a batch and q the
proportion of non-infected containers. Then, p-\-q=\oxq=\-p.
Suppose also that a sample of two items is taken from a large batch containing 10%
infected containers. The probability of a single item taken at random being infected is
/? = 0.1 (10% = 0.1), whereas the probability of such an item being non-infected is
given by q = 1 -p = 0.9.
The probability of both items being infected is/? =0.01, and of both items being
non-infected, q = (1 -p) =0.81. The probability of obtaining one infected item and
one non-infected item is 1 - (0.01 + 0.81) = 0.18 = 2pq.
In a sterility test involving a sample size of n containers, the probability/? of obtaining
n consecutive 'steriles' is given by q" = (1 -/?/. Values for various levels of/? (i.e.
proportion of infected containers in a batch) with a constant sample size are given in
Table 23.4 which shows that the test cannot detect low levels of contamination. Similarly,
if different sample sizes are employed (based also upon (1 -pf) it can be shown that
as the sample size increases, the probability of the batch being passed as sterile decreases.
The British Pharmacopoeia makes an allowance for accidental contamination which
may arise during the execution of a sterility test by allowing the test to be repeated.
Under these circumstances the following rules apply.
1 If no growth occurs with fresh samples, the batch passes the test.
2 If growth occurs, but the organism differs from that found previously, the test is
repeated on a third sample from the batch using double the number of containers of
product.
3 If no growth occurs with the third sample, the batch passes the sterility test; if,
however, any microorganism is found, the batch is treated as non-sterile, unless or
until the material has been resterilized and has passed the above tests.
In actual fact, however, these additional tests increase the chances of passing a
batch containing a proportion of infected items (Table 23.4, first retest). This may be
Table 23.4 Sampling in sterility testing
Infected
items in
batch (%)
0.1
1
5
10
20
50
p
0.001
0.01
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
q
0.999
0.99
0.95
0.9
0.8
0.5
Probability P, of drawing 20
consecutive sterile items:
First sterility test*
0.98
0.82
0.36
0.12
0.012
<0.00001
First retestt
0.99
0.99
0.84
0.58
0.11
0.002
,20
* Calculated from P = (1 -p) = q .
t Calculated from P = (1 -p ) 20 [2 - (1 -pf ].
450 Chapter 23
deduced by using the mathematical formula
(l-/?)"[2-(l-/>)"]
which gives the chance in the first retest of passing a batch containing a proportion/? of
infected containers.
It can be seen from the above that a sterility test can only show that a proportion of
the products in a batch is sterile. Thus, the correct conclusion to be drawn from a
satisfactory test result is that the batch has passed the sterility test not that the batch is
sterile.
Conclusions
The techniques discussed in this chapter comprise an attempt to achieve, as far as
possible, the continuous monitoring of a particular sterilization process. The sterility
test on its own provides no guarantee as to the sterility of a batch; however, it is an
additional check, and continued compliance with the test does give confidence as to
the efficacy of a sterilization or aseptic process. Failure to carry out a sterility test,
despite the major criticism of its inability to detect other than gross contamination,
may have important legal and moral consequences.
Acknowledgements
We are grateful to SmithKline Beecham Pharmaceuticals for permission to use
Fig. 23.2.
Further reading
Baird R.M. & Bloomfield S.F. (eds) (1996) Microbial Quality Assurance in Cosmetics, Toiletries and
Non-sterile Pharmaceuticals. London: Taylor & Francis.
British Pharmacopoeia (1993) London: HMSO.
Denyer S.R (1982) In-use contamination in intravenous therapy — the scale of the problem. In: Infusions
and Infection. The Hazards of In-use Contamination in Intravenous Therapy (ed. RF. D'Arcy), pp.
1-16. Oxford: Medicine Publishing Foundation.
Denyer S.R (1992) Filtration sterilization. In: Principles and Practice of Disinfection, Preservation
and Sterilization, 2nd edn. (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J. Ayliffe), pp. 573-604. Oxford:
Blackwell Science.
Denyer S.R & Baird R.M. (eds) (1990) Guide to Microbiological Control in Pharmaceuticals. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood. (Chapters 7, 8 and 9 provide additional information).
European Pharmacopoeia, 3rd edn. (1997) Maisonneuve: SA.
Gardner J.F. & Peel M.M. (1991) Introduction to Sterilisation, Disinfection and Infection Control, 2nd
edn. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Greene V.N. (1992) Control of sterilization processes. In: Principles and Practice of Disinfection,
Preservation and Sterilization, 2nd edn. (eds A.D. Russell, W.B. Hugo & G.A.J. Ayliffe), pp. 605-
624. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Gilbert P. & Allison D. (1996) Redefining the 'sterility' of sterile products. Eur J Parenteral Sci, 1,
19-23.
Health Technical Memorandum (1994) Sterilisers. HTM 2010. London: Department of Health.
Hodges, N.A. (1995) Reproducibility and performance of endospores as biological indicators. In:
Microbiological Quality Assurance: a Guide Towards Relevance and Reproducibility of Inocula
(eds M.R.W. Brown & P. Gilbert), pp. 221-234. New York: CRC Press.
Sterilization control and sterility assurance 45 1
Hoxey E.V., Soper C.J. & Davies D.J.G. (1984) The effect of temperature and formaldehyde
concentration on the inactivation of Bacillus stearothermophilus spores by LTSF. J Pharm
Pharmacol, 36, 60.
Line S.J. & Pickerell J.K. (1973) Testing a steam-formaldehyde sterilizer for gas penetration efficiency.
J Clin Pathol, 26, 716-720.
Pharmaceutical Codex (1994) London: Pharmaceutical Press.
Soper C.J. & Davies D.J.G. (1990) Principles of sterilization. In: Guide to Microbiological Control in
Pharmaceuticals (eds S.P. Denver & R.M. Baird), pp. 157-181. Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
United States Pharmacopoeia (1995) 23rd revision. Rockville, MD: US Pharmacopeial Convention.
Production of therapeutically useful
substances by recombinant DNA
technology
1 Introduction
2 The basic principles of recombinant
DNA technology
2.1 Introduction to cloning
2.2 Expression of cloned genes
2.2.1 Transcription
2.2.2 Translation
2.2.3 Post-translational modification
2.3 Maximizing gene expression
2.4 Choice of cloning host
3 Production of medically important
polypeptides and proteins
4 Authenticity and efficacy of drugs
produced by recombinant DNA
technology
5 Future trends with protein
pharmaceuticals
5.1 Small-molecule drugs
5.2 Anti-sense agents
5.3 Gene therapy and gene repair
6 Glossary
7 Further reading
Introduction
Natural products of pharmaceutical interest are synthesized by a wide variety of
organisms, ranging from prokaryotes such as bacteria to eukaryotes such as yeast, other
fungi, flowering plants, animals and man. The commercial production of compounds
from microbes is relatively simple since the organism in question can be grown on a
large scale and high-yielding variants can be isolated following many successive rounds
of mutation and selection. A good example is penicillin production by Penicillium
chrysogenum (Chapter 7), where the wild strain yield of a few milligrams per litre
has been raised to over 20gH. Commercial production of compounds from plants
is less easy since synthesis may be tissue or organ specific and may only occur at a
certain developmental stage. If the genetics of the producing organism have not been
studied then selection of high-yielding variants is extremely difficult. Molecules of
pharmacological interest from higher animals are by definition extremely potent, for
example hormones, and so are synthesized in relatively minute quantities. This is a
serious limitation if the producing organisms are animals such as cattle or pigs, as in
the case of insulin, but production is well nigh impossible if the only source is man
himself, as with human growth hormone.
In order that demand should meet supply, or to reduce production costs, it would be
of great benefit if microorganisms could be induced to synthesize pharmacologically
active molecules whose production is normally limited to higher plants and animals.
With the advent of recombinant DNA technology, often called genetic engineering,
this is now possible and synthesis no longer is restricted to polypeptides.
The advantages of recombinant DNA technology are enormous, as the following
example shows. Somatostatin is a hormone that inhibits the secretion of pituitary growth
hormone. The researchers who first isolated somatostatin required nearly half a million
sheep brains to produce 5 mg of the substance. Using a chemically synthesized gene, 9
Recombinant DNA technology 453
litres of bacterial culture, costing just a few pounds or dollars, produced the same
amount. Development work has already led to the production of numerous biologically
active human agents in clinically significant amounts, and a number of them are
commercially available (see Table 24.2, pp. 463-464).
The basic principles of recombinant DNA technology
2.1
Introduction to cloning
Let us suppose that we wish to construct a bacterium which produces human insulin.
Naively, it might be thought that all that is required is to introduce the human insulin
gene into its new host. The fallacy with this idea is that foreign genes are not maintained
in cells, since they are not replicated. With recombinant DNA technology this problem
is solved by inserting the insulin gene into a cloning vector. The latter is simply a DNA
molecule that can replicate in vivo. Cloning vectors are usually plasmids (Chapter 9),
which are extrachromosomal, autonomously replicating DNA molecules (Fig. 24.1).
In order to insert foreign DNA into a plasmid, use is made of special enzymes
known as restriction endonucleases. These enzymes cut large DNA molecules into
shorter fragments by cleavage at specific recognition sites (Fig. 24.2), i.e. they are
highly specific deoxyribonucleases (DNases). Some of these enzymes generate
fragments with single-strand protrusions called 'sticky-ends' because their bases are
complementary. Fragments of the foreign DNA are inserted into plasmid vectors cut
Fragment - Chromosome
of DNA x,
DMA
fragment
into plasmid
Fig. 24.1 The requirement for a cloning vector: (A) fragments of DNA introduced into the
bacterium by transformation do not undergo replication and gradually are diluted out of the
population; (B) DNA fragments introduced into plasmids are inherited by both daughter progeny ;
cell division.
454 Chapter 24
-
Enzyme RecpflnFlion
products
fdoRi
,
G AATTC
— CTTAAG
{ T
MmIH — ggcc—
HirttHU
-CCG&—
I
— A*AGCTT
-TTCGA.
-G
-CTTAA
-CC
-A
-TTCGA
AATTC-
cc —
L
Sfrvl — CCCGGG
— G G GC C C-
ccc
GGG
AGCTT
A
GGG —
CCC — ■
1% 241 Tin; recognition site* of some common restriaittD tndtmucEcfiica. The arrows indicate the
clavfljt points.
0NA1
DNA 2
■■■■-'. AC
G jB AT.C G
j:
CGATCC
C C T A G G
1
BamHl
l
BamHl
CCTAG1
ANNEAL
Nick
DNA ligase
GATCC
CCTAGB
HArnmhinefl UNA
Fig. 24.3 The construction of a chimeric (or recombinant) DNA molecule by joining together two
DNA fragments produced by cleavage of different parental DNA molecules with the same restriction
endonuclease.
open with the same enzyme, which therefore have matching ends (Fig. 24.3).
The resulting recombinants or chimeras are transformed into the new host microbe.
Since each transformant may contain a different fragment of the foreign genome it is
necessary to select those with the desired gene. In practice this can be the most difficult
Recombinant DNA technology 455
step, but the screening methods used are outside the scope of this chapter. Suffice
to say that a necessary prerequisite usually is a sensitive test for the desired protein
product.
Theoretically, it is possible to clone any desired gene by 'shotgunning'. This is
done by inserting into plasmids a random mixture of fragments from total human DNA,
in the case of the insulin gene, and then selecting the appropriate clone. However, if
introduced into a bacterium this clone would not make human insulin. The reason for
this is that many genes of eukaryotes, including the human insulin gene, are a mixture
of coding regions (called exons) and non-coding regions (called introns). In eukaryotes,
genes containing introns are transcribed into messenger RNA (rnRNA) in the usual
manner but then the corresponding intron sequences are spliced out (Fig. 24.4).
Unfortunately not all bacteria can splice out introns.
A solution to the problem of introns is to isolate rnRNA extracted from the human
pancreas cells that make insulin. These cells are rich in insulin rnRNA from which
introns have already been spliced out. Using the enzyme reverse transcriptase it is
possible to convert this spliced rnRNA into a DNA copy. This copy DNA (cDNA),
which carries the uninterrupted genetic information for insulin can be cloned. Although
yeast cells (Saccharomyces) can splice out introns it is normal practice to eliminate
them anyway by cDNA cloning.
An alternative approach is to synthesize an artificial gene in the test-tube starting
with the appropriate deoxyribonucleotides. This approach, which demands that the
entire amino acid sequence be known, has been used to clone genes encoding proteins
200 amino acids long.
U
Efcon
■ — ^ — Iri&ulin gerte-^^
^a
I ntron
Ezn
-H
I
1
Expti
Intron Enon
DNA
TRANSCRIPTION
'i
SPLICING
i
./
Un&pliced RNA
Spliced RNA
I
TRANSLATION
TjtfiJtfTOiJTOW-^
Proton
Fig. 24.4 Splicing of a messenger RNA molecule transcribed from a hypothetical insulin gene
containing two introns.
2.2
Expression of cloned genes
2.2.7
Once a gene is cloned it is necessary to convert the information contained in it into a
functional protein. There are a number of steps in gene expression: (i) transcription of
DNA into mRNA; (ii) translation of the mRNA into a protein sequence: and (iii) in
some instances, post-translational modification of the protein. In discussing these steps
in more detail, expression of a cloned insulin gene will be used as an example.
Transcription
Transcription of DNA into mRNA is mediated by the enzyme RNA polymerase. The
first stage is binding of the RNA polymerase to recognition sites on the DNA which are
called promoters. After binding, the RNA polymerase proceeds along the DNA molecule
until a termination signal is encountered. It follows that a gene which does not lie
between a promoter and a termination signal will not be transcribed. This would be the
case with a cloned insulin gene, since neither a cDN A gene nor an artificially synthesized
gene will carry a promoter. The solution is to clone the gene into a vector close to a
bacterial promotor. An example is shown in Fig. 24.5.
2.2.2
Translation
Translation of mRNA into protein is a complex process which involves interaction of
the messenger with ribosomes. One prerequisite for this is that the mRNA must carry a
ribosome binding site (RBS) in front of the gene to be translated. After binding, the
ribosome moves along the mRNA and initiates protein synthesis at the first AUG codon
it encounters. A synthetic insulin gene will lack an RBS and if a cDNA is used as the
starting material the RBS may be lost in the process of cloning. The solution is to
Vector
Fig. 24.5 Insertion of a cloned
insulin gene into a vector
carrying a bacterial promoter.
The arrow indicates the direction
of transcription. If we suppose
the bacterial promoter is derived
from the lactose operon then
transcription will be initiated
only in the presence of lactose.
cio-ned
bBcteriHl^
promotej-
ilffom
lactose Operon)
Plus
lactosu
Minus
lactose
TRANSCRIPTION
NO TRANSCRIPTION
Recombinant DNA technology 457
DNA
Pralruaylin
Fig. 24.6 The use of a vector carrying a promoter and adjacent ribosome binding site (RBS) and
initiation codon to obtain synthesis of proinsulin from a synthetic gene. The arrow indicates the
direction of transcription.
2.2.3
utilize a vector in which the insulin gene can be inserted downstream from a promoter
and RBS (Fig. 24.6).
Post-trans lational modification
A number of proteins undergo post-translational modifications and insulin is one of
these. Proteins which are to be secreted are synthesized with an extra 15-30 amino
acids at the N-terminus. These extra amino acids are referred to as a signal sequence
and a common feature of these sequences is that they have a central core of hydrophobic
amino acids flanked by polar or hydrophilic residues. During passage through the
membrane the signal sequence is cleaved off (Fig. 24.7). If the insulin gene were cloned
by the cDNA method then the signal sequence would be present and, in Escherichia
coli at least, the insulin would be transported through the cytoplasmic membrane
{exported). Using the synthetic gene approach, a signal sequence would be present on
the protein only if the corresponding coding sequence had been incorporated at the
Human preproinsulin
Ehpjft
COOH
Human proinsulin
coon
Human insulin
Fig. 24.7 The conversion of preproinsulin to insulin by sequential removal of the signal peptide and
the C fragment.
458 Chapter 24
time of construction. Sometimes it is desirable for the bacterium to export the protein,
in which case a signal sequence is incorporated; with other proteins it may be desirable
that they are retained within the cell.
In E. coli cells, the presence of a signal sequence usually results in export of a
protein into the periplasmic space rather than into the growth medium. Unfortunately,
many recombinant proteins are rapidly and extensively degraded in the periplasmic
space because of the presence there of numerous proteases. In Gram-positive bacteria
and eukaryotic microorganisms, signal sequences direct proteins into the growth
medium. Filamentous organisms such as fungi or actinomycetes might be particularly
favourable for export because of their high surface area to volume ratio.
A small number of proteins, and again insulin is an example, are synthesized as
pro-proteins with an additional amino acid sequence which dictates the final three-
dimensional structure. In the case of proinsulin, proteolytic attack cleaves out a stretch
of 35 amino acids in the middle of the molecule to generate insulin. The peptide that is
removed is known as the C chain. The other chains, A and B, remain crosslinked and
thus locked in a stable tertiary structure by the disulphide bridges formed when the
molecule originally folded as proinsulin. Bacteria have no mechanism for specifically
cutting out the folding sequences from pro-hormones and the way of solving this problem
is described in a later section.
Another modification which can be made in vivo is glycosylation, for example that
of (3 and y interferons, although the biological role of the sugar residues is not known.
Bacteria cannot glycosylate the products of cloned mammalian genes. These non-
glycosylated proteins retain their pharmacological activity but their pharmacokinetics
and in vitro stability may be different. Yeast cells can glycosylate proteins but the
pattern of glycosylation may well be different from that seen in the normal host of the
gene. Non-glycosylated or wrongly glycosylated proteins may provoke the formation
of antibodies following administration.
2.3 Maximizing gene expression
From a commercial point of view it is desirable to maximize the yield of protein in a
fermentation. This means maximizing gene expression and important factors are:
1 the number of copies of the plasmid vector per unit cell (copy number);
2 the strength of the promoter;
3 the sequences of the RBS and flanking DNA;
4 proteolysis.
The limiting factor in expression is the initiation of protein synthesis. Increasing
the copy number of the plasmid increases the number of mRN A molecules transcribed
from the cloned gene and this results in increased protein synthesis. Similarly, the
stronger the promoter (see Fig. 24.5), the more mRNA molecules are synthesized. The
base sequence of the RBS (see Fig. 24.6) and the length and sequence of the DNA
between the RBS and the initiating AUG codon are so important that a single base
change, addition or deletion, can affect the level of translation up to 1000-fold.
Proteolysis does not affect transcription and translation but by degrading the desired
product it influences the apparent rate of gene expression. Although proteolysis can be
reduced it is difficult to eliminate it completely. One approach is to use protease-deficient
Recombinant DNA technology 459
0-galactosldase ~*\
N H 2 jvM^vw^-wiJuVi^ Met — Ah — Gfy — Cy& — L ys — Asn — Pf>& ^ph*
S Tq:
I 1
S t-ys
HQQC — Cy$— Ser — Thr—Pbe^ 7 * 11
I
CyBftogan
NH 2 Ate — Gty Cys Lys Asn Pte^
I ftp
S \
p-galBctostdase fragments ■+■ [ t_y$
? /
I T?tr
HGQC — Cys — Sw — fflr /Vie-"
ActLvfl tomatOGtstin
Fig. 24.8 Release of somatostatin from a hybrid protein by cyanogen bromide cleavage.
Somatostatin can be purified free of cyanogen bromide and fragments of /J-galactosidase.
mutants and another is to protect the desired protein by fusion to an E. coli protein (see
below).
Somatostatin was the first human peptide to be synthesized in a bacterial cell. It is
only 14 amino acids long and genes for polypeptides of this size are very amenable to
direct chemical synthesis. However, small peptides are rapidly degraded in E. coli and
for this reason the synthetic gene was fused to the 5' end of the /3-galactosidase gene.
This results in the synthesis of a fusion protein which is relatively stable in E. coli.
Somatostatin does not contain any methionine residues, so the synthetic gene was
constructed in such a way that a methionine was incorporated at the junction of the
fusion peptide. By treatment with cyanogen bromide, which breaks proteins into
polypeptide fragments at methionine residues, authentic somatostatin could be recovered
(Fig. 24.8). Although in this particular instance, and in the case of insulin and fi-
endorphin, the fusion protein contained a remnant of the E. coli /3-galactosidase gene
at the N-terminus, other bacterial proteins have been used, for example tryptophan
synthetase, j3-lactamase, etc.
2.4 Choice of cloning host
A number of cloning hosts are in widespread use. Escherichia coli is still the most
popular organism for initial genetic manipulations and is used for the commercial
production of a number of therapeutic proteins. Bacillus subtilis has not lived up
to its initial promise of high-level protein secretion and interest in it is declining.
Saccharomyces cerevisiae is widely used but faces competition from recombinant animal
cells: progress with the latter has been impressive and high-level expression and secretion
systems are available. Good progress has also been made in developing cloning
systems for filamentous fungi and actinomycetes, two groups of organisms which
have long been used in the production of low molecular weight pharmaceuticals.
More recently, there has been growing interest in the development of cloning systems
460 Chapter 24
for the more unusual organisms used in the pharmaceutical industry. The advantages
and disadvantages of the main microbial cloning systems are shown in Table 24. 1 .
Recombinant proteins can be produced in plants and animals as well as microbes.
For example, a number of important human proteins, e.g. a, -antitrypsin, have been
produced in rats and mice and in some instances can be engineered to be secreted in the
breast milk. Clearly, small mammals are not desirable as production vehicles. However,
good expression can also be obtained with animals such as sheep and goats. Given the
history of large mammals as sources of antitoxins for human therapy they also may be
acceptable for the production of recombinant proteins. A large number of recombinant
proteins also have been produced in plants, e.g. proteins toxic to insect larvae, antibody
fragments, etc. Already some of these recombinant plants are grown commercially,
and are being consumed, so there is no reason why they cannot be sources of protein
drugs as well. In this context it is worth noting that the pharmaceutical industry is used
to manufacturing drugs from plants, as plants are the source of many of the older
medicines still in use.
Production of medically important
polypeptides and proteins
The overproduction of a wide variety of proteins has now been achieved in E. coli and
other cloning hosts. Many of these proteins are in clinical trials and, as indicated earlier,
over a dozen are already on the market. The current status of many of these proteins is
summarized in Table 24.2. The efficacy of many of the proteins listed remains to be
determined because until the advent of recombinant DNA technology sufficient
quantities were not available to enable clinical trials to be undertaken. It should be
noted that clinical efficacy alone is not sufficient Market size is just as important since
it can cost up to £50 million to bring a new drug to the market place and company
shareholders expect a good return on their investment.
One of the advantages of recombinant DNA technology is that is enables analogues
of human proteins to be produced. Thus, numerous groups have produced a-a and
a-/3 hybrid interferons. Some of these hybrids have altered properties in vitro but whether
this will translate into a clinical benefit remains to be determined. In some instances
the analogues have only a single amino acid change. Thus, changing cysteine residue
17 in interferon-/3 to a serine residue yields a protein with improved half-life and in
vitro stability. Changing methionine residue 358 in a, -antitrypsin to valine yields a
more oxidation-resistant enzyme.
Authenticity and efficacy of drugs produced by
recombinant DNA technology
To demonstrate the safety and efficacy of any polypeptide drug, regardless of whether
it is made by recombinant DNA technology, organic synthesis or extraction from a
natural source, a number of quality criteria need to be met. Not only must the protein
be produced in accordance with good manufacturing practice but it must also meet
specification. Although the absolute specification will vary depending on the identity
of the protein, the therapeutic target and the route and period of administration, certain
Recombinant DNA technology 461
Table 24.1 Comparison of different organisms as cloning hosts
Organism
Advantages
Disadvantages
Escherichia coil
Bacillus subtilis
Saccharomyces cerevisiae
Filamentous fungi
Actinomycetes
Mammalian cells
Ease of manipulation
Promoters and gene regulation
well understood
Easy to culture on large scale
Already used in manufacture of
insulin, interferon and
human somatotrophin
Many proteins naturally
exported into growth
medium
Non-pathogenic
Easy to culture
Some Bacillus enzymes
excreted at high level
(>5gM)
Widely used industrial
organism which is easy to
culture
Glycosylates proteins
Can get export into growth
medium of heterologous
proteins
High-level expression systems
developed
Heterologous proteins inside
cell do nofform inclusions
Large surface area to volume
ratio should favour protein
export
Have been used in industrial
microbiology for over 40
years
Large surface area to volume
ratio should favour protein
export
Widely used in industrial
microbiology
Good expression systems being
developed
Get export of proteins
Get desired post-translational
modifications and products
not likely to be immunogenic
to humans
Good expression systems
available
Do not usually get export of
proteins into growth medium
Over-expressed foreign
proteins often form
aggregates ('inclusions') of
denatured protein
Many foreign proteins rapidly
degraded
Many post-translational
modifications do not occur
Still not much known about
gene regulation
Good, high-level expression
vectors lacking
High-level export of
heterologous proteins not
achieved
Much still to be learned about
control of gene expression
Post-translational modifications
of proteins not necessarily
the same as those in the
animal cell
Promoters/gene regulation
poorly understood but may
be similar to yeast
Good expression systems
lacking
Rheology of fermentations
important
Promoters/gene regulation stil
poorly understood
Rheology of fermentations
important
Large-scale growth of animal
cells costly
Great care needed to avoid
contamination of cultures
462 Chapter 24
Table 24.2 Current status of selected recombinant proteins
Protein
Size/structure
Expression system
Clinical indications
Comments
Human insulin
Human somatotropin
lnterferon-a 2a
lnterferon-a 2 b
Interferon-/
Tissue plasminogen
activator
Relaxin
a-Antitrypsin
Two peptide chains:
A, 21 amino acids
long, and B, 30
amino acids long
E. coli
191 amino acids
166 amino acids
143 amino acids,
glycosylated
530 amino acids,
glycosylated
53 amino acids;
insulin-like (two
protein chains)
394 amino acids,
glycosylated
E. coli
E. coli
E. coli
E. coli
Yeast
Animal cells
E. coli
E. coli
Yeast
Juvenile onset
diabetes
Pituitary dwarfism
Various cancers and
viral diseases
Chronic
granulomatous
disease
Acute mycocardial
infarct
Pulmonary embolism
Facilitates childbirth
Treatment of
emphysema
Approved for sale
A and B chains made separately as
fusion proteins and joined in vitro
Compared with animal insulins some
undesirable side-effects have been
noted
Approved for sale
If useful in treatment of osteoporosis
then market size will be much larger
Has additional methionine residue at
N-terminus, but technology for
removing this now available
Approved for sale
Over 80% success in treatment of hairy
cell leukemia; success with other
cancers lower and more variable
Market size may be limited
Unpleasant ('flu-like') side-effects
Approved for sale
In clinical trials for treatment of cancer
and viral diseases
Approved for sale
Animal cell culture most effective way
of producing active enzyme
Prepares endometrium for parturition
and reduces fetal distress
Pig relaxin shown to be clinically
effective
Prevents cumulative damage to lung
tissue caused by leucocyte elastase
In clinical trials
Continued on p. 464
Table 24.2 Continued
Protein
Size/structure
Expression system
Clinical indications
Comments
lnterleukin-2
Tumour necrosis factor
Human serum albumin
Factor VII
Factor IX
Erythropoietin
Hepatitis B surface
antigen
Granulocyte colony
stimulating factor
Granulocyte-macrophage
colony stimulating
factor
133 amino acids
157 amino acids
582 amino acids; 17
disulphide bridges
2332 amino acids
415 amino acids
glycosylated;
modified residues
166 amino acids
glycosylated
Monomer has 226
amino acids
127 amino acids
127 amino acids
E. coli
Animal cells
E. coli
Animal cells
Yeast
Mammalian cells
Mammalian cells
Mammalian cells
Yeast
Mammalian cells
E. coli
E. coli
Treatment of cancer
Treatment of cancer
Plasma replacement
therapy
Treatment of
haemophilia
Treatment of
Christmas disease
Treatment of
anaemia
associated with
dialysis and
AZT/AIDS
Vaccination
Adjunct to cancer
chemotherapy
Improved bone
marrow transplant
Approved for sale
Very toxic and side-effects severe
Normally obtained from plasma but
now concern over potential
contamination with AIDS virus
Normally obtained from plasma but
now concern over potential
contamination with AIDS virus
Approved for sale
Must be made in mammalian cells since
glycosylation and conversion of first
12 glutamate residues to
pyroglutamate essential for activity
Approved for sale
Without glycosylation protein is cleared
very quickly from plasma
Approved for sale
Monomer self-assembles into structure
resembling virus particles
Approved for sale
By stimulating white blood cell
formation, aids recovery
Approved for sale
Table 24.3 Specification of therapeutic proteins to be administered parenterally
Criterion
Appropriate analytical methods
Greater than 95% pure
Microheterogeneity below specified level
Endotoxin below specified level
Contaminating DNA below specified
level (<10pg dose" 1 )
Toxic chemicals used in purification
below specified level
IgG below specified limit (if monoclonal
antibodies used in purification)
Absence of microorganisms
Gel electrophoresis; HPLC
Polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis
C- and N-terminal analysis. Amino
acid composition
Limulus amoebocyte lysate method
(see also Chapter 18)
Hybridization
Appropriate methods
ELISA or RIA
Sterility test (see also Chapter 23)
HPLC, high-performance liquid chromatography; HI ISA, enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
method; RIA, radioimmunoassay method.
quality guidelines have been adopted by most countries. This core specification is shown
in Table 24.3.
Although many of the quality control tests used are designed to assess purity they
often give data which confirms the identity of the protein, e.g. chromatographic
behaviour (high-performance liquid chromatography), electrophoretic mobility and
amino acid composition. However, most of the analytical techniques in current use
give no indication of the three-dimensional structure of the protein and hence no
indication of biological activity. Thus, the absolute specific activity of the protein needs
to be determined in a biological test. Determination of the specific activity is particularly
important with proteins overproduced in E. coli, for such proteins exist in aggregates
with nucleic acid often called 'inclusions'. The protein in these aggregates has to be
extracted with denaturing agents such as urea, sodium dodecyl sulphate or guanidinium
hydrochloride and then renatured, a process akin to recreating native egg white from a
meringue.
As indicated earlier, recombinant DNA technology can be used to deliberately
produce desired analogues of natural proteins. However, undesirable analogues may
also be produced inadvertently during the production process. Hor example, when the
human somatotrophin gene is expressed in E. coli, the resultant protein has an additional
methionine residue at the N-terminus. Other foreign gene products may or may not
carry this additional methionine residue. Recently, methods have been developed for
enzymatically removing this N-terminal methionine and for mediating another post-
translational modification, C-terminal amidation.
Another undesirable modification is removal of some amino acids residues from
the C-terminus and/or the N-terminus by microbial exoproteases. Care needs to be
taken during the fermentation and extraction stages to minimize proteolytic damage,
and any 'nibbled' molecules should be removed during purification.
Recombinant DNA technology 465
Future trends with protein pharmaceuticals
Already over a dozen recombinant-derived therapeutically useful proteins are being
marketed and at least as many more are in clinical trials. So, what of the nature? There
are two disadvantages with developing proteins A as therapeutic entities. First, most of
them are not active when given orally, and parenteral administration is almost de rigeur.
Some proteins can be administered in other ways, e.g. insulin can be given per rectum
but this is not a route which is favoured in many countries outside of France and Japan.
Other proteins may be active if given sublingually or if administered by aerosol. Clearly,
much work needs to be done in developing new dosage forms particularly suited to the
administration of proteins. Second, most of the proteins being marketed or currently in
clinical trials were obvious candidates for development, e.g. insulin and interferons.
Identifying the next generation of therapeutically useful proteins will be much more
difficult. There are hundreds of human proteins of which relatively little is known but
only a few are likely to be worth developing. For example, a factor which promotes
bone growth would have many clinical benefits but the candidate proteins have yet to
be identified.
5.1 Small-molecule drugs
One trend which has become obvious is that many pharmaceutical companies are turning
their attention to the application of recombinant DNA technology in the production of
small molecules. Microorganisms are widely used in the production of drugs, e.g.
antibiotics and steroid transformations. Where the rate-limiting step in production has
been identified, cloning the relevant gene could well facilitate synthesis and give
increased yields and/or decreased production times. In addition, novel metabolic
pathways can be introduced into microorganisms and this could eliminate more
conventional but complex production processes involving plants.
5.2 Anti-sense agents
Many drugs treat the symptoms of a disease rather than the cause of the disease, e.g. the
different classes of drug for the treatment of hypertension. Where the primary cause of
the disease is overexpression then anti-sense agents may be of value. These are nucleic
acids which are complementary to the 5' region of a mRNA molecule and bind to it. In
this way the translation of the mRNA into protein is reduced or eliminated and hence
the anti-sense molecule modulates expression. There are two major problems with
anti-sense nucleic acids as therapeutic entities. First, small single-stranded nucleic acids
are rapidly degraded inside cells. The solution to this problem is to use modified nucleic
acids, e.g. ones in which the phosphodiester backbone is replaced with a peptide chain
('peptide nucleic acids'). The second issue is delivering enough of the anti- sense
molecules to the target cells. This can be achieved with proper formulation, and a
number of anti-sense drugs are in clinical trials.
466 Chapter 24
Gene therapy and gene repair
There are many inherited diseases where the genetic basis for the disorder is known
but for which no effective drug therapy exists. For example, Lesch-Nyhan disease is
caused by a deficiency in hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyl transferase and
adenosine deaminase deficiency causes severe immunodeficiency disease. One way of
treating these diseases is to take cells from the patient and transfect them in vitro with
a vector molecule carrying a normal gene and a selectable marker. Those cells carrying
the selectable marker are checked to see that they carry the gene of interest, cultured,
and then re-introduced into the patient where they provide the missing function. This is
known as gene therapy.
There are a number of problems with gene therapy. First, it is restricted to those
diseases which can be treated by manipulating skin cells or stem cells since these are
the only cells which can be cultured outside the body for any length of time. Second,
the vectors used are derived from viruses and there is a risk, albeit very small, that the
vector virus could recombine with an endogenous virus and cause cancer. Third, the
normal gene which has been introduced does not replace the defective gene. Rather, it
is inserted elsewhere in the genome as an additional gene copy. Thus, gene therapy is
only of use for treating disorders which display homozygous recessive inheritance. An
alternative approach is to use gene repair. In this case a single-stranded nucleic acid,
complementary to the region around the defect, is introduced into the target cells. By
stimulating recombination the defect can be repaired. One advantage of gene repair
over gene therapy is that the former can be used to treat disease caused by dominant
mutations.
Glossary
Clone (Noun) A group of cells all descended from a common ancestor: in genetic engineering, usually
refers to a cell carrying a foreign gene. (Verb) To use the techniques of gene manipulation in vitro
to transfer a gene from one organism to another.
Cloning vector Plasmid (vide infra) into which a foreign gene is placed to ensure its replication in a
new host cell.
Exon Portion of DNA that codes for the final mRNA.
Fusion protein Covalent linkage of two distinct protein entities, e.g. j3-galactosidase and somatostatin.
A fusion protein need not retain the different biological properties of its two components.
Genome Haploid sets of chromosomes with their associated genes.
Intron An intervening sequence in DNA.
Operon Two or more genes subject to coordinate regulation by an operator and a repressor.
Plasmid An extrachromosomal circular DNA molecule in bacteria. Often used as cloning vector.
Promoter Region of a DNA molecule at which RNA polymerase binds and initiates transcription.
Restriction endonuclease A deoxyribonuclease which cuts DNA at specific sequences which exhibit
twofold symmetry about a point. Name derives from the fact that their presence in a bacterial cell
prevents (restricts) the growth of many infecting bacteriophages.
Reverse transcriptase An enzyme coded by certain RNA viruses which is able to make complementary
single- stranded DNA chains from RNA templates and then to convert these DNA chains to double-
helical form.
'Sticky-ends' Complementary single- stranded tails projecting from otherwise double-helical nucleic
acid molecules.
'Shotgunning' Cloning of a complete set of DNA fragments from a particular genome.
Recombinant DNA technology 467
Signal sequence Amino acid sequence in protein, whose function is to direct its final intracellular or
extracellular location.
Splicing (1) Gene splicing: manipulations, the object of which is to attach one DNA molecule to
another; (2) RNA splicing; removal of introns from mRNA precursors.
Vector See Cloning vector.
Further reading
Bollon A.P. (1984) Recombinant DNA Products: Insulin, Interferon and Growth Hormone. Boca Raton,
Florida: CRC Press.
Bonnen E.M. & Spiegel R.J. (1984) Interferon-alpha: current status and future promise. J Biol Resp
Mod, 3, 580-598.
Courtney M., Jallat S., Tessier L-H., Benavente A., Crystal R.G. & Lecocq J-P. (1985) Synthesis in E.
coli of alpha,-antitrypsin variants of therapeutic potential for emphysema and thrombosis. Nature,
313, 149-151.
Glick B.R. & Pasternak J.J. (1994) Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and Applications of
Recombinant DNA. Washington, D.C.: American Society for Microbiology.
Goeddel D.V., Heyneker H.L., Hoxumi T., Arentzen R., Itakura K., Yansura D.G., Ross M.J., Miozzari
G., Crea R. & Seeburg P.H. (1979) Expression in Escherichia coli of a DNA sequence coding from
human growth hormone. Nature, 281, 544-548.
Goeddel D.V., Kleid D.G., Bolivar F., Heyneker H.L., Yansura D.G., Crea R., Hirose T., Kraszewski
A., Itakura K. & Riggs A.D. (1979) Expression in Escherichia coli of chemically synthesised genes
for human insulin. P roc Natl Acad Sci USA, 76, 106-110.
Goeddel D.V., Yelverton E., Ullrich A., Heyneker H.L., Miozzari G., Holmes W., Seeburg P.J., Dull T.,
May L, Stebbing N., Crea R., Maeda S., McCandliss R., Sloma A., Tabor J.M., Gross M., Familletti
P.C. & Pestka S. (1980) Human leukocyte interferon produced by E. coli is biologically active.
Nature, 287,411-416.
Guerigan J.L. (Ed.) (1982) Insulins, Growth Hormone and Recombinant DNA Technology. New York:
Raven Press.
Guerigan J.L., Bransome E.D. & Outschoorn A.S. (1981) Hormone Drugs. Rockville: US Pharmacopeial
Convention, Inc.
Itakura K., Hirose T., CreaR,, Riggs A.D. , Heyneker H.L., Bolivar F. & BoyerH.W. (1977) Expression
in Escherichia coli of a chemically synthesised gene for the hormone somatostatin. Science, 198,
1056-1063.
Madigan M.T., Mastinks J.M. & Parker J. (1997) Genetic Engineering and Biotechnology. Brock's
Biology of Microorganisms, 8th edn. London: Prentice Hall.
Old R.W. & Primrose S.B. (1989) Principles of Gene Manipulation: An Introduction to Genetic
Engineering, 4th edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Primrose S.B. (1991) Molecular Biotechnology, 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Shine J., Fettes I., Lan N.C.Y., Roberts J.L. & Baxter J.D. (1980) Expression of cloned j8-endorphin
gene sequences by Escherichia coli. Nature, 285, 456-46 1 .
Tomlinson E. (1991) Impact of the new biologies on the medical and pharmaceutical sciences. Pharm
J, 247, 335-344.
Additional applications of
microorganisms in the
pharmaceutical sciences
1 Introduction
1.1 Early treatment of human disease
1.2 Present-day exploitation
3.3
2
Pharmaceuticals produced by
4.1
microorganisms
4.1.1
2.1
Dextrans
4.1.2
2.2
Vitamins, amino acids and organic
4.2
acids
4.3
2.2.1
Vitamins
4.4
2.2.2
Amino acids
4.4.1
2.2.3
Organic acids
4.4.2
2.3
Iron-chelating agents
4.5
2.4
Enzymes
2.4.1
Streptokinase and streptodornase
4.6
2.4.2
L-Asparaginase
2.4.3
Neuraminidase
5
2.4.4
jS-Lactamases
3
Applications of microorganisms
in the partial synthesis of
pharmaceuticals
7
3.1
Production of antibiotics
3.2
Streroid biotransformations
8
Chiral inversion
Use of microorganisms and their
products in assays
Antibiotic bioassays
Microbiological assays
Radioenzymatic (transferase) assays
Vitamin and amino acid bioassays
Phenylketonuria testing
Carcinogen and mutagen testing
Mutations at the gene level
The Ames test
Use of microbial enzymes in sterility
testing
Immobilized enzyme technology
Use of microorganisms as models of
mammalian drug metabolism
Insecticides
Concluding remarks
Further reading
Introduction
There has long been a tendency, especially in medical and pharmaceutical circles, to
regard microbes as harmful entities to be destroyed. However, as will be described in
this chapter, the exploitation of microorganisms and their products has assumed an
increasingly prominent role in the diagnosis, treatment and prevention of human diseases.
Non-medical uses are also of significance, e.g. the use of bacterial spores (Bacillus
thurungiensis) and viruses (baculoviruses) to control insect pests, the fungus Sclerotinia
sclerotiorum to kill some common weeds, and improved varieties of Trichoderma
harzianum to protect crops against fungal infections.
Early treatment of human disease
The earliest uses of microorganisms to treat human disease can be traced to the belief
that formation of pus in some way drained off noxious humours responsible for
systemic conditions. Although the spontaneous appearance of pus in their patients'
wounds satisfied most physicians, deliberate contamination of wounds was also
practised. Bizarre concoctions of bacteria such as 'ointment of pigs' dung and 'herb
sclerata' were favoured during the Middle Ages. Both early central European and South
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 469
American civilizations cultivated various fungi for application to wounds. In the
nineteenth century, sophisticated concepts of microbial antagonism were developed
following Pasteurs's experiments demonstrating inhibition of anthrax bacteria by
'common bacteria' simultaneously introduced into the same culture medium. Patients
suffering with diseases such as diphtheria, tuberculosis and syphilis were treated by
deliberate infection with what were then thought to be harmless bacteria such as
staphylococci, Escherichia coli and lactobacilli. Following their discovery in the early
part of this century, bacterial viruses (bacteriophages) were considered as potential
antibacterial agents, an idea that soon fell into disuse. This idea has recently been
revived but has been criticized because of the possibility of transferring antibiotic
resistance genes from phage to host bacteria.
12 Present-day exploitation
Some of the most important and widespread uses of microorganisms in the
pharmaceutical sciences are the production of antibiotics, vaccines and the use of
microorganisms in the recombinant DNA industry. These are described in Chapters 7,
15 and 24. However, there are a variety of other medicinal agents derived from
microorganisms including vitamins, amino acids, dextrans, iron-chelating agents
and enzymes. Microorganisms as whole or subcellular fractions, in suspension or
immobilized in an inert matrix are employed in a variety of assays. Microorganisms
have also been used in the pharmaceutical industry to achieve specific modifications
of complex drug molecules such as steroids, in situations where synthetic routes are
difficult and expensive to carry out.
Pharmaceuticals produced by microorganisms
2.1 Dextrans
Dextrans are polysaccharides produced by lactic acid bacteria, in particular members
of the genus Leuconostoc (e.g. L. dextranicus andL. mesenteroides) following growth
on sucrose. These polymers of glucose first came to the attention of industrial
microbiologists because of their nuisance in sugar refineries where large gummy masses
of dextran clogged pipelines. Dextran is essentially a glucose polymer consisting of
(1 -» 6)-ce-links of high but variable molecular weight (15000-20000000; Fig. 25.1).
Growth of the dextran producer strain is carried out in large fermenters in media
with a low nitrogen but high carbohydrate content. The average molecular weight
of the dextrans produced will vary with the strain used. This is important because
dextrans for clinical use must have defined molecular weights which will depend on
their use. Two main methods are employed for obtaining dextrans of a suitable molecular
weight. The first involves acid hydrolysis of very high molecular weight polymers,
whilst the second utilizes preformed dextrans of small size which are added to the
culture fluid. These appear to act as 'templates' for the polymerization, so that the
dextrans are produced with much shorter chain lengths. Once formed, dextrans of the
required molecular weight are obtained by precipitation with organic solvents prior to
formulation.
470 Chapter 25
CHi
H
H
HO
H
o 1
OH
H
OH
J/
C-
i
OH
«-
■O — CH.
OH
H C
O
H
- n
fig, 15,1 Stmciaira of dextran showing (] — *6j-a-linkage-
2.2
2.2.1
Dextrans are produced commercially for use as plasma substitutes (plasma
expanders) which can be administered by intravenous injection to maintain or restore
the blood volume. They can be used in applications to ulcers or burn wounds where
they form a hydrophilic layer which absorbs fluid exudates.
A summary of the properties of the different types of dextrans available is presented
in Table 25 . 1 . Dextrans for clinical use as plasma expanders must have molecular weights
between 40000 (= 220 glucose units) and 300000. Polymers below the minimum are
excreted too rapidly from the kidneys, whilst those above the maximum are potentially
dangerous because of retention in the body. In practice, infusions containing dextrans
of average molecular weights of 40000,70000 and 1 10000 are commonly encountered.
Iron dextran injection contains a complex of iron hydroxide with dextrans of average
molecular weight between 5000 and 7000, and is used for the treatment of iron-
deficiency anaemia in situations where oral therapy is ineffective or impractical. The
sodium salt of sulphuric acid esters of dextran, i.e. dextran sodium sulphate, has anti-
coagulant properties comparable with heparin and is formulated as an injection for
intravenous use.
Vitamins, amino acids and organic acids
Several chemicals used in medicinal products are produced by fermentation (Table
25.2).
Vitamins
Vitamin B 2 (riboflavin) is a constituent of yeast extract and incorporated into many
vitamin preparations. Vitamin B 2 deficiency is characterized by symptoms which include
an inflamed tongue, dermatitis and a sensation of burning in the feet. In genuine cases
of malnutrition, these symptoms will accompany those induced by other vitamin
deficiencies. Riboflavin is produced commercially in good yields by the moulds
Eremothecium ashbyii and Ashbya gossypii grown on a protein-digest medium.
Pernicious anaemia was a fatal disease first reported in 1880. It was not until 1926
that it was discovered that eating raw liver effected a remission. The active principle
was later isolated and called vitamin Bi 2 or cyanocobalamin. It was initially obtained
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 471
Table 25.1 Properties and uses of dextrans
Type of
dextran'
Molecular
weight
(average)
Product
Sterilization
method Clinical uses
Dextran 40
Dextran 70
Dextran 110
Iron Dextran
Dextran sodium
sulphate
Chemically cross-
linked dextrans
40000
70000
110000
5000-
7500
(complex with
ferric chloride)
10% w/v in 5% w/v Autoclave
glucose injection or
0.9% w/v sodium
chloride injection
6% w/v in 5% w/v Autoclave
glucose injection or
0.9% w/v sodium
chloride injection
6% w/v in 5% w/v
glucose injection or
0.9% w/v sodium
chloride injection
Colloidal solution Autoclave
In 0.9% w/v sodium
chloride injection
Powder for preparing Autoclave
solution
IV infusion: improves blood flow
and tissue function in burns and
conditions associated with local
ischaemia
IV: used to produce an
expansion of plasma volume in
conditions associated with loss
of plasma proteins
Autoclave IV: as for dextran 70
Deep IM: non-deficiency
anaemia (oral therapy
ineffective or impractical)
IV (slow infusion): non-deficiency
anaemia (oral therapy
ineffective or impractical)
Anticoagulant (intravenous use
of solution
Water-insoluble: chromatographic
techniques (fractionation and purification
* In the USA, dextran injections with average molecular weights of about 75 000 are also available.
IV, intravenous; IM, intramuscular.
The current British Pharmacopoeia and British National Formulary should be consulted for further information, including
toxic manifestations.
2.2.2
from liver but during the 1960s it was noted that it could be obtained as a by-product of
microbial metabolism (Table 25.1). Hydroxycobalamin is the form of choice for
therapeutic use and can be derived either by chemical transformation of cyanocobalamin
or directly as a fermentation product.
Biotin is a member of the vitamin B family and is an essential factor in the processes
and maintenance of normal metabolism in human beings. It is an essential growth
factor for some bacteria. Its chemical structure was established in the early 1940s and
a practical, highly stereospecific, chemical synthesis enabled D-biotin, identical to that
found in yeasts and other cells, to be produced.
Amino acids
Amino acids find applications as ingredients of infusion solutions for parenteral nutrition
and individually for treatment of specific conditions. They are obtained either by
fermentation processes similar to those used for antibiotics or in cell-free extracts
employing enzymes isolated from bacteria (Table 25.1). Details of the many and varied
472 Chapter 25
Table 25.2 Examples of vitamins, amino acids, antibiotics and organic acids produced by microorganisms
Pharmaceutical
Producer organism
Use
Riboflavin
(vitamin B 2 )
Cyanocobalamin
(vitamin B 12 )
Amino acids, e.g.
glutamate, lysine
Antibiotics*, e.g.
Benzylpenicillin
Gentamicin
Nystatin
Organic acids
Citric acid
Lactic acid
Gluconic acid
Eremothecium ashbyii
Ashbya gossypii
Propionibacterium freudenreichii
Propionibacterium shermanii
Pseudomonas denitrificans
Corynebacterium glutamicum
Brevibacterium flavum
Penicillin notatum, P. chrysogenum
Micromonospora purpurea
Streptomyces noursei
Aspergillus niger
Lactobacillus delbrueckii
Rhizopus oryzae
Gluconobacter suboxydans
Aspergillus niger
Treatment of vitamin B 2 deficiency disease
Treatment of pernicious anaemia
Supplementation of feeds/food; intravenous
infusion fluid constituents
Antibacterial drug
Antibacterial drug
Antifungal drug
Effervescent products; sodium citrate used as an
anticoagulant; potassium citrate used to treat
cystitis
Calcium lactate is a convenient source of Ca 2+ for
oral administration; constituent of intraperitoneal
dialysis solutions
Calcium gluconate is a source of Ca 2+ for oral
administration; gluconates are used to render
bases more soluble, e.g. chlorhexidine gluconate
For further information, see Chapters 5, 6 and 7.
2.2.3
2.3
processes reported in the literature will be found in the appropriate references at the
end of the chapter.
Organic acids
Examples of organic acids (citric, lactic, gluconic) produced by microorganisms, together
with pharmaceutical and medical uses, are depicted in Table 25.2. Citric and lactic
acids also have widespread uses in the food and drink and plastics industries, respectively.
Gluconic acid is also used as a metal-chelating agent in, for example, detergent products.
Iron-chelating agents
Growth of many microorganisms in iron-deficient growth media results in the secretion
of low molecular weight iron-chelating agents called siderophores, which are usually
phenolate or hydroxamate compounds. The therapeutic potential of these compounds
has generated considerable interest in recent years. Uncomplicated iron deficiency can
be treated with oral preparations of ferrous (iron II) sulphate but such treatment is not
without hazard and iron salts are common causes of poisoning in children. The accidental
consumption of around 3 g of ferrous sulphate by a small child leads to acidosis, coma
and heart failure amongst a variety of other symptoms which, if untreated, are fatal.
Desferrioxamine B (Fig. 25.2), the deferrated form of a siderophore produced by
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 473
I >
NH,
CCH 2 Js
Nj
OH
C
II
o
/
CONH
/
\
[CH 2 ) 3
l
OH
/
/
[CH Z ) Z
CONH
I
(CHA
OH
c
/
CH ;
(CH ? )r-
/
i
Fe
3-f
\
LCH*)n
N
/
fg — o — Fb |HI| ™0 = C— J CH 2 )a
/ °n /=°
C fj /
CH 3 KHfc
Kg. 25 J Structure of dteretfiwdrtiifle B (Desfctffll) ftftd it* tWMSpOiulingi iron the Idle,
Streptomyces pilosus, is a highly effective antidote for the treatment of acute iron
poisoning. Desferoxamine owes its effectiveness both to its high affinity for ferric
iron (its binding constant is in excess of 10 30 ) and because the iron-desferrioxamine
complex is highly water-soluble and is readily excreted through the kidneys. In
haemolytic anaemias such as thalassaemia, desferoxamine is used together with
blood transfusions to maintain normal blood levels of free iron and haemoglobin.
Desferoxamine is prepared as a sterile powder for use as an injection, but it is also
administered orally in acute iron poisoning to remove unabsorbed iron from the gut.
Patients with iron overload disorders treated with desferoxamine may, however, have
increased susceptibility to infections.
The important role played by iron availability during infections in vertebrate hosts
has only been recognized relatively recently. The ability of the host to withhold growth-
essential iron from microbial and, indeed, neoplastic invaders whilst retaining its own
access to this metal has led to suggestions that microbial iron chelators or their
semisynthetic derivatives may be of use in antimicrobial and anticancer chemotherapy.
Preliminary work has shown some encouraging results. The bacterial siderophores
parabactin and compound II secreted by Paracoccus denitrificans have been shown to
inhibit the growth of leukaemia cells in culture and in experimental animals. They also
appear capable of inhibiting the replication of RNA viruses.
Siderophores like desferoxamine may, therefore, find increasing applications not
only in the treatment of iron poisoning and iron-overloaded disease states but also
as chemotherapeutic agents, although the possible problems noted above cannot be
ignored.
Enzymes
Several enzymes have important therapeutic and other medical or pharmaceutical uses
(Table 25.3). In this section, those enzymes used therapeutically will be described,
with section 4 discussing the applications of microbially derived enzymes for antibiotic
inactivation in sterility testing and diagnostic assays.
Streptokinase and streptodornase
Mammalian blood will clot spontaneously if allowed to stand: however, on further
standing, this clot may dissolve as a result of the action of a proteolytic enzyme called
plasmin. Plasmin is normally present as its inactive precursor, plasminogen. Certain
strains of streptococci were found to produce a substance which was capable of activating
plasminogen (Fig. 25.3), a phenomenon that suggested a potential use in liquefying
clots. This substance was isolated, found to be an enzyme and called streptokinase.
Streptokinase is administered by intravenous or intra-arterial infusion in the treatment
of thrombo-embolic disorders, e.g. pulmonary embolism, deep- vein thrombosis and
arterial occlusions. It is also used in acute myocardial infarction.
A second enzyme, streptodornase, present in streptococcal culture filtrates, was
observed to liquefy pus. Streptodornase is a deoxyribonuclease which breaks down
deoxyribonucleoprotein andDNA, both constituents of pus, with a consequent reduction
in viscosity. Streptokinase and streptodornase together have been used to facilitate
Table 25.3 Clinical uses and other applications of enzymes
Clinical and/or other
Enzyme
Source
use
Section
Streptokinase
Certain streptococcal
strains
Liquefying blood clots
2.4.1
Streptodornase
Certain streptococcal
strains
Liquefying pus
2.4.1
L-Asparaginase
E. col i or Erwinia
carotovora
Cancer chemotherapy
2.4.2
Neuraminidase
Vibrio cholerae
Possible: increase immuno-
genicity of tumour
cells
2.4.3
A -I_actamases
Bacillus cereus (or
Sterility testing, treatment
2.4.4,
other bacteria, as
of penicillin-induced
4.5
appropriate)
allergic reaction
Other antibiotic-
Some AGAC-resistant
Sterility testing, assay
4.1.2,
modifying or
bacteria
4.5
-inactivating
Some CMP-resistant
Sterility testing
4.5
enzymes
bacteria
Glucose oxidase
Aspergillus niger
Blood glucose
analysis
4.6
AGAC, aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol antibiotics (see Chapter 5); CMP, chloramphenicol.
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 475
Shed mammalian
Fibrlnogert
Thrombin
Carrtptak vtfith
streptokinase
Spontaneous
clot
if
Fibrin
[matrix of
clotf
Plasm inagan
(inactive precursor)
Activated
..__Actfon
Proteolytic enzyme,
pJasmlri
^_ t (fibfinolysfn
activity}
FiR, 2S J Action of strcptotitiiw.
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
drainage by liquefying blood clots and/or pus in the chest cavity. The combination can
also be applied topically to wounds which have excessive suppuration.
Streptokinase and streptodornase are isolated following growth of non-pathogenic
streptococcal producer strains in media containing excess glucose. They are obtained
as a crude mixture from the culture filtrate and can be prepared relatively free of
each other. They are commercially available as either streptokinase injection or as a
combination of streptokinase and streptodornase.
L- Asparaginase
L-Asparaginase, an enzyme derived from E. coli or Erwinia carotovora, has been
employed in cancer chemotherapy where its selectivity depends upon the essential
requirement of some tumours for the amino acid L-asparagine. Normal tissues do not
require this amino acid and thus the enzyme is administered with the intention of
depleting tumour cells of asparagine by converting it to aspartic acid and ammonia.
Whilst L-asparaginase showed promise in a variety of experimentally induced tumours,
it is only useful in humans for the treatment of acute lymphoblastic leukaemia, although
it is sometimes used for myeloid leukaemia.
Neuraminidase
Neuraminidase derived from Vibrio cholerae has been used experimentally to increase
the immunogenicity of tumour cells. It appears capable of removing Af-acetylneuraminic
(sialic) acid residues from the outer surface of certain tumour cells, thereby exposing
new antigens which may be tumour specific together with a concomitant increase in
their immunogenicity. In laboratory animals administration of neuraminidase-treated
tumour cells was found to be effective against a variety of mouse leukaemias. Preliminary
investigations in acute myelocytic leukaemia patients has suggested that treatment of
the tumour cells with neuraminidase in combination with conventional chemotherapy
may increase remission rates.
(5 -Lactamases
/ A -Lactamase enzymes, whilst being a considerable nuisance because of their ability to
476 Chapter 25
confer bacterial resistance by inactivating penicillins and cephalosporins (see Chapter
9), are useful in the sterility testing of certain antibiotics (see section 4.5) and, prior to
culture, in inactivating various /3-lactams in blood or urine samples in patients undergoing
therapy with these drugs. One other important therapeutic application is in the rescue
of patients presenting symptoms of a severe allergic reaction following administration
of a /3-lactamase-sensitive penicillin. In such cases, a highly purified penicillinase
obtained from Bacillus cereus is administered either intramuscularly or intravenously
and in combination with other supportive measures such as adrenaline or antihistamines.
Applications of microorganisms in the partial synthesis
of pharmaceuticals
Whole microbial cells as well as microbially derived enzymes have played a significant
role in the production of novel antibiotics. The potential of microorganisms as chemical
catalysts, however, was first fully realized in the synthesis of industrially important
steroids. These reactions have assumed increasing importance following the discovery
that certain steroids such as hydrocortisone have anti-inflammatory activity, whilst
derivatives of the steroidal sex hormones are useful as oral contraceptive agents. More
recently, chiral inversion of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NS ADDs) has been
demonstrated.
Production of antibiotics
In the antibiotics industry, the hydrolysis of benzylpenicillin to give 6-aminopenicillanic
acid by the enzyme penicillin acylase is an important stage in the synthesis of many
clinically useful penicillins (see Chapters 5 and 7). The combination of genetic
engineering techniques to produce hybrid microorganisms with significantly higher
acylase levels, together with their entrapment in gel matrices (which appears to improve
the stability of the hybrids), has resulted in considerable increases in 6-aminopenicillanic
acid yields.
A second example is provided by the production by fermentation of cephalosporin
C, which is used solely for the subsequent preparation of semisynthetic cephalosporins
(Chapters 5 and 7).
Furthermore, antibiotics produced by fermentation of various moulds or, especially,
Streptomyces spp. can be employed by medicinal chemists as starting blocks in the
production of what might be more effective antimicrobial compounds.
Steroid biotransformations
Since steroid hormones can only be obtained in small quantities directly from mammals,
attempts were made to synthesize them from plant sterols which can be obtained
cheaply and economically in large quantities. However, all adrenocortical steroids are
characterized by the presence of an oxygen at position 11 in the steroid nucleus. Thus,
although it is easy to hydroxylate a steroidal compound it is extremely difficult to
obtain site-specific hydroxylation, so that many of the routes used for synthesizing the
desired steroid are lengthy, complex and consequently expensive. This problem was
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms All
ft. nigricans
Progesl* rone
1 1 a -tiydiWYProgeste rone
Fig. 25.4 Conversion of progesterone to 11 a-hydroxyprogesterone by Rhizopus nigricans.
overcome when it was realized that many microorganisms are capable of performing
limited oxidations with both stereo- and regio-specificity. Thus, by simply adding a
steroid to growing cultures of the appropriate microorganism, specific site-directed
chemical changes can be introduced into the molecule. In 1952, the first commercially
employed process involving the conversion of progesterone to 1 1 a-hydroxyprogesterone
by the fungus Rhizopus nigricans was introduced (Fig. 25.4). This reaction is an
important stage in the manufacture of cortisone and hydrocortisone from more readily
available steroids. Table 25.4 gives several other examples of microbially directed
oxidations employed in the manufacture of steroidal drugs.
More recent advances involving the employment of microorganisms in bio-
transformation reactions utilize immobilized cells (both living and dead). Immobilization
of microbial cells, usually by entrapment in a polymer gel matrix, has several important
advantages. Whole microbial cells contain complex multistep enzyme systems and
there is therefore no longer a need to extract enzymes or enzyme systems which may
be inactivated during purification procedures. It also increases the stability of membrane-
associated enzymes which are unstable in the solubilized state, as well as permitting
the conversion of water-insoluble compounds like steroids in two-phase water-organic
solvent systems.
Chiral inversion
Several clinically used drugs, e.g. salbutamol (a / A -adrenoceptor agonist), propanol (a
j3-adrenoceptor antagonist) and the 2-arylpropionic acids (NSAIDs) are employed in
Table 25.4 Examples of biological transformations of steroids
Starting material
Product
Type of reaction
Progesterone
Compound S*
1 1 a-hydroxyprogesterone
Hydrocortisone
Cortisone
11 a-hydroxyprogesterone
Hydrocortisone
A-1 1 a-hydroxyprogesterone
Prednisolone
Prednisone
Hydroxylation
Hydroxylation
Dehydrogenation
Dehydrogenation
Dehydrogenation
Derived from diosgenin by chemical transformation.
the racemic form. In the last series, e.g. ibuprofen, activity resides almost exclusively
in the S(+) isomers; chiral inversion, in the undirectional manner R(-) — > S(+),-occurs
in vivo over a 3-hour period. The S(+) form is a more effective inhibitor of prostaglandin
synthesis, and enzymes from some fungal enzymes convert a racemic mixture into the
S(+) isomer in vitro. It has thus been suggested that the enantiomerically pure S(+)
form could be administered clinically to give a reduced dosage and possible less toxicity.
CDDH
t— H Ffc(-) fnrni
COOH
t— Ar Sl+>*orm
Use of microorganisms and their products in assays
Microorganisms have found widespread uses in the performance of bioassays for:
1 determining the concentration of certain compounds (e.g. amino acids, vitamins,
some antibiotics) in complex chemical mixtures or in body fluids;
2 diagnosing certain diseases;
3 testing chemicals for potential mutagenicity or carcinogenicity;
4 monitoring purposes involving the use of immobilized enzymes;
5 sterility testing of antibiotics.
Antibiotic bioassays
Antibiotics may be assayed by a variety of methods (see Chapter 8, pages 166-188, in
Pharmaceutical Microbiology, 5th edition 1992). Only microbiological and radio-
enzymatic assays will be considered briefly here: see Figs 25.5 and 25.6 and sections
4.1.1 and 4. 1.2.
Fig. 25.5 Graphical
representation of a two-by-two
assay response. X is the
horizontal distance between the
two lines. The antilog of X gives
the relative potency of the
standard and test.
Standard
Lgg 1c dew
Additional phn rma ceutk -of &ppticttfkvt$ afitU£N>ar$anismE 47*
E
D1
■*■■
c
u
Gentamictn concentration
(i*g ml- 1 *
Fig. 25.6 Relationship between concentration of
aminoglycoside antibiotic and the transfer of radioactivity
from adenosine triphosphate to phosphocellulose.
t.1.1
Microbiological assays
In microbiological assays the response of a growing population of microorganisms to
the antimicrobial agent is measured. The usual methods involve agar diffusion assays,
in which the drug diffuses into agar seeded with a susceptible microbial population and
produces a zone of growth inhibition.
In the commonest form of microbiological assay used today, samples to be assayed
are applied in some form of reservoir (porcelain cup, paper disc or well) to a thin layer
of agar seeded with indicator organism. The drug diffuses into the medium and after
incubation a zone of growth inhibition forms, in this case as a circle around the reservoir.
All other factors being constant, the diameter of the zone of inhibition is, within limits,
related to the concentration of antibiotic in the reservoir.
During incubation the antibiotic diffuses from the reservoir, and that part of the
microbial population away from the influence of the antibiotic increases by cell division.
The edge of a zone is formed when the minimum concentration of antibiotic which
will inhibit the growth of the organism on the plate (critical concentration) reaches, for
the first time, a population density too great for it to inhibit. The position of the zone
edge is thus determined by the initial population density, growth rate of the organism
and the rate of diffusion of the antibiotic.
In situations where the likely concentration range of the tests will lie within a
relatively narrow range (e.g. in determining potency of pharmaceutical preparations)
and high precision is sought, then a Latin square design with tests and calibrators
at two or three levels of concentration may be used. For example an 8 x 8 Latin
square can be used to assay three samples and one calibrator, or two samples and
two calibrators at two concentrations each (over a two- or fourfold range), with a
coefficient of variation of around 3%. Using this technique, parallel dose-response
lines should be obtained for the calibrators and the tests at the two dilutions (Fig. 25.5).
Using such a method, potency can be computed or determined from carefully prepared
nomograms.
480 Chapter 25
Conventional plate assays require several hours' incubation and consequently the
possibility of using rapid microbiological assay methods has been studied. Two such
methods are:
1 Urease assay. When Proteus mirabilis grows in a urea-containing medium it
hydrolyses the urea to ammonia and consequently raises the pH of the medium. This
production of urease is inhibited by aminoglycoside antibiotics (inhibitors of protein
synthesis; Chapter 8). In practice, it is difficult to obtain reliable results by this
method.
2 Luciferase assay. In this technique, firefly luciferase is used to measure small
amounts of adenosine triphosphate (ATP) in a bacterial culture, ATP levels being reduced
by the inhibitory action of aminoglycoside antibiotics. This method may find more
application in the future as more active and reliable luciferase preparations become
available.
4.1.2 Radio enzymatic (transferase) assays
These depend on the fact that bacterial resistance to aminoglycosides (Chapter 9), such
as gentamicin, tobramycin, amikacin, netilmicin, streptomycin, spectinomycin, etc., and
chloramphenicol is frequently associated with the presence of specific enzymes (often
coded for by transmissible plasmids) which either acetylate, adenylylate or phosporylate
the antibiotics, thereby rendering them inactive (Chapter 9). Aminoglycosides may
be susceptible to attack by aminoglycoside acetyltransferases (AAC), aminoglycoside
adenylyltransferases (AAD), or aminoglycoside phosphotransferases (APH). Chloram-
phenicol is attacked by chloramphenicol acetyltransferases (CAT). Acetyltransferases
attack susceptible amino groups and require acetyl coenzyme A, while AAD or APH
enzymes attack susceptible hydroxyl groups and require ATP (or another nucleotide
triphosphate).
Several AAC and AAD enzymes have been used for assays. The enzyme and the
appropriate radiolabeled cofactor ([1- I4 C] acetyl coenzyme A, or [2- 3 H] ATP) are used
to radiolabel the drug being assayed. The radiolabeled drug is separated from the
reaction mixture after the reaction has been allowed to go to completion; the amount of
radioactivity extracted is directly proportional to the amount of drug present.
Aminoglycosides are usually separated by binding them to phosphocellulose paper,
whereas chloramphenicol is usually extracted using an organic solvent. An example of
a standard curve (for gentamicin) is provided in Fig. 25.6.
These types of assay are rapid, taking approximately 2 hours, show good precision
and are much more specific than microbiological assays.
4.2 Vitamin and amino acid bioassays
The principle of microbiological bioassays for growth factors such as vitamins and
amino acids is quite simple. Unlike antibiotic assays (see section 4.1) which are based
on studies of growth inhibition, these assays are based on growth exhibition. All that is
required is a culture medium which is nutritionally adequate for the test microorganism
in all essential growth factors except the one being assayed. If a range of limiting
concentrations of the test substance is added, the growth of the test microorganism will
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 481
IS
81
Vitamin conc&ntration (ng)
Fig. 25.7 Standard curve in a
vitamin assay.
Assay microorganism
Vitamin or amino acid
Lactobacillus casei
L. arabinosus
L leichmannii
L. casei
Saccharomyces u varum
L arabinosus
Acetobacter suboxydans
L. casei
Neurospora crassa or
S. carlsbergiensis
L. casei
L viridans
Biotin
Calcium pantothenate
Cyanocobalamin
Folic acid
Inositol
Nicotinic acid
Pantothenol
Pyridoxal
Pyridoxine
Riboflavine
Thiamine
Table 25.5 Some examples of
microorganisms used as
bioassays for vitamins and amino
acids
4.3
be proportional to the amount added. A calibration curve of concentration of substance
being assayed against some parameter of microbial growth, e.g. cell dry weight, optical
density or acid production, can be plotted. An example of a standard curve is presented
in Fig. 25.7 and from this the concentration of growth factor in the unknown solution
can be determined. One example of this is the assay for pyridoxine (vitamin B 6 ) which
can be assayed using a pyridoxine-requiring mutant of the mould Neurospora. Lactic
acid bacteria have extensive growth requirements and are often used in bioassays. It
is possible to assay a variety of different growth factors with a single test organism
simply by preparing a basal media with different growth-limiting nutrients. Table 25.5
summarizes some of the vitamin and amino acid bioassays currently available. In
practice, only vitamins are assayed by bioassay procedures, because most amino acids
are currently determined chemically.
Phenylketonuria testing
Phenylketonuria (PKU) is an inborn error of metabolism by which the body is unable
to convert surplus phenylalanine (PA) to tyrosine for use in the biosynthesis o£ for
4 8 2 Chapter 25
(a)
©-
NADPH NADP
CH 2 CH[NH 2 fC0OH
^2
HO
<^
Phenylalanine
(b) Absence of priaylalanlne 4-rnonciOKYggnasi?
CHXH(NH 2 )COOH
Tyrosine
©-
CH 3 CH(NH a JO00H
Phenylalanine
©--*
COCOOH
Phenyl pyruvic acid
HOOC(CH 2 ) 2 COOOOH
ot-Ketoglutaric acid
Tranta mi nation
HOOC[CH^2CH4htH,}COOH
Glutamic acid
Fig. 25.8 (a) Normal metabolism, in which phenylalanine is converted by phenylalanine 4-mono-
oxygenase to tyrosine, (b) Phenylketonuria, in which there is a transamination reaction between
phenylalanine and a-ketoglutaric acid. Phenylalanine 4-mono-oxygenase is absent in about 1 in
every 10000 human beings because of a recessive mutant gene.
example, thyroxine, adrenaline and noradrenaline. This results from a deficiency in the
liver enzyme phenylalanine 4-mono-oxygenase (phenylalanine hydroxylase). A secondary
metabolic pathway comes into play in which there is a transamination reaction between
PA and a-ketoglutaric acid to produce phenylpyruvic acid (PPVA), a ketone and glutamic
acid. Overall, PKU may be defined as a genetic defect in PA metabolism such
that there are elevated levels of both PA and PPVA in blood and excessive excretion of
PPVA (Fig. 25.8).
Control of PKU can be achieved simply by resorting to a low PA-containing diet.
Failure to diagnose PKU, however, will result in mental deficiency, and early diagnosis
is essential. In 1968, the UK Medical Research Council Working Party on PKU
recommended the adoption of the Guthrie test as a convenient method for screening
newborn infants. This assay employs Bacillus subtilis as the test organism. In minimal
culture media, growth of this bacterium is inhibited by /3-2-thienylalanine (Fig. 25.9a)
and its competitive reversal in the presence of PA (Fig. 25.9b) or PPVA. The use of
filter-paper discs impregnated with blood or urine permits the detection of elevated
levels of PA and PPVA. The test can be quantitated by the measurement of the diameter
of the growth zone around the filter-paper disc and comparing it with a calibration
curve constructed from known concentrations of PA or PPVA (Fig. 25.9c).
If positive, the Guthrie test provides presumptive evidence for the presence of PKU.
It should be confirmed by other, chemical, means.
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 483
(a)
<b>
CH,
©-
H
NH-
ch 3 — c — rm
COOH
COOH
*
B
H
o
*?
ra
a o
fc>
Phenylalanine
concn.
Fig. 25.9 (a) /3-Thienylalanine, (b) phenylalanine, (c) standard curve in Guthrie test.
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
Carcinogen and mutagen testing
A carcinogen is a substance which causes living tissues to become carcinomatous (to
produce a malignant epithelial tumour). A mutagen is a chemical (or physical) agent
which induces mutation in a human (or other) cell.
Mutagenicity tests are used to screen a wide variety of chemicals for their ability to
cause a mutation in the DNA of a cell. Such mutations can occur at:
1 gene level (a 'point' mutation);
2 individual chromosome level;
3 chromosome set level, i.e. a change in the number of chromosomes (aneuploidy).
Some compounds are only mutagenic or carcinogenic after metabolism (often in
the liver). This aspect must, therefore, be considered in designing a suitable test method
(see section 4.4.2).
Mutations at the gene level
Forward mutation refers to mutation of the natural ('wild-type') organism to a more
stringent organism. By contrast, reverse (backward) mutation is the return of a mutant
strain to the wild-type form, i.e. it is a heritable change in a previously mutated gene
that restores the original function of that gene.
There are two types of reverse mutation:
1 frame-shift: in these mutants, the gene is altered by the addition or deletion of one
or more basis so that the triplex reading frame for RNA is modified;
2 base-pair: in these mutants, a single base is altered so that the triplex reading frame
is again modified.
These principles of reverse mutation are utilized in one important method, the Ames
test (section 4.4.2), which is used to detect compounds that act as mutagens or
carcinogens (most carcinogens are mutagens).
The Ames test
The Ames test is used to screen a wide variety of chemicals for potential carcinogenicity
484 Chapter 25
or as potential cancer chemotherapeutic agents. The test enables a large number of
compounds to be screened rapidly by examining their ability to induce mutagenesis in
several specially constructed bacterial mutants derived from Salmonella typhimurium.
The test strains contain mutations in the histidine operon so that they cannot synthesize
the amino acid histidine. Two additional mutations increase further the sensitivity of
the system. The first is a defect in their lipopolysaccharide structure (Chapter 1) such
that they are in fact deep rough mutants possessing only 2-keto-3-deoxyoctonate (KDO)
linked to lipid A. This mutation increases the permeability of the mutants to large
hydrophobic molecules. The second mutation concerns a DNA excision repair system
which prevents the organism repairing its damaged DNA following exposure to a
mutagen.
The assay method involves treatment of a large population of these mutant tester
strains with the test compound. Histidine-requiring mutants are used to detect mutagens
capable of causing base-pair substitutions (in some strains) or frame-shift mutations
(other strains). This can be carried out by incorporating both the test strain and test
compound in molten agar (at 45 °C), which is then poured onto a minimal glucose agar
plate. Alternatively, the mutagens can be applied to the surface of the top agar as a
liquid or as a few crystals. The medium used for the top agar contains a trace of histidine
which permits all the bacteria on the plate to undergo several divisions, since for many
mutagens some growth is a necessary prerequisite for mutagenesis to occur. After
incubation for 2 days at 37°C the number of revertant colonies can be counted and
compared with control plates from which the test compound has been omitted. Each
revertant colony is assumed to be derived from a cell which has mutated back to the
wild type and thus can now synthesize its own histidine: see Fig. 25.10 for a summary.
A further refinement to the Ames test permits screening of agents which require
metabolic activation before their mutagenicity or carcinogenicity is apparent. This is
achieved by incorporating into the top agar layer, along with the bacteria, homogenates
of rat (or human) liver whose activating enzyme systems have been induced by exposure
to polychlorinated biphenyl mixtures. This test is sometimes referred to as the
Salmonella/microsome assay since the fraction of liver homogenate used, called the
S9 fraction, contains predominantly liver microsomes.
It is important to realize that this test is flexible and is still undergoing modification
and development. Almost all the known human carcinogens have been tested and shown
Saimanglta typfrimuriufi} strain
(h istldi ne-requ i ring)
+ Possible mutagen
■i fat Ifver horrjggenete ($Ef
Revertents Nti revertahte
\r\o longer require (still require
Iwticflneli hittidineji
Fig. 25.10 Summary of the
Ames test. Mutagen ic Non-mutagflnic.
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 485
to be positive. These include agents such as /3-naphthylamine, cigarette smoke
condensates, aflatoxin B and vinylchloride, as well as drugs used in cancer treatment
such as adriamycin, daunomycin and mitomycin C. Whilst the test is not perfect for the
prediction of mammalian carcinogenicity or mutagenicity and for making definitive
conclusions about potential toxicity or lack of toxicity in humans, it nevertheless
represents a significant advance providing useful information rapidly and cheaply. The
Ames test forms an important part of a battery of tests, the others of which are non-
microbial in nature, for detecting mutagenicity or carcinogenicity.
4.5 Use of microbial enzymes in sterility testing
Sterile pharmaceutical preparations must be tested for the presence of fungal and
bacterial contamination before use (see Chapters 18 and 23). If the preparation contains
an antibiotic, it must be removed or inactivated. Membrane filtration is the usual
recommended method. However, this technique has certain disadvantages. Accidental
contamination is a problem, as is the retention of the antibiotic on the filter and its
subsequent liberation into the nutrient medium.
Enzymic inactivation of the antibiotic (see also Chapter 9) prior to testing would
provide an elegant solution to this problem. Currently, the only pharmacopoeial method
permitted is that of using an appropriate / A -lactamase to inactivate penicillins and
cephalosporins. Other antibiotics which are susceptible to inactivating enzymes are
chloramphenicol (by chloramphenicol acetyltransferase) and the aminoglycosides, e.g.
gentamicin, which can be inactivated by phosphorylation, acetylation or adenylylation.
A method for acetylating and consequently inactivating aminoglycosides prior to testing
and using 3 -N- acetyl transferase (an enzyme with wide substrate specificity) in
combination with acetyl coenzyme A has been described, but this method has yet to be
adopted.
4.6 Immobilized enzyme technology
The therapeutic uses of microbially derived enzymes have already been examined
(section 2.4). However, enzymes also form the basis of many diagnostic tests used in
clinical medicine. For example, glucose oxidase, an enzyme used in blood glucose
analysis, is obtained commercially from Aspergillus niger. Future development and
improvement of such diagnostic tests is likely to involve the immobilization of enzymes
in enzyme electrodes. Several types of glucose oxidase electrodes have been developed,
although none is yet in clinical use. One basic system employs glucose oxidase layered
over a platinum electrode. As the reaction proceeds and oxygen is consumed, i.e. glucose
+ oxygen — > gluconic acid + hydrogen peroxide, the reduction in oxygen levels is
detected by the underlying electrode. However, problems of enzyme inactivation in
vivo, competition between glucose and oxygen in body fluids and calibration have
prevented the adoption of this system as an implantable glucose monitor in diabetic
patients. However, there are currently a number of major research efforts in this area
and it is likely that biosensors employing immobilized enzymes which are potentially
useful for monitoring many substances of clinical importance will become readily
available in the not-too-distant future.
486 Chapter 25
Use of microorganisms as models of mammalian
drug metabolism
The safety and efficacy of a drug must be exhaustively evaluated prior to its approval
for use in the treatment of human diseases. Investigations of the manner in which a
drug is metabolized are extremely valuable since they provide information on its mode
of action, why it exhibits toxicity and how it is distributed, excreted and stored in the
body. Traditionally, drug metabolism studies have relied on the use of animal models
and, to a lesser extent, liver microsomal preparations, tissue culture and perfused organ
systems. Each of these models has certain advantages and disadvantages. Animals in
particular are expensive to purchase and maintain and there is considerable pressure
from animal welfare groups to curb the use of animals in scientific research.
The use of microbial systems as in vitro models for drug metabolism in humans
has been proposed since there are many similarities between certain microbial enzyme
systems and mammalian liver enzyme systems. The major advantages of using micro-
organisms is their ability to produce significant quantities of metabolites that would
otherwise be difficult to obtain from animal systems or by chemical synthesis, and the
considerable reduction in operating costs compared with animal studies.
Microbial drug metabolism studies are usually carried out by firstly screening a
large number of microorganisms for their ability to metabolize a drug substrate. The
organism is usually grown in a medium such as peptone glucose in flasks which are
shaken to ensure good aeration. Drugs as substrates are generally added after 24 hours
of growth and are then sampled for the presence of metabolites at intervals up to 14
days after substrate addition. Once it has been determined that a microorganism can
metabolize a drug, the whole process can be scaled up for the production of large
quantities of metabolites for the determination of their structure and biological properties.
As an example of this the metabolism of the antidepressant drug imipramine can be
considered. In mammalian systems, this is metabolized to five major metabolites:
2-hydroxy imipramine, 10-hydroxy imipramine, iminodibenzyl, iniipramine-/V-oxide
and desipramine (Fig. 25.11). For microbial metabolism studies, a large number of
fungi are screened, from which several are chosen for the preparative scale production
of imipramine metabolites. Cunninghamella blakesleeana produces the hydroxylated
metabolites 2-hydroxyimipramine and 10-hydroxyimipramine; Aspergillus flavipes and
Fusarium oxysporum f. sp. cepae yield the N-oxide derivative and iminodibenzyl,
respectively; whilst the pharmacologically active metabolite desipramine is produced
by Mucor griseocyanus together with the 10-hydroxy and iV-oxide metabolites. By
scaling up this procedure, significant quantities of the metabolites that are formed during
the mammalian metabolism can be obtained.
Microorganisms thus have considerable potential as tools in the study of drug
metabolism. Whilst they cannot completely replace animals they are extremely useful
as predictive models for initial studies.
Insecticides
Like animals, insects are susceptible to infections which may be caused by viruses,
fungi, bacteria or protozoa. The use of microorganisms to spread diseases to particular
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 487
I mi pre mi re
Desiprarnina
3-lrvdnQwyiTn iprarrtine
1 0-hyd roxyi rn i pramine
Imlnodibenzyl
lmi"p ngrnifi s-N'OXid e
R n - ■ lCH s yVl<CH 3 fe ; R*= R 3 = H
R n =(OH ? KNHCH a ? R*=R 5 =H
R 1 =R2^R3^H
R 1 -(CH a ) 3 IMfCH s ^ ft 1 =R*=H
O
Fig. 25.11 Structure of imipramine and its metabolites.
insect pests offers an attractive method of bio-control, particularly in view of the ever-
increasing incidence of resistance to chemical insecticides. However, any micro-
organism used in this way must be highly virulent, specific for the target pest but non-
pathogenic to animals, man or plants. It must be economical to produce, stable on
storage and preferably rapidly acting. Bacterial and viral pathogens have so far shown
the most promise.
Perhaps the best studied, commercially available insecticidal agent is
B. thuringiensis. This insect pathogen contains two toxins of major importance. The
( A -endotoxin is a protein present inside the bacterial cell as a crystalline inclusion
within the spore case. This toxin is primarily active against the larvae of lepidopteran
insects (moths and butterflies). Its mechanism of action is summarized in Fig. 25.12.
Commercially available preparations of B. thuringiensis are spore-crystal mixtures
prepared as dusting powders. They are used primarily to protect commercial crops
from destruction by caterpillars and are surprisingly non-toxic to man and animals.
Although the currently available preparation has a rather narrow spectrum of activity,
a variant B. thuringiensis strain has recently been isolated and found to produce a
different 5-endotoxin with activity against coleopteran insects (beetles) rather than
lepidopteran or dipteran (flies and mosquitoes) insects.
The second B. thuringiensis toxin, the /3-exotoxin has a much broader spectrum
encompassing the Lepidoptera, Coleoptera and Diptera. It is an adenine nucleotide,
probably an ATP analogue which acts by competitively inhibiting enzymes which
catalyse the hydrolysis of ATP and pyrophosphate. This compound, however, is toxic
when administered to mammals so that commercial preparations of the B. thuringiensis
5-endotoxin are obtained from strains which do not produce the j8-exotoxin.
Strains of B. sphaericus pathogenic to mosquitoes were isolated several years ago.
More recently, strains of this organism with increased toxicity to mosquitoes have
been isolated and might have considerable potential as control agents.
JrtSolybie
at
mildly acid
pH
Protein crystalline inclusions
wfflifn sporuJiptrng celts
^OEC-lLPb^
at
neutral
Sofubte
in
dilute
alkali
Dissolved protein ** —
attacks carrierting substance
responsible fork** ping calls
erf gut wa[E adherent
Crystals ingested by
larvae dissolve in
gut (contents alkaline)
Gut contents
diffusa intp bltrad
-^GenaraL paralysis
Tissue invasion
by comm&nsals
Oeath
Fi^. 2S.12 Mecharu5.n1 of action of ii^eiKirrtcijciii from B. jfturinfitenst*.
Other insect pathogens are currently being evaluated for activity against insects
which are vectors for diseases such as sleeping sickness, as well as those which cause
damage to crops. Viruses may well have the greatest potential for insect control since
they are host-specific and highly virulent, and one infected insect can release vast
numbers of virus particles into the environment. They have already been used with
considerable success against the spruce sawfly and pine moth.
Concluding remarks
Microorganisms are not always the killers they are made out to be. In fact, mankind
has been remarkably adept at harnessing microbes for a variety of purposes. In many
instances, e.g. antibiotics by whole or partial synthetic production (Chapter 7) and
various forms of vaccines, products have been obtained to turn the tables on infecting
organisms. Other products have been used for a variety of purposes (including
many non-pharmaceutical or non-medical ones, outside the scope of this chapter).
Microorganisms have also been employed for specific assay purposes and different
types of chemical transformations, as well as in genetic engineering (Chapter 24).
Immobilized microorganisms have now been used with considerable success in the
partial synthesis of steroids and antibiotics and in the production of the antiviral
compound adenine arabinoside (Chapter 5).
There are reports of the benefits of botulinum toxin in the treatment of cerebral
palsy in children. The toxin, produced by Clostridium botulinum, is a powerful and
deadly poison, but is also an effective muscle relaxant. It is not licensed for use as such
in the UK but is undergoing clinical trials. Current evidence suggests that repeat
injections are necessary some 4-6 months after the first.
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 489
Recent studies on the therapeutic uses of toxins have demonstrated also that:
1 botulinum toxin can be used to study synapse remodelling and that enzyme-
inactivated toxin can be employed to deliver other molecules into motor nerve ending.
2 Pseudomonas cytotoxin hybrids destroy cancer cells and have given promising
results in tumour destruction.
3 Cholera toxin and related toxins act as immune modulators, with potential use as
adjuvants and as therapeutic agents in the treatment of immunologically mediated human
disease.
A cautionary note must still be added, however: problems of toxicity remain and
these must be overcome before widespread therapeutic usage is feasible.
The beneficial harnessing of microbes is likely to continue well into the next century.
8 Further reading
Ames B.N., McCann J. & Yamasaki E. (1975) Methods for detecting carcinogens and mutagens with
the Salmonella/mammalian microsome mutagenicity test. MutatRes, 31, 347-364.
Breeze A.S. & Simpson A.M. (1982) An improved method using acetyl-coenzyme A regeneration for
the enzymic inactivation of aminoglycosides prior to sterility testing. JAppl Bacteriol, 53, 277-
284.
Clark A.M., McChesney J.D. & Hufford CD. (1985) The use of microorganisms for the study of drug
metabolism. Med Res Rev, 5, 231-253.
Conference (1973) Streptokinase in clinical practice. Postgrad Med J, 49, 3-142.
DataJ.L. & Nies A.S. (1974) Dextran40. Ann Intern Med, 81,500-504.
Davis G., Green M.J. & Hill H.A.O. (1986) Detection of ATP and creatinine kinase using an enzyme
electrode. Enzyme Microb Tech, 8, 349-352.
Demain A.L., Somkuti G.A., Hunter-Cevera J.C. & Rossmore H.W. (1989) Novel Microbial Products
for Medicine and Agriculture. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Doenicke A., Grote B. & Lorenz W. (1977) Blood and blood substitutes. Br J Anaesth, 49, 681 —
688.
Fukui S. & TanakaA. (1982) Immobilized microbial cells. Annu Rev Microbiol, 36, 145-172.
Harvey A. (ed.) (1993) Drugs from Natural Products. Pharmaceuticals andAgro chemicals. Chichester:
Ellis Horwood.
Hewitt W. & Vincent S. (1989) Theory and Application of Microbiological Assay. London: Academic
Press.
Hutt A. J., Kooloobandi A. & Hanlon G.W. (1993) Microbial metabolism of 2-arylpropionic acids:
Chiral inversion of ibuprofen and 2-phenylpropionic acid. Chirality, 5, 596-601.
Jones R.L. & Grady R.W. (1983) Siderophores as antimicrobial agents. Eur J Clin Microbiol, 2, 411-
413.
Kier D.K. (1985) Use of the Ames test in toxicology. Reg Toxicol Pharmacol, 5, 59-64.
Mackowiack P.A. (1979) Clinical uses of microorganisms and their products. Am J Med, 67,293-306.
Priest EG. (1992) Biological control of mosquitoes and other biting flies by Bacillus sphaericus and
Bacillus thuringiensis. J Appl Bacteriol, 72, 357-369.
QueenerS.W. (1990) Molecular biology of penicillin and cephalosporin biosynthesis. Ant imic rob Agents
Chemother, 34, 943-948.
Reid E. & Wilson D. (eds) (1990) Analysis for Drugs and Metabolites including Ant i- infective Agents.
Methodological Surveys in Biochemistry and Analysis, vol. 20. Royal Society of Chemistry.
Scientific American (1981) Issue on industrial microbiology, vol. 245, No. 3. (An excellent series of
papers describing the manufacture by microorganisms or products useful to mankind.)
Smith R.V. & Rosazza J.P. (1975) Microbial models of mammalian metabolism. I P harm Sci, 64,
1737-1759.
Turner A.P.F. & Pickup J.C. (1985) Diabetes mellitus: biosensors for research and management.
Biosensors, 1, 85-115.
Verall M.S. (1985) Discovery and Isolation of Microbial Products. Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
490 Chapter 25
Weinberg E.D. (1984) Iron withholding: a defence against infection and neoplasia. Physiol Rev, 64,
65-107.
White L.O. & Reeves D.S. (1983) Enzymatic assay of aminoglycoside antibiotics. In: Antibiotics:
Assessment of Antimicrobial Activity and Resistance (eds A.D. Russell & L.B. Quesnel), pp. 199-
210. Society for Applied Bacteriology Technical Series No. 18. London: Academic Press.
White R.J. (1982) Microbiological models as screening tools for anticancer agents: potentials and
limitations. Annu Rev Microbiol, 36,415-433.
Additional pharmaceutical applications of microorganisms 491
Index
Note: page numbers in italics refer to
figures, those in bold refer to tables
[A w ] see water activity
abortion
brucellosis 29
listeriosis 28
abscesses, fibrin deposition 83-4
acanthamoeba keratitis 207
Acanthamoeba spp. 207
accelerated electron radiation 40 1 ,
403,405
acetic acid 235
/V-acety 1-3-0-1 -carboxyethyl-
glucosamine 5
iV-acetylglucosamine 5
acetyltransferases 188
acid-fast stain for bacterial spores 12
Acinetobacter 30
acquired immune deficiency syndrome
see AIDS
Acremonium chrysogenum 157, 158
acridine dyes 174, 226
acriflavine 226,249
actinomycetes
cloning host 462
industrial water supplies 342
active immunity 304-5, 328-9
acute phase proteins 281
acycloguanosine see acyclovir
acyclovir (acycloguanosine) 70,
126-7, 130, 174
adaptation, drug resistance 133
additive effects of drug
combinations 128
adenosine arabinoside 125
adenosine deaminase deficiency
467
adenosine triphosphatase 258
adenosine triphosphate (ATP) 17
firefly light-emitting system 25
microbial 372
non-microbial 25
adenovirus 57,63
oncogenic 72
adenyl cyclase 86
adenylyltransf erases 188
adhesins, antibodies against 79
adult T-cell leukaemia/lymphoma
syndrome 72
adverse drug reactions 1 35-6
aflatoxins 49,372
agglutinins 79
B. pertussis 81
AIDS
Candida albicans infection 44
cryptococcal meningitis 47
fungal infections 114
Mycobacterium avium intracellular
276
Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia
117,178
secondary infections 72
trimetrexate treatment 178
air, filtered 432-3
air supply for clean areas 432-4
air-filtration systems 341,433
air-sampling machine 340
albumin, human serum 464
Alcaligenes spp. 342, 346
alcohols 210,213-14
aliphatic 213
aralkyl 213-14
fusel 40
membrane-active agents 178
preservatives 213-14
properties 209
aldehydes 210,214-16
antiviral activity 57
properties 209
sporicidal action 204
toxicity 208
alexidine 216-17
alkyl polyguanides 204
alkyl quaternaries 204
allergies 279
allografts 301
allylamines, synthetic 122
Alternaria spp. 347
alveolar region, macrophages 78
amantadine hydrochloride 1 24, 1 25
Ames test 484-5
6-p-amidinopenicillanic acid 93, 94,
95
amikacin 106, 707, 108
aminacrine 226
D-amino acids 163
amino acids 472-3
bioassays 481-2
amino groups 259
aminoacyl-tRNA 172
aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
antibiotics 106-8, 169, 171
active uptake 171
energy-dependent phase of uptake
171
energy-independent phase of uptake
171
resistance 188-9,190
ribosomal target site alteration 189
aminoglycoside-modifying enzymes
189,190
aminoglycosides 131, 133,481
burn wounds 144
cystic fibrosis infections 140
enzymatic inactivation 133
toxicity 135
6-aminopenicillanic acid (6-APA) 92,
93
amoebiasis, intestinal 108
cyclic AMP 86
amphoterocin B 114,115
action 179
combination with 5-flucytosine
134
ampicillin 93, 94, 95
candidiasis superinfection 136
Gram-negative bacteria lysis 167
Haemophilus influenzae resistance
145
kidney infection 141
typhoid fever 142
«-amyl alcohol 40
amylase 83
anaphylactic reactions 299
anaphylaxis 135
anaphylotoxins 292
anionic surfactants 357
ankylosing spondylitis 301
antagonism 128
anthelmintics, imidazole derivatives
120, 121
anthrax 27
vaccine 311
anti-inflammatory drugs 301
anti-sense agents 466
antibacterial agents, non-antibiotic
cell wall targetting 256
cellular targets 260, 261
cytoplasm effects 258-9
cytoplasmic membrane activity
257-8
mode of action 256-9, 260, 261,
262
multitarget reactors 259, 262
antibacterial agents, semi-solid
248-9
antibiotic policies 145-7
costs 146
drug resistance 146
free prescribing 146-7
restricted dispensing/reporting
147
antibiotic resistance see resistance
antibiotics
activity spectrum 182
aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
106-8, 170,171, 188-9,190
antifungal 114,775
assays 479-81
p-lactams 92-3, 94, 95-8, 99,
100-4
combination 1 34-5
definition 91-2
enzymic inactivation 486
glycopeptide 111-12
macrolides 108-11
manufacture 149-50
benzylpenicillin 149,150-8
cephalosporin C 149, 158, 759,
160
fermentation 149,150
Index 493
Index
Note: page numbers in italics refer to
figures, those in bold refer to tables
[A w ] see water activity
abortion
brucellosis 29
listeriosis 28
abscesses, fibrin deposition 83-4
acanthamoeba keratitis 207
Acanthamoeba spp. 207
accelerated electron radiation 40 1 ,
403,405
acetic acid 235
/V-acety 1-3-0-1 -carboxyethyl-
glucosamine 5
iV-acetylglucosamine 5
acetyltransferases 188
acid-fast stain for bacterial spores 12
Acinetobacter 30
acquired immune deficiency syndrome
see AIDS
Acremonium chrysogenum 157, 158
acridine dyes 174, 226
acriflavine 226,249
actinomycetes
cloning host 462
industrial water supplies 342
active immunity 304-5, 328-9
acute phase proteins 281
acycloguanosine see acyclovir
acyclovir (acycloguanosine) 70,
126-7, 130, 174
adaptation, drug resistance 133
additive effects of drug
combinations 128
adenosine arabinoside 125
adenosine deaminase deficiency
467
adenosine triphosphatase 258
adenosine triphosphate (ATP) 17
firefly light-emitting system 25
microbial 372
non-microbial 25
adenovirus 57,63
oncogenic 72
adenyl cyclase 86
adenylyltransf erases 188
adhesins, antibodies against 79
adult T-cell leukaemia/lymphoma
syndrome 72
adverse drug reactions 1 35-6
aflatoxins 49,372
agglutinins 79
B. pertussis 81
AIDS
Candida albicans infection 44
cryptococcal meningitis 47
fungal infections 114
Mycobacterium avium intracellular
276
Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia
117,178
secondary infections 72
trimetrexate treatment 178
air, filtered 432-3
air supply for clean areas 432-4
air-filtration systems 341,433
air-sampling machine 340
albumin, human serum 464
Alcaligenes spp. 342, 346
alcohols 210,213-14
aliphatic 213
aralkyl 213-14
fusel 40
membrane-active agents 178
preservatives 213-14
properties 209
aldehydes 210,214-16
antiviral activity 57
properties 209
sporicidal action 204
toxicity 208
alexidine 216-17
alkyl polyguanides 204
alkyl quaternaries 204
allergies 279
allografts 301
allylamines, synthetic 122
Alternaria spp. 347
alveolar region, macrophages 78
amantadine hydrochloride 1 24, 1 25
Ames test 484-5
6-p-amidinopenicillanic acid 93, 94,
95
amikacin 106, 707, 108
aminacrine 226
D-amino acids 163
amino acids 472-3
bioassays 481-2
amino groups 259
aminoacyl-tRNA 172
aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
antibiotics 106-8, 169, 171
active uptake 171
energy-dependent phase of uptake
171
energy-independent phase of uptake
171
resistance 188-9,190
ribosomal target site alteration 189
aminoglycoside-modifying enzymes
189,190
aminoglycosides 131, 133,481
burn wounds 144
cystic fibrosis infections 140
enzymatic inactivation 133
toxicity 135
6-aminopenicillanic acid (6-APA) 92,
93
amoebiasis, intestinal 108
cyclic AMP 86
amphoterocin B 114,115
action 179
combination with 5-flucytosine
134
ampicillin 93, 94, 95
candidiasis superinfection 136
Gram-negative bacteria lysis 167
Haemophilus influenzae resistance
145
kidney infection 141
typhoid fever 142
«-amyl alcohol 40
amylase 83
anaphylactic reactions 299
anaphylaxis 135
anaphylotoxins 292
anionic surfactants 357
ankylosing spondylitis 301
antagonism 128
anthelmintics, imidazole derivatives
120, 121
anthrax 27
vaccine 311
anti-inflammatory drugs 301
anti-sense agents 466
antibacterial agents, non-antibiotic
cell wall targetting 256
cellular targets 260, 261
cytoplasm effects 258-9
cytoplasmic membrane activity
257-8
mode of action 256-9, 260, 261,
262
multitarget reactors 259, 262
antibacterial agents, semi-solid
248-9
antibiotic policies 145-7
costs 146
drug resistance 146
free prescribing 146-7
restricted dispensing/reporting
147
antibiotic resistance see resistance
antibiotics
activity spectrum 182
aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
106-8, 170,171, 188-9,190
antifungal 114,775
assays 479-81
p-lactams 92-3, 94, 95-8, 99,
100-4
combination 1 34-5
definition 91-2
enzymic inactivation 486
glycopeptide 111-12
macrolides 108-11
manufacture 149-50
benzylpenicillin 149,150-8
cephalosporin C 149, 158, 759,
160
fermentation 149,150
Index 493
P-lactams 149-50
penicillin V 149,158
mechanisms of action 162-79
chromosome function/replication
173-6
protein synthesis 169-70,163,
171-6
microorganisms in partial synthesis
477
polypeptide 111
production from microorganisms
470, 473
rifamycins 106
semisynthesis 92
sources 92
synthesis 92
tetracyclines 104-6
antibodies 283
binding 80
feedback 296
maternally-acquired 327
passive acquired immunity 303
pre-formed 328
secretory 327
transplacental passage 302
antibody-dependent cell-mediated
cytotoxicity (ADCC) 297
antifungal agents 1 1 4, 7 7 5
disinfectant powders 249
antigen 283
antigen-antibody complexes 86
antigen-presenting cells 294
antigens 284
cross-reactive 298
antilymphocyte serum 301
antimessages 69
antimicrobial action, target sites 163
antimicrobial agents/drugs
acid 210,212-13
adverse reactions 1 35-6
anatomical site of infection 133
chemoprophylaxis 1 36-7
choice 202-8
chemical agent properties 203
microbial challenge 203
vegetative bacteria 204
clinical use 130-1, 137M5
combinations 226-7
dilution 449
distribution 133
environmental factors 208
generic substitution 146
host factors 131
intended application 207-8
lipid solubility 133
liquid
antifungal activity 244-5
bacteriostasis estimation 242-4
virucidal activity testing 245-8
membrane filtration 449
neutralizing agents 240
no n- antibiotic 229-32
bacterial spore resistance 270-2
fungal resistance 274-5
protozoal resistance 275
resistance 263 A 1, 265, 266-76
viral resistance 275, 276
see also biocides
organism susceptibility 131,752
pharmacological factors 131,133
preservatives 365-8
properties 209
resistance 133-4
selection 131,133
semi-solid 243
specific inactivation 448
sterility testing 448-9
superinfection 136
synergism 227
synthetic 115-22,123
therapeutic concentrations 133
toxicity 208
types of compound 208,210-11,
212-21,222,223-7
antimycobacterial drugs, resistance
196-7
antiseptics 202,230
antibacterial activity 205
antifungal activity 205, 206
a-antitrypsin 461,463
antitubercular drugs 117-18
antiviral drugs 124-8, 174
API system 20
arabinogalactan 168
arabinose 168
arabinosyl transferase enzyme 168
Archaebacteria 4
Arthus reaction 300
2-arylpropionic acid 478
ascospores 40,41
Neurosporacrassa 48
aseptic areas for manufacture of sterile
products 435-6
Ashbya gossyp ii 47 1
L-asparaginase 476
Aspergillus flavipes 487
Aspergillus flavus 49
Aspergillus fumigatus 49
Aspergillus niger 205, 486
Aspergillus oryzae 49
Aspergillus parasiticus 49
Aspergillus spp. 49-50
building contamination 349
glass container contamination 348
isolated from air 340
packaging contamination 348
assay methods
plate 481
urease 371
asthma, extrinsic 291
athlete's foot 51
atmosphere
chemical disinfection 341,342
compressed air 342
disinfection 250- 1
filtration 341
microbial content 340-1
microbial count reduction 341-2
microbiological quality checking
340
microbiological standard
requirements 341
microorganism fall-out in
manufacturing process 428
suspended particles 340
ultraviolet irradiation 34 1 , 342
attenuation 279
Aurebasidium pullulans 351
Aurebasidium spp. 349
autoclave see steam sterilizer
autoclaving, instruments 425
autografts 301
autoimmune destruction 86
autoimmunity 279,298-9
autolysins 167
avoparcin 198-9
azalides
action on ribosomes 169
protein synthesis inhibition 172
azathioprine 301
azidothymidine see zidovudine (AZT)
azithromycin 110,118,172
AZT see zidovudine (AZT)
aztreonam 102,703
B cells 285,296
baby hamster kidney (BHK) cell
monolayers 246
bacillary dysentery 29, 57
bloody flux 82
MacConkey's medium 18
bacille Calmette-Gu6rin (BCG)
vaccine 297, 306,311, 333,
336
efficiency 326
potency 316
sterility tests 317
Bacillus anthracis 10, 27
Bacillus brevis 27
Bacillus cereus 271 , 76
biocide resistance 264
emetic toxin 85
penicillinase production 477
Bacillus licheniformis 27
Bacillus megaterium 342
Bacillus polymyxa 27
Bacillus pumilus 386
Bacillus spnaericus 488
Bacillus spp.
antibiotic source 92
isolated from air 340
packaging contamination 348
properties 27
raw materials for manufacturing
process 347
spore 1 1
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
Bacillus stearothermophilus 386,
387,443
Bacillus subtilis 27
biocide resistance 264
cloning host 460, 462
contamination of non-sterile
products during manufacture
380
PKU screening 483
sterilization reference organism
386, 388
water supply 342
Bacillus thuringiensis 488,489
bacitracin 27,92, 1 1 1
resistance 196
bacteraemia 84,282
bacteraemic shock 376
see also endotoxic shock
bacteria 3-4
acid-fast organisms 32
acquired resistance to biocides
272-4
494 Index
adaptation to intrinsic resistance
272
aerobes 16
aggregates 4
anaerobes 16, 17
binary fission 14,21,22
biochemical tests 20
bioluminescence 25
bond energy 17
carbohydrate metabolism 17
cell counts 20-1
cell envelope 86
colony-forming units (CFU) 21
conjugation 14-15
culture media 17
direct epifluorescent filtration
technique (DEFT) 23
DNA 14
electric conductivity 24-5
energy storage 17
facultative 16
flow cytometry 23-4
growth 15-25
consumable determinants 15-16
curves 22-3
energy provision 17-18
environmental determinants 1 6-
17
gas requirements 15, 16
inhibition 16-17
mean generation time 21-2
measurement 20-2
media 16, 17
pH 16
requirements 15-17
temperature 16
water requirement 15-16
identification 1 8-20
isolated from air 340
light- scattering/-absorbing units 21
luminous 25
media 16, 17, 18-20
metabolic pathways 18
micro-calorimetry 24
microaerophilic 16
microscopy 23
oxygen requirement 16
quick detection methods 23-5
reproduction 14-15
resistance to biocides 264, 265,
266
sexual reproduction 10
toxins 14
transduction 15
transformation 14, 15
vegetative 204
viable counts 21
water storage 343
see also Gram-negative bacteria;
Gram-positive bacteria
bacterial cell
appendages 10
capsules 10
envelope 266
pigment 10
polysaccharide backbone 5
proteins of outer layer 8
shape 4
size 4
slime 10
structure 4-5, 6, 7-10
wall 164-8
crosslinking 166
peptide bond formation 166
bacterial cell wall 4
lysis by disinfectants 256
non-antibiotic antibacterial agent
activity 256
bacterial chromosome 9-10
bacterial culture
death curve 230,231
growth curve 230, 231
pH effects on growth 235
bacterial infections
epithelial tissue 80
gastrointestinal 141-3
systemic 80
bacterial spores 11-13
acid-fast stain 12
antimicrobial agent choice 204
biocide resistance 270-2
coat 12
dehydration 11-12
development 271
formation process 11-12
germination 12-13,271
heat resistance 11-12,13, 397
mature 271
outgrowth 12-13,271
susceptibility 271
bacterial vaccines 307-8,311-12
combined 310
fermentation 307-8
processing of bacterial harvest 308
safety tests 316
seedlot system 307
single component 310,311-12
bactericidal activity of semi-solid
antibacterials 248-9
bactericides 131,229
multidose injections 414
quantitative suspension tests 239
bacteriophages see phages
bacteriostasis
cup-plate technique 243
ditch-plate technique 242-3
estimation 242-4
gradient-plate technique 244
serial dilution 242
solid dilution method 243
bacterio stats 229
semi-solid antibacterial agents 248
bacteriuria 140, 141
Bacteroides frag His 30
aztreonam resistance 102
phages 248
Bacteroides spp. 30
Baird-Parker medium 19
baker's yeast 35
base-pair mutation 484
BCG vaccine see bacille Calmette-
Gu6rin (BCG) vaccine
benzalkonium chloride 417, 419
benzoic acid 210, 212
benzyl alcohol 213
D-benzylpenicillenic acid 104
benzylpenicillin 92,93
brain abscess 145
degradation products 96
Gram-negative bacteria
lysis 167
protection 7
hydrolysis 477
manufacture 149
carbon source 155
cell removal 157
contaminants 155-6
crude extract treatment 157-8
defoaming agents 153-4
extraction 157-8
fed nutrients 155-6
fermentation control 154-7
fermenter 152-4
GMP 158
inoculum preparation 151
inoculum transfer to vessel 154
instrumentation 154
isolation 157
lactose 155
media additions 154
nitrogen source 155
organism 150-1
oxygen supply 152-3
PAA stimulation 156-7
pH 156
production strains 151
sampling 154
sulphate supply 155
temperature control 153, 156
termination of fermentation 157
biguanides 210,216-17
mycobacterial resistance 269
properties 209
biliary excretion 133
binary fission of bacteria 14
bio-control 488-9
bioburden
determination 440
measurement 372
reduction in pharmaceutical
products 371
biocide-degrading enzymes,
constitutive 266
biocides 230
bacterial resistance 10, 264, 265
intrinsic 264, 265, 266
cationic 268,269
insusceptibility 263
relative microbial responses 263-4
see also antimicrobial agents/drugs,
non-antibiotic
biofilms 77
physiological (phenotypic)
adaptation to intrinsic
resistance 272
production 264
biological indicators of sterility 442,
443,445.6
bioluminescence 25
preservatives 254
biotin 472
bisbiguanides 178
see also chlorhexidine
bismuth sulphite agar 19
bisphenols 222,224
bisulphites 262
Black Death 28
black fluids 222,223
blepharitis 79
blood substitute, dextran 10,471
Index 495
blow/fill/seal units 436
blue-green algae 3,4
.boils 26, 143
bone marrow 284
multipotential cells 285
suppression 1 35-6
Bordetella pertussis 28-9,80,334
non-invasive pathogen 81-2
vaccine production 308
see also pertussis; whooping cough
Borrelia burgdorferi 32
Borrelia recurrentis 32
Borrelia vincenti 32
botulinum
antitoxin 318
toxin in medical use 489,490
botulism 27, 76, 85
bovine spongiform encephalopathy
(BSE) 73,207,323-4
sterilization 386
see also prions
brain abscess 145
Branhamella catarrhalis 26
Branhamella spp. 26
Brevundimonas diminuta 445-6
brewer's yeast 35
brilliant green 226
P-bromopenicillanic acid 103
bronchiectasis 138
bronchitis 138
chronic 29
bronchodilators 416
bronchopneumonia 30
bronchoscope, disinfection 276
bronopol 214
thiol group reaction 259
Brucella abortus 29, 80, 81
Brucella melitensis 29
Brucella suis 29
buildings 349-50
Burkitt's lymphoma 72
burns, infected wounds 144
cadexomer-l2 220
calcium alginate 422
Campylobacter
antimicrobial agent choice 204
gastrointestinal infections 142
Campylobacter jejuni 31
Campylobacter spp. 30-1
cancer chemotherapy 476
Candida alb icans 35,44-7
amphoterocin B activity 1 14
antimicrobial agent choice 205
cell wall 44-5
flucytosine activity 122
gene isolation 45
germ tube formation 46,47
HO gene 47
hyphal form 45
mating type switching 46, 47
morphological switching 45-6
mutants 45
phenotypic switching 45
positive control for sterility testing
449
Candida parapsilosis 44
Candida spp., contaminated medicines
356
candidiasis
intestinal 114
ketoconazole 122
superinfection 136
candidosis, vaginal 44,46
capacity use-dilution test 238
capreomycin 111,118
capsids 54,57
assembly 69
capsomeres 54-6,57
1-carbacephems 101, 102
1-carbapenems 101-2
see also carbapenems
carbapenems 167
see also 1-carbapenems
carbenicillin 93, 94,95
burn wounds 144
gentamicin combination 108
carbohydrate metabolism 17
carbolic acid see phenol
carboxypeptidase 167
carbuncle 143
carcinogen screening 62,484-6
catgut, sterilized surgical 423
cationic compounds 268, 269
cationic surfactants 224-5, 358
pH effects on antibacterial activity
236
CD4+ cells 72,73
CD8 expression 296
cefacetrile 98,99
cefaclor 97, 95,100
cefamandole 97, 95,100
cefibuten 97, 99,100
cefixime 97
cefotaxime 96,97,99,100
kidney infection 141
PBP binding 167
cefoxitin 97, 95,100
cefpodixime 97, 99,100
ceftazidime 96, 99,100
PBP binding 167
ceftizoxime 96, 99,100
ceftriaxone 96, 99,100
cefuroxime 96, 97, 95,100
ceilings 349
clean areas 430, 434
cell membrane see cytoplasmic
membrane
cell surface, pH effects on antibacterial
activity 236
cell wall see bacterial cell wall
cell-mediated immunity 283, 293-6
cellulitis 143
cellulose, oxidized 422
central nervous system
infections 144-5
secondary disease 86
cephalexin 97, 98,100
PBP binding 167
cephaloridine 167
cephalosporin C 477
manufacture 149, 158,759, 160
cephalosporins 92,93-7,131
activity spectrum 97
p-lactam ring interaction with
transpeptidases 167
13-lactamase susceptibility 97
biosynthetic genes 156-7
enzymatic inactivation 133
half-life 97
PBP binding 167
peptidoglycan crosslinking 166-8
pharmacokinetic properties 97
resistance 192
structure- activity relationships 96-
7
cephamycins 157
cephapirin 91,98
cephradine 97,95,100
changing facilities, clean areas 433
cheese ripening 49
chemical indicators of sterility 442-3,
444
chemoprophylaxis 1 36-7
Chick-Martin test 237, 238
chickenpox outbreaks 88, 325
chimeras 455
chiral inversion 478-9
chitin
Candida albicans 44
S. cerevisiae cell wall 43, 44
Chlamydia psittaci 31
Chlamydia spp. 3 1
Chlamydia trachomatis 31
chloramine 218
chloramphenicol 91,92,112,113,
133, 190-1
action on ribosomes 170
bone marrow suppression 135-6
drug-resistant ribosomes 190
efflux proteins 190
enzymatic inactivation 133
mammalian cell penetration 172
protein synthesis inhibition 171-2
ribosome effects 172
typhoid fever treatment 137
chloramphenicol acetyltransferases
(CATs) 112,190
chlorbutol 213-14
ophthalmic preparations 419
chlorhexidine 210,216-17,258
bacterial spore activity 271
cytoplasm coagulation 259
E. coli sensitivity 267
mechanism of action 258,260
microbial attack 359
microorganism sensitivity 265
mycobacterial resistance 269
ophthalmic preparations 417,419
properties 209
Proteus resistance 268
S. marcescens resistance 268
Sacch. cerevisiae sensitivity 274
chlorine 217-18
antiviral activity 57
compounds 209,210
gas 345
thiol group reaction 259
chlorine-releasing agents, thiol group
reaction 259
chlorocresol 222, 224, 253
chloroform 219,367-8
p-chloromercuribenzoate 259
chloroxylenol 209, 211, 222, 224,
268
potentiators 258
chlortetracycline 105
cholera 28,283
antibiotic treatment 142
contaminated medicine 356
496 Index
toxin in medical use 490
vaccine 306, 308
Chromobacter spp. 342
chromosomal mutations, acquired
resistance 182-3
chromosomes
bacterial 9-10
function/replication 173-6
selective inhibition 173-5
supercoiling 173, 175
unwinding 174
ciprofloxacin 118, 120,727, 188
kidney infection 141
typhoid fever 142
Cladosporium spp. 348
building contamination 349
filters 35 1
isolated from air 340
raw materials for manufacturing
process 347
clarithromycin 110,118
clavams 97-8, 100,101
clavulanic acid 101
combination therapy 98, 100
cleanliness, pharmaceutical
manufacture 427-8,433
clindamycin 112,773
protein synthesis inhibition 172
wound infections 144
clomocycline 104
clonal deletion, tolerance 298
cloned gene expression 457-9
post-translational modification
458-9
transcription 457
translation 457-8
cloning 454-6
host choice 460-1
shotgunning 456
systems 461,462
Clostridium botulinum 76
medical use of toxin 489
toxin 14,85
Clostridium difficile 27
pseudomembranous colitis 136
Clostridium novyi 27
Clostridium perfringens 27,282
toxin production 83
Clostridium septicum 27
Clostridium spore 1 1
Clostridium sporogenes 27, 499
Clostridium spp.
isolated from air 340
properties 27
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
water supply 342
Clostridium tetani 27
exotoxin 283
medicament-borne infection 382
non-sterile pharmaceutical products
376
tissue damage 85
clotrimazole 120,123
clumping 239,240
cluster of differentiation 294
co-trimoxazole 117
gastrointestinal infections 142, 143
typhoid fever treatment 137
coagulase 282
coccoid bacteria 4
colistin 111
see also polymyxins
collagenase 83,282
colony-forming units (CFU) 21
colostrum, secretory antibodies 327
colouring agents 358-9
common cold 62
partially invasive pathogens 82
common-source outbreaks 87, 88
community protection against
epidemics 322
community-acquired pathogens 198
complement
cascade 293
fixation 80
system 87,281,291-3
complement activation
alternative pathway 293
classical pathway 291-3
regulation 293
complex-mediated reactions 300
compound II 474
compressed air 342
concentration exponent 2 3 3 A
congenital rubella syndrome 332
conjugation
bacterial 14-15
plasmid transfer 183
resistance plasmid transfer 133
conjunctiva 79
conjunctivitis 26, 29, 31
contact lenses 79
disinfection 419
solutions 418-19
contact plates 440
corn starch liquor 155
cortisone manufacture 478
Corynebacterium diphtheriae 27, 80,
82
(3-phage 62
tissue damage 85
Corynebacterium spp.
isolated from air 340
properties 27
cosmetic preparations, preservatives
251,252
cotrimoxazole 178
Coulter counter 23, 24
cowpox 322
Coxiella burnetti 31
cresol 222,223
Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (CJD) 73,
207, 323-4, 356
sterilization 386
CRM197 335
crop pest control 488
Cryptococcus neoformans 35, 47
amphoterocin B activity 114
meningitis treatment with drug
combination 134
crystal violet 226
Cunninghamella blakesleeana 487
cup-plate method 243,248, 249
cyanocobalamin 472
cycloserine 118
see also D-cycloserine
D-cycloserine 165
mechanism of action 163,164
see also cycloserene
cyclosporin A 301
cystic fibrosis 138,139
cystitis 29
cytarabine 125,726"
cytokines 295
cytolytic reactions 299
cytomegalovirus 63, 127
HIV infection 72
interferons 70
cytopathic effect (CPE) 66, 67
Cytophaga spp. 342
cytoplasm 4,9-10
coagulation 259
non-antibiotic antibacterial agent
activity 258-9
cytoplasmic membrane 4, 8-9,178-9
active transport system 9
antibacterial agent penetration
pathways 267-8
non-antibiotic antibacterial agent
activity 257-8
porins 185
selective disruption 178
cytotoxic reactions 299
cytotoxic T cells 296
D-biotin 472
D-value 13,387,389,391,403
Dane particles 246-7
dapsone 776,117
ddl 73, 126
decaprenyl-arabinose 168
defence mechanisms, specific 283-4
Deinococcus (Micrococcus)
' radiodurans 403
deletions 183
demethylchlortetracycline 105
deoxyribonuclease (DNase) 83, 454
deoxyribonucleic acids 258
dequalinium chloride 226
dermatophytes 50
desferrioxamine 473 A 1
dextrans 10,470-1,472
dextrose agar 20
di-(5-chloro-2-hydroxyphenyl)
sulphide 257
diabetes, infection of islets of
Langerhans 86
diamidines 226
Gram-negative bacteria sensitivity
267
diaminopyrimidine derivatives 776,
117
diarrhoea, traveller's 143
dibromopropamidine 226
dichloroisocyanurate, HIV
disinfection 207
dichloroisocyanuric acid 218
dideoxycytidine (DDC) 125-6
dideoxyinosine see ddl
dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) 176
inhibitors 174, 177-8
dihydrofolic acid 176
dihydropteroate synthetase (DHPS)
187
dihydropteroic acid 176
dihydrostreptomycin 106
diphosphatidyl glycerol 8
diphtheria 27, 82
antitoxin 318
Index
497
tetanus 334
tissue damage 85
toxin
non-toxic derivative 335
production 62
toxoid 334
vaccination 333- A t
efficiency 326
vaccine 304,308,311,314,315
diphtheria, tetanus and pertussis
(DTP) immunization 333,
334-5
dipicolinic acid (DPA) see pyridine
2,6-dicarboxylic acid
diplococci, aggregates 4
Diplococcus pneumoniae see
Streptococcus pneumoniae
direct epifluorescent filtration
technique (DEFT) 23
disease
common-source outbreaks 87, 88
early treatment 469-70
epidemiology 87-8
immunity 278-9
infectious 305
manifestation 8 1 -4
propagated-source outbreaks 87,
88
severity 325-6
slow virus 73, 276
transmission 76
see also infection
disinfectants 201-2,230
acid 267
air 250-1
antibacterial activity 205
cell wall lysis 256
concentration for virucidal activity
247
contamination 370
factors affecting disinfection
process 232-7
Gram-negative bacteria protection
7
in vivo tests 241-2
liquid 237 A 18
quantitative suspension
tests 239-40
suspension tests 237-8
microbial attack 359
mycobactericidal activity 241
powders 249
skin tests 241-2
solid 249-50
sporicidal activity 241
storage 353
types 201-28
see also individual compounds
viable airborne microorganism
determination 250-1
disinfection
aseptic areas 436
atmosphere 250-1
attainable level 203
clean areas for pharmaceutical
manufacture of sterile
products 433
concentration exponent 233-4
contact lenses 419
dilution effect 233^
dynamics 230-2
equipment 424
hepatitis B virus 206
high level 201,202
HIV 206-7
inoculum size 236, 237
instruments 207
interfering substances 236
intermediate level 201-2
low level 202
manufacturing equipment 352
pH effects 234-6
policies 227-8
potency/concentration relationship
233 A 1
rate of kill 231
surface activity effects 236
survivor/time curve 252
temperature effects 232-3
viable counts 239
virus 57
water 345
ditch-plate technique 242-3,248
DNA
bacterial 14
viral 15
DNAgyrase 173,174
inhibition by quinolones 175
quinolone binding 187
DNA ligase 174
DNA polymerase 173,174,246
DNA strand replication 174
doors 349-50
doxycycline 105
drains 349
dressings 419-21
packaging 420-1
spray-on 421
sterilization 419-20
drug
efficacy 487
fever 135
safety 487
see also resistance
drug combinations 128-9, 134-5
indications 128-9
justifications for use 128
resistance prevention 135
responses 128
dry heat sterilizer 397-8
duck hepatitis B virus (DHBV) 246
dyes 226
early proteins 59
Ebola virus 65, 205
econazole 120,723
EDTA 8, 258, 267, 268
contact-lens solutions 419
efflux 134
efflux proteins
chloramphenicol 190
tetracycline resistance 196
tetracyclines 190
egg inoculation for virucidal activity
245
electron accelerators 401,403,405
electron transport chain 9
inhibition 257
elongation factors 172-3
Embden-Meyerhof pathway 18
S. cerevisiae 42
emulsions
breakdown 372,374
preservative evaluation 252
encephalitis 144
endocarditis prevention 136-7
endospore 1 1
endothelial cells 285
endotoxic shock 372
see also bacteraemic shock
endotoxins 86, 282, 283
energy
reactions producing 17-18
storage 17
enteric fever 84
enteritis 29
Enter obacter cloacae 342
Enterobacteriaceae, biocide
resistance 266-9
enterococci
biocide sensitivity 263
multi-drug resistance 134
resistance 183
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
see also vancomycin-resistant
enterococci (VRE)
enterotoxins 283
Enterotube 20
enterovirus infection 62
environment, contamination sources for
non-sterile products 377
environmental monitoring, sterility
assurance 441
enzymes 475-7
microbial in sterility testing 486
plasmid mediated inactivation
133-4
eosinophils 285
epidemics 88,325
community protection 322
Epidermophyton floccosum 50,51
Epidermophyton spp. 346
epifluorescence, preservatives 254
episomes 9
Epstein-Barr virus 63, 72
equipment
aseptic areas 436
sterilization 423-5
Eremothecium ashbyii All
ergosterol synthesis 179
ermA gene 191
ermB gene 191
ermC gene 191
Erwinia carotovora 476
Erwinia spp. 347
erythrogenic toxin, Streptococcus
pyogenes 26
erythromycin 108, 109
gastrointestinal infections 142
legionnaire's disease treatment
131,139
mycoplasma infections 139
new derivatives 109-10
erythropoietin 464
Escherichia coli 29
ampicillin resistance 181
L-asparaginase production 476
biocide resistance 266-7, 268
bismuth sulphite agar 19
498
Index
cloning host 460, 462
deep rough mutants 267
enteropathic strains 82
enterotoxigenic 143
exotoxins 86
K-antigens 80
lux cluster insertion 25
MacConkey's medium 18
macrolide resistance 191
meningitis 144, 145
multidrug resistance pumps (MDR)
196
multiple antibiotic resistance (MAR)
196
multiple resistance 197
peptidoglycan 6
phages 58,248
phospholipid structure 8
signal sequence 458, 459
somatostatin synthesis 460
toxin production 82
water supply 342
Escherichia coli 0157 infection
outbreak 323
Escherichia coli K12(lambda) 60
ester antimicrobials 210, 212-13
ethambutol 168
M. tuberculosis resistance 196, 197
ethanol 210,213
formation 42
properties 209
ethionamide 118
ethylene oxide 262
antiviral activity 57
toxicity 399-400
ethylene oxide sterilization 400, 399
operating cycle 401
sterilizer design/operation 400-1
ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid see
EDTA
ethylphenols 222,223
eukaryotes 4
exaltation 279
exons 456
exopolymer matrix 77
exotoxins 86, 282, 283
expanded cortex theory 12
eye preparations
drops 417-18
lotions 418
ointments 418
preservatives 359
eye-drops 417-18
preservatives 417
Ps. aeruginosa contamination 382
sterilization 419
storage temperature 364
F value 13,392
F-pili 10
conjugation 14
F-value 391, 392, 398
Fab fragments 286
Factor VIII 356,464
Factor IX 464
famciclovir 127
fansidar 178
fats, microbial attack 358
Fc fragments 286
fentichlor 257
fever 282
fibrin
deposition 281
around abscesses 83-4
foam 422
fibrinolysins 83
filters, manufacturing process 351
filtration sterilization 405-7
biological monitoring 445-6
gases 407
liquids 406
see also membrane filtration
fimbriae 10,79
fire fly light-emitting system see
luciferase
fittings, clean areas 430
flagella 10
flaviviruses 65
Flavobacterium spp. 30, 342
flavouring agents 358-9
floors 349
clean areas 430, 434
flow cytometry, bacteria 23-4
flucytosine 122,123
5-flucytosine 134
5-fluoridine phosphates 122
5-fluorocytosine 174, 176
fluoroquinolones 120
5-fluorouracil 122, 174
folate
antagonists 176-8
metabolism in microbial/mammalian
cells 176,777
utilization 176
food, microbial growth 76
food industry, D-value 13
food poisoning 27
Campylobacter jejuni 3 1
contaminated medicines 356-7
staphylococcal 26
Vibrio parahaemolyticus 28
see also salmonellosis
formaldehyde 215-16
amino group reaction 259
low temperature steam (LTSF)
process 399,400,401
plasmid-mediated resistance 279
sterilization 399,401-2
toxicity 399
foscarnet see sodium phosphoformate
fosfomycin resistance 195
frameshift mutations 182, 183,484
framycetin 106, 108
Francisella tularensis 28
fungal infections, imidazole
derivatives 120, 122
fungi
antimicrobial agent choice 204-5
azole actions om membrane 179
biocide resistance 274-5
dimorphic 35
filamentous 462
media 20
polarity 37-8
fungicides 230
activity testing 245
quantitative suspension tests 239
fungistats 230
activity testing 245
furaltadone 119
furazolidone 119
Fusarium oxysporum f. sp. cepae
487
Fusarium spp. 347
fusel alcohols 40
fusidicacid 112,773,172-3
action on ribosomes 170
resistance 191
fusion protein 460
gamma-irradiation 401,403
sterilizer 403, 404, 405
see also ionizing radiation; radiation
sterilization
ganciclovir 126-7
Gardnerella vaginalis 27
gas gangrene 27
gas sterilization 399- A 101
monitoring 441, 444
gastrointestinal infections 141-3
gastrointestinal tract
commensal microorganisms 78
vascular permeability 82, 86
gelatin foam, absorbable 422
gene therapy 467
gene transfer, drug resistance 133
general protoplasmic poison 259
generic substitution of drugs 146
genes
biosynthetic 156-7
cloned 457-9
expression maximization 459-60
light-emitting 25
repair 467
genetic code 10
genetic engineering see recombinant
DNA technology
gentamicin 92, 106,707, 108
gentian violet 226
Germall 115,252
German measles vaccine 304
glass containers 348
p-glucan, Candida albicans 44-5
glucan, S. cerevisiae cell wall 43
Gluconobacter spp. 92
glucose oxidase production 486
glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase
deficiency 136
glutaraldehyde 210,214-16
amino group reaction 259
cell wall activity 256
HIV disinfection 207
mycobacterial resistance 270
properties 209
toxicity 208
glycerol teichoic acid 6
glycocalyx 10,77
glycolytic pathway, S. cerevisiae 42
glycopeptide antibiotics see
glycopeptides
glycopeptides 111-12,165-6
multi-drug resistance 134
resistance 194-5
see also teicoplanin; vancomycin
glycosylation 459
glycylcyclines 105-6
gonorrhoea 26
good manufacturing practice (GMP)
158,427, 428
good pharmaceutical manufacturing
Index
499
practice (GPMP) 368,370- 1 ,
436-7
hospital pharmacies 3 81
validation 371,372
gradient-plate technique 244
graft rejection 301
Gram-negative bacteria 5, 7
aminoglycoside-modifying
enzymes 189
antimicrobial agent choice 204
biocide resistance 266-9
contaminated medicines 356
cytoplasmic membrane 185
endotoxins 282
envelope 7
fusidic acid resistance 191
industrial water supplies 342
outer membrane 267
porins 185
Gram-negative cocci 26
Gram-negative rods 28-32
Gram-positive bacteria 5, 7
aminoglycoside-modifying
enzymes 189
biocide sensitivity 263
cytoplasmic membrane 185
fusidic acid resistance 191
Gram-positive cocci 26
biocide resistance 266
Gram-positive rods 27-8
granulocyte colony stimulating
factor 464
granulocyte-macrophage colony
stimulating factor 464
griseofulvin 92,114,775
growth hormone, contaminated 356
Guthrie test 483
gyrA gene 187
H-2 complex 301
H-antigens 284
haemagglutination, bacterial 10
haemodialysis solutions 416
haemolysins 83,283
haemophiliacs, HIV infection 356
Haemophilus influenzae 29
ampicillin resistance 145
erythromycin activity 108
meningitis 144
respiratory tract infection 82
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
upper respiratory tract infections
137
vaccine 307,311
Haemophilus influenzae Type B (HiB)
immunization 335
Haemophilus pneumoniae 139
haemorrhagic fever 205
haemostats, absorbable 421-2
halazone 218,279
halogens 217-20
sporicidal action 204
hand disinfection
hygienic 241
surgical 242
hand washing 428
nurses 378
hapten-protein conjugates 104
HAT medium 288
hay fever 291
Hazard Analysis of Critical Control
Points (HACCP) 339
health hazards, non-sterile
pharmaceutical
products 375-6
heat, disinfection process 232-3
heat sterilization 390-9
monitoring 441,443-4
heat transfer, dry heat sterilizer 397-8
heavy metals 220-1
Saccharomyces cerevisiae
effects 275
HeLa cell lines 66
Helicobacter pylori 3 1
helper T cells 295
helplessness, tolerance 298
HEPA filters 407,442
hepatitis
environment specificity 208
viruses 63
hepatitis A
vaccine 313
virus 65
hepatitis B
immunoglobulins 319
surface antigen (HBsAg) 247, 307,
464
vaccine 307,313
hepatitis A virus 65
hepatitis B virus
animal model 246
disinfection 206
policies 227
interferons 70
oncogenic 72
see also duck hepatitis B virus
(DHBV)
hepatitis C virus 65
hepatocellular carcinoma 49
herd immunity 88
herpes infection, acyclovir 126
herpes keratitis 125
herpes simplex 321
encephalitis 144
phosphonoacetic acid activity 127
virus 63
herpes virus 63
interferons 70
plaque assays 245, 246
herpes zoster 321
hexachlorophane 222, 224, 257
Gram-negative bacteria
sensitivity 267
hexose monophosphate pathway,
S. cerevisiae 42
high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
filters 407,442
histamine 281,291,293
HIV 65,72-3
AZT activity 125
contaminated Factor VIII products
356
disinfection 206-7
policies 227
glutaraldehyde sterilization 215
immune system effects 294
Kaposi's sarcoma 72
protease inhibitors 127
reactivation 127
reverse transcriptase 174, 247
TIBO activity 127
viral protein production 70
HLA-B27 301
HO gene 47
hospital patients
compromised 382
resistance to medicament-borne
infection 383
hospital-acquired infection 77
hospitals
disinfection policies 227
environment as contamination
source 379
pharmacies 380-1
host
autoimmune destruction 86
damage 282-3
host factors, antimicrobial drugs 131
human immunodeficiency virus see
HIV
human immunoglobulins 304, 305,
318-19
human leucocyte antigen (HLA) 294,
301
human papilloma virus 72
human serum, pooled 328
human T-cell lymphotrophic virus type
I (HTLV-1) 65, 72
humectants 358
humoral antigen-antibody
reactions 291
humoral immune response 283
humoral immunity 285-6
hyaluronidase 83,282
hybridoma 288-9
hydrochloric acid 280
hydrocortisone manufacture 478
hydrogen peroxide 211,221
ribosome effects 259
p-hydroxybenzoic acid see parabens
hygiene 346-7
personal 428
pharmaceutical manufacture 427-8
hyperglycaemia 86
hypersensitivity 135,299-302
delayed 299, 300
immediate 291,299
stimulatory 300
types I-V reactions 299-300
hypochlorite 210,218
antiviral activity 57
properties 209,210,218
thiol group reaction 259
hypoxanthine-guaninephosphoribosyl-
transferase (HGPRT) 287,
288,467
ibuprofen 479
idiotypic determinants 296-7
idoxuridine 125,726, 174
imidazole derivatives 120, 122,723
imidazoles 178, 179
imipenem 101, 102
imipramine 487
immobilized enzyme technology 486
immune response 283
magnitude 328
specificity 328
tumours 301-2
500
Index
immune system
adaptive 283-4
innate 280-3
recovery from infection 87
immunity 302-3
acquired 302-3
active 328-9
passive 327-8
active 304-5
cells involved 284-99
classes 326-9
generation strategies 321
humoral 285-6
longevity 327
natural 302
immunization 321-2
antibody response 286
cost 327
juvenile schedule 335-6
programme objectives 325-7
routine against infectious disease
330-5
safety 326
special risk groups 336
travelling 326
immunogens 283
effectiveness 326
non-replicating 328
immunoglobulin A (IgA) 290
immunoglobulin D (IgD) 290
immunoglobulin E (IgE) 290-1
immunoglobulin G (IgG) 286, 287,
290,318
transplacental 327
immunoglobulin M (IgM) 289-90
immunoglobulins 285-6
classes 289-91
globular domains 286
human 304, 305, 318-19
quality control 319
immunological memory 324
immunological products 304-5
see also vaccines
immunological tolerance 297-8
immunology 278-9
immunoregulation 296-7
immunosera 304,305,317-18
immunosuppression
fungal infections 114,144
Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia
117
immunosuppressive drugs 301
impetigo 26, 143
implants 421
in-process control 427
inactivating agents 240,448
see also neutralizing agents
inactivation factor (IF) 388, 389, 393
incubators, chemical sterilization 425
infection
anatomical site 133
bacterial 80, 141-3
common source 323M
establishment 75
fungal 120, 122
gastrointestinal 141-3
intracellular 131
iron availability 474
manifestations 81
medicament-borne 381-3
administration route 382-3
microbial contamination
type/degree 382
patient resistance 383
prevention 136-7
propogated source 324-5
recovery 87
respiratory tract 137-9
routes 76
skin 143-4
spread 323-5
time-concentration profile 328
viral 143,356
wound 28, 30, 144
see also candidiasis; candidosis
infective agents, obligate pathogens
87
inflammation 281-2
inflammatory response modulation 80
influenza
partially invasive pathogens 82
vaccine 307,310,313,326
influenza A virus 124
influenza virus 62, 64
chick embryo cell system for
growing 66-7
combat of herd immunity 88
enveloped particles 70
viral protein production 70
inhA gene mutations 197
inhaler solutions 416
initiation codon 458
injectable products 41 1-15
autoclaving 413
design 411-12
drug stability 415
intravenous infusions 412-14
isotonicity adjustment 412
multidose 412,414
packaging 413
single-dose 414
small-volume aqueous 414-15
small-volume oily 415
total parenteral nutrition 414
inoculum size 236, 237
insecticides 487-9
instruments
disinfection 207
sterilization 423-5
insulin 463
cloned gene 456,457,458
alpha-interferon 297
interferons 70-1, 128,281,463
antitumour effect 71
recombinant DNA technology 461
interleukin-1 (IL-1) 282
interleukin-2 (IL-2) 296, 297, 464
intoxication 81,85
intracellular pathogens 131, 172
intravenous infusions 412-14
additives 413-14
introns 456
iodine 217, 219, 220
antiviral activity 57
compounds 211
properties 209
thiol group reaction 259
iodophors 219-20
ionizing radiation see radiation
sterilization
iron dextran injection 471
iron poisoning 474
iron-chelating agents 473-4
isoamyl alcohol 40
isografts 301
isolators
pharmaceutical manufacture of
sterile products 436
sterility testing 447, 448
isoleucyl tRNA 173
synthetase 192
isoniazid 117,118,168
M. tuberculosis resistance 168,
196-7
isopropanol 213
itraconazole 122
joints, artificial 425
kanamycin 106, 707, 108
Kaposi's sarcoma 72
KatG catalase-peroxidase enzyme
system 168
katG gene 197
Kelsey-Sykes test 238 .
keratin 1 1
fungal utilization 50
ketoconazole 120, 122,123
kidney
infection 141
inflammation 26
malfunction 86
Klebsiella aero genes 342
Klebsiella pneumoniae 346
Klebsiella pneumoniae subsp.
aero genes 30
MacConkey's medium 18
Klebsiella spp.
medicament-borne infection 382
multiple resistance 197
urinary tract infections 140
Krebs citric acid cycle 18
p-lactam antibiotics 92-3, 94, 95-8,
99, 100-4
bacterial cell wall crosslinking
block 165-7
manufacture 149-50
resistance 192-4
p-lactambond 165
P-lactamase 93,192,476-7
lactic acid, vaginal 79
lactobacilli 79
Lactobacillus spp. 347
lactose 155
laminar airflow unit 433, 436
lanosterol 179
latamoxef 100, 101
latent heat 393
lecithinase 282
Legionella pneumophila 31-2
erythromycin activity 108
pneumonia 138, 139
roxithromycin activity 110
Legionella spp., environment
specificity 208
legionellosis 31-2, 138-9
antimicrobial agent choice 204
intracellular infection 131
lens disinfection 207
Index
501
leprosy 32
dapsone therapy 117
Leptospira icterohaemorrhagiae 33
Lesch-Nyhan disease 467
leucocidins 81,282
leucocytes, toxicity of
antimicrobials 242
Leuconostoc dextranicum 10
Leuconostoc mesenteroides 10
Leuconostoc spp.
dextran production 470
intravenous infusions 412
leucovorin 178
leukotrienes 281,291
ligatures 422-3
light emitting genes 25
Limulus test 372
lincomycin 112,113
protein synthesis inhibition 172
lincosamide resistance 191
lipid A 339
lipid carrier molecule 165
lipid solubility of drugs 133
lipopolysaccharide 7, 8, 178, 267,
268
aminoethanol/aminocarabinose
incorporation 195
polyclonal activation 298
polymyxin activity 179
Ps. aeruginosa 269
Listeria monocytogenes 27-8
Listeria spp.
antimicrobial agent choice 204
environment specificity 208
lux cluster insertion 25
listeriosis 28
lockjaw see tetanus
lomefloxacin 120
loracarbef 101
low temperature steam formaldehyde
(LTSF) process 215, 394, 399,
400-1
luciferase 25,372
luciferin 25
lung abscess 138,139
lux cluster 25
Lyme disease 32
lymph nodes 285
lymph system 84
lymphocytes 283
cell-mediated immunity 294
lymphokines 281,298
lymphoreticular organs 284
lysogenic cells 59
Lysol 223
lysozyme 59,280
Gram-negative bacteria protection
7
MacConkey's medium 18
macrolesions 183
macrolide, lincosamide and
streptogramin (MLS)
antibiotics, resistance 191
macrolides 108-11
action on ribosomes 170
efflux 133
protein synthesis inhibition 172
resistance 191
macrophage activating factor 295
macrophage chemotactic factor 295
macrophage migration inhibitory
factor 295
macrophages 280,285
alveolar region 78 ,
endogenous pyrogen release 86
major histocompatibility complex
(MHC) 294, 296, 301
malachite green 226
malaria, Epstein-Barr virus infection
72
mammalian cells, cloning host 461,
462
mammalian drug metabolism models
487
mannitol salt medium 19
mannoproteins
Candida albicans 44
5. cerevisiae cell wall 43 A 4
Mantoux skin test 333
Marburg virus, disinfection 205
mast cells 285
master temperature record (MTR)
441
MDRTB 118,134,196-7
measles
immunoglobulins 319
outbreaks 88,325
vaccination 331
vaccine 304,313
virus 64
measles, mumps and rubella (MMR)
vaccination 331-2
juvenile immunization
schedule 336
measles, mumps and rubella vaccine
(MMR Vac) 310
mebendazole 120
mec gene 194
mecillinam 92-3, 94, 95
PBP binding 167
medical devices 77
medicines, contaminated 356-7
Medicines Act (1968) 380
membrane attack complex 292
membrane enzymes 257-8
thiol-containing 258
membrane filters 406, 407
membrane filtration
antimicrobial agents 449
sterility testing 447
water disinfection 345
membrane permeability 258
membrane potentials 257
membrane-active agents 178
resistance 195-6
meningitis
bacterial 26, 144, 145
cryptococcal 47, 122
drug combinations 134
infantile 29
meningococcal 26
secondary case prevention 137
sulphonamide activity 116-17
pneumococcal 145
viral 144
mepacrine 174
mercuric chloride 234
mercury
inducible resistance 273
salts in cytoplasm coagulation 259
meropenem 101, 102
messenger RNA (mRNA) 58
copying 174
early molecules 59
late 69
translation into protein 457
metabisulphites 212
methacycline 105
methici LJ in-resistant Staphylococcus
aureus (MRSA) 134, 194, 197
antimicrobial agent choice 204
biocide resistance 263, 273-4
mupirocin 113
phenol disinfection 223
methisazone 125
methotrexate 178
metronidazole 120,123
brain abscess 145
DNA strand breakage 175
wound infections 144
MIC 242,243
miconazole 120,123
micro-calorimetry, bacteria 24
microbial cell, antigenic structure 284
microbial challenge 203-7
microbial growth on food 76
microbial spoilage 355-65
types 356-60
microbial toxin detection 372
microbiological assay 480-1
Micrococcus spp.
contamination sources for non-sterile
products 378
industrial water supplies 342
packaging contamination 348
microcolonies 77
microflora, commensal 77, 78
Micromonospora purpurea 92
microorganisms
antibiotic assays 479-81
attachment 79
human disease treatment 469-70
models of mammalian drug
metabolism 487
portals of entry 77-9
raw materials for manufacturing
process 347-8
survival 79
transfer from operators 346
viable airborne determination
250-1
Microsporon spp. 346
Microsporum spp. 50
Mima spp. 346
minimum infective number (MIN) 76
minimum inhibitory concentration
(MIC) 242,243
minocycline 105
monobactams 92, 102, 167
monoclonal antibodies 286-9
production 287-8
uses 289
monocytes 280,285
Morganella 30
mosquito control 488
moulds 35
antibiotic production 477
biocide response 264
incubation temperature 20
502
Index
isolated from air 340
raw materials for manufacturing
process 347
MRSA see methicillin-resistant
Staphylococcus aureus
msrA gene 191
mucociliary blanket of respiratory
tract 78
mucopeptide 5,80
slime layers 79
see also peptidoglycan
mucopolysaccharide slime layers 79
Mucor griseocyanus 487
Mucor sp. 340
mucous membranes 77-8, 280
commensal microflora 78
multidose products, contamination
sources 377,379
multidrug export genes 274
multidrug resistance 134
multidrug resistance pumps
(MDR) 196
multiple antibiotic resistance
(MAR) 196
mumps
vaccination 331
vaccine 306,313
virus 64
mupirocin 112-13
protein synthesis inhibition 173
resistance 192
murein 5
see also mucopeptide; peptidoglycan
mutagenicity testing 484-6
mutation
acquired resistance to biocides 272
drug resistance 133
reverse 484
mycobacteria
arabinogalactan synthesis 168
biocide resistance 264, 266,
269-70
mycolic acid synthesis 168
non-tuberculous infection 106
survival following phagocytosis 81
mycobactericides 241
Mycobacterium avium intracellular
276
antimicrobial agent choice 204
biocide resistance 269
Mycobacterium bovis 332
Mycobacterium chelonae 270
Mycobacterium leprae 32, 269
Mycobacterium smegmatis 25
Mycobacterium terrae 241
Mycobacterium tuberculosis 32
antimicrobial agent choice 204
biocide resistance 269, 270
chlorehexidine insusceptibility 217
glutaraldehyde sterilization 215
HIV infection 72
human infection 332
intermediate level disinfection 202
isoniazid resistance 168
multiple drug-resistant (MDRTB)
strains 118,134,196-7
mycobactericidal activity 241
rifampicin activity 106
streptomycin activity 107
survival following phagocytosis 81
transmission 276
tuberculin test 300
mycolic acid 270
synthesis 168
Mycoplasma pneumoniae
antibody production 86
pneumonia 138, 139
mycotoxins 49
myxoedema 298
myxoviruses 64
naftidine 178, 179
nalidixic acid 120, 133
pseudomonad selective media 19
nasopharynx, colonization 346
National Health Service
Crown immunity removal 380-1
purchasing policy 380
natural immunity 302
natural killer (NK) cells 297, 298
nebulizer device 417
necrotising fasciitis 26, 143
necrotoxins 283
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 26, 75
biocide sensitivity 268
plasmid transfer by transformation
183
sulphonamide resistance 181
transmission 87
Neisseria meningitidis 26
meningitis 144-5
respiratory tract infection 82
vaccine 307,311
Neisseria pharyngis 346
Neisseria spp.
erythromycin activity 108
properties 26
neomycin 106, 108
netilmicin 106, 108
neuraminidase 476
Neurospora crassa 35, 47-9
trichogyne 48
neurotoxins 14
neutralizing agents 240,448
neutrophils 280
nitrofurans 119,175
nitrofurantoin 1 19,133
DNA strand breakage 175
nitrofurazone 119
nitroimidazoles 175
nocardicins 102,103
non-ionic surfactants 358
non-nucleoside antiviral compounds
127
nor A and norB gene mutants 188
norfloxacin 120,121
gastrointestinal infections 143
noxythiolin 216
nucleic acid synthesis inhibitors 186-8
nucleic acids 259
nucleoside analogues 125-7
nucleoside triphosphate synthesis
173 A
nystatin 114,725,179
O-antigens 284
occupational risks 336
oestradiol implants 421
ofloxacin 118
oils, microbial attack 358
oleandomycin 108, 109
olivanicacid 101, 102
ophthalmia, purulent 26
ophthalmic preparations 417-19
contact-lens solutions 418-19
design 417
eye drops 417-18
lotions 418
ointments 418
solutions 356
see also eye-drops
opsonization, pathogenesis 80
organic acids 473
organic chlorine compounds 218-19
organic polymers, microbial
attack 358
organomercury compounds
microbial attack 359
mycobacterial resistance 269
ornithosis 31
osteomyelitis, staphylococcal 26
overkill for virucidal activity 247
1-oxaphems 100-1
oxygen utilization pathway 18
oxyribonucleic acids 258
PAA see phenylacetic acid
p-aminobenzoic acid (PABA) 176,
177
hyperproduction 187
sulphonamide activity 177
A -aminosalicylic acid (PAS) 117
packaging
contamination sources for non-sterile
products 377
dressings 420-1
injectable products 413
materials 348-9
microbial spoilage 364
pharmaceutical manufacture 429
polymers 358
preservatives 267-8
pandemics 88
papilloma virus 64
parabactin 474
parabens 210,212-13,267
bacterial spore activity 271
Paracoccus denitrificans 474
paramyxovirus 64
parasites
elimination 279
immunity 291
paratyphoid fever 29, 283
antibiotic treatment 142
MacConkey's medium 18
parenteral nutritional fluids
contaminated 356
see also total parenteral nutrition
paromomycin 108
passive immunity 327-8
Pasteur ella pestis see Yersinia pestis
Pasteurella tularensis see Francisella
tularensis
pathogenesis
conjunctiva 79
consolidation 79-81
contact 78
intestinal tract 78
opsonization 80
phagocytosis avoidance 80-1
Index
503
physico-chemical barriers 78
respiratory tract 78
urogenital tract 78-9
pathogenicity 75-7
pathogens 279
active spread 83 — 4
invasive 83-4
non-invasive 81-2
obligate 87
partially invasive 82
passive spread 84
primary defence strategies 282
PBPs see penicillin-binding proteins
penicillanic acid 102-3
derivatives 102-3
sulphone 103
penicillin G see benzylpenicillin
penicillin V see
phenoxymethylpenicillin
penicillin-binding proteins (PBPs) 97,
98, 167, 192, 193
penicillinase 477
penicillins 92-3, 94, 95
antigens 104
p-lactam ring interaction with
transpeptidases 167
broad spectrum 131
enzymatic inactivation 133
hypersensitivity 103 A 4
meningitis treatment 145
naturally occurring 92
peptidoglycan crosslinking 165-7
production from Penicillium
chrysogenum 453
resistance 192, 193-4
Streptococcus pneumoniae 198
semisynthetic production 92-3
structure 92
synthesis 477
Penicillium camembertii 49
Penicillium chrysogenum 92, 150,
158,453
Penicillium digitatum 35
Penicillium marneffei 50
Penicillium notatum 92,150
Penicillium roquefortii 49
Penicillium spp. 49-50
building contamination 349
glass container contamination 348
isolated from air 340
packaging contamination 348
penicilloic acid 192
pentachlorophenol 257
peptic ulcer 31
peptidase 83
peptide nucleic acids 466
peptidoglycan 5, 6, 80, 266
assembly disruption 168
biosynthesis 164-8
inhibition 164-8
network expansion 12
synthesis inhibitor resistance 192-5
see also mucopeptide; murein
peptidyl transferase 171, 172
peracetic acid 221
peritoneal dialysis solutions 416
peritonitis, bacterial 26
pernicious anaemia 471-2
peroxygen compounds 221
sporicidal action 204
personal hygiene 428
pertussis
vaccination 334
safety 326
vaccine 304,306,308,312,315
see also Bordetella pertussis;
whooping cough
Peyer's patches 285
phages ' 15, 57-62,470
epidemiological uses 62
indicator organisms for virucidal
activity testing 247-8
induction 61
lambda of E. coli 60
lysogeny 60-2
lytic growth cycle 59-60, 61
temperate 59,60-2
therapy 58
transduction 62
virulent 59-60
plaque formation 60
phagocytes
endogenous pyrogen release 86
killing 81
phagocytic cells 131, 293
phagocytic system, recovery from
infection 87
phagocytosis 280-1
avoidance 80-1
protection 77
survival 81
phagolysosome 281
phagosome 281
pharmaceutical manufacture
atmosphere 340-2
bioburden 440
measurement 372
reduction 371
contamination
non-sterile products 376,380-1
removal 370-1
definition 426-7
documentation 429
endotoxin levels 372
environmental cleanliness 427-8
hygiene 345-6,427-8
microbial contamination control
426,427-9
microbial transfer from operators
346
microorganisms in partial synthesis
477-9
packaging 429
post-market surveillance 373
process
buildings 349-50
cleaning equipment/utensils 353
cleansing 352
critical control points 349
design 429
disinfection 352
equipment 350-3
filters 351
glass containers 348
microbial checks 352-3
packaging 348-9
raw materials 347-8
validation 349
pyrogen testing 372
quality control 429
procedures 371-2
quality of materials 428-9
respiratory tract flora 345-6
sampling time 371
skin flora 345-6
spoilage detection 372
sterile products 429-30, 431,
432-6
storage 429
transport 429
validation procedures 371
water supply 342-5
pharmaceutical products
chemical deterioration 357
formulation design/development
368-70
microbial attack
observable signs 359-60
susceptible ingredients 357-9
microbial risk control 368-73
microbial spoilage 360-5
contaminant inoculum 361
moisture content 362-3
nutritional factors 361-2
packaging design 364
pH 364
protection of microorganisms
365
redox potential 363
storage temperature 364
microbiological quality 339
parametric release 439
physico-chemical deterioration 357
physico-chemical parameter
manipulation 369
potency determination 480
preservation 365-8
preservatives 369
quality assurance 368-73
pharmaceutical products, non-sterile
contamination 374-6
control 383
environment 377,379
equipment sources 379
extent 379-81
human sources 378-9
manufacture 380-1
packaging 377
prevention 383
sources 376-9
in use 377-9,381
water supply 376
health hazards 375-6
spoilage 374-5
pharmaceutical products, sterile
410-11
absorbable haemostats 421-2
aseptic areas 430, 431, 432-5,
435-6
blow/fill/seal units 436
clean areas 430, 431, 432-5
cleaning 434
containers 435
disinfection 434
dressings 419-21
environmental contamination 433
GPMP 437
implants 421
injections 411-15
isolators 436
504
Index
ligatures 422-3
microbiological monitoring 434
non-injectable 416
operation of clean area 434-5
ophthalmic preparations 417-19
sterilization methods 410-11
sutures 422-3
terminal sterilization 429-30
vaccine preparation 430
pharyngitis, acute 137
phenolics 211
properties 209
phenols 221,222,223-4
bacterial spore activity 271
black fluids 222, 223
coefficient tests 237-8
cytoplasm coagulation 259
dilution 234
E. coli sensitivity 267
interaction with packaging
materials 367
minimum inhibitory
concentration 243
mycobacterial resistance 269-70
pH effects 235
white fluids 222, 223
phenoxyacetic acid 158
phenoxyethanol 214
2-phenoxyethanol 257
phenoxymethylpenicillin 92
manufacture 149, 158
phenylacetic acid (PAA) 92, 93, 156
phenylalanine 483
phenylethanol 214
phenylketonuria (PKU) testing 482-3
phenylmercuric acetate 253,417,419
phenylmercuric nitrate 417,419
phenylmercuric salts 220
pheromones, oligopeptide 36
phosphatidyl ethanolamine 8
phosphatidyl glycerol 8
phospholipase 83
phospholipid 7, 8
arrangement in cytoplasmic
membrane 8
bilayer 9
phosphonoacetic acid 127
phosphotransferases 188
Photobacterium fischeri 25
phthalylsulphathiazole 116
physical indicators of sterility 441-2
picornaviruses 64-5
pigment, bacterial cell 10
pili 10,79
pinocytosis 82
pipleines 351
Pityrosporum spp. 346
pivmecillinam 93, 94, 95
plague 28,283
plant matter, decaying 342
plaque assays for virucidal
activity 245-6
plasma substitutes 471
plasmid-coded acquired resistance to
biocides 272-4
plasmids
enzyme inactivation 1 3 3 A
foreign DNA insertion 454-5
resistance 133,187,273
acquired 183-4
transposons 183
pneumococcal polysaccharide
vaccine 307,311
Pneumocystis carinii 72
Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia
co-trimoxazole activity 117
trimetrexate therapy 178
pneumonia 138-9
bacterial 26
pneumococcal 139
staphylococcal 139
polarity 37-8
polio vaccine 304, 306, 309, 310,
314,315
inactivated (IPV) 330,331
live oral (OPV) 330,331
juvenile immunization schedule
335
poliomyelitis
paralytic 330
vaccination 326,330-1
effects on incidence 322
killed (Salk) 330
live (Sabin) 330
see also polio vaccine;
poliovirus
poliovirus 57, 62, 64, 69
faecal excretion of vaccine
virus 330-1
plaque assays 245
types 330,331
polyclonal activation 298
polyenes 114,775,178,179
antibiotic-resistance 43
polyglycerol-phosphate 5
polyhexamethylene biguanide 207,
217
polyhydroxybutyric acid 9
polymers, packaging 358
polymyxins 27,92,111,178-9
resistance 195-6
polynoxylin 216
polypeptide antibiotics 1 1 1,461
polyphosphate 9
polyribitol 5
polyvinylchloride, plasticized 413
porins 8,270
cell membrane 185
channels 267,268
potassium monoperoxysulphate 221
povidone-iodine 219, 220
poxviruses 63,69
pregnancy, urinary tract infections
140
preservatives 202, 251-4, 365-8
availability 366-8
bioluminescence 254
challenge tests 369
combinations 252-4
concentration 366
containers 367-8
efficacy 252
epifluorescence 254
evaluation 252
eye-drops 417
inoculum size 366
microbial attack 359
multiphase systems 367
packaging 267-8
performance criteria 252
pH effects 367
rapid methods of evaluation 254
synergy 253-4
temperature 366
water activity [AUwu] 366
prions 73
antimicrobial agent choice 207
biocide activity 276
pro-drugs 93
proflavine 174,226
proguanil 216
bacterial DHFR inhibition 177-8
proinsulin 459
prokaryotes 4
prokaryotic nucleus 9
promoters 457
prontosil 115,776
propamidine 226
propanol 478
prophage 59, 61, 62
(3-propiolactone 262
propogated-source outbreaks 87, 88
FIP 88
proproteins 459
propylene glycol 342
prostaglandins 281
prostate infections 141
proteases 77
protective clothing 346-7, 428
aseptic areas 435
clean areas 433
protein A 81
protein A-IgG complexes 81
protein drugs 461
protein synthesis inhibition
azalides 172
chloramphenicol 171-2
clindamycin 172
lincomycin 172
macrolides 172
mupirocin 173
resistance 188-92
streptomycin 169
proteins
administration route 466
fusion 460
glycosylation 459
identity 465
medically important 461,463-4
recombinant 461,466
synthesis 169-70,163, 171-6
proteolysis 459-60
Proteus mirabilis 188
Proteus morganii 29-30
Proteus spp.
biocide resistance 264
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
water supply 342
Proteus vulgaris 29-30
prothionomide 118
protonmotive force 257
Protozoa
antimicrobial agent choice 207
metronidazole activity 120
resistance to biocides 275
Providencia spp. 30
Providencia stuartii 264
pro virus 71
pseudomembranous colitis 27
Index
505
superinfection 136
vancomycin therapy 1 1 1
pseudomonads
biocide resistance 269
selective media 19
Pseudomonas acidophila 92
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 28, 75
antimicrobial agent choice 204
biocide resistance 264, 269
burn colonization 144
cephalosporin activity 96, 97
chlorhexidine sterilization 217
clavulanic acid activity 100
contaminated medicines 356, 382
contamination of non-sterile
products 376,377
during manufacture 380
sources 378,379
in use 381
cystic fibrosis infections 139
EDTA sensitivity 269
eye-drop contamination 417
gentamicin activity 108
medicament-borne infection 356,
382
membrane permeabilization
evaluation 258
phages 248
polymyxin
activity 178, 179
resistance 195-6
QAC activity 225
tetracycline activity 105
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
urinary tract infections 140
Pseudomonas cytotoxin 490
Pseudomonas spp.
contamination of
sweetening/flavouring
agents 359
indigenous to fresh water 342
raw materials for manufacturing
process 347
pseudomonic acid A see mupirocin
psittacosis 31
pneumonia 138
public health measures 322
puerperal sepsis 26
purine synthesis 173 A 1
pus 84
pustules 143
pyelitis 29
pyelonephritis 29
pyrazinamide 118
M. tuberculosis resistance 196,
197
pyridine 2,6-dicarboxylic acid 11,72
pyridoxine assay 482
pyrimidine synthesis 173 A 1
pyrogens
bacterial 348
testing in pharmaceutical
manufacture 372
pyruvil transferase 195
Q-fever 31, 138
qacA, qacB and qacC genes 274
QACs see quaternary ammonium
compounds
quality assurance 368-73,427
quality control 368,427
GPMP 370
pharmaceutical manufacture 429
quaternary ammonium compounds
(QACs) 207,211,224-5
atmospheric disinfection 342
bacterial spore activity 271
BS specification 240
cell membrane effects 268
clumping 240
E. coli sensitivity 267
Gram-negative bacteria
sensitivity 267
interaction with packaging
materials 367
membrane-active agents 178
microbial attack 359
mycobacterial resistance 269
properties 209
viable counts 240
4-quinolone antibacterials 120
see also quinolones
quinolones 131
derivatives 226
DNA gyrase
inhibition 175
site of action 173
resistance 187-8
rabies 62
immunoglobulins 319
vaccine 306, 309, 314
virus 64
radiation sterilization 401-3, 404,
405
monitoring 441,444
sterilizer design 403,404,405
radioenzymatic assays 481
rainfall 342
rate of kill 231
recombinant animal cells 460
recombinant DNA technology 453-4,
470
cloning 454-6
drug authenticity/efficacy 461,465
medically important
polypeptide/protein
production 461
natural protein analogue
production 465
principles 454-61
proteolytic damage 465
small molecule production 466
recombinant proteins 466
production from mammals 461
redox potential 363
relapsing fever 32
relaxin 463
replica plating 41-2
resistance 181
access prevention to target sites
185
acquired 181-4
chromosomal mutations 182-3
genetic basis 182-4
plasmids 183-4
transposons 184
aminoglycoside-aminocyclitol
group 188-9,190
antibiotic policies 146
antimicrobial drugs 1 33 A -
antimycobacterial drugs 196-7
p-lactam antibiotics 192-4
bacitracin 196
bacterial conjugation 15
biochemical mechanisms 184-97
cephalosporins 192
fusidic acid 191
genetic determinants 184
glycopeptides 194-5
intrinsic 181-2
membrane-active antibiotics 195-6
multidrug 134
mupirocin 192
penicillins 192, 193-4
peptidoglycan synthesis inhibitors
192-5
plasmid-acquired 133, 183-4, 187
plasmid-mediated 273
polymyxins 195-6
problem 197-9
protein synthesis inhibitors 188-92
sterilization 387-8
super-infection 131
target sites 185-6
teicoplanin 194, 195
tetracyclines 190, 196
urinary tract infections 140
vancomycin 195
respiratory tract 78
flora 346-7
infections 137-9
restriction endonuclease 454, 455
reticuloendothelial system 280
retroviruses 65
reverse transcriptase 125, 456
activity assay 247
inhibitiors 127
rheumatic fever 26
rheumatoid arthritis 299
rhinovirus 62, 65, 82
infection 70
receptors 69
Rhodotorula spp. 340
ribarivin 125,726
riboflavin 471
ribosome binding site 457-8,459
ribosomes
bacterial 169, 170
non-antibiotic antibacterial agent
activity 258,259
streptomycin action 170,171
rickettsia, chloramphenicol activity
112
Rickettsia prowazeki 3 1
Rickettsia quintana 31
Rickettsia spp. 31
Rickettsia typhi 31
Rideal-Walker test 22 1 , 237, 238
rifabutin 106
rifampicin 106,118
chemoprophylaxis 137
legionnaires' disease
treatment 131, 139
resistance 106, 188
structure 106
transcription effects 175-6
rifamycin 106
resistance 188
506
Index
ringworm 50,51,77
griseofulvin 1 14
risk categories for equipment in contact
with patient 227-8
risk control, microbial 368-73
RNA methylase genes 191
RNA polymerase 174, 457
rod-shaped bacteria 4
rotavirus 64
plaque assays 245
roxithromycin 110
rubella
vaccination 331-2
vaccine 306,314
virus 65
Sabouraud maltose 20
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 35, 36-
44
ascus formation 40, 42
bud scar 44
budding pattern 38-9
cell ageing 44
cell polarity 37-8, 39
cell wall 43-4
chitin ring 38, 44
chlorhexidine sensitivity 274
cloning host 460, 462
developmental switch 40-1
diploid 36, 37,39
diplophase 40
ethanol formation 42
fusel alcohol effects 40
genetic manipulation 36
glycolytic pathway 42
haploid 36,57, 39
haplophase 40
heavy metal activity 275
hyphal growth 40
invasive filaments 38,40
life cycle 3 6 A 2
comparison with N. crassa 48-9
meiosis 40-2
metabolism 42-3
morphological change 37
mutants 36
mutation combinations 42
oligopeptide pheromones 36
physiology 42-3
polyene antibiotic-resistant mutants
43
pseudohyphae 38,39-40
replica plating 41-2
schmoos 36
spore formation 40-2
sporulation 40-1,43
sterol requirement 43
trehalose production 42-3
unsaturated fatty acid requirements
43
vegetative cell cycle 36-40
salbutamol 478
Salmonella enteritidis 29
Salmonella paratyphi 29
exotoxin production 84
subepithelial tissue penetration 84
Salmonella spp.
medicament-borne infection 382
partially invasive pathogens 82
phenol disinfection 223
Salmonella typhi 29, 80
bismuth sulphite agar 19
chloramphenicol activity 172
drug sensitivity 137
exotoxin production 84
K-antigens 80
phage typing 62
phenol coefficient tests 237
subepithelial tissue penetration 84
survival following phagocytosis 81
vaccine production 308
Salmonella typhimurium 29
Ames test 485
deep rough mutants 267
exotoxin production 84
lux cluster insertion 25
subepithelial tissue penetration 84
Salmonella.'microsome assay 485
salmonellosis 82,84
antibiotic treatment 142
contamination of non-sterile
products during manufacture
380
sanitizer 230
Sarcina spp. 346
sarcinae, aggregates 4
scarlet fever 26, 85
Schick test toxin 334
self antigens, tolerance evasion 298
serial dilution 242
serotonin 281
Serratia marcescens 30
chlorhexidine resistance 268
filtration sterilization biological
monitoring 445
formaldehyde resistance 273
pigment 10
Serratia spp.
indigenous to fresh water 342
medicament-borne infection 382
serum sickness 300
services, clean areas 432
sewage contamination 342
sex strands 10
Shigella boydii 29
Shigella flexneri 29
Shigella shiga 29, 57-8
Shigella sonnei 29
Shigella spp.
gastrointestinal infections 142
partially invasive pathogens 82
phenol disinfection 223
shotgunning 456
siderophores 77, 473, 474
signal sequence 458
silver salts, plasmid-mediated
resistance 273
sisomicin 106
skin 280
commensal microflora 77
eruptions 135
flora 143,346-7
contamination sources 378
infections 143-4
tests
disinfectants 241-2
semi-solid antibacterial agents
249
trauma 77
slime 10
mucopeptide/mucopoly saccharide
layers 79
slit sampler 250-1
slow virus diseases 73, 276
smallpox 279
chick embryo cell system for
growing virus 67
control 321
vaccination 326
vaccine 304,305-6
sodium hypochlorite 345
sodium phosphonoformate 127
soft tissue infections 143M
soil erosion 342
solid dilution method 243
somatostatin 460
somatotrophin 463
sorbic acid 212
sparfloxacin 120
spermine 280
spiramycin 108, 109
spirochaetes 4,32-3
spleen 285
spoilage, non-sterile pharmaceutical
products 374-5
spores, biocide resistance 266
sporicides 229,241
quantitative suspension tests 239
sporulation 271
squalene epoxidase 122
Stachybotrys spp., filters 351
Staphylococcus albus 346, 380
Staphylococcus aureus 4, 26
bacitracin resistance 196
brain abscess 145
chlorehexidine sterilization 217
contamination sources for non-sterile
products 378
cystic fibrosis infections 139
enterotoxin 85
erythromycin resistance 109
lung abscess 139
msrA gene 191
penicillin resistance 181
phage 58
typing 62
pigment 10
pneumonia 139
positive control for sterility testing
449
prophages 61
protein A 81
quinolone resistance 188
skin flora 143
skin infections 143 A l
tetracycline-resistant 105
topoisomerase mutations 187
transduction 183
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
virulent strains 80
see also methicillin-resistant
Staphylococcus aureus (MRS A)
Staphylococcus epidermidis 11
Staphylococcus spp.
aggregates 4
burn colonization 144
contamination sources for non-sterile
products 378
isolated from air 340
Index
507
properties 26
selective media 19
steam sterilization 392, 393-5
superheated steam 393-5
steam sterilizer 394-7
design 394-7
operation 395-7
temperature monitoring 395
sterile fluids, non-injectable 415-16
sterile pharmaceutical products 416
absorbable haemostats 421-2
dressings 419-21
implants 421
injections 411-5
instruments and equipment 423-5
non-injectable sterile fluids 415-6
opthalmic preparations 417-9
surgical ligatures and sutures 422-3
sterility assurance 388-9, 439
bioburden determination 440
environmental monitoring 440-1
sterility testing 446-51
accidental contamination 450
antimicrobial agents 448-9
direct inoculation 446-7
inactivating agents 240,448
isolators 447,448
low level contamination 447
membrane filtration 447
methods 446-8
microbial enzymes 486
neutralizing agents
positive controls 449
random sampling 446
sampling 450-1
sterilization 385,399-401
catgut 423
conditions 408
control 439-40
D-value 370
dressings 420
equipment 423-5
ethylene oxide 400
eye-drops 419
filtration 405-7
biological monitoring 445-6
formaldehyde 401-2
gas 399-401,441,444
heat 390-9,441,443-4
dry 397-8
moist 392-7
process 390-2
temperature profile 391
temperature/time cycles 393
injectable products 413,415
instruments 423-5
manufacturing equipment 352
methods 389-90
microorganism sensitivity 386-9
monitors 441-3,444,445-6
biological indicators 442
chemical indicators 442-3, 444
physical indicators 441-2
radiation 401-3,404,405,441,
444
raw materials for manufacturing
process 348
reference organisms 386
resistance 387-8
steam 392,393-5
superheated 393-5
steam sterilizer design/operation
395-7
sterility assurance 388-9, 390
survivor curves 386, 387, 388
terminal 429-30
steroids 301
biotransformations 477-8
inhaler preparations 4 1 6
synthesis 470
sterol 43
sticky-ends 454
storage, pharmaceutical manufacture
429
Streptococcus faecalis 342
Streptococcus pneumoniae 4, 26
penicillin resistance 198
pneumonia treatment 138, 139
transformation 14
upper respiratory tract infections
137
Streptococcus pyogenes 4, 26, 80
burn colonization 144
erythrogenic toxin 26
penicillin susceptibility 181
pH of antibacterial agent 235-6
skin infections 143
toxin 83,85
transduction 183
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
upper respiratory tract infections
137
Streptococcus salivarus 346
Streptococcus spp.
aggregates 4
isolated from air 340
properties 26
raw materials for manufacturing
process 347
streptodornase 475-6
streptogramins, resistance 191
streptokinase 282,475-6
Streptomyces aureofaciens 158
Streptomyces clavuligerus 98, 157
Streptomyces olivaceus 102
Streptomyces spp., antibiotic
source 92
streptomycin 92, 106, 107-8
action on ribosomes 170, 171
tuberculosis therapy 1 17,118
styes 26
succinylsulphathiazone 116
sulbactam 103
sulphadiazine 116
sulphadimidine 116
sulphites 212,262
sulphonamides 115-17,177
DHFR inhibitor combination 178
resistance to 187
thymine production blocking 174
sulphur dioxide 212,262
amino group reaction 259
supercoiling regions, chromosomal
173, 175
superinfection 131, 136
suppressor T cells 295-6
surface activity, antibacterial action
236
surface adhesins 78
surface antigens 284
surfactants 224-5
anionic 224
cationic 224-5, 236, 358
microbial attack 357-8
non-ionic 358
potentiation of antibacterial
agent 236
surgical prophylaxis 130-1,136
survivor curves, sterilization 386,
387, 388
survivor/time curve 232
swabs 440
sweetening agents 358-9
synergism 128
syphilis 33
systemic lupus erythematosus 299
T cell receptors 294, 296
T cells 285
activation 298
classes 295-6
suppression 297
absence 298
T-even phage DNA 59
T-even phages 69
tar acids 211,223
taurolidine 216
tazobactam 103
teichoic acids 6, 7, 266
bacterial cell wall 167
teicoplanin 112
pentapeptide binding 165-6
resistance 194, 195
use in multi-drug resistance 134
temafloxacin 120
temocillin 93, 94, 95
temperature
coefficient 232-3, 366
record chart 441
terbinafine 122,123
testosterone implants 421
tetanus 27,283
antitoxin 304,318
immunoglobulins 319
tissue damage 85
vaccination 334
efficiency 326
vaccine 304,308,311,314,315
tetrachlorosalicylamlide (TCS) 257
tetracycline 104-5
candidiasis superinfection 136
group 104-6
mycoplasma infections 139
resistance and efflux proteins 196
tetracyclines 92
action on ribosomes 169
bacteriostatic action 171
efflux 133
efflux proteins 190
protein synthesis effects 171
resistance 190
tetrahydrofolate 176,777
tetrahydroimidazobenzodiazepinone
(TIBO) 127
tetroxoprim 116,117
thiacycline 105
thiatetracyclines 105
wo-thiazolones 259
thienamycine 101,102
508
Index
thiocarbamates, synthetic 122
thiol groups 258,259
thiomersal 220-1
ophthalmic preparations 417,419
thromboxanes 281
thrush
oral 44,114
vaginal 44,46
thymidine kinase 126
thymidylate synthetase 174, 176
thymidylic acid 174,176
thymine production blocking 173
thymus 284
thyroiditis 298
thyrotoxicosis 298,300
ticarcillin, burn wounds 144
tinea 50
tolnaftate activity 122
tissue culture for virucidal activity
245
tissue damage 84 — 7
direct 84-6
indirect 86-7
membrane function interference 85
secondary disease 86
target cells 85
tissue fluid loss 86
tissue plasminogen activator 463
tissue transplantation 301-2
tobacco mosaic virus (TMV) 56
tobramycin 106, 108
tolerance 297-8
mechanism breakdown 298
tolnaftate 122,123
tonsillitis 26
tonsils 285
topoisomerase 173, 175
mutations 187
total parenteral nutrition 414
storage temperature 364
see also parenteral nutritional fluids
toxaemia, generalized 84
toxins 77
ingestion 76
see also endotoxins; exotoxins;
pyrogens
trachoma 31
transcription 174
transduction
bacterial 15
plasmid transfer 183,184
transformation
bacterial 15
plasmid transfer 183,184
transpeptidases 166-8
transplantation 301-2
organ rejection 279
transport, pharmaceutical
manufacture 429
transposons
acquired resistance 184
conjugative 184
glycopeptide resistance 194-5
plasmids 183
transversions 182, 183
travelling
immunization 326
risks 336
trehalose 42-3
Treponema pallidum 33, 87
Treponema pertenue 33
tricarbanilide 257
triacetyloleandomycin 108
triazoles 179
tricarboxylic acid cycle, S. cerevisiae
42
trichlorocarbanilide (TCC) 257
Trichophyton mentagrophytes 11, 205
Trichophyton spp. 50-1
griseofulvin activity 114
transfer from manufacturing process
operators 346
triclosan 224,267
trimethoprim 776,117,187
bacterial DHFR inhibition 177
prostate infections 141
resistance 187
trimetrexate 178
triphenylmethane dyes 226
tuberculin test 300
tuberculosis 32
disinfection of equipment 204
drug therapy 117-18
drug resistance 134
incidence 276,332-3
MDRTB 118,134,196-7
streptomycin activity 107
vaccination 332-3
tularaemia 28
tumour
destruction 490
immune response 301-2
necrosis factor 464
recognition 279
viruses 71-2
typhoid fever 29, 84, 283
antibiotic treatment 142
chloramphenicol therapy 172
drug sensitivity 137
MacConkey's medium 18
phenol coefficient tests 237
vaccination immunity longevity
327
vaccine 306,307,308,312
typhus infection 31
tyrothricin 27
UDP-7V-acetylmuramic acid 165
ultraviolet irradiation sterilization
401,405
uncoupling agents 257
undecaprenyl phosphate 174
undulant fever 29
unsaturated fatty acids, S. cerevisiae
requirements 43
URA3 gene 45
urethritis, non-gonococcal 31
urinary bladder
catheterization 139
irrigation solutions 416
urinary tract infections 78-9,139-41
community-acquired 141
drug resistance 140
drug therapy 140-1
recurrent 141
urogenital tract 78-9
urological irrigation solutions 416
vaccination 279,321-2
active acquired immunity 302
cost 327
effectiveness 326
immunity longevity 327
programmes 88
objectives 325-7
routine against infectious disease
330-5
safety 326
vaccine production
aluminium testing 317
bacterial 307-8
calcium presence testing 317
final product control 315-17
free formalin 317
from microorganisms 470
in-process control 312,314,315
manufacturing 430
phenol concentration 317
potency 315-16
quality control 312,314-17
safety tests 316
seed lot system 307
sterility tests 317
toxicity testing 317
viral 309-10,312,313,314-17
vaccines 304,305-10,311,312,313,
314-17
aseptic filling 436
bacterial 307-8,310,311-12,316
bacterial cell component 306-7
classes 329-30
component 329-30
costs 320
killed 306,329-30
larger organisms 320
live 305-6,329
toxoid 306
viral 309-10,312,313,314-17
subunit 307
vaccinia virus 63, 69
vaginal pH 79
vaginitis 27
vaginosis, bacterial 120
Van A phenotype 194,195
vancomycin 111
pentapeptide binding 165
resistance 194
rifampicin combination 106
use in multi-drug resistance 134
vancomycin-resistant enterococci
(VRE) 197, 199
VanH phenotype 194,195
varicella
immunoglobulins 319
vaccine 314
variola major 321
variola virus 63
variolation 279,321
vascular permeability, histamine 293
venereal infection 79
viable airborne microorganism
determination 250-1
viable counting 239, 240
Vibrio cholerae 28, 80
exotoxin 86,283
neuraminidase production 476
toxin production 82
vaccine production 308
Vibrio parahaemolyticus 28
vibrios 4
Index
509
Vincent's angina 32
viomycin 111
viral chemotherapy 70-1
viral DNA replication 69
inhibition 174
viral genome 55
viral infection
contaminated medicines 356
skin 143
viral protein production 69-70
viral vaccines 309-10,312,313,
314-17
attentuated 316
blending 309-10
combined 310
drying 310
filling 310
safety tests 316
single-component 310,313-14
viral harvest processing 309
virus growth 309
virion 69
virucidal activity testing 245-8
animal model 246
egg inoculation 245
endogenous reverse transcriptase
247
hepatitis B virus 246
immune reaction 246-7
phages 247-8
plaque assays 245-6
tissue culture 245
virus morphology 247
virucide 230
virulence 75,279
definition 79
virulence factors 75
extracellular 77
virus-host cell interactions 57
viruses 53
antimicrobial agent choice 205-7
capsid 54,57
assembly 69,70
capsomeres 54-6,57
chemical agent effects 57
cytopathic effect (CPE) 66, 67
degree of virulence 75
DNA 69
endocytosis 69
general properties 53-4
HeLa cell lines 66
helical symmetry 56
hexon 57
human 62, 63-5, 66-70
attachment 68-9
cell culture 66
chick embryo cell system for
growing 66-8
cultivation 66-8
multiplication 68-70
non-enveloped 70
penetration 69
uncoating 69
viral protein production 69-70
icosahedral symmetry 57
lipoprotein envelope 55
membrane glycoprotein receptors
68-9
metabolic capabilities 54
morphology 55,247
nucleic acid content 54
nucleocapsid release 69
oncogenic 71
penton 57
physical agent effects 57
protein coat 54
replication 66,67
resistance to biocides 275,276
RNA 69-70
oncogenic 71
size 54
slow 73
structure 54-6
subunit structure 54-6
temperate 15
upper respiratory tract infections
137
see also antiviral drugs; phage;
prions
vitamin B 471,472
vitamin B 6 assay 482
vitamins 471-2,473
bioassays 481-2
Vogel-Johnson medium 19
volutin granules 9
vomiting 76
VRE 197, 199
walls 349
clean areas 430,434
water
chlorine gas disinfection 345
deionized 343
demineralized 343
disinfection 345
distilled 344
distribution system 344-5
mains supply 343
membrane filtration 345
microbial ecology 342-5
microbial flora growth
reduction 344
microbial quality checking 345
non-injectable 416
raw 343
reservoir storage 343
reverse osmosis production 344
sodium hypochlorite disinfection
345
softened 343
ultraviolet irradation 345
water activity [AUwu] 362-5,369
preservatives 366
water supply contamination 376
water systems, storage tanks 32
water vapour, phase diagram 394
Weil's disease 33
white fluids 222, 223
Kelsey-Sykes test 238
whooping cough 28-9, 81, 283
epidemics 326
see also Bordetella pertussis;
pertussis
windows 349-50
wound infections 30
burn 144
postoperative 144
secondary 28
xenografts 301
xylenols 222,223
yaws 33
yeasts 35
biocide response 264
industrial water supplies 342
isolated from air 340
yellow fever
vaccination immunity longevity
327
vaccine 306,314
virus 65
Yersinia pestis 28
z-value 13,387-8
zidovudine (AZT) 73,125,130,174
zinc-based products 378
510
Index
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11